JP7388407B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, if a game ball that is equipped with a variable ball entry means and enters an internal area of the variable ball entry means enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) provided within the internal area, the player A pachinko machine that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous for players is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 11-197312

However, in conventional gaming machines, the games tend to become monotonous, and there has been a desire to further improve the interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like , and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest .

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It had an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inner area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area. variable entry means;
special ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the inner area;
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state providing means capable of providing a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined ball enters the special ball entering means,
The variable ball entry means is configured such that only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area,
This gaming machine is
a first opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a second opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means;
Route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
By changing the state to at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, the value for the game ball that has flowed down to the predetermined route that can flow down to the special ball entry means. configured to be able to change the value of a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means by a variable means that can change the value of the game ball,
The variable means is configured to perform a predetermined lottery result when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first chance entry means or the second opportunity entry means. configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a switching condition,
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one place through which game balls can pass one by one,
A ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a regulating means is provided that allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball to pass in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game ball that enters the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means is configured to be unable to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter;
This gaming machine is
comprising an award confirmation means for confirming the award of one gaming value to the special gaming state when a game ball enters the special entry means;
When the game ball is controlled to be in the advantageous state by the variable means and the game ball enters the special ball entry means and the special game state is given, the case where the special game state is given is higher than the case where the variable means is controlled to the non-advantageous state. Also, the configuration is such that it is easy to determine the provision of the special gaming state of the predetermined type that is most advantageous to the player,
In the first route or the second route, a delay means capable of delaying the falling speed of the game ball is provided,
When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the second opportunity ball entry means, the variable value is applied to game balls that have passed through the specific area after the next game ball after the game ball that entered the ball. It is structured so that the value of the falling game ball can be changed by the action of the means,
In a predetermined gaming state, when the game ball that has passed through the specific area flows down the first route and enters the second opportunity ball entry means, the game ball that has passed through the specific area is The variable means is configured to be more likely to enter a specific control state advantageous to a player who can execute the advantageous state than when the ball flows down two routes and enters the first opportunity ball entry means. Its gist is:

According to the gaming machine of the present invention , it is possible to improve interest .

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows propriety judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows fluctuation time judgment processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry counting process. It is a flow chart showing special prize winning processing. It is a flowchart showing non-special winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows special gate passage processing. It is a flowchart which shows the type ball entry process. It is a flowchart showing V winning jackpot setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows discrimination information setting processing. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows termination setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a blade member opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting winning part control process. It is a flowchart which shows a 3rd display control process. It is a flow chart which shows bypass mechanism control processing. It is a flowchart which shows remaining ball monitoring processing. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows pending information storage processing. It is a front view of the center winning unit. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the operation of the route distribution member. It is an exploded perspective view showing a route distribution member. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view showing the rotating body unit. (a) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is in a housed state, and (b) is a front view showing a rotating body unit in which a movable accessory is in a protruding state. (a) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a housed state and its related configuration, and (b) is a partial cross-sectional schematic diagram showing a movable accessory in a protruding state and its related configuration. FIG. 7 is a front view for explaining a route distribution member and the like according to another embodiment. FIG. 7 is a partially sectional front view for explaining route distribution areas and the like according to another embodiment. It is a flowchart showing starting winning pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 4th display control process. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. FIG. 3 is a front view of the variable display unit. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a variable display unit. It is a front view of the variable display device unit in a state where the performance accessories unit has appeared. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart showing game state check processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter, and a gaming state determination value. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the end of a variation. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows opening and closing accessory control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for deciding a decorative pattern. 3 is a flowchart illustrating counter update processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold display setting process. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot types. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a first jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a second jackpot type determination table. (a) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a complete loss/variation pattern table. It is a diagram showing the structure of a variable pattern table at the time of a probability variable jackpot in a normal state. It is a figure showing the composition of an opening-and-closing pattern control table. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display apparatus in a normal state. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the decorative pattern display device when a jackpot occurs. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display device in chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display aspect of a decorative pattern display apparatus in gold mode. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a decorative pattern display device during a roulette performance. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of a decorative pattern display device when a pending display change process is performed. It is a flowchart which shows a part of accessory effect setting processing. 99 is a flowchart showing a continuation of FIG. 98, which is part of the accessory production setting process. (a) is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a role-playing pattern determination table for "end" time, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of a role-playing pattern determination table for "until next time". FIG. 7 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in a reduced diameter state. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotating body in a diameter-reduced state. FIG. 3 is a front view showing the upper rotating body and the like in an expanded diameter state. FIG. 7 is a rear view showing a part of the upper rotary body in a diameter-expanded state. 102 is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 101. FIG. It is a front view showing a part of the lower movable accessory (both left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). It is a side view showing a part of the lower movable accessory (both left and right lower rotating bodies, etc.). FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of presentation using an upper rotating body. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an aspect|mode of the stopped state (stopped state without enlarged display) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies based on the 1st development production pattern. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a mode of a stopped state (weak/SMALL enlarged stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies according to the second development effect pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of a mode of the stopped state (strong/SMALL enlarged stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies according to the third development effect pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an aspect of the stopped state (weak/BIG enlargement stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies concerning the 4th development production pattern. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an aspect of the stopped state (strong/BIG expansion stopped state) of the upper rotary body and the left and right lower rotary bodies according to the fifth development effect pattern. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a rotating body according to another embodiment. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. (a) is a flowchart showing the first propriety judgment process, (b) is a flowchart showing the second propriety judgment process, and (c) is a flowchart showing the time saving propriety judgment process. It is a flowchart which shows a type determination process. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. 3 is a flowchart showing firing permission command setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special display control process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variable display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 1 discrimination information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd variable display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows special figure 2 discrimination information setting processing. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart showing specific prize winning processing. It is a flowchart which shows termination setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows remaining ball monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows normal display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows general figure fluctuation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows ordinary figure discrimination|determination information setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting winning part control process. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of various counters used for determining decorative patterns and the like. 3 is a flowchart illustrating counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows pending information storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows suspension processing. It is a flowchart which shows a win display process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation stop processing. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. It is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the effect display device. (a) and (b) are time charts for explaining the flow of variable display, etc. in the first special symbol display device, the second special symbol display device, and the effect display device. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. FIG. 3 is a front view of the variable display unit. It is a front view of the variable display device unit in a state where the performance accessories unit has appeared. (a) is a diagram showing the movable accessory and the vertical drive mechanism in a standby state, and (b) is a diagram showing the movable accessory and the vertical drive mechanism in the operating state. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart showing game state check processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter, and a gaming state determination value. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the end of a variation. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows opening and closing accessory control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for deciding a decorative pattern. 3 is a flowchart illustrating counter update processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process during winning. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot types. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a first jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a second jackpot type determination table. (a) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a complete loss/variation pattern table. It is a diagram showing the structure of a variable pattern table at the time of a probability variable jackpot in a normal state. It is a figure showing the composition of an opening-and-closing pattern control table. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of an effect display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) in a normal state. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device (liquid crystal display unit) when a jackpot occurs. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of an effect display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) in chance mode. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of an effect display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) in gold mode. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the performance display device (liquid crystal display part) during the roulette performance. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of an effect display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) when a hold display change process is performed. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a rotating body and the like in a diameter-reduced state. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a part of the rotating body in a reduced diameter state. FIG. 3 is a front view showing a rotating body and the like in a diameter-expanded state. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a part of the rotating body in an enlarged diameter state. 215 is a sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 215. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of a mode of presentation using a rotating body. It is a flowchart which shows a part of accessory effect setting processing. 222 is a flowchart that is a part of the accessory production setting process and is a continuation of FIG. 221. (a) is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a role-playing pattern determination table for "end" time, and (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of a role-playing pattern determination table for "until next time". It is a flowchart which shows accessory appearance setting processing. It is a figure showing the composition of an accessory appearance operation control table. It is an operation|movement process diagram for demonstrating the operation|movement aspect of accessory appearance operation|movement, etc. It is a figure which shows the structure of the accessory appearance operation control table based on another embodiment. FIG. 7 is an operation process diagram for explaining the operation mode of an accessory object appearance operation according to another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the conventional accessory appearance operation control table. It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame and a front frame set are opened. It is a front view showing the structure of an inner frame, a game board, etc. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, back pack unit, etc. are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flowchart which shows main processing by a main control device. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main controller. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing starting prize winning processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows reach determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing through gate passing processing. It is a flowchart showing game state check processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter, and a gaming state determination value. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the end of a variation. It is a flowchart showing variable prize winning device control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd display control process. It is a flowchart which shows opening and closing accessory control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the sub-control device. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of various counters used for deciding a decorative pattern. 3 is a flowchart illustrating counter update processing. 3 is a flowchart showing command determination processing of the sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a hold display setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display setting process during winning. It is a diagram for explaining jackpot types. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a first jackpot type determination table. It is a diagram showing the configuration of a second jackpot type determination table. (a) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, and (b) is a diagram showing a storage configuration of a complete loss/variation pattern table. It is a diagram showing the structure of a variable pattern table at the time of a probability variable jackpot in a normal state. It is a figure showing the composition of an opening-and-closing pattern control table. It is a schematic configuration diagram showing the electrical configuration of a game hall in which pachinko machines are installed. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of one pachinko machine and a corresponding game data display device configured via a hall computer. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram for explaining display contents displayed on the liquid crystal display section of the game data display device, in which (a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in normal display mode, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents in active display mode. (c) is a diagram showing an example of display content in the effect display mode. It is a flowchart showing jackpot signal 1 output processing. It is a flowchart showing jackpot signal 2 output processing. (a) is a timing chart for explaining changes in the output state of the conventional jackpot signals 1 and 2, and (b) and (c) are timing charts for explaining changes in the output state of the jackpot signals 1 and 2 of the present embodiment. 2 is a timing chart for explaining. It is a figure for explaining the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device (liquid crystal display part). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the effect display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) in the "normal stage" of a "normal mode." It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device (liquid crystal display section) in the "lively stage" of the "normal mode". It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the effect display device (liquid crystal display part) in the "slightly lively stage" of the "normal mode." It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device (liquid crystal display section) in the "zone entry stage" of the "normal mode". It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of an effect display device (liquid crystal display part) in a "chance mode." It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the effect display device (liquid crystal display part) in "gold mode." It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the effect display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) in "dark mode." It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the performance display device (liquid crystal display part) in opening performance. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of a production display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) during a round. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the effect display apparatus (liquid crystal display part) in an ending effect. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display mode of the performance display device (liquid crystal display part) in demonstration performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device (liquid crystal display part) in a "normal reach" performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device (liquid crystal display part) in a "super reach" performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device (liquid crystal display part) in a "special reach" performance. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display mode of the performance display device (liquid crystal display part) during the roulette performance.

[First embodiment]
Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko machine as a gaming machine will be described in detail based on the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 constituting its outer shell, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. However, in FIG. 3, for convenience, nails and ornaments disposed on the game board 30 surface, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 etc., the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and the game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. can be stored in. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

A production button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15. When the player presses the performance button 125, a predetermined performance is performed or the content of the performance is changed on the performance display device 42, which will be described later.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and projects toward the front. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown), an operation amount detection means (not shown) (variable resistor) for detecting an operation amount of the operation section of the handle 18, and the like.

Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is fired by a firing device 60 as a firing means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. The handle 18 is also provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. When the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, firing of game balls by the firing device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of game balls, or to temporarily stop shooting the game balls while gripping the handle 18.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a firing device 60, which will be described later, while arranging them in a line. In addition, when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication path 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Further, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball extraction button 123. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Furthermore, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light-emitting means play a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light-emitting mode such as lighting or blinking according to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach.

For example, on the periphery of the window section 101, an annular illumination section 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Furthermore, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the annular illumination section 102, which are turned on when a predetermined error occurs. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the annular illumination section 102 above each error display lamp 104 in correspondence with the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 4 and the like. At the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a firing device 60 and a firing rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after being fired from the firing device 60. installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device is adopted as the firing device 60.

In the present embodiment, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from being launched based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the firing device 60 is allowed to launch.

Further, above the firing device 60, a ball feeding device 63 is provided. The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by a driving means such as a solenoid.

In addition, the reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352 to be described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like and almost closes the exit of the dispensing passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the inlets (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 and the dispensing passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance apart. A game ball can pass through the gap. As a result, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side, pass through the lower tray communication path 71, and are paid out to the lower tray 15. That will happen.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) at the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 serving as the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 4. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30, which is composed of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52, and guides a game ball fired from a firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. The rail 50 may be a ball passage. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 4). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 4) of the outer rail component 52. The game ball fired with more than a predetermined force will hit the return rubber 54 and be returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30, for example.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the firing device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53 as a regulating means, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are removed from the area.

In addition, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a space for dropping game balls that have fallen through the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed that guides the ball to the dish 15. The area where the return ball prevention member 53 is arranged may be the specific area. If the game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72. .

The game board 30 also includes a general winning section 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b) as a starting ball entry means, and a through-ball winning section 33 (specifically, a first starting winning section 33a and a second starting winning section 33b). A gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as a variable ball entry means, etc. are arranged in a through hole formed by router processing, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30.

Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with ball entry detection switches (ball entry detection means) that detect game balls that have entered the various ball entry means, corresponding to the general winning section 31 and other ball entry means. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning section 31, a count switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32, and a first starting switch 223 is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 32. A first starting winning switch 224a is provided at a position corresponding to the winning part 33a, a second starting winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the second starting winning part 33b, and a second starting winning switch 224b is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34. A through gate switch 225 is provided.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) into various winning means such as the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, and the starting winning section 33, it is detected by various detection switches, and a predetermined number of balls are sent to the upper tray 19 or the lower tray 15. A prize ball (game ball) is paid out. For example, if a ball enters the starting winning section 33, 3 prizes will be awarded, if a ball enters the general winning section 31, 5 prizes will be awarded, and if a ball enters the variable winning device 32, 10 prizes will be awarded. The ball is paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not win in various winning means such as the general winning section 31 are discharged out of the gaming area through the out port 36. . Further, the game board 30 has a large number of nails planted therein in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members such as a windmill are also installed.

Here, the configuration of the central winning unit 37 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 4, FIGS. 40 to 45, and the like.

The central winning unit 37 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area (gaming board 30). The central winning unit 37 includes a housing (center frame) 400 that forms an internal area 401 into which game balls flowing down the gaming area can enter, and a front panel 402 attached to the front opening of the housing 400. ing. The front panel 402 is made of a transparent member, and the internal area 401 is visible through the front panel 402.

A pair of left and right ball entrance openings 403 are formed in the upper part of the housing 400, which serve as entrances through which game balls flowing down the game area enter the internal area 401. Further, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a pair of left and right blade members 404 for opening and closing the ball entry opening 403, and a blade solenoid 405 (see FIG. 7) for operating the blade members 404. There is. The "wing member 404" constitutes the "opening/closing member" in this embodiment.

Each blade member 404 is provided so as to be rotatably displaceable between a closed position in which the corresponding ball entry opening 403 is closed and an open position in which it is opened. When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entrance opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is in the closed state, and the game ball cannot enter the internal area 401 (ball cannot enter). On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central winning unit 37 is in the open state, and the game ball can enter the internal area 401 (ball entry possible). becomes.

Although the details will be described later, the blade member 404 is used when a ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b), and a small prize is selected in a lottery based on the entering ball. When a winning ticket is won, it remains open for a predetermined period of time. In other words, if a small win is won in the lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b), the predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) in this embodiment is This corresponds to the case where it is established. Further, in this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, so that when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and when one is in the closed position, the other is in the open position. The other is also in the closed position.

On the other hand, the internal area 401 includes a route distribution area 406 where game balls entering from the ball entry opening 403 are first guided, a win/fail lottery area 407 provided at a position below the area, and a lottery area 407 provided at a position further below the route distribution area 406. It is divided into a type lottery area 408 as a type lottery area, and an accessory operation lottery area 409 provided on the right side of the win/fail lottery area 407.

First, the route distribution area 406 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42 and the like. In the route distribution area 406, a game ball that enters the internal area 401 from the ball entry opening 403 is guided once to the back side of the upper rear wall portion 400a of the housing 400, and then guided to the center in the left and right direction of the route distribution area 406. An introduction passage 601 for guiding, a dropping passage 602 for dropping downward the game balls led out from the exit part 601a of the introduction passage 601 opened at the center in the left and right direction of the route distribution area 406, and a dropping passage 602 for dropping the game balls downward. A route distributing member 603 as a route distributing means provided, a normal guide path 604 provided at the left side of the route distributing member 603 and capable of guiding game balls to the winning lottery area 407, and a route distributing member 603. A special guide path (special path) 605 is provided at the right position and can guide game balls to the accessory activation lottery area 409.

In this embodiment, the normal guide passage 604 and the like constitute a "first route", and the special guide passage 605 and the like constitute a "second route".

A pair of left and right entrances 601b of the introduction passage 601 are each provided with an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means for detecting passage of a game ball entered from the ball entry opening 403.

In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b, and a game ball that enters the right ball entry opening 403 always passes through the right entrance 601b. The game ball is configured to pass through, and a game ball that enters the internal area 401 is always detected by either the left or right internal ball entry detection switch 437.

Further, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls are paid out.

As shown in FIG. 42, the route distribution member 603 includes a cylindrical shaft portion 611 having a shaft hole 611a extending in the front-rear direction, a central piece portion 613 projecting upward from the shaft portion 611, and a shaft portion It includes a left piece 614 that projects leftward from 611 and a right piece 615 that projects rightward from shaft 611 .

The shaft pin 610 is inserted into the shaft hole 611a of the shaft portion 611. The shaft pin 610 has its rear end supported by the upper rear wall 400a that defines the back side of the drop passage 602, and its front end supported by the front panel 402 (bearing hole 402a) that defines the front side of the drop passage 602. has been done. As a result, the route distribution member 603 is rotatably supported around the shaft pin 610.

Further, a protrusion 617 having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front is formed at a lower position of the route distribution member 603. In normal times, as shown in FIG. 41(a), the route distributing member 603 is moved to the center position in the left-right direction (axis pin 610), and the right piece 615 is tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and is maintained in a rightward tilted state urged by the rightward tilted surface of the protrusion 617.

In such a rightward tilted state, the tip 613a of the center piece 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the right side wall 602a of the falling passage 602, and the game ball falling down the falling passage 602 falls into the special guide passage 605 on the right side. At the same time, the liquid becomes in a state in which it cannot flow down to the normal guide passage 604 on the left side.

In other words, under normal conditions when the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the right, the special guide passage 605 is closed by the route distribution member 603, while the normal guide passage 604 is opened, and the falling passage 602 is closed. The game ball is guided to the left side normal guide path 604 along the left side guide surface constituted by the left side surface of the center piece 613 and the upper surface of the left piece 614 of the route distribution member 603.

Accordingly, the route distribution member 603 rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means due to the force received from the game ball in contact with the left piece 614 [see FIG. 41(b) ].

As a result, for a predetermined period of time, the route distributing member 603 has a central piece 613 tilted to the left of the center position in the left-right direction (the position of the shaft pin 610), a left piece 614 tilted downward from the horizontal direction, and a protrusion. The left inclined state is biased by the left inclined surface of the portion 617.

In this left-leaning state, the tip 613a of the center piece 613 comes into contact with or comes close to the left side wall 602b of the falling passage 602, and the game ball falling down the falling passage 602 is directed to the left normal guide passage 604. At the same time, the liquid becomes in a state where it cannot flow down to the special guide passage 605 on the right side.

That is, during a predetermined period of time when the route distribution member 603 is in the leftward tilted state, the route distribution member 603 causes the normal guide passage 604 to be in a closed state, while the special guide passage 605 is in an open state. As a result, at this timing, a game ball falling down the falling path 602 (for example, as shown in FIG. If there is a game ball B2), the game ball is guided to the special guide path 605 on the right side along the right guide surface formed by the right side surface of the center piece 613 of the route distribution member 603 and the upper surface of the right piece 615. It will be destroyed.

Once the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left, the biasing force of the biasing means (when the game ball is guided to the special guide path 605 on the right side, (the applied force is also applied), and it rotates clockwise, returning to its normal rightward tilted state (see FIG. 41(c)).

In this embodiment, the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the right tilted posture, which is the first posture, corresponds to the first state, and the state in which the route distribution member 603 is in the left tilted posture, which is the second posture, corresponds to the second state. Equivalent to. Further, in this embodiment, in the first state and the second state, the route distribution member 603 directs the game ball to the first route consisting of the normal guide passage 604 etc., the second route consisting of the special guide passage 605 etc. A state in which flow is possible constitutes a specific state. Of course, the specific state is not limited to these, and other configurations may be adopted.

Next, the configuration of the accessory activation lottery area 409 will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 40, the accessory activation lottery area 409 is provided with a special gate 650 through which game balls guided by the special guide path 605 can enter (pass through). The passage widths of the special guide passage 605 and the special gate 650 are set to a width that allows each game ball to pass through. Furthermore, the game balls that have passed through the special gate 650 are discharged to the outside of the internal area 401 (to the back side of the game board 30) via a discharge passage (not shown). The "special gate 650" constitutes the "opportunity ball entry means" in this embodiment.

The special gate 650 is provided with a special gate switch 651 that detects game balls passing therethrough. The "special gate switch 651" constitutes the "opportunity ball entry detection means" in this embodiment.

When a game ball is detected by this special gate switch 651, an activation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate a movable accessory 722, which will be described later. If the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined period of time. Details of the configuration and operation mode of the movable accessory 722 will be described later.

In this embodiment, even if a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, the prize ball is not paid out (the number of prize balls is 0). The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out.

Next, the configuration of the win/fail lottery area 407 will be explained in detail. The win/fail lottery area 407 is provided with a rotating body unit 410 as a win/fail sorting means. The rotating body unit 410 has a function of allocating the destination of game balls guided from the route allocation area 406 via the normal guide path 604 to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the internal area 401. Note that the width of the normal guide path 604 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one ball at a time.

As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the rotating body unit 410 includes a unit base 411 serving as a base portion, and a unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface side thereof.

A substantially disk-shaped rotating body 414 is attached to the unit base 411 on an installation base 413 formed protruding from the upper surface thereof, and a rotating body motor 415 for rotationally driving the rotating body 414 is attached. . On the other hand, a gear mechanism (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the rotary body motor 415 to the rotary body 414 is provided on the lower surface side of the unit base 411 .

The rotating body 414 is installed so that its upper surface faces obliquely upward on the front side and the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to the vertical direction. The rotating body motor 415 is constituted by a stepping motor, and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main controller 261. Under such a configuration, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate in a constant direction (counterclockwise in this embodiment) at a constant cycle.

The rotating body 414 has pocket portions 416 formed at three locations on its outer peripheral edge, each of which can receive one game ball at a time. The three pocket sections 416 are divided into one special pocket section 416a and the other (two) non-special pocket sections 416b.

The non-special pocket portion 416b is open to the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 and above, and has a bottom wall portion 417. The upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 is inclined downward toward the outer circumferential side of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, the special pocket part 416a is open on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414, upward and downward, and does not have a bottom wall part 417 like the non-special pocket part 416b. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a resin material colored differently from other portions. This makes it easy for the player to distinguish between the special pocket section 416a and the non-special pocket section 416b.

The unit cover 412 includes a substantially cylindrical cylindrical wall portion 431 disposed to surround the rotating body 414, and a stage portion 432 formed to extend outward from the periphery of the cylindrical wall portion 431. ing.

The upper edge of the cylinder wall part 431 projects upward from the upper surface of the stage part 432, and a gate part 435 is provided on the front side thereof to communicate the inner circumferential side and the outer circumferential side of the cylinder wall part 431. .

Further, the upper surface of the stage portion 432 is configured such that a game ball can roll thereon. In the stage part 432, a part located behind the gate part 435 is inclined downward toward the front and toward the cylindrical wall part 431 side, and a part located in front of the gate part 435 is tilted backward (toward the gate part 435 side). It slopes downward.

As a result, the game balls led out from the exit part 604a of the normal guide passage 604 opened in the middle rear wall part 400b of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the win/fail lottery area 407 and guided to the rear side of the stage part 432, While the movement toward the rotating body 414 is restricted by the cylindrical wall 431, it rolls clockwise or counterclockwise toward the front on the stage 432, and swings left and right multiple times in front of the gate 435. Then, when the relative positions of the gate portion 435 and the pocket portion 416 (special pocket portion 416a or non-special pocket portion 416b) of the rotary body 414 match, the rotary body enters into the pocket portion 416. .

Furthermore, the unit base 411 has a first V winning passage 427 for guiding the game balls accommodated in the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 to the type lottery area 408, and a first V winning passage 427 for guiding the game balls accommodated in the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game balls accommodated in the non-special pocket part 416b. An out passage 428 for discharging the inside area 401 is provided.

The first V winning passage 427 is formed slightly downstream of the gate portion 435 with respect to the rotational direction (counterclockwise direction) of the rotating body 414, that is, at a position to the right of the gate portion 435. On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed further downstream than the first V winning passage 427, that is, at the far right position of the first V winning passage 427.

Further, the entrance side of the first V winning passage 427 is open on the upper surface of the installation stand 413, and the pocket part 416 of the rotary body 414 is configured to be able to pass above it. The game ball that has entered the special pocket section 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate section 435 is moved between the special pocket section 416a and the entrance of the first V winning passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. When the ball matches, the ball falls downward from the special pocket part 416a and enters the first V winning passage 427. In addition, at a position corresponding to the first V winning passage 427, a cylindrical wall portion 431 protruding downward from the back surface of the stage portion 432 prevents the game balls from falling off from the side surface of the rotating body 414.

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the non-special pocket part 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate part 435, as the rotating body 414 rotates, the non-special pocket part 416b and the entrance part of the first V winning passage 427 Even if the positions match, the bottom wall part 417 provided in the non-special pocket part 416b prevents the game ball accommodated in the non-special pocket part 416b from falling (entering the ball) into the 1st V winning passage 427. It has become.

Further, at a position corresponding to the out passage 428, a notch 431a is formed at the lower edge of the cylinder wall 431. As a result, when the rotating body 414 further rotates and the positions of the non-special pocket part 416b in which the game ball is accommodated and the out passage 428 match, the game ball that was accommodated in the non-special pocket part 416b is removed from the bottom wall. Due to the inclination of the portion 417, the ball moves toward the outer circumferential side of the rotating body 414, and falls (enters the ball) into the out passage 428 via the notch 431a of the cylindrical wall portion 431.

Incidentally, the housing 400 is formed with a connection passage 429 connected to the exit portion of the first V winning passage 427, and the first V winning passage 427 and the type lottery area 408 are brought into communication through the connecting passage 429.

Further, the first V winning passage 427 is provided with a first special ball entry detection switch 461 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting game balls passing therethrough. When a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. becomes. Therefore, the "1st V winning passage 427" constitutes the "special ball entry means" in this embodiment.

In a jackpot that occurs when a game ball enters the 1V winning passage 427, a prescribed time of 30 seconds passes after the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state. This is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined round) with one opening/closing operation until the closed state is set as one special prize state on the condition that a prescribed number of eight game balls are won in the variable winning device 32.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot states include a "3 round jackpot" in which the above special prize state (round) is repeated 3 times, a "7 round jackpot" in which the above special prize state (round) is repeated 7 times, and a "7 round jackpot" in which the above special prize state (round) is repeated 7 times. A "15 round jackpot" in which (round) is repeated 15 times is set.

However, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, when the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects a ball entry, the jackpot state does not start immediately, but the jackpot state is started in the type lottery area 408. After the type of state is determined, the jackpot state is configured to start.

As described above, in this embodiment, the game ball that enters the special pocket part 416a of the rotary body 414 and passes through the 1V winning passage 427 and is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is selected by type lottery. You will be guided to area 408.

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is provided with a non-special entry ball detection switch 462 that detects game balls that pass through this and are discharged outside the internal area 401.

Further, in a predetermined section in the circumferential direction of the upper edge of the cylinder wall part 431 including the upper part of the entrance of the first V winning passage 427 and the out passage 428, there is a groove extending toward the inner circumferential side of the cylinder wall part 431. A formed overhang 440 is provided.

The overhang portion 440 is configured to cover a portion of each pocket portion 416 located below (an area approximately half of the rotating body 414 in the radial direction) from above. As a result, another game ball rides on top of the game ball that entered the predetermined pocket part 416, and the two game balls stacked vertically continue to the 1st V winning path 427 or the out path 428. To avoid a situation in which a game ball enters a ball or, for some reason, jumps over a cylinder wall part 431 and directly enters a pocket part 416 located at a position that coincides with a first V winning passage 427 and an out passage 428. I can do it.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 43 to 45, a bypass mechanism section 721 is provided at the rear of the rotating body unit 410. The bypass mechanism section 721 includes a movable accessory 722 as a movable body (movable member) assembled in an opening housing section 433 formed in the most upstream part of the stage section 432, and a movable accessory 722 that operates the movable accessory 722. A movable accessory solenoid 725 is provided as a member driving means. The movable accessory solenoid 725 is driven and controlled by a main controller 261 that constitutes a movable object control means.

The movable accessory 722 is assembled so that it can be slid (raised and lowered) in the vertical direction. In a normal state when the movable accessory solenoid 725 is in a non-energized state, the movable accessory 722 is almost entirely accommodated in the opening housing section 433, and its upper surface is substantially continuous with the upper surface of the stage section 432. [See FIGS. 44(a) and 45(a)]. This accommodation state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to a non-advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the other hand, when the movable accessory solenoid 725 is energized and the bypass mechanism section 721 is activated, the movable accessory 722 rises and enters a protruding state in which a part of it protrudes upward from the upper surface of the stage section 432 [Fig. 44(b), see FIG. 45(b)]. The operation of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to a predetermined operation in this embodiment, and the operating state of the movable accessory 722 corresponds to an advantageous state in this embodiment.

On the upper surface of the movable accessory 722, there is a left inclined part 727 that gently slopes downward to the left from approximately the center in the left and right direction, and a right slope that slopes gently downward to the right from the approximately central part in the left and right direction. An inclined portion 728 is formed.

In a normal state when the movable accessory 722 is almost entirely housed in the opening housing portion 433, the exit portion of the normal guide passage 604 opens in the middle rear wall portion 400b of the housing 400 at a position above the movable accessory 722. The game ball drawn out from 604a is guided to the left or right of the stage section 432 by the left inclined part 727 or right inclined part 728 on the upper surface of the movable accessory 722.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), a second V winning passage 730 is provided inside the movable accessory 722. The passage width of the second V winning passage 730 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one.

Then, when the movable accessory 722 is in a protruding state projecting from the stage part 432, the movable accessory 722 blocks the front of the exit section 604a of the normal guide path 604, and the entrance section 730a of the second V winning path 730 and the normal guide path. 604 and the outlet portion 604a thereof are in a state facing each other [see FIGS. 44(b) and 45(b)]. As a result, the game ball can enter the second V winning passage 730 from the normal guide passage 604, and both passages 604 and 730 are in a communicating state.

In addition, in the protruding state in which the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage part 432, the outlet part 730b of the second V winning passage 730 is opposite to the inlet part 737a of the bypass passage 737 formed on the back side of the middle rear wall part 400b of the housing 400. It will be in a state where it is facing the direction. As a result, the game ball can enter from the second V winning passage 730 to the bypass passage 737, and both passages 730 and 737 are brought into communication.

That is, when the movable accessory 722 is in a protruding state that protrudes from the stage part 432, the normal guide passage 604 and the bypass passage 737 are in a communicating state through which the game ball can pass through the second V winning passage 730.

The passage width of the bypass passage 737 is set to a width that allows game balls to pass through one by one. Further, the outlet portion 737b of the bypass passage 737 opens into the lower rear wall portion 400c of the housing 400 that defines the back side of the type lottery area 408 at a position above the 15R ball entry port 731. As a result, in the protruding state where the movable accessory 722 protrudes from the stage part 432, the game balls guided to the normal guide path 604 are directly directed to the 15R without going through the rotary body unit 410 and the type distribution mechanism part 741 described later. It becomes possible to guide the ball to the entrance 731. That is, by operating the movable accessory 722, it is possible to avoid sorting by the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism section 741.

A second special ball entry detection switch 738 is provided in the bypass passage 737 as a special ball entry detection means for detecting game balls passing therethrough. Then, when a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the right to generate a jackpot state (special game state) is granted. .

However, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, when the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects the ball entry, the jackpot state does not start immediately, but the game ball enters the 15R ball. After the ball enters the opening 731, a jackpot state is started.

In addition, when the movable accessory 722 descends and returns to the accommodated state while the game balls remain in the second V winning passage 730, the remaining balls are guided to the bypass passage 737 via the lower passage 739. and is configured to be detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738.

In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738, the upper tray 19 (or lower tray 15) is The configuration is such that a number of game balls are paid out. Of course, the number of game balls paid out in response to these ball entry detection switches is not limited to ten, and may be any other number. Further, it may be configured such that when a game ball is detected by these ball entry detection switches, no game ball is paid out (the number of prize balls is 0).

Hereinafter, the above-mentioned "jackpot that occurs when a game ball enters the 1st V winning passage 427" and "jackpot that occurs when a gaming ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the 2nd V winning passage 730" are common. This is sometimes referred to as a "V-winning jackpot."

Next, the type lottery area 408 will be explained in detail. In the type lottery area 408, there is a 15R ball entrance 731 where a jackpot state of "15 rounds" (15 rounds jackpot) is given when a game ball enters, and a "7 round" when a game ball enters. 7R ball entrance 732 where a jackpot state (7 round jackpot) is given, and 3R ball entrance 733 where a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot) is given when a game ball enters the ball. It is provided. Here, the "15R ball entry port 731," the "7R ball entry port 732," and the "3R ball entry port 733" constitute the "type-based ball entry means" in this embodiment.

Further, the 15R ball entry opening 731 is provided with a 15R ball entry detection switch 734 that detects a game ball entered here. Similarly, the 7R ball entrance 732 is provided with a 7R ball entry detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered here, and the 3R ball entrance 733 is provided with a 3R ball entry detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered here. A ball entry detection switch 736 is provided.

In the type lottery area 408, the destination of the game ball guided to the type lottery area 408 via the 1V winning passage 427 and the connecting passage 429 is determined by the 15R ball entrance 731, 7R ball entrance 732, or 3R ball entrance. A type sorting mechanism section 741 is provided as a type sorting means (type determining means) for sorting to one of the types 733.

The type sorting mechanism section 741 includes a starting board 742 to which game balls led out from the exit section 429a of the connection passage 429 are guided, a first passing board 744 to which game balls that have passed through the starting board 742 are guided, and A second spanning board 745 to which the game ball that has passed through the first spanning board 744 is guided; and a 15R guide where the gaming ball that has passed through the second spanning board 745 is guided and which guides the game ball to the 15R ball entrance 731. A passage 746 is provided.

The starting stand 742 is installed at the upper left of the type lottery area 408, and its upper surface is inclined downwardly toward the right.

The first gang plate 744 is installed at a position to the right and slightly below the starting platform 742, and its left end is rotatably supported in the front-rear direction as an axis, and the right end is a free end. It is being

The rotation axis of the first span plate 744 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor etc. on the back side of the lower rear wall 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The first spanning plate 744 is configured to be oscillated up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the first spanning board 744 has an upper surface that is slightly tilted downward to the right, and a forward position where the game ball is guided to the second spanning board 745; , and a falling position that guides the game ball to the 3R ball entrance 733.

Then, when the game ball guided to the first spanning board 744 via the starting platform 742 rolls to the right end of the first spanning board 744, if the first spanning board 744 is at the forwarding position, The game ball is guided to the second passing board 745.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the first spanning board 744 rolls to the right end of the first spanning board 744, if the first spanning board 744 is at the above-mentioned falling position, the game ball enters the 3R ball. You will be guided to the mouth 733.

In other words, the first passing board 744 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided via the starting board 742 to either the 3R ball entrance 733 or the second passing board 745.

The second spanning board 745 is installed at a position to the right and slightly below the first spanning board 744, and its left end is rotatably supported with the front-rear direction as an axial direction, and the right end is a free end. It is set in.

The rotation axis of the second span plate 745 is connected to a swinging mechanism (not shown) consisting of a motor etc. on the back side of the lower rear wall 400c of the housing 400, and the swinging mechanism is controlled by the main controller 261. The second spanning plate 745 is configured to be oscillated up and down by being driven and controlled.

Specifically, the upper surface of the second spanning board 745 is tilted slightly downward to the right, and the upper surface is tilted downward more greatly than the advance position where the game ball is guided to the 15R guide path 746. It is configured to be movable between the drop position where the game ball is guided to the 7R ball entrance 732.

Then, when the game ball guided by the second spanning board 745 rolls to the right end of the second spanning board 745, if the second spanning board 745 is at the above-mentioned forwarding position, the game ball will move to the 15R guidance path. You will be guided to 746.

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the second spanning board 745 rolls to the right end of the second spanning board 745, if the second spanning board 745 is at the above-mentioned falling position, the game ball enters the 7R ball. It is guided to the mouth 732.

In other words, the second spanning board 745 has a function of allocating the destination of the game ball guided through the first spanning board 744 to either the 7R ball entrance 732 or the 15R guiding path 746.

The 15R guide passage 746 is installed at a position to the right and slightly below the second spanning plate 745, and its upper surface is inclined downward toward the 15R ball entry opening 731 on the right.

In this embodiment, the first spanning board 744 and the second spanning board 745 are configured to swing at different periods. For example, the first spanning plate 744 is configured to swing slightly faster than the second spanning plate 745.

Further, in this embodiment, after the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects the ball entry, any one of the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, or the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is activated. When the entry of a ball is detected, the jackpot state of the corresponding type is started. In addition, when the second special ball entering detection switch 738 detects the ball entering and then the 15R ball entering detection switch 734 detects the ball entering, the jackpot state corresponding to the 15 round jackpot starts. It has become.

From here, we return to the explanation of the game board 30. As shown in FIG. 4, the first starting winning part 33a is provided at the lower left and lower right of the central winning unit 37. Further, the second starting winning part 33b is provided directly below the central winning unit 37.

Furthermore, the second starting prize part 33b is provided with a pair of opening/closable starting opening opening/closing members 33c on both sides thereof. In this embodiment, when the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in the closed state, the game ball is configured to be unable to enter the second starting winning part 33b.

In other words, the first starting winning section 33a allows game balls to enter at all times, whereas the second starting winning section 33b uses a ball entry assist lottery based on the game ball passing through the through gate 34. If the game ball is won, the starting port opening/closing member 33c is opened, and the game ball can enter the second starting winning section 33b.

Not limited to this, when the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in the closed state, it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting prize winning section 33b, and if the game ball is won in the ball entry assist lottery, the starting port opens and closes. It may be configured such that the member 33c is in an open state and the game ball can easily enter the second starting prize winning section 33b.

As described above, the first starting prize winning section 33a is provided with the first starting winning switch 224a that detects the game ball that has entered there. Similarly, the second starting winning section 33b is provided with a second starting winning switch 224b that detects a game ball that has entered there. Each starting winning switch 224a, 224b constitutes a "starting ball entering detection means" in this embodiment.

As will be described in detail later, if a game ball is detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b, it will be a "hit" that is advantageous to the player, or a "miss". A lottery will be held to determine whether or not it is true.

The "win" in the win/fail lottery includes a "small win" in which the wing member 404 of the central prize winning unit 37 is opened, and a "big win" in which the large prize opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable prize winning device 32 is opened.

In addition, when a winning lottery is conducted based on ball entry detection by the first starting prize switch 224a or the second starting prize winning switch 224b, the result of the winning lottery is shown on a special display device 43, which will be described later. A fluctuating display and a stop display are performed for this purpose.

In addition, in this embodiment, a common winning lottery is performed in the case where the first starting winning switch 224a detects the ball entering and when the second starting winning switch 224b detects the ball entering. , the common special display device 43 is configured so that a variable display is performed, but the first start-up prize switch 224a performs a variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery conducted based on the detection by the first winning prize switch 224a. It is also possible to separately provide the special display device and a second special display device on which a variable display is performed for teaching the result of the winning/losing lottery performed based on the detection by the second starting winning switch 224b. The first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b may be used as the first or second opportunity ball hitting detection means. Furthermore, when such a configuration is adopted, each variable display is separately held and stored, and the corresponding variable display is digested in the order in which it was stored, or one is given priority over the other. It may be configured so that In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratios of the types of jackpot states that are awarded when winning in the lottery may be different or may be the same.

In the game areas on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, downstream areas are formed in which game balls can flow down. The through gates 34 are arranged in downstream areas on both the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured to allow game balls flowing down there to pass one by one. The downstream area on the right side of the central winning unit 37 may be the first downstream route, and the downstream area on the left side may be the second downstream route. Further, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 that detects a game ball passing through the through gate 34. When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entering assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to open the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c). If the player wins in the entry assist lottery, the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is kept open for a specified period of time.

At the upper right of the game board 30, there is a through-gate display device (normal symbol display device) 41 that displays the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery based on the ball entering (passing the ball) into the through gate 34, and each starting prize section. A special display device (special symbol display device) 43 that displays the lottery results of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the special gates 33a and 33b, and a lottery for the activation assist lottery based on the ball entering the special gate 650 (passing the ball) A special gate display device 44 is provided to display the results. The "special gate display device 44" constitutes the "display means" in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, the through gate display device 41 is composed of two lamps, the special display device 43 constituting the first display means is composed of eight lamps, and the special gate display device 44 is composed of two lamps. has been done.

Note that the configurations of these display devices 41, 43, and 44 are not particularly limited to the above configuration, and may be configured with different numbers of lamp groups, for example, or may include a 7-segment display device, a dot display device, a liquid crystal display device, etc. It may be configured by different display devices such as a display device.

In addition, in the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b), a variable display (switching) for teaching the lottery result of the winning lottery. display) is started, and when the fluctuating display is stopped after a predetermined period of time, an aspect corresponding to the result of the winning lottery is displayed. The first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b may be used as the first or second opportunity winning means. Further, the display contents of the special display device 43 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the results of the winning lottery are displayed definitively.

If you win a jackpot in such a winning lottery, after the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the specified time of 30 seconds must elapse or the variable winning device 32 must be closed. A jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a "direct hit jackpot") that is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), with one opening and closing operation until the closed state is treated as one special prize state, on the condition that the specified number of 8 game balls enter the prize. ) will be given.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, only when a "big hit" is won in the lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b). When the game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 through the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 and is detected by the first special entry ball detection switch 461, or when the movable accessory 722 ( A jackpot state (V winning jackpot) also occurs when a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730) and is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b) during the variable display on the special display device 43, the corresponding variable display will change. , is configured to be performed after the variable display that is being performed at that time ends. In other words, the variable display on the special display device 43 is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is suspended is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is , a total of up to four fluctuation displays are suspended.

Further, the number of hold times in the variable display of the special display device 43 is displayed by lighting on a special display device hold lamp 47 provided near the special display device 43. The hold lamp 47 for the special display device of this embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of holds is taught by appropriately switching the lighting/extinguishing state of each lamp.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting prize section 33 during a jackpot or small win, the variable display for that amount will also be suspended, and the variable display will be executed after the jackpot or small win state ends. be done.

In the through gate display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the ball entry assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. When doing so, an aspect corresponding to the result of the input assist lottery is displayed. Here, if the lottery result of the entry assist lottery is a winning result corresponding to the opening of the starting port opening/closing member 33c, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display device 41, and the variable display is stopped. After that, the starting port opening/closing member 33c is opened. In addition, the display contents of the through gate display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the entry assist lottery is displayed definitively.

Additionally, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display on the through gate display device 41, the corresponding variable display will be performed after the variable display being performed at that point ends. The structure is as follows. In other words, the variable display on the through-gate display device 41 is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, up to four times are held, and the number of times that the variable display is held is determined by the number of times the variable display is held near the through gate display device 41. The gate hold lamp 48 is lit and displayed. The through gate reservation lamp 48 of this embodiment is composed of four lamps, and the number of reservations is taught by appropriately switching the on/off state of each lamp.

In the special gate display device 44, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display (switching display) for displaying the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variable display is stopped. At that time, an aspect corresponding to the result of the operation assist lottery is displayed. Here, if the lottery result of the operation assist lottery is a winning result that activates the movable accessory 722, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the special gate display device 44, and after the variable display is stopped, the movable accessory 722 is activated. Accessory object 722 is activated. Further, the display contents of the special gate display device 44 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the actuation assist lottery is displayed definitively.

Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, a game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display or the movable accessory 722 is in operation, and the special gate switch 651 causes the game ball to pass through the special gate 650. Even if it is detected, the variable display (operation assist lottery result) is not suspended.

Furthermore, an effect display device 42 is provided above the central winning unit 37. The effect display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. In the effect display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the variable display and lottery results displayed on the special display device 43. The display is performed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

The variable prize winning device 32 is arranged at the lower center of the gaming area (gaming board 30). In addition, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter prizes, and when a jackpot situation occurs, the grand prize opening/closing member 32a is opened and the game ball can enter the grand prize opening. It is assumed to be in an open state.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 5, 6, and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 6, a frame cover 213 made of resin is provided on the back side of the game board 30 to protrude rearward and cover the central winning unit 37 and the like from behind. Furthermore, a display control device 45 and a sub-control device 262 are detachably attached to the back side of the frame cover 213.

The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). Further, the board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, so that the inside thereof is visible.

A back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 below the frame cover 213 so as to cover the general winning section 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning section 33, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting winning game balls from various winning means. The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Furthermore, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board (not shown) that is electrically connected to the general prize switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

Further, the back frame set 215 is provided with a second panel relay board (not shown) that is electrically connected to various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 via cable connectors. Specifically, the second board relay board includes an internal ball entry detection switch 437, a first special ball entry detection switch 461, a non-special ball entry detection switch 462, a round ball entry detection switch (15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 734, It is electrically connected to a ball detection switch 735, a 3R ball entry detection switch 736), a second special ball entry detection switch 738, and a special gate switch 651, respectively. This second board relay board is to relay various switches provided in the central winning unit 37 and the main control device 261, and like the first board relay board, it is connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. electrically connected.

On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224a and 224b that detect the ball entering the starting winning parts 33a and 33b are directly connected to the main control device 261 via the connector cable without going through the relay board.

Under the above configuration, the detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. (Excluding cases detected by through gate switch 225, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651).

In addition, although not shown in the drawings, on the back side of the game board 30, there is provided a solenoid for the big winning opening that opens and closes the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a with the variable winning device 32, and a solenoid for the big winning opening that opens and closes the big winning opening opening/closing member 32a with the variable winning device 32, and with the second starting winning part 33b. A starting port solenoid that opens and closes the pair of starting port opening/closing members 33c is provided. Further, the back frame set 215 is also provided with a third panel relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main control device 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying the transmission of various information to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, reference numbers are not attached to terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming status (jackpot status, time-saving mode, etc.), the front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92, which will be described later, and internal terminals. A terminal for outputting information regarding the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as a ball entering error, a lower tray full error, a tank ball error, and a dispensing error, which is output from the dispensing control device 311. A terminal is provided for outputting information regarding the number of prize balls.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. That will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further downstream of the tank rail 356, a vertical case rail 357 is connected. connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 6, a discharge passage section 217 is formed in the lower frame set 251, into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed.

That is, the game balls won by each winning means such as the general winning section 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any winning means are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute.

In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are removably attached in a stacked state. It is being

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and is locked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 5, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The main control device 261 constitutes special game state providing means, opening/closing control means, etc. in this embodiment.

The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, a through gate display device 41, a special display device 43, a special gate display device 44, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the through gate display device 41, special display device 43, and special gate display device 44 described above are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, although illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a general winning switch 221, a counting switch 223, starting winning switches 224a, 224b, a through gate switch 225, an internal ball entry detection switch 437, Various detection switches, various substrates, and blades that can constitute predetermined detection means such as special ball entry detection switches 461, 738, non-special ball entry detection switches 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and special gate switch 651. A blade solenoid 405 that opens and closes the member 404, a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, a movable accessory solenoid 725 that moves the movable accessory 722 up and down, a first spanning board 744, and a second spanning board 745. Various electrical parts such as motors are connected to the That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It is equipped with a RAM 553, which is a memory that temporarily stores various data, etc. when executing the program, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. It is equipped with The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a production button 125, various illumination parts, and lamps 102 and 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command signal (for example, a production pattern command such as a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and displays the display on the production display device 42. let As described above, in this embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main controller 261 displays whether or not there is a win, and the effect display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 displays the winning result. , a display matching that of the special display device 43 is performed.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing prohibition button 18a (which stops firing) is activated. (see FIG. 1) is not operated, the firing device 60 is driven and game balls are fired at predetermined intervals with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. This embodiment is configured to fire at approximately 0.6 second intervals (approximately 100 shots per minute).

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the effect display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the effect display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the start winning switches 224a and 224b, there is a jackpot that opens the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening/closing member 32a), and a jackpot that opens the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404). ) A win/fail random number counter C1 used in a win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small win that opens the ``win'', and a variable time selection counter used to determine the time of variable display (fluctuating time) performed on the special display device 43. C2, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the win/fail random number counter C1, and the detection of the through gate switch 225, whether to open the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c). Entering assist random number counter C3 used in the ball entering assist lottery to determine whether or not to actuate the ball, and activation assist random number used in the activation assist lottery to determine whether or not to activate the movable accessory 722 based on the detection of the special gate switch 651. A counter C4 is used.

The counters C1, C2, CINI, C3, and C4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the input assist random number counter C3 is stored. It is provided. Both the special fluctuation holding area and the normal fluctuation holding area include one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

In addition, in each holding area of the special fluctuation holding area, the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, etc. Stored sequentially. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the special display device 43 up to four times in total as described above.

Furthermore, in each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the through gate display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the win/fail random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 399, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 399), the lower limit value as the opening price is 0. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the win/fail random number counter C1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the applicable random number counter C1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 399) similar to the win/fail random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the win/fail random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 is stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), it is stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer. The value of the winning/falsifying random number counter C1 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area.

In this embodiment, in the winning/failure lottery performed based on the value of the winning/failing random number counter C1 stored in the special fluctuation holding area, a lottery result of "small win", "big win", or "miss" is obtained. The win/fail lottery process related to the jackpot lottery and the small win lottery constitutes the open lottery process in this embodiment.

Specifically, in this embodiment, the number of random number values that result in a "jackpot" is one, and that value is "0". That is, the probability of winning a "jackpot" is 1/400, and a stop display is performed on the special display device 43 in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "jackpot", resulting in a 15-round jackpot state. That will happen.

Further, the number of random number values that result in a "small win" is 398, and the values are "2 to 399". In other words, the probability of winning a "small win" is 398/400.

In particular, the "small win" of this embodiment includes a "short small win" in which the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is released for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is released for 1.5 seconds. There is a "hit". Therefore, among the values of the win/fail random number counter C1, "2 to 21" correspond to a "long small win", and "22 to 399" correspond to a "short small win".

When a "short small win" is won, a stop display is performed on the special display device 43 in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "short small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 0.5 seconds. That will happen. Also, if you win a "long small win", a stop display is performed on the special display device 43 in a manner (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to the "long small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. That will happen. Here, the function of the main controller 261 which executes the small winning lottery and the big winning lottery and also determines the opening/closing pattern of the opening/closing member such as the blade member 404 constitutes the opening/closing pattern determining means in this embodiment.

Further, among the values of the win/fail random number counter C1, "1" is a value corresponding to "miss", and in the case of "miss", the special display device 43 displays the mode corresponding to "miss" (the lighting lamp). combination), a stop display is performed.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a win/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or "big win."

Furthermore, in this embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, a gaming state is provided in which the time (variable time) of the variable display on the special display device 43 is shortened. Ru. In addition, even if the next jackpot state does not occur after the end of the jackpot state, this gaming state ends when the special display device 43 displays the variable four times, and then returns to the normal gaming state. Return to

Hereinafter, a gaming state in which the varying time of the special display device 43 is shortened will be referred to as a "time reduction mode", and a normal gaming state in which a normal varying display is performed in which the varying time is not shortened will be referred to as a "normal mode". The specific variation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" and the "normal mode" will be described later.

Furthermore, in the "time reduction mode", the starting port opening/closing member 33c of the second starting prize part 33b is opened relatively frequently, and the "high ball entry state" is established in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the second starting winning part 33b. becomes. As a result, in the "time reduction mode", compared to the "normal mode" where the starting port opening/closing member 33c is hardly opened and the game ball is in a "low ball entry state" where it is difficult to enter the second starting winning part 33b. , it becomes easier to enter the game ball into the second starting winning part 33b.

Specifically, in the "normal mode", the fluctuation time of the through-gate display device 41 for displaying the result of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passing of the game ball through the through-gate 34 is 10 seconds. , the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the entry assist lottery is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the "time reduction mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the entry assist lottery is 2 seconds.

That is, in the "time reduction mode", the fluctuation time of the through gate display device 41 is shorter and the opening time of the starting port opening/closing member 33c is longer than in the "normal mode". Since the time period during which the starting port opening/closing member 33c is in the open state becomes longer, game balls enter the second starting prize winning section 33b more frequently, and successive drawings are made continuously. The balls will hold up well.

In this way, in the "time saving mode", if the pending variable display on the special display device 43 successively wins a small win (after closing the blade member 404 and performing the variable display, Although the flow of opening is the same, since the fluctuation time is short), the blade members 404 are opened almost continuously (in rapid succession). For this reason, it is easy to cause a plurality of game balls to enter the inner area 401 of the central winning unit 37 all at once.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big hit" or "small win (short small win and long small win)" in the lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning section 33, and the probability of winning a "small win (short small win)" The opening time of the blade member 404 at the time of occurrence of "small hit and long small hit" is the same in both modes (time reduction mode and normal mode).

Furthermore, the probability of winning the entry assist lottery based on the passing of a game ball to the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the actuation assist lottery based on the passing of a game ball to the special gate switch 651 will not be disclosed. The same is true for both modes.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The variable time selection counter C2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning part 33a or the second starting winning part 33b (the timing detected by the first starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b), the variable time selection counter buffer The stored value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the special variable reservation area of the RAM 503.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 when a "small win" is achieved in the win/fail lottery in the "normal mode" is set to "2 seconds" or "3 seconds". Note that a variable time selection table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the variable time selection counter C2 corresponds to "2 seconds variation" or "3 seconds variation" is stored in the ROM 502 in advance. Therefore, the ROM 502 that stores the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the first variation pattern storage means in this embodiment.

In addition, the variation time of the special display device 43 in the case of a "big hit" or "miss" in the lottery in the "normal mode" is "7 seconds".

On the other hand, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 in the "time reduction mode" is uniformly "0.1 seconds" regardless of the result of the lottery ("small win", "big win", or "miss"). . Note that the variation time related to the special display device 43 is not limited to the four variations of 2 second variation, 3 second variation, 7 second variation, and 0.1 second variation according to this embodiment, and different variation times may be adopted. You may.

Furthermore, the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the ball entry assist random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The ball entering assist random number counter C3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the ball entering assist random number counter C3 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. Ru.

Normally, there are eight random number values that can be won, and the range is from 1 to 8. When the value of the entry assist random number counter C3 is acquired, the through gate display device 41 displays a variable display for a predetermined period of time, and then stops in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to winning or losing. A display is performed, and if the prize is won, the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is kept open for a predetermined period of time.

Further, the operation assist random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within the range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (ie, 19). The operation assist random number counter C4 is updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is acquired.

Usually, there are 15 winning random number values, and the range is 1 to 15. When the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 is acquired, the special gate display device 44 displays a variable display for a predetermined period of time, and then stops displaying in a mode (combination of lit lamps) corresponding to winning or losing. is held, and if the winner is won, the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 will be in a protruding state for a predetermined period of time. Therefore, the operation assist lottery constitutes the operation lottery process in this embodiment, and the function of the main control device 261 that executes the operation assist lottery constitutes the "lottery processing execution means" and the "state lottery means".

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by an input. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be explained here first, and then main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 11, first in step S301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and stores the detected information. Incidentally, when the game ball is paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the prize ball counter corresponding to this is added, and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the process is immediately terminated. In addition, in the external output process of the normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311. Furthermore, upon outputting this prize ball command, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, a random number initial value update process is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the win/fail random number counter C1, variable time selection counter C2, entry assist random number counter C3, and actuation assist random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and the counter values are set to the maximum value (in this embodiment, each "399", "9", "9", "19"), each is cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1, C2, C3, and C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step S304, a starting winning process is executed in conjunction with winning in the starting winning part 33 (first starting winning part 33a or second starting winning part 33b), and in step S305, the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Through-gate passing processing is executed in accordance with this, and in step S306, entry counting processing is executed in accordance with the entry of a ball into the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37.

In the subsequent step S307, detection is performed by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 (ball entry into the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414) or by the second special ball entry detection switch 738. A special winning process is executed in response to the detection (the entry of the movable accessory 722 into the bypass passage 737 via the second V winning passage 730).

Furthermore, in step S308, a non-special winning process is executed in response to detection by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 (ball entering the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414), and in step S309, , executes special gate passage processing as the game ball passes through the special gate 650.

After that, in step S310, the type ball entry process is executed in accordance with the detection by the round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, and 736 (ball entry into the 15R ball entry port 731, 7R ball entry port 732, and 3R ball entry port 733). , temporarily end the timer interrupt processing.

Here, the starting winning process in step S304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 13.

The execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a win/fail random number storage area for storing the value of the win/fail random number counter C1, a variable time random number storage area for storing the value of the variable time selection counter C2, and a suspended fluctuation. A starting winning determination flag is provided for determining whether the display is based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, either the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b.

In addition, in the special fluctuation reservation area in this embodiment, apart from the area for storing the values of the above-mentioned win/fail random number counter C1 and fluctuation time selection counter C2, in the win/fail lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, "jackpot" is included. A jackpot flag indicating that you have won ``, a losing flag indicating that you have won, a long small win flag indicating that you have won a ``long small win,'' a short flag that indicates that you have won a short small win. A small hit occurrence flag is provided. In addition, a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, and a 7-second variation flag indicating the variation time on the special display device 43 are provided.

First, in step S501, the value of the holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings of the variable display triggered by the entry of game balls into the first and second starting winning parts 33a and 33b is set to an upper limit value (in this embodiment, " 4). If a negative determination is made in step S501, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the game ball has won the first starting winning section 33a based on the detection information of the first starting winning switch 224a. If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process moves to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S502, the process advances to step S503, and the hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the respective values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 are stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas in the special variable holding area. Here, the predetermined condition may be satisfied when various counter values corresponding to a jackpot are stored in the special fluctuation holding area during a predetermined jackpot state. Alternatively, during a predetermined jackpot state, when various counter values corresponding to a jackpot are stored in the special fluctuation holding area, the predetermined condition may be satisfied at a predetermined rate, for example, with a probability of 60%.

In step S505, the starting winning determination flag of the holding area in which the values of the winning/losing random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are stored is turned on. In addition, the starting winning prize determination flag of this embodiment is set to ON when the suspended variable display is based on the ball entering the first starting winning part 33a, and is set to ON when the ball entering the second starting winning part 33b. is set to off if the

In the subsequent step S506, a win/fail determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a "small win" or "big win". Note that details of the validity determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S507, a variation time determination process is performed to determine the variation time in the special display device 43 based on the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area. Note that details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S508, the first command setting process is performed. In addition, in the starting command, the stored fluctuation information (predetermined information used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) is determined whether the ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b. It includes information indicating whether the variation information is based on the base, information indicating "small win" or "big win", information indicating variation time, etc., and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step S201). be done.

Here, details of the validity determination process in step S506 will be explained with reference to FIG. 14. In this embodiment, the type of small win (long small win, short small win) is also determined in the success/failure determination process.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches "0", which is the value corresponding to "jackpot". In addition, during a predetermined jackpot state, various counter values corresponding to specific jackpots, such as certain variable jackpots, which may be given a specific game mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode after the end of the jackpot, are stored in the special fluctuation holding area. A predetermined condition may be satisfied if the Then, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot condition will occur, the jackpot occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and then the process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches "1", which is the value corresponding to "miss". Determine whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined that it is "missing", the missing flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined that it is a "long small win", in step S5105, the value of the win/fail random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is changed to "long small win". It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "win". If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the long small hit occurrence flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5105, that is, if it is determined that it is a "short small win", the short small win occurrence flag is turned on in step S5107, and then this process is ended.

Next, the variation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. 15. The function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S507 constitutes the first fluctuation pattern selection means in this embodiment.

First, in step S5201, it is determined whether the mode is a time reduction mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, a 0.1 second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds is set to ON. , this process ends. In other words, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the corresponding variation display is uniformly set to 0.1 seconds, regardless of whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot, a long small win, a short small win, or a loss.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined in step S5203 whether or not a long small hit occurrence flag was set in the right/fail determination process that was performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5203, that is, if it is determined that it is a "long small win," in step S5204, the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to "0. , 1''.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is one of "2 to 9", in step S5205, the variable time of the variable display performed on the special display device 43 After turning on the 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that the time is 3 seconds, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, in step S5206, the 2-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds is turned on, and then this process is performed. finish.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S5203, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short small hit occurrence flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5207, that is, if a "short small hit" occurs, then in step S5208, the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is set to "0, 1". Determine whether it matches either of the two.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5205, a 3-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 3 seconds is set on, and then this process is performed. finish. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5208 is negative, in step S5206, the 2-second fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds is set on, and then this process is performed. finish. That is, the possibility that a longer fluctuation time (3 seconds) will be selected is higher when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S5207, that is, in the case of a "jackpot" or "miss", in step S5209, a 7 seconds display is displayed indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 7 seconds. After turning on the second fluctuation flag, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, after the process in step S508, or if a negative determination is made in step S502, in step S509, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the second starting winning section 33b. This is determined based on the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the hold counter Na is incremented by 1 in step S510.

In the following step S511, each value of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the first area among the vacant holding areas of the special variable holding area. In step S512, a validity determination process is performed. Note that the validity determination process in step S512 is the same as the validity determination process in step S506 above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the following step S513, a fluctuation time determination process is performed. Note that the validity determination process in step S513 is the same as the variation time determination process in step S507, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a first command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passing process in step S305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 16.

In step S601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the through gate display device 41 is counted in step S602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than 4, the process advances to step S603, and the normal hold is performed. The counter Nc is incremented by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the input assist random number counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas in the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended.

Next, the ball entry counting process in step S306 will be explained with reference to FIG. 17. First, in step S7201, a game ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 by determining whether or not there is a detection of the internal ball entry detection switch 437 provided at the entrance part 601b of the introduction passage 601. Determine whether or not it was done. If a negative determination is made in step S7201, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7201, a ball entry command is set for the sub-control device 262 to notify that the game ball has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. When the sub-control device 262 side receives a ball entering command, it outputs a ball entering sound effect and lights and blinks a ball entering lamp (not shown) to inform the player that a ball has entered. It is configured to notify.

Thereafter, in step S7203, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter for grasping the number of game balls in the internal area 401 is incremented by 1. In the subsequent step S7204, a monitoring timer setting process that is taken into consideration in the remaining ball monitoring process is performed. In this embodiment, each time the internal ball entry detection switch 437 is detected, the monitoring timer is set to "10000". Furthermore, even if a predetermined numerical value has already been set in the monitoring timer, "10000" is overwritten. Note that the monitoring timer is decremented by 1 in normal processing (remaining ball monitoring processing in step S212 to be described later) performed every 4 mec. After step S7204, this process ends.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be explained with reference to FIG. 18. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether there is detection information of a game ball by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738. If a negative determination is made in step S7301, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7301, it is determined in step S7302 whether or not a jackpot state is in progress, with reference to a jackpot flag to be described later. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, the process is immediately terminated. That is, during the jackpot state, if a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 via the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461, , even if a game ball enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730) and the game ball is detected by the second special entry ball detection switch 738, The right to generate a jackpot condition is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, in step S7303, the special winning flag indicating that the first special ball entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball entering detection switch 738 has detected the ball entering has already been set. Determine whether it is turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, the process ends immediately. That is, in a state where it has already been decided to generate a jackpot state (the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted), the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 is activated again. Even if a ball is detected, the corresponding jackpot will be invalidated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7303 is negative, the special winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then the process ends.

In this embodiment, at the stage when the first special ball entry detection switch 461 detects the ball entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and it is not clear what type of jackpot state will be given. Since this has not yet been determined, the jackpot state is configured not to start until the type is determined.

Similarly, at the stage when the second special ball entry detection switch 738 detects the ball entry, the right to generate a jackpot state is only granted, and the game ball has not yet entered the 15R ball entry opening 731. Therefore, the jackpot state is not started until the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 and the "15 round jackpot" is confirmed.

Next, the non-special winning process in step S308 will be explained with reference to FIG. 19. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462. That is, it is determined whether or not the game ball is ejected to the outside of the central winning unit 37 (inner area 401) via the out passage 428. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1 in step S7402, and then this process is ended.

Next, the special gate passing process in step S309 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 20.

In step S7501, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the special gate 650 based on the detection information of the special gate switch 651. If a negative determination is made in step S7501, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7501, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, then in step S7502, it is determined whether or not a third display flag, which will be described later, is on, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650. It is determined whether or not the display device 44 is displaying a variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7502, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7502, it is determined in step S7503 whether or not the accessory in operation flag, which will be described later, is on, that is, whether the movable accessory 722 is in operation (in a protruding state). Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7503, the process is immediately terminated.

As a result, even if a game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or while the movable accessory 722 is in operation, The activation assist lottery is invalidated, and the configuration is such that the right to activate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7503, in step S7504, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in a predetermined operation assist random number storage area set in the RAM 503. do.

In the following step S7505, the special gate passage flag is turned on, and in step S7506, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process is ended.

Next, the type entry process of step S310 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether the special winning flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 detects a ball entry. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7602, a 15R jackpot flag indicating a 15 round jackpot is set on in step S7603. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S7602, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the 7R ball entrance detection switch 735 detects the ball entrance. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7605, a 7R jackpot flag indicating a 7 round jackpot is set on in step S7606. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

If the determination in step S7605 is negative, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 detects the ball entry. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7608, a 3R jackpot flag indicating a 3-round jackpot is set on in step S7609. After that, in step S7604, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is subtracted by 1, and then this process ends.

Next, NMI interrupt processing will be explained. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the Pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step S401, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and starts the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. Its contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Execute wait processing for about seconds. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process moves to step S111 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step S104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step S111 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case as well, the process moves to step S111.

In the process of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112, etc.). That is, in step S112, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step S113, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step S108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared. In step S109, a command is sent to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at the time of power-off, and in step S110, the used register is returned from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the process of steps S201 to S212 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the settings of the special display device 43, second start prize section 33b, etc. updated in the previous process is sent to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to each sub-side. Execute external output processing such as sending to a control device.

For example, when starting a variable display on the effect display device 42, a variable pattern command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262. In other words, the variable pattern command is a command signal output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the production display device 42 to perform a display performance that matches the display performed on the special display device 43. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 that has input the variable pattern command determines the display mode of the effect display device 42 based on the command, and controls the display control device 45 to display the display mode on the effect display device 42. give instructions to

On the other hand, when stopping the variable display on the effect display device 42, a confirmation command is sent to the sub-control device 262. In response, the sub-control device 262 that has input the confirmation command instructs the display control device 45 to end the variable display (display effect) being performed on the effect display device 42 based on the command. put out.

However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, if the jackpot is in progress, or if the right to jackpot has been granted but the jackpot has not yet started, the central winning unit 37 is open. (during a small hit state), the configuration is such that the subtraction process of the first display timer that measures the fluctuation time on the special display device 43 is not performed (see FIG. 23), so if the special display device 43 If ball entry is detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 or the second special ball entry detection switch 738 during the variable display of the effect display device 42 and the special winning flag is turned on, the special winning flag is turned on. The confirmation command will not be sent to the sub-control device 262 until the V winning jackpot related to the flag ends, and will be sent after the jackpot ends.

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the subsequent step S204, a V winning jackpot setting process is executed. In this process, the game ball that entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the first V winning path 427 via the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414, and the game ball enters the first V winning path 427. When the game ball is detected by the special entry ball detection switch 461 or enters the bypass passage 737 via the movable accessory 722 (second V winning passage 730), the game ball is detected by the second special entry ball detection switch 738. Settings are made for jackpots that occur based on the detection of the winnings. The details of this V winning jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special display device 43 and the control contents of the special display device 43 are set, and the hit determination and performance pattern on the performance display device 42 are also set. Details of this first display control process will be described later. Note that the function of the main control device 261 that executes the first display control process constitutes the first display control means in this embodiment.

In step S206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32 and the control content of the variable winning device 32 are set. As a result, when a jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening opening/closing member 32a) is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, a blade member opening/closing process is executed. In this process, the control details of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) of the central winning unit 37 are set. Details of the blade member opening/closing process will be described later.

In step S208, a second display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the through-gate display device 41, the control details of the through-gate display device 41, etc. are set. Details of this second display control processing will be described later.

In step S209, a starting prize winning section control process is executed. In this process, the control details of the starting port opening/closing member 33c of the second starting winning part 33b are set. The details of the starting winning section control process will be described later.

In step S210, a third display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of display is to be performed on the special gate display device 44, the control contents of the special gate display device 44, etc. are set. Details of this third display control process will be described later. Note that the function of the main control device 261 that executes the third display control process constitutes a display control means in this embodiment.

In step S211, accessory drive control processing related to the central winning unit 37 is executed. In this process, drive control processing related to the rotating body unit 410, drive control processing related to the bypass mechanism section 721, drive control processing related to the type distribution mechanism section 741, etc. are performed.

For example, in the drive control process related to the rotating body unit 410, control such as rotating the rotating body 414 counterclockwise at a constant speed is performed, and in the drive control process related to the type distribution mechanism section 741, the first passing Controls such as swinging the plate 744 and the second spanning plate 745 at a predetermined rhythm are performed.

Further, in the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism section 721, control such as making the movable accessory 722 protrude when a predetermined condition is satisfied is performed. Note that details of the drive control process related to the bypass mechanism section 721 (hereinafter referred to as "bypass mechanism control process") will be described later.

In step S212, remaining ball monitoring processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to confirm whether or not a game ball exists in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. Details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step S213, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S214 it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process moves to step S201, and the processes from step S201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S215, where the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example), it is cleared to 0. After this process, the process moves to step S213. In other words, at the time of determination in step S214, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process. will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps S201 to S212 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the random number counter C1).

Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step S216 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S216, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step S217, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step S218. to be memorized. Thereafter, in step S219, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step S220, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step S221, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step S213 is performed at a timing that is the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps S201 to S212, or the end of one cycle of the process in step S215 that is performed within the remaining time. is being executed. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring before data is stored (step S216), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the V winning jackpot setting process in step S204 will be explained with reference to FIG. 22.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether the special winning flag (see special winning processing in FIG. 18) indicating that a game ball has been detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball entering detection switch 738 is on. Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1503, and it is determined whether or not a 15R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, a round number counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds in the jackpot state is set to "15", and then the process moves to step S1505.

In step S1505, the special winning flag is turned off, and the jackpot flag indicating that the jackpot is in progress is set on. Thereafter, in the subsequent step S1506, the first variable flag indicating that the opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 is in progress is set to ON, and in step S1507, the first variable timer used for the opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 32 is set to ON. 7500'', and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to ``8'', and the process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1503, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not a 7R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1509, the round number counter is set to "7" in step S1510, and then the process moves to step S1505, where the same processing as described above is performed.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1513 whether or not a 3R jackpot flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is set on. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1513, the round number counter is set to "3" in step S1514, and then the process proceeds to step S1505, where the same processing as described above is performed.

Next, the first display control process in step S205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23.

First, in step S801, a jackpot flag is referred to to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the jackpot is in progress, the process ends immediately. That is, during the jackpot state, a new variable display is not started, and a variable display that has already been started is not ended.

Incidentally, the jackpot state includes the middle of the jackpot state (special game state), the opening period before the start of the jackpot state, and the ending period after the end of the jackpot state. Generally, during the opening period (for example, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a jackpot on the special display device 43 until the first opening starts on the variable winning device 32), A display notifying the start of the jackpot condition is performed on the performance display device 42. On the other hand, during the ending period (a predetermined period after the opening of the final round is finished in the variable prize winning device 32), a display is performed on the effect display device 42 to notify the end of the jackpot state and the mode to be awarded after the jackpot.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether or not the special winning flag is on. The special winning flag is set to ON when a game ball is detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461 or the second special ball entering detection switch 738 (see step S7304 of the special winning processing), and the jackpot flag is set to ON. When it is turned on, it is turned off (see step S1505 of the V winning jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, the process is immediately terminated. In other words, in a state where the right to generate a jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not started yet, a new fluctuating display will not be started, and a fluctuating display that has already started will not be ended. .

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the small win opening flag is set on. As will be described in detail later, the small win open flag is turned on when the wing member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is open, that is, during the small win state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, the process ends immediately. That is, while the central winning unit 37 is open (during a small winning state), a new variable display is not started, and a variable display that has already been started is not ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, then in step S804, the setting status of the first display flag is checked to determine whether or not the special display device 43 is undergoing variable display. When the first displaying flag is set to on, it is considered that a variable display is being performed, and when the first displaying flag is turned off, it is considered that a variable display is not being performed. Although the details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting the variable display on the special display device 43 (see step S808), and is turned on when the variable display on the special display device 43 is stopped (see step S808). (see step S812).

If a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, the jackpot state is not in progress, the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, and the central winning unit 37 is being opened (small win state). If the special display device 43 is not in the state of change) or is not in the process of variable display on the special display device 43, the process advances to step S805, and the value of the hold counter Na that counts the number of hold times in the change display triggered by the entry of the ball into the starting winning section 33 is determined. Determine whether it is greater than 0. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if no variable display is stored on hold, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one variable display is stored on hold, 1 is subtracted from the value of the hold counter Na in step S806.

In the following step S807, processing for shifting the data stored in the special fluctuation holding area is executed. This shift process is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and from the second pending area to the pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area. In addition, in this shift process, not only the values of the win/fail random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2, but also the values of the jackpot occurrence flag, the miss flag, the long small win occurrence flag, the short small win occurrence flag, the 2 second fluctuation flag, and the 3 second The on/off settings of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag are also shifted.

In the following step S808, variable display setting processing is performed. Here, details of the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 24.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether the fluctuation information corresponds to a "jackpot" by determining whether or not the jackpot occurrence flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set on. As a modified example, in the same way as the winning/failure judgment process of the starting winning process, the winning/failure random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is determined to be a value corresponding to a jackpot by once again considering the winning/failure judgment table. It may be determined whether or not the value is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if you win a "big hit" in the winning/failure lottery, then in step S902, a direct hit indicating that you have won a "jackpot" in the winning/failure lottery (a "direct jackpot"). Set the jackpot flag on. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S903, in step S904, a fluctuation pattern that results in a jackpot (jackpot fluctuation pattern) is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is sent to send the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) also to the sub-control device 262. Configure settings. In the following step S905, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. Note that the first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. . After step S905, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S903, in step S906, a fluctuation pattern that shortens the fluctuation time and becomes a jackpot (jackpot shortening pattern) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation information) is transmitted to the sub-control device. The variable pattern command is set so that it can also be sent to H.262. In the subsequent step S907, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S907, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S901, in step S908, it is determined whether or not the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is "missing" by determining whether the outgoing flag in the execution area is set on. In addition, as a modified example, in the same way as the win/fail determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined whether the win/fail random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1" or not, thereby determining whether or not the win is "lost". It may also be determined.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S908, that is, if the result is "missing", it is determined in step S909 whether or not the 7-second fluctuation flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S909, in step S910, a fluctuation pattern that is an outlier (an outlier fluctuation pattern) is determined, and a fluctuation pattern command is set to transmit the fluctuation pattern to the sub-control device 262 as well. I do. Thereafter, in step S911, a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set in the first display timer, and then the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a fluctuation pattern that results in a failure by shortening the fluctuation time (deviation shortened pattern) is determined, and the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is transmitted to the sub-control device. The variable pattern command is set so that it can also be sent to H.262. In the following step S913, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set for the first display timer used for fluctuation control of the special display device 43. After step S913, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is a "small hit", the blade release flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is on. In addition, as a modified example, in the same manner as the propriety determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined once again whether or not the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any one of "2 to 21". It may also be determined whether or not a "long small win" has been won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "long small win", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second fluctuation flag in the execution area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S916, in step S917, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small win 3 seconds). A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S918, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S919, the opening/closing control timer used to control opening/closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 3 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S916, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second fluctuation flag of the execution area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a two-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, a fluctuation pattern (long small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and results in a long small win is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined. A variation pattern command is set in order to send the same to the sub-control device 262 as well.

In the following step S925, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S926, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 0.1 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S915, that is, if it is a "short small win", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second variation flag in the execution area is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S927, in step S928, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (a variation pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (short small win 3 seconds). A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S929, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Further, in step S930, an opening/closing control timer used to control opening/closing of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 3 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S927, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S931, in step S932, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern command is set in order to determine a variation pattern (variation pattern) and also send the variation pattern to the sub-control device 262.

In the following step S933, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500", which corresponds to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a two-second variable display is performed on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a fluctuation pattern (short small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the fluctuation time and results in a short small win is determined, and further, the fluctuation pattern (variation information) is determined. A variation pattern command is set in order to send the same to the sub-control device 262 as well.

In the following step S936, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S937, the opening/closing control timer is set to "25", which corresponds to 0.1 second. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after a variable display is performed for 0.1 seconds on the special display device 43. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag indicating that variable display is in progress on the special display device 43 is set on. After step S938, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 23, if an affirmative determination is made in step S804, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process advances to step S809, and a first display timer subtraction process is performed. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 1 every 4 msec.

Next, the process proceeds to step S810, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, taking into account the value of the first display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S810.

If a negative determination is made in step S810, in step S811, a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the special display device 43, and the present process is ended. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal process. Specifically, the settings are made so that the combinations of lamps to be lit are sequentially switched. As a result, variable display (switching display) on the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S810, that is, if it is time to stop the variable display on the special display device 43, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the following step S813, stop display settings are made to perform a stop display on the special display device 43. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a "jackpot", the plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are displayed in a stopped state (for example, lit for only a few seconds) in a manner (combination) corresponding to the "jackpot", and a "miss" is displayed. If it is a "miss", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a "miss", if it is a "long small win", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a "long small win", and if it is a "short small win", it will be stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a "long small win". The display is stopped in a manner corresponding to a "short hit".

Furthermore, in the stop display setting process related to step S813, a setting process is performed to send a confirmation command to the sub-control device 262 to perform a stop display of the effect display device 42.

Then, in the subsequent step S814, after performing discrimination information setting processing, the present processing ends.

Here, the discrimination information setting process will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 25. First, in step S1001, it is determined whether the direct hit jackpot flag is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the win/fail lottery, jackpot settings are performed from step S1002 onwards.

Specifically, in step S1002, a jackpot flag indicating whether or not a jackpot state is in progress as a special gaming state is set on. In the subsequent step S1003, a first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable prize winning device 32 is in an open state is set on. In this embodiment, when the first variable flag is turned on, the variable prize winning device 32 is opened.

Subsequently, in step S1004, a first variable timer is set, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32, and indicates whether a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this example, "7500", which corresponds to 30 seconds, is set as a value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum open time per round (the longest time that the variable winning device 32 is in the open state) is 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter indicating the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the special prize state has occurred, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 is executed) is set. Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as a value corresponding to "direct jackpot".

In the subsequent step S1006, a winning counter is set to count the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32. In this example, "8" indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is set as the value. After that, this process ends. In addition, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see step S301 in FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and the ball has entered the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there has been, the value of the prize winning counter is decremented by 1.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the win/fail lottery, the process moves to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not a variation counter is set. The variation counter is a means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In this embodiment, the time saving mode is such that after the end of the jackpot state, the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43, and as described later, "4" is set as the counter value after the end of the jackpot. .

Here, if the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the fluctuation number counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation number counter is subtracted by 1, and step The process moves to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether the counter value of the variation counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the fourth variable display after the end of the jackpot (after the time reduction mode is applied). Here, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", processing is performed to turn off the time reduction mode flag in step S1010, processing to turn on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the variable prize winning device control process in step S206 will be explained with reference to FIG. 26.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot by considering the jackpot flag. If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1201, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1202. In the following step S1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S1204, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0". That is, in step S1204, it is determined whether or not the open time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, remains.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process advances to step S1205, and it is determined whether or not the value of the prize winning counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 has reached a prescribed number per round (eight balls in this example). If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing to close the variable prize winning device 32 (timing to end the round) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1204 or step S1205, the process advances to step S1206, and it is determined whether the counter value of the round number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened) has reached the specified number of times.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1206, end setting processing is performed in step S1207, and this processing ends. Details of the termination setting process will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S1206, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the predetermined number, round forwarding processing is performed in step S1208, and the present processing ends. In the round feed process, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1. In other words, the opening/closing process of the variable prize winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of rounds executed reaches a prescribed number of times set in advance. Further, in the round sending process, the first variable flag is turned off and a wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set in the first variable timer.

If a negative determination is made in step S1203, that is, if it is during the interval period between rounds, the process advances to step S1209, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1209, that is, if the interval period has ended and it is time to start the next round, round start processing is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round (in this example, "7500") is set to the first variable timer, and the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round is set to the first variable timer, and the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round is set to the first variable timer. Set the maximum number of winnings per round (in this example, "8"). If a negative determination is made in step S1209, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is placed in an open state. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the variable winning device 32 is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state.

Here, the termination setting process in step S1207 will be explained with reference to FIG. 27. First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time saving mode flag is set to ON. That is, in this embodiment, after the jackpot state of all the jackpot types of "direct hit jackpot" and "V prize winning jackpot ("15 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "3 round jackpot") ends. , and is configured to be provided with a time saving mode.

After step S1303, in step S1304, the normal mode flag is turned off, and in step S1305, the variation counter is set to "4", and then the process moves to step S1306. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the time reduction mode is maintained until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing is performed to turn off various jackpot flags. After step S1306, this process ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. First, in step S1801, it is determined whether the blade opening flag (see step S914 of the variable display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, the process ends immediately.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not a small hit opening flag indicating that the blade member 404 is being opened is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the blade member 404 is to be released due to a "small win" win, the process moves to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". As mentioned above, when it is determined that a "small win" has been won during the variable display setting process, the opening/closing control timer is set to a time corresponding to the same time as the variation time of the variable display performed on the special display device 43. (See step S919, step S923, step S926, step S930, step S934, and step S937). Therefore, at the same time as the corresponding variable display ends, an affirmative determination is made in this determination.

If a negative determination is made in step S1803, the value of the opening/closing control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1804, and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1803, that is, if the timing to release the blade member 404 has arrived, the small winning opening flag is turned on in step S1805, and the blade member 404 is opened in step S1806. Perform processing to make it open.

Thereafter, in step S1807, it is determined whether the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1807, a value "375" corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set for the opening/closing control timer in step S1808, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1807, a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the opening/closing control timer in step S1809, and this processing is ended.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the opening/closing control timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1810, the value of the opening/closing control timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1811, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1810, that is, if the timing to close the blade member 404 has arrived, the small hit opening flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade opening flag is turned off in step S1813. Then, in step S1814, the blade member 404 is brought into a closed state, and then the present process ends. Therefore, the function of executing the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 is capable of executing the opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means in this embodiment a predetermined number of times (capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entry means is opened in a predetermined manner). This constitutes an opening/closing control means.

Next, the second display control process in step S208 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29.

First, in step S2101, the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the through-gate display device 41 is in the process of variable display is checked to determine whether the through-gate display device 41 is in the process of variable display (switching display). Determine whether or not. Specifically, when the second displaying flag is on, it is considered that the through gate display device 41 is performing a variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the through gate display device 41 It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, in which the fluctuating display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process advances to step S2102, and it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0, the process advances to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that a condition for performing a variable display (switching display) on the through gate display device 41 is satisfied. Specifically, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the through gate display device 41, and is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the through gate display device 41. It will be considered.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the variable display on the through gate display device 41 is different between the time shortening mode, which is a high ball entry state, and the normal mode. A value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set, and in the normal mode, a value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds is set for the second display timer. Among the jackpots, for example, a specific jackpot gaming state or an opening period in which a specific gaming mode such as a high probability mode or a high support mode can be provided after the end of a probability-variable jackpot may be set as a predetermined open gaming state. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "1250" is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

Then, after step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends. Furthermore, if a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing of the next normal processing based on the settings in the start setting processing, A variable display (switching display) is started on the through gate display device 41.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if variable display is being performed on the through gate display device 41, the process advances to step S2106, and a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process advances to step S2107, and it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0". That is, it is determined whether the variable time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the second display flag is turned off in step S2108, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display on the through gate display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal process.

Note that, as described above, it is determined whether or not the winning result is based on the value of the input assist random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area. Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the input assist random number counter C3, "1 to 8" are the winning values.

Next, the process advances to step S2110, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process is performed to open and close the second start prize part 33b (start opening/closing member 33c). Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is discrimination information for determining whether or not the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning part 33b, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a specified time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the second starting winning part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is different between the time shortening mode which is a high ball entry state and the normal mode. A value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the timer, and in the normal mode, a value "100" corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "100" is set to the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2107 is negative, in step S2111, a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41, and the process ends. Then, based on the settings of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the through gate display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal process. Specifically, the settings are made so that the combinations of lamps to be lit are sequentially switched. As a result, variable display (switching display) of the through gate display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the startup winning section control process in step S209 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 30.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the second starting prize part 33b (starting port opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the second start winning section 33b is in the closed state), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is assumed that the second start winning part 33b is in an open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2203, in which it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the second variable timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step S2203 when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process moves to step S2204, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

In addition, based on the on/off state of the second variable flag, various control signals are outputted to the second start winning part 33b in the external output process of the next normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a drive signal to open the starting port opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting winning part 33b (starting port solenoid), and the second starting winning part 33b is in the open state. Become. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal to close the starting port opening/closing member 33c is output to the second starting prize part 33b, and the second starting winning part 33b is in a closed state.

Next, the third display control process in step S210 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31.

First, in step S2301, the setting status of the third displaying flag indicating whether or not the special gate display device 44 is in the process of variable display is checked to determine whether the special gate display device 44 is in the process of variable display (switching display). Determine whether or not. Specifically, when the third display flag is on, it is considered that the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display, and when the third display flag is off, the special gate display device 44 It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, in which the fluctuating display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, the process advances to step S2302, and it is determined whether the special gate passing flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step S2302, that is, if the special gate passage flag is not on, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the variable display is not in progress and the special gate passing flag is on, the process advances to step S2303 and the special gate passing flag is turned off. In the following step S2304, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that a condition for performing a variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44 is satisfied. Specifically, the third display flag is turned on, and a third display timer setting process is performed. The third display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the special gate display device 44, and is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the special gate display device 44. It will be considered.

In this embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state is in the time reduction mode or the normal mode, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display is uniformly set to 1 second, which corresponds to 1 second for the third display timer. The value "250" is set.

Then, after step S2304 ends, the third display control process ends. Note that, based on the settings in the start setting process, when a control signal to start a variable display (switching display) is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output process of the normal process, A variable display (switching display) is started on the special gate display device 44.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2301, that is, if variable display is being performed on the special gate display device 44, the process advances to step S2306, and a third display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the third display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the process advances to step S2307, and it is determined whether the count value of the third display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. If the determination in step S2307 is affirmative, the third display flag is turned off in step S2308, and in step S2309, a stop display setting is made to perform a stop display on the special gate display device 44. Then, based on the settings of the stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the next external output process in the normal process.

As described above, it is determined whether or not the prize is won based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the operation assist random number storage area. Specifically, among the numerical values 0 to 19 of the operation assist random number counter C4, "1 to 15" are the winning values.

Next, the process advances to step S2310, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory operating flag is turned on and the operating time is set in the accessory operating timer.

The accessory in operation flag is discrimination information for determining whether or not the movable accessory 722 is in operation.

The accessory activation timer is a means for measuring the operating time (remaining time) of the movable accessory 722, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a prescribed time has elapsed from the start of the operation. In this embodiment, a value "1000" corresponding to 4 seconds is set for the accessory activation timer.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2307, then in step S2111 a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44, and the present process ends. Then, based on the settings of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special gate display device 44 in the external output processing in the next normal process. Specifically, the settings are made so that the combinations of lamps to be lit are sequentially switched. As a result, variable display (switching display) on the special gate display device 44 is realized at the timing of the third display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Next, the bypass mechanism control process performed in the accessory drive control process of step S211 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether the accessory in operation flag indicating whether the movable accessory 722 is in an operating state is on. Here, if it is determined that the accessory object in operation flag is not on (the movable accessory object 722 is in the housed state), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2401, that is, if the accessory operating flag is on, it is assumed that the movable accessory 722 is in a protruding state, and the accessory operating timer subtraction process is performed in step S2402. Each time this process is performed, the value of the accessory activation timer is decremented by one.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2403, in which it is determined whether or not the specified projection time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the accessory activation timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step S2403 when the predetermined projection time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the accessory activation timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2403 is affirmative, the process moves to step S2404, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step S2404, a process of turning off the accessory operating flag is performed.

Based on the on/off status of the accessory operating flag, various control signals are output to the bypass mechanism section 721 (movable accessory solenoid 725) in the next external output process of normal processing. When the accessory operating flag is on, a drive signal that turns the movable accessory solenoid 725 into an excited state is output, and the movable accessory 722 becomes in a protruding state. On the other hand, when the accessory operating flag is off, a drive signal that turns the movable accessory solenoid 725 into a de-energized state is output, and the movable accessory 722 is placed in the housed state.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process in step S212 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. First, in step S7101, in order to specify the number of game balls remaining in the internal area 401, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is "0".

As described above, the "remaining ball monitoring counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the internal ball entering detection switch 437, and is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the internal ball entering detection switch 437, and the non-special ball entering detection switch 462, the 15R ball entering detection switch 734, and the 7R ball entering detection switch. 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736, and special gate switch 651, 1 is subtracted based on the detection.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, that is, if there are no game balls remaining in the internal area 401, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7101, in step S7102, the value of a monitoring timer for determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ball last entered the internal area 401. It is determined whether or not is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 in step S7103, and then the process ends. In this embodiment, when a ball enters the inner area 401, "10000" is set in the monitoring timer. Therefore, the monitoring timer becomes "0" 40 seconds after the last ball enters the inner area 401. In addition, in this embodiment, the time from when a game ball enters the internal area 401 until it is ejected (specifically, from when a game ball is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437 to when the game ball is ejected) The time required for detection by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462, 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, 3R ball entry detection switch 736, or special gate switch 651 is approximately 8 seconds to 30 seconds. seconds.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7102 is affirmative, that is, the value of the remaining ball monitoring counter is " 0'', it is assumed that a ball jam has occurred in the internal area 401, and error notification processing is performed in step S7104. For example, control is performed such as lighting the error display lamp 104, outputting an error notification sound, and prohibiting the shooting of game balls. After that, this process ends.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be explained. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt process will first be explained with reference to FIG. 34, and then the main process will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step S3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step S3002, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in order to remember that the command was sent. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process executed when the command is received, but for example, the timer shown in FIG. In interrupt processing, before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 and the command is executed. The reception flag may be turned on, and if a command has not been received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in the subsequent step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step S3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step S3107, and in the following step S3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, it is determined whether the backup is valid or not. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if an abnormality in backup is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization processing from step S3115 onward. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process moves to step S3114 to permit interrupts.

On the other hand, on condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step S3110, the information on the occurrence of the power cut is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step S3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step S3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step S3123 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step S3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step S3124. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step S3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and the contents of the registers are saved in the backup area 513a. RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that in the process of step S3122, information on the occurrence of power-off is checked after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3201, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed.

Here, the command determination process in step S3201 will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 34).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, this process ends because no new command has been received from the main controller 261. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing in steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission for payout of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step S3307, the command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process in step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of the RAM 513 (step S3308) and set the initial value of the RAM 513 (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step S3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step S3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 36. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step S3205, the lower tray full state or lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full status setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray full status is released. Perform state settings. Further, in step S3206, a tank ball absent state (bulb out state) or a tank ball free state (ball present state) is set in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, and the special setting for the no-tank-bulb state is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank-bulb state and the no-tank-bulb release state are performed. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step S3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the dispensing motor 358a is driven to execute the ball discharging process, on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball is not in a state where it is not possible to dislodge the ball, and that the ball discharging operation has not started. In the following step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, the normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the variation information included in the preceding command in a pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553. In addition, as mentioned above, the starting command includes whether the variable display is triggered by the ball entering the starting winning section 33, the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b (starting winning determination flag). setting), information indicating whether the fluctuation information corresponds to a jackpot (setting of the jackpot occurrence flag), information indicating whether the fluctuation display corresponds to a long small win or a short small win (long small win occurrence flag or short small win). information indicating whether or not the fluctuating display corresponds to a miss (setting of a hit occurrence flag), information indicating whether the fluctuating display corresponds to a miss (setting a miss flag), and the fluctuating time of the fluctuating display (2 second fluctuating flag, 3 second fluctuating flag, 7 second fluctuating flag). flag, and information indicating the setting of the 0.1 second fluctuation flag).

Further, the hold information storage area, like the special variable hold area of the main controller 261, includes four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, variation information included in the preceding command is stored in chronological order according to the reception history of the preceding command based on the variation display (information stored in the special variation pending area). By employing this configuration, the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation reservation area of the main control device 261.

Here, the pending information storage process in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether a preceding command has been received (whether or not the preceding command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If the determination in step S4101 is affirmative, in step S4102, a pending counter Np that counts the number of pending changes in the variable information stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by 1.

In the following step S4103, the fluctuation information including information on whether or not it is a jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small win, information on fluctuation time, etc. included in the first command is stored in the first vacant holding area of the holding information storage area. Store in area. Thereafter, in step S4104, the values of various counters used in determining the contents of the effect display are obtained, and the values are stored in the same holding area where the fluctuation information is stored.

After performing the process in step S4104, or if a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process moves to step S4105, and it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern command has been received (or whether the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). whether or not). If the determination in step S4105 is affirmative, one is subtracted from the value of the pending counter Np in step S4106.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the holding information storage area to the execution area side, from the first holding area to the execution area. , the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second reservation area → first reservation area, third reservation area → second reservation area, fourth reservation area → third reservation area.

After performing the process in step S4107, or if a negative determination is made in step S4105, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 38, after step S3903 or if a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process moves to step S3904, and it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905; on the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3911.

In step S3905, updating processing of various counters used in determining the contents of the effect display is executed. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, basically, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 upon reception of the variable pattern command. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined here. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates various types of effects (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

Note that the display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of a variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during a jackpot, and the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. The necessary display commands are generated each time based on the information. Normally, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 can be roughly divided into a group of normal variable data, a group of reach effect data, etc., and basically each data constituting these data groups is linked to the variable time timer. By sequentially outputting the data in accordance with a predetermined time order based on the data, display effects are performed according to various fluctuation patterns. For example, the normal variation data group consists of normal variation data 1, normal variation data 2, ..., normal variation data m, and the reach effect data group consists of reach effect data 1, reach effect data 2, ..., reach effect data. n, data output is performed sequentially in the order of normal fluctuation data 1 → 2 → ... → m with the start of normal fluctuation, and then, with the start of reach performance, reach performance data 1 → 2 → Data output is performed sequentially in the order of ...→n.

The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display etc. on the effect display device 42. Note that once the variable pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the effect display is continued under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the confirmation command is received. Then, when the confirmation command is received, the variable display on the effect display device 42 is stopped.

In step S3906, it is also confirmed whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated, and if the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when "4" is set in the variation counter in the termination setting process, or when the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in the discrimination information setting process, a command containing that fact is mainly used. The command information is output from the control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 is configured to display the remaining number of times in the time reduction mode on the effect display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, in step S3906, if the sub-control device 262 receives an operation notice command output from the main control device 261 based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, the movable accessory 722 is activated. It may also be configured to perform an operation warning performance that foretells that it is extremely hot time.

For example, the movable accessory 722 is better when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603 or by the effect of notifying that the movable accessory 722 will operate after how many seconds. There will be performances to notify you that it will be activated at certain times.

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, lighting patterns of lamps and electric decorations are set in order to synchronize with the presentation performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display presentation performed by the presentation display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the performance performed by the central winning unit 37 and the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. Further, when commands related to audio, such as notification of error occurrence, are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo screen that is set to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed without a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 being performed on the effect display device 42) Performs other processing such as control settings for display).

In step 3910, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings in steps S3905 to 3909. For example, when causing the effect display device 42 to perform a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45.

After the processes of steps S3905 to S3910, which are performed every 1 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in the above step S3904, the process moves to step S3911, and it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3912, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step S3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3913. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the game ball launched into the gaming area enters the starting winning section 33 (the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b), and When a small win is won in the lottery based on the entered ball, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 opens and closes, and the ball entering opening 403 remains open for a predetermined time.

When the ball entry opening 403 is in the open state, the game ball that enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 through the ball entry opening 403 passes through the introduction passage 601 to the fall passage 602. You will be guided to.

The destination of the game ball that has fallen down the falling path 602 is a normal guide path 604 that can be guided to the win/fail lottery area 407 or a special guide path 605 that can be guided to the accessory operation lottery area 409 by the route distribution member 603. be distributed to.

However, under normal conditions, the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the right and closes the special guide path 605 on the right side, so the game ball falling down the falling path 602 is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side. It will be destroyed.

Then, when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604, the route distribution member 603 is tilted to the left for a predetermined period of time due to the force received from the game ball that comes into contact with it. Therefore, if there is a game ball falling down the falling path 602 at this timing, the game ball will be guided to the special guide path 605.

The game balls guided to the normal guide path 604 are guided to the win/fail lottery area 407, and their destinations are sorted by the rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414). Here, when a game ball enters the first V winning passage 427 and the game ball is detected by the first special ball entering detection switch 461, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) is granted. The Rukoto.

Thereafter, the game ball detected by the first special ball entry detection switch 461 is guided to the type lottery area 408, and is used to determine the jackpot type. Then, after the jackpot type (number of rounds) is determined here, the jackpot state starts.

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the special guide path 605 is guided to the accessory activation lottery area 409 and passes through the special gate 650. Then, when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 of the special gate 650, an activation assist lottery is performed, and if the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 is activated for a predetermined time.

When the movable accessory 722 is activated and protrudes from the stage portion 432, the normal guide path 604 and the bypass passage 737 are brought into communication via the second V winning passage 730 within the movable accessory 722.

When a game ball enters the second V winning passage 730 while the movable accessory 722 is in operation, the game ball is guided to the bypass passage 737, and the game ball is detected by the second special ball entry detection switch 738. By doing so, the right to generate a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) will be granted.

Thereafter, when the game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731 via the bypass passage 737, the 15R jackpot starts.

In other words, when the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state (projecting state), the game ball guided to the normal guide path 604 directly enters the 15R without going through the rotating body unit 410 and the type sorting mechanism section 741. It will be guided to the ball mouth 731.

The main effects of this embodiment will be described below. As described above, in this embodiment, by providing the movable accessory 722 in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area 401. Particularly in this embodiment, when the movable accessory 722 is activated, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the expectation of the occurrence of a V-winning jackpot. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball is detected at the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, an operation assist that determines whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is provided. A lottery is held, and the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate if a winner is won in the operation assist lottery.

As a result, the movable accessory 722 does not move regularly or continuously, and does not move every time when the special gate switch 651 detects a ball entering the ball. It is possible to suppress monotony of the performance and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable accessory 722.

In addition, by providing the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 with an opportunity ball entering means (special gate 650) that detects the movement opportunity of the movable accessory 722, based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area 401, Since it is configured to determine whether or not the movable accessory 722 will be in an advantageous state, the player will be able to pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, further improving interest. can be achieved.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the special gate 650 is discharged outside the internal area 401, and is configured to be unable to flow down (ball cannot enter) into the first V winning passage 427 or the like. If the game ball passing through the special gate 650 is configured to flow down toward the first V winning passage 427, etc., there is a risk that the timing at which the movable accessory 722 acts on the game ball will always be constant. There is. As a result, the result of the action of the movable accessory 722 will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable accessory 722 are likely to be carried out. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the first V winning passage 427 etc. via the normal guide passage 604 without passing through the special gate 650 may be obstructed. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the game ball passing through the special gate 650 and the game ball on which the movable accessory 722 acts are always different, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the various problems described above. can.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is guided to the normal guide path 604 that can guide the destination to the winning/losing lottery area 407, or the accessory operation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) is provided with a route distribution member 603 that distributes the route to a special guide path 605 that can guide the route to 650).

For example, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, the first game ball that precedes is guided to the normal guide path 604, and the second game ball that follows The ball is guided to a special guide path 605. As a result, when two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, it becomes possible to direct the game balls to both the normal guide path 604 and the special guide path 605, so that the movable accessory 722 The effects of this will be more effective.

However, in this embodiment, under the configuration in which the game ball is fired by the firing device 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds at the time of a "short hit", At the time of a "long small hit", the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. As a result, it is advantageous for the player that a plurality of game balls enter the central winning unit 37 in succession during one open state period in which the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404) is in the open state. The configuration is such that the situation is unlikely to occur frequently.

Under such a configuration, if a plurality of game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 in succession at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404), the action of the movable accessory 722 (assist ), if the configuration is such that the game ball does not win the V prize with a higher probability, the game is started at the stage where multiple game balls do not enter the central winning unit 37 in succession at the same time. There is a risk that people's expectations will fade and interest will decline.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after a predetermined game ball passes through the special gate 650, the varying time of the variable display performed on the special gate display device 44 (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating) ) is set to "1 second", and "4 seconds" is set as the operation time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation.

As a result, for example, other game balls may not enter the central prize unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650, or other game balls may enter the central prize unit 37 together with the game ball that entered the special gate 650. Even if the game ball does not win the V prize, the game balls that enter the central winning unit 37 afterwards are given a chance to win the V prize with a higher probability.

In other words, the probability is higher for game balls other than game balls that entered the central winning unit 37 at the same time as the game ball that passed through the special gate 650 (for example, during one open state period of the blade member 404). The structure is such that you will be given a chance to win a V prize.

More specifically, for example, two game balls enter the internal area 401 during one open state period of the central winning unit 37 (wing member 404), and the first game ball (first identified) enters the internal area 401. The game ball that passed through the entrance section 601b as a region) flows down into the normal guide path 604, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the entrance section 601b next) flows down into the special guide path 605. , After that, when the game ball that has flowed down to the special guide path 605 passes through the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 is activated, at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the normal guide path 604 passes the movable accessory 722, Even if the movable accessory 722 does not operate yet and the game ball that has flown down to the normal guide path 604 does not receive the action (assist) of the movable accessory 722 and does not win a V prize, the center winning unit 37 (wing member During the next open state period of 404), the game ball that entered the internal area 401 (the game ball that passed through the entrance section 601 next) flows down to the normal guide path 604, and due to the action of the movable accessory 722, You will be given a chance to win the V prize.

Of course, in place of the above configuration, the variation time of the variable display performed on the special gate display device 44 (the time until the movable accessory 722 starts operating), the operating time of the movable accessory 722 after the start of operation, etc. , a game in which various setting times are set to times different from the above-mentioned setting times, and a predetermined game ball enters the inner area 401 after a relatively long period of time (for example, one minute or more) after passing through the special gate 650. The ball may flow down into the normal guide path 604, and the action of the movable accessory 722 may provide a chance to win a V prize.

With this configuration, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has passed through the special gate 650, the player can actively try to enter the game ball into the central winning unit 37. It becomes possible to do this. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is of a type in which a jackpot state (direct jackpot) in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning section 33. It has the functions of a gaming machine (so-called former Type 1 Pachinko machine), and a central winning unit 37 that becomes open when a small winning is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning section 33. It has the functions of a type of gaming machine (so-called old type 2 pachinko machine) in which a game ball that enters the unit 37 enters the first V winning passage 427, etc., and a jackpot state (V winning jackpot) occurs. This is a so-called 1 type 2 type mixer.

The present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that is given a predetermined game value. The gaming value includes, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to the player, a special prize state (round) awarded during a jackpot, and a gaming mode such as a high probability mode awarded after the jackpot. In addition to the pachinko machine, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

For example, when a game ball enters the starting winning section 33, without performing a predetermined lottery process (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33. , a type of gaming machine in which the central winning unit 37 is opened and the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 enters the 1V winning passage 427, etc., resulting in a jackpot (so-called old type 2 pachinko). It may be implemented as a machine).

Further, instead of the variable winning device 32, a configuration may be adopted in which a central winning unit 37 as a variable ball entry means opens and closes to generate a jackpot state. In such a case, the configuration may be such that the variable winning device 32 is omitted. In other words, it is a type of game in which a jackpot state occurs in which a predetermined variable ball entry means (big winning opening as a specific area) opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the entry of balls into a predetermined starting ball entry means. In the machine, a movable body may be provided in an internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, the game ball is provided with a variable ball entry means such as a central winning unit 37 that becomes open when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on the ball entering the starting winning section 33, and a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means. The game machine may be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which a specific game value is awarded when a ball enters a special ball entry means such as a V winning hole. That is, in this type of gaming machine, a movable body may be provided in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, in the central winning unit 37 according to the above embodiment, the game ball that enters the left ball entry opening 403 always passes through the left entrance 601b that constitutes the specific area, and enters the right ball entry opening 403. The game ball that enters the specific area always passes through the right entrance part 601b that constitutes the specific area, and the game ball that enters the internal area 401 is detected by either the left or right internal ball entrance that constitutes a predetermined detection means. It is always detected by the switch 437. However, the various configurations related to the specific area and the predetermined detection means, such as the position and number of the specific area and the predetermined detection means, are not limited to the configurations related to the entrance section 601b and the internal ball entry detection switch 437, Other configurations may also be adopted. For example, one or more specific areas or a predetermined detection means may be set as a specific area and an internal ball entry detection switch 437 as a predetermined detection means is set as a specific area. It is also possible to have a configuration in which it is provided at a position different from that of the portion 601b.

Furthermore, in the central winning unit 37, one of the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 (including the pair of left and right blade members 404, the introduction passage 601 and its pair of left and right entrances 601b) may be omitted. good. For example, the ball entry opening 403 on the left side (including the left wing member 404, the left side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the left inlet portion 601b) may be omitted, and the ball entry opening 403 on the right side (including the left wing member 404, the left side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the entrance portion 601b on the left side thereof) may be omitted. 404, the right side portion of the introduction passage 601, and the entrance portion 601b on the right side thereof) may be provided. As a result, there is one ball passage (the right side of the introduction passage 601) through which the game balls can pass one by one and which can guide the game balls one by one to the exit section 601a, which is a specific area provided only in one place. The configuration is provided only for In other words, the game ball that does not pass through the one ball passage cannot enter the inner area 401 through the exit portion 601a. Further, the ball passage (the right side of the introduction passage 601) is provided at a position where only game balls that are fired with a predetermined intensity (hit right) and jump over the center winning unit 37 can pass through.

Instead of or in addition to this, at an outer position (outer position than the blade member 404) on one side (for example, right side) of the left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, the ball entry opening 403 etc. on the one side (one side A ball path (such as a ball path member having a ball path) that can guide game balls one by one to the side blade member 404, one side portion of the introduction path 601, and the entrance portion 601b on that one side is provided. It is also possible to have a different configuration.

In addition, in specific areas such as the exit part 601a and the entrance part 601b of the introduction passage 601, while allowing game balls to pass in a predetermined direction (inner area 401 side), game balls in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction are allowed to pass through. It may be configured to include a regulating means (such as a valve-like member whose state changes from the first state to the second state depending on the force received from the game ball) for regulating the passage of the game ball.

The winning probabilities for various types of lottery (soft lottery processing, mechanical mechanism lottery, etc.) related to the pachinko machine 10 are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. . Furthermore, it goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented as a type of game machine in which the game balls are circulated within the game machine and are not directly paid out to the player, a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the types of jackpot states include a "3 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated three times, a "7 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times, and a "7 round jackpot" in which the special prize state (round) is repeated seven times. ) is repeated 15 times, which is a "15 round jackpot", but this is not limiting, and other jackpot states with different numbers of rounds may occur.

Of course, instead of being a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that only generates one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15-round jackpot).

(c) The configuration of the game mode awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, a time reduction mode is provided in which the time of the variable display (variation time) on the special display device 43 is shortened while the variable display is performed four times on the special display device 43. However, the period for which the time saving mode is applied is not limited to this. For example, the time saving mode may be continued after the jackpot state ends until the next jackpot state occurs.

Furthermore, as the game mode after the end of the jackpot state, instead of or in addition to the time reduction mode, a high probability mode or the like may be provided in which the probability of winning the jackpot state (direct hit jackpot) is high. A specific game mode such as a time saving mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state. When a jackpot that has the right to be given a high probability mode after the end of the jackpot state, a so-called probability variable jackpot, occurs, a stop display is performed on the special display device 43 or the like in a specific manner corresponding to the probability variable jackpot. You can. Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine configured such that the time reduction mode, high probability mode, etc. are not provided after the end of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the probability of winning the entry assist lottery based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34 and the winning probability of the activation assist lottery conducted based on the passing of the game ball to the special gate switch 651 are explained. The probability is configured to be the same in all modes.

Not limited to this, as a game mode after the end of the jackpot state, instead of or in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction mode or the above-mentioned high probability mode, the winning probability of the entry assist lottery, the winning probability of the operation assist lottery, the small winning ( In particular, a mode (high support mode) may be implemented in which the probability of winning (especially long small win) is higher than the normal mode. At least one of these high support modes may be a specific game mode.

(d) The configuration related to the accessory activation lottery (accessory activation lottery area 409, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(d-1) For example, in the above embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651) provided in the accessory activation lottery area 409, whether to activate the movable accessory 722 or not. An operation assist lottery is held to determine the operation assist lottery, and when a winner is won in the operation assist lottery, the operation condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is configured to operate.

For example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 without performing a lottery process, the operating condition is always satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is operated.

In addition, it may be configured to include a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the counted value becomes a predetermined number or more, the activation condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is activated. good. Alternatively, it is provided with a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the special gate switch 651, and when the counted value becomes a predetermined number or more, a predetermined lottery process is executed to obtain a predetermined lottery result. In this case, the movable accessory 722 may be configured to operate when the operating condition is satisfied.

(d-2) In addition, the operation assist lottery for determining whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722 is not performed by a software lottery process, but by providing a mechanical lottery mechanism such as a croon in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. A configuration may also be adopted in which a lottery is drawn based on the behavior of the game balls. However, it is preferable to perform the lottery process using software in order to simplify the configuration of the central winning unit 37.

For example, in the accessory activation lottery area 409, the game balls do not always pass through the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), but the game balls can (or do not) pass through the special gate 650 at a predetermined rate. You can also use it as

(d-3) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, an opportunity entry means (special gate) for detecting an operation opportunity of the movable accessory 722 is provided in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37. However, the position where the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided is not limited to this, and may be at a different position.

For example, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a second internal area different from the internal area 401 (an area where the ball can enter from a different entrance than the ball entry opening 403 opened and closed by the blade member 404), and the second internal area is A configuration may also be adopted in which an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the internal area.

(d-4) Also, like the through gate 34, an opportunity ball entry means (special gate) is provided in the game area outside the central winning unit 37, allowing game balls flowing down the game area to enter (pass through). It may also be a configuration. Furthermore, the structure related to the opportunity ball entry means is not limited to a ball entry means such as a through gate through which the entered game ball can pass, but can also be used for entry means such as a prize opening through which the entered game ball is ejected out of the gaming area. Ball means may also be used. Then, a predetermined operating condition is met, such as when a predetermined lottery process is executed based on the entry of a game ball into a predetermined through gate or a predetermined winning opening, and a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained. A configuration may be adopted in which the movable accessory 722 is activated when the condition is established. For example, as will be described later, when a game ball is detected by the starting winning parts 33a, 33b (starting winning switches 224a, 224b) during the lottery invalid period, an operation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722. It may be configured such that when the activation assist lottery is held and the activation assist lottery is won, the activation condition is satisfied and the movable accessory 722 is activated.

In addition, the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (inner area 401) and is guided to the special guide passage 605 passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651, after which it is placed on the back side of the game board 30. Instead of being ejected to the central winning unit 37, it may be configured to return to the gaming area outside the central winning unit 37.

In addition, the game ball that enters the central winning unit 37 (inner area 401) and is guided to the special guide path 605 passes through the special guide path 605 without being detected by the predetermined ball detection means, The ball is configured to be able to return to the gaming area outside the central winning unit 37 and then enter an opportunity ball entry means (such as a special gate) provided in the gaming area outside the central winning unit 37, where the ball enters the gaming area outside the central winning unit 37. It may be configured such that it can be detected by a detection means (such as a special gate switch).

However, if the opportunity ball entry detection means (special gate) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable accessory 722 is located outside the central winning unit 37, the opportunity ball entry detection means (special gate switch) is provided using a wire or the like. From this point of view, it is recommended that the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) be disposed within the central winning unit 37, since there is a risk that a fraudulent act of erroneously detecting the ball and activating the movable accessory 722 may be carried out. is more preferable.

(d-5) In the above embodiment, when the game ball passes through the special gate 650, a variable display starts on the special gate display device 44, and after a predetermined time, the display stops in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. is carried out, and if the lottery result of the activation assist lottery is a winning result, the movable accessory 722 is configured to be activated thereafter.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the display means (special gate display device 44) for displaying the lottery results of the operation assist lottery is omitted.

Further, in the embodiment described above, the variation time of the variation display on the special gate display device 44 is uniform (1 second), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be a configuration.

For example, the main control device 261 includes a variable pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns with different display times, and a variable pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns based on the detection of a game ball by the special gate switch 651. and a fluctuation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of the plurality of fluctuation patterns, and controlling the special gate display device 44 based on the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation pattern selection means. Good too.

Thereby, the varying time from when the variable display starts until the stop display is made on the special gate display device 44 can be made variable. Furthermore, the operation start period from when a game ball is detected by the special gate switch 651 until the movable accessory 722 actually enters the operating state (advantageous state) can be made variable.

(d-6) In the above embodiment, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, a new game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651. Even so, the variable display (operation assist lottery result) is not suspended. In other words, the activation assist lottery for that amount is invalidated, and the configuration is such that the right to activate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, when a game ball newly passes through the special gate 650 and is detected by the special gate switch 651 while the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display or the movable accessory 722 is in operation, a predetermined number of times It may also be configured to include a holding means (variable holding area) that can hold the variable display (operation assist lottery result) of minutes.

Here, the holding means (fluctuating holding area) includes one execution area and a plurality of holding areas, similar to, for example, the normal changing holding area that stores the value of the input assist random number counter C3 in the above embodiment. , the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 may be stored in the plurality of holding areas in chronological order according to the history of passage of game balls to the special gate 650. Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to only the value of the operation assist random number counter C4, and other information may be stored.

(e) The configuration related to route distribution (route distribution area 406, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, the route distribution member 603 of the above embodiment is pivotally supported in a swingable manner, and is normally maintained in a rightward tilted state by a biasing means such as a coil spring (not shown), so that the route distribution member 603 of the above embodiment is tilted to the right. The falling game ball is in a state where it can flow down to the normal guide path 604 on the left side. In this state, when a game ball falling down the falling path 602 is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side, the route distribution member 603 is moved by the force received from the game ball contacting the left piece 614. , rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the biasing means, and is tilted to the left for a predetermined period of time, allowing game balls falling down the falling path 602 to flow down to the special guide path 605 on the right side. It is configured to be in a state.

The configuration (shape, operation mode, etc.) of the route distribution means is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, the shaft pin 610 is fixed to the shaft portion 611 of the route distribution member 603, and the shaft portion 611 protrudes toward the back side of the upper rear wall portion 400a, and as shown in FIG. The route distribution member 603 is provided with an action piece 800 extending downward from the rear end, and a pair of coil springs 801 and 802 as a maintenance means for supporting the action piece 800 from left and right sides. The center piece 613 may be configured to be maintained in an equilibrium state (reference posture) with no horizontal inclination at the center position in the left-right direction (the position of the shaft pin 610).

With this configuration, when a game ball falls to the route distribution member 603 which is normally in an equilibrium state, the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side or to the special guide path on the right side. I am not sure whether I will be directed to 605 or not.

When a game ball that has fallen to the route distribution member 603 in an equilibrium state is guided, for example, to the special guide path 605 on the right side, the route distribution member 603 moves away from the game ball that contacts the right side portion 615. Due to the received force, the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802 is turned clockwise and becomes the first state (first posture), that is, the right tilted state [see FIG. 41(a)]. As a result, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction and enters the left tilted state (see FIG. 41(b)), which is the second state (second posture). Thereafter, the route distribution member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times, such as once again being tilted to the right, and then returns to the balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802.

Similarly, when a game ball that has fallen to the route distribution member 603 in an equilibrium state is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side, the route distribution member 603 Due to the force received from the coil springs 801 and 802, the coil springs 801 and 802 rotate clockwise and tilt to the right after being rotated counterclockwise and tilted to the left. After that, the route distribution member 603 swings left and right a plurality of times, such as once again being tilted to the left, and then returns to the balanced state due to the elastic force of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802.

Under such a configuration, when two game balls fall successively to the route distribution member 603 in an equilibrium state, for example, when the first game ball in front is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side. In this case, the second subsequent game ball is guided to the special guide passage 605 on the right side. Conversely, when the first game ball in advance is guided to the special guide path 605 on the right side, the second game ball that follows is guided to the normal guide path 604 on the left side.

In addition, according to the above configuration, a plurality of continuously falling game balls can be alternately distributed to different routes while adopting a relatively simple configuration without providing a driving means for driving the route distribution member 603. configuration can be realized. As a result, the configuration and control can be simplified and made more compact.

(e-2) In the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, instead of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, a weight is attached to the lower end of the operating piece 800, so that the route distribution member 603 is normally The route distribution member 603 may be configured to be able to freely swing while maintaining an equilibrium state due to the action of the game ball.

(e-3) In the route distribution member 603 illustrated in FIG. 46, in place of the pair of coil springs 801 and 802, a drive means (distribution drive means) such as a motor for swinging the route distribution member 603 is provided, The route distribution member 603 may be configured to swing periodically or continuously between a rightward tilt state and a leftward tilted state. Alternatively, the route distribution means such as the route distribution member 603 is normally in a stopped state, and may be configured to enter a predetermined operating state only when a predetermined drive condition is satisfied and a specific state is achieved.

(e-4) The route distribution means does not have to be movable, and may be fixed to the housing 400 or the like or provided integrally with the housing 400, for example. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which routes are distributed based on random behavior of game balls. In addition, various other configurations related to the route distribution means, such as the location and number of route distribution devices provided, are not limited to the above embodiments, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which one or more route distribution means are provided at a position different from that of the above embodiment (another variable entry means different from the central winning unit 37).

(f) The configurations of various guide routes are not limited to the above embodiments.

(f-1) For example, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the configuration according to the above embodiment, from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball is From the time when the game ball is guided to the special guide path 605 by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the special gate from the time when the movable object reaches the movable accessory 722 (the exit part 604a of the normal guide path 604). 650 (special gate switch 651) and the movable accessory 722 is preferably configured to reach an advantageous state in a short time.

If the time required for the game ball to reach the movable accessory 722 (the exit portion 604a of the normal guide path 604) from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603 is longer than the route It is configured such that the time required to reach an advantageous state from the time when the game ball is guided to the special guide path 605 by the distribution member 603 until the game ball reaches the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous is made longer. If so, two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, the first game ball in the lead is distributed to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the following game ball is distributed to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603. When the second game ball is sorted to the special guide path 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing when the movable accessory 722 is activated. , there is a risk that interest will decrease significantly.

In addition, in order to lengthen the time required for the game ball guided to the normal guide path 604 to reach the movable accessory 722, for example, it is possible to lengthen the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the normal guide path 604. Conceivable. Further, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, a delay means for delaying passage of the game ball is installed in the normal guide path 604.

Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

(f-2) For example, in the above embodiment, the second route (opportunity entry ball guidance route) for guiding the game balls sorted by the route distribution member 603 to the opportunity entry means (special gate) is to guide the game balls to the special gate. Although the configuration is such that only one special guide path 605 is provided to guide the ball to the route 650, the time required for the game ball to reach the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) from the route distribution member 603 is not limited to this. It may be configured to include a plurality of different second routes (opportunity entry guidance routes).

By providing a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guidance routes), the movable accessory 722 is actually in the operating state (advantageous state) from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution member 603 (predetermined trigger). The period of time until this happens can be made variable.

Further, according to the above configuration, the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution member 603 to the opportunity ball entry means (special gate) can be made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game balls. This allows the player to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, thereby further increasing interest.

As a more specific configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 604a), from the time when the game ball is distributed by the route distribution member 603, the game ball reaches the first opportunity ball entry means (first special gate 650A), and the movable accessory The first second route (first special guide passage 605A) that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state until 722 is activated and the advantageous state that leads to the second opportunity ball entry means (second special gate 650B) It may also be configured to include a second second route (second special guide path 605B) with a short arrival time. Here, the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" constitutes the "first downstream route", and the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" constitutes the "first downstream route". It constitutes a "second downstream route" (the same applies hereafter).

In the example shown in FIG. 47, the first special gate 650A is provided with a first special gate switch 651A that detects a game ball passing therethrough, and the second special gate 650B is provided with a first special gate switch 651A that detects a game ball passing therethrough. A second special gate switch 651B for detection is provided. Here, the "first special gate switch 651A" constitutes the "first opportunity ball entry detection means", and the "second special gate switch 651B" constitutes the "second opportunity ball entry detection means" ( Same below).

The passage width of each special guide passage 605A, 605B and special gate 650A, 650B is set to a width that allows one game ball to pass through. Furthermore, the game balls that have passed through each of the special gates 650A and 650B are discharged to the outside of the internal area 401 via a discharge passage (not shown).

Further, a slide member 655 that can open and close the entrance portion is provided at the entrance portion of the second special guide passage 605B. The slide member 655 is provided so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and by moving to the forward protruding position, the slide member 655 enters a closed state in which the entrance portion of the second special guide passage 605B is closed, and returns to the rearward retracted position. By being displaced, the second special guide passage 605B is brought into an open state in which the entrance portion is opened.

When the slide member 655 is in the closed state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 serving as the upstream route distribution means pass through the upper surface of the slide member 655 and enter the first special guide path. You will be guided to 605A. On the other hand, when the slide member 655 is in the open state, the game balls distributed by the route distribution member 603 are guided to the second special guide path 605B.

Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the slide member 655 constantly repeats the sliding displacement operation, or a configuration in which the state of the slide member 655 is changed periodically or randomly. Further, in the specific state, the rate at which the slide member 655 is in the open state and the rate at which it is in the closed state may be controlled to be different.

In other words, the slide member 655 constitutes the trigger route changing means (downstream route distributing means) in this embodiment, and changes the destination of the game ball to "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" or " It is possible to change to the second route (second special guide passage 605B). Note that the route distribution means such as the route distribution member 603 may be configured to open and close a predetermined route like the slide member 655.

When a game ball is detected by each of the special gate switches 651A and 651B, an activation assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not to activate each movable accessory 722. Here, if the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 operates for a predetermined period of time. In addition, in a specific state, the probability of winning in the actuation assist lottery is different depending on whether the game ball is detected by the first special gate switch 651A or the case where the game ball is detected by the second special gate switch 651B. You can also use it as In other words, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" A configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which the movable accessory 722 can be in the predetermined operating state differs depending on the case.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 47, by protruding ribs 653A and 653B in the first special guide passage 605A, the passage length of the first special guide passage 605A, which is the movement path of the game ball, is lengthened. , the game ball is configured to advance forward over time while stopping the momentum of the game ball.

In addition, instead of or in addition to the ribs 653A and 653B, other delaying means for delaying the passage of the game ball (for example, a stage, a croon, etc., where the game ball reciprocates in the same place several times, or moves forward after going around the same place) It is also possible to arrange a mechanism such as this in the middle of the first special guide passage 605A.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 47, special gates 650A, 650B (special gate switches 651A, 651B) are provided individually corresponding to the first special guide passage 605A and the second special guide passage 605B. However, instead of this, the game balls passing through the first special guide passage 605A or the second special guide passage 605B move toward one special gate (special gate switch), and the same special It may also be configured to be detected by a gate switch.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 47, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)", the game ball always flows down to the first special gate 650A (first special guide passage 605A). If the game ball passes through the special gate switch 651A) and flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)", the game ball must pass through the second special gate 650B (second special guide passage 605B). 2 special gate switch 651B), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls may pass through the first special gate 650A and the second special gate 650B as opportunity ball entry means at a predetermined rate. It is also possible to have a configuration that allows (or does not pass). In addition, when the game ball flows down to the "first second route (first special guide passage 605A)" and when the game ball flows down to the "second second route (second special guide passage 605B)" The rate at which the game ball can pass through the opportunity ball entry means (the rate at which the movable accessory 722 can be in a predetermined operating state) may be configured to be different depending on the case where it flows down.

(f-3) A configuration with a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guidance routes) as described in (f-2) above is the route exemplified in (e-1) to (e-3) above. The configuration related to the distribution member 603 will be more successful.

If the route distributing member 603 guides the game ball to the special guide path, the route distributing member 603 takes longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable object 722 from the time the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 to the time when the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722. If the game ball is configured to take a long time to reach the advantageous state from the time it is guided to the special gate 605 until the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the first game ball is distributed to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball is distributed to the special guide path. 605, the player will know that the game ball will reach the movable accessory 722 before the timing at which the movable accessory 722 is activated, which may significantly reduce interest.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball in advance is distributed to the special guide path 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the normal guide path 604, , the expectation of a jackpot situation increases, and the player watches with anticipation the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide path 605.

On the other hand, the route distributing member 603 allows the game ball to be guided by the special guide rather than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable object 722 from the time when the game ball is guided to the normal guide path 604 by the route distributing member 603. If the game ball is configured to reach an advantageous state from the time it is guided to the passage 605 until it reaches the special gate 650 and the movable accessory 722 becomes advantageous, the central winning unit 37 Two game balls enter the internal area 401 in succession, the first game ball is distributed to the special guide path 605 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball that follows is normally guided. When distributed to the passage 604, unless the movable accessory 722 is maintained in an advantageous state for a relatively long period of time, the game ball reaches the movable accessory 722 after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable accessory 722 ends. Because it becomes clear that the player is going to do something, there is a risk that interest in the game will drop significantly.

Conversely, under the above configuration, if the first game ball in advance is distributed to the normal guide path 604 by the route distribution member 603, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the special guide path 605, , the expectation of a jackpot situation increases, and the player watches with anticipation the behavior of the game ball guided to the special guide path 605.

Therefore, if the configuration is provided with a plurality of second routes (opportunity ball entry guidance routes) as described above, two game balls enter the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 in succession, Regardless of whether the second game ball is sorted into the normal guide path 604 or the special guide path 605, the second game ball that follows is sorted into the “first second route (the first route) which takes a long time to reach an advantageous state”. The timing at which the movable accessory 722 operates and the game ball depend on whether the movable accessory 722 is activated or the game ball Since there is still a possibility that the timing of the ball reaching the movable accessory 722 coincides with the timing, the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with a sense of expectation that a jackpot will occur.

(g) The configuration related to the win/fail lottery (win/fail lottery area 407, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(g-1) For example, in the above embodiment, a rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) is provided as a success/failure sorting means. The rotating body 414 includes one special pocket part 416a for jackpots and two non-special pocket parts 416b for losers, and rotates counterclockwise at a constant speed.

For example, the number and ratio of the pocket portions 416a and the non-special pocket portions 416b of the rotary body 414 may be changed to vary the winning probability of the jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In addition, the rotating body 414 is provided with a special pocket part 416a for 3R jackpots and a special pocket part 416a for 7R jackpots, for example, and a jackpot type lottery is also performed in the win/fail lottery area 407. You can also use it as In such a case, the configuration may be such that the type lottery area 408 is omitted.

(g-3) Instead of the rotary body 414, a configuration may be provided in which another lottery mechanism such as a croon is provided.

(h) The configuration of the type lottery (type lottery area 408, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment.

(h-1) The type lottery area 408 has a type sorting means (type determining means) that allocates the destination of the game ball to any of the 15R ball entrance 731, 7R ball entrance 732, or 3R ball entrance 733. ) is provided.

In place of the type sorting mechanism section 741, a configuration may be adopted in which another type lottery mechanism such as a clone is provided.

(h-2) The type lottery area 408 may be omitted, and the type of jackpot condition to be awarded may be determined when a game ball enters a special entry means such as the first V winning passage 427, for example. In other words, the configuration may be such that the type determination for determining the type of jackpot state is performed by software determination processing.

(i) The configurations of the central winning unit 37 and the internal area 401 are not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, the configuration may be such that the route distribution area 406 (route distribution member 603) and the accessory activation lottery area 409 (special gate 650) are omitted. In such a case, for example, when the ball entry is detected by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, an operation assist lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722.

However, if the movable accessory 722 is only configured to perform a predetermined action based on ball entry detection by the internal ball entry detection switch 437, a game in which the ball enters the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37 The movable accessory 722 moves with respect to the ball at the same timing every time.

Therefore, in such a case, it is preferable to also employ various configurations that make the operation timing variable, such as the configuration that makes the fluctuation time variable as described above.

(j) The configuration of the movable body whose state changes based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650 (position, shape, operating mode, advantageous state, etc.) is limited to the configuration related to the movable accessory 722 of the above embodiment. Instead, other configurations such as an opening/closing member may be adopted.

(j-1) For example, the movable accessory 722 according to the above embodiment is in the operating state (advantageous state), thereby avoiding the winning lottery by the rotating body unit 410 and the type lottery by the type sorting mechanism section 741. , is configured so that game balls normally guided to the guide path 604 can be guided directly to the 15R ball entrance 731.

In other words, when the movable accessory 722 is in an operating state (advantageous state), it is configured so that it is easier to win the V prize jackpot than when the movable accessory 722 is in an inactive state (non-advantageous state). At the same time, the game ball is configured to easily enter the 15R ball entrance 731 corresponding to the 15R jackpot which is the most advantageous for the player among the multiple types of special gaming states (15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 3R jackpot). ing.

The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball is guided to the entrance of the type lottery area 408 while only the right to generate a jackpot state is granted, avoiding only the lottery by the rotary body unit 410. .

(j-2) Also, a movable body is provided in the type lottery area 408, and when the movable body changes to an advantageous state, the type lottery by the type distribution mechanism section 741 is avoided and the game ball is placed in the 15R ball entry hole. The configuration may be such that the user is guided to 731.

(j-3) The rotating body unit 410 (rotating body 414) may be used as the movable body in this embodiment. For example, the rotary body 414, which normally rotates at a constant speed, changes its state to an advantageous state based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, and the special pocket part 416a for jackpot is placed in a position corresponding to the gate part 435. Alternatively, the special jackpot portion 416a may be configured to move at a position corresponding to the gate portion 435 at a very low speed.

(j-4) The rotating body 414 is provided with, for example, a special pocket part 416a for 3R jackpot, a special pocket part 416a for 7R jackpot, and a special pocket part 416a for 15R jackpot, and the rotating body 414 is (Non-advantageous state), the special pocket part 416a for 15R jackpot is controlled to move at a very high speed at the position corresponding to the gate part 435, and the game ball is moved against the special pocket part 416a for 15R jackpot. makes it difficult for the ball to enter, and if the game ball passes through the special gate 650 and is in an advantageous state, the special pocket part 416a for the 15R jackpot is temporarily placed at the position corresponding to the gate part 435. It is also possible to perform control such that the special pocket section 416a for the 15R jackpot moves at a normal speed to a position corresponding to the gate section 435.

(j-5) The type sorting mechanism section 741 (first spanning board 744, second spanning board 745) may be used as a movable body in this embodiment.

For example, the first transition plate 744 and the second transition plate 745, which normally swing, change to an advantageous state based on the game ball passing through the special gate 650, and temporarily stop at the forward position, or A configuration may be adopted in which the game ball can easily enter the 15R ball entry port 731 by increasing the amount of time spent at the forward position.

(j-6) Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of operating states (advantageous states) of the movable bodies (movable accessory 722, rotating body 414, type sorting mechanism section 741, etc.) are set. Alternatively, it may be configured to be determined based on the lottery result of a predetermined operation lottery process. In this way, when the movable body is brought into the operating state (advantageous state), the operating pattern determining means in this embodiment is configured by the function of determining which of the plurality of operating patterns is to be executed.

Furthermore, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to be in a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. It may be configured so that it is easier to enter the special ball entry means (V winning passages 427, 730, etc.) and it is easier to hit the V winning jackpot than in the case. Further, when the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled to be in a predetermined operating state (advantageous state), the movable body such as the movable accessory 722 is controlled so as not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. A configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined type of special gaming state (for example, the most advantageous 15R jackpot for the player) is more likely to occur among the plurality of types of special gaming states (for example, 15R jackpot, 7R jackpot, 3R jackpot).

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, in the case where a winning result is obtained by the operation assist lottery, the effect of the effect display device 42 etc. is displayed during the operation start period before the movable accessory 722 is activated. The means may be configured to be able to perform an opening performance as a preliminary performance that suggests that the movable accessory 722 will be in an operating state.

Incidentally, such opening performance is performed after the stop display when a variable display is performed on the special gate display device 44 and a stop display is performed in a manner corresponding to the lottery result of the operation assist lottery. On the other hand, in a configuration in which the special gate display device 44 is omitted (a configuration in which no variable display is performed), the lottery is performed after the winning result is obtained by the operation assist lottery.

(k-1) In addition to the above configuration, the main control device 261 or the sub-control device 262 includes a performance pattern storage means for storing a plurality of performance patterns that determine the performance time of the opening performance, and a performance pattern storage unit that stores a plurality of performance patterns that determine the performance time of the opening performance, a performance pattern selection means that is capable of selecting one of the plurality of performance patterns stored in the performance pattern storage means, and the performance pattern selection means selects one from among the plurality of performance patterns stored in the performance pattern storage means. The present invention may also include a performance control means that can control a predetermined performance means based on the created performance pattern.

With this configuration, the operation start period (for example, opening period) from a predetermined trigger (for example, when an operation condition is satisfied) until the movable accessory 722 actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

(k-2) Without performing a performance such as the above-mentioned opening performance, the operation start period from a predetermined opportunity (for example, when an activation condition is established) until the movable accessory 722 actually becomes in an advantageous state may be made variable. .

For example, the main control device 261 includes an operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that determine the operation start period from the establishment of the operation condition until the movable accessory 722 enters the operation state, and a special gate switch 651 that controls the game ball. an operation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of operation patterns stored in the operation pattern storage means based on the detected operation pattern; The movable accessory 722 may be controlled based on the control means.

(l) In addition to the game performance using movable bodies such as the movable accessory 722, it may be configured to perform other game performances.

(l-1) For example, without being guided to the 1st V winning passage 427 etc., the ejection route (second route) such as the out passage 428 (non-special entry detection switch 462) or the special guide passage 605 (special gate switch 651) ) The configuration may be such that specific processing advantageous to the player can be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of game balls discharged outside the internal area 401 via the player. The functions of the main control device 261 and the like that execute such processing constitute a specific processing execution means in this embodiment.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls guided toward the 1st V winning passage 427, etc., but also the game balls discharged via the discharge route (second route) are utilized to provide new gameplay. This makes it possible to dramatically increase the interest of players.

(l-2) For example, it is equipped with a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means (discharged ball detecting means) such as the non-special entering ball detection switch 462 or the special gate switch 651, and the counted value is set to a predetermined value. The predetermined condition is met if the count is greater than or equal to the predetermined number, or the predetermined condition is met if the predetermined lottery result is obtained by executing a predetermined lottery process when the counted value is greater than or equal to the predetermined number. , the configuration may be such that specific processing advantageous to the player is executed.

In addition, such specific processing includes, for example, processing to lengthen the time that the movable accessory 722 is in the operating state when it is in the operating state, processing to increase the winning probability in the operation assist lottery, and special pocket part of the rotating body 414. 416a, processing to make it easier to enter the game ball, processing to make it easier for the game ball to be guided to the 15R ball entrance 731 in the type lottery area 408, etc.

(m) The small winning opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the feather member 404 of the central winning unit 37 and the jackpot opening mode (opening/closing pattern) of the large winning opening opening/closing member 32a of the variable winning device 32 are limited to the above embodiments. It's not a thing.

(m-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the blade member 404 has two opening/closing patterns of "short small hit" and "long small hit", but this is not limited to this. It may be configured with one or more opening/closing patterns.

(m-2) In the above embodiment, the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened for 0.5 seconds during a "short small win", and the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds during a "long small win". However, the single opening mode (opening time) of the blade member 404 is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment, and a configuration may be provided with other opening modes having different opening times.

(m-3) In the above embodiment, the blade member Although the configuration is such that the opening/closing operation (opening operation) of the blade member 404 is performed only once (one round), the opening/closing operation of the blade member 404 may be performed two or more times (multiple rounds) for one small hit occurrence. Round)

(m-4) For example, a first opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed once (one round), and a second opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing operation of the blade member 404 is performed twice (two rounds). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a plurality of opening/closing patterns having different numbers of opening/closing operations (number of rounds) can be executed, as in the configuration with the above-described configuration. However, if a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns (for example, a long small hit that is open for 1.5 seconds) is performed, and if the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed (for example, a short hit that is open for 0.5 seconds), It is preferable that the movable object such as the movable accessory 722 be configured to be more likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state than in the case where a small win is made.

(n) In consideration of the remaining balls in the internal area 401 of the central winning unit 37, the above embodiment is configured to perform the remaining ball monitoring process (step S212). In addition, in the first display control process (step S205), it is determined whether or not the feather member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is releasing a small win, and if it is releasing a small win, a new variable display may be started. The configuration is such that the variable display that has already started is not terminated.

Instead of or in addition to these configurations, a game ball is detected by the starting winning section 33 (first starting winning section 33a or second starting winning section 33b) while the feather member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is releasing a small hit. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the jackpot lottery and the small win lottery are not executed. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a lottery invalidation period is set.

In addition, in consideration of the period for discharging the remaining balls, the lottery invalid period includes, in addition to the period in which the feather member 404 is opened in the open game state (the small winning period), after the opening period ends (the period in which the feather member 404 is opened). It may also include a predetermined period of time (after closure). Of course, the lottery invalidation period is not limited to this, and may be a period different from this. For example, the period from when the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 until the opening of small winnings is started may also be included in the lottery invalidation period. In addition, in a type of gaming machine where a predetermined lottery process is performed even during a predetermined winning state (during the opening/closing control of the variable ball entry means), the lottery invalidation period is such that the predetermined opening/closing of the variable ball entry means is performed. It may be a predetermined period (lottery period) during which it is being executed.

In the pachinko machine for which the lottery invalidation period has been set, for example, before starting the start-up winning process in step S304, it is determined whether or not the lottery is in the invalidation period, and if it is the lottery invalidation period, the start-up In the prize-winning process, only the payout setting of the prize balls (setting of the prize ball command) related to the starting prize winning section 33 is performed without storing various counter values such as the win/fail random number counter C1. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the process moves to the start winning process.

In addition, when adopting such a configuration, in place of or in addition to the operation assist lottery related to the special gate 650 (special gate switch 651), during the lottery invalidation period, the startup prize section 33 (first startup prize section 33a or the second starting winning part 33b), an operation assist lottery is held to decide whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722, and if the player wins in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 is activated. A configuration may be adopted in which the accessory 722 is activated.

In addition, when performing the operation assist lottery related to the starting winning part 33, it is also possible to omit the accessory operation lottery area 409 (the special gate 650 and the special gate switch 651) and the configuration related thereto.

Here, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 11, an example of the start-up winning pre-processing that can be executed before starting the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 48.

First, in step S7700, a predetermined flag or the like is referred to to determine whether or not the lottery is in an invalid lottery period. In this example, the small winning opening period of the central winning unit 37 and the predetermined period after the end of the small winning opening period are set as the lottery invalidation period. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not the lottery invalidation period, this process is directly terminated, and the process proceeds to the starting winning process in step S304.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7700, that is, if it is the lottery invalid period, then in step S7701, the first This is determined based on the detection information of the starting winning switch 224a or the second starting winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S7701, the process is directly terminated and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process in step S304.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7701, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b, the third displaying flag is turned on in step S7702. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the special gate display device 44 is displaying a variable display. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7702, the process is immediately terminated and the process proceeds to the starting prize winning process in step S304.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7702, it is determined in step S7703 whether or not the accessory object in operation flag is on, that is, whether or not the movable accessory object 722 is in operation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7703, this process is directly terminated and the process proceeds to the starting winning process in step S304.

As a result, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b, and the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b. Even if it is detected by the winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b, the activation assist lottery is invalidated and the right to operate the movable accessory 722 is not newly granted.

Not limited to this, during the variable display of the special gate display device 44 or during the operation of the movable accessory 722, a new game ball enters the first starting winning section 33a or the second starting winning section 33b, and the first starting winning section 33b enters the first starting winning section 33a. It may be configured to include a holding means (variation holding area) that can hold a predetermined number of variable displays (operation assist lottery results) when detected by the winning switch 224a or the second start winning switch 224b.

Here, the holding means (fluctuation holding area) includes one execution area and a plurality of In the plurality of holding areas, the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 are displayed in chronological order according to the winning history of game balls to the starting winning parts 33a and 33b. It may also be configured such that the information is stored in . Of course, the information stored in the holding means is not limited to only the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2, and other information may be stored.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7703, in step S7704, the values of the operation assist random number counter C4 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 are set to the lottery invalidation set in the RAM 503. Store in the random number storage area for the period.

In the subsequent step S7705, the starting winning determination flag for the lottery invalid period is turned on, and in step S7706, the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 newly stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period is a value corresponding to the assist winning. A validity determination process is performed to determine whether or not. Here, when the value of the actuation assist random number counter C4 is a value corresponding to an assist win, that is, when an actuation assist win is achieved, this corresponds to a case where the predetermined condition in this example is satisfied.

In this example, it is determined whether or not the lottery is won based on the value of the operation assist random number counter C4 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalidation period. Specifically, among the numerical values "0 to 19" of the operation assist random number counter C4, "1 to 5" are the winning values. In other words, the assist winning probability is 5/20. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the assisted winning is performed with a different probability of winning.

In the following step S7707, a variable time is determined based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the random number storage area for the lottery invalid period to determine the variable time in the invalid period display device (not shown) constituting the second display means. A determination process is performed, and then this process ends. Therefore, the function of executing the fluctuation time determination process and the like in step S7707 constitutes the second fluctuation pattern selection means in this example.

Note that the correspondence between the value of the variable time selection counter C2 and the variable time on the invalid period display device is stored in advance in the ROM 502 as a variable time selection table for the lottery invalid period (not shown). Therefore, the ROM 502 that stores the variation time selection table and the like constitutes the second variation pattern storage means in this example.

For example, if the value of the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is one of "0 to 2" from "0 to 9", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the invalid period display device is set to 3 seconds. If the value is one of "3 to 5", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the invalid period display device is set to 5 seconds, and if it is any of "6 to 9", , the variable time of the variable display performed on the invalid period display device is set to 7 seconds.

Next, the fourth display control process performed in the normal process of FIG. 10 in relation to the invalid period display device will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 49. Note that the function of the main control device 261 that executes the fourth display control process constitutes the second display control means in this example.

First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not the display device for the invalid period is displaying a variable display by checking the setting status of the fourth display flag indicating whether the display device for the invalid period is displaying a variable display. . Specifically, when the fourth display flag is on, it is assumed that the display device for the invalid period is displaying a variable display, and when the fourth display flag is off, the display device for the invalid period is considered to be displaying a variable display. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped. The invalid period display device and the special gate display device 44 may be shared.

If a negative determination is made in step S7801, the process advances to step S7802, and it is determined whether or not the starting winning determination flag for the lottery invalidation period is on. If a negative determination is made in step S7802, that is, if the starting winning determination flag for the lottery invalidation period is not on, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the starting prize determination flag for the lottery invalid period is not in the fluctuating display and is on, the process advances to step S7803, and the starting winning prize determining flag for the lottery invalid period is turned off. In the following step S7804, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that a condition for performing a variable display on the invalid period display device is satisfied. Specifically, the fourth display flag is turned on, and the fourth display timer is set. The fourth display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the invalid period display device, and is used as a reference when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, a value corresponding to the variation time determined in the variation time determination process of step S7707 is set in the fourth display timer. That is, the value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds, the value "1250" corresponding to 5 seconds, or the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds is set for the fourth display timer.

Then, after step S7804 ends, the fourth display control process ends. Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start variable display is output to the invalid period display device in the next external output process of normal processing, the invalid period display device The variable display starts at .

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7801, that is, if variable display is being performed on the invalid period display device, the process advances to step S7806, and a fourth display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the fourth display timer is decremented by 1.

Next, the process advances to step S7807, and it is determined whether the count value of the fourth display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7807, the fourth displaying flag is turned off in step S7808, and in step S7809, a stop display setting is performed to perform a stop display on the invalid period display device. Then, based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the invalid period display device in the external output process in the next normal process.

Next, the process advances to step S7810, where discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for driving the movable accessory 722 of the bypass mechanism section 721 is performed. Specifically, the accessory object operation flag is turned on, and the operation time is set in the accessory object operation timer. In this embodiment, a value "3000" corresponding to 12 seconds is set for the accessory activation timer. Thereby, the movable accessory 722 is controlled to a predetermined operating state (advantageous state). The movable object control means in this example is constituted by the function of the main control device 261 that performs driving processing of the movable accessory 722 based on the setting contents.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7807, then in step S7811, a switching display setting is performed to continue the variable display of the invalid period display device, and the process ends. Then, based on the settings of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the invalid period display device in the next external output process in normal processing. As a result, variable display of the invalid period display device is realized at the timing of the fourth display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

Therefore, the random number storage process in step S7704 (storage of the actuation assist random number counter C4), the validity determination process in step S7706, etc. constitute the actuation lottery process (actuation assist lottery) in this example, and the main control that executes this actuation lottery process The functions of the device 261 constitute lottery processing execution means (invalid period lottery processing execution means).

Further, the function of the main controller 261 that executes the random number storage process in step S7704 (storage of the variable time selection counter C2), the variable time determination process in step S7707, etc. constitutes the set time selection means in this example.

As described above, according to this example, the small winning opening period in which the central winning unit 37 is made to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning section 33 and the end of the small winning opening period. The subsequent predetermined period (during the remaining ball monitoring period) is set as a lottery invalidation period, and when a game ball newly enters the starting winning part 33 during the lottery invalidation period, it is determined whether or not to operate the movable accessory 722. An operation assist lottery is held to determine the operation assist, and if a winner is won in the operation assist lottery, the movable accessory 722 is activated.

As a result, even during the opening period of the central winning unit 37, in which opening opportunity etc. cannot be obtained in the past, the movable accessory 722 can be operated in a predetermined manner by the player based on the entry of the game ball into the starting winning part 33. Advantageous conditions may arise.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting winning part 33, if it is found that the gaming ball will not win a V prize at the opening timing of the central winning unit 37 related to the starting ball, the center In order to prevent game balls from entering the start winning section 33 unnecessarily during the opening period of the winning unit 37, some players temporarily stop firing the game balls at that point.

On the other hand, according to this example, after the game ball enters the starting winning section 33, even in such a situation, the player can newly start winning in order to receive assistance from the movable accessory 722. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the section 33, a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine can be suppressed.

Further, since the profit given to the player differs depending on whether or not the timing at which the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 is during the open period of the central winning unit 37, it is possible to diversify the games.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In addition, under the configuration according to this example, if a relatively small value is set for the accessory activation timer and the fourth display timer, immediately after the game ball enters the starting winning part 33 during the predetermined lottery invalidation period. The movable accessory 722 becomes operational, and the movable accessory 722 is configured to be able to act on the game ball that entered the central winning unit 37 during the small winning release before the lottery invalidation period.

On the other hand, if a relatively large value is set for the accessory activation timer or the fourth display timer, the movable accessory 722 will be activated for game balls that enter the central winning unit 37 after the end of the predetermined lottery invalidation period. It becomes a configuration that can work. As a result, even if a game ball does not exist in the internal area 401 of the center winning unit 37 at the time when the game ball enters the starting winning section 33 within the lottery invalidation period, the center that is opened at a predetermined timing thereafter The movable accessory 722 acts on the game ball that has entered the winning unit 37, and a chance to win a prize is given.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the starting winning unit 33 within the lottery invalidation period, the player may actively try to enter the gaming ball into the central winning unit 37. It becomes possible to play games. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below along with their effects.

Conventional issue A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, the movable body periodically or continuously performs a predetermined operation unrelated to the game, or the movable body The effects related to the movable body became monotonous, such as the player performing a predetermined action, and the player's interest (excitement) in the movement of the movable body tended to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means A1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
an opportunity ball entry means provided to allow the game ball to enter (or pass through);
an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
Lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery processing based on ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
At least a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the activation lottery process. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the above means A1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Moreover, in this means, it is configured to determine by lottery whether or not the movable body is to be brought into a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, for example, the movable body does not perform regular or continuous operations, and it also eliminates the need to perform predetermined actions every time in response to a predetermined opportunity, such as when the variable ball entrance means is in an open state. , it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body.

Particularly, in this means, decisions such as whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state are made by software by the lottery processing execution means (operation lottery processing). Thereby, there is no need to newly provide a complicated mechanism such as a mechanical lottery mechanism that performs a lottery based on the behavior of the game balls, and the configuration can be simplified.

Here, the placement position of the "opportunistic ball entry means" includes, for example, "inside the internal region of the variable ball entry means", "in a region different from the internal region of the variable ball entry means", and "inside the internal region of the variable ball entry means". ``within the gaming area outside the variable ball entry means.''

Means A2. The game machine according to means A1, wherein the opportunity ball entry means is configured to allow a game ball to enter after passing through the specific area.

According to the above means A2, by providing an opportunity ball entry means (an opportunity ball entry detection means) for detecting a motion trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area can be adjusted. Based on this, it is determined whether the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, etc., so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, which increases the interest. It is possible to improve the

In addition, if the triggered ball entry means (triggered ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is placed outside the variable ball entry means (inner area), the triggered ball entry detection means can be used using a wire or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as causing the device to make a false positive detection and activating the movable body may be more likely to occur.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means A2, by providing the trigger ball entry means in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Means A3. The gaming machine according to means A1 or A2, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the above means A3, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. I can do it.

Means A4. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A3, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality (for example, two) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the player continues to play consecutive balls, the movable body will Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means A4, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

In addition, "a first flow route (first route) that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means; and a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means. In the case of a configuration including a second downstream route (the second said first route) that allows the ball to flow down to the special entrance means with a higher probability than the downstream route (the first said first route), the overall As a result, the proportion of game balls that flow down to the special ball entry means increases. must be set, which may reduce interest for players.

Means A5. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means A5, even game balls other than game balls that entered the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. That will happen.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means A5, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above means A5 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened and closed during an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the open/close member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of means A1 to A4, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.

In addition, the structure related to the above means A5 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the movable body starts operating after the start of the operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means A6. Display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the activated lottery process;
The movable body control means includes:
The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after a stop display is made on the display means.

If the movable body suddenly operates without any warning, the player who has not been paying attention to the movable body until then may not be able to grasp the situation and may become confused.

On the other hand, according to the means A6, by providing the display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance using the movable body, and to further improve the interest for the players.

Means A7. Fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different times of the fluctuation display;
Variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
The gaming machine according to means A6, further comprising display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means.

According to the above means A7, it is possible to make the variable time variable from when the variable display starts until the stop display is made on the display means. Furthermore, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

This eliminates the need for the movable body to always operate at a fixed timing, so it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Means A8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to use.

According to the means A8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special game state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means A9. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means A1 to A8 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means A9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means A10. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means A1 to A9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means A11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means A1 to A10 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means A11, even during an open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue B. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, effects related to the movable body, such as the movable body periodically or continuously performing a predetermined operation regardless of the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, are The game became monotonous, and the player's interest in the movable body tended to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means B1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above means B1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by providing an opportunity ball entry means (an opportunity ball entry detection means) for detecting an action trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. As a result, it is determined whether or not the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In addition, if the triggered ball entry means (triggered ball entry detection means) for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body is placed outside the variable ball entry means (inner area), the triggered ball entry detection means can be used using a wire or the like. There is a risk that fraudulent acts such as causing the device to make a false positive detection and activating the movable body may be more likely to occur.

In contrast, according to the present means, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed by providing the trigger ball entry means in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

Means B2. comprising a predetermined detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has passed through the specific area,
The game machine according to means B1, characterized in that the opportunity ball entry means is provided at a position downstream of the predetermined detection means, where the game ball detected by the predetermined detection means can enter. .

If the movable body is configured to perform a predetermined operation based on the detection by the predetermined detection means, the movable body will operate at the same timing every time with respect to a game ball that enters the variable ball entry means (internal area). I will do it.

As a result, the performance related to the movable body becomes monotonous, and the timing of the operation of the movable body is easily grasped by the player, and there is a risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means B2, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the performance related to the movable body, and to suppress the above-mentioned fraudulent acts.

Means B3. comprising an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, wherein the operating condition can be satisfied when a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means.

According to the means B3, it is not necessary to perform a software lottery process to determine whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state, so that the control process can be simplified.

Means B4. an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
and a lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means,
The gaming machine according to means B1 or B2, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process.

According to the means B4, the determination as to whether or not to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state is performed by software by the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process).

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time in response to a predetermined opportunity, so it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means B5. The game according to any one of means B1 to B4, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the means B5, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. I can do it.

Means B6. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B5, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality (for example, two) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the player continues to play consecutive balls, the movable body will Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means B6, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the ball enters the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

Means B7. The game machine according to means B6, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a plurality of the second routes configured such that the time required for the game ball to reach the opportunity ball entry means from the route allocating means is different.

If the movable body is configured to move at a fixed timing every time from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means, the effects related to the movable body will become monotonous, and the movement of the movable body by the player may become monotonous. It becomes easier to grasp the timing of body movements, and there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating a gaming machine in accordance with the timing may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means B7, the operation start period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

This eliminates the need for the movable body to always operate at a fixed timing, so it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

In addition, "the time required for the game ball to reach the opportunity ball entry means from the route distribution means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means is different". included.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a chance ball entry means (a chance ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball that passes through each of the "plurality of second routes". may be configured to move toward a single ball opportunity entry means (original ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same opportunity ball entry detection means.

For example, "a first said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a first opportunity ball entering means, and a second said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a second opportunity ball entry means". It may also be configured as "equipped".

Furthermore, it includes trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". It is also possible to have a different configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means B8. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. a first route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state from when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state; The gaming machine according to means B6, further comprising a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enters the game ball consecutively, the first game ball that precedes it is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. If the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time required to reach the advantageous state is shortened. When game balls enter the ball consecutively, the first game ball ahead is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a certain period of time, the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the movable body's advantageous state ends, which may significantly reduce interest. .

On the other hand, according to the means B8, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball that precedes the ball enters either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball will be sorted to either the "first said second route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state" or the "second said second route that takes a short time to reach an advantageous state." Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates coincides with the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body, so the player may play the game ball with a sense of expectation that a special gaming state will occur. You can watch the behavior closely.

Means B9. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means B9, even game balls other than game balls that entered the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. That will happen.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means B9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball that precedes (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means B9 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened and closed during an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of means B1 to B8, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.

In addition, the structure related to the above means B9 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the movable body starts operating, and the time when the movable body starts operating after the start of the operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means B10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to use.

According to the means B10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means B11. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means B1 to B10 is characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means B10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means B12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means B1 to B11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means B13. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means B1 to B12 is configured to be able to perform control to cause the movable body to perform the predetermined action to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means B13, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue C. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, even if a situation advantageous to the player occurs, such as when multiple game balls consecutively enter the variable ball entry means at the same time, these multiple game balls Depending on the timing of ball entry, all of the game balls may end up heading for the special ball entry means, or all of the game balls may not go to the special ball entry means and may instead be guided to the ejection section or non-special ball entry means. The configuration made it easy for problems such as storage to occur.

Normally, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, even if a new game ball enters the special ball entry means when the right to a special gaming state has been obtained, the special gaming state will not be granted. It is configured.

Therefore, even if two game balls consecutively enter the special ball entry means, two special game states will not be granted, but only one special game state will occur. Therefore, the player may feel negative feelings such as loss, waste, waste, etc.

As a result, there is a concern that even though a favorable situation for the player, such as being granted a special gaming state, has occurred, the player's interest may be reduced.

On the other hand, if all the game balls have been guided to the ejection section etc., since multiple game balls entered the variable ball entry means at the same time, the game ball is not allowed to enter the special ball entry means. This does not contribute at all to the player's expectation that the game will be advantageous in letting the ball enter the ball, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease.

In this sense, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to dramatically improve the interest when a plurality of game balls enter the variable ball entry means. Our goal is to provide gaming machines that allow you to:

Means C1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
Route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flowed down to the first route (that can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means", for example, "a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entrance means can be detected" ``When a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means,'' or ``A predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means. This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through an activated lottery.

According to the above means C1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, this means is configured to include route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes will flow down to either the first route or the second route. The above-mentioned movable body is provided in order to make it possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. This will result in more effective effects.

As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the occurrence of a special game state may be improved by entering a plurality of game balls into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first game ball that precedes and the second game ball that follows flow down? Since the results will vary depending on the route, the player will have a sense of anticipation and will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means C2. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second route,
comprising a maintenance means capable of maintaining the route distribution means in the first state,
When the game ball flows down to the first route due to the route allocating means maintained in the first state, the route allocating means is configured to change to the second state due to the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that:

Under the configuration according to the means C2, in order to operate the movable body, it is necessary to cause the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, and in order to cause the game ball to enter the opportunity ball entry means, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the opportunity ball entry means. It is necessary to change the sorting means to the second state and guide the game ball to the second route.

In other words, in order to operate the movable body, at least two game balls are successively entered into the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball that precedes the variable ball entry means is maintained in the first state by the route distribution means. It is necessary for the subsequent second game ball to flow down to the second route by the route allocating means changed to the second state.

As a result, it is possible to ensure a more reliable gaming property in which it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of game balls than to enter one game ball into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. I can do it.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the means C2, for example, "Means C2. The route distribution means is
A route distribution member configured to be able to change its posture between a first posture in which the game ball can flow down the first route and a second posture in which the game ball can flow down the second route,
comprising a maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in the first posture;
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution member maintained in the first attitude, the force received from the game ball causes the route distribution member to (for example, resist the urging force of the urging means). The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so as to change to the second attitude. ” etc.

Means C3. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. From the moment when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time required to reach the advantageous state is shortened. The gaming machine according to means C2.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach an advantageous state, two game balls may be consecutively entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball that precedes the game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the is activated, there is a risk that the game's interest will be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, according to the above means C3, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and to suppress the decrease in interest for the players.

Note that the above-mentioned "advantageous state arrival time" only needs to be shorter than the above-mentioned "movable object arrival time", for example, a configuration in which the ball enters the opportunity ball entry means directly from the route distribution means (a configuration in which the ball enters the opportunity ball entry means directly) This is intended to include configurations in which the distance is zero, etc.).

Further, one possible way to lengthen the "movable body arrival time" is to lengthen the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first route", for example.

Moreover, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed in the "first route." Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

In addition, "from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means, the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (the opportunity ball entry detection means), and the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state. The movable body from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means until the game ball reaches the movable body It is preferable that the arrival time is shortened.

If the above-mentioned "movable body arrival time" is longer than the above-mentioned "advantageous end arrival time", two game balls will consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, and the first game of the preceding one will be played. When the ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the subsequent second game ball is distributed to the second route, the player can distribute the game ball after the timing when the advantageous state of the movable body ends. Since it is known that the movable object is reached, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Means C4. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed at least into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route, and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a distribution driving means that periodically or continuously performs a predetermined operation of changing the state of the route distribution means.

If two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball that precedes it will always be distributed to either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent game ball will be distributed to either the first route or the second route. If the configuration is such that the second game ball is sorted to the other route, it will be consecutively entered depending on the relationship between the preset "advantageous state arrival time" and the "movable object arrival time". As soon as the two played game balls are alternately distributed by the route distribution means, the subsequent result is determined, which may reduce the player's interest.

On the other hand, according to the means C4, even if two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, the first game ball that precedes the ball enters the first route or the second route. Since it is not decided which one to allocate, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed.

As a result, the player can watch the behavior of the game ball with anticipation for the occurrence of a special gaming state, and can suppress a decline in interest.

Means C5. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed at least into a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first route, and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second route,
comprising a maintenance means capable of maintaining the route distribution means in a reference state between the first state and the second state;
When the route allocating means is maintained in the standard state, the game ball can flow down either of the first route and the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means maintained in the reference state, the route allocating means changes to the second state due to the force received from the game ball,
When the game ball flows down to the second route due to the route allocating means maintained in the reference state, the route allocating means is configured to change to the first state due to the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that:

According to the above means C5, the same effects as the above means C4 are achieved. In particular, according to the present means, since there is no need to provide a driving means for driving the route distribution means, it is possible to adopt a relatively simple configuration and alternately move a plurality of (two) game balls that continuously flow down. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the water flows down different routes. As a result, the configuration and control can be simplified and made more compact.

In addition, as a more specific configuration of the means C5, for example, "Means C5. The route distribution means is
A route distribution member configured to be able to change its posture between at least a first posture in which a game ball can flow down to the first route and a second posture in which a game ball can flow down to the second route,
comprising a maintaining means (biasing means, etc.) capable of maintaining the route distribution member in a reference posture between the first posture and the second posture;
In a state where the route distribution member is maintained in the reference posture, the game ball can flow down either of the first route and the second route,
When the game ball flows down to the first route due to the route distribution member maintained in the standard posture, the route distribution member changes to the second posture due to the force received from the game ball,
When the game ball flows down to the second route due to the route distribution member maintained in the reference posture, the route distribution member is configured to change to the first posture due to the force received from the game ball. The gaming machine according to means C1, characterized in that: ” etc.

Means C6. The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. From the time when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means), the second route takes a long time to reach an advantageous state until the movable body enters an advantageous state; The gaming machine according to means C4 or C5, further comprising: a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the physical arrival time.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach an advantageous state, two game balls may be consecutively entered into the internal area of the variable ball entry means. When the first game ball that precedes the game ball is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the is activated, there is a risk that the game's interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. If the structure is such that the time required for the movable body to reach an advantageous state from when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means to reach the advantageous state is shortened, the two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. balls enter the ball consecutively, the first game ball that precedes it is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in an advantageous state for a certain period of time, it will be known that the game ball will reach the movable body after the timing when the movable body's advantageous state ends, which may significantly reduce interest.

On the other hand, according to the means C6, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball that precedes the ball enters either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball will be sorted to either the "first said second route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state" or the "second said second route that takes a short time to reach an advantageous state." Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates coincides with the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body, so the player may play the game ball with a sense of expectation that a special gaming state will occur. You can watch the behavior closely.

It should be noted that a structure may be adopted in which a chance ball entry means (a chance ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "first said second route" and the "second said second route"; The game ball passing through the "first said second route" or the "second said second route" respectively moves toward one opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means), and the same opportunity ball entry detection means It may be configured to be detected by means.

For example, "a first said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a first opportunity ball entering means, and a second said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a second opportunity ball entry means". It may also be configured as "equipped".

Furthermore, it includes trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". It is also possible to have a different configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means C7. The game according to any one of means C1 to C6, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the above means C7, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. I can do it.

Means C8. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means C8, even game balls other than the game balls that entered the timing ball entry means and the game balls that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. That will happen.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means C8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means C8 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period." The game machine according to any one of means C1 to C7, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the structure related to the above means C8 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time of the movable body after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means C9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C8, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means C9, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special game state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means C10. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means C1 to C9 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means C10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means C11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means C1 to C10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means C12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means C1 to C11 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means C12, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue D. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing each time, for example, when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

Therefore, in the past, there was a possibility that the player could grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body and commit fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Furthermore, the effects associated with movable objects tend to be monotonous, and in this respect, further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent activities and increase interest.

Means D1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
Movable body control capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when at least a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (for example, when a game ball is detected by a predetermined ball detection means). and means;
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from at least a predetermined trigger (for example, when the operating condition is met) until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state is variable.

According to the means D1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In particular, in this means, by making the period from a predetermined trigger (for example, when the above-mentioned operating condition is met) until the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state (for example, the opening period) variable, the movable body is activated every time. Since movements are not performed at fixed timings, it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using movable bodies. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will know the timing of the operation of the movable body. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Means D2. an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
an opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the opportunity ball entry means;
The gaming machine according to means D1, characterized in that the operating condition can be established based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means.

If the trigger ball entry means that triggers the operation of the movable body is placed outside the variable ball entry means (inner area), a wire or the like can be used to cause the trigger ball entry detection means to make a false detection and activate the movable body. This may make it easier for fraudulent acts to occur.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means D2, the movable body is configured to operate due to the behavior of the game ball that has entered the internal area, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Here, for example, if it is set as "a configuration in which the operating condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means", the software can decide whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state. Since it is not necessary to perform the random selection process, the control process can be simplified. In addition, it is also possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as installing a fraudulent ROM or the like in which the program related to the lottery process has been tampered with.

Means D3. an operation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of operation patterns that define an operation start period from at least the establishment of the operation condition until the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state;
and actuation pattern selection means capable of selecting any one of the plurality of actuation patterns stored in the actuation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means. The gaming machine according to means D2, characterized in that:

According to the means D3, a plurality of patterns of operation start periods (for example, opening periods) are prepared, and a predetermined operation start period is selected from these patterns by software. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, and the effects of the means D1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the present means, there is no need to provide the variable ball entry means with a complicated mechanical selection mechanism, and the structure of the variable ball entry means can be simplified.

Means D4. During the operation start period, a performance means capable of performing at least a preliminary performance (opening performance) that suggests that the movable body will be in the predetermined advantageous state;
performance pattern storage means for storing a plurality of performance patterns corresponding to the plurality of operation patterns;
The gaming machine according to means D3, further comprising performance control means capable of controlling the performance means based on a performance pattern corresponding to the operation pattern selected by the operation pattern selection means.

According to the above-mentioned means D4, by performing a preliminary effect suggesting that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to make the player recognize in advance that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. .

Furthermore, the player is nervous because he or she does not know when the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, and has a sense of expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state at a timing that is advantageous to him. In addition to the behavior of the game ball, the game effect related to the movable body can be watched closely, making it possible to further improve interest.

In addition, in a configuration in which the operation start period from when the actuation condition is satisfied until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state is variable, if the operation start period is relatively long, even if the actuation condition is satisfied, First, there is a risk that the player may feel anxious or angry that the movable body may not be in a predetermined advantageous state.

On the other hand, according to the present means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of such problems, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for players.

Means D5. comprising a lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery processing based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D4, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process. .

According to the means D5, the determination as to whether or not to put the movable body in a predetermined advantageous state is performed by software by the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process).

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time in response to a predetermined opportunity, so it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means D6. Display means that starts a variable display based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the activated lottery process;
Fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns with different times of the fluctuation display;
Variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the variation pattern storage means based on the detection of a game ball by the opportunity ball entry detection means;
Display control means for controlling the display means based on the variation pattern selected by the variation pattern selection means,
The movable body control means includes:
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D5, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be capable of executing control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is displayed on the display means.

According to the means D6, by providing the display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the movable body may be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player is nervous because he or she does not know whether the movable object will be in a predetermined advantageous state or not, but he or she watches the behavior of the game ball and the fluctuation display with a sense of expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance related to the movable body and further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the means D6, it is possible to make variable the variable time from the start of variable display to the stop display on the display means. Furthermore, the operation start period from when the game ball is detected by the opportunity ball detection means until the movable body actually reaches a predetermined advantageous state can be made variable.

As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the operation start period. As a result, it is possible to more easily diversify the period from a predetermined trigger until the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, and the effects of the means D1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means D7. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means, but not to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means, but not to flow down to the special ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D6, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

If a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (including a continuous ball situation in which two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them). (Similarly.) Even if an advantageous situation occurs for the player, if all of these multiple game balls head toward the opportunity ball entry means, no matter how advantageous the movable body is, There is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means D7, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

Note that the above-mentioned "predetermined opportunity" may be that the game ball is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means.

Means D8. The route distribution means (route distribution mechanism, route distribution member, etc.)
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down the first route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down the second route,
comprising a distribution driving means that periodically or continuously performs a predetermined operation of changing the state of the route distribution means,
Means D7 comprises a plurality of the second routes configured such that the time required for the game ball passing through the specific area to reach the opportunity ball entry means from the route distribution means is different. The game machine described.

If the movable body is configured to move at a fixed timing every time from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means, the effects related to the movable body will become monotonous, and the movement of the movable body by the player may become monotonous. It becomes easier to grasp the timing of body movements, and there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating a gaming machine in accordance with the timing may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means D8, by providing a plurality of second routes, it is possible to make the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means variable.

Furthermore, the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means (predetermined trigger) until the movable body actually becomes in an advantageous state can be made variable.

Furthermore, according to the present means, the period from the time when the game balls are distributed by the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means can be made variable by the mechanical configuration based on the behavior of the game balls. This allows the player to pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing interest.

In addition, "the time required for the game ball to reach the opportunity ball entry means from the route distribution means is different" includes, for example, "the distance from the route distribution means to the opportunity ball entry means is different". included.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a chance ball entry means (a chance ball entry detection means) is provided individually corresponding to each of the "plurality of second routes", or a game ball that passes through each of the "plurality of second routes". may be configured to move toward a single ball opportunity entry means (original ball entry detection means) and be detected by the same opportunity ball entry detection means.

For example, "a first said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a first opportunity ball entering means, and a second said second route that allows a game ball to flow down to a second opportunity ball entry means". It may also be configured as "equipped".

Furthermore, it includes trigger route changing means (downstream route distribution means) capable of periodically or randomly changing the destination of the game ball to at least the "first said second route" or "second said second route". It is also possible to have a different configuration. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means D9. As the plurality of second routes,
The game ball flows down to the second route by the route allocating means from the time when the game ball reaches the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route allocating means to the time the game ball reaches the movable body. A first route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state from when the game ball reaches the opportunity ball entry means (opportunity ball entry detection means) and the movable body reaches the predetermined advantageous state; , and a second route in which the advantageous state arrival time is shorter than the movable body arrival time.

If the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means until the game ball reaches the movable body is longer than the time from the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means, If the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is configured to take a long time to reach a predetermined advantageous state, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means. enters the game ball consecutively, the first game ball that precedes it is distributed to the first route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the second route, the player Since it is known that the game ball will reach the movable body before the timing when the movable body is activated, there is a risk that interest will be significantly reduced.

Conversely, the time when the game ball flows down to the second route by the route distribution means is longer than the time it takes for the game ball to reach the movable body from the time the game ball flows down to the first route by the route distribution means. If the game ball reaches the trigger ball entry means and the movable body reaches a predetermined advantageous state, the time required to reach the advantageous state is shortened. When game balls enter the ball consecutively, the first game ball ahead is distributed to the second route by the route distribution means, and the second game ball that follows is distributed to the first route. Unless the movable body is maintained in a predetermined advantageous state for a certain period of time, the game ball may arrive at the movable body after the timing when the movable body's advantageous state ends, which may significantly reduce interest. There is.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means D9, two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, and the first game ball that precedes the ball enters either the first route or the second route. Even if it is sorted, the subsequent second game ball will be sorted to either the "first said second route that takes a long time to reach an advantageous state" or the "second said second route that takes a short time to reach an advantageous state." Depending on whether the movable body is activated or not, there is a possibility that the timing at which the movable body operates coincides with the timing at which the game ball reaches the movable body, so the player may play the game ball with a sense of expectation that a special gaming state will occur. You can watch the behavior closely.

In addition, the "second said second route" only needs to take a shorter time for the game ball to pass than the "first said second route"; This is intended to include configurations in which the ball enters the ball (such as a configuration in which the distance to the timing means for entering the ball is zero).

In addition, one way to increase the time required for the game ball to pass through the "first said second route" is to lengthen the travel distance of the game ball required to pass through the "first said second route". It can be considered as

Furthermore, instead of or in addition to this, a configuration may be adopted in which, for example, a delay means for delaying the passage of the game ball is installed on the "first said second route". Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

Furthermore, by installing a delay means as described above in the "first route", the game ball that has flown down to the first route is movable longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the "second route". A configuration may be adopted in which the time taken for the movable body to reach the body is longer.

Means D10. The game according to any one of means D2 to D9, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the means D10, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. I can do it.

Means D11. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means D11, even game balls other than the game balls that entered the timing ball entry means and the game balls that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. That will happen.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means D11, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means D11 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period following the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed. The game machine according to any one of means D2 to D10, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the structure related to the above means D11 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time of the movable body after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means D12. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D11, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means D12, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means D13. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means D1 to D12 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means D13, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means D14. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means D1 to D13, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means D15. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means D1 to D14 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means D15, even during an open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which a release opportunity etc. cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue E. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines include, for example, a guide route for directing game balls that have entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means toward the special ball entry means, and a guide route for directing game balls that have deviated from the guide route to the internal area. Some have a release route (discharge route) for discharging to the outside.

However, in the past, even though the game ball entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball once deviated from the guide route and was guided to the deviated route. It made no contribution to the game and was simply thrown away. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means E1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first route (guidance route) that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route (discharge route) capable of discharging game balls that do not flow down to the first route out of the internal area;
Ball detection means (discharged ball detection means) capable of detecting game balls that have passed through the second route;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a specific processing execution means capable of executing a specific processing advantageous to a player when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the detection of a game ball by the ball detection means.

According to the means E1, based on the detection of game balls ejected via the second route (ejection route), specific processing advantageous to the player, such as making it easier to generate a special gaming state, is executed. be done.

As a result, not only the behavior of the game balls flowing down towards the special ball entry means via the first route (guidance route), but also the behavior of the game balls ejected via the second route can be used to create new gameplay. This can dramatically increase the interest of players.

Means E2. The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected by the ball detection means.

According to the means E2, it becomes possible to execute specific processing advantageous to the player each time a game ball is detected by the ball detection means, so that the interest for the player can be dramatically improved. .

Means E3. comprising lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery processing based on detection by the ball detection means,
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained in the lottery process.

According to the means E3, it is no longer necessary to execute specific processing advantageous to the player every time a game ball is detected by the ball detection means, so that the specific processing is suppressed from becoming monotonous and the specific processing is executed. It is possible to increase the player's expectations for the game. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means E4. comprising a counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detecting means,
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined number.

According to the means E4, even when the number of game balls that deviate from the first route (guide route) and flow to the second route (discharge route) becomes relatively large, a decrease in interest for the player is suppressed. be able to.

Means E5. Counting means for counting the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means;
A lottery process execution means capable of executing a predetermined lottery process when the number of game balls counted by the counting means exceeds a predetermined number,
The gaming machine according to means E1, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained in the lottery process.

According to the means E5, there is no need to execute specific processing advantageous to the player every time the number of game balls detected by the ball detection means exceeds a predetermined number, so that it has the same effect as the means E3. The effect is produced.

Means E6. In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; Equipped with a movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
The specific processing execution means is
Any one of the means E1 to E5 is characterized in that the movable body control means is equipped with a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state when the predetermined condition is satisfied. gaming machines.

According to the means E6, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means E7. comprising route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state;
The gaming machine according to means E6, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flown down the first route.

Under the configuration according to the means E6, if, for example, a plurality of (for example, two) game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time when the above predetermined condition is about to be met (the two game balls are almost spaced apart from each other) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the balls continue to flow down without leaving a gap (the same applies hereinafter), all of these multiple game balls will be sent to the second route (discharge). If the ball goes towards the special ball entry means, there is a risk that even if the movable body is in an advantageous state, a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means E7, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or Since it is possible to direct one game ball to the first route, such as flowing down one of the second routes and the second subsequent game ball flowing down the other route, the above-mentioned movable body The provided effects will be more successful.

As a result, the player will be able to watch with anticipation the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means, thereby further increasing his interest.

Means E8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to means E6 or E7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to use.

According to the means E8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means E9. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The means E6 or E7 is characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among a plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. gaming machines.

According to the means E9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means E10. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the movable body will be activated to the next game ball that has passed through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be operable.

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means E10, the game ball other than the game ball that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) as the game ball that was involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition (last) also has a higher The player will be given a chance to enter the ball into the special ball entry method with probability.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable entry ball means together with the game balls that were involved in (last) the establishment of the predetermined condition, or even if the game balls that were involved in the establishment of the predetermined condition (last) and the other game balls do not enter the variable entry means, Even if other game balls that entered the ball means do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means will have a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. This will give you a chance to play the ball.

Thereby, even after confirming that the predetermined condition has been met, the player can actively play the game in order to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Therefore, the above means E10 is defined as ``When the game ball that has passed through the specific area is detected by the ball detection means and the predetermined condition is met, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is in the open state. The game machine according to any one of means E6 to E9, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during the open state period.'' .

Note that the configuration related to the above means E10 adjusts the time from the time when the predetermined condition is established until the movable body starts operating, the operating period of the movable body after the start of operation, etc. under the configuration related to each of the above-mentioned means. By doing so, it can be easily realized without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means E11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means E6 to E10 is configured to be able to execute control to cause the movable body to perform the predetermined operation as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means E11, even during an open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which a release opportunity etc. cannot be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means E12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means E1 to E10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Conventional issue F. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, since conventional variable ball entry means have multiple winning holes (specific areas), such as on both the left and right sides, game balls may enter the variable ball entry means from multiple directions at the same time. there were.

Therefore, even if multiple game balls enter the variable ball entry means at a timing advantageous to the player, depending on the timing of the entry of the game balls, they may interfere with each other, and even one ball may be specially entered. There is a risk that the game ball will not flow down the route desired by the player, such as not heading toward the ball means, and the player's interest will decrease.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase interest.

Means F1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that do not flow down to the first route to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route;
The game ball is provided so that its state can change between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is more advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and the game ball that has flowed down to the first route. A movable body that can cause a change in behavior (that can act on the game ball),
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; Equipped with
The specific area is provided in only one place through which game balls can pass one by one,
A game machine characterized in that a ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means", for example, "a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entrance means can be detected" ``When a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means,'' or ``A predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means. This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through an activated lottery.

According to the means F1, by providing a movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body moves in a predetermined manner based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. Since the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the game will be in an advantageous state, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In particular, this means is configured to include route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entering means to the first route or the second route.

As a result, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes will flow down to either the first route or the second route. The above-mentioned movable body is provided in order to make it possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. This will result in more effective effects.

As a result, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the occurrence of a special game state may be improved by entering a plurality of game balls into the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time.

In addition, with this means, the specific area is provided in only one place through which the game balls can pass one by one, and the ball path that can guide the game balls one by one to the specific area is provided in only one place. Therefore, the game balls can be appropriately guided one by one to the route distribution means. Thereby, the above-mentioned effects will be more reliably achieved.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first game ball that precedes and the second game ball that follows flow down? Since the results will vary depending on the route, the player will have a sense of anticipation and will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means F2. The gaming machine according to means F1, characterized in that a game ball that does not pass through the ball path cannot pass through the specific area.

If a game ball that does not pass through the ball path is configured to be able to pass through a specific area, the game ball that does not pass through the ball path will pass through the ball path and flow down toward the specific area. There is a risk that it may interfere with On the other hand, according to the means F2, the game ball cannot pass through the specific area unless it passes through the ball path, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above problem and further enhance the effect of the means F1. can.

Means F3. The gaming machine according to means F1 or F2, wherein the ball passage is provided on either the left side or the right side of the opening/closing member outside the variable ball entry means.

According to the means F3, the game balls can be guided one by one to the opening/closing member. Thereby, it is possible to suppress problems such as a plurality of game balls entering the opening/closing member at the same time and causing the balls to bite.

Means F4. The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F3, wherein the ball passage is provided so that only game balls shot with a predetermined intensity by the shooting means can pass therethrough.

According to the means F4, the ball path is provided only at a position (for example, on the right side of the variable ball entry means) through which only the game ball fired with a predetermined intensity (for example, right-handed) by the firing means can pass. The effects of the means F1 etc. can be further enhanced.

Means F5. Means F1 to F4, characterized in that the means F1 to F4 are provided with a regulating means for allowing the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while regulating the pass of the game ball in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction in the specific area. The gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means F5, for example, when two game balls pass through the ball path in succession, the behavior of the first game ball, etc. that precedes the first game ball and the following game ball. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as the second game ball colliding with each other and interfering with each other. As a result, the effects of the means F1 and the like can be further enhanced. Here, the above-mentioned regulating means includes one whose state changes from the first state to the second state depending on the force received from the game ball.

Means F6. The game according to any one of means F1 to F5, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the means F6, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. I can do it.

Means F7. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above means F7, even game balls other than game balls that entered the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means at the same time (in a continuous ball state) are treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. That will happen.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means F7, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the preceding first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the means F7 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed." The game machine according to any one of means F1 to F6, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the structure related to the above means F7 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means to the time when the movable body starts operating. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means F8. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means F8, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means F9. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means F1 to F8 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means F9, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means F10. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means F1 to F9, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means F11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any of the means F1 to F10 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means F11, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issue G. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the performance related to the movable body is monotonous, such as the movable body performing a predetermined action every time, for example, when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest (feeling of excitement) in the movement of the movable body tends to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means G1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
special ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a first opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) after passing through the specific area;
a first opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) after passing through the specific area;
a second opportunity ball entry detection means capable of detecting a game ball that has entered the second opportunity ball entry means;
a first flow route that allows a game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second flow route that allows the game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means;
Route distribution means (downstream route distribution means) capable of distributing the destination of the game ball that has passed through the specific area to at least the first downstream route or the second downstream route;
A movable body that is capable of changing its state at least between an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, and that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that has passed through the specific area. and,
the predetermined advantageous state in which the movable body is caused to perform a predetermined operation when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means; A movable body control means capable of controlling the movable body,
In a specific state, the rate at which the predetermined advantageous state can be reached is different depending on whether the game ball flows down to the first downstream route and the case where the game ball flows down to the second downstream route. A gaming machine with special features.

In addition, when "a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of the game ball into the first opportunity ball entering means or the second opportunity ball entering means", for example, "the first opportunity entry means" "When a game ball is detected by the ball detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means," or "based on the ball entry detection by the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means." This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result is obtained through a predetermined lottery result (winning result).

According to the means G1, by providing the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing various opportunity ball entry means (various opportunity ball entry detection means) for detecting movement triggers of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the game ball that enters the internal area can be detected. Since it is determined based on the behavior whether or not the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Furthermore, the present means is configured such that the rate at which the predetermined advantageous state can be achieved is different between when the game ball flows down to the first downstream route and when the game ball flows down to the second downstream route. There is. This allows the player to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing interest.

Means G2. The time or distance required for the game ball that has passed through the specific area to flow down the first flow route and reach the first opportunity ball entry means, and The gaming machine according to means G1, characterized in that the time or distance required for the ball to flow down the downstream route and reach the second opportunity entry means is different.

According to the means G2, the period until the movable body can reach a predetermined advantageous state is variable between when the game ball flows down to the first downstream route and when the game ball flows down to the second downstream route. It can be done.

This eliminates the need for the movable body to always operate at a fixed timing, so it is possible to suppress monotony of game performance using the movable body. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Means G3. The gaming machine according to means G1 or G2, further comprising a delay means for delaying the falling of the game ball in the first falling route or the second falling route.

According to the means G3, even if the lengths of the first downstream route and the second downstream route are relatively short, by providing the above delay means, it takes a long time until the game ball reaches the predetermined position. can be relatively long. As a result, it is possible to effectively utilize the gaming space. Here, as a delay means, for example, a stage or a croon, etc., where the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or a configuration in which the game ball moves forward after going around the same place, or a rib, etc., that stops the momentum of the game ball and delays the time. An example is a configuration in which the game ball advances forward.

Means G4. comprising a lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery process based on ball entry detection by the first opportunity ball entry detection means or the second opportunity ball entry detection means,
The predetermined operating condition is configured to be satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process,
In the specific state, the rate at which the predetermined lottery result is obtained when a game ball is detected by the first opportunity ball entry detection means and when it is detected by the second opportunity ball entry detection means. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the numbers are different from each other.

According to the means G4, the determination as to whether or not to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state is performed by software by the lottery process execution means (operation lottery process).

This eliminates the need to perform an action every time in response to a predetermined opportunity, so it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Furthermore, in the present means, the percentage of obtaining the predetermined lottery result is different between when the game ball is detected by the first chance ball entering detection means and when the game ball is detected by the second chance ball entry detection means. Since they are configured differently, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing interest.

Means G5. The route distribution means is
The state can be changed between a first state in which the game ball can flow down to the first flow route and a second state in which the game ball can flow down to the second flow route,
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G4, characterized in that in the specific state, the rate at which the route distribution means is in the first state and the rate at which it is in the second state are different.

According to the above means G5, the behavior of the game ball can be diversified, and the player will be able to pay more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, so that it is possible to further improve interest. can. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the rate at which the route distribution means is in the first state and the rate at which the route distribution unit is in the second state can be changed periodically or randomly.

Means G6. a predetermined route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
In the specific state, the game ball includes a route allocating means (upstream route allocating means) capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the predetermined route,
The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G5, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball that has flown down the predetermined route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality (for example, two) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the player continues to play consecutive balls, the movable body will Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means G6, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the predetermined route or , the game ball is flown down either the first flow route or the second flow route, and the subsequent second game ball is flown down the other route. Since it becomes possible to direct the object to both directions, the effect of providing the above-mentioned movable body becomes more effective.

Means G7. The game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means (the first opportunity ball entry means and/or the second opportunity ball entry means) cannot flow down to the special ball entry means (ball cannot enter). A gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured as follows.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the means G7, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball that is acted upon by the movable body are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. I can do it.

Means G8. When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means (the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means), the next time the game ball enters the ball, The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G7, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area.

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the means G8, a game ball other than the game ball that entered the timing ball entry means and the game ball that entered the ball at the same time (in a continuous ball state) can be treated with a higher probability. The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. That will happen.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means G8, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down a predetermined route, or one of the first downstream route or the second downstream route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed the specific area next) flows down the other route. Then, the game ball that has flown down to the first falling route or the second falling route enters the opportunity ball entry means (the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means) and enters the movable body. is activated, the movable body is not yet activated at the time when the game ball that has flown down the predetermined route passes the movable body, and even if the game ball that has flown down the predetermined route does not enter the special ball entry means. Then, during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means, the game ball that enters the internal area (the next game ball that passed through the specific area) flows down to a predetermined route, and due to the action of the movable body, a special ball enters the internal area. It is also possible to provide a configuration in which a chance is given for the ball to enter the ball entry means.

Therefore, the above means G8 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means (the first opportunity ball entry means or the second opportunity ball entry means), the game ball Any of the means G1 to G7 characterized in that the movable body is configured to be able to act on the game ball that has passed through the opening/closing member during an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the opening/closing member through which the ball has passed. It may also be stated as "A gaming machine described in the above."

In addition, the configuration related to the above means G8 is based on the configuration related to each of the above-mentioned means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the trigger ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from when the movable body starts operating after the start of operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means G9. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G8, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means G9, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means G10. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means G1 to G9 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means G10, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means G11. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means G1 to G10, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means G12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means G1 to G11 is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means G12, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional subject H. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

Some of these pachinko machines are equipped with a movable body that causes a change in the behavior of game balls that enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

However, in conventional gaming machines, the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing each time, for example, when a game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

Therefore, conventionally, the timing of the movement of the movable body could be grasped by the player, and there was a possibility that a fraudulent act could be carried out, for example, by vibrating the gaming machine in accordance with the timing.

Furthermore, the effects associated with movable objects tend to be monotonous, and in this respect, further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention was made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suppress fraudulent activities and increase interest.

Means H1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
an opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter (or pass through) the specific area;
The behavior of the game ball that passes through the specific area is provided so that the state can change between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state. A movable body that can cause a change in (that can act on the game ball);
a movable body control means capable of executing control to cause the movable body to perform a predetermined operation to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the trigger ball entry means; ,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: opening/closing pattern determining means for determining which opening/closing pattern to execute among a plurality of opening/closing patterns when performing opening/closing control of the opening/closing member.

In addition, "when a predetermined operating condition is established based on the entry of a game ball into the opportunity ball entry means", for example, "a game ball that enters the opportunity ball entrance means can be detected" ``When a game ball is detected by the opportunity ball entry detection means,'' or ``A predetermined operation lottery is performed based on the ball entry detection by the opportunity ball entry detection means. This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through an activated lottery.

According to the above means H1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, by providing the trigger ball entry means for detecting the movement trigger of the movable body in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, the movable body moves in a predetermined manner based on the behavior of the game ball that enters the internal area. Since the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the game will be in an advantageous state, the player pays more attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

In particular, in this means, by providing a plurality of opening/closing patterns of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member), the timing at which the game ball enters the variable ball entry means changes. Even if the movable body is configured to operate at a constant timing, the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball that enters the internal area of the variable ball entry means will vary. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body.

In addition, when changing the rate of balls entering the special ball entering means, etc., for example, there is a method of providing a plurality of operating patterns of the movable body and changing the selection probability of the pattern to change the rate of balls entering the special ball entering means, etc. It is also possible to change the operation mode of a movable body that changes the behavior of a game ball by performing a predetermined action, and adjust the rate of balls entering the special ball entry means to a desired ball entry rate. The work is extremely difficult and requires repeated trial and error. In this respect, according to the present means, it is possible to more easily change the rate of balls entering the special ball entering means.

Means H2. When a predetermined opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns is performed, the movable body is configured to be more likely to be in the predetermined advantageous state than when the predetermined opening/closing pattern is not performed. A gaming machine according to feature H1.

According to the above means H2, for example, if a predetermined opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing member is opened at a relatively high rate is performed, more game balls can enter the variable ball entry means at the same time. Therefore, due to the synergistic effect with the configuration in which the movable body is likely to be in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation level of the ball entering the special entry means is increased, and the game increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. Can perform. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H3. Lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operation lottery processing based on the ball entering the opportunity ball entry means;
Display means that starts a variable display based on the entry of a ball into the triggered ball entry means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on the lottery result of the operation lottery process;
a holding means capable of holding the fluctuating display on the display means for a predetermined number of times;
The gaming machine according to means H1 or H2, characterized in that the operating condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the operating lottery process.

According to the above means H3, the movable body does not need to perform an action every time in accordance with a predetermined opportunity, so that the effect of the above means H1 etc. is enhanced, and the monotony of the performance related to the movable body is suppressed. It is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the movement of the body.

In addition, in this means, by providing the holding means, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the movable body operates. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means H4. Any one of the means H1 to H3 is characterized in that it includes an operation pattern determining means for determining which of a plurality of operation patterns is to be executed when the movable body is brought into the advantageous state. The game machine described.

According to the means H4, by providing a plurality of operating patterns of the movable body, the effects of the means H1 and the like can be further enhanced. Although it is extremely difficult to adjust the ball entry rate into the special ball entry means to a desired ball entry rate, it is possible to diversify the behavior of the game ball and improve the interest, as described above. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts.

Means H5. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H4, wherein at least one opening/closing pattern among the plurality of opening/closing patterns includes a plurality of opening/closing operations.

According to the means H5, since the opening/closing member opens relatively more often, more game balls can be entered into the variable ball entry means at the same time. As a result, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation of the ball entering the special ball entry means.

Means H6. According to means H5, at least one opening/closing operation among the plurality of opening/closing operations has an opening time longer than a firing interval (for example, 0.6 seconds) of the game ball by the firing means. gaming machines.

According to the means H6, the effect of the means H5 can be further enhanced.

Means H7. a first route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the special ball entry means;
a second route that allows game balls that have passed through the specific area to flow down to the opportunity ball entry means;
and route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route in a specific state,
The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H6, wherein the movable body is capable of causing a change in the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first route.

Under the configuration of each of the above means, if a plurality (for example, two) of game balls enter the variable ball entry means at the same time (two game balls flow down continuously with almost no gap between them) Even if a situation that is advantageous to the player occurs, such as a situation in which the player continues to play consecutive balls, the movable body will Even if the player is in an advantageous state, there is a risk that a problem may occur, such as not a single game ball entering the special ball entry means.

On the other hand, according to the means H7, for example, when two game balls consecutively enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means at the same time, the first game ball that precedes the first route or It is possible to direct the game ball to both the special ball entry means and the opportunity ball entry means, such that the game ball flows down one of the second routes and the subsequent second game ball flows down the other route. Therefore, the effect of providing the movable body becomes more effective.

Furthermore, when two game balls enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means in succession, which route will the first game ball that precedes and the second game ball that follows flow down? Since the results will vary depending on the route, the player will have a sense of anticipation and will pay closer attention to the behavior of the game balls distributed by the route distribution means. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means H8. The game according to any one of means H1 to H7, characterized in that the game ball that enters (or passes through) the opportunity ball entry means cannot flow down (or cannot enter) into the special ball entry means. Machine.

If the game ball that has passed through the opportunity ball entry means is configured to flow down toward the special ball entry means, there is a risk that the timing at which the movable body acts on the game ball will always be constant. As a result, the result of the action of the movable body will always be the same, and there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease. Furthermore, there is a risk that fraudulent acts such as vibrating the gaming machine in synchronization with the timing of the movement of the movable body may become more likely. In addition, there is a risk that other game balls flowing down toward the special ball entry means without passing through the opportunity ball entry means may be obstructed.

On the other hand, according to the means H8, the game ball that enters the opportunity ball entry means and the game ball on which the movable body acts are always different, so that the occurrence of the various problems described above can be suppressed. I can do it.

Means H9. A configuration in which when a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the movable body can act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area after the game ball passes through the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that:

In addition, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine in which game balls are fired intermittently at predetermined intervals, a plurality of shots are fired to the variable ball entry means during one open state period in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state. Situations advantageous to the player, such as game balls hitting the ball consecutively, do not occur frequently. In particular, in a situation where the nails of the game board are adjusted in the game hall, making it difficult for the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means, such a situation that is advantageous to the player may not occur at all. could be.

In other words, if multiple game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means consecutively at the same time (for example, during one open state period of the variable ball entry means), they will be affected by the action (assist) of the movable body. Therefore, in a gaming machine configured to prevent game balls from entering the special ball entry means with a higher probability, when a plurality of game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means in succession at the same time, There is a risk that players' expectations will fade and their interest will decline.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means H9, even for game balls other than game balls that entered the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means at the same time (in a continuous ball state), there is a higher probability that a special The player is given a chance to enter the ball into the ball entry means.

In other words, even if other game balls do not enter the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means, or even if a game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means enters the variable ball entry means together with the game ball that entered the opportunity ball entry means. Even if other game balls do not enter the special ball entry means, game balls that subsequently enter the variable ball entry means are given a higher probability of entering the special ball entry means. That will happen.

As a result, even after the player has confirmed that the game ball has entered the trigger ball entry means, the player cannot actively play the game in an attempt to cause the game ball to enter the variable ball entry means. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, according to the means H9, two game balls enter the internal area during the predetermined open state period of the variable ball entry means, and the first game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area first) The ball) flows down either the first route or the second route, and the subsequent second game ball (the game ball that passed through the specific area next) flows down the other route, and then goes to the second route. In the case where the game ball that has flown down enters the trigger ball entry means and the movable body is activated, the movable body has not yet operated and the movable body has not yet operated at the time when the game ball that has flowed down to the first route passes the movable body. Even if the game ball that flows down to the special ball entry means does not enter the special ball entry means, after that, the game ball that enters the internal area during the next open state period of the variable ball entry means (the game ball that passes through the specific area next time) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the game ball) flows down to the first route and is given a chance to enter the special ball entry means by the action of the movable body.

Therefore, the above-mentioned means H9 is defined as "When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the opportunity ball entry means, the opening/closing member through which the game ball has passed is opened/closed in an open state period subsequent to the open state period of the open/close member through which the game ball has passed." A game machine according to any one of means H1 to H8, characterized in that the movable body is configured to act on a game ball that has passed through the member.''

In addition, the configuration related to the above means H9 is based on the structure related to each of the above means, and the time from the time when a game ball enters the opportunity ball entry means until the movable body starts operating, and the time from the time when the movable body starts operating after the start of the operation. By adjusting the operating period etc., it is possible to easily achieve this without having to enter a plurality of game balls into the variable ball entry means at the same time.

Means H10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H9, characterized in that it is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means H10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special game state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means H11. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means H1 to H10 characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means H11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

Means H12. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control means capable of performing an opening/closing operation of the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) a predetermined number of times when a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is established based on entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; A gaming machine according to any one of means H1 to H11, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

In addition, if "a predetermined starting condition (opening trigger) is satisfied based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "the game ball entering the starting ball entering means can be detected". Under the configuration, "when a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detection means" and "a predetermined starting lottery based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detection means" This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained through the initial lottery.

Means H13. a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. and means;
The movable body control means includes:
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. Any one of the means H1 to H12 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform the predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means H13, even during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means) in which no release opportunity etc. can be obtained conventionally, the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Conventional issues I. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a variable ball entering means is provided which becomes an open state based on a game ball entering the starting ball entering means, and a game ball that enters an internal area of the variable ball entering means is provided within the internal area. Pachinko machines are known in which a special game state advantageous to the player occurs when a ball enters a special ball entry means (V winning hole) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 11-197312).

However, in such a pachinko machine, in order to cause the game ball to enter the internal area of the variable ball entry means, it is necessary to continue firing the game ball into the gaming area even after the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. be. In such a case, conventionally, the variable ball entry means has already been released, so even if a game ball newly enters the starting ball entry means at this timing, no opening opportunity etc. is obtained and the prize ball is not awarded. It was just that. As a result, there is a risk that players' interest in the game may decline, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can dramatically increase the interest of players.

Means I1. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It has an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the internal area, and a closed state in which the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the internal area, variable ball entry means that allows only game balls that have passed through a specific region to enter the internal region;
A special ball entry means that allows a game ball that enters the internal area to enter (or pass through);
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state imparting means capable of imparting a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
a starting ball entering means into which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter;
Opening/closing control capable of executing an open game state in which the variable ball entering means (opening/closing member) is opened in a predetermined manner when a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means. means and
In the internal region of the variable ball entry means, the variable ball entry means is provided so as to be changeable between at least an advantageous state (special state) that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state (normal state) that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state; A movable body that can cause a change in the behavior of the game ball (that can act on the game ball),
A game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined opening game state in which the variable ball entering means is caused to execute a predetermined opening based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. A gaming machine comprising a movable body control means capable of executing control to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined operation as a benefit that can be given when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, when "a predetermined opening trigger is established based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entering means", for example, "a starting entering ball capable of detecting the game ball that has entered the starting ball entering means" ``When a game ball is detected by the starting ball entering detecting means'' or ``a predetermined starting lottery is conducted based on the ball entering detection by the starting ball entering detecting means'', This includes cases where a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained in the initial lottery.

According to the above means I1, by providing the movable body in the inner region of the variable ball entry means, it is possible to cause a change in the behavior of the game ball that enters the inner region. For example, by bringing the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state, it is possible to perform a game performance that increases the player's expectations for the granting of a special game state, such as increasing the expectation that the ball will enter the special ball entry means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this means, a game ball is newly inserted into the starting ball entering means during a predetermined opening game state in which the variable entering ball means is caused to execute a predetermined release based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entering means. The configuration is such that control can be executed to bring the movable body into a predetermined advantageous state by causing the movable body to perform a predetermined action as a benefit that can be given when a ball enters the ball and satisfies a predetermined condition.

As a result, the movable body performs a predetermined operation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means even during the open game state (during the release period of the variable ball entry means) in which release opportunities etc. cannot be obtained conventionally. A situation may arise that is advantageous to a player who does.

Conventionally, some players have thought that when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entering means at the opening timing of the variable ball entering means related to the starting ball entering means. When this is known, the game ball launch is temporarily stopped at that point to prevent the game ball from entering the starting ball entry means unnecessarily during the open game state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means). There are also players.

On the other hand, according to the present means, after the game ball enters the starting ball entering means, even in such a situation, the player can newly enter the starting ball entering means in order to receive assistance from the movable body. Since the game ball continues to be fired in search of the game ball entering the ball, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the game machine.

Furthermore, the benefits given to the player differ depending on whether the timing at which the game ball enters the starting ball entry means is in the open gaming state (during the open period of the variable ball entry means), so it is possible to diversify the game. can be achieved.

As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means I2. The movable body control means causes the movable body to perform the predetermined operation when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means and a predetermined condition is satisfied during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open game state. The gaming machine according to means I1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute control to bring the predetermined advantageous state into the predetermined advantageous state.

Conventionally, in a pachinko machine, a variable ball entry device is used for a predetermined period of time from the time when the variable ball entry device is in the open state (or from the time the game ball enters the internal area of the variable ball entry device that is in the open state). This is set as a standby time (remaining ball monitoring period) for waiting for a predetermined detection switch to detect a game ball (remaining ball) that has entered the internal area of the means but has not yet been ejected.

However, conventionally, if a new game ball enters the starting ball entry means during this remaining ball monitoring period, prize balls will be paid out, but a lottery based on the entered ball will not be held. , the variable ball entry means is configured so as not to be in an open state.

On the other hand, according to the means I2, even during a predetermined period after the end of the predetermined open game state (during the remaining ball monitoring period), the movable body is activated based on the entry of the game ball into the starting ball entry means. A situation may occur that is advantageous to a player who performs a predetermined action. As a result, the effects of the above means I1 can be further enhanced.

Means I3. The present invention is characterized in that the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means to when the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) starts to open can be changed in a plurality of ways. A gaming machine according to means I1 or I2.

If the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means until the opening of the variable ball entry means is always constant, the game ball enters the starting ball entry means. At this point, the player can easily grasp that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the opening timing of the variable ball entry means related to the starting ball entry, and at that point, the player cannot release the game ball. There is a risk that some players may temporarily stop playing.

Furthermore, if the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means until the opening of the variable ball entry means is always constant, the opening timing of the variable ball entry means may be controlled by the player. There is a risk that the player will easily be able to grasp the timing of the game, and that actions such as shooting game balls at the same time will be easily performed.

On the other hand, according to the above means I3, the opening timing of the variable ball entry means changes, and the variable ball entry means does not always open at a constant timing, so the game performance related to the variable ball entry means is monotonous. It is possible to suppress the As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the variable ball entry means. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as firing a game ball in accordance with the opening timing of the variable ball entry means will be performed. Furthermore, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Means I4. a first display means that starts a variable display based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means, and performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on a lottery result of a predetermined opening lottery process;
a first fluctuation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of fluctuation patterns having different times of fluctuation display related to the first display means;
a first variation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the plurality of variation patterns stored in the first variation pattern storage means based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means; ,
a first display control means for controlling the first display means based on the variation pattern selected by the first variation pattern selection means;
The opening/closing control means is
The game machine according to means I3, characterized in that the game machine is configured to be able to execute the open game state in which the variable ball entry means (opening/closing member) is opened after the first display means displays a stop indication.

According to the above means I4, it is possible to make the variable time variable from when the variable display starts until the stop display is made on the first display means. Utilizing this, it is possible to make variable the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entering means until opening of the variable ball entering means is started.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I3 described above can be realized through relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I5. Lottery processing execution means capable of executing a predetermined operating lottery processing based on a game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof); Equipped with
The gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I4, characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at least when a predetermined lottery result (winning result) is obtained by the activated lottery process.

If the movable body is configured to operate every time a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end of the state), At the time when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the player can easily understand that the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of the movement of the movable body related to the starting ball entry. , there is a risk that some players may temporarily stop shooting the game balls at that point.

According to the above means I5, the movable body does not operate every time a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after its termination). Therefore, it is possible to suppress monotony of effects related to the movable body and increase the player's expectations for the movement of the movable body. As a result, the player's interest can be dramatically improved.

Means I6. The time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined operation of the movable body starts. The gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I3, characterized in that (the time it takes for the movable body to reach the predetermined advantageous state) can be changed in a plurality of ways.

Even if the time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during a predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end of the state) until the predetermined operation of the movable body is started is always constant. In this case, when the game ball enters the starting ball entry means, the game ball cannot enter the special ball entry means at the timing of the operation of the movable body related to the starting ball entry means. There is a risk that some players may easily notice this, and at that point some players may temporarily stop shooting game balls.

In addition, the time from when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end of the state) until the predetermined operation of the movable body is started is always If the timing is constant, the player may easily grasp the timing of the movement of the movable body, and may easily perform actions such as firing a game ball in accordance with the timing.

On the other hand, according to the above means I6, the operation timing of the movable body changes and the movable body does not always operate at a constant timing, so that monotony of game performance using the movable body is suppressed. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the present means, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the operation timing of the movable body. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an action such as firing a game ball in accordance with the operation timing of the movable body will be performed. Furthermore, since the player continues to shoot game balls, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Means I7. The time from when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) until the predetermined operation of the movable body starts. from among a plurality of preset times based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end of the state). The gaming machine according to means I6, characterized in that it is equipped with a set time selection means that can select any one of them.

According to the above means I7, the configuration related to the above means I6 can be realized with relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I8. A variable display is started based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof), and the lottery result of the predetermined operation lottery process is started. a second display means that performs a stop display in a predetermined manner based on;
a second variation pattern storage means for storing a plurality of variation patterns having different times of variation display related to the second display means;
A plurality of patterns stored in the second fluctuation pattern storage means based on the game ball entering the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during a predetermined period after the end thereof) second fluctuation pattern selection means capable of selecting one of the fluctuation patterns;
a second display control means for controlling the second display means based on the variation pattern selected by the second variation pattern selection means;
The movable body control means includes:
The gaming machine according to means I6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute control to bring the movable body into the predetermined advantageous state after the stop display is displayed on the second display means.

According to the means I8, by providing the second display means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that there is a possibility that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state.

Furthermore, the player is nervous because he or she does not know whether the movable object will be in a predetermined advantageous state or not, but he or she watches the behavior of the game ball and the fluctuation display with a sense of expectation that the movable body will be in a predetermined advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to further improve interest.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance related to the movable body and further improve the interest for the players.

In addition, according to the above means I8, it is possible to make variable the variable time from the start of the variable display to the stop display on the second display means. Utilizing this, from the time the game ball enters the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end of the state) until the predetermined operation of the movable body starts. The time can be made variable.

As a result, the configuration related to the means I6 can be realized through relatively simple processing, and control can be simplified.

Means I9. After the end of the predetermined open game state (and/or a predetermined period after the end), the movable body is configured to be able to act on the game ball that has passed through the specific area. A gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I8.

In a game machine configured to allow a game ball to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability under the action (assist) of a movable body, during a predetermined open play state (and/or after the end of the play state) When a game ball enters the starting ball entering means during a predetermined period (at the time of actuation assist lottery), there is a risk that the player's expectations will fade and interest will decline when there are no game balls in the internal area. There is.

On the other hand, according to the means I9, at the time when the game ball enters the starting ball entering means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end), the game ball is placed in the internal area. Even if the game ball does not exist, a game ball that subsequently enters the variable ball entry means opened at a predetermined timing will be given a chance to enter the special ball entry means with a higher probability.

As a result, the player can change the variable even after confirming that the game ball has entered the starting ball entry means during the predetermined open game state (and/or during the predetermined period after the end of the state). It becomes possible to actively play the game in order to cause the game ball to enter the ball entering means. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means I10. When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the game ball enters the special ball entry means more easily than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. The gaming machine according to any one of means I1 to I9, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured to be easy to play.

According to the means I10, when the movable body is in a predetermined advantageous state, the expectation of the ball entering the special ball entry means increases, so a game performance is performed that increases the player's expectations for the granting of the special gaming state, etc. be able to.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

Means I11. The special gaming state granting means is configured to be able to grant a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values to be given to the player,
comprising a type determining means for determining a gaming value to be given when a game ball enters the special ball entering means,
When the movable body is controlled to be in the predetermined advantageous state, the predetermined advantageous state of the plurality of types of special game states is higher than when the movable body is controlled not to be in the predetermined advantageous state. Any of the means I1 to I10 is characterized in that the special gaming state of the type (for example, the most advantageous type for the player among the plurality of types of special gaming states) is configured to be easily determined by the type determining means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means I11, the type of special game state is determined based on the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means.

In addition, when the movable body is controlled to a predetermined advantageous state, the configuration is such that a predetermined type of special game state among multiple types of special game states is easily determined. It is possible to perform a game performance that increases a player's expectations for the provision of a special game state of a type with a high game value.

As a result, the player will be able to pay closer attention to the behavior of the game ball in the internal area of the variable ball entry means, thereby further increasing the player's interest.

In addition, "gaming value" includes, for example, the number of prize balls that can be paid out, the number of special prize states (number of rounds) performed during the special game state, the game mode (high probability mode, etc.) that is given after the special game state, etc. is included.

In addition, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of the means B1 to B13. The configuration of a part or all of any of the above means C1 to C12, the configuration of a part or all of any of the above means D1 to D15, the above means E1 to E12 A part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a part or all of the means G1 to G12, a part or all of the means H1 to G12, The configuration of a part or all of any of H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means B1 to B13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means D1 to D15, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means E1 to E12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means H1 to H13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means A1 to A11, and a configuration of a part or all of the above means B1 to B13. A part or all of any of the means C1 to C12, a part or all of the means D1 to D15, a part or all of the means E1 to D15 A configuration of a part or all of any of the means F1 to F11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means G1 to G12, a configuration of a part or all of the means H1 to G12, At least one of the configurations of a part or all of any of the means H13 and a part or all of any of the means I1 to I11 may be implemented in any combination. .

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing motor) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a A pinball game machine that includes a game area where game balls are guided, and ball entry means (general winning hole, variable winning device, operating hole, etc.) arranged in the game area.

(b) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine having a gaming area extending substantially vertically. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing motor) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and a A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) in which the game ball is guided and extends substantially vertically, and each ball entry means (general winning hole, A pinball game machine is equipped with a variable prize winning device, an operating port, etc., and is configured such that the behavior of game balls flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

(c) The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

[Second embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to a second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with the first embodiment described above (same components, same processing contents, etc.) will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals. Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention (pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment) includes a "rotating body" as the "rotating means" of the present invention.

FIG. 50 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 51 is a perspective view, and FIG. 52 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 53 is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame 12, game board 30, etc. FIG. 54 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 55 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, back pack unit 203, etc. are opened. However, in FIG. 52, for convenience, nails and various accessories as route changing means arranged on the game board 30 surface, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 52 etc., the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

As shown in FIG. 55, etc., the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 50). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 54) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 54). In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 52, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 50, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is now possible. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

In addition, a performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower tray 15 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The production button 125 is configured so that the player can press it (press it downward). Further, inside the lower plate 15, an operation detection switch (not shown) is provided as an operation detection means for detecting a pressing operation of the production button 125. When the production button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to a sub-control device 262, which will be described later. Thereby, when the player presses the performance button 125, a predetermined performance is performed on the performance display device 42, etc., or the content of the performance is changed, as will be described later.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and projects toward the front. The handle 18, which serves as an operating means that can be operated by the player, includes, for example, a base fixed to the front frame set 14, and a rotary operating section as a first operating section that is rotatably assembled to the base. , a variable resistor as operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the rotary operation section, a firing stop switch as a second operation section that can select whether or not to launch the game ball into the game area, etc. .

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as "launching device") 60 as a launching means to be described later while arranging them in a line. In addition, when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication path 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 as operation means that can be operated by the player. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19. In addition, in order to clarify the ownership of the game balls used at the game hall, certain information that can identify the game hall is written on them by engraving, etc., and game balls brought in from other game halls cannot be used. This prevents fraudulent activities, etc. Further, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Further, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball extraction button 123 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Furthermore, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting or blinking according to changes in the gaming state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach. For example, a frame lamp 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided around the periphery of the window portion 101. Additionally, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the frame lamp 102, which are turned on in the event of a predetermined error. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the upper part of each error display lamp 104 in the frame lamp 102, corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 52) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIG. 53. At the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a firing device 60 and a firing rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after being fired from the firing device 60. installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device having a plunger as a movable member is employed as the firing device 60.

In the present embodiment, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from being launched based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the firing device 60 is allowed to launch.

A ball feeding device 63 is provided above the firing device 60. The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by a driving means such as a solenoid.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 52 and 53 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12. ) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like and almost closes the exit of the dispensing passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear ends of the lower plate communication path 71 and the upper plate communication path 73. In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective entrances of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 and the payout passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance apart, and the gap between them is replaced by the game ball. is allowed to pass.

In addition, since the entrance of the lower tray communication path 71 and the entrance of the upper tray communication path 73 are provided adjacent to each other, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are full of game balls, the balls are not put out. The game balls flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and are delivered to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication path 71.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) at the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 serving as the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 53. The game board 30 in this embodiment is based on a transparent plate, which is a light-transmitting member formed into a flat plate shape from a resin material having light-transmitting properties, such as polycarbonate, acrylic resin, and ABS resin. (game board main body). Here, "transparent" does not only mean that objects existing in the rear area of the game board 30 can be seen in a completely transparent state, but also that at least a portion of light can be transmitted and the presence of the object can be seen. It may also include a so-called semi-transparent state.

With this configuration, the player can view various objects such as lamps and display devices arranged in the rear area of the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light emitting means are arranged at the rear position of a predetermined area in the gaming area, and the player , the light emitted from the LED can be seen from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. Incidentally, the LED board 48A and the like are controlled to light up and blink in a predetermined light emitting manner in response to various game performances, and serve to enhance the performance effect during the game.

Furthermore, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 formed of a band-shaped metal plate, and guide means for guiding the game ball fired from the firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. A rail 50 is attached. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left in FIG. 53) of the inner rail component 51. This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 53) of the outer rail component 52. As a result, the game ball fired with more than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 54 as a movement regulating means and is returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launching device 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes through the return ball prevention member 53 as a return regulating means, the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the gaming area.

In addition, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a space for dropping game balls that have fallen through the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed that guides the ball to the dish 15. As a result, if a game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. be discharged.

The game board 30 includes a general winning opening (general winning section) 31, a variable winning device (big winning opening) 32, an upper starting winning opening 33YA, a lower starting winning opening 33YB, a through gate 34, a variable display unit 35, and a first The special display device 43L, the second special display device 43R, etc. are arranged so as to be fitted into attachment holes formed through the transparent plate.

Furthermore, in the front area of the game board 30, that is, in the game area formed on the front side of the game board 30, in order to allocate the falling direction of the game ball in a predetermined area and guide the game ball to a predetermined position, A large number of nails 49, windmills 57, etc. are arranged. The windmill 57 is a rotating body that rotates when a game ball that moves relative to itself comes into contact with it and acts on the flow of the game ball, and changes its state between a rotating state and a stopped state. For example, the windmill 57 includes a shaft member whose rear end side is directly or indirectly fixed to the game board 30, a central cylindrical portion through which the front end side of the shaft member is inserted, and a shaft member extending radially outward from the central cylindrical portion. It has a plurality of extended contact pieces as actuated parts and a decorative disc part which is circular plate-shaped in front view and is provided at the front end of the central cylindrical part, and the game ball comes into contact with the contact pieces. By receiving an external force, it rotates with the front-rear direction as the axial direction. Of course, the configuration of the windmill 57 is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted.

The game balls guided to the game area flow down through various paths while having their flow direction and rotation direction changed by nails 49 and the like. Then, some of the plurality of game balls guided to the game area are guided to the windmill 57 while moving relatively through various routes, and the windmill 57 divides the falling routes to the left and right. Here, in the first mode in which the game ball passes on the left side of the windmill 57, and when the game ball acts on the contact piece in the first close state, the windmill 57 moves in the counterclockwise direction, which is the first mode of operation. Perform a rotational motion to . On the other hand, when the game ball passes on the right side of the windmill 57 in the second mode and the game ball acts on the contact piece in the second close state, the windmill 57 moves clockwise in the second mode of operation. Performs rotational motion.

Under such a configuration, for example, game balls distributed to the right side by a windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the left windmill 57) provided in the left side area of the variable display unit 35 are distributed to the left side by the left windmill 57. Compared to a game ball, it is easier to be guided toward the upper starting prize opening 33YA by the nail 49 or the like. On the other hand, the game balls distributed to the right side by the windmill 57 (hereinafter referred to as the right windmill 57) provided in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 are compared to the game balls distributed to the left side by the right windmill 57. , it becomes easier to be guided to the variable winning device 32.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the left windmill 57 rather than the case where the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game ball passes through the left side of the left windmill 57. When passing through the right side of the ball, the proportion of game balls guided to the upper starting prize opening 33YA is higher than when the left windmill 57 rotates clockwise and the game ball passes through the right side of the left windmill 57. When the left windmill 57 rotates counterclockwise and the game balls pass through the left side of the left windmill 57, the proportion of game balls guided to the general winning slot 31 increases.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the gaming area is widely expanded in the left and right direction, by providing the windmill 57 etc., the gaming ball can be moved to the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the variable winning device 32 etc. It is constructed so that it is easy to guide the person to the destination. In addition, the nails 49 and the like are adjusted in advance on the game board 30 so that winnings to the top starting prize opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, etc. occur with a moderate probability.

In this embodiment, the windmills 57 are provided in the left side area and the right side area of the variable display unit 35, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only one of the left windmill 57 or the right windmill 57 is provided. It is also possible to have a configuration including the following. Furthermore, when the game board 30 is configured based on a transparent plate as in the present embodiment, at least a portion of the windmill 57 such as a decorative disc portion is configured as a transparent portion using a transparent resin material or the like. You may. The relative positional relationship between the windmill 57 and the game ball is a first positional relationship in which at least a part of the windmill 57 and at least a part of the game ball do not overlap, and a first positional relationship where at least a part of the windmill 57 and the game ball are in a non-adjacent state. The positional relationship changes to a second positional relationship, which is a close state in which at least a portion thereof overlaps. Therefore, when the transparent part is provided, in the first positional relationship in which the game ball does not pass through the windmill 57, the light transmitted through the game board 30 is visible to the player through the transparent part of the windmill 57. That will happen. On the other hand, in the second positional relationship in which the game ball passes through the windmill 57, a part of the game ball that overlaps with the transparent part of the windmill 57 blocks a part of the light that has passed through the game board 30, and also Light such as external light is irradiated from the front through the part of the game ball.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with winning detection switches as detection means for detecting game balls that have won into the various winning holes, corresponding to various winning holes (ball entering means) such as the general winning hole 31. There is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. In addition, a first starting winning switch 224A is provided in the upper starting winning opening 33YA, and a second starting winning switch 224B is provided in the lower starting winning opening 33YB. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

As is well known, when a game ball wins (balls entered) into various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning hole 33YA, and the lower starting winning hole 33YB, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the (or lower tray 15). For example, if there is a prize in the upper starting prize opening 33YA, there will be 3 prizes, if there is a winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, one prize will be awarded, and if there is a winning in the general winning opening 31, there will be 10 prizes. When there is a win in the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15). Here, the upper starting winning hole 33YA may constitute a first starting ball entering means, the lower starting winning hole 33YB may constitute a second starting ball entering means, and the variable winning device 32 may constitute a specific ball entering means. . Further, a state in which a game ball enters a predetermined winning hole such as the upper start winning hole 33YA may be considered as an advantageous state. For example, the first advantageous state is a state in which a game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA and three prize balls are paid out, and the first advantageous state is a state in which a game ball enters the general winning hole 31 and ten prize balls are paid out. It may also be an advantageous state of 2. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the gaming area through this out port 36. .

The variable winning device 32 includes a grand prize opening (code omitted) into which game balls can be won, a rectangular flat opening/closing plate (great winning opening opening/closing member) 32a as an opening/closing member for opening and closing the grand prize opening, and the opening/closing plate. It is equipped with a solenoid for the big prize opening (not shown) that opens and closes the opening/closing portion 32a.

In normal times when a predetermined condition is not met, the variable winning device 32 is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, but when a predetermined condition is met, such as when a jackpot or small win, which will be described later, occurs. In this case, by energizing the grand prize opening solenoid, the opening/closing plate 32a is tilted forward using its lower side as a pivot axis, and the game ball enters the opening state where it can enter the grand prize opening.

The upper starting prize opening 33YA allows game balls to be won at all times. On the other hand, the lower starting prize opening 33YB is provided with an opening/closing accessory 37Y as an opening/closing winning assistance device.

The opening/closing accessory 37Y includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37Ya serving as opening/closing members that rotate and displace in the left-right direction about the lower end side, and a starting prize opening solenoid (not shown) that drives the movable blades 37Ya to open and close. , the movable blade 37Ya opens and closes in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition, thereby creating an open state in which the game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB, and a gaming ball entering the lower starting winning opening 33YB. The state can be changed between a closed state and an impossible closed state.

As described above, the upper start winning hole 33YA and the lower starting winning hole 33YB are provided with a first starting winning switch 224A and a second starting winning switch 224B as detection means for detecting winning game balls, respectively. Then, when a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224A, 224B, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and the special display devices 43L, 43R and the effect display device 42 (to be described later) The structure is such that variable displays and predetermined effects are performed. Here, if you win in the lottery, you will be given a jackpot status or the like.

Hereinafter, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 86, in this embodiment, the jackpot types are "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", and "JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot".

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds) with "Long Open" as one special prize state.

In this embodiment, "long open" means that a prescribed time of 30 seconds has elapsed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 has been switched from the closed state to the open state, or that the variable winning device 32 has received a specified number of winnings. It refers to one opening/closing operation until it becomes a closed state on the condition that 10 game balls win a prize.

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "Long Open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), "Short Open" is further set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In this embodiment, "short opening" means that a specified time of 0.4 seconds has passed after the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or that the specified time has elapsed as specified in the variable winning device 32. It refers to one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached on the condition that three game balls win a prize.

In this embodiment, the game ball is fired from the firing device 60 toward the game area at a rate of one every "0.6 seconds" based on the player's operation of the handle 18. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, with just one "short release", even one game ball may not win. For this reason, the opening/closing plate 32a is almost never closed based on the condition related to the number of winnings (the number of winnings is 3) among the above two closing conditions corresponding to "short opening", and once the opening/closing plate 32a is opened, will normally be closed based on the elapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). This prevents the execution period from changing each time during the "short release" execution period.

In the jackpot states of "4R definite variable jackpot A" and "4R definite variable jackpot B", this is repeated four times (4 rounds) with "long opening" as one special prize condition.

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot A", "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 8 times (8 rounds), "short open" is further set as one special prize state, This is repeated eight times (eight rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot B", the "long open" is set as one special prize state, and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), the "short open" is set as one special prize state, This is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In the jackpot states of "4R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot B", this is repeated four times (four rounds) with "long open" as one special prize state.

In the jackpot state of "JUB jackpot", "short opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 5 times, and then "long opening" is set as one special prize state, and this is repeated 15 times. . In other words, five "short releases" are performed in the first round, and "long releases" are performed in each of the second to 16th rounds.

In addition, when the above-mentioned various "probability variable jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, a "high probability mode (high probability state)" is provided as a lottery mode after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when various "normal jackpots" occur, a "low probability mode (low probability state)" is given after the jackpot state ends.

"High probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is increased compared to the "low probability mode" that is normally set. The "high probability mode" set after the end of the jackpot continues until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, after the above-mentioned various jackpots are completed, the winning support mode related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y is maintained while the special display devices 43L and 43R display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode (high ball entry state)" is given as a.

"High support mode" means that the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time of the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting winning hole 33YB is higher than the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" which is normally set. It refers to a state in which there is an increase in the number of

For example, the "high support mode" includes (1) a state in which the fluctuating display time on the normal symbol display device 41 described below is shorter than that in the "low support mode", (2) a state in which the movable blade 37Ya of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is (3) A state in which the opening time (regulated time) is longer than in the "low support mode"; (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be won per opening of the movable blade 37Ya is greater than in the "low support mode"; , (4) If a winning result is obtained by the opening/closing lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the number of times the opening/closing process of the movable blade 37Ya is executed per time is set to "low support mode". (5) A state in which the winning probability in the open lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is higher than the winning probability in the "low support mode." The high support mode in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high support mode." This makes it easier for game balls to frequently win into the lower starting prize opening 33YB, increasing the number of times jackpot lottery is executed, and making it possible to hold balls well.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "high support mode" is assigned, by changing the fluctuation pattern table to a table for the "high support mode" as described later, the first and second special display devices 43L , 43R (effect display device 42) is configured so that the variable display time is shorter than that in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of "16R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot A", a "high support mode" is provided until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until next time/high support mode."

After the completion of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", a variable display of "20 times", "30 times", "40 times" or "50 times" is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. ``High Support Mode'' will be granted during the period. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", respectively.

After the completion of "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A", "high support mode" is given while "30 times" variable display is performed on special display devices 43L and 43R. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "30 times/high support mode S."

After the end of "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" "Support mode" will be added.

After the “JUB Jackpot” ends, “Until next time/High support mode” will be given.

In this embodiment, various gaming states occur by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if a state is given a "high probability mode" and a "high support mode", it becomes a so-called "probability variable state".

A state in which "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are added becomes a so-called "normal state."

When the "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are added, it becomes a so-called "time saving state".

When a state is provided with a "high probability mode" and a "low support mode", it becomes a so-called "potential state (potential probability variable state)". In other words, in the "potential state", the probability of winning a jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is no different from the "normal state", so the state with the "high probability mode" This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the situation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned various "big wins", a "small win" is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the win/fail lottery. In the small winning state, "short opening" is treated as one special prize state, and this is repeated five times (5 rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode that are awarded after the small winning state ends are the original modes before the small winning state occurred. For example, if the lottery mode before the small winning state is "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small winning state ends.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the prize is awarded when the game ball is won in the winning lottery in the case where the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA and when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. The distribution of jackpot types is different. If you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the upper starting winning slot 33YA, "16R definite strange jackpot A", "16R sure strange jackpot B", "4R sure strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot B" ”, “16R regular jackpot A”, “16R regular jackpot B”, and “4R regular jackpot B”, and if you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the lower starting winning slot 33YB. The winnings will be divided into one of the following: "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Regular Jackpot A," and "JUB Jackpot." Furthermore, the "small win" is configured to occur only when a winning lottery is triggered by a game ball landing in the lower starting prize opening 33YB.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R each include two segment display devices and are installed at the bottom of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source consisting of an LED, and by controlling these individual light sources on and off, it is possible to light up only one arbitrary display segment, and also to light up any combination of display segments. The display segment can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on each segment display device.

Then, a variable display is performed on the first special display device 43L when a game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and a variable display is performed on the second special display device 43R when a game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. The configuration is such that a variable display is performed at . Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the display mode when the variable display stops, whether or not you have won the jackpot lottery, etc. is definitively displayed. Ru. For example, when a game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, a fluctuating display is made at high speed on the corresponding first special display device 43L, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the display modes is stopped (for example, stopped for a few seconds) )do. If the player wins the jackpot lottery, numerical values corresponding to various jackpots (see FIG. 86) are displayed when the fluctuations are stopped, and a jackpot state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 86, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and "50 times/high support mode" is displayed. If you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "16R Guaranteed Variable Jacket B", "84" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. In addition, if you win the "JUB jackpot", "1.-" will be stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and if you win the "small win", the first or second special display will stop displaying. "1-" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, in order to enhance the production effect of the "JUB jackpot", the stopping modes of both "1.-" and "1-" for the "JUB jackpot" and the stopping mode "1.-" for the "JUB jackpot" are important. It is preferable that the configuration is confusing.

Of course, the manner in which the special display devices 43L and 43R stop corresponding to each type of win is not limited to the above-mentioned manner. For example, there may be not one but a plurality of stopping modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type. For example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", one of "91", "92", "93", etc. is selected and stopped on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition, even if there are multiple stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type, there are multiple stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and "small win". It is preferable that the plurality of stopping modes have a confusing configuration. For example, any one of "-1.", "-2", "-3.", "-4", etc. is displayed as a stop mode related to "JUB jackpot", and "small jackpot" is displayed. As a plurality of stop modes, any one of "-1", "-2.", "-3", "-4.", . . . may be stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, a pair of specific symbols (here, "1", "2", "3", etc.) with a predetermined display segment (here, ".") lit and a specific symbol that is not lit. One of them is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and the other is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "small win", and these are alternately inserted.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in any or all display segments can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting winning hole 33YA, 33YB during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variable display is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is suspended is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper starting winning slot 33YA and the gaming balls that have entered the lower starting winning slot 33YB. Correspondingly, up to four variable displays (a total of eight variable displays) are suspended. Further, the number of times of holding is displayed by lighting on the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. Incidentally, when a new game ball enters the starting prize opening 33YA, 33YB during the jackpot state, the corresponding variable display is also suspended.

Basically, the fluctuating display that is triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA, and is digested in the order in which it is won, and is displayed in the lower starting winning hole. The variable display triggered by winning in 33YB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball wins in the lower starting winning hole 33YB, and is digested in the order in which the winnings are won. However, if both the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper start winning hole 33YA and the variable display triggered by a win in the lower start winning hole 33YB are suspended (the first holding lamp 46a and the second If one or more of the holding lamps 46b are lit, the variable display triggered by a win in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is preferentially digested. That is, the configuration is such that the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is not performed unless all of the variable displaying triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is digested. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, if a game ball is won in the lower start winning hole 33YB and one second holding lamp 46b is lit, a winning into the upper starting winning hole 33YA is disabled. The fluctuating display triggered by the winning will be postponed, and the fluctuating display triggered by the winning to the lower starting prize opening 33YB will be performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is also referred to as the "first fluctuating display", and the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning opening 33YB is referred to as the "second fluctuating display". ” is also called.

Further, the through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through one ball at a time. Although details will be described later, the through gate 34 is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the through gate switch 225 opens or closes. An opening lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the accessory 37Y (lower starting prize opening 33YB), and a variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. If the player wins in the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y remains open for a specified time.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that displays a variable display when passing through the through gate 34, and an effect display device 42 that displays a variable display in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. and is provided.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 includes a variation specification indicating which of the upper start winning hole 33YA and the lower start winning hole 33YB the variable display performed on the performance display device 42 corresponds to. A lamp 40 is provided.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol changes from "○" to "x" to The display changes at high speed in the order of "○" →... Then, when the fluctuating display stops for several seconds at the "○" symbol (winning symbol), the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB remains open for a predetermined period of time. The display contents of this normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount will be performed after the variable display that is being performed at that point ends. It becomes. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times that the change is held is displayed by lighting on the hold lamp 44. There is.

The effect display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, based on the command from the main control device 261, the sub control device 262 performs auxiliary control so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display contents are determined and displayed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 92, the effect display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and a plurality of types of symbols (numbers) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed) in each symbol display area. ), and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area). For example, when the main control device 261 determines the above-mentioned various "probable and variable jackpots" or various "regular jackpots", a display corresponding to the jackpot is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and an effect display device At step 42, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and a jackpot state is started. Ru. In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or a "small win", the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 does not correspond to a jackpot, as will be described later.

Further, when symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a jackpot, as a preliminary step, for example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-win state.

Note that even if a ready-to-win state occurs, if a jackpot state does not occur, a symbol different from the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. In addition, in the case of various "probable jackpots" or various "regular jackpots", the number of zeros is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above, but in this embodiment, the numbers are stopped and displayed. Depending on the type of symbol, it is impossible to determine the gaming state (such as whether or not it is a "high probability mode") that will be awarded after the end of the jackpot.

In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", a predetermined specific combination of numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance symbol) is stopped and displayed instead of a double. For example, in this embodiment, "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. As a result, when the chance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player cannot distinguish between "JUB jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and "small win" which is less advantageous to the player. ” can be expected to occur, so it is possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Of course, the combination of specific numbers that are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas may be different depending on whether it is a "JUB jackpot" or a "small win." In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", instead of a predetermined specific combination of numbers, the display will stop at a random winning combination, just like when you win. You may also do so.

Furthermore, the performance display device 42 is configured to display the number of pending changes in the special display devices 43L, 43R corresponding to the above-mentioned pending lamps 46a, 46b (see FIG. 92, etc.).

In this embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the holding lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. . Therefore, the player will be able to grasp the game status, lottery results, etc. exclusively from the display contents of the performance display device 42 (symbol display, pending display, etc.).

Of course, the configurations of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46L, 46R are not limited to such configurations, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special display devices 43L, 43R, etc. may be configured to be visible. However, as mentioned above, the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an inconspicuous place such as the lower corner of the gaming area where the player cannot easily see them, and the size of the display section is small, and the characters for identification are displayed in a stopped state. The time is also relatively short. Therefore, unless one takes his eyes off the special display devices 43L and 43R and carefully observes them, it is virtually impossible to grasp the game state to be granted.

The fluctuation specific lamp 40 is equipped with an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red, and when a fluctuation display is performed on the effect display device 42 triggered by a winning in the upper starting prize opening 33YA. It emits blue light, and it emits red light when a variable display triggered by a winning in the lower start prize opening 33YB is performed.

Next, the configuration of the variable display unit 35 will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, so that the variable display unit 35 is It has an integrated configuration.

A rectangular opening 213a (see FIG. 55) is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is detachably attached to the back side of the opening 213a. The liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42 is a known one in which a liquid crystal panel made of various translucent members laminated is disposed on the front side of a backlight serving as a light emitting means.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a substantially circular opening 751 formed in the center thereof, and the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 can be viewed through the opening 751.

Note that the center frame 47 is not composed of a single member, but includes various decorative members plated on the base member, lens members made of transparent resin that transmit light such as LEDs, etc. is assembled.

A stage portion 770 is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 along the left-right direction. The stage portion 770 has gentle undulations formed along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the center of the rear wall portion 772 of the stage portion 770, which opens toward the front and into which a game ball can fall. Furthermore, a communication path 775 communicating with the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the central portion of the stage portion 770 . The other side of the communication path 775 is opened at the front side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47, and serves as a discharge port 776 for discharging the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the game board 30 surface. In addition, in the state where the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 53, the discharge port 776 is located above the upper starting winning port 33YA.

A guide groove 778 is formed in the center of the stage section 770 at a position in front of the drop hole 774 and slopes gently downward toward the back. This allows the game ball to fall from the stage section 770 to the drop hole 774.

A ball passage (warp passage) 764 through which game balls pass is formed inside the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47. The entrance portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while the exit portion 764b opens toward the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. It's open. This ball passage 764 allows the game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 to be guided onto the stage section 770 within the center frame 47.

After the game ball guided onto the stage section 770 rolls on the stage section 770, it falls from the front onto the game board 30 surface or falls into the above-mentioned drop hole 774. Among these, the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 are guided onto the game board 30 surface via the communication path 775. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA with a relatively high probability.

Further, in the variable display device unit 35, an upper performance accessory unit 761 and a lower performance accessory unit 762 are arranged between the center frame 47 and the frame cover 213.

Specifically, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is arranged on the back side of the upper side part 47a of the center frame 47, and in normal times (see FIG. 56), almost the entire part is covered by the upper side part 47a etc. Only a portion is visible to the player.

Further, the lower performance accessory unit 762 is arranged on the back side of the lower side 47b of the center frame 47, and in normal times (see FIG. 56), it is almost entirely covered by the lower side 47b etc. Only the player can see the player.

Here, the configurations of the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762 will be explained in detail. First, the upper performance accessory unit 761 will be explained in detail with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is provided on the back side of the upper side portion 47a of the center frame 47.

The upper performance accessory unit 761 includes a unit base portion 810 disposed on the upper front surface of the frame cover 213, an upper movable accessory 811 that is swingably provided with respect to the unit base portion 810, and the upper movable accessory unit 761. A swing drive mechanism 812 for swinging an object 811 is provided.

The swing drive mechanism 812 includes a support arm 814 that supports the upper movable accessory 811, and a swing motor 815 that serves as a drive source for driving the support arm 814.

As the support arm 814 is rotated based on the drive of the swing motor 815, most of the upper movable accessory 811 is located behind the upper side 47a of the center frame 47, making it difficult for the player to see. It is possible to oscillate between a standby state (see FIG. 56) and an exposed state (see FIG. 58) in which most of the part is located on the front side of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 and is easily visible to the player. . The area in front of the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 constitutes the effect area (predetermined area) in this embodiment.

The swing motor 815 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal, and by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the amount of rotational displacement of the upper movable accessory 811 (support arm 814) can be controlled. . At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of rotational displacement of the upper movable accessory 811 (support arm 814) from the reference position. Although not shown, the swing drive mechanism 812 is provided with a position detection sensor for detecting the rotation position of the support arm 814.

Here, the upper movable accessory 811 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The upper movable accessory 811 includes a base portion 817 fixed to the tip of a support arm 814, and an upper rotary body 820 rotatably supported on the front side of the base portion 817. The upper rotating body 820 is a rotating body for presentation, and constitutes a first rotating body as a first rotating means.

The base portion 817 has a generally circular shape when viewed from the front, and a support shaft portion 818 is formed in the center thereof to protrude forward. The support shaft portion 818 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with a closed front side and an open back side.

On the back side of the base portion 817, an upper rotating body drive motor 821 is attached and fixed. A pinion gear 821b is fixedly attached to the front end of the rotating shaft 821a of the upper rotating body drive motor 821. The driving force of the upper rotary body drive motor 821 is transmitted to the upper rotary body 820 via the pinion gear 821b.

An annular cover body 822 is attached and fixed to the front surface of the base portion 817 . A circular opening 822a is formed in the center of the cover body 822.

The upper rotary body 820 mainly includes a rotary base plate 823 and six movable pieces 825 arranged annularly on the front side thereof.

The rotating board 823 has a cylindrical portion 826 extending in the front-rear direction, and six extending pieces 827 extending radially outward from the outer circumferential wall of the cylindrical portion 826. The six extending pieces 827 are provided at equal intervals (60° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 826.

The cylindrical portion 826 is externally fitted onto the support shaft portion 818 of the base portion 817 . As a result, the rotating board 823 is rotatably supported by the base portion 817. Although not shown in the drawings, the cylindrical portion 826 or the spindle portion 818 is provided with a regulating means for preventing the rotary board 823 (cylindrical portion 826) from falling off from the base portion 817 (spindle portion 818). ing.

Each extending piece 827 is formed with a slit 829 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 . A cylindrical pinion support shaft 830 is formed on the back surface near the tip of each extending piece 827 to protrude rearward.

An annular central gear member 831 is fitted onto the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating board 823 from behind.

The central gear member 831 is integrally formed with a large diameter gear portion 831a provided on the front side and a small diameter gear portion 831b provided on the rear side so as to form steps in the front and back.

Further, a pinion gear 832 is fitted onto each of the pinion support shafts 830 and meshed with a large-diameter gear portion 831a of a central gear member 831.

Furthermore, an annular presser plate 835 is attached to the back side of the rotating board 823 (see FIG. 105). The circular opening 835a of the holding plate 835 has a slightly larger diameter than the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831, through which the small diameter gear portion 831b can be inserted, and has a smaller diameter than the large diameter gear portion 831a.

As a result, the presser plate 835 covers the six pinion gears 832 and the large-diameter gear portion 831a from behind, and is fixed to the tip of the pinion support shaft 830 while passing through the small-diameter gear portion 831b. As a result, the central gear member 831 is held rotatably around the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823.

A pinion gear 821b of the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is meshed with the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831. Thereby, the rotation of the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is transmitted to the central gear member 831.

That is, the pinion gear 821b, the central gear member 831, the pinion gear 832, etc. transmit the power of the upper rotary body drive motor 821 to the upper rotary body 820 to slide the movable piece 825 and rotate the rotary base plate 823. The main power transmission mechanism is configured to drive the vehicle in this manner.

Further, a second drive gear 841 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating board 823. As shown in FIG. 105, the second drive gear 841 is meshed with a second transmission gear 842. The second transmission gear 842 is connected to an oil damper 843. A support member 844 is fitted into the oil damper 843 from the rear, and the support member 844 is attached and fixed to the base portion 817.

As a result, the rotating board 823 is braked so as not to rotate with low torque below a predetermined level. Here, the second drive gear 841, the second transmission gear 842, and the like constitute a regulating power transmission mechanism that transmits the force of the oil damper 843 to the upper rotary body 820 and regulates the operation of the upper rotary body 820.

The regulating power transmission mechanism is not connected to the main power transmission mechanism, and directly transmits power between the upper rotating body drive motor 821 and the oil damper 843 without going through the rotating board 823. is configured so that it is not transmitted.

As can be seen from FIG. 101 and the like, the upper rotating body 820 is formed with the motif of one flower, and each movable piece 825 is formed to imitate one flower petal.

Each movable piece 825 is made of a transparent resin material having light-transmitting properties. However, fine irregularities (not shown) are formed on the surface of the general portion of each movable piece 825 (excluding a magnifying lens portion 828 described later). As a result, the general part of the movable piece 825 diffuses and transmits the light emitted from the display part (liquid crystal display part) 42a of the effect display device 42 located at the rear, and the whole becomes in a state where the surface emits light uniformly. The configuration makes it difficult to identify the display target (object) displayed on the display section 42a through the general portion of the movable piece 825.

On the other hand, a magnifying lens portion 828 is formed in one of the six movable pieces 825 . Hereinafter, when distinguishing the movable piece 825 having the magnifying lens portion 828 from other movable pieces 825, it may be referred to as "specific movable piece 825A." The movable piece 825 and the magnifying lens section 828 constitute a light-transmitting section in this embodiment.

The magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A can enlarge and display an object located at the rear for the player to see. For example, the player can magnify and visually recognize display targets such as letters and characters displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 through the magnifying lens section 828.

A rack portion 838 extending linearly is integrally formed on the back surface of the movable piece 825. The rack portion 838 is inserted into the slit 829 of the extending piece 827 of the rotating board 823. This allows the movable piece 825 to slide along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 (the direction in which the extending piece 827 extends). Although not shown in the drawings, the rack portion 838 or the slit 829 is provided with a regulating means for preventing the movable piece 825 from falling off from the rotating board 823.

The rack portion 838 of the movable piece 825 is engaged with the pinion gear 832 on the back side of the extending piece 827. As a result, the movable piece 825 is moved along the slit 829 of the extending piece 827, that is, in the radial direction of the rotating base plate 823, by transmitting the power of the upper rotating body drive motor 821 via the main power transmission mechanism. It becomes possible to slide along the line.

With this configuration, when the upper rotary body 820 is in a normal standby state, the movable pieces 825 of the six radially arranged extending pieces 827 are in a reduced diameter state, in which each movable piece 825 is slid to the innermost side in the radial direction. (See Figures 101 and 102).

In addition, in the diameter-reduced state of the upper rotary body 820, the base end portions of the six movable pieces 825 are in a state of approximately contacting the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823, and each movable piece 825 Both side edges on the proximal side of the movable pieces 825 are in a state in which they are substantially in contact with the proximal side edges of the adjacent movable pieces 825, respectively.

On the other hand, when a predetermined performance is executed, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter by simultaneously sliding the movable pieces 825 radially outward in the six radially arranged extension pieces 827. (See Figures 103 and 104).

Further, a motor control board (motor driver) 845 is attached to the back side of the base portion 817 to control the upper rotating body drive motor 821 in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262.

The upper rotating body drive motor 821 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal applied via a motor control board 845, and the rotation angle changes depending on the number of input pulses. That is, by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the amount of rotational displacement and rotational speed of the upper rotating body 820 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of rotational displacement of the upper rotating body 820 from the reference position.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 105, a position detection sensor 846 for detecting the rotational position of the upper rotary body 820 (rotary substrate 823) is attached to the front surface of the base portion 817. In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 846, a known photosensor in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed facing each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 847 is formed to protrude from the back side of the rotating board 823 (second drive gear 841 in this embodiment). Then, when the light shielding piece 847 is detected by the position detection sensor 846, it is determined that the upper rotating body 820 is at the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 101, the reference position is the position where the specific movable piece 825A is placed on the right side in the horizontal direction when the upper rotating body 820 is viewed from the front.

Further, although not shown, an upper accessory control board is provided on the base portion 817 to monitor and control the position detection sensor 846 in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262.

Under such a configuration, if it is assumed that the upper rotating body drive motor 821 rotates once with a 360-pulse excitation signal (drive pulse signal), the angle change based on the 1-pulse excitation signal (angle change per step) is 1. °. That is, in this embodiment, since the timer interrupt is set to 2 msec, it takes 720 msec (=2 msec x 360 pulses) at the shortest for the upper rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate once.

Further, if it is assumed that the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the pinion gear 821b of the upper rotary body drive motor 821 and the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is 1:4, the upper rotary body drive motor Under the configuration in which the upper rotating body 821 rotates once with an excitation signal of 360 pulses, the upper rotating body 820 rotates once in 2880 msec (=2 msec x 360 pulses x 4) at the shortest.

However, the amount of angular change based on the one-pulse excitation signal, the gear ratio between the pinion gear 821b and the small diameter gear portion 831b, etc. are not limited to the values exemplified above, and different configurations may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 103 and the like, when the upper rotary body 820 stops rotating, the six movable pieces 825 are set at six locations in the rotational direction of the upper rotary body 820 (clockwise in this embodiment). Predetermined stop positions EA1 to EA6 (specifically, a first stop position EA1 located on the right side of the upper rotating body 820, a second stop position EA2 located on the lower right side, and a third stop position EA2 located on the lower left side) The vehicle is configured to stop at any one of a stop position EA3, a fourth stop position EA4 located on the left side, a fifth stop position EA5 located diagonally on the upper left side, or a sixth stop position EA6 located on the diagonally upper right side. ing.

Here, the operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 configured as described above will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 101, 102, etc., in normal times when no accessory performance is performed, the six movable pieces 825 are each located at the radially inner slide limit position of the upper rotating body 820. In other words, the upper rotary body 820 is in the most contracted state.

In this state, when the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is rotated forward, the central gear member 831 first begins to rotate clockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b.

At the beginning of rotation, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotary base plate 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotary base plate 823 remains stopped and does not move.

On the other hand, as the central gear member 831 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a rotate, respectively. Power is transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 through the rack portion 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension piece 827. , the upper rotating body 820 is slid radially outward in the radial direction. In other words, the upper rotating body 820 expands in diameter.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 103, 104, etc., when the six movable pieces 825 each reach the radially outer sliding limit position of the upper rotary body 820 and the upper rotary body 820 is in the most expanded state, the rotary board Rotational power will be transmitted to 823. Then, when the torque exceeds a predetermined level, the rotating board 823 starts rotating clockwise in front view.

Thereafter, when the upper rotating body drive motor 821 stops, the upper rotating body 820 stops, and the six movable pieces 825 each stop at one of the above-mentioned stopping positions EA1 to EA6.

Furthermore, when returning to normal operation after the end of the performance, the upper rotating body drive motor 821 is first rotated in the reverse direction, and the central gear member 831 is rotated counterclockwise in the front view via the pinion gear 821b. let

Even in such a case, when the central gear member 831 initially starts rotating, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotating board 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotating board 823 is stopped. It remains stationary, and only the movable piece 825 moves.

As a result, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a of the central gear member 831 rotate. Power is transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 through the rack portion 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension piece 827. , the upper rotary body 820 is slid radially inward, and the upper rotary body 820 is reduced in diameter.

Thereafter, when the six movable pieces 825 have each slid to the radially inner slide limit position of the upper rotary body 820, the upper rotary body drive motor 821 is stopped. As a result, the upper rotating body 820 returns to its normal reduced diameter state.

Next, the lower performance accessory unit 762 will be explained in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the lower performance accessory unit 762 is provided on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47.

The lower performance accessory unit 762 includes a unit base portion 850 arranged to cover the front lower part of the frame cover 213, and a lower movable accessory 851 provided on the back side of the unit base portion 850 so as to be movable up and down. , and a vertical drive mechanism 852 for vertically moving the lower movable accessory 851.

The lower movable accessory 851 includes a slide base part 853 that is displaceable in the vertical direction, a pair of left and right pillar parts 854A and 854B that project upward from the slide base part 853, and the pillar parts. Driving motors 855A and 855B for the lower rotary body provided at the upper ends of 854A and 854B, respectively (see FIG. 107); It includes lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, and motor control boards (motor drivers) 857A, 857B (see FIG. 107) provided on the back side of the drive motors 855A, 855B. The lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating bodies for presentation, and constitute a second rotating body as a second rotating means.

As shown in FIG. 106, the left lower rotary body 856A (hereinafter referred to as "lower left rotary body 856A") is provided with a first information writing portion 856Aa having a circular shape when viewed from the front at one end in the longitudinal direction. A second information writing section 856Ab having a circular shape when viewed from the front is provided at the other end in the longitudinal direction. The information writing sections 856Aa and 856Ab constitute affected sections in this embodiment.

Both information writing sections 856Aa and 856Ab are made of a translucent material and can transmit light emitted from the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the production display device 42 located at the rear at a predetermined transmittance. It is composed of

In the first information writing section 856Aa of the present embodiment, "SMALL" is written in clear letters against a background component that has a relatively high light transmittance and is brightly colored and transparent (for example, a rainbow pattern) (hereinafter referred to as "SMALL"). (This description is sometimes referred to as "Strong/SMALL.") The second information writing section 856Ab has "SMALL" written in dull letters against a dark semi-transparent background component with relatively low light transmittance. (Hereinafter, such description may be referred to as "weak/SMALL".)

On the other hand, the general part of the lower left rotary body 856A, excluding both information writing parts 856Aa and 856Ab, is covered with a non-translucent material, and is light-shielded so as not to transmit the light emitted from the display part 42a of the effect display device 42. It has become a department.

Similarly to the lower left rotary body 856A, the right lower rotary body 856B (hereinafter referred to as the "lower right rotary body 856B") has a circular shape in front view at one end in the longitudinal direction, as shown in FIG. A first information writing section 856Ba is provided, and a second information writing section 856Bb having a circular shape when viewed from the front is provided at the other end in the longitudinal direction. The information writing sections 856Ba and 856Bb constitute affected sections in this embodiment.

Similar to both information writing parts 856Aa and 856Ab related to the lower left rotating body 856A, both information writing parts 856Ba and 856Bb related to the lower right rotating body 856B are made of a translucent material, and are located at the rear. It is configured to be able to transmit light emitted from a display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the display device 42 at a predetermined transmittance.

In the first information writing section 856Ba of the present embodiment, "BIG" is written in clear letters against a background component that has a relatively high light transmittance and is brightly colored and transparent (for example, a rainbow pattern) (hereinafter referred to as "BIG"). (This description is sometimes referred to as "Strong/BIG.") The second information writing section 856Bb has "BIG" written in dull letters against a dark semi-transparent background component with relatively low light transmittance. (hereinafter, such description may be referred to as "weak/BIG").

On the other hand, the general part of the lower right rotating body 856B, excluding both information writing parts 856Ba and 856Bb, is covered with a material that does not have translucency, and does not transmit the light emitted from the display part 42a of the effect display device 42. It is a light shielding part.

Note that the drive motors 855A and 855B for the lower rotary bodies are stepping motors whose rotations are controlled by drive pulse signals applied respectively, and by adjusting the drive pulse signals, the amount of rotation of the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B is controlled. can. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of rotational displacement of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B from the reference position.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 107, position detection sensors 858A and 858B for detecting the rotational positions of the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are attached to the lower surfaces of the lower rotary body drive motors 855A and 855B. . In this embodiment, known photosensors in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed facing each other are used as the position detection sensors 858A and 858B.

Correspondingly, light shielding pieces 859A and 859B are formed to protrude from the back sides (near the side edges) of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B. Then, when the light shielding pieces 859A, 859B are detected by the position detection sensors 858A, 858B, it is recognized that the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are at the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 106, the longitudinal direction of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B is along the vertical direction, and the first information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ba side are higher than the second information writing parts 856Ab, 856Bb side. The position becomes the reference position.

Now, the vertical drive mechanism 852 includes a vertical drive motor 860 disposed on the unit base portion 850 and a rack portion 861 provided on the right edge of the slide base portion 853. A pinion gear 860a fixedly attached to the rotating shaft of the vertical drive motor 860 is engaged with a rack portion 861 of the slide base portion 853.

Although not shown in the drawings, the unit base portion 850 is formed with a guide groove extending in the vertical direction, and the slide base portion 853 is formed with a protrusion that is assembled into the guide groove. This restricts displacement in the left-right direction when the slide base portion 853 moves up and down. That is, the guide groove portion and the protrusion portion constitute a guide means for guiding the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B).

With this configuration, by rotating the vertical drive motor 860, the lower movable accessory 851 can be slid in the vertical direction.

Normally, the lower movable accessory 851 is in a standby state where most of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are located at the standby position behind the lower side 47b of the center frame 47, making it difficult for the player to see (see FIG. 56). There is. Then, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates forward, and the slide base portion 853 slides upward, so that the lower movable accessory 851 is moved so that the entire lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are connected to the production display device 42. It is located on the front side of the display section 42a and is in an exposed state where it is easily visible to the player (see FIG. 58).

Further, from this state, the vertical drive motor 860 rotates in the reverse direction, and the slide base portion 853 slides downward, so that the lower movable accessory 851 returns to the normal standby state.

The vertical drive motor 860 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal, and by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the vertical movement of the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B) is controlled. You can control the amount. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of vertical displacement of the lower movable accessory 851 from the reference position.

More specifically, a position detection sensor 863 for detecting the vertical position of the lower movable accessory 851 is attached to the unit base portion 850. In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 863, a known photosensor in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed opposite to each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 864 is formed protruding from the lower end of the rack section 861 on the slide base section 853. When the light shielding piece 864 is detected by the position detection sensor 863, it is determined that the lower movable accessory 851 (slide base portion 853) is at the reference position. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, the position where the lower movable accessory 851 is in the above-mentioned standby state is the reference position (standby position).

Here, although not shown in the drawings, it may be configured to include a movement regulating means such as a stopper capable of regulating the movement of the lower movable accessory 851 (lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) by a predetermined amount or more.

Although not shown, the unit base portion 850 includes a lower accessory control board that performs drive control of the vertical drive motor 860, monitoring control of the position detection sensor 863, etc. in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262. is installed.

With this configuration, in this embodiment, the positional relationship between the upper rotary body 820 and the lower left rotary body 856A or the lower right rotary body 856B is adjusted while the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are respectively rotating or stopped. However, a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B do not overlap, and at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body It is configured to change to a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion of the rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B overlaps. As will be described later, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the high support mode continues), the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are in a second positional relationship (close state) compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is configured so that the ratio of

Specifically, when the lower left rotating body 856A stops rotating, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) and the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) respectively indicate the rotation direction of the lower left rotating body 856A (this implementation (clockwise direction in this embodiment) predetermined stop positions EB1 to EB4 set at four locations (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, a first stop position EB1 located above the lower left rotating body 856A, a first stop position EB1 located on the right side) The vehicle is configured to stop at any one of a second stop position EB2 located on the lower side, a third stop position EB3 located on the lower side, or a fourth stop position EB4 located on the left side.

Then, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1, and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the fourth stop. When it stops at position EA4, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing section 856Ab (stopped at the first stop position EB1) is LOW/SMALL) is enlarged and displayed for the player to see (see FIGS. 110 and 111).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A corresponds to the first and second positional relationship in this embodiment. Further, the mode in which the magnifying lens section 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) corresponds to the first mode in this embodiment, and the upward rotation The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the fourth stop position EA4 corresponds to the first operation mode in this embodiment.

In addition, when the rotation of the lower right rotating body 856B is stopped, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) are respectively set in the rotational direction of the lower right rotating body 856B (this implementation In the example shown in FIG. 106, there are four predetermined stop positions EC1 to EC4 (counterclockwise direction) (specifically, as shown in FIG. 106, the first stop position EC1 is located above the lower right rotating body 856B, the left side The vehicle is configured to stop at any one of a second stop position EC2 located on the lower side, a third stop position EC3 located on the lower side, or a fourth stop position EC4 located on the right side.

Then, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) stops at the first stop position EC1, and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop. When stopped at position EA1, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or second information writing section 856Bb (strong/BIG) stopped at the first stop position EC1 is Weak/BIG) is enlarged and displayed for the player to see (see FIGS. 112 and 113).

Such a relative positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower right rotating body 856B corresponds to the second second positional relationship in this embodiment. Further, the mode in which the magnifying lens section 828 enlarges and displays the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) corresponds to the second mode in this embodiment, and the upward rotation The operation mode of the upper rotating body 820 that stops the specific movable piece 825A of the body 820 at the first stop position EA1 corresponds to the second operation mode in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, due to various table configurations, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) or the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1, and the upper rotating body When the specific movable piece 825A of 820 stops at the fourth stop position EA4, that is, the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) stops at the first stop position EB1 via the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. Or, the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) is at the first stop position EC1 than when the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) is enlarged. and the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotating body 820 stops at the first stop position EA1, that is, the first movable piece 825A stops at the first stop position EC1 through the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. When the information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) or the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) is enlarged, a predetermined advantage advantageous to the player, such as continuation of the high support mode, is displayed as described later. The configuration is such that the ratio of states is high. Furthermore, a second advantageous state (high support mode continues) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (high support mode continued "+10 times") that is advantageous to the player. It is configured so that the percentage of "continued until next time" increases.

Next, the back structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 54, 55, etc. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 55 and the like. As described above, on the back side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 53) disposed corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, there is a resin frame cover 213 that covers the center frame 47 from behind. It is provided so as to protrude from the rear. Furthermore, on the back side of the frame cover 213, an effect display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213 are removably mounted in a stacked state. attached.

The performance display device 42 is housed in a housing box (not shown) in which an opening is formed to expose the display section (liquid crystal screen) of the performance display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and It is fixed on the back side. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (accommodation box). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible. Note that an LED control board and the like that drive the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 are disposed inside the frame cover 213.

A back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 below the frame cover 213 so as to cover the general prize opening 31, the variable prize winning device 32, the starting prize openings 33YA, 33YB, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have moved from the front side to the back side of the game board 30 through different routes such as the above-mentioned various winning openings and out openings 36. . The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224A and 224B that detect winnings to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. (Except when detected by the through gate switch 225.)
Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 54, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. Further, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203.

The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, symbols are not attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, high probability mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and internal terminals. A terminal for outputting information regarding the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as a prize winning error, a lower tray full error, a tank ball error, a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information regarding the number of pitches is provided.

However, in this embodiment, a terminal for outputting information regarding a "small win" is not provided, and the configuration is such that no information on the occurrence of a "small win" is output. In this embodiment, during the "high support mode", "small wins" tend to occur relatively frequently, so occurrence information is not always output every time a "small win" occurs. , this may lead to a significant increase in the output signal. Therefore, when such a problem is relatively unlikely to occur, such as during a "low support mode", the configuration may be such that information on the occurrence of a "small hit" is output.

In addition, the output of the occurrence information of the "JUB jackpot" is performed, for example, after the five "short openings" related to the "JUB jackpot" have finished, that is, after the situation is no longer distinguishable from the case of a "small win", for example, as described below. It is preferable to perform the output of the opening command (jackpot notification effect) with the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" confirmed. In a situation where it is still not possible to distinguish between a "small win" and a "JUB jackpot" occurrence information, if only the "JUB jackpot" occurrence information is output first, the information display equipment installed in the hall's island equipment corresponding to the pachinko machine 10, etc. There is a risk that the player will know in advance that a "JUB jackpot" has occurred by looking at the "JUB jackpot" and the presentation effect of the "JUB jackpot" will be diminished.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 54) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. That will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has two rows of ball passages through which game balls flow down sideways, for example, and which slopes gently toward the downstream side. A case rail 357 is connected to the case rail 357 that allows the water to flow downward vertically. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 54) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 55, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage section 217 as a rear guide means into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow, and the most downstream part of the discharge passage section 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging game balls to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 is formed. The game ball is a rotating body that flows down the game area. The game ball rotates and flows down while coming into contact with nails 49, windmills 57, etc. in the game area and being influenced by it. The game balls that have entered each winning hole such as the general winning hole 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 54, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311 as a payout control means, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are stacked in the front and back. It is removably attached.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 50, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and is locked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 54). reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 54) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

In addition, in this embodiment, various conductive members made of conductive metal materials, such as the reinforcing frame of the front frame set 14, the locking device 600, the rail components 51 and 52, and the left and right frame components 11c and 11d, are used. First, various conductive members made of conductive resin materials, such as the tank 355, tank rail 356, and case rail 357, are electrically connected to a predetermined ground terminal (not shown). Incidentally, game balls are generally made of a metal material, the surface of which is polished or plated, and has a luster that reflects light and is electrically conductive. Therefore, when the game ball comes into contact with the various conductive members, the static electricity charged on the game ball can be released.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 54, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right (lower left in FIG. 54) on the back side of the inner frame 12. The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 59 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L, 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-described special display devices 43L, 43R and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 as a display means is controlled via the sub-control device 262. The sub-control device 262 constitutes a light emission control means in this embodiment.

In addition, although illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes various detection switches such as a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, starting winning unit switches 224A, 224B, and a through gate switch 225. Various electrical components such as various boards are connected to it. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 551, and a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a performance button 125, performance accessory units 761, 762, various illumination parts, and lamps 102, 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the effect display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 display whether or not there is a jackpot, etc. The effect display device 42 controlled by the player performs a display that matches the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 performs drive control of the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that this is not the case, the firing device 60 is driven and the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. Thereby, the player can change the movement amount and operation mode of the game ball guided to the game area.

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the effect display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the effect display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, a jackpot random number counter CB1 is used for jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a jackpot type determination counter CB2 is used to determine the jackpot type. It is used to set the initial values of the reach selection counter CB3 and the jackpot random number counter CB1, which are used to determine whether or not to generate a reach state when the effect display device 42 is removed and varied, and to determine the type of reach to be generated. The initial value random number counter CINI and the fluctuation used for determining the fluctuation display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42), determining the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) in the effect display device 42, etc. By using the type counters CS1, CS2 and the normal symbol random number counter CB4 used for the lottery of the regular symbol display device 41 (the opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB). There is.

The counters CB1, CB2, CB3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CB4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area where the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, jackpot type determination counter CB2, and reach selection counter CB3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area where the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is stored. It is provided. The normal fluctuation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

Further, the special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area and a second special fluctuation reservation area each having four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 are set according to the winning history of game balls to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 is set according to the winning history of the game ball to the lower starting prize opening 33YB. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

By adopting such a configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times, respectively, as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (that is, 599), the lower limit value as the opening value is 0. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the jackpot random number counter CB1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 599) similar to the jackpot random number counter CB1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter CB1 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA or the lower starting winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is changed to the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation Stored in the holding area. Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lottery games.

There are two types of random number values that result in a jackpot: "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." In this embodiment, in the "low probability mode," the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set as "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." 2, the value is "7, 307", and in the "high probability mode", the number of random number values that will be a jackpot is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the "low probability mode", there is a probability of 1/300 to win the lottery (a jackpot state occurs), and in the "high probability mode", the probability is 1/30 to win the lottery.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a validity determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two validity determination tables, the first validity determination table storing "7, 307" and the second validity determination table storing "7 to 16, 307 to 316". be.

Further, in this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is also used when determining a "small win". The number of random number values that result in a "small win" is 50, and the values are "101-125, 401-425". In other words, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/12 (a small winning state occurs).

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In the present embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter CB2 determines the jackpot type, that is, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A". , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", or "JUB jackpot" is determined.

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball wins into the upper start winning hole 33YA or when it wins into the lower start winning hole 33YB. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when winning a prize.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, with reference to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 87), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0, 1". The granting of “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A” is determined.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "2", it is decided to award "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "3", it is decided to give "30 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "Mode", and if it is "4", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "5", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "50 It has been decided that ``16R Probable Variable Jackpot B'' with ``Numbers and High Support Mode'' will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "6", it is determined that "4R probability variable jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "7", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "8", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "9", if it is "9", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "10", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "High Support Mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "11", it is determined that "16R normal jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "12", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "13", "30 times/high support mode" is awarded. If it is "14", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". If it is "18", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "19", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the upper starting prize opening 33YA, there is a 10% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 20% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot B", and a 5 % probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", 20% probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", 5% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot A", and 20% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot B". , there is a 20% probability of "4R normal jackpot B".

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start prize opening 33YB, with reference to the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 88), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is "0 to 9", " If it is "10, 11", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot A", and if it is "12, 13", it is decided to award "4R regular jackpot A". If it is "14", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times/high support mode". If it is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times / high support mode". If it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "Normal jackpot B", and if it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "JUB jackpot".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, there is a 50% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 10% probability that it will be a "4R probability variable jackpot A", and a 10% probability. % probability will be "4R normal jackpot A", 20% probability will be "4R normal jackpot B", and 10% probability will be "JUB jackpot".

The jackpot type determination counter CB2 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area).

Furthermore, the reach selection counter CB3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In the present embodiment, the reach selection counter CB3 determines the "out-of-front reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops after the reach occurs with respect to the decorative symbol, and the final stop after the reach occurs in the same way. We will draw a lottery between ``reach except before and after,'' where the symbol stops at a point other than before and after the reach symbol, and ``completely miss,'' where no reach occurs. In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 stores a reach determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the reach selection counter CB3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and which reach it corresponds to. It is provided. The reach judgment table stores values from 0 to 238, CB3 = 0, 1 corresponds to a reach that is out of the front and back, CB3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to a reach other than the front and back, and CB3 = 22 to 238 is a complete reach. It has a configuration that falls under the category of outliers.

The reach selection counter CB3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special fluctuation holding area) of the RAM 503. area or second special fluctuation holding area).

Further, among the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 198), the lower limit value is added. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 240, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 240). It becomes. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as a "first variation type counter" and CS2 is also referred to as a "second variation type counter." This is also indicated in FIG. 60.

For example, in the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table (see FIG. 90) related to the normal state, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach type of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough fluctuation patterns. The second variation type counter CS2 determines more detailed variation aspects such as variation time. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of variation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode using only the first variation type counter CS1.

Note that the normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the variation of decorative symbols. Super reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the performance display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. . Premium reach is a performance mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbols, characters with a different pattern from super reach are displayed. This is a reach pattern that creates a sense of expectation in the player.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the effect display device 42 determines a variation pattern at the start of variation of decorative symbols.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter CB1, reach selection counter CB3, and fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially increments by 1 within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The random number counter CB4 is updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 is acquired.

Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 that results in a winning is acquired, after a fluctuating display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time, the symbol corresponding to the winning ("○" in this example) is stopped and displayed. Then, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB remains open for a predetermined period of time.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", there are two winning random numbers, "0 and 1". On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the winning random number values are eight from "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 1/5, and in the "high support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 4/5.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing. Its contents are as explained above.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 63, first at step SB301, a process of reading various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the states of various winning detection switches (general winning switch 221, count switch 223, starting winning switches 224A, 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control device 261 are read, and the states of the switches are determined. and save the detection information.

In step SB302, random number initial value updating processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SB303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, the reach selection counter CB3, and the normal symbol random number counter CB4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter CB1, CB2, CB3, and CB4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step SB304, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB, and in step SB305, a through gate passing process is executed as the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily ended.

Here, the starting winning process in step SB304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 64. In addition, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a jackpot random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, a jackpot type random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and a reach selection counter CB3. A reach random number storage area is provided to store the value of .

First, in step SB501, it is determined based on the detection information of the second starting winning switch 224B whether the game ball has won in the lower starting winning hole 33YB. If an affirmative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB502, the value of the lower reservation counter Nb that counts the number of reservations in the variable display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is set to an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SB502, the process moves to step SB509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB502, the process proceeds to step SB503, where the lower holding counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step SB504, the values of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 updated in the random number update process of step SB303 are set among the vacant reservation areas in the second special fluctuation reservation area. Store in the first area. After step SB504, the process moves to step SB505.

In step SB505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In the following step SB506, when it is determined in step SB505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a second jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the second jackpot type determination table. If the value is one of "0 to 9", turn on the "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "10, 11" corresponding to "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" , turn on the "4R Probable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "12, 13" corresponding to "4R Normal Jackpot A", turn on the "4R Normal Jackpot A Flag", If it is one of the values ``14 to 17'' corresponding to ``4R normal jackpot B'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag'', and select one of the values ``18, 19'' corresponding to ``JUB jackpot''. If so, turn on the "JUB jackpot flag".

In addition, if you win "16R definite strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" here, that is, if "until next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot ends. For a predetermined period of time (20 variable displays in this embodiment), for example, a production lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a non-announcement production that does not notify that the assigned "high support mode" is "until next time/high support mode". The lottery is held with a probability of about 1/100. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SB507, if it is determined in step SB505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. Note that details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Further, in step SB508, a holding control command setting process is performed. The hold control command is a command for informing the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the change display) held and stored in the second special change hold area. be. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SB201). The hold control command includes, as hold information, for example, information indicating the results of the above-mentioned jackpot determination process and jackpot type determination process, and information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is the trigger for the winning of the variable display. It will be done.

Here, details of the jackpot determination process in step SB505 will be explained with reference to FIG. 65.

First, in step SB5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be either "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first judgment table. Determine if they match. Although the process of step SB5101 is shown in a simplified manner in FIG. 65 for convenience, in reality, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "7" and if the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is "307" or not, and if either of these determinations is affirmative, an affirmative determination is made in step SB5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step SB5101, a negative determination is made in step SB5101.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step SB5102, and then the process proceeds to step SB5105. In step SB5102, the function of the main controller 261 that generates a jackpot state corresponding to the first gaming value (first special gaming state) enables the first gaming value imparting means (first special gaming state generation) in this embodiment. means) are constructed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5101, it is determined in step SB5103 whether or not the "high probability mode" is in progress based on the value of a lottery mode flag, which will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5103, that is, if the "high probability mode" is in progress, in step SB5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used for the second validity determination. Among the values corresponding to jackpots stored in the table, it is determined whether it is any one of "8 to 16, 308 to 316" excluding the above "7" and "307". In this determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 and each value corresponding to a jackpot match, as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5104, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode," the jackpot winning flag is turned on in step SB5102, and the process is then terminated.

The determination processing in step SB5101 and step SB5104 constitutes the first lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes this constitutes the first lottery means.

If a negative determination is made in step SB5103 or step SB5104, that is, if it is not a "big hit", the process moves to step SB5105.

Further, in step SB5105, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to a small win. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5105, that is, if it is determined that a small winning state will occur, the small winning winning flag is turned on in step SB5106, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5105, the process is immediately terminated.

The determination process in step SB5105 constitutes the second lottery in this embodiment, and the function of the main controller 261 that executes this constitutes the second lottery means. Further, in step SB5106, the function of the main control device 261 that generates a small winning state corresponding to the second gaming value (second special gaming state) enables the second gaming value giving means (second special gaming state) in this embodiment. (gaming state generating means) is configured.

Next, the reach determination process in step SB507 will be described with reference to FIG. 66.

First, in step SB5301, it is determined whether a winning flag (big hit winning flag or small winning winning flag) was set in the jackpot determining process performed immediately before. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB5301, that is, when a jackpot state or a small win state occurs, the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB5301, that is, if a winning state does not occur, then in step SB5302, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area with reference to the reach determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "front/back off reach". When an affirmative determination is made in step SB5302, in step SB5303, a front-back off-reach flag indicating the occurrence of a front-back off reach is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB5302, in step SB5304, the reach determination table is taken into account and the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be "reach other than front and back". It is determined whether the value matches any one of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "." If an affirmative determination is made in step SB5304, the flag other than front and back out is turned on in step SB5305, and then the process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB5304, that is, if the result is "completely missed", the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, after the process in step SB508, or if a negative determination is made in step SB501, in step SB509, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper starting prize opening 33YA or not. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step SB509, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made, in step SB510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the variable display triggered by winning to the upper starting winning hole 33YA is set to the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SB510, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB510, the process proceeds to step SB511, where the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step SB512, each value of the jackpot random number counter CB1, the jackpot type determination counter CB2, and the reach selection counter CB3 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the first special fluctuation reservation area. After step SB512, the process moves to step SB513.

In step SB513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Incidentally, the jackpot determination process in step SB513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step SB505 above, except for the small hit determination, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the winning in the upper starting winning opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

In the following step SB514, when it is determined in step SB513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a first jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot winning flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CB2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the above-mentioned first jackpot type judgment table. If the value is either “0, 1”, turn on the “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag”, and if the value is one of “2 to 5” corresponding to “16R Probable Variable Jackpot B” turns on the "16R definite variable jackpot B flag", and if the value is "6" corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot A", turns on the "4R definite variable jackpot A flag", corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot B" If the value is "7 to 10", turn on the "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B flag", and if the value is "11" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot A", turn on the "16R normal jackpot". A flag" is turned on, and if the value is one of "12 to 15" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot B", turn on the "16R normal jackpot B flag" and correspond to "4R normal jackpot B". If the value is one of "16 to 19", the "4R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" here, that is, if "High Support Mode Until Next Time" is granted after the jackpot ends, the above-mentioned non-announcement will be made as in step SB506. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to perform the performance. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SB515, when it is determined in step SB513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CB1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter CB3 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is used. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. The reach determination process in step SB515 is similar to the reach determination process in step SB507, except that the information regarding the variable display that is the target of the process is based on the ball hitting the upper starting prize opening 33YA. For convenience, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the subsequent step SB516, a holding control command setting process is performed. After that, this process ends. The setting process of the hold control command in step SB516 is the same as the setting process of the hold control command in step SB508, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SB305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 67.

In step SB601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step SB601, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step SB602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB602, that is, if the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 is confirmed and the value of the normal holding counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step SB603, where the normal holding counter is Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step SB604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 updated in the random number update process of step SB303 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended. Therefore, the process of step SB604 constitutes a part of the third lottery.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 61. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Executes wait processing for about seconds. In the following step SB102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step SB103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed down (ON), and if it is pressed down, the process moves to step SB112 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the following step SB104 whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step SB112 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SB105, and in subsequent step SB106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case as well, the process moves to step SB112.

In the process of step SB112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. The sub-control device 262 that has received the initialization command executes its own initialization process as described later, and sets the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting to the gaming state Store in the status storage area.

Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SB113, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SB113, etc.). That is, in step SB113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step SB114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step SB115, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SB103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step SB107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step SB108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

In step SB109, a game state check process is executed to check the game state stored in the RAM 503 at the time of power-off.

In the subsequent step SB110, a return command is sent to return the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc., which are the sub-side control devices, to the gaming state at the time of power-off. Note that the return command sent to the sub-control device 262 includes information regarding the gaming state at the time of power-off identified in the gaming state check process (gaming state determination value Xj described later).

In step SB111, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step SB115, interrupt permission is set, and the process proceeds to normal processing, which will be described later.

Here, the game status check process in step SB109 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 68 and 69. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a gaming state check process, and FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter Kj, and a gaming state determination value Xj, which will be described later. Note that the game state check process is also executed in the variable display setting process (step SB807) and the winning end setting process (step SB1216), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 68, in step SB1901, a process of reading various information related to the gaming state at the time of power-off, which is backed up and stored in the RAM 503, is executed. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj are each read from the RAM 503.

The lottery mode flag is state determination information for determining whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" or "high probability mode", and the flag value indicates whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode". In the case of "high probability mode", "50 (H)" is set, and in the case of "high probability mode", "53 (H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "5" of the upper four bits in the lottery mode flag is uniformly added as a countermeasure against noise, and is not particularly used to determine the gaming state.

The support mode flag is state determination information for determining what state the winning support mode is in. As the flag value, if the winning support mode is "low support mode", "A0 ( H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "A" of the upper four bits in the support mode flag is uniformly added as a noise countermeasure, and is not specifically used to determine the gaming state.

In addition, if the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", the flag value is "A1(H)" is set.

In addition, when the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value, and when it is "until next time/high support mode", the flag value is set. "A3(H)" is set.

The gaming state specific counter Kj is state determination information for counting the number of executions of the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot and specifying the switching timing of the gaming state.When the jackpot ends, a predetermined initial value is set and the fluctuating display is subtracted by 1 each time it is performed. For example, as will be described later, if "50" is set as the initial value of the gaming state specific counter Kj, and then the value of the counter Kj becomes "31", the fluctuation display at that point will be as follows: It can be specified that this is the 20th fluctuation display.

In this embodiment, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "16R Normal Jackpot B" or "4R Normal Jackpot B", in other words, after the jackpot ends, "20 times/high support mode", When "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode" is provided, "50" is set as the initial value.

In addition, if you win "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A", that is, if "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded after the jackpot ends, "30" is set as the initial value. Ru.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", or "JUB Jackpot", that is, if you are granted "Until next time/High support mode" after the jackpot ends, the initial value will be "0". " is set. However, when the non-notification performance execution flag is turned on and the non-notification performance is executed, "30" is set as the initial value. The non-notification performance execution flag is turned off after the initial value is set.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 68, in step SB1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read in step SB1901 and the value of the support mode flag are added.

In the following step SB1903, the addition value calculated in step SB1902 is ANDed with a predetermined mask value (in this embodiment, "07 (H)"), the lower 3 bits of data are extracted, and the data is processed for a predetermined operation. Set the game state determination value Xj in the area.

In step SB1904, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1". In other words, the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1905, and it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4" or not. In other words, the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, the process moves to step SB1909. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1905, the process moves to step SB1906.

In step SB1906, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "2". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1907, and it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1906 or step SB1907, the process moves to step SB1912. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1907, the process moves to step SB1908.

In step SB1908, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "6". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode".

If an affirmative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1914. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1916, where the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step SB1904 or step SB1905, and in step SB1909, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "31". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 20th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1910.

In step SB1910, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "21". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1911.

In step SB1911, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "11". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SB1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SB1912.

In step SB1912, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1". That is, it is determined whether it is the "50th time (in the case of the initial value "50")" or the "30th time (in the case of the initial value "30")".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SB1916, stores the value of the gaming state determination value Xj ("1", "4", "2" or "5") in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and Finish the process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB1912, that is, if the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1", the process moves to step SB1913, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is changed to "7". . Thereafter, the process moves to step SB1916, where the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step SB1908, and in step SB1914, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "0". That is, it is determined whether the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is not performed. If an affirmative determination is made here, the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1914, that is, if it is the "until next time/high support mode" where a non-notification effect is performed, the process moves to step SB1915, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set to "5". Change to Thereafter, the process moves to step SB1916, where the value "5" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends. As a result, even if you are in the "until next time/high support mode" state, the lottery mode will be "high probability mode" and the winning support mode will be "30 times" for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment).・The same effect as in the state of "High Support Mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 62. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the process of steps SB201 to SB210 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps SB211 and SB212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SB201, control signals based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, opening/closing accessory 37Y, etc. updated in the previous process are sent to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to each sub-side device. Execute external output processing such as sending to a control device. Some more detailed examples are listed below.

For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches described above, it is determined whether or not game balls have entered various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, and if there has been a winning, the prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings are determined. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311.

Furthermore, if a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

In addition, in the external output process, information for understanding the gaming state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall, taking into consideration various information such as the lottery mode flag and the jackpot flag described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

For example, if a winning error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and if there is no winning error, the turn-off signal is output. A signal is output.

Further, when displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner by the effect display device 42, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 which has input the variation pattern command, symbol command, etc., determines the variation mode of the production display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the production display device 42 (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.). An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 to display (display).

In step SB202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (198, 240 in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step SB203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SB204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Thereafter, in step SB205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of control is to be performed on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R and the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R are set, and jackpot determination and decorative symbols on the performance display device 42 are set. Setting of the fluctuation pattern is performed. Details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step SB206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the variable winning device 32 are set, such as what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when a jackpot or a small win occurs, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step SB207, a second display control process is executed. In this process, settings such as what kind of control is to be performed on the normal symbol display device 41 and the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are performed. Details of this second display control processing will be described later.

In step SB208, opening/closing accessory control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, such as what kind of control is to be performed on the opening/closing accessory 37Y, are set. Details of this opening/closing accessory control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step SB209, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SB210, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal processing. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process moves to step SB201, and the processes from step SB201 described above are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is executed repeatedly (step SB211, step SB212).

That is, in step SB211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SB212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step SB202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198, 240 in this example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps SB201 to SB209 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CB1) can be randomly updated, and fluctuations can be similarly The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated randomly.

Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SB209: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step SB213 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SB213, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step SB214, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step SB215. to be memorized. Thereafter, in step SB216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step SB217, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step SB218, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step SB209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps SB201 to SB208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps SB211 and SB212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the appropriate timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step SB213), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the first display control process in step SB205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 70.

In FIG. 70, in step SB801, various winning medium flags (medium jackpot flag and medium winning flag), which will be described in detail later, are referred to to determine whether or not it is currently a winning state (in a jackpot state or a small winning state). Determine. Note that the winning state (big winning state and small winning state) includes the middle of the winning state and a predetermined time after the winning state ends. The predetermined time after the winning state ends is the time from when the winning state ends until the normal game (variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R) starts, and generally during this time period, the effect display device At 42, a display indicating the end of the win state and various game states and various modes to be provided after the win is made. In addition, the period from when the variable display is stopped and displayed in a manner corresponding to a win on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the effect display device 42 until the variable prize winning device 32 is released (generally, this time period is A display indicating the start of a winning state is displayed on the effect display device 42) is also included in the winning.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB801, that is, if the winning state is in progress, this process is immediately terminated.On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB801, a first display is displayed in step SB802, which will be described in detail later. It is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (effect display device 42) is undergoing a variable display by looking at the setting status of the medium flag. Specifically, if the first displaying flag is set (in the on state), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the first displaying flag is cleared (in the off state), the fluctuation display is considered to be in progress. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped. Although the details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting variable display on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step SB920, step SB807). When the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step SB814), it is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step SB802, that is, if the winning state is not in progress and the fluctuating display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step SB803, where the fluctuating display (second fluctuating It is determined whether the value of the lower suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions (display) is greater than 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB803, that is, if at least one second variable display is held and stored, 1 is subtracted from the lower holding counter Nb in step SB804. Note that in this embodiment, if the second variable display is held and stored as a result of the determination process in step SB803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even if the first variable display is stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is prioritized and consumed (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

In the following step SB805, processing for shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the second special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step SB805, in step SB806, the process of turning on and off the second hold lamp 46b and the process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process moves to step SB807.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SB803, that is, if no second variable display is stored in storage, in step SB808, the variable display (first It is determined whether an upper suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions (variable display) is greater than 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step SB808, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step SB809. In the following step SB810, processing for shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step SB810, in step SB811, the process of turning on and off the first holding lamp 46a and the process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process moves to step SB807. In this embodiment, there is one execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing a fluctuation display based on the data. Then, they will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step SB807, variable display setting processing is performed. Here, details of the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 72.

First, in step SB900, a game status check process is executed. It should be noted that the gaming status check process is similar to the gaming status checking process in step SB109 (see FIG. 68), so a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Subsequently, in step SB901, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a small win by determining whether or not the small win winning flag is on.

If it is determined that the win corresponds to a small win, the process moves to step SB910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process moves to step SB902.

In step SB902, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot winning flag is on.

If it is determined that this corresponds to a jackpot, the process moves to step SB903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step SB912.

In step SB903, it is determined whether any of the various probability variable jackpot flags ("16R probability variation jackpot A flag", "16R probability variation jackpot B flag", "4R probability variation jackpot A flag", "4R probability variation jackpot B flag") is on. By determining whether or not the variable display corresponds to a "probable variable jackpot", it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a "probable variable jackpot".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB903, that is, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", a variation pattern is determined in consideration of the variation pattern table corresponding to the "probable variable jackpot" in step SB904, and is set in the variation pattern command. . Next, in step SB905, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "probable variable jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" (described later). After that, the process moves to step SB920.

If a negative determination is made in step SB903, the process moves to step SB906, and the various normal jackpot flags ("16R normal jackpot A flag", "16R normal jackpot B flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", By determining whether any of the "Jackpot B Flag") is on, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to the "Normal Jackpot". If an affirmative determination is made in step SB906, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", a fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal jackpot" in step SB907, and is set in the fluctuation pattern command. do. Subsequently, in step SB908, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "normal jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" (described later). After that, the process moves to step SB920.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, depending on the type of symbols stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42, it is impossible to determine the gaming state such as the lottery mode given after the end of the jackpot. In other words, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", the "odd number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is a "normal jackpot", the "even number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and so on, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol and the jackpot type. are not clearly associated with each other, and in this embodiment, the above various tables are used to determine the predetermined fluctuations depending on the type of various jackpots, for example, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", it is likely to be stopped and displayed with "odd symbols". The tables are simply divided so that the appearance rates of patterns and designs are different. Therefore, for example, at the time of a jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable pattern or a stop symbol is selected based on one jackpot table, regardless of the type of jackpot such as "probable jackpot" or "normal jackpot".

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB906, the process moves to step SB909, and it is determined whether or not the JUB jackpot flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to "JUB jackpot". Determine whether If an affirmative determination is made in step SB909, that is, if it is a "JUB jackpot", the process moves to step SB910.

In step SB910, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", and is set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step SB911, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ6", which will be described later) corresponding to the chance symbol is set, and the process proceeds to step SB920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB902, that is, if it is "missing", it is determined in step SB912 whether or not the front and rear missing flags are on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB912, that is, in the case of "out-of-front reach", in step SB913, a fluctuation pattern is determined by taking into account the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "out-of-front reach", and the fluctuation pattern command is , and turn off the front and back out-of-line flags. Continuously, in step SB914, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ3", which will be described later) corresponding to the front-back out-of-place symbol is set. After that, the process moves to step SB920.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, it is determined in step SB915 whether or not the flag other than front/rear deviation is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SB915, that is, if it is a "reach other than front/back off", a fluctuation pattern is determined in step SB916 with reference to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front/back off"; Set it to the fluctuation pattern command and turn off the flags other than those that are out of order. Subsequently, in step SB917, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ4", which will be described later) corresponding to a symbol other than front and back off is set. After that, the process moves to step SB920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SB915, that is, if it is a "completely off", then in step SB918, an outlier variation pattern is determined by taking into consideration the variation pattern table corresponding to "completely off", and the variation pattern command is Set to . Subsequently, in step SB919, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ5" to be described later) corresponding to a completely missed symbol is set. After that, the process moves to step SB920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and variation pattern command will be explained. In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "probable variable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as "probable variable jackpot/variable pattern table"), a variable pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot", "JUB jackpot" and "small win" are used. , a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "completely off" (hereinafter referred to as "reach when completely off"). A plurality of variable pattern tables (referred to as variable pattern tables) are provided depending on the gaming status (values of gaming status determination value Xj "0" to "7").

For example, regarding the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 89(a), at "address 100" which is the reference address, the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to the "normal state" of "0". A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 101", a variable probability/variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state determination value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 102", the value of gaming state determination value Xj is "2". A variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "103" is stored, a variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value Xj of "3" is stored at "address 104" , when the variable pattern table is stored, when the gaming state determination value Xj corresponds to the value "4", the fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 105", when the variable probability jackpot corresponds to the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5", A variable pattern table is stored, and at "address 106", a variable pattern table for a probability variable jackpot corresponding to the value "6" of the gaming state judgment value A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

In addition, regarding the complete failure/fluctuation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 89(b), at "address 700" which is the reference address, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0", which corresponds to the "normal state". A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 701", a complete failure/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state judgment value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 702", the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2". A complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "703" is stored, a complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value "3" is stored at "address 704", , when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "4", the variation pattern table is stored, and at "address 705", when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "5", the completely off state/ A fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 706", a fluctuation pattern table for when the gaming state determination value Xj is completely off corresponding to "6" is stored; A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Although not shown, there are other fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "foreign and off reach", and As for the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front and back misses", as in the case of the above-mentioned variable pattern table for variable jackpot and fluctuating pattern table for complete miss, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0" ~ A plurality of table groups corresponding to "7" are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the fluctuation pattern in step SB904, step SB907, step SB910, step SB913, step SB916, and step SB918, first, based on the gaming state determination value Xj specified in the gaming state check process (step SB900), Next, a process is performed to select a table corresponding to a predetermined gaming state (values of gaming state determination value Xj from "0" to "7") from a plurality of table groups. At this time, the address where the table to be selected is stored is specified by adding the value of the gaming state judgment value can do. In other words, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj plays the role of the offset value as it is.

Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected fluctuation pattern table (for example, the variable jackpot time fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "address 100": see FIG. 90). and set the corresponding variation pattern command.

The variable pattern command in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are composed of information specifying the gaming state. In this embodiment, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set as is. Furthermore, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are made up of information that specifies the jackpot type, etc., and the 8 bits of the lower byte are made up of information that specifies the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the variable probability jackpot/variation pattern table related to the normal state (Xj=0) [see Figure 89(a)], in the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern command related to the normal state, the upper 4 bits are set to "0" which is the value of the gaming state determination value Xj, and the following 4 bits are set to "F" indicating "probability variable jackpot". Then, the remaining 8 bits of the lower byte are set with values that specify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Note that the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation modes (effect patterns) of decorative symbols in a table, and when a variation pattern command is received, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is stored in the sub-control device 262. The pattern (performance pattern) becomes executable.

Next, the symbol commands will be explained in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine the symbol to be stopped. In this embodiment, there are six categories: combinations of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of even-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of symbols other than front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of completely out-of-place symbols, and combinations of chance symbols. is specified. These categories are indicated by, for example, "BZ1," "BZ2," "BZ3," "BZ4," "BZ5," and "BZ6," and any one of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and stop symbols is stored in the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

The combination of odd jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "BZ1" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of odd jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "BZ1" indicating an odd jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of even jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "BZ2" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of even jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "BZ2" indicating an even jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of front and back off symbols corresponds to the "front and back off reach" in which after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops, and corresponds to the combination of front and back off symbols. “BZ3” is set in the symbol command.

The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to the "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the combination of symbols other than front and rear off is the pattern that corresponds to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "BZ4" is set in the command.

The combination of complete miss symbols corresponds to a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs, and "BZ5" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the complete miss symbol combination.

Moreover, "BZ6" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, as described above, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top.

Although details will be described later, when "BZ3" to "BZ5" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. Specifically, when "BZ3" indicating a combination of front and rear out-of-reach symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command selects the front and rear out-of-reach symbols stored in the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to a missed reach is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front and back misses is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than front and rear misses stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and rear misses in the RAM 553 is sent to the sub-control device. 262 is determined as the stopping symbol. When "BZ5" indicating a combination of completely missed symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects the combination of symbols corresponding to a completely missed symbol stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

Further, when "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the variation pattern command and symbol command set as described above are output in an external output process (step SB201) which will be described later. Then, the sub-control device 262 that has input these commands determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on these commands, and performs display control to display the variation mode on the effect display device 42 (variable display). An instruction is issued to the device 45.

Now, in step SB920, a start setting process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In this start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. .

The variable display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative symbol selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the settings of the first display timer, when a control signal to start variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of normal processing, the special display device Variable display starts at 43L and 43R. After step SB920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 70, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB802, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SB812, where a first display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Next, the process proceeds to step SB813, where it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the first display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SB813.

When a negative determination is made in step SB813, in step SB817, switching display settings are made to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the present process ends. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB813, the first display flag is canceled (turned off) in step SB814, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R in step SB815. .

In addition, based on the setting contents of the above-mentioned stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for only a few seconds).

Subsequently, in step SB816, a variation end setting process is performed, and then this process is ended. Here, the variation end setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 71.

First, in step SB1001, it is determined whether the stop display corresponds to a jackpot or a small win, taking into account the jackpot winning flag and the small winning winning flag. Here, if it corresponds to a big win or a small win, the process moves to step SB1002, and win settings are made. Specifically, setting processing is performed for the medium jackpot flag, medium small win flag, first variable flag, first variable timer, open number counter, winning counter Vx, etc. After step SB1002 is completed, the variation end time setting process is ended.

The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the jackpot state is in progress, and here, "1" indicating the occurrence of the jackpot state is set as the flag value (turned on).

The small hit medium flag is state determination information for determining whether or not a small win is in progress. Here, like the jackpot medium flag, "1" indicating the occurrence of a small win is set as the flag value. (turned on).

The first variable flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state.

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the open time of the variable winning device 32 (time when the special prize state occurs), the interval between each special prize state, etc., and is defined from the start or end of opening of the opening/closing plate 32a. This is taken into consideration when determining whether or not time has elapsed. In the win setting process of step SB1002, predetermined values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 91). For example, if the first time is the above-mentioned "long open" like "16R guaranteed variable jackpot A", "7500" is set in the first variable timer, and like "JUB jackpot" the first time is the above-mentioned "short open". In this case, "100" is set in the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 32a is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 91, the opening/closing pattern control table includes the number of times the special prize state occurs in each winning state (number of rounds), the opening time of the opening/closing plate 32a in each special prize state (each round), and the time between each special prize state. The interval time etc. are set in advance.

The open number counter is used to determine the number of times the special prize state occurs during the jackpot state or the small win state, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process (“long open” or “short open”) of the variable winning device 32 is executed. This is the status determination information. In the win setting process of step SB1002, initial values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" indicating 16 times is set, and in the case of "JUB jackpot", the total of 5 "short openings" and 15 "long openings" is set. "20" indicating 20 times is set as the initial value.

The winning counter Vx is a winning counting means that counts the number of game balls that have won into the variable winning device 32. In this embodiment, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 63), it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there is a winning prize, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is incremented by 1.

In addition, in the win setting process of step SB1002, the specified number K1 is the maximum expected number of prizes to be won to the variable winning device 32 per one opening/closing operation (one special prize state) of the opening/closing plate 32a, with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. Configure settings. As described above, the prescribed number K1 is predetermined for each opening type (operation mode of the opening/closing member related to one opening/closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". For example, if it is a "long open", the prescribed number K1 is set to "10", and if it is a "short open", the prescribed number K1 is set to "3".

In the win setting process at step SB1002, an opening command that announces the start of a big win or a small win is also set. However, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", the opening command is set after five "short openings" (such as special prize state start processing in step SB1217, which will be described later). As a result, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", the jackpot notification performance etc. will be performed after the five "short openings" are completed, and up to this point, it cannot be distinguished from the case of a small win.

Now, in step SB1001, if it is determined that it does not correspond to a jackpot or a small win, that is, the jackpot winning flag and the small winning winning flag are off, the process moves to step SB1003.

In step SB1003, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". The support counter is a means to measure the duration of the "high support mode" (how many times the fluctuation is displayed), and as described later, after the jackpot ends, the values corresponding to various jackpots are set as the counter value. Ru.

Here, if the counter value of the support number counter is "0", this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the support number counter is set (if the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the high support mode is being set, and in step SB1004, the value of the support number counter is subtracted by 1. . In step SB1004, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is also performed. Thereafter, the process moves to step SB1005.

In step SB1005, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the predetermined number of variable displays after the end of the jackpot (after the high support mode is applied). Here, if the value of the support number counter is "0", processing is performed to switch the value of the support mode flag to "A0 (H)" indicating "low support mode" in step SB1006, and this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB1005 that the counter value of the support number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the variable prize winning device control process of step SB206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 73.

First, in step SB1201, it is determined whether the medium jackpot flag or the medium small win flag is on. If a negative determination is made here, the process is directly terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1202, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in the subsequent step SB1202.

In the following step SB1203, it is determined whether the first variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state, the process advances to step SB1204, and it is determined whether the count value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. It is determined whether there is an opening time (specified time "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds") remaining for each opening/closing operation ("long opening" or "short opening").

If a negative determination is made in step SB1204, the process proceeds to step SB1205, where it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is greater than or equal to the specified number K1, that is, the number of game balls that have won into the variable winning device 32 in one special prize state. It is determined whether or not the number of pitches has reached the maximum expected number of prizes (specified number of "10" or "3"). If a negative determination is made in step SB1205, that is, if the timing to close the variable prize winning device 32 (timing to end the special prize state) has not yet arrived, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB1204 or step SB1205, the process proceeds to step SB1206, where a first variable timer setting process is performed.

Here, the first variable timer indicates whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the special prize state (for example, whether a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of a jackpot or small win, or whether the next time has passed since the end of a predetermined special prize state). In order to determine whether the interval until the start of the special prize state has elapsed, etc., a predetermined value (for example, a value "750" corresponding to "3 seconds") or "250" corresponding to "1 second") is set.

After that, the process proceeds to step SB1207, where it is determined whether the counter value of the open number counter is "0", that is, whether the number of executions of the special prize state ("long open" or "short open") has reached the specified number of times. judge.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1207, an open end setting process is performed in step SB1210, and this process ends. In the end setting process of step SB1210, the first variable flag is turned off and the winning end flag is turned on.

If a negative determination is made in step SB1207, that is, if the number of executions of the special prize state (“long release” or “short release”) has not reached the specified number of times, special prize sending processing is performed in step SB1211, and this processing is continued. finish.

In the special prize sending process of step SB1211, the value of the open number counter is subtracted by 1, and the first variable flag is turned off. As a result, the opening/closing process is repeated until the number of executions of the special prize state reaches the specified number of times.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB1203, that is, within a predetermined time after the end of the special prize state (within a predetermined time after the end of winning, or during the interval between special prize states), the process advances to step SB1212. , it is determined whether the value of the first variable timer is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1212, that is, if a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of the special prize state and it is time to move to the next process (start of the next special prize state or start of the normal game), , the process moves to step SB1215. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1212, the process is directly terminated.

In step SB1215, it is determined whether or not to end the jackpot state or small win state, taking into consideration the winning end flag.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SB1215, a winning end setting process is performed in step SB1216, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB1215, special prize state start processing is performed in step SB1217, and then this processing is ended.

In the win end setting process of step SB1216, the medium jackpot flag or the medium small win flag is turned off, and the lottery mode flag switching process, the support mode flag switching process, the support number counter setting process, and the game status notification command setting process , setting processing of an ending command that announces the end of the jackpot or small win, etc. are performed.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (various "probability variable jackpot flag" or "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on), "53 (H)" indicating the occurrence of "high probability mode" is set as a flag value. On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (various "normal jackpot flags" are on), "50 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "low probability mode" is set as the flag value.

However, when the small winning winning flag is on, the lottery mode flag switching process is not performed, and the flag value related to the original mode is set as is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of a small win (the flag value of the lottery mode flag is "53 (H)"), even after the small win ends, the "high probability mode" (lottery mode The flag value "53 (H)") of the flag is set.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the flag value will be "A1 (H)" is set as the flag value, "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "30 times/high support mode S", and "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "until next time/high support mode". "A3(H)" is set as the flag value.

In the support number counter setting process, the support number counter is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the support As the value of the number counter, "20" corresponds to 20 times of fluctuation display, "30" corresponds to 30 times of fluctuation display, "40" corresponds to 40 times of fluctuation display, or "50" corresponds to 50 times of fluctuation display. Set. Further, when "30 times/high support mode S" is provided, "30" corresponding to 30 times of variable display is set as the value of the support number counter. When the "until next time/high support mode" is provided, the value of the support number counter is set to a value that is virtually impossible to reach (for example, "99999" corresponding to 99999 times of fluctuation display).

The gaming state notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the gaming state that will be set after the end of the jackpot. In setting the command, first a game status check process is performed. Since the game status check process is the same as the game status check process in step SB109 (see FIG. 68), detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The gaming status notification command includes a gaming status determination value Xj related to the new gaming status ascertained through the gaming status checking process. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that receives this switches the gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj) that it knows to a new gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj). Note that the gaming state notification command may be omitted, and instead of this, the gaming state determination value Xj may be included in, for example, an ending command that announces the end of the jackpot state.

Incidentally, the jackpot winning flag, the small winning winning flag, and various "jackpot flags" are turned off after various processes such as the above lottery mode flag switching process are completed. In addition, when the winning setting (step SB1002) is performed in the fluctuation end setting process in FIG. A configuration may also be adopted in which the "high probability mode" is interrupted.

In the special prize state start process of step SB1217, the first variable flag is turned on, and the opening time ("7500" or "100") related to the next special prize state is set to the first variable with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table. In addition to setting the timer, the specified number K1 for the next special prize state is also set. Furthermore, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is reset to "0".

Based on the on/off status of the first variable flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first variable flag is on, a control signal to open the opening/closing plate 32a is outputted to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening becomes open. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal to close the opening/closing plate 32a is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening is closed.

Next, the second display control process in step SB207 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 74.

In FIG. 74, in step SB2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable by checking the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display. Determine. Specifically, when the second displaying flag is on, it is assumed that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step SB2101, the process proceeds to step SB2102, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is >0, the process advances to step SB2103. In step SB2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step SB2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step SB2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 are satisfied. Specifically, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, so "500" is set to the second display timer. . Further, in the "high support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, "100" is set to the second display timer.

Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the normal symbol display device 41 will display the variable display. Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "×" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and if the displayed symbol is "○", it will be displayed as "×" or "×". ”, the display is switched to “○”. Then, after step SB2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Now, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB2101, that is, if variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step SB2106, where a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by 1.

The process then proceeds to step SB2107, where it is determined whether the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SB2107, the second displaying flag is turned off in step SB2108, and in step SB2109, the normal symbol stop display setting for performing a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Then, based on the setting contents of this normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a win, the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for a few seconds), and in the case of a loss, the "X" symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is determined whether or not it is a win based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter CB4 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area.

Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter CB4, the winning values are two, "0 and 1" in "low support mode", and "0 to 7" in "high support mode". There are 8 pieces.

Next, the process advances to step SB2110, where a variation end setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is state determination information for determining whether the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a prescribed time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is different between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", "1000" is set for the second variable timer. In the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB2107, a switching display setting is performed in step SB2111 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, and the present process is ended. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", the display is switched to "x", and if the current lighting is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the opening/closing accessory control process in step SB208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75.

First, in step SB2201, it is determined whether the second variable flag indicating whether the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not on (the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the closed state), the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB2201, that is, if the second variable flag is on, it is assumed that the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step SB2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

The process then proceeds to step SB2203, where it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the second variable timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step SB2203 when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB2203, the process moves to step SB2204, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the termination setting process of step SB2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Based on the on/off status of the second variable flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second variable flag is on, a control signal to open the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the open state. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a control signal to close the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the closed state. As a result, it becomes impossible to win a game ball into the lower starting winning hole 33YB.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will first be explained with reference to FIG. 76, and then main processing will be explained with reference to FIG.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step SB3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step SB3002, in order to memorize that the command was sent from the main control device 261. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process that is executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step SB3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SB3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SB3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step SB3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step SB3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SB3107, and in the following step SB3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power-off occurrence information is not set in step SB3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SB3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization process from step SB3115. Transition.

In step SB3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SB3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step SB3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SB3114, where interrupts are permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power outage occurrence information is set in step SB3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SB3108, process). That is, in step SB3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step SB3110, the power cut-off occurrence information is cleared, and in step SB3111, the payout permission flag that allows the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step SB3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SB3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SB3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SB3114, in the process of step SB3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step SB3123 onwards is performed as power outage processing at the time of power-off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SB3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step SB3124. Thereafter, in step SB3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step SB3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step SB3127, a RAM judgment value is calculated and RAM access is prohibited in step SB3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that the process in step SB3122 checks the power-off occurrence information after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt processing, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and a determination process for the command is performed (step SB3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 79.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps SB3124, SB3201), first, it is determined in step SB3301 whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 76).

If it is determined in step SB3301 that the command reception flag is off, this process ends because no new command has been received from main controller 261. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step SB3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step SB3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SB3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SB3303, the processing in steps SB3302 to SB3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is determined in steps SB3304 to SB3306. In step SB3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SB3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SB3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step SB3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step SB3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step SB3309. Thereafter, in step SB3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission for payout of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step SB3307, this command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step SB3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of RAM 513 (step SB3308) and set the initial value of RAM 513 (step SB3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SB3304: NO, step SB3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 will return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step SB3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SB3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step SB3305: NO, step SB3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step SB3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step SB3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SB3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step SB3304: NO), a payout return command (step SB3305: NO), or a prize ball command (step SB3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 78. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step SB3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB3202, launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step SB3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step SB3204. Execute the return operation. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step SB3205, the lower tray full state or lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full. , execute the setting for the lower tray full release state. Further, in step SB3206, a tank ball absent state (ball out state) or a tank ball free state (ball present state) is set in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb condition is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb release condition are performed. Run the settings.

After that, in step SB3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step SB3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step SB3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step SB3210.

In step SB3211, the dispensing motor 358a is driven to execute the ball discharging process on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball is not in a state where it is not possible to dislodge the ball, and that the ball discharging operation has not started. In the following step SB3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained with reference to FIG. 80. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In this normal processing, first, in step SB3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step SB3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

Note that the ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the storage area is It is configured to return to the starting point and update the command. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the following step SB3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, the command determination process will be explained with reference to FIG. 83.

First, in step SB4101, the received command is read from the command buffer of RAM553. In subsequent step SB4102, it is determined whether the command is an initialization command, in step SB4103 it is determined whether or not it is a return command, in step SB4104 it is determined whether or not it is a pending control command, and in step SB4110 In step SB4111, it is determined whether or not it is a gaming state notification command, and in step SB4112, it is determined whether or not it is a symbol command.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is an initialization command, it means that the main controller 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 553 when the power is turned on, so the RAM 553 is cleared in step SB4105, and the RAM 553 is cleared in step SB4106. Set the initial value of RAM 553. As a result, the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a return command (step SB4102: NO, step SB4103: YES), the main control device 261 returns to the state before the power was cut off, so the subsystem that does not have a backup function In step SB4107, the control device 262 reads the value of the gaming state determination value Xj (any one of "0" to "7") included in the return command, and stores it in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a hold control command (step SB4103: NO, step SB4104: YES), in step SB4108, various information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type) included in the hold control command is processed. information, information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is the trigger for the variable display) is stored in the sub-variation holding area, and this processing ends.

The sub-fluctuation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special fluctuation reservation area of the main controller 261. In other words, the sub-variation holding area includes a first sub-variation holding area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33YA, a second sub fluctuation holding area corresponding to the lower starting winning opening 33YB, and one sub-execution area. Each of the two sub-fluctuating reservation areas includes four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area).

In each holding area, according to the reception history (reception order) of the holding control command and the winning history of the game ball included in the holding control command (whether the winning is based on which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB, etc.), Information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type information) related to the variable display executed by the effect display device 42 is stored in chronological order. Thereby, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the number of pending changes and their contents.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a gaming state notification command (step SB4104: NO, step SB4110: YES), in step SB4107, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj included in the gaming state notification command ( (any one of "0" to "7") is read out and stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a variable pattern command (step SB4110: NO, step SB4111: YES), it is time to start variable display on the effect display device 42, so start setting is performed in step SB4113. The process is performed and the process moves to step SB4114.

In the start setting process of step SB4113, various settings related to the variable display performed on the effect display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub-fluctuation holding area to the sub-execution area side is executed. Subsequently, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display timer. The variable display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of the variable display) in the effect display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

In addition, in the start setting process, a variable display flag is turned on, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the effect display device 42 is displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, a production pattern related to the variation display of decorative symbols is selected, and the display is stopped after the variation time has elapsed based on the hit type information (including "miss"). Determine the stopping symbols (combination of stopping symbols) to be executed. Information regarding the production pattern and stop symbols determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation holding area. Note that the correspondence between variable time information and performance patterns and the correspondence between jackpot type information and stopped symbols are stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table.

In addition, in the sub-control device 262, similarly to the main control device 261, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "probable variable jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "normal jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "JUB jackpot" and a "small win" are generated. , the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "completely off", respectively, the values of the game state judgment value Xj are "0" to " 7" A plurality of corresponding table groups are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

That is, when determining the display mode on the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects a predetermined gaming state (gaming state judgment value The table corresponding to the values of Xj ("0" to "7") is selected. At this time, specifying the address where the table to be selected is stored by adding the value of the gaming state determination value Xj to the reference address is the same as when selecting the above-mentioned variable pattern table.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a symbol command (step SB4111: NO, step SB4112: YES), symbol setting processing is performed in step SB4116, and this processing is ended.

In the symbol setting process of step SB4116, the symbols stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 81) of the RAM 553, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect display device 42 based on the winning type information stored in the reservation area of the sub-variation reservation area. It is set in the above sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed.

More specifically, when "BZ1" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th symbols is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "BZ2" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the zero, 2, 4, 6, and 8 symbols is determined as the stop symbol. In addition, when "BZ3" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front and back out-of-reach symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ4" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and back out is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ5" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely missed symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When “BZ6” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” is set as a stop symbol in accordance with the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the production display device 42. decide.

Now, in step SB4114, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variable pattern command matches the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Here, if both values match, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the two values are different, the status error flag is turned on at step SB4115, and at step SB4117, the value of the gaming status determination value Xj included in the newly received fluctuation pattern command is regarded as the appropriate value. , the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in the gaming state information storage area. After that, this process ends. If the two values are different by turning on the status error flag, this fact will be notified by the error display lamp 104 or the like. Of course, the error notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and the error notification may be performed using the effect display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like.

In recent years, gaming machines have a backup function in their main controllers, so even if the power is cut off due to a power outage, various data including the gaming mode (gaming state) at that time will be stored. Since the power can be maintained, even if the power is cut off during the high probability mode, the player can resume playing the game in the high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, by using the backup function described above, it becomes possible to set the gaming machines in the high probability mode from the beginning of business at the gaming hall, which is commonly called "morning." Such acts are carried out by the game hall in order to increase its ability to attract customers at the start of business, but there is a risk that the gambling spirit of the players may be turned into a prank. Various methods can be considered to set the above action, but one example is a method of not initializing and resetting a gaming machine whose gaming mode was the high probability mode at the end of business on the previous day. Furthermore, in a configuration such as the present embodiment, in which information regarding the gaming mode (gaming state determination value Xj) is transmitted from the main controller to the sub-control device by a return command or the like when the pachinko machine is powered on, etc. If the cable connector connecting the main controller and sub-control device is removed when the power is turned on, etc., the sub-control device will not be able to grasp the actual gaming mode set by the main controller, and will not be able to grasp the initial gaming mode. In other words, control related to the "normal mode" is performed.

In general gaming machines, when performing effects on a display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color, etc.) is made different between the normal mode and the high probability mode, so that players, etc. This makes it easy to understand the current game mode.

Further, since the sub-control device that controls the liquid crystal display device and the like generally does not have a backup function, when the power is turned off, control related to the initial setting gaming mode ("normal mode") is performed.

Therefore, by utilizing this, it is possible to set the display mode of the liquid crystal display device to be in the normal mode even though the actual gaming mode set by the main controller is the high probability mode. In this case, the current gaming mode cannot be easily determined just by looking at the liquid crystal display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this action through a predetermined investigation or the like.

In particular, in a gaming machine where a high probability mode that is superficially difficult to distinguish from the "normal mode", such as the "latent probability variable state" of the present embodiment, is set, the high probability mode is activated by the above action, and the gaming hall starts operating. If the game mode is set from time to time, it becomes impossible to determine the actual game mode from the display mode of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the fluctuation pattern command and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 are different. If so, an error notification is made to that effect, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the gaming state information storage area. In other words, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate gaming mode at that time. As a result, even if an action such as the above-mentioned "Morning" is performed and the actual gaming mode set by the main controller 261 is the high probability mode, the performance mode in the sub-control device 262 will be changed to the mode in the normal mode. Even if the variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the performance mode corresponds to the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command. As a result, actions such as the above-mentioned "morning" by game halls can be suppressed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, after step SB3903 or if a negative determination is made in step SB3901, the process moves to step SB3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SB3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step SB3912.

In step SB3905, updating processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 81, it is used to set the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5, the accessory effect counter CB8, and each losing symbol in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area. Upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used.

The missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is for determining the symbol (jackpot symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 when a jackpot (“probable jackpot” or “normal jackpot”) occurs. In this embodiment, five odd-numbered symbols and five even-numbered symbols are set as jackpot symbols. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 4, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 4). When the symbol command transmitted from the main controller 261 is "BZ1" indicating a combination of odd jackpot symbols, the counter value is determined based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values and decorative symbols), for example. If is 0, it is "1" (lower number), if it is 1, it is "3" (lower number), if it is 2, it is "5" (lower number), and if it is 3, it is "7" (lower number). If the number is 4, then the number is 9, and so on, the combination of odd jackpot symbols is determined.

Also, if the symbol command is "BZ2" indicating a combination of even jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values and decorative symbols), for example, if the counter value is 0, "0" If it is 1, it will be “2”, if it is 2, it will be “4”, if it is 3, it will be “6”, if it is 4, it will be “ A combination of even jackpot symbols is determined, such as ``8'' (double number).

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as described above. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CB5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referenced at the timing when a symbol command is received. You may also do so.

The accessory production counter CB8 is for determining whether or not to perform an accessory production (additional production), which will be described later, and its type. As the accessory production counter CB8, 400 counter values (0 to 399) are prepared. That is, the accessory effect counter CB8 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 399, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 399).

The accessory performance counter CB8 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SB3905 and stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553. Then, it will be taken into account in the accessory performance setting process of step SB3910, which will be described later.

The upper, middle, and lower losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stopping symbols (combinations of losing symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the jackpot lottery results in a "losing" drawing. Since each column displays one of 10 decorative symbols, 10 counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each column. The upper/missing symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle/missing symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower/missing symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbol in the lower symbol display area. is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical values of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted and the current value is determined. Ru. The winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that their update times do not overlap, and the combination of these winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the RAM 553 as the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffers, front and rear out-of-reach reach symbol buffers, and It is stored in one of the completely missed symbol buffers.

Here, the updating process of each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 82, in step SB4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL, and in step SB4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the center/miss symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the down/out symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination will be made in step SB4001. Further, if the top/miss symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step SB4002. Then, if it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL (step SB4001 is YES), the process advances to step SB4003, and the top/miss symbol counter CL is updated. If it is time to update the center/out symbol counter CM (step SB4002 is YES), the process advances to step SB4004, and the center/out symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if it is time to update the down/out symbol counter CR (both steps SB4001 and SB4002 are NO), the process advances to step SB4005, and the down/out symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SB4003 to SB4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted. , the calculation results are set as the current values of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above update process of CL, CM, and CR, each of the upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. Never. As a result, one set of missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step SB4006, the combination of the updated missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas If it is a combination of reachable symbols (YES in step SB4006), further in step SB4007, it is determined whether or not the symbol is different from the symbol in the middle symbol display area. Determine whether or not. If the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and back missed reach (front and back missed symbols) (step SB4007 is YES), proceed to step SB4008, and check the combination of the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. It is stored in the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffers in the RAM 553. If the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of reach (symbols other than front and back miss) (symbols other than front and back miss) (step SB4007 is NO), the process advances to step SB4009, and the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time are The combinations are stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer of RAM 553 except for the front and back.

In addition, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (step SB4006 is NO), the process advances to step SB4010, and it is determined whether the combination of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a winning symbol combination, If it is a combination of losing symbols (completely missing symbols) (step SB4010 is YES), the process advances to step SB4011, and the combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely missing symbol buffer of the RAM 553. do. Note that if both step SB4006 and step SB4010 are NO, the symbols are aligned on the top, middle, and bottom, which corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols, but in this case, the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are buffered. The process ends without storing the data in the file.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the chance pattern that is stopped and displayed in the case of "JUB jackpot" has one combination of decorative patterns ("3", "4", "1"), There is no need to use counter information for display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, in step SB3907, display setting processing for performing various displays on the effect display device 42 is performed. The display setting process mainly includes a variable display setting process for performing a variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42, a hold display setting process for holding a hold display, and the like.

First, the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 84. As shown in FIG. 84, in step SB4301, the setting status of the variable display flag is checked to determine whether or not the effect display device 42 is displaying a variable display. In detail, if the fluctuating display flag is set (on), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the fluctuating flag is cleared (off), the fluctuating display is It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which is a stopped state. As described above, the fluctuating display flag is turned on when starting the fluctuating display of the effect display device 42 (start setting process of step SB4113), and is turned on when the fluctuating display of the effect display device 42 is stopped (step SB4113). (see SB4305).

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the fluctuation has started or if the fluctuation is in progress, the process advances to step SB4302, and if a negative determination is made, the present process is directly ended.

In step SB4302, a variable display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the fluctuation display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

The process then proceeds to step SB4303, where it is determined whether a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the fluctuation display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303.

If a negative determination is made in step SB4303, a variation execution process is performed in step SB4304 to execute a variation display on the effect display device 42, and this process is ended.

In this variation execution process, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variation reservation area of the RAM 553, for example. .

Thereby, the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in accordance with the command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of symbols on the effect display device 42. Once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the value of the fluctuation display timer set in the start setting process of step SB4113 is Until it reaches "0"), the variable display of symbols continues under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB4303, that is, if it is determined that the value of the variable display timer is "0", in step SB4305, the stop display setting for performing a stop display on the effect display device 42 is set. and end this process. In the stop display setting, the fluctuating display flag is canceled (turned off), and a stop command that instructs the display control device 45 to stop the fluctuating display on the effect display device 42 is set.

In addition, in the variation execution processing of step SB4304, production mode switching setting processing for performing the display mode on the production display device 42 in a mode (production mode) according to the type of gaming state is also performed.

The performance mode in this embodiment is a state in which a "normal mode" is not provided with a "high support mode" and a state in which a "high support mode" is provided, depending on the gaming state (value of the gaming state determination value Xj). ``Chance mode'', which has an unknown duration, and ``Until next time/high support mode'', and ``Gold mode'' which explicitly informs the player. It is set to switch between.

More specifically, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "0", that is, when "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are assigned, The effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set to "normal mode" (see FIG. 92).

In addition, when the value of the gaming state judgment value Since the state is in a "potential state", even in such a case, the performance mode in the performance display device 42 is set to the "normal mode" so that the state is superficially the same as the "normal state".

When the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5", or "7", that is, "20 times/high support mode" , "30 times/High support mode", "40 times/High support mode", "50 times/High support mode", "30 times/High support mode S", "Until next time/High support mode" non-announcement effects Alternatively, during the period of "support continuous performance" which will be described later, the performance mode on the performance display device 42 is set to "chance mode" (see FIG. 94).

When the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "6", that is, when the "until next time/high support mode" is assigned (excluding the non-announcement production period), , the performance mode on the performance display device 42 is set to "gold mode" (see FIG. 95).

Next, the hold display setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 85. First, in step SB4501, the winning type information stored in the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the lower start prize opening 33YB among the sub-variation reservation areas is information corresponding to a small win (small win). (win information).

If a negative determination is made here, that is, if small win information is not included, normal pending display update processing is performed in step SB4502. As shown in FIG. 92, in the normal hold display, hold images TA1 to TA1 corresponding to four hold areas (hold first to fourth hold areas) are displayed in the first hold display area W3a and the second hold display area W3b, respectively. TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed. Normally, a "holding lamp image" imitating a circular holding lamp is displayed as each holding image TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4.

Then, in the normal hold display update process of step SB4502, the display is updated to increase or decrease the number of hold images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in a lighting mode or a light out mode, in accordance with an increase or decrease in the number of hold images in the sub-variable hold area. Processing will be carried out.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB4501, that is, if small hit information is included in any of the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area, reservation display change processing is performed in step SB4503. After that, this process ends.

By performing the pending display change process in step SB4503, among the four pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area containing the above-mentioned small winning information are One of them is replaced with the "star-shaped image" from the "holding lamp image" that is normally displayed on hold. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 97, the third pending image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image".

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 80, in the lamp setting process of step SB3908, lighting patterns of lamps and electric decorations are set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the effect display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step SB3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. Furthermore, if a command related to voice, such as a notification of an error occurrence, is transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step SB3909.

In step SB3910, accessory effect setting processing is executed. In the accessory performance setting process, various settings regarding the accessory performance using the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762 are performed. Note that the accessory performance setting process is a process that is performed as an additional performance when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed, which will be described later, and is executed only when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed. It is processing. Details of the accessory effect setting process in step SB3910 will be described later.

In step SB3911, other processes such as control settings for customer waiting effects (for example, a demo screen display that is set to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed with no variable display on the effect display device 42) are performed. .

In step 3912, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings in steps SB3905 to SB3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a decorative pattern in a variable manner. Furthermore, when performing the accessory performance, various control signals such as motor control signals (drive pulse signals) are output to the performance accessory units 761, 762, etc.

After the processes in steps SB3905 to SB3912, which are performed every 1 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in step SB3904, the process moves to step SB3913, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information or not. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step SB3914, where it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step SB3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SB3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step SB3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Next, the display mode etc. on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 will be explained together with the flow of the game by the player.

In the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, in the normal state (when the value of the gaming state determination value (See Figure 92). Further, below the variable display area W1, an instruction display area W2 is set which instructs (recommends) the firing mode of the game ball to the player, and further below it shows the pending number of variable displays. A hold display area W3 is set.

The hold display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variable hold area. That is, the hold display area W3 is divided into a first hold display area W3a and a second hold display area W3b, corresponding to the first sub-change hold area and the second sub-change hold area. In each of the hold display areas W3a and W3b, hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area) are displayed (see FIG. 92).

Holding images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are displayed in an off state (see the shaded area) during normal times (when not on hold), and when a variable display is held in a predetermined holding area, the corresponding The pending images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area are switched to be displayed in a lighting mode (see the white portion).

In the example shown in FIG. 92, the first pending image TA1 and the second pending image TA2 in the first pending display area W3a are displayed in a lit mode, and the remaining pending images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a non-lit mode. The condition is shown. In other words, the fluctuation display is held in the reservation first area and the reservation second area of the first sub-variation reservation area, and the current number of reservations in the fluctuation display is "2" related to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. It is shown.

In the normal state, the instruction display area W2 is displayed with "← "Left-handed" is displayed. Accordingly, the player plays the game by "hitting to the left."

When "hitting to the left", most of the game balls are guided toward the upper starting prize opening 33YA located on the lower side of the variable display unit 35 by the nails and the like. Among them, how many game balls will be won into the upper starting prize opening 33YA.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) flows down the right side area of the variable display unit 35, that is, the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Since the game ball is placed in an unreachable position, if the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will not be opened and the game ball will enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB. Never.

In other words, in the normal state, the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the left".

When the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, in the variable display area W1 of the performance display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns Z with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns Z are scrolled and displayed periodically from right to left in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In such a case, in the upper pattern display area, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), and in the middle and lower pattern display areas, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in ascending order (in the order of decreasing numbers). displayed in increasing order). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area, and decorative symbols Z are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

When a jackpot lottery is won based on the winning of a game ball to the upper starting winning hole 33YA, a decorative pattern Z of a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined jackpot line after reaching a reach state. In the normal state of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, when three decorative symbols Z of a jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in line on any of the five lines in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot condition is confirmed.

When a jackpot state occurs, the opening/closing plate 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened, and a game ball can enter the jackpot opening, and a predetermined jackpot effect is displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42. will be started. Here, the number of jackpot rounds may be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable prize winning device 32 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position where the game balls flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach), If the player continues to "hit left-handed", the game ball cannot be won into the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 93, when the jackpot effect is started, the instruction display area W2 displays an action in which the player fires a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (such action is described below). , "Right-handed hit") is displayed as "Right-handed hit →". Accordingly, the player plays a jackpot game by switching from "hitting left" to "hitting right" so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35. .

In the case of "hitting to the right" here, most of the game balls will be guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nails and the like, and will be won into the variable winning device 32. This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not win into the variable winning device 32 and pass through the variable winning device 32 flow down toward the upper starting winning hole 33YA and the lower starting winning hole 33YB by the nails and the like.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display unit 35, on the way to the variable winning device 32, a through gate 34 is provided which triggers the opening of the lower starting winning opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y). The game ball passes through the through gate 34.

Here, if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state, and the game ball will not be able to win into the lower starting prize opening 33YB. It becomes possible.

After the jackpot ends, the winning support related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42) display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode" will be added as a mode.

Accordingly, on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, a predetermined support performance ("chance mode" performance or "gold mode" performance) related to the "high support mode" is performed, and the variable display area W1 is reduced. Is displayed. In the reduced variable display area W1, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes one line.

Further, during the support performance, a support number display area W4 is set on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 (see FIGS. 94 and 95). The support count display area W4 apparently displays the support count that has been confirmed to be provided. Therefore, for example, even if it is confirmed that the number of support will be given "50 times" in the internal lottery, "20 times" is initially displayed for presentation purposes.

More specifically, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" and win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or When the "50 times/high support mode" is granted, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

Similarly, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", you can win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode". - Even when the "high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

On the other hand, if "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded, that is, the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2" or "5". In the case of (excluding Xj=“5” in the case of non-notification effect), “30 times” is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" and are granted "Until next time/high support mode", that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is " 6", "until next time" is displayed in the support count display area W4 from the beginning. However, when the above-mentioned non-notification effect is performed, "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

As mentioned above, while the "high support mode" is provided, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to win into the lower start winning hole 33YB, so even if the jackpot game ends, the player can not open or close the winning combination. It is preferable to continue "hitting to the right" in order to obtain an opportunity to open object 37Y. In other words, during the "high support mode", the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the right". Therefore, in the instruction display area W2 of the performance display device 42 during the "high support mode", "Right hit →" is displayed to recommend "Right hit" to the player.

In this embodiment, when the normal number of times changes in the "high support mode" (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 does not show the end value "1 time"), that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj The fluctuation time when is "1", "2", "4", and "5" is set to "1 second" by the fluctuation pattern table selected based on each gaming state judgment value Xj (at the time of jackpot except for). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

Also, when the "high support mode" changes a specific number of times (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 is the ending value "1 time", that is, the "20th time" or "30th time" after the end of the jackpot) , the "40th" or "50th" variation time), that is, the variation time when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "7" is selected based on the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj. It is set to "25 seconds" according to the fluctuation pattern table (excluding when there is a jackpot). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

On the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 during the above-mentioned specific times fluctuation (variation of 25 seconds), a support continuation performance that excites the player's interest is displayed, such as determining whether or not the "high support mode" continues by lottery. It is done.

For example, in this embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) at the time of the above-mentioned specific times variation. In the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 96, a roulette symbol TR is displayed. The roulette symbol TR includes "end" indicating that the number of supports ends here, "+10 times" indicating that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "next time" indicating that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Items such as "until" are listed.

In the roulette effect, the roulette symbol TR rotates and the subsequent gaming state is determined by the item that stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY.

Here, the item to stop at depends on the number of grants of "high support mode" determined at the time of jackpot lottery ("20 times", "30 times", "40 times", "50 times") or "until next time". ”) and the number of support grants at that time (the value of the support number counter). The determined item is then displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode" and after "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, if you reach the roulette effect, the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are "30" remaining support grants, so the item "+10 times" is selected.

For example, if you win "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times/high support mode" and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, Since the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are no more support grants left, the "End" item is selected.

Also, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A" with "Until Next Time/High Support Mode", a non-announcement effect is performed (the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj becomes "5"), and the number of support display area W4 is displayed. When the roulette effect is reached after "30 times" is initially displayed, the upper limit is "until next time", so the item "until next time" is selected.

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", the display mode on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the same state as the normal state (see FIG. 92). Therefore, "←Left hit" is displayed in the instruction display area W2 of the display section 42a.

However, in this embodiment, if a small hit is won during the "high support mode" and the small win information is stored in any of the holding areas of the second sub-variation holding area related to the lower starting winning opening 33YB, , among the pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, the display mode of the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area storing the small winning information is changed to an image in a mode different from the normal mode. (See FIG. 97). In the example shown in FIG. 97, the third pending image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image". In this embodiment, along with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

Therefore, even if the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", if small win information is stored in the hold area, the above display will be displayed and the player will receive a small win. This suggests that this will occur.

As mentioned above, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small winning state is extremely short, so if you switch from the “left hitting” state to “right hitting” after the small winning occurs, it will not be in time, and the variable winning device 32 will not open in time. In order to win the game ball to 32, it is necessary to hit it "right-handed" in advance. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the small win suggestion allows the player to understand that a small win will occur, so he can prepare in advance and miss out on a small win.

As described above, when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed, a performance using the upper performance accessory unit 761 and the lower performance accessory unit 762 may be performed as an additional performance. .

Here, the accessory effect setting process in step SB3910 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 98 and 99.

First, in step SB6001, it is determined whether or not the current variation is the execution time of the roulette performance (support continuous performance), taking into consideration the value of the gaming state determination value Xj.

Here, if the determination is negative, that is, if it is not the time to perform the roulette effect, in step SB6002, the value of the effect state flag JF, which will be described later, is reset to "0", and the process is immediately terminated.

The performance state flag JF is discrimination information for determining the performance state of the additional performance (mainly the performance performance using the performance accessory units 761 and 762).

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6001, that is, if the current variation is the execution time of the roulette effect, the process moves to step SB6003.

In step SB6003, it is determined whether or not the additional performance is currently in the pre-start stage (JF=0), taking into account the value of the performance status flag JF. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the additional effect has started (JF≧1), the process moves to step SB6006.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6003, that is, if it is before the start of additional effects, the process moves to step SB6004.

At step SB6004, based on the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553, performance determination processing is performed to determine whether or not to execute the performance performance and its type.

The correspondence between the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 and whether or not the accessory performance is executed and its type is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as an accessory performance pattern determination table.

In this embodiment, in the roulette performance of the performance display device 42, a plurality of accessory performance pattern determination tables are set corresponding to the final display item of the roulette symbol TR that finally stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY. .

Specifically, "End" indicates that the number of supports ends here, "+10" indicates that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "Until next time" indicates that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Corresponding to the three confirmed display items, such as ``end'', role model performance pattern determination table, ``+10 times'', role model performance pattern determination table, and ``until next time'', role model performance pattern determination table. There are 3 tables available.

In each table, the rate at which various presentation patterns are selected differs depending on whether they correspond to "end", "+10 times", or "until next time". If the number of support is continued, or if it corresponds to "until next time", than in the case of "end", whether or not to execute the role performance, and furthermore, the development performance pattern described later. The various tables are configured to increase the rate at which this is done.

For example, when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "end", the "end"/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 100(a) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 is CB8=0 to 249, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory effect counter CB8 is CB8=250 to 399, "with accessory effect" is selected, and the accessory effect is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when CB8=250 to 299, the "no development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CB8=300 to 329, the "first development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CB8= In the case of 330 to 359, the accessory production of the "second development pattern" is executed, and in the case of CB8 = 360 to 379, the accessory production of the "third development pattern" is executed, and in the case of CB8 = 380 to 389. If CB8=390 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fourth development pattern" is executed, and if CB8=390 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fifth development pattern" is executed. Note that the details of the accessory effects of these first to fifth development patterns will be described later.

Further, when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "until next time", the "until next time" time/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 100(b) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter CB8 is CB8=0 to 9, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory effect counter CB8 is CB8=10 to 399, "with accessory effect" is selected, and the accessory effect is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when CB8=10 to 99, the "no development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CB8=100 to 199, the "first development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and CB8= In the case of CB8=200-249, the accessory effect of the "second development pattern" is executed, and in the case of CB8=250-299, the accessory effect of the "third development pattern" is executed, and when CB8=300-349. If CB8=350 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fourth development pattern" is executed, and if CB8=350 to 399, the accessory effect of the "fifth development pattern" is executed.

Note that the specific contents of the "+10 times" character performance pattern determination table, which is referred to when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "+10 times", are omitted from illustration, but are similar to those mentioned above. A table with contents different from the ``'End'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' and the ``'Until next time'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' is set.

Here, when the above-mentioned "no accessory effect" is selected, the value of the accessory effect pattern flag PF is set to "0". The accessory performance pattern flag PF is discrimination information for determining the accessory performance pattern.

Similarly, when the "undeveloped pattern" accessory performance is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "1". When the accessory performance of the "first development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "2". When the accessory performance of the "second development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "3". When the accessory performance of the "third development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "4". When the accessory performance of the "fourth development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "5". When the accessory performance of the "fifth development pattern" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "6".

Therefore, when performing the performance determination process in step SB6004, the sub-control device 262 first selects a predetermined one from among the plurality of role object performance pattern determination table groups based on the information related to the confirmed display items in the roulette performance. An accessory performance pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmed display item is selected, and an accessory performance pattern is determined based on the selected table. At this time, the determined result is stored in a predetermined storage area within the RAM 553.

Then, in the following step SB6005, a start request setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

In the start request setting process of step SB6005, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "1" indicating that the start request period for the accessory performance is in progress, and the value of the operation effective timer ST is set to a predetermined value (main In the embodiment, it is set to 5 seconds).

Note that the operation valid timer ST is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the effect button 125.

Furthermore, in this start request setting process, a display setting process for performing a start request display effect on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed.

By performing this display setting process, in addition to the roulette effect, characters such as "Please press the button" are displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 to prompt the player to press the effect button 125. A display effect prompting operation is executed.

Now, in Step SB6006, which is proceeded to after a negative determination is made in Step SB6003, it is determined whether or not it is currently in the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance (JF=1), taking into account the value of the production status flag JF. Discern. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not during the period for requesting the start of the accessory production (JF≧2), the process moves to step SB6012.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6006, that is, if it is currently in the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance, it is determined in step SB6007 whether or not the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". do.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the production button 125 during the period of requesting the start of the accessory production, and the operation validity period has passed, the process moves to step SB6008.

In step SB6008, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6007, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process moves to step SB6009.

In step SB6009, taking into account the value of the button operation flag BF, it is determined whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the period of requesting the start of the accessory performance (during the valid operation period). Discern.

The button operation flag BF is discrimination information for determining whether or not the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, and if the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, its value is "1". , and the value is maintained at "0" while no pressing operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step SB6009, that is, if the effect button 125 is not pressed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the effect button 125 is pressed, effect pattern setting processing is performed in step SB6010.

In the performance pattern setting process of step SB6010, a value corresponding to the performance pattern selected in the performance determination process of step SB6004 is set as the value of the performance status flag JF.

Specifically, in consideration of the value of the accessory effect pattern flag PF, if "no accessory effect" is selected, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "2". On the other hand, if "Accessory effect is included (no development pattern, first development pattern, second development pattern, third development pattern, fourth development pattern, or fifth development pattern)" is selected, the performance state flag JF Set the value to "3".

Thereafter, in step SB6011, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0", and this processing is ended.

Now, in step SB6012 to which the process proceeds after a negative determination is made in step SB6006, it is determined whether or not the performance pattern of the additional performance is "no accessory performance (JF=2)", taking into account the value of the performance status flag JF. Determine.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the performance pattern is "no accessory performance", notification setting processing is performed in step SB6013.

By performing this notification setting process, the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 displays a notification performance that notifies the user that the accessory performance will not be performed, such as displaying characters such as "Unfortunate that it does not move". executed.

Thereafter, in step SB6014, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6012, the process moves to step SB6015, and it is determined whether or not the value of the production state flag JF is "3".

If an affirmative determination is made here, it is assumed that although the production pattern is "with accessory production (JF = 3)", it is currently in the stage before starting the production of the accessory drive, and in step SB6016 Perform setting processing and end this processing.

In the superior object drive setting process of step SB6016, the sub-control device 262 first reads the superior object performance control data that defines the operation progress process of the superior object performance from the ROM 552, and stores this in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. .

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the superior role performance control data according to the timetable, and also The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

The plurality of motion process data includes, for example, drive control of the swing drive mechanism 812 (swing motor 815) of the upper performance accessory unit 761 to lower, raise, or stop the upper movable accessory 811. The data includes data specifying an operation process such as controlling the upper rotor 820, and data specifying an operation process such as rotating or stopping the upper rotor 820 by controlling the drive motor 821 for the upper rotor 820. .

As a result, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern is "with accessory performance", when the player presses the performance button 125, the upper movable accessory 811 is first moved to the standby position (the upper side of the center frame 47). 47a) to the lower performance position (see FIGS. 56 and 58).

Then, after the upper movable accessory 811 descends to the performance position and stops so as to cover a part of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating. In this embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is set to rotate clockwise at a constant speed.

At the same time, on the display section 42a, the roulette symbol TR (see FIG. 96) is displayed in a reduced size and hidden behind the upper rotating body 820, making it difficult for the player to see it.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 108, various display objects are displayed on the display section 42a around the roulette symbol TR along the orbit EF of the magnifying lens section 828 of the specific movable piece 825A. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 108, a plurality of star-shaped light emitting points EG are displayed blinking along the orbit EF of the magnifying lens section 828. As a result, the display target (for example, the star-shaped light emitting point EG) located at the position through which the magnifying lens section 828 passes is displayed in an enlarged manner through the magnifying lens section 828, and is visible to the player. Of course, the display target displayed here is not limited to the star-shaped light emitting point EG illustrated in FIG. 108, and a configuration in which a different display target is displayed may be adopted.

Note that when the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, a predetermined value based on the various performance patterns (motion process data) is set to the value of the predetermined process timer. Once the upper rotating body 820 starts rotating, the rotation continues until the value of the process timer becomes "0". Note that the process timer subtraction process is performed separately in other processes (step SB3911) within the normal process.

After a predetermined period of time has passed since the upper rotary body 820 enters the constant speed rotation state (after the series of rotation start operations are completed), the sub-control device 262 sets the value of the performance state flag JF to the value after the start of execution of the accessory performance. "4" is set to indicate that the operation is valid, and a predetermined value (5 seconds in this embodiment) is set to the value of the operation valid timer ST.

At the same time, display setting processing for performing a development request display effect is performed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42.

By performing this display setting process, in addition to the above-mentioned display target, the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 displays a message such as "Please press the button" to show the player the effect button. A display effect prompting the user to operate 125 is executed.

Now, in step SB6017 to which the transition is made after a negative determination is made in step SB6015, taking into account the value of the performance state flag JF, the current performance initial state (JF=4 ).

In the present embodiment, the performance modes in the initial state of the performance after the start of execution of the role performance and before the development of the performance are "first development pattern", "second development pattern", "third development pattern", and " This is the same regardless of whether the "fourth development pattern" or the "fifth development pattern" is set.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if the performance is not in the initial state of the accessory performance (JF≧5), the process moves to step SB6030.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6017, that is, in the initial state of the accessory performance (independently rotating state of the upper rotating body 820), in step SB6018, the value of the operation valid timer ST is set to "0". Determine whether it exists or not.

Here, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the performance button 125 during the initial state of the accessory performance, and the operation validity period expires. If the time has passed, the process moves to step SB6019.

In step SB6019, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SB6018, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process moves to step SB6020.

In step SB6020, it is determined whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the initial state of the accessory performance (during the valid operation period), taking into consideration the value of the button operation flag BF. do.

If a negative determination is made in step SB6020, that is, if the effect button 125 is not pressed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the performance button 125 is pressed, then in step SB6021, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF corresponds to the "no development pattern (lower accessory performance pattern)". It is determined whether it is "1" or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the effect pattern is a "no-development pattern," a no-development effect setting process is performed in step SB6022.

By performing such a no-development effect setting process, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 displays a notification that the development effect will not be performed, such as displaying characters such as "Unfortunately, no development". The performance is executed.

Thereafter, in step SB6023, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and this process ends.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6021, the process moves to step SB6024 and determines whether the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "2" corresponding to the "first development pattern (pattern without enlargement stop)". Determine whether

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "first developed pattern," a first developed effect setting process is performed in step SB6025, and the present process is ended.

In the first advanced performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "7", which means that the accessory performance has been developed.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the first development pattern from the ROM 552. The first development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the first development effect control data according to the timetable, and The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

Note that, although the same applies to the following various development effect patterns, the plurality of operation process data includes, for example, controlling the drive motor 821 for the upper rotary body to rotate or stop the upper rotary body 820, etc. The data that defines the operation process of the lower movable accessory unit 762 and the vertical drive mechanism 852 (vertical drive motor 860) are controlled to raise, lower, or stop the lower movable accessory unit 762. data that defines the operation process such as controlling the drive motors 855A, 855B for the lower rotary bodies to rotate or stop the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B, etc. It is.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the first development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the first development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Incidentally, although the same applies to the following various advanced effect patterns, the process timer subtraction process is separately performed in other processes (step SB3911) within the normal process. In addition, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 based on the contents of the various setting processes performed in this process, and the upper movable accessory Various controls related to the accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 will be performed. Then, when the operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to various advanced production patterns is started, the operation control continues until the value of the process timer becomes "0". This will be done.

Under such a configuration, when the first advanced effect pattern is executed in this embodiment (the same applies when the following various advanced effect patterns are executed), first, the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A is visually recognized. Control is performed to reduce the rotational speed of the upper rotating body 820 to the extent possible. At the same time, a setting process is performed to output a predetermined sound (for example, a sound shouting "Big or Small", etc.) from the speaker SP as a development notification effect. Based on this setting process, the output control process of the speaker SP is performed by the audio setting process in step SB3909.

Subsequently, control is performed to rotate the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B while raising the lower movable accessory 851 from the standby position on the back side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 (see FIG. 56).

Here, the lower left rotating body 856A is configured to rotate clockwise at a constant speed, and the lower right rotating body 856B is configured to rotate counterclockwise at a constant speed. In addition, the rotational speeds of the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are adjusted to such an extent that the player can visually recognize the characters such as "SMALL" and "BIG" written in each of the information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, and 856Bb. The speed is set to slow.

After that, when the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B reach the predetermined performance position in front of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, the lower movable accessory 851 rises while maintaining the rotational movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B. Only the operation is stopped. As a result, the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are in a rotating state at positions rearward of the orbit of the movable piece 825 of the rotating upper rotary body 820 (see FIG. 58, etc.).

In this state, while the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B are rotating, the positional relationship between the upper rotating body 820 and the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B is such that at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B do not overlap; and a condition where at least a portion of the upper rotating body 820 and at least a portion of the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B overlap. Changes to

In the first development effect pattern, as shown in FIG. 109, the final stop position of the magnifying lens portion 828 of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 is the first information writing portion 856Aa of the lower left rotary body 856A ( It does not match the stop position of any of the stop positions of the second information writing section 856Ab (strong/SMALL) and the second information writing section 856Ab (strong/SMALL), and the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) and the second information writing section of the lower right rotating body 856B The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are moved so that the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are in a state that does not coincide with any of the stop positions of the portion 856Bb (weak/BIG) (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as "stopped state without enlarged display"). stops and finishes the performance.

However, the combination of the stopping states of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B in the "stopped state without enlarged display" is not limited to the combination illustrated in FIG. 109, but may be a combination different from this. The upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be configured to stop at this point. At this time, the combination pattern of these stopping modes may be determined based on the value of the accessory performance counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6024, the process moves to step SB6026, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "3", which corresponds to the "second development pattern (weak/SMALL expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "second development pattern," a second development effect setting process is performed in step SB6027, and the present process ends.

In the second advanced effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the second development pattern from the ROM 552. The second development effect control data that defines the following is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the second development effect control data according to the timetable, and also The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the second development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the second development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Under such a configuration, when the second advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, and then as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotary body 856A finally match, that is, the upper rotary body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4, and the second information writing section 856Ab (weak/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as "weak/SMALL"). The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so as to reach the "SMALL enlargement stop state", and the performance ends.

However, the manner in which the lower right rotary body 856B stops in the "weak/SMALL enlarged stop state" is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 110, and the lower right rotary body 856B may It may be configured to stop. At this time, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory production counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6026, the process moves to step SB6028, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "4", which corresponds to the "third development pattern (strong/SMALL expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "third developed pattern," a third developed effect setting process is performed in step SB6029, and the present process is ended.

In the third advanced performance setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory performance.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the third development pattern from the ROM 552. The third development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the third advanced production control data according to the timetable, and also The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the third development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the third development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Under such a configuration, when the third advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, after the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotary body 856A finally match, that is, the upper rotary body 820 is specified. A state in which the movable piece 825A is stopped at the fourth stop position EA4, and the first information writing section 856Aa (strong/SMALL) of the lower left rotating body 856A is stopped at the first stop position EB1 (hereinafter, such a state will be referred to as "strong/SMALL"). The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so as to reach the "SMALL enlargement stop state", and the performance ends.

However, the manner in which the lower right rotating body 856B stops when the "strong/SMALL enlarged stop state" is reached is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 111, and the lower right rotating body 856B may be stopped in a manner different from this. It may be configured to stop. At this time, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory performance counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6028, the process moves to step SB6030, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "5", which corresponds to the "fourth development pattern (weak/BIG expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "fourth developed pattern," a fourth developed effect setting process is performed in step SB6031, and the present process is ended.

In the fourth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the fourth development pattern from the ROM 552. The fourth development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the fourth development effect control data according to the timetable, and The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the fourth development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the fourth development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Under such a configuration, when the fourth advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, and then as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the lower right rotary body 856B finally match, that is, the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 matches, A state in which the specific movable piece 825A stops at the first stop position EA1, and the second information writing section 856Bb (weak/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B stops at the first stop position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state is referred to as " The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the state is "weak/BIG enlargement stop state"), and the performance ends.

However, the manner in which the lower left rotating body 856A stops in the "weak/BIG enlargement stop state" is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 112, and the lower left rotating body 856A stops in a manner different from this. It may also be a configuration. At this time, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory production counter CB8.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SB6030, the process moves to step SB6032, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "6", which corresponds to the "fifth development pattern (strong/BIG expansion stop pattern)". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the developed effect pattern is the "fifth developed pattern," a fifth developed effect setting process is performed in step SB6033, and the present process is ended.

In the fifth development effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "7", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the operation progress process of the upper movable accessory 811 (upper rotating body 820) and lower movable accessory 851 (left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) corresponding to the fifth development pattern from the ROM 552. The fifth development effect control data that defines the is read out and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the fifth advanced production control data according to the timetable, and The operating time is set in a predetermined process timer, and the processing corresponding to the operating process data is executed while managing the operating time based on the value of the process timer.

That is, the sub-control device 262 uses the rotational position information (amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) of the upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the process timer based on the fifth development effect control data. The operation control of the upper movable accessory 811 and the lower movable accessory 851 corresponding to the fifth development pattern will be executed while taking into consideration the value of .

Under such a configuration, when the fifth advanced motion pattern is executed in this embodiment, after the same motion control as when the first advanced effect pattern is executed, as shown in FIG. , the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 and the stop position of the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the lower right rotary body 856B finally match, that is, the state where the stop position of the specific movable piece 825A of the upper rotary body 820 matches A state in which the specific movable piece 825A is stopped at the first stop position EA1, and the first information writing section 856Ba (strong/BIG) of the lower right rotating body 856B is stopped at the first stop position EC1 (hereinafter, such a state will be referred to as " The upper rotary body 820 and the left and right lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B stop so that the state of "strong/BIG enlargement stop state" is reached, and the performance ends.

However, the manner in which the lower left rotating body 856A stops when the "strong/BIG enlargement stop state" is reached is not limited to the manner illustrated in FIG. 113, and the lower left rotating body 856A stops in a manner different from this. It may also be a configuration. At this time, this stopping mode may be determined based on the value of the accessory production counter CB8.

Now, in step SB6035 to which the judgment is negative in step SB6017 and the transition is made, it is determined whether or not the role performance is currently in the developing state (JF=5), taking into consideration the value of the production state flag JF. . If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6035, that is, if the accessory performance is in the developing state (the upper rotating body 820 and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are in operation), the process moves to step SB6036.

In step SB6036, it is determined whether the value of the process timer is "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SB6036, that is, if it is the end timing of the accessory performance, end setting processing is performed in step SB6037, and the present processing is ended.

In the end setting process of step SB6037, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 the accessory performance end control data that defines the end process of the accessory performance, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Based on this, the upper rotary body 820 (upper rotary body drive motor 821) is stopped, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B (lower rotary body drive motors 855A, 855B) are stopped, and the upper movable accessory 811 is moved to the standby position. The operation setting process for raising the lower movable accessory 851 to the standby position, the operation setting process for lowering the lower movable accessory 851 to the standby position, etc. are sequentially performed, and the accessory production ends.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the second rotating body that is movable in a predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating body, and The relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body in is a first positional relationship in which at least a portion of the first rotating body and at least a portion of the second rotating body do not overlap; Under a configuration that can be changed to a second positional relationship in which a portion of the second rotating body overlaps with at least a portion of the second rotating body, in the first positional relationship, light emitted from the light emitting means through the transparent portion of the first rotating body becomes visible, and in the second positional relationship, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating body that overlaps with the transparent portion of the first rotating body. It is configured so that

In this way, the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body and the second rotating body) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap and move apart, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. becomes possible.

In particular, in this embodiment, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating body and the second rotating body, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform motion effects of the first rotating body and the second rotating body as well as effects using light. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is of the first type in which a jackpot state in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning holes 33YA and 33YB. It is a gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that is given a predetermined game value. Note that the gaming value includes, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to players, special prize states (rounds) awarded during jackpots, gaming modes such as high probability modes awarded after jackpots, etc. . In addition to the pachinko machine, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

For example, it is equipped with a variable winning device that opens when a small win is won in a lottery based on the ball entering a predetermined starting winning section, and the game ball that enters the variable winning device is placed in a predetermined special winning section ( It may also be implemented as a second type gaming machine in which a jackpot state occurs when a ball enters the V-winning slot. Here, when a game ball enters the starting winning section, without performing a predetermined lottery process (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning section, It may be configured such that the variable winning device is in an open state, and a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a V winning hole or the like to generate a jackpot state.

Furthermore, it may be implemented as a third type gaming machine (for example, a so-called 1 type 2 type mixing machine) that has both the functions of the first type gaming machine and the functions of the second type gaming machine.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities associated with various types of lottery related to pachinko machines (soft lottery processing, mechanical mechanism lottery, etc.) are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. Furthermore, as will be described later, it goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented as a type of game machine in which the game balls are circulated within the game machine and are not directly paid out to the player, a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, a 16R jackpot in which 16 special prize states (rounds) occur, a 4R jackpot in which 4 special prize states (rounds) occur, etc. are set, but the number of rounds is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which other different jackpot states occur.

Of course, instead of being a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that only generates one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot).

(c) The configuration of the game mode awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the "high support mode" is always given after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the "high support mode" is not given depending on the jackpot type. Good too.

In addition, this pachinko machine does not change the lottery mode (``high probability mode'' or ``low probability mode''), but only switches to the winning support mode (``high support mode'' or ``low support mode''). You can. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to paying out prize balls, the pachinko machine may be configured to provide points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player to a storage medium such as a magnetic card. A specific game mode such as a high support mode or a high probability mode may be set as a special game state.

(d) The configuration related to the game board is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the game board 30 according to the above embodiment is constructed based on a transparent plate that is a light-transmitting member, but is not limited to this, and may be constructed from an opaque member such as wood that does not have light-transmitting properties. good.

(d-1) In the above embodiment, the LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C mounted with a plurality of LEDs are arranged at the rear position of a predetermined area in the game area, and the configuration is such that various light emitting effects can be performed. There is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the LED board 48A, other light emitting means such as a lamp or a liquid crystal display device may be arranged at the rear of the game board 30.

(d-2) In place of or in addition to the above embodiment, a light emitting device such as a lamp or an LED is arranged at at least one of the top, bottom, left and right end faces of the game board 30 so as to face the end face. , the light emitted from the light emitting means enters into the game board 30, and a part of the light is emitted from a predetermined position on the front surface of the game board 30, making it visible to the player. Good too. In other words, the game board 30 may be configured to function as a light emitting member or a light guiding member. Of course, a portion of the light incident from the first position in the front view of the front part (or rear part) of the game board 30 is emitted from the second position in the front view of the front part of the game board 30, and becomes visible to the player. It is also possible to have a configuration like this.

(d-3) In place of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 according to the above embodiment, a display screen having a size that covers substantially the entire back side of the gaming area or substantially the entire back side of the gaming board 30 at the rear position of the game board 30 It is also possible to have a configuration including a display device having.

Further, the game board 30 may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 without providing an opening for mounting the performance display device 42. At this time, nails or the like may be placed on the front surface of the game board 30, which is the area in front of the performance display device 42, to make this an area where the game ball can flow down. Of course, this may be an area where the game ball cannot fall.

(e) The configuration of the first rotating means is not limited to the upper rotating body 820 as the first rotating body of the above embodiment.

(e-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 which is the first rotating means (first rotating body) is the display part (liquid crystal display part) 42a of the effect display device 42 which becomes the effect area (predetermined area). Although it is configured to rotate on the front side, the area in which the first rotating means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means rotates in the front area of the center frame 47. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis of the first rotation means is fixed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotation axis of the first rotation means can be displaced may be adopted.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means performs a rotation operation in an internal area of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis of the first rotation means is fixed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotation axis of the first rotation means can be displaced may be adopted.

Further, in the front area (gaming area) of the game board 30, a configuration may be adopted in which the first rotating means performs a rotating operation. Here, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis of the first rotation means is fixed, or a configuration in which the position of the rotation axis of the first rotation means can be displaced may be adopted.

(e-2) The moving mechanism of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, as the support arm 814 swings and displaces, the upper rotating body 820 (upper movable accessory 811) moves between the standby position on the back side of the upper side 47a of the center frame 47 and the display part of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced to the presentation position on the front side of 42a.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the position of the upper rotary body 820 (upper movable accessory 811) may be configured to linearly move between the standby position and the performance position, such as in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction, or may be configured to move in a linear manner. It may be configured to move between the standby position and the presentation position by combining a plurality of movements such as curvilinear movements. Of course, the first rotating means may be rotatably supported (fixed) at a predetermined position without moving.

(e-3) The shape of the first rotating means (first rotating body) and the configuration related to the light-transmitting portion are not limited to the above embodiments. For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820 is configured to include six movable pieces 825 imitating flower petals as transparent parts, but the number, arrangement, shape, etc. of the transparent parts may vary. The present invention is not limited to this, and other configurations may be adopted. It is also possible to have a configuration including only one light-transmitting portion.

Further, in the above embodiment, the movable piece 825, which is a light-transmitting portion, is slid in the radial direction of the upper rotary body 820, and the upper rotary body 820 is configured to expand or contract in diameter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a structure in which the light-transmitting part does not displace in the radial direction of the first rotating means, that is, a structure in which the size of the first rotating means does not change, may be used. For example, the first rotating means may be a circular disk when viewed from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the general part of each movable piece 825 is made of a semi-transparent member that makes it difficult to identify the display target displayed on the display unit 42a, but the present invention is not limited to this. The display object may be made of an identifiable transparent member.

Further, the movable piece 825 does not need to be made of a light-transmitting material, and the movable piece 825 may be made of a light-shielding material. In such a case, each specific movable piece 825 may have a configuration in which a through hole or a notch through which light can be transmitted (visually recognized) is formed. Alternatively, a first rotating means may be employed in which a predetermined number of through holes, etc., which serve as light-transmitting portions, are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction of a circular disc body when viewed from the front. In other words, the first rotating means may have portions with different light transmittances.

(e-4) In the above embodiment, it acts on the acted parts (information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means (second rotating body). As an action part, a magnifying lens part 828 is formed in one movable piece 825 (specific movable piece 825A) among the six movable pieces 825.

The configuration is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the magnifying lens section 828 is omitted. Further, instead of or in addition to the enlarging lens section 828, a reducing lens section may be provided as the action section. By using this, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the affected parts (information writing parts 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, 856Bb) of the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are displayed in a reduced size.

(e-5) The rotational drive source of the first rotating means (first rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the upper rotary body 820 is configured to rotate using the upper rotary body drive motor 821 as the drive source, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other actuators such as a solenoid may be employed as the rotational drive source. You can.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball is rotated using a game ball that is driven into the game area. For example, a rotary drive member such as a water wheel is disposed inside the outlet 36, and a drive transmission mechanism for transmitting the force of the rotary drive member to the first rotating means is disposed, and the outflow that is frequently discharged from the outlet 36 is disposed. The first rotating means may be rotationally driven using a ball. Further, the first rotating means may be configured to rotate by using a game ball flowing down a predetermined position in the game area. In short, any configuration may be used as long as the first rotation means can rotate using the game ball fired into the game area by the firing means.

(f) The configuration of the second rotating means is not limited to the lower left rotating body 856A and the lower right rotating body 856B as the second rotating body of the above embodiment.

(f-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the plate-shaped lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are substantially rectangular in front view, are used as the second rotating means (second rotating body), but the number of second rotating means The configuration, shape, and configuration of the information writing section are not limited to the above embodiments.

For example, either the lower left rotating body 856A or the lower right rotating body 856B may be omitted, and a configuration may be provided in which only one second rotating means is provided. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with three or more 2nd rotation means.

The second rotating means may include, for example, a rotating body that is circular in front view and is rotatable with the front-rear direction as an axial direction, and the rotating body may include one or more information writing sections.

(f-2) As the second rotating means, a rotating body having a different shape such as a spherical shape may be employed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 114, as a movable accessory related to the second rotating means (second rotating body), there is a predetermined support 880 that is movably provided by a moving drive means (not shown), and A accommodating part 881 provided at the upper end, a spherical member 882 as a spherical second rotation means (spherical body) accommodated in the accommodating part 881, and for controlling the posture and orientation of the spherical member 882. A movable accessory may be employed that is equipped with a rotation driving means including a plurality of actuators (not shown) or the like.

In the movable accessory illustrated in FIG. 114, information writing portions 884 provided at multiple locations (for example, 4 locations) on the surface of the ball member 882 are inserted through an opening 883 formed in the front surface of the container 881. One of them becomes visible. In the information writing section 884, for example, character information such as "Atari" or "Loss" may be written.

Here, the ball member 882 may be made of a translucent member. Then, light emitted from a predetermined light emitting means disposed behind the housing section 881 enters the ball member 882 through the rear opening (not shown) of the housing section 881, and enters the ball member 882 through the opening 883 to play the game. It may also be made visible to the public.

Alternatively, the ball member 882 may be made of a metal material, or the surface of the ball member 882 may be plated or the like. Then, light emitted from the predetermined light emitting means (including light incident from outside the pachinko machine 10 through the window 101) is irradiated onto the ball member 882 from the front through the opening 883. The player may be able to visually recognize the light reflected by the player.

(f-3) In the above embodiment, the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are configured to be rotatable with the longitudinal direction as the axial direction, but the rotational axis direction of the second rotation means is not limited to this. .

For example, the ball member 882 as the second rotation means illustrated in FIG. 114 may be configured to rotate in the vertical direction, horizontal direction, or diagonal direction as the rotation axis direction. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation axis direction (attitude) of the second rotation means can be changed. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 114, ball receiving members (not shown) capable of supporting the ball member 882 are provided at eight corners of the accommodating portion 881, and by controlling the ball receiving members, the ball receiving member is A configuration may also be adopted in which three-dimensional attitude control of the spherical member 882 is performed through the spherical member 882.

(f-4) The information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab, 856Ba, and 856Bb of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B in the above embodiment are made of a translucent material, and the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 located at the rear It is configured to be able to transmit light emitted from it at a predetermined transmittance.

However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least the information writing section 856Aa and the like (or the entire lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) may be made of an opaque material (for example, a metal material) that does not have light-transmitting properties. Further, by performing polishing, plating, or the like on the information writing section 856Aa, etc., it may be made into a reflective section that can reflect light.

The light emitted from the predetermined light emitting means (including light incident from outside the pachinko machine 10 through the window 101) is transmitted from the front through the movable piece 825 of the upper rotating body 820 to the information writing section. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which 856Aa or the like is irradiated.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the player can visually recognize the information written in the information writing section 856Aa or the like through the magnifying lens section 828.

Further, the information writing portion 856Aa and the like may be configured to be curved into a spherical shape so as to be convex toward the outside. With this configuration, not only light incident from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 but also light irradiated from multiple directions such as the side of the game board 30 can be reflected to the front side of the pachinko machine 10.

(f-5) The moving mechanism of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the embodiment described above, the lower movable accessory 851 is provided with a vertical drive mechanism 852 that moves the lower movable accessory 851 up and down, and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are placed between the standby position on the back side of the lower side 47b of the center frame 47 and the display section of the effect display device 42. It is configured to be displaced in the vertical direction between it and the presentation position on the front side of 42a.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable not only in the vertical direction but also in the left-right direction, front-back direction, etc.

In addition, in a configuration that is movable in the front-rear direction, for example, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board 30. Further, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B (lower movable accessory 851) may be configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the horizontal direction in the rear region of the game board 30. At this time, a configuration may be provided in which a guide member is provided as a rear guide means that can guide the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B that have moved to the rear area of the game board 30 to a predetermined position.

Further, the lower left rotary body 856A and the lower right rotary body 856B may be configured to be movable independently and relatively movable. Of course, each may be configured to be movable individually in the up-down direction, left-right direction, front-back direction, etc. Furthermore, each may be configured to be movable individually from the front area to the rear area of the game board 30, or each may be configured to be individually movable in the rear area of the game board 30.

In addition, the moving path, moving speed, rotational speed, etc. of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are set in multiple ways (multiple patterns), and the moving path, moving speed, rotating speed, etc. of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are changed as appropriate. Good too. In addition, a configuration may be provided that includes a route changing means that can execute a process of changing the route along which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B move. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined lottery is conducted to change the moving route, and the moving route of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B is determined based on the result of this lottery.

(f-6) The rotational drive source of the second rotating means (second rotating body) is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the above embodiment, the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are configured to rotate using the lower rotary body drive motors 855A and 855B as the drive source, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other rotary drive sources such as solenoids may be used. An actuator may also be used.

Further, a predetermined movable member that can contact the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and can cause a change in the movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B is provided, and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are moved by the force received from the movable member. It may also be a configuration.

For example, by colliding a predetermined movable member (for example, a hammer-shaped accessory) with the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B in a stopped state, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B start moving or rotating. You can also use it as

(f-7) In the above embodiment, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotation means, rotate on the front side of the display section (liquid crystal display section) 42a of the effect display device 42, which becomes the effect area (predetermined area). However, similar to the first rotation means, the area in which the second rotation means rotates is not limited to this.

For example, in the front area of the center frame 47, the internal area of various winning devices such as the variable winning device 32, and the front area (gaming area) of the game board 30, a configuration is adopted in which the second rotating means is rotatable and movable. Good too. Further, in the rear region of the game board 30, the second rotation means may be configured to perform a rotation operation.

(g) The configuration related to the rotating body effect, such as the timing when the rotating body effect is performed using the first rotating means and the second rotating means (the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B), is limited to the above embodiment. However, other configurations may be adopted.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B is performed as an additional effect when the continuous support effect (roulette effect) is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a rotating body effect using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B is performed in different scenes, such as an additional effect of a reach effect, for example.

For example, the above-mentioned pattern without development (rotation performance of only the upper rotary body 820 without any minor role performance) may be used for a one-shot notification performance to notify the player of winning a jackpot lottery.

(g-2) In the above embodiment, the lottery performance is performed to determine whether or not to continue the support mode after the jackpot (number of times of support); , a type lottery is held to determine the type of jackpot state (number of rounds) based on the entry of a ball into a predetermined ball entry means, and as a performance for teaching the result of the lottery, for example, A configuration may also be adopted in which rotating body effects such as the various advanced effect patterns described above (effects using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B) are performed.

In addition, when performing a rotating body performance during or at the end of a jackpot state, for example, if the lottery result that was suspended when the ball entered a predetermined entry means during the jackpot state includes a jackpot winning result (so-called pending series). occurs), the first information writing section 856Aa of both information writing sections 856Aa, 856Ab of the lower left rotating body 856A (or both information writing sections 856Ba, 856Bb of the lower right rotating body 856B) ” (or “BIG” in the first information writing section 856Ba) may be displayed in an enlarged and stopped manner, or may be configured to be more likely to be displayed in an enlarged and stopped state. On the other hand, if the reserved lottery results do not include jackpot winning results (so-called pending results do not occur), "WEAK/SMALL" in the second information entry section 856Ab (or "SMALL" in the second information entry section 856Bb) is selected. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which "Weak/BIG") is displayed in an enlarged and stopped state, or a structure in which it is more likely to be displayed in an enlarged and stopped state.

(g-3) In the above embodiment, depending on the degree of expectation that the high support mode will continue to be provided (the degree of expectation that gaming value can be provided), the role production, and furthermore the development production (the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotation body 820) The rotating body performance using the rotating bodies 856A and 856B) is performed at a rate that changes.

Not limited to this, for example, if a winning result is obtained through a predetermined lottery process (result that gaming value is awarded such as a big hit, small win, high probability mode, high support mode, etc.) , a configuration may be adopted in which the percentage of role performance and further development performance (rotating body performance using the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B) being performed is higher than when no winning result is obtained.

In addition, only when the grant of high support mode continues (when the game value is granted), or when a winning result is obtained through the prescribed lottery process (big win, small win, high probability mode, high support mode Only when a result that a game value is given such as It is also possible to have a configuration in which this is done.

(h) In the above embodiment, the upper rotary body, which is the first rotation means, is 820 (magnifying lens section 828) acts, but the structure in which the first rotation means and the second rotation means act on each other is not limited to this, and other structures may be used. May be adopted.

(h-1) For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotating means, act on the affected portion of the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means. As a specific configuration, for example, in the upper rotating body 820, a ``specific information writing section (for example, characters such as ``hit'') is provided as an affected section in place of the ``magnifying lens section 828'', and in the lower left rotating body 856A, A "reducing lens section" is provided as a first action section in place of the "first information writing section 856Aa," and a "magnification lens section" is provided as a second action section in place of the "second information writing section 856Ab." Under this configuration, the lower left rotary body 856A is configured to rotate and stop at a position in front of the upper rotary body 820, and when the upper rotary body 820 and the lower left rotary body 856A are stopped, the specific information writing section (“hit” '' etc.) may be displayed in an enlarged manner by an ``enlarging lens section'' or displayed in a reduced size by a ``reducing lens section''.

Furthermore, here, the case where it acts in the second manner (when the display is enlarged by the "magnifying lens section") is better than the case where it operates in the first manner (when the display is reduced in size by the "reducing lens section"). A configuration may be adopted in which the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player increases. Or, when the game operates in the second manner, the ratio of the second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state is higher than when the game operates in the first manner. may be configured.

(h-2) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, are close to each other even when they are close to each other. It is configured to maintain a separated state.

However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper rotating body 820, which is the first rotating means, and the left and right lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B, which are the second rotating means, may be able to come into contact with each other in a close state.

For example, when the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are stopped, the peripheral edge of the action part (magnifying lens part 828) of the upper rotary body 820 is It is also possible to have a configuration in which the parts are in contact with each other. This makes it difficult for a gap to occur between the peripheral edge of the information writing portions 856Aa, etc. of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B and the peripheral edge of the action portion (magnifying lens portion 828) of the upper rotary body 820. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as light leaking from the gap and the leaked light making it difficult to visually recognize the information writing section 856Aa or the like or reducing the brightness of the information writing section 856Aa or the like.

(i) In the above embodiment, a performance button 125 that can be pressed and operated by the player is provided as an operation means for performance. The configuration of the operating means and the performance using the same are not limited to the above embodiment.

(i-1) In the above embodiment, when the player operates the performance button 125, the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B, which are the second rotation means, start operating, and the development performance (the upper rotary body 825 and rotating body effects using lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B). The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the advanced performance is started in accordance with a predetermined performance program without being triggered by the operation of the operating means.

(i-2) The operating mode of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

For example, a slide lever is provided as a first operation part that can adjust the amount of movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B in the left-right direction, and a second operation part that can determine the start timing and stop timing of the upward movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B. A production button 125 may be provided as the operation unit, and the coordinate position at which the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B rotate can be adjusted two-dimensionally in the vertical and horizontal directions.

In addition, at the stage of performing the above-mentioned development effect, in conjunction with the movement of the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B rising, while displaying the character on the display section 42a, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B are pressed down to execute the development effect. A display effect is performed to prevent the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B from being pushed downward, and the player repeatedly presses the effect button 125 to stop the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B from being pushed downward. It is also possible to have a configuration that performs the following.

(i-3) A configuration may be provided with a return regulating means (for example, a ratchet mechanism) capable of regulating the return of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B guided to the production area to outside the predetermined area (standby position). This allows the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B to operate more stably in the production area.

(j) In the above embodiment, various performances related to the rotating body performance are performed by controlling the operation (motor control, etc.) of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B in accordance with a predetermined performance program. It is configured to be carried out.

The present invention is not limited to this, and includes a detection means capable of detecting the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B passing a predetermined position in the production area (predetermined area), and based on the fact that the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are detected by the detection means, The configuration may be such that various effects related to rotating body effects can be executed.

For example, when the player is configured to be able to determine the coordinate position at which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B rotate in two dimensions, vertically, horizontally, and horizontally as described above, the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B determined by the player The coordinate position may be specified by a plurality of detection means, and the rotation mode of the upper rotating body 820 and the stop position of the magnifying lens section 828 may be changed in accordance with the specified coordinate position.

Note that any type of detection means may be used as long as it is capable of detecting the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, but considering that the production area is an area that is visible to the player. Therefore, it is preferable to use a type that can detect the presence or absence of the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B in a non-contact manner, such as a distance measuring sensor.

(k) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, there is a possibility that the rotating bodies such as the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be charged with static electricity due to friction during rotation. In view of this, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper rotary body 820, the lower rotary bodies 856A, 856B, etc. are provided with a grounding structure that releases static electricity.

For example, the upper rotary body 820 and the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B are provided with a conductive portion having conductivity, and a predetermined conductive member having conductivity is provided outside the production area (predetermined area) such as the center frame 47, When the rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B are in a standby state, the conductive parts of the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B may be in contact with a conductive member such as the center frame 47. By electrically connecting a conductive member such as the center frame 47 to a predetermined ground terminal (not shown), static electricity charged on the upper rotating body 820 and the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B can be removed.

Here, the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B, which are relatively simply configured, may have a configuration in which at least a portion or the entirety thereof is formed of a conductive metal material. Instead of or in addition to this, the surfaces of the lower rotating bodies 856A and 856B may be plated or the like.

Further, a long conductive member made of a conductive material is disposed along a part of the path along which the lower rotating bodies 856A, 856B move from a predetermined standby position to the production area (predetermined area). You can also use it as

Further, among the lower rotary bodies 856A and 856B, at least the conductive portion that contacts the conductive member may be configured to be curved into a spherical shape so as to be convex to the outside. In other words, a configuration including a conductive portion having a hemispherical convex shape may be used.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below along with their effects.

Conventional subject VA. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up and flashes in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, making the performance of the rotating means monotonous. There was a desire for further improvement in interest.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VA1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
A second player that is configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and to be able to change its state between at least a predetermined rotational state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a transparent portion that can transmit light. one rotation means;
and a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of the predetermined area is,
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
In the first positional relationship,
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship,
A game machine characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting device can be blocked by at least a portion of the second rotating device that overlaps with a transparent portion of the first rotating device. .

In addition, examples of the above-mentioned "predetermined trigger" include "the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means provided within the gaming area" (the same applies to the various means described below). .

In addition, providing "gaming value" includes, for example, paying out game media such as prize balls, and providing special gaming conditions (such as winning conditions and game modes) that are advantageous to the player. (The same applies to the various methods below).

Furthermore, the configuration in which the second rotation means is "rotatable in a predetermined manner" includes, for example, a configuration in which the second rotation means is rotatable with the front-rear direction as the axial direction, similar to the first rotation means (the following various means But the same). Of course, the second rotation means may be configured to be rotatable in a manner different from this (the same applies to various means described below). For example, the second rotating means may be configured to be rotatable with the left-right direction as the axial direction.

Furthermore, the configuration in which "the second rotating means is movable relative to the first rotating means" means, for example, the center position (rotational This refers to a configuration in which the center position (position of the rotation axis) of the second rotation means can be moved in the vertical direction, left and right direction, etc., with reference to the position of the axis (the position of the axis) (the same applies to the various means described below). Therefore, when the predetermined area is viewed from the front, the positional relationship between the center position of the first rotation means and the center position of the second rotation means does not change, that is, the centers of the two rotation means are arranged on the same axis in the front and back direction. It does not include a structure in which the positional relationship in front view is fixed and the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means changes only in the circumferential direction.

According to the means VA1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

In particular, with this means, by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

In addition, as one of the production devices that perform game production using a rotating means, a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on the rotating means, and by blinking the light emitting means in a predetermined pattern while rotating the rotating means, an afterimage is generated. Versawriters and the like that display characters, figures, etc. are known as such.

However, in a configuration such as a versatile lighter in which a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on a rotating means, the rotating means becomes large and heavy, and the operability of the rotating means may deteriorate.

Furthermore, when a plurality of light emitting means are mounted on a rotationally driven rotating means, a signal line is usually connected between the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means and a control device installed outside the rotating means. The power line must be electrically connected via a slip ring or the like, which may complicate wiring and control.

Therefore, in such a performance device, the operability of the rotating means is low, and the motion performance of the rotating means tends to be monotonous.

In contrast, according to the present means, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed by changing the relative positional relationship between the two rotating means, so there is no need to mount the light emitting means on the rotating means. , it is possible to suppress the increase in size and weight of the rotating means, and improve the operability of each rotating means.

In addition, if one rotating means is used and the diameter of the rotating means is increased in order to increase the switching speed of the visual recognition mode of light (the speed of the outer circumference of the rotating means), the rotation There is a risk that the load on the means, motor, etc. will increase.

In contrast, according to the present means, by overlapping the two rotating means, it is possible to increase the switching speed of the visual recognition mode of light without increasing the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. As a result, the durability of the rotating means, motor, etc. can be improved.

Means VA2. than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close state),
When the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a second positional relationship (close state),
The gaming machine according to means VA1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs at a higher rate.

According to the means VA2, it is possible to perform a game performance in which the ratio of a predetermined advantageous state is changed depending on the difference in the positional relationship (adjacent state) of the two rotating means.

As a result, the player will watch the operation of the second rotating means with anticipation, and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VA3. A first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state can occur,
than when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the first second positional relationship (close state),
When the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a second positional relationship (close state),
The gaming machine according to means VA1, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state.

According to the means VA3, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Means VA4. When the predetermined condition is met, compared to when it is not met,
Any one of means VA1 to means VA3 is characterized in that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured such that a ratio (frequency) of the second positional relationship (close state) is increased. The game machine described.

According to the means VA4, when a predetermined condition is met (for example, when a winning result is obtained by a predetermined lottery process), compared to when the predetermined condition is not met (for example, when a winning result is not obtained by a predetermined lottery process). , the first rotation means and the second rotation means are more likely to be in the second positional relationship (close state).

In other words, the rate at which the first rotation means and the second rotation means have the second positional relationship changes depending on the gaming situation. As a result, the game can be varied and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VA5. The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined region, and the plurality of second rotation means are movable relative to each other,
The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA4, characterized by:

According to the means VA5, a plurality of second rotation means that are movable relative to each other are provided, and these are configured to be able to act on the first rotation means individually, thereby further diversifying game performances. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Here, for example, a predetermined second rotation means among the plurality of second rotation means may be configured to be able to act on other second rotation means. Thereby, further diversification of game performance can be achieved.

Means VA6. The first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the transparent parts arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the first rotating means (for example, at predetermined intervals around the rotation axis). arranged at an angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals),
comprising a light emission control means capable of controlling the light emission means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA5, wherein the light emission control means is configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emission means.

According to the means VA6, by adjusting (changing) the rotation period of the first rotation means and the flashing period of the light emitting means, it is possible to perform a rotation means effect using a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect), etc. The apparent operating mode of the rotating means (light-transmitting portion) can be changed. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and improve the interest for the players.

Here, "blinking control" refers to control in which the light emitting means periodically repeats a lighting state and a non-lighting state.

For example, blinking control in which the blinking cycle of the light emitting means is shorter than the light-transmitting part movement cycle in which the N light-transmitting parts move a distance corresponding to the predetermined interval (the cycle in which the light-transmitting parts move by one formation pitch interval). In the case where the light-emitting means lights up at a predetermined timing and the player visually recognizes the light-transmitting part, the light-transmitting part that is visually recognized by the player has not yet reached the distance of one formation pitch interval when the light-emitting means lights up next time. It will be visible from the front side position.

With such a configuration, it is possible to produce a strobe phenomenon (wagon wheel effect) in which the rotating means (light-transmitting portion) appears to be rotating in a direction opposite to the actual rotating direction. As a result, it is possible to create a visual effect that gives the player the illusion that the rotating means, which is rotating in the forward direction, suddenly reverses itself.

Note that there is a mechanical limit to controlling the rotational drive of the rotating means using a motor or the like. Therefore, depending on the mode of operation, the operation may appear slow, which may reduce the player's interest.

For example, it is extremely difficult to perform drive control to suddenly reverse the rotation direction of a rotating means (motor) that is rotating in the forward direction to the opposite direction without providing a deceleration period due to the influence of inertia and the like. In addition, if the direction of rotation of the rotating means (motor) is suddenly reversed, there is a risk that the load on the rotating means, motor, etc. will become significantly large. As a result, there is a risk that durability may be reduced due to looseness in the assembled state of the rotating means and the motor.

On the other hand, according to the above configuration, it is possible to perform an effect as if, for example, the rotating means rotating in the forward direction suddenly reversed, without increasing the load on the rotating means, the motor, etc. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and improve the interest for the players.

Means VA7. The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA6, characterized in that a diameter of the second rotating means when viewed from the front of the predetermined area is smaller than at least a diameter of the first rotating means.

If the diameter of the second rotating means that moves in a predetermined area is relatively large, the load on the drive mechanism etc. will increase due to the influence of inertia, etc., and there is a risk that it will be difficult to control the movement of the second rotating means. be.

In this regard, according to the above-mentioned means VA7, braking performance can be improved and the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed.

Means VA8. The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ) The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA7, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VA8, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, as with means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to polishing". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed to be curved (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA8, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VA9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA8, characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotating means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player.

According to the means VA9, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA9, similarly to means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is calculated based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VA9, similarly to means VC4, it may be possible to include "movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more." Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA9, similarly to the means VC6, "a return regulating means capable of regulating the return of the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area to outside the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA9, similar to the means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VA10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VA10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VA11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VA1 to VA10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VA11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA11, similarly to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)". ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VA12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VA1 to VA11, characterized in that:

According to the means VA12, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA12, as with means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA12, similar to means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode." It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VA12, as in the means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VA13. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of means VA1 to VA12, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VA13, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA13, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA13, similarly to means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotation means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, similarly to the means VG4, it may be possible to ``equip a path changing means that can change the path of movement of the second rotation means in the front area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VA13, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VA13, similarly to the means VG6, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means may be configured to be changeable" may be used. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional assignment VB. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385). For example, there are devices that perform effects such as lighting up or blinking light emitting means mounted on the rotating means while rotating the rotating means.

Instead of this, for example, it is conceivable to provide a rotating means and a light emitting means separately, and to perform various game effects by rotating the rotating means at a position in front of the light emitting means.

However, under such a configuration, if at least a part of the rotating means is formed of a light-shielding material that does not transmit light, the front design surface of the part will appear dark to the player's eyes, and the design surface will appear dark to the player's eyes. may become difficult to see.

As a result, there is a risk that the design of the rotating means may be degraded, and the player's interest may be diminished.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VB1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
A second player that is configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and to be able to change its state between at least a predetermined rotational state and a predetermined stopped state, and has a transparent portion that can transmit light. Equipped with one rotation means,
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ) is configured to be able to irradiate the game machine.

According to the means VB1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Furthermore, according to the present means, in the second positional relationship (close state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means overlap, the second rotation means overlaps with the transparent portion of the first rotation means. Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) is irradiated from the front through the transparent portion of the first rotation means onto at least a portion of the reflection portion of the second rotation means.

As a result, even if at least a part of the second rotating means is formed of a light-shielding material that does not transmit light, the front design surface of the part appears dark to the player's eyes, and the design Problems such as surfaces becoming difficult to visually recognize are less likely to occur.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the design quality and, in turn, to improve the interest for the players.

Means VB2. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VB1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VB2, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as "that which is being done." Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, as in the means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, as in the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB2, similar to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the circumference of the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB2, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined region viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VB3. The gaming machine according to means VB1 or VB2, wherein the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member through which light can pass.

When a light-transmitting member is disposed between the light-emitting means and the first rotation means, the brightness of the light emitted from the light-emitting means is reduced by passing through the light-transmitting member.

For example, in an illumination device, in a configuration in which a translucent member such as a cover member is disposed on the front side of an LED as a light emitting means, the brightness of light emitted from the LED etc. It decreases by passing through.

Similarly, in a structure such as a liquid crystal display device, in which a liquid crystal panel made of various translucent members is disposed on the front side of a backlight as a light emitting means, the light emitted from the backlight is The brightness decreases as the light passes through various translucent members.

Therefore, under the configuration according to the present means VB3, the effects of the means VB1 and the like described above are more effective.

Means VB4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB3, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is made of a metal material.

According to the above means VB4, the rigidity of the second rotating means can be increased, and the durability and wear resistance can be improved. Furthermore, the reflective portion can be formed by simply polishing a predetermined portion of the second rotating means, thereby simplifying the manufacturing process. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the reflecting portion (at least a portion of the second rotating means) is subjected to rust prevention treatment or the like.

Means VB5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB4, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is subjected to a polishing process.

According to the above-mentioned means VB5, by performing polishing (mirror finish), a more glossy reflective portion can be formed. As a result, the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB6. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB5, characterized in that at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.).

According to the means VB6, it is possible to increase the reflectance of light in the reflecting portion, and the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB7. The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB6, wherein at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex to the outside).

According to the means VB7, not only light emitted from the front side of the gaming machine (outside the gaming machine) but also light emitted from multiple directions such as the side of the gaming board can be reflected to the front side of the gaming machine. As a result, the effects of the means VB1 and the like can be further enhanced.

Means VB8. According to any one of the means VB1 to VB7, at least the reflecting part (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing part in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. Game machine.

According to the means VB8, the predetermined information written in the information writing section of the reflective section can be visually recognized by the player through the transparent section of the first rotating means.

Thereby, it is possible to further diversify the game performance using the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means), and the effect of the means VB1 can be further enhanced.

Means VB9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB8, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VB9, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VB9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is calculated based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, it may be provided that, similarly to the means VC4, "movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more" is provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB9, similar to the means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating returning outside the predetermined area (standby position). It may also be used as "to be present". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB9, as with means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating section capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VB10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VB10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VB11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any of the means VB1 to VB10, characterized in that in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VB11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, similarly to the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VB12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VB1 to VB11, characterized in that:

According to the means VB12, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB12, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB12, similar to means VF3, "the one rotation means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotation means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VB12, as in the means VF4, a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur. When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VB13. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VB1 to VB12, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VB13, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB13, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB13, similarly to means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, similarly to the means VG4, it may be provided that "a path changing means capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotating means is provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VB13, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear region of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VB13, it may be possible that "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional issue VC. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, the rotating means performs a rotating operation in a preset operation when, for example, a predetermined performance condition is satisfied. For this reason, the performance of the rotating means tends to become monotonous, and the player's interest in the operation of the rotating means tends to fade. In this respect, further improvement in interest was desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VC1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operating mode of the second rotating means is configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by a player.

According to the means VC1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Further, according to the present means, the operating mode of the second rotating means is configured to change depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player. Furthermore, the relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means can be changed. As a result, the player becomes more aware that he or she is actively participating in the game, and can improve his or her interest in the game.

Here, the "operation mode of the operating means" includes, for example, the number of operations and the amount of operation displacement. For example, the information includes the number of times a button-type operating means is pressed and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

Means VC2. The gaming machine according to means VC1, wherein the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player.

According to the means VC2, the player himself can determine the timing for starting the operation of the second rotating means, which has been in a standby state until then. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, thereby further increasing interest in the game.

Means VC3. means VC1 or A gaming machine described in VC2.

According to the means VC3, the player can change the amount of movement of the second rotating means based on the amount of operational displacement of the operating means. This strengthens the player's awareness that he or she is actively participating in the game, thereby further increasing interest in the game.

Means VC4. The game machine according to any one of the means VC1 to VC3, characterized in that the game machine includes a movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more.

Under the configuration related to the above-mentioned means VC1, etc., if the configuration is such that the amount of movement of the second rotating means can be changed as desired by the player, the amount of movement of the second rotating means may be greater than the amount of movement planned by the developer. There is a possibility that a player may appear who attempts to move the two-rotation means. If an attempt is made to move the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more, there is a risk that the second rotating means will collide with a predetermined portion and the second rotating means or the predetermined portion may be damaged.

On the other hand, according to the means VC4, by providing the movement restricting means, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be reduced.

Means VC5. The game machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC4, further comprising a guide means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area.

Under the configuration related to the above-mentioned means VC1 etc., if a configuration is adopted in which the movement amount of the second rotation means can be changed as desired by the player, the movement distance of the second rotation means can be changed to a predetermined area that becomes the production area of the first rotation means. There is a risk that the second rotating means will not be guided appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the means VC5, the occurrence of the above-described problems can be reduced by providing the guide means.

Means VC6. The means according to any one of the means VC3 to VC5, characterized in that the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating return to outside the predetermined area (standby position). Game machine.

Under the configuration of the above means VC1 etc., if the second rotation means is configured to be able to operate as the player desires, the second rotation means once guided to the predetermined area will be rotated again. There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the rotating means returns to the outside of the predetermined area (standby position) and the rotating means performance is not performed appropriately.

On the other hand, according to the means VC6, by providing the return regulating means, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be reduced.

Means VC7. The operation means includes at least a first operation part that can change the amount of movement of the second rotation means, and a second operation part that can select whether or not to cause the second rotation means to perform a predetermined operation. A gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC6, characterized in that the gaming machine is equipped with the following.

According to the above-mentioned means VC7, the player can now make many decisions on his/her own, thereby further strengthening the sense that he/she is actively participating in the game, and further improving his/her interest in the game. can.

Means VC8. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VC1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in any one of VC7 to VC7.

According to the means VC8, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first positional relationship (close state), The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as ``what is being done''. Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, as in the means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, as in the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC8, similarly to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts that are arranged around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC8, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VC9. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC8, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VC9, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process" similarly to the means VB5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC9, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC9, similarly to the means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VC10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means VC1 to VC9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VC10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC10, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VC11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VC1 to VC10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VC11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC11, similarly to the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC11, as in the means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC11, similarly to means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VC12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VC1 to VC11, characterized in that:

According to the means VC12, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similar to the means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode." It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VC12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" is also provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VC13. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VC1 to VC12, wherein the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VC13, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VC13, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotation means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, similarly to the means VG4, it may be possible to ``equip a path changing means that can change the path of movement of the second rotating means in the front area of the game board''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VC13, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VC13, it may be possible that "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional assignment VD. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means only performs a predetermined rotational operation, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights up or flashes. For this reason, the performance of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

In view of this, it is conceivable to create an effect in which multiple movable bodies including rotating means are linked together, but in such a configuration, the multiple movable bodies may , there is a possibility that a situation may arise in which it is not possible to link or stop the production mode that the player wants to see. If such a situation occurs, there is a risk that the player's interest in the game will be significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VD1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VD1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes are overlapped or separated, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

However, in a configuration in which the second rotating means moves within a predetermined area, there is a risk that the second rotating means may become misaligned due to assembly errors, deterioration over time, or the like. If such a positional shift occurs, the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means may not be appropriate, and there is a possibility that the above-mentioned presentation effect may not be produced appropriately.

Note that conventionally, in order to grasp the position of the movable body, a detection means for detecting the movable body at a standby position (reference position) is often provided. However, with this configuration alone, it is not possible to grasp the position of the movable body in the performance area (predetermined area) where the performance is actually performed, so there is a risk that the problems described in the above problem may occur.

On the other hand, according to the means VD1, the detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position is provided in the predetermined area serving as the production area, and the second rotation means is detected by the detection means. Based on this, the system is configured to be able to perform predetermined effects.

This makes it difficult for a time lag to occur between the operating mode of the rotating means and the start timing of the predetermined effect when performing the effect in the predetermined area, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

Means VD2. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The gaming machine according to means VC1, characterized in that the light emitting mode of the light emitting means can be changed based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means.

According to the means VD2, it is possible to perform an effect that produces a visual effect such as changing the light emission mode of the light emitting means at an appropriate timing.

Means VD3. A predetermined display means is provided as the light emitting means,
The gaming machine according to means VD2, characterized in that the display mode of the display means can be changed as the light emission mode of the light emission means.

According to the means VD3, it is possible to perform an effect that produces a visual effect such as changing the display mode of the display means at an appropriate timing.

Means VD4. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VD2 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. or the gaming machine described in any one of VD3.

According to the means VD4, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as ``what is being done''. Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD4, as in means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state)." It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD4, similarly to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4 and similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD4, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VD5. The detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area,
The game machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD4, characterized in that it is configured to be able to perform different effects depending on which of the plurality of detection means detects the second rotating means.

According to the above-mentioned means VD5, it is possible to diversify the game performance and further improve the interest.

Means VD6. The game machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD5, characterized in that the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and individually passable through the predetermined position.

According to the means VD6, it is possible to diversify the game performance and further improve the interest.

Means VD7. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD6, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VD7, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to polishing processing" similarly to the means VB5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, as in means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex outward)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD7, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written. It may also be used as "to be present". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VD8. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD7, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VD8, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, similarly to the means VC2, it may be possible that "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VD8, similarly to means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, it is also possible to "equip a movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more", similarly to the means VC4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD8, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD8, like the means VC6, "a return regulating means capable of regulating the return of the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area to outside the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may also be used as "to be present". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD8, similar to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VD9. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD8, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VD9, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, similarly to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD9, as in means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)". ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VD10. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VD1 to VD9, characterized in that:

According to the means VD10, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD10, similar to means VF3, "the one rotation means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotation means operates in the first operation mode. It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VD10, as in the means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VD10, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VD11. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VD1 to VD10, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VD11, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VD11, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG4, "a path changing means capable of changing the moving path of the second rotating means may be provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, similarly to the means VG5, it may be provided that "a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VD11, "the direction of the axis of rotation of the second rotating means may be configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional subject VE. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, the rotating means may be charged with static electricity due to friction during rotation. When the rotating means is configured to be movable, when the rotating means contacts or comes close to another electrical device (including other rotating means), static electricity flows to the electrical device. Not only the electrical equipment itself but also the gaming machine may be affected greatly.

For example, there are concerns about disturbances in the screen of the display device, noise mixing into control signals, etc., and in severe cases, various problems such as damage to electrical equipment or malfunction of electrical equipment may occur. There is.

As a result, the game performance may not be performed appropriately, and the player's interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VE1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-proximity state), the conductive part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity.

According to the means VE1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Furthermore, according to the present means, the second rotating means has a conductive portion in at least a portion thereof, and is configured to include a conductive member (earth member) that can come into contact with the conductive portion of the second rotating means.

Thereby, the static electricity charged in the second rotating means can be released through the conductive member, and the occurrence of the various problems described above due to static electricity can be suppressed.

Furthermore, malfunctions of various performance devices such as movable accessories and display devices can be suppressed, and a decrease in interest for players can be suppressed.

Means VE2. The gaming machine according to means VE1, characterized in that the conductive member is provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region).

If the conductive member is disposed within a predetermined area serving as a production area, the conductive member will come into contact with the player's eyes, which may reduce the design quality.

On the other hand, according to the means VE2, the occurrence of such problems can be suppressed.

Means VE3. The gaming machine according to means VE1 or VE2, wherein the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotation means moves from a predetermined standby position to the predetermined area.

According to the means VE3, the static electricity charged in the second rotating means can be released during the movement before coming into contact with the first rotating means, and the effect of the means VE1 etc. can be further enhanced. .

Means VE4. The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE3, wherein the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of a path along which the second rotating means moves.

According to the above means VE4, the second rotating means can easily come into contact with the conductive member, and static electricity can be more reliably released.

Means VE5. The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE4, wherein at least the conductive part (at least a part of the second rotating means) is curved (in a spherical shape convex to the outside).

According to the means VE5, the contact area between the conductive portion of the second rotating means and the predetermined conductive member can be reduced, and the frictional resistance during movement of the second rotating means can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to move the second rotating means smoothly, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest for the player.

Means VE6. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VE1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine according to any one of VE5 to VE5.

According to the means VE6, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as "that which is being done." Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, as in the means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similarly to the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, as in the means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE6, similarly to the means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VE7. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE6, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VE7, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE7, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotation means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE7, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to polishing". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE7, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE7, similarly to the means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (such as characters) is written. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VE8. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE7, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VE8, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC2, it may be possible that "the second rotation means starts a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is determined based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, it may be provided that, similarly to the means VC4, "movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more" is provided. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE8, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE8, similarly to the means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating returning to outside the predetermined area (standby position)." It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE8, similarly to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VE9. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE8, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VE9, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE9, similarly to the means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE9, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE9, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VE10. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VE1 to VE9, characterized in that:

According to the means VE10, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE10, similarly to means VF3, "the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode more than the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode. It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE10, as in the means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VE10, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member that can come into contact with the second rotating means and can cause a change in the movement of the second rotating means" can also be used. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

Means VE11. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VE1 to VE10, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VE11, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE11, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotation means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, similarly to the means VG4, it may be provided that "a path changing means capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotation means is provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VE11, similarly to means VG5, it may be provided that "a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear region of the game board to a predetermined position" may be provided. . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VE11, it may be possible that "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotating means is configured to be changeable" similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional assignment VF. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means simply lights up and flashes in accordance with the rotation of the rotating means, making the performance of the rotating means monotonous. There was a desire for further improvement in interest.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to provide multiple rotating means, but if these simply rotate independently without affecting each other, the performance of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and it becomes more interesting. It was hoped that improvements would be made.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VF1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of a predetermined area (game board front view) is
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine characterized by the following configuration.

According to the means VF1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby creating a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Furthermore, according to the present means VF1, when the other rotating means (for example, the first rotating means) acts in a predetermined manner on the acted part of one rotating means (for example, the second rotating means), the The one rotating means is configured to be able to execute a predetermined operation in an operation mode corresponding to a predetermined mode.

In other words, one rotating means operates in a different manner due to a difference in the manner in which the other rotating means acts on the acted part of one rotating means.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the operating modes of the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means), and it is possible to improve the interest for the player.

Means VF2. The one rotating means is
When the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first mode, it operates in a first operation mode corresponding to the first mode;
When the other rotating means acts on the operated portion in a second manner, the rotating means is configured to operate in a second operation manner corresponding to the second manner. The gaming machine described in means VF1.

According to the means VF2, the effect of the means VF1 can be further enhanced.

Means VF3. When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode,
The gaming machine according to means VF2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player occurs at a higher rate.

According to the means VF3, it is possible to perform a game effect in which the rate of achieving a predetermined advantageous state changes depending on the operating mode of the rotating means. As a result, the player watches the operation of the rotating means with anticipation, and the player's interest can be improved.

Means VF4. A first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state can occur,
When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode,
The gaming machine according to means VF2, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured so that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state.

According to the means VF4, the same effects as those of the means VF3 are achieved.

Means VF5. The game machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF4, characterized in that the other rotating means is configured to be able to come into contact with an actuated portion of the one rotating means.

If the actuated part is configured as a translucent part that can transmit light, and a gap is created between the actuated part of the other rotating means and one rotating means, the light will pass through the gap. The leaked light may cause problems such as making it difficult to see the affected part or reducing the brightness of the affected part itself.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means VF5, the occurrence of such a problem can be suppressed.

Means VF6. The gaming machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF5, characterized in that it includes a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means.

According to the means VF6, the operating mode of the second rotating means changes when the movable body comes into contact with the second rotating means. As a result, the operating modes of the rotating means etc. are diversified, and it is possible to improve the interest for the players.

For example, the second rotating means may be configured to start operating when a predetermined movable member (for example, a hammer-shaped accessory) acts on the second rotating means that is in a stopped state.

Means VF7. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VF1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in any one of VF6 to VF6.

According to the means VF7, at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as "that which is being done." Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF7, as in means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur" The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF7, as in the means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (close state) compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF7, similar to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF7, similar to the means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number N (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts," light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF7, similarly to the means VA7, it may be possible that "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined area viewed from the front is smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VF8. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF7, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VF8, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF8, similarly to the means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB5, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to polishing". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed to be curved (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF8, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written." It may also be used as "to be present". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VF9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF8, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VF9, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VF9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotation means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the left and right directions) is calculated based on at least the amount of operation displacement of the operation means. ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, it is also possible to "equip a movement regulating means capable of regulating the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more", similarly to the means VC4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotating means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF9, similarly to the means VC6, "the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area is provided with a return regulating means capable of regulating returning to outside the predetermined area (standby position)." It may also be used as "to be present". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF9, similar to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part that can change the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement for the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VF10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VF1 to VF9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VF10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VF11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VF1 to VF10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VF11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF11, similarly to means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF11, similar to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves" You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VF11, as in the means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VF12. The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
Any one of the means VF1 to VF11, characterized in that the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. The game machine described.

According to the means VF12, the same effects as the means VG1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VF12, similarly to means VG2, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotating means may be configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG3, "a plurality of paths by which the second rotation means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board may be provided". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG4, "a path changing means capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotating means may be provided in the front area of the game board". Thereby, the same effect as the means VG4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, similarly to the means VG5, it may be possible to ``equip a rearward guiding means capable of guiding the second rotating means that has moved to the rear area of the game board to a predetermined position.'' . Thereby, the same effect as the means VG5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VF12, "the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means may be configured to be changeable", similarly to the means VG6. Thereby, the same effect as the means VG6 is achieved.

Conventional assignment VG. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a type of gaming machine, a pachinko machine is known in which a game is played by shooting game balls into a gaming area. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Among such pachinko machines, there are machines that produce a presentation effect by rotating the rotating means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-100385).

However, in conventional gaming machines, for example, only one rotating means is provided, and the rotating means only performs a predetermined rotational operation, and the light emitting means mounted on the rotating means only lights up or flashes. For this reason, the performance of the rotating means tends to be monotonous, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

In view of this, it is conceivable to use a plurality of rotating means capable of relative displacement to create a performance, but in such a configuration, the arrangement and operation of one rotating means will affect the operation of the other rotating means. This may make it difficult to create a dynamic performance.

As a result, performances using rotating means tend to become monotonous, and further improvement in interest has been desired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can increase interest.

Means VG1. a game board having a game area on the front side;
a lottery means for performing a lottery based on a predetermined opportunity;
A gaming machine comprising a gaming value imparting means capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value when a winning result is obtained in the lottery,
a first rotating means configured to be rotatable in a predetermined area with the front-rear direction (direction of the player's line of sight) as an axial direction and changeable in state at least between a predetermined rotating state and a predetermined stopped state;
A second rotating means that is movable in the predetermined area and rotatable in a predetermined manner is configured to be movable relative to the first rotating means,
The relative positional relationship between the first rotation means and the second rotation means in a front view of the predetermined area is,
a first positional relationship (non-adjacent state) in which at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means do not overlap; and a first positional relationship between at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means. and a second positional relationship (proximity state) in which at least a portion thereof overlaps with each other.
The game board is made of a translucent member, and at least a part of the rear area thereof is configured to be visible from the front,
The first rotation means is configured to be rotatable in a front area of the game board,
A game machine characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be movable from a front area to a rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board.

According to the means VG1, the two rotating means (the first rotating means and the second rotating means) whose relative positional relationship changes overlap or separate, thereby providing a more dynamic game performance. It becomes possible to execute.

Incidentally, if both the first rotation means and the second rotation means are arranged together in the front area (or rear area) of the game board, it is not possible to allow the two rotation means to pass each other due to the front and rear space. There is a risk that the operation of both rotating means may be restricted.

In this regard, according to the present means VG1, the second rotating means is configured to be movable from the front area of the game board to the rear area and movable in the rear area of the game board, so that The second rotating means can be freely operated at the rear position of the game board without being restricted by the first rotating means arranged in the area.

Further, the player can visually confirm the operation of the second rotating means through the game board made of a translucent member.

As a result, it becomes possible to perform more dynamic and more diverse game presentations, and it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Means VG2. The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined region, and the plurality of second rotation means are movable relative to each other,
Means VG1 according to the means VG1, characterized in that the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable from the front area to the rear area of the game board, and movable in the rear area of the game board. Game machine.

According to the means VG2, a plurality of second rotation means that are movable relative to each other are provided, and these are configured to be movable individually to the rear area of the game board, thereby further diversifying game effects. be able to. As a result, it is possible to further improve the interest for the players.

Means VG3. The game machine according to means VG1 or VG2, characterized in that a plurality of paths are provided through which the second rotating means can move from the front area to the rear area of the game board.

According to the above means VG3, the operation mode of the second rotating means is diversified, and it is possible to further improve the interest.

Means VG4. The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG3, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a path changing device capable of changing the path of movement of the second rotating device in the front area of the game board.

According to the means VG4, the operation mode of the second rotating means can be further diversified, and the interest can be further improved.

Means VG5. The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG4, further comprising a rear guide means capable of guiding the second rotation means that has moved to a rear region of the game board to a predetermined position.

In the rear area of the game board, many devices such as display devices and presentation devices are installed, so compared to the front area of the game board, there is limited space for moving movable objects. It is required to move the rotation means twice.

On the other hand, according to the means VG5, by providing the rear guide means, it is possible to accurately guide the second rotation means to a predetermined position.

Means VG6. The gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG5, characterized in that the direction of the rotation axis of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable.

If the direction of the rotation axis is fixed and the direction of rotation is simply changed, the game performance may become monotonous.

On the other hand, according to the means VG6, since the rotation axis direction is configured to be changeable, it is possible to perform more diverse performances, and further improve interest.

Means VG7. Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light,
The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
In the first positional relationship (non-proximity state),
At least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means is made visible through the transparent part of the first rotating means,
In the second positional relationship (proximity state),
Means VG1 characterized in that it is configured such that at least a part of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be blocked by at least a part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. The gaming machine described in any one of VG6 to VG6.

According to the means VG7, at least a portion of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be transmitted or blocked by changing the relative positional relationship between the first rotating means and the second rotating means. In other words, the visual recognition mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed without controlling the light emitting means to turn on or blink.

Thereby, it is possible to perform an operation effect using light as well as an operation effect of the first rotation means and the second rotation means. As a result, it is possible to diversify the game performance and dramatically increase the interest for the players.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG7, similarly to the means VA2, "the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (close state). The configuration is configured such that when the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second second positional relationship (proximate state), a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is achieved at a higher rate. It may also be used as "that which is being done." Thereby, the same effects as the means VA2 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, similarly to means VA3, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." The first rotation means and the second rotation means are configured so that the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in a first second positional relationship (adjacent state). The configuration is such that when the second positional relationship (proximity state) is reached, the second advantageous state occurs more often than the first advantageous state. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, as in means VA4, "when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the first rotation means and the second rotation means are in the second positional relationship (proximity state) compared to when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. It is also possible to say that the configuration is such that the ratio (frequency) of Thereby, the same effects as the means VA4 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, similar to means VA5, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable individually in the predetermined area, and the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be movable relative to each other," The plurality of second rotation means are configured to be able to act individually on the first rotation means (at least a part of the first rotation means and at least a part of the second rotation means can be approached individually). ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, similar to means VA6, "the first rotating means has a predetermined number of N pieces (N is an integer of 1 or more) of the light-transmitting parts around the first rotating means. light emission control means arranged at equal intervals at predetermined intervals in the direction (for example, at a predetermined angle of 360°/N equal angular intervals around the rotation axis) and capable of controlling the light emission means; , the light emitting means may be configured to be able to perform blinking control of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VA6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG7, similarly to means VA7, "the diameter of the second rotating means in the predetermined region viewed from the front may be smaller than at least the diameter of the first rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VA7 is achieved.

Means VG8. The first rotation means includes a transparent part that can transmit light,
The second rotating means has at least a part of the reflecting part capable of reflecting the irradiated light (at least a part of the second rotating means is configured to be able to reflect the light),
In the second positional relationship,
Light (including light irradiated from outside the gaming machine) from the front through the transparent part of the first rotating means is applied to at least a part of the reflective part of the second rotating means that overlaps with the transparent part of the first rotating means. ), the gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG7, characterized in that it is configured to be able to irradiate.

According to the means VG8, the same effects as the means VB1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB3, "the first rotating means is rotatably provided on the front side of a predetermined translucent member that can transmit light". good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB4, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be made of a metal material". Thereby, the same effect as the means VB4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) may be subjected to a polishing process" similarly to means VB5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB6, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is plated (for example, chrome plating, etc.)" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB7, "at least the reflecting portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB7 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG8, similarly to means VB8, "at least the reflecting section (at least a part of the second rotating means) includes an information writing section in which predetermined information (characters, etc.) is written." It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VB8 is achieved.

Means VG9. Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG8, characterized in that the operation mode of the second rotation means is configured to be changeable according to the operation mode of the operation means operated by the player.

According to the means VG9, the same effects as the means VC1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG9, similarly to means VC2, "the second rotation means may start a predetermined operation based on the operation of the operation means by the player". Thereby, the same effect as the means VC2 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VG9, similarly to the means VC3, "the amount of movement of the second rotating means (the amount of movement in the vertical direction and the amount of movement in the horizontal direction ) may be configured to be changeable. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, it is also possible to ``equip a movement restricting means capable of restricting the movement of the second rotating means by a predetermined amount or more'', similarly to the means VC4. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG9, it may be provided that "guiding means for guiding the second rotation means to the predetermined area is provided" similarly to the means VC5. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG9, like the means VC6, "a return regulating means capable of regulating the return of the second rotating means guided to the predetermined area to outside the predetermined area (standby position) is provided. It may also be written as ``to be present''. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC6 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG9, similar to means VC7, "the operating means includes at least a first operating part capable of changing the amount of movement of the second rotating means, and a predetermined amount of movement of the second rotating means." and a second operation section that allows selection of whether or not to execute the operation. Thereby, the same effect as the means VC7 is achieved.

Means VG10. In the predetermined area,
comprising a detection means capable of detecting the second rotation means passing a predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG9, characterized in that the second rotation means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined performance based on the detection by the detection means.

According to the means VG10, the same effects as the means VD1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG10, similarly to means VD2, "a light emitting means capable of emitting a predetermined light is provided, and based on the detection of the second rotation means by the detection means, the light emitting means is activated." It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the light emission mode can be changed. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD2 is achieved.

In addition, similar to the means VD3, the light emitting means may include a predetermined display means, and the display mode of the display means may be changed as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG10, similarly to means VD5, "the detection means are provided at a plurality of locations in the predetermined area, and depending on which of the plurality of detection means the second rotation means is detected, It may also be defined as "configured to be able to execute different effects." Thereby, the same effect as the means VD5 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG10, similarly to means VD6, "the plurality of second rotation means are configured to be individually movable in the predetermined area and to be able to individually pass through the predetermined position" Good too. Thereby, the same effect as the means VD6 is achieved.

Means VG11. The second rotating means has at least a part thereof a conductive part having conductivity (at least a part of the second rotating means is made of a conductive material),
In the second positional relationship (proximate state), at least a portion of the first rotation means and at least a portion of the second rotation means are configured to be able to come into contact with each other or come close to each other,
Any one of the means VG1 to VG10, characterized in that, in the first positional relationship (non-adjacent state), the conductive part of the second rotation means is configured to be able to come into contact with a predetermined conductive member having conductivity. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means VG11, the same effects as the means VE1 are achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to the means VG11, similarly to the means VE2, "the conductive member may be provided in a region different from the predetermined region (outside the predetermined region)". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG11, similarly to means VE3, "the conductive member is disposed along a part of the path along which the second rotating means moves from the predetermined standby position to the predetermined area. You can also say "to be there". Thereby, the same effect as the means VE3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG11, similarly to means VE4, "the conductive member is an elongated member disposed along at least a predetermined section of the path along which the second rotating means moves." You can also use it as Thereby, the same effect as the means VE4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG11, similarly to means VE5, "at least the conductive portion (at least a part of the second rotating means) is formed in a curved shape (in a spherical shape convex to the outside)." ”. Thereby, the same effect as the means VE5 is achieved.

Means VG12. One of the first rotation means and the second rotation means includes at least one actuated portion that receives an action from the other rotation means,
When the other rotating means acts in a predetermined manner on the actuated portion of the one rotating means, the one rotating means can perform the predetermined operation in an operation manner corresponding to the predetermined manner. A gaming machine according to any one of means VG1 to VG11, characterized in that:

According to the means VG12, the same effects as the means VF1 are achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF2, "when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a first manner, the one rotating means when the other rotating means acts on the acted part in a second manner, a second operation according to the second aspect; It may also be defined as ``configured to perform an operation in accordance with the mode.'' Thereby, the same effect as the means VF2 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to means VG12, similar to means VF3, "the one rotation means operates in the second operation mode more than the one rotation means operates in the first operation mode". It may be configured such that the rate of a predetermined advantageous state advantageous to the player is greater when the player performs the action. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF3 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration according to means VG12, as in means VF4, "a first advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state occur." When the one rotating means operates in the second operating mode than when the one rotating means operates in the first operating mode. It may be configured such that the second advantageous state occurs more often than the advantageous state. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF4 is achieved.

Here, under the configuration related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF5, "the other rotating means may be configured to be able to come into contact with the operated portion of the one rotating means". Thereby, the same effect as the means VF5 is achieved.

Here, under the structure related to the means VG12, similarly to the means VF6, "a predetermined movable member capable of contacting the second rotating means and capable of causing a change in the movement of the second rotating means" may also be provided. good. Thereby, the same effect as the means VF6 is achieved.

In addition, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of the means VB1 to VB13. The configuration of a part or all of any of the above means VC1 to VC13, the structure of a part or all of any of the above means VD1 to VD11, the above means VE1 to VE11 Any part or all of any of the above means VF1 to means VF12, and any part or all of any of the above means VG1 to means VG12. or at least one configuration may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VB1 to VB13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, or a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13, a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VE1 to VE11, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means VA1 to VA13, and a configuration of a part or all of the means VB1 to VB13. a part or all of any of the means VC1 to VC13, a part or all of any of the means VD1 to VD11, a part or all of the means VE1 to VD11; The configuration of a part or all of any of VE11, the configuration of a part or all of any of the means VF1 to VF12, and the configuration of part or all of any of the means VG1 to VG12. Any combination of at least one of the configurations may be implemented.

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means (such as a firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing device) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and A game area (game board, etc.) into which game balls are guided, and a predetermined ball entry means (general prize opening, variable prize winning device, ``a pinball game machine'' which is equipped with a starting prize opening, etc.) and is configured such that game balls flowing down the game area can be visually recognized.

(b) The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

[Third embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to a third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with those of the first and second embodiments described above (same components, same processing contents, etc.) will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals.

The gaming machine according to the present invention (the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment) includes a first counting function section as the first counting means of the present invention, and a second counting function section as the second counting means of the present invention. , a subtraction function section as a subtraction means of the present invention, an information setting function section as an information setting means of the present invention, a performance execution function section as a performance execution means of the present invention, an update function section as an update means of the present invention, It has a continuation function section as a continuation means of the invention, and a specific correspondence display execution function section as a specific correspondence display execution means of the present invention.

The "predetermined gaming state" may be any gaming state in which the second gaming operation can be performed, and may be, for example, a normal state, a small win state advantageous to the player, or a predetermined state in between. A normal state for a predetermined period that can be executed after the end of the right to hold a predetermined lottery with an upper limit of the number, a jackpot state advantageous to the player, or a predetermined lottery with a predetermined upper limit of a predetermined number held during that period. A normal state for a predetermined period of time that can be executed after the end of the normal state based on the right, and a time shortened state with ball entry support in which the variable display time is shorter than the normal state and the game ball can enter or easily enters the predetermined ball entry means. Or, the normal state for a predetermined period that can be executed after the end of the predetermined lottery based on the right to hold a predetermined lottery with a predetermined number as an upper limit, the variable display time is shorter than the normal state, and the game ball enters the predetermined ball entry means. A normal state for a predetermined period of time that can be carried out based on the right to hold a predetermined lottery with a predetermined upper limit during the shortened time without ball entry support where it is impossible or difficult to enter the ball, and the lottery probability is Any state of high probability that is higher than the normal state, or a normal state of a predetermined period of time or a shortened time state that may be executed after its termination based on the right to hold a predetermined number of draws reserved up to a predetermined number during that period. Good too.

The "first counting means" may be any device that can count based on the numerical value set corresponding to the second game operation, and if it can realize the gist of the present invention, it may be, for example, an electrical storage device. It may be anything, such as a RAM as an area, a counter set in a buffer, an area consisting of a plurality of addresses, a pointer, a mechanical counting device, etc.

Of course, the "subtraction means" may be of any type as long as it can subtract the numerical information set therein, and as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention.

The "subtraction condition" may be one that causes the numerical value set in the first counting means to be subtracted based on the fulfillment of the condition, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the second game operation It may be anything, such as stopping the second game round, confirming the stop of the second game round, or elapse of a predetermined period of time after the second game round has stopped.

The "specific condition" may be anything that causes a corresponding specific gaming state to occur based on the fulfillment of the condition, and may be any condition as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention. In addition, the conditions are that a game ball enters a predetermined winning area, that a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on the ball that enters the ball and that a predetermined result is achieved, and that the right to conduct the lottery is limited to a predetermined number of players. the player performs a predetermined operation on a predetermined operation means, a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on that operation and a predetermined result is obtained, A plurality of game balls enter the ball entry area, a predetermined game action is performed, a predetermined period of time passes, a predetermined performance is performed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined count value reaches the upper limit. It can be anything, including reaching something.

The "second counting means" may be any device that can count based on a set numerical value, and may be set in a RAM, a buffer, etc. as an electrical storage area, as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. It may be any type of counter, an area consisting of multiple addresses, a pointer, a mechanical counting device, etc. In addition, the numerical information stored therein includes numerical information corresponding to the number of times of multiple games, numerical information corresponding to the number of executions of the winning variation, numerical information corresponding to the number of executions of the reach variation, and numerical information corresponding to the number of executions of the multiple play conditions. Numerical information corresponding to the establishment of , Numerical information corresponding to time information of a predetermined period, Numerical information corresponding to a predetermined number of game balls used in the game, Numerical information corresponding to the number of game balls that entered a predetermined ball entry means It may be any kind of information, such as numerical information, numerical information corresponding to the number of operations of a predetermined operating means, numerical information corresponding to the number of game balls paid out, etc.

Of course, the "information setting means" and the "updating means" may be any means as long as they can set or update these numerical information, and can realize the gist of the present invention. Further, the "specific correspondence display execution means" may be any device that can execute a specific correspondence display corresponding to these numerical information, such as animation display, character display, icon It may be of any type, such as a display or a still image display.

The "update condition" may be anything that updates the numerical value set in the second counting means based on the fulfillment of the condition, and if it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, for example, the gaming operation is stopped. The stopping of the gaming rotation is confirmed, the predetermined period of time has passed after the gaming rotation has stopped, the gaming rotation has ended, the gaming rotation has started, and the conditions for starting the gaming rotation have been met. A predetermined number of game balls are fired or paid out, a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined ball entry means, and a predetermined operation means is operated a predetermined number of times. It can be anything.

Now, as shown in FIG. 117 etc., the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. ing. However, in FIG. 117, for convenience, game members (nails, accessories, etc.) disposed on the game board 30 surface, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame 14, etc. are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 120 etc., the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 115). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

An extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 120) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 119). In addition, as shown in FIG. 117, a pair of upper and lower receivers 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

A curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 117, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

A front frame 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Note that the front frame 14 may be directly supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable, not via the inner frame 12.

The front frame 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. Details of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 115 etc., a lower tray 15 as a ball receiving tray is provided on the front side of the front frame 14 at the center of its lower part, and game balls ejected from the lower payout outlet 16 are placed in the lower tray 15. It is possible to store it. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and serves as an operating means that protrudes toward the front side. The handle 18 includes a rotary operation part 18a that can be rotated by the player, a touch sensor (not shown) that can detect a human touch on the handle 18, and a touch sensor (not shown) that can detect the amount of operation of the rotary operation part 18a. A variable resistor (not shown) and the like are provided for this purpose. With this configuration, when the rotational operation section 18a is rotated clockwise, a game ball is fired by a firing device 60, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotational operation.

Further, the handle 18 is provided with a stop lever 18b that can be pressed and operated with the thumb of the right hand that grips the rotation operation portion 18a. When the stop lever 18b is pressed, the firing device 60 is prohibited from firing game balls even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to perform a rotational operation of the rotary operation section 18a while prohibiting the shooting of game balls, or to temporarily stop shooting the game balls while holding the handle 18.

As shown in FIG. 116, an upper tray 19 is provided above the lower tray 15 in which game balls can be stored. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores the game balls paid out from the upper payout port 17 and guides them toward the firing device 60 while arranging them in a line. The game balls that are paid out when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication path 71 and a lower payout outlet 16, which will be described later.

A lending switch 121, a return switch 122, and a balance display section 124 are provided on the upper surface of the front edge of the upper tray 19. Usually, in a game hall or the like, a CR unit (not shown) is placed on the left side of the pachinko machine 10. When the lending switch 121 is operated with a game card with a balance inserted into the CR unit, lending balls are supplied to the upper tray 19 in response to the operation. On the other hand, the return switch 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the CR unit. Further, the balance display section 124 displays the balance of the card inserted in the CR unit.

Furthermore, a ball removal button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the front edge of the upper plate 19. The ball removal button 123 is configured to be retractable and is always urged upward by a biasing means (not shown). Under this configuration, when the ball removal button 123 is pressed, the space between the upper tray 19 and the lower tray 15 is opened, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 19 are guided to the lower tray 15. It looks like this. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

In addition, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 are provided on the upper surface of the front edge of the upper plate 19. By operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, a predetermined effect is performed or the display contents are changed on the effect display device 42, which will be described later.

The front side of the front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps. These light emitting means play the role of increasing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to changes in the game state and the like. For example, on the periphery of the window section 101, an illumination section 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. Furthermore, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the illumination section 102, which are turned on in the event of a predetermined error. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the upper part of the illumination part 102 to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 117) provided on the back surface of the front frame 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIG. 118. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 on the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 serving as the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Further, at the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, at a position below the window hole 39, there is a firing device 60 as a firing means, and a firing device 60 for guiding the game ball immediately after being fired by the firing device 60. A rail 61 is attached. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device is adopted as the firing device 60. Further, above the firing device 60, a ball feeding device 63 is provided that guides game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the firing position of the firing device 60.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 (game area) will be explained with reference to FIG. 118. A rail 50 is attached to the game board 30 for guiding the game balls fired from the firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided through the firing rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137. The rail 50 consists of an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 118). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 118) of the outer rail component 52. As a result, the game ball fired with a force greater than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30, for example.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, since the game ball launched by the launcher 60 may flow backward through the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the play area. It will be destroyed.

The gaming area includes a left general winning section 31A, a right general winning section 31B, a first variable winning device (jacket variable winning device) 32A as a first special variable ball entering means, and a second variable winning device as a second special variable ball entering means. Variable winning device (small hit variable winning device) 32B, first starting winning section 33WA as a first starting ball entering means, second starting winning section 33WB as a second starting ball entering means, through gate as an opportunity ball entering means 34, a variable display unit 35, etc. are provided. This will be explained in detail below.

A variable display device unit 35 is disposed approximately in the center of the gaming area, and a first starting winning section 33WA is disposed below the variable display unit 35.

The variable display device unit 35 is provided with a performance display device 42 as a performance display means for performing various display performances, and a center frame 47 is provided so as to surround the performance display device 42. The center frame 47 has a frame shape with an opening formed in the center, and the display section of the effect display device 42 is visible through the opening.

A stage portion 770 on which a game ball can roll is provided on the upper surface of the lower side of the center frame 47. A guide groove 774 is formed in the center of the stage portion 770 and is gently sloped downward toward the front. As shown in FIG. 118, in a state where the center frame 47 is disposed on the game board 30, the guide groove 774 is located directly above the first starting winning part 33WA.

A ball passage (warp passage) 775 through which game balls pass is formed inside the left side of the center frame 47. The entrance of the ball passage 775 is formed as an opening on the left side of the center of the left side of the center frame 47 (on the game board 30 side). On the other hand, the outlet portion of the ball passage 775 is formed as an opening on the right side of the lower end of the left side of the center frame 47 (on the stage portion 770 side). The ball passage 775 allows the game balls flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 to be guided onto the stage section 770 in the center frame 47.

The game ball guided onto the stage section 770 via the ball path 775 etc. rolls on the stage section 770 and then falls from the front edge of the stage section 770 onto the game board 30 surface or falls into the guide groove. 774 and is discharged onto the game board 30 surface. Among these, the game balls discharged through the guide groove 774 can enter the first starting prize winning section 33WA with a relatively high probability.

The first starting winning part 33WA is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening (first starting winning opening) into which game balls can always enter is opened above it. Further, a first start winning switch 224a that can detect a game ball that enters from the first starting winning opening is provided at a position corresponding to the first starting winning part 33WA.

Under such a configuration, when a game ball enters the first start-up winning section 33WA and the game ball is detected by the first start-up winning switch 224a, a first win/fail lottery (to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state) is performed. A jackpot lottery) etc. are carried out, and a variable display is carried out on a first special symbol display device 43A, which will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the fact that a game ball enters the first starting winning part 33WA and the gaming ball is detected by the first starting winning switch 224a corresponds to "establishment of the first starting condition", and based on this, the first The variable display performed on the special symbol display device 43A corresponds to the "first game operation", and the functions of the main control device 261, which will be described later, which performs these controls constitute the "first execution means".

A first variable winning device 32A is disposed below the first starting winning section 33WA. The first variable winning device 32A includes a big winning opening 32Aa into which a game ball can enter, a big winning opening shutter 32Ab that opens and closes the big winning opening 32Aa, and a big winning opening shutter 32Ab that drives the opening and closing of the big winning opening shutter 32Ab. It is equipped with a solenoid (not shown) and a big winning hole count switch 222 that can detect a game ball that has entered the big winning hole 32Aa.

Under this configuration, in the first variable winning device 32A, the big winning hole shutter 32Ab closes the big winning hole 32Aa along the top and bottom, and the game ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the big winning hole 32Aa. It is in a closed state. In addition, in such a closed state, the game ball can flow down in front of the big prize opening shutter 32Ab.

On the other hand, when a jackpot state occurs, the first variable winning device 32A causes the big winning hole shutter 32Ab to tilt forward using its lower side as a rotation axis, and the game ball flowing down the gaming area enters the big winning hole 32Aa. It becomes an open state where the ball can enter. In the present embodiment, a "first opening/closing control means" is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that controls opening and closing of the first variable winning device 32A when a jackpot state occurs.

In the left side area of the game area (lower left of the variable display unit 35), a plurality of left general winning parts 31A are arranged along the peripheral edge of the game area. The left general winning section 31A is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and has a winning opening (general winning opening) into which game balls can enter at any time open above it. Further, a left general winning switch 221a that can detect a game ball that enters from the general winning opening is provided at a position corresponding to the left general winning part 31A.

A through gate 34 is provided in the right side area of the game area (right side of the variable display unit 35) through which game balls flowing down the area can pass one ball at a time. The through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 that can detect game balls passing therethrough. In this embodiment, the left side area of the game area constitutes the first area, and the right side area of the game area constitutes the second area.

Then, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 (when the game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225), the starting ball entry support lottery determines whether or not to open the second starting winning section 33WB. At the same time, a variable display for teaching the result of the starting ball support lottery is performed on the normal symbol display device 41, which will be described later. Here, if the player wins in the starting ball support lottery, the second starting winning part 33WB is kept open for a specified time after the variable display ends.

Further, in the right side area of the gaming area (to the right side of the variable display unit 35), a right general prize winning section 31B is provided in an area downstream of the through gate 34. The right general winning part 31B is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and has a winning opening (general winning opening) into which game balls can enter at any time opened above it. Further, a right general winning switch 221b that can detect a game ball that enters from the general winning opening is provided at a position corresponding to the right general winning part 31B.

Further, in the lower right area of the gaming area (lower right side of the variable display unit 35), a second start winning part 33WB is arranged downstream of the right general winning part 31B. The second starting winning part 33WB in this embodiment is a variable winning device that changes state between an open state in which a game ball can enter and a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter.

Specifically, the second starting winning part 33WB includes a second starting winning opening 33WBa into which a game ball can enter, and a pair of left and right wing members as opening/closing members provided on the left and right sides of the second starting winning opening 33WBa, respectively. 33WBb, a starting winning hole solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the pair of blade members 33WBb, and a second starting winning switch 224b that can detect a game ball that has entered the second starting winning hole 33WBa. ing.

The pair of blade members 33WBb are each rotatably supported, and are normally maintained in a closed position (closed state) close to each other. In addition, an entry prevention member 145 is provided at a position directly above the second starting winning part 33WB to prevent the game ball from entering between the pair of blade members 33WBb in the closed state. As a result, in normal times, the second starting winning part 33WB is in a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area cannot enter the second starting winning opening 33WBa.

On the other hand, when a predetermined opening condition is satisfied as will be described later, the pair of blade members 33WBb are each rotated so that their tips are separated from each other and enter the open position (open state). As a result, a gap through which a game ball can pass is formed between the entry prevention member 145 and the tip of each blade member 33WBb, and the second start prize winning section 33WB allows the game ball flowing down the gaming area to enter the second starting prize. The ball is in an open state in which the ball can enter the mouth 33WBa.

Under such a configuration, when a game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB that is in the open state and the gaming ball is detected by the second starting winning switch 224b, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot state. A first win/fail lottery (big win lottery), a second win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small win state (small win lottery), etc. are performed, and a variable display is performed on the second special symbol display device 43B, which will be described later. be exposed. In other words, the second win/fail lottery (small win lottery) is performed only when a game ball enters the second starting winning section 33WB.

In this embodiment, the fact that a game ball enters the second start winning part 33WB and the game ball is detected by the second start winning switch 224b corresponds to "establishment of the second start condition", and based on this, the second The variable display performed on the special symbol display device 43B corresponds to the "second game round operation", and the "second execution means" is constituted by the functions of the main control device 261, which will be described later, which performs these controls.

Furthermore, the function of the main control device 261 that generates a jackpot condition as a first special gaming condition constitutes a "first special gaming condition generating means," and the main control device generates a small winning condition as a second special gaming condition. The function of 261 constitutes a "second special game state generating means". Among these, the function of the main control device 261 that generates a jackpot when a game ball enters a specific ball entering section 320c, which will be described later, constitutes a "specific ball entering section first special game state generating means."

Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, a jackpot that occurs when a ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB may be referred to as a "direct jackpot." In addition, the fluctuating display triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning part 33WA is also referred to as the "first fluctuating display", and the fluctuating display triggered by the ball hitting the second starting winning part 33WB is called the "second fluctuating display". ” is also called. Further, the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display will be referred to as the "first fluctuation time", and the fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display will be referred to as the "second fluctuation time".

A second variable winning device 32B is disposed below the right side area of the gaming area (lower right side of the variable display unit 35) on the downstream side of the second starting winning section 33WB.

The second variable winning device 32B is provided so that a part of it projects forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and on the upper surface of the projecting part, the ball entry device 32B is used for entering the game ball into the internal area 320a. An opening 320b is formed. The front cover member (not shown) of the second variable winning device 32B in this embodiment is made of a transparent member, and allows the player to view the internal area 320a.

In addition, the second variable winning device 32B includes an opening/closing member 318 that opens and closes the ball entry opening 320b, and a solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the opening/closing member 318. By opening and closing, the state can be changed between an open state where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the internal area 320a and a closed state where a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the internal area 320a. has been done.

In this embodiment, the second variable prize winning device 32B is normally maintained in a closed state, and is configured to be able to change its state to an open state when a small winning state, which will be described later, occurs. In the present embodiment, a "second opening/closing control means" is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that controls opening and closing of the second variable prize winning device 32B when a small winning state occurs.

The opening/closing member 318 is provided so as to be slidable in the front-back direction. The upper surface of the opening/closing member 318 is inclined downward from right to left, and when the opening/closing member 318 is in the closed position and the ball entry opening 320b is closed, the upper surface of the opening/closing member 318 is tilted downward from right to left. This is a guideway that guides the players to the left (toward the center of the game board 30).

Here, a structure may be provided in which a deceleration means (for example, a structure in which a plurality of protrusions are alternately formed protruding from the front and rear walls sandwiching the guideway) is provided for decelerating the game ball rolling on the guideway. . This allows more game balls to enter the internal area 320a when a small hit occurs.

When the opening/closing member 318 is in the closed position, the game ball rolls from right to left on the upper surface (guidance path) of the opening/closing member 318, falls from the left end onto the game board 32, and the first variable winning device It flows down towards 32A.

On the other hand, when the opening/closing member 318 retreats to the open position and the ball entry opening 320b becomes open, the game balls flowing down the game area and the game balls rolling on the guideway enter the internal area 320a. Balls can be entered.

The internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B includes an incoming ball count switch 223a that can detect all game balls that have entered the internal area 320a along a predetermined downstream path, and an incoming ball count switch 223a that can detect all game balls that have entered the internal area 320a. A specific ball entry area (V winning area) 320c into which the detected game ball can enter, a specific ball entry detection switch (V winning switch) 223b that detects the game ball entering the specific ball entry area 320c, and a specific An on-off valve 319 that can open and close the ball entry section 320c, a solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the on-off valve 319, and a non-specific ball entry section 320d to which game balls that have not entered the specific ball entry section 320c are guided. and a non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c that detects a game ball that has entered the non-specific ball entry section 320d.

The on-off valve 319 is rotatably supported on a shaft and is configured to be movable between a closed position that restricts the ball from entering the specific ball entry section 320c and an open position that allows the ball to enter the specific ball entry section 320c. ing.

Under such a configuration, when the game ball that has entered the internal area 320a flows down to the position of the specific ball entry section 320c, if the on-off valve 319 is in the open position and the specific ball entry section 320c is in the open state, The game ball falls into the specific ball entry section 320c.

On the other hand, when the game ball that has entered the internal area 320a flows down to the position of the specific ball entry section 320c, if the on-off valve 319 is in the closed position and the specific ball entry section 320c is in the closed state, the game ball passes over the on-off valve 319 without falling into the specific ball entry section 320c, and is guided to the non-specific ball entry section 320d.

When a small winning state occurs, if the game ball that entered the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B enters the specific ball entering section 320c, the first variable winning device 32A is in the open state. A jackpot situation that is said to be occurring is now occurring. Hereinafter, a jackpot that occurs when a game ball enters the specific ball winning area (V winning area) 320c (V winning) may be referred to as a "V winning jackpot".

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific ball entrance part 320c of the second variable winning device 32B is basically in an open state, and the small winning state where the ball entering opening 320b of the second variable winning device 32B is opened. , when one game ball enters the specific ball entry section 320c and the game ball is detected by the specific ball entry detection switch 223b, the on-off valve 319 is driven and controlled to the closed state, and from this point on The game ball guided onto the ball entry section 320c will be guided to the non-specific ball entry section 320d. The game ball that enters the non-specific ball entering section 320d is detected by the non-specific ball entering detection switch 223c provided in the non-specific ball entering section 320d.

The second variable winning device 32B, which is opened in the small hit state, closes the ball entry device using the opening/closing member 318 when the total number of balls detected by the specific ball entry detection switch 223b and the non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c reaches four. The opening 320b is closed, and the game ball is in a closed state where it is impossible to enter the ball. The specific ball entry section 320c and the non-specific ball entry section 320d are configured to merge below, and the game balls that have flowed into the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B through the merged discharge passage. , and is discharged to the back side of the game board 30.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the period when a small winning state occurs and the ball entry opening 320b of the second variable winning device 32B is opened, an average of about 4 game balls are inside the second variable winning device 32B. It is designed to be accessible. Then, when a game ball is allowed to enter the second variable winning device 32B, it is designed so that the game ball always (almost 100%) enters the specific ball entering section 320c. Therefore, unless the player does not shoot the game ball or the player does not hit the ball right-handed, if the player hits the right-hand ball, there is an almost 100% probability that the game ball will land in the specified ball entry section 320c and the player will hit the jackpot. This will occur.

As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) into various winning sections such as general winning sections 31A, 31B, variable winning devices 32A, 32B, starting winning sections 33WA, 33WB, etc., it is detected by various winning switches, and the upper tray 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the (or lower tray 15).

In this embodiment, 10 balls enter the left general winning section 31A, 3 balls enter the right general winning section 31B, and 3 balls enter the first variable winning device 32A (big winning opening 32Aa). 15 pieces if the ball enters the second variable winning device 32B (specific ball entering section 320c or non-specific ball entering section 320d), 5 balls when the ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA It is configured so that three game balls (prize balls) are paid out when three balls enter the second starting prize winning section 33WB.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36 corresponding to the lowest part of the gaming area, and game balls that do not win in various winning sections such as the general winning sections 31a and 31b are stored in this out port. 36 and is discharged to the outside of the game area (the back side of the game board 30). Further, the game board 30 is provided with various members such as a large number of nails and a windmill in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

Here, various gaming states in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained. In this embodiment, "15 round jackpot", "8 round jackpot", and "4 round jackpot" are set as jackpot types.

Hereinafter, the "15 round jackpot" will be referred to as the "15R jackpot", and will be simplified as "15RS" in the drawings. Similarly, the "8 round jackpot" is called the "8R jackpot" and is simply written as "8RS" in the drawings. Further, the "4 round jackpot" is referred to as the "4R jackpot", and is simply written as "4RS" in the drawings.

In the jackpot state of "15R jackpot", the jackpot release operation is repeated 15 times (15 rounds). In addition, the "jackpot opening operation" means, for example, after the big winning opening shutter 32Ab of the first variable winning device 32A is switched from the closed state to the open state, a prescribed time of 30 seconds has elapsed, or the first variable winning device It refers to one opening/closing operation until the closed state is reached on the condition that a prescribed number of eight game balls are won in 32A (the same applies hereinafter).

In the jackpot state of "8R jackpot", the jackpot release operation is repeated 8 times (8 rounds), and in the jackpot state of "4R jackpot", the jackpot release action is repeated 4 times (4 rounds).

However, as will be described in detail later, regarding the "V winning jackpot" according to this embodiment, since the small winning state in which the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state corresponds to the first round, the above "jackpot opening operation" (Release of first variable winning device 32A)" will be reduced by one round each. In other words, when a "15R jackpot" occurs due to a "V winning jackpot", the above "jackpot release action" is set to "14 times", and when an "8R jackpot" occurs, the above "jacket release action" is set to "7". If a "4R jackpot" occurs, the "jackpot release operation" is set to "three times".

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot type that is awarded when the game ball is won in the winning lottery is divided between when the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA and when it enters the second starting winning section 33WB. are different. If you win the lottery triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, you will be divided into either "15R jackpot" or "4R jackpot" (excluding during time saving B mode which will be described later). In addition, if you win the lottery based on the entry of the ball into the second starting winning section 33WB, you will be divided into one of the "15R jackpot", "8R jackpot", or "4R jackpot".

Next, the starting ball entry support state related to the second starting winning part 33WB will be explained. The starting ball entry support state in this embodiment is a "high ball entry state" in which the blade member 33WBb of the second starting winning part 33WB is opened relatively frequently and the game ball easily enters the second starting winning part 33WB. "High support state)" and "Low ball entry state (Low support state)" in which the proportion of the blade member 33WBb being released is lower than in the "High ball entry state" and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting winning part 33WB. status).

In addition, the "high ball entry state" includes (1) a state where the fluctuating display time on the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than the "low ball entry state", (2) one opening of the second starting winning part 33WB. (3) The specified number of game balls that can be entered per opening of the second starting winning section 33WB is "low ball entry state". (4) A state in which the number of times the second starting prize winning section 33WB is opened per winning start ball support lottery is greater than that in the "low ball entry state," (5) Starting ball support lottery. For example, the probability of winning is set to be higher than that in the "low ball entry state". The "high ball entry state" in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high ball entry state". .

Specifically, in this embodiment, when winning the starting ball entry support lottery, the second starting winning part 33WB is opened for 0.2 seconds x 2 times in the "low entering ball state" and in the "high entering ball state". In "state", it is 1.8 seconds x 2 times. As a result, in the "high winning ball state", it becomes easy for game balls to win frequently in the second starting winning section 33WB.

In this embodiment, the "high ball entry state" corresponds to "the first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition," and the "low ball entry state" corresponds to "the first auxiliary state that makes it easier to meet the second starting condition." The function of the blade member 33WBb of the second starting winning part 33WB and the main control device 261 that drives and controls these constitutes an "auxiliary means."

Next, various game states (various game modes) when the special symbol display devices 43a, 43b are displayed in a variable manner will be explained.

In this embodiment, the game modes that are predetermined game states are "normal mode", "fluctuating time reduction mode with starting ball entry support (hereinafter referred to as "time saving A mode")", and "no starting ball entry support". The configuration is such that three game modes can be switched and set: variable time reduction mode (hereinafter referred to as "time saving B mode").

In the "normal mode", the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B display fluctuations in a "normal fluctuation state" in which they are performed at normal times, and the starting ball entry support state becomes a "low ball entry state".

In the "time saving A mode", the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B becomes a "variable time shortening state" in which the variable display is performed in a shorter time than the normal time, and the starting ball entry support state becomes a "high ball entry state". Become. Furthermore, the "normal fluctuation state" and the "reduced fluctuation time state" can be switched by changing the fluctuation time determination table as described later.

"Time saving A mode" is a game mode that is given after the end of the jackpot state, and the variable display on the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B (mainly the second variable display on the second special symbol display device 43B) is set in advance. The process ends after a predetermined number of times, and then shifts to the "normal mode".

In addition, in this embodiment, even if any jackpot condition such as "15R jackpot", "8R jackpot" or "4R jackpot" occurs, after the jackpot condition ends, "time saving A mode" is given a predetermined number of times. The configuration is as follows. Specifically, after the end of the "15R jackpot" or "8R jackpot", a "time saving A mode" with a duration of 7 variable displays will be given, and after the end of the "4R jackpot", the duration will be a variable display. One time of "Time-saving A mode" will be granted.

In the "time saving B mode", the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B becomes a "variable time shortening state" in which the variable display is performed in a shorter time than the normal time, and the starting ball entry support state becomes a "low ball entry state". Become. In this embodiment, the state set to "time saving B mode" corresponds to a specific gaming state.

"Time-saving B mode" is a game mode that is given when you win the third winning lottery (time-saving winning lottery) held during "normal mode" based on the ball entering the second starting winning part 33WB, and is a special game mode. When the variable display on the symbol display devices 43A, 43B (mainly the first variable display on the first special symbol display device 43A) is performed a predetermined number of times, it ends, and then shifts to the "normal mode".

However, as mentioned above, in the "normal mode" and "time saving B mode", the starting ball support state related to the second starting winning part 33WB does not become the "high hitting ball state", and the game ball does not enter the second starting winning ball state. Since the ball is in a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult for the ball to enter part 33WB, a small winning state based on the result of the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) does not substantially occur. Even if a small winning state occurs, as will be described later, the small winning release operation of the second variable winning device 32B in the "normal mode" and "time saving B mode" is performed twice for 0.1 seconds. Therefore, it becomes substantially difficult for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 32B.

Further, although details will be described later, in this embodiment, various display effects corresponding to the current gaming state (gaming mode) are performed on the effect display device 42. For example, in the "normal mode", the "normal stage production" is performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, and the "battle" is performed when the "time-saving A mode" with a duration of one variable display is given. ``Stage production'', ``Rush stage production'' that is performed when ``Time saving A mode'' with a duration of 7 variable displays is given, ``Time saving A mode (Battle stage production or Rush stage production)'' is completed. There is a "continuous chance stage performance" that can be played, a "lucky stage performance" that is performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA when the "time saving B mode" is provided.

As shown in FIG. 118, on the outside of the upper right corner of the game area, a normal symbol is displayed as a normal display means for teaching the result of the starting ball support lottery, which is performed based on the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34. A device 41, a first special symbol display device 43A serving as a first special display means for teaching the result of a first winning lottery (jackpot lottery) that is performed when a ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA; To teach the results of the first winning/failure drawing (big winning drawing), the second winning/failure drawing (small winning drawing), and the third winning/failure drawing (time-saving winning drawing), which are held based on the entry of a ball into the second starting winning part 33WB. A second special symbol display device 43B serving as a second special display means is provided so as to be visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The normal symbol display device 41 is composed of two LEDs (common symbol lamps). In the normal symbol display device 41, for example, the normal symbol lamp on the right side is displayed blinking (fluctuating display) in response to the passing of the game ball to the through gate 34. After the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display is stopped based on the result of the starting ball entry support lottery. In other words, the lighting mode when the fluctuating display stops (combination of lit standard lamps) is associated with various results of the starting pitch support lottery, and the lighting mode when the fluctuating display stops. As a result, the results of the starting pitch support lottery will be displayed definitively. For example, lighting up both the left and right regular map lamps indicates "winning", and lighting only the left regular map lamp indicates "losing".

The first special symbol display device 43A is composed of four LEDs (first special symbol lamps). In the first special symbol display device 43A, a switching display (first variable display) of the first special symbol lamp is performed in response to the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA.

Then, after a specific game state occurs in which a first variable display, which is a specific game, is performed for a predetermined time on the first special symbol display device 43A, the first variable display is displayed based on the result of the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery). will be suspended. In other words, the lighting mode (combination of lit special lamps) when the first variable display stops is associated with various results of the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery), and the first variable display The result of the first win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery), that is, "jackpot" or "miss" is definitely displayed by the lighting state when the button stops.

The second special symbol display device 43B is composed of four LEDs (second special symbol lamps). In the second special symbol display device 43B, a switching display (second variable display) of the second special symbol lamp is performed in response to the ball entering the second starting winning portion 33WB.

Then, after a specific game state occurs in which a second variable display, which is a specific game, is performed for a predetermined time on the second special symbol display device 43B, a first win/fail lottery (big win lottery) and a second win/fail lottery (small win lottery) occur. Alternatively, the second variable display will be stopped based on the result of the third win/fail lottery (time-saving winning lottery). In other words, the lighting mode when the second variable display stops (the combination of special symbol lamps that are lit) is associated with the various results of the first to third winning/failure drawings, and the second variable display is The results of the first to third winning/failure drawings, that is, "big win," "small win," "time-saving win," or "missing," are definitely displayed depending on the lighting mode when it stops. In the present embodiment, stopping the second variable display corresponds to the establishment of a predetermined update condition, and winning the "time saving win" corresponds to the establishment of the specific condition.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B, the jackpot type (“15R jackpot”, “8R jackpot”, and “4R jackpot”) is determined depending on the lighting mode to be stopped (stop mode). (Which of these is the case?) will also be taught. In addition, in the second special symbol display device 43B, depending on the lighting mode (stop mode) to be stopped, the type of time-saving hit (one of "30 times saving time", "40 times saving time", and "50 times saving time") is displayed. (Which one?) will also be taught. It should be noted that there are not one but a plurality of stop modes of the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B that respectively teach various jackpots, small wins, various time-saving wins, and misses, and any one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. Ru.

Further, the stop display on the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B is maintained for a specified time, and after the period (variation interval) has elapsed, the next variable display can be started.

Furthermore, after the stop display on the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B, if the next variable display is not performed even after a specified time has elapsed, the first special symbol display device 43A Alternatively, the second special symbol display device 43B is configured to be switched from a lighting mode indicating the result of the winning lottery to a lighting mode indicating a standby state in which no variable display is performed. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the lighting mode indicating the result of the lottery is maintained as it is.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting prize winning section 33WA, which is a specific condition or an update condition, while the first variable display is being executed, a game ball corresponding to the entering ball enters the One fluctuating display is stored on hold, and after the first fluctuating display being executed is stopped, the first fluctuating display that has been stored on hold is started. Similarly, during execution of the second variable display, if a game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB that is a specific condition or an update condition, the second variable display corresponding to the entered ball is displayed. After the second variable display that is being held and stored is stopped, the second variable display that has been held and stored is started.

In addition, if a game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display corresponding to the passing is stored and stored, and after the variable display in progress is stopped and displayed. , the fluctuating display that had been stored on hold is now started.

Further, in this embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is stored on hold so as to be adjacent to the normal symbol display device 41, the first special symbol display device 43A, and the second special symbol display device 43B. a normal hold display device 44 indicating that the first variable display is on hold; and a first hold display means capable of informing or suggesting that the first variable display is held and stored (that the right to execute the first variable display has been obtained). A first suspension display device 46A and a second suspension as a second suspension display means capable of informing or suggesting that the second variable display is stored on hold (that the right to execute the second variable display has been obtained). A display device 46B is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 43A, the second special symbol display device 43B, the first reservation display device 46A, the second reservation display device 46B, the normal symbol display device 41, and the normal reservation display device 44 are as follows: The display is directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later, as main control means.

The normal hold display device 44 is composed of two LEDs (normal hold lamps). In this embodiment, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 performed based on the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34 can be held and stored up to four times. For example, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 is held for one time, the normal holding lamp on the left side lights up, and when the fluctuating display for two times is held, the normal holding lamps on the left and right side light up, When a batch is on hold, the normal hold lamp on the left flashes, and the normal hold lamp on the right lights up, and when four times are on hold, the normal hold lamps on the left and right blink. Incidentally, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the jackpot state, the variable display for that amount may also be suspended.

The first hold display device 46A includes two LEDs (first hold lamps). In this embodiment, the first variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting prize winning section 33WA can be held and stored up to four times. For example, if the first variable display is on hold for one time, the first hold lamp on the left will light up, and if the first variable display is on hold for two times, the first hold lamps on the left and right will light up. However, if the first fluctuation display is on hold for three times, the first hold lamp on the left will flash, and the first hold lamp on the right will be lit, and if the first fluctuation display is on hold for four times. , the left and right first hold lamps flash. When a plurality of first variable displays are stored on hold, the first variable displays are sequentially digested in the order in which they were stored on hold (from the first one on hold).

The second hold display device 46B includes two LEDs (second hold lamps). In this embodiment, the second variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting prize winning section 33WB can be held and stored up to four times. For example, if the second variable display is on hold for one time, the second hold lamp on the left will light up, and if the second variable display is on hold for two times, the second hold lamps on the left and right will light up. However, if the second fluctuation display is on hold for three times, the second hold lamp on the left will blink, and the second hold lamp on the right will be lit, and if the second fluctuation display is on hold for four times. , the left and right second hold lamps flash. If a plurality of second variable displays are held and stored, the second variable displays are sequentially consumed in the order in which they were held (starting from the one that was held first).

Incidentally, when a new game ball enters the starting winning section 33Wa, 33Wb during the jackpot state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended. However, in this embodiment, as will be described later, in a jackpot state, a "right-handed hit" is performed, and the game ball relatively enters the second starting prize part 33WB provided at the lower position of the right side area of the game area. Basically, after the jackpot state ends, the second variable display is held and stored.

As mentioned above, basically, the first variable display triggered by a ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA and winning a prize. The second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball enters the second starting winning section 33WB, and is digested in the order in which the winning ball enters the second starting winning section 33WB. . However, if both the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB are suspended ( When one or more of the first holding lamp and one or more of the second holding lamps are lit), the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB is preferentially digested. That is, if the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB has not been fully digested, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA will not be displayed. It is configured so that it does not get damaged. For example, in a state where one first hold lamp of the first hold display device 46A is lit, a game ball is won in the second start winning section 33WB, and one second hold lamp of the second hold display device 46B is lit. If it lights up, the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA is postponed, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB is performed first. That will happen.

Further, the effect display device 42 of the variable display device unit 35 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display section, and the display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 displays auxiliary display contents based on commands from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, etc. It is determined and displayed by a display control device 45, which will be described later. In this embodiment, the effect display device 42 and the sub-control device 262 and display control device 45 that control the effect display device 42 constitute a “specific correspondence display execution function unit”.

The effect display device 42 is configured to be able to perform a variable effect display (a variable display of decorative symbols) as a variable corresponding effect display in accordance with the variable display by the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B. There is.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 159, the effect display device 42 is provided with three upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (an upper symbol display area, a middle symbol display area, and a lower symbol display area). , multiple types of decorative symbols (designs with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed) in each symbol display area, and then sequentially in each symbol display area (for example, upper symbol display area→lower symbol display area). Decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (in the order of symbol display area→middle symbol display area).

When the main controller 261 determines that a jackpot has occurred, a display corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the first or second special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, and a decorative symbol is displayed on the performance display device 42 as a jackpot. (For example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area so that they are lined up on a predetermined effective line), and a jackpot state occurs. is started.

In addition, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot, as a preliminary step, for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. It will be done. In this way, a state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined active line in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and a variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-reach state. Of course, even if a reach state occurs, it does not necessarily mean a jackpot state, and there may be cases where the player misses the jackpot.

In this embodiment, after a reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) that was stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed on the same active line. A jackpot condition is given when the number is stopped (the decorative pattern of the same number is stopped and displayed). However, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot cannot be determined depending on the type of decorative pattern that is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the case of a "small hit" or "time saving win", the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42 is different from that corresponding to the jackpot (the same number of zeros). For example, the numbers of the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are combinations such as "3, 4, 1" that look like outlier symbols. As a result, the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed cannot be determined as a "small win" or "time-saving win." Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case of a "small win" or "time-saving win", the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 may be the same number of doubles.

As shown in FIG. 117, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the lower dispensing port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19. Further, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the firing rail 61 provided on the front side of the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame 14 has a gap between A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game balls that have fallen further to the lower tray 15. As a result, if a game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball is discharged to the lower tray 15 via the foul ball passage 72. be done.

Furthermore, a firing ball passage 74 is provided that communicates between the upper tray 19 and the ball feeding device 63 and guides game balls stored in the upper tray 19 to the ball feeding device 63. In addition, a communication hole (not shown) that communicates with the lower plate communication path 71 is formed in the firing ball passage 74, and a first shutter (not shown) that opens and closes the communication hole is provided. The first shutter is normally biased toward a closed position that closes the communication hole by a biasing means (not shown). Further, the first shutter is configured to work in conjunction with the ball removal button 123, and to be displaced to an open position where the communication hole is opened when the ball removal button 123 is pressed.

As shown in FIG. 116, the lower tray 15 is formed with a discharge port 15a through which the game balls stored in the lower tray 15 can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10, and the discharge port 15a is opened and closed. A second shutter 15b is provided. The second shutter 15b is normally urged toward the closed position, which closes the discharge port 15a, by an unillustrated urging means. Furthermore, the second shutter 15b is configured to operate in conjunction with the ball removal lever 25, and for example, when the ball removal lever 25 is slid to the left, it is displaced to the open position that opens the discharge port 15a. is configured to do so.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 117 and 118 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352 to be described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and communicates with the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). It is divided into a passage and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, and substantially closes the exit of the dispensing passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear end of the lower plate communication path 71. Furthermore, the inlet portion (ball inflow portion) of the lower plate communication path 71 and the inlet portion (ball inflow portion) of the upper plate communication path 73 are provided adjacent to each other. Further, when the front frame 14 is in the closed state, both the entrances and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance, and the game ball can pass through the gap between them. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are full of game balls, the game balls that are paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflowing to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), It passes through the passage 71 and is delivered to the lower tray 15.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to. In this embodiment, based on the fact that a game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch, an error notification is provided to notify that the lower tray 15 is full using a display on the performance display device 42, a sound, etc. Control takes place. Incidentally, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the error notification state is canceled.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 119, 120, etc. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 120, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 118) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, there is a resin frame cover that covers the center frame 47 from behind. 213 is provided to protrude rearward. Furthermore, on the back side of the frame cover 213, an effect display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213 are removably mounted in a stacked state. installed.

The production display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a that has an opening for exposing the liquid crystal display section of the production display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is fixed to the back side of the frame cover 213. There is. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (accommodation box 42a). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). Note that an LED control board and the like that drive the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 are disposed inside the frame cover 213. Further, the storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a, 262a are made of transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning parts 31A, 31B, variable winning devices 32A, 32B, starting winning parts 33WA, 33WB, etc. from behind. There is. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting winning game balls in various winning sections. The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 includes general winning switches 221a, 221b, big winning opening count switch 222, ball entering count switch 223a, specific ball entering detection switch 223b, non-specific ball entering detection switch 223c, A first panel relay board is provided which is electrically connected to the start prize switches 224a, 224b and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. This first board relay board relays the general winning switches 221a, 221b, etc. and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224a and 224b that detect winnings in the starting winning parts 33WA and WB are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball entry detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, although not shown, a second board relay board that relays various motors and solenoids to the main control device 261 is also provided on the back side of the game board 30.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 119, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism section 352. In addition, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 119) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 119) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying the transmission of various information to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, symbols are not attached, but terminals are used to output various information regarding the current gaming state, such as the occurrence of a jackpot, and the opening of the front frame 14 and inner frame 12 detected by opening detection switches 91 and 92, which will be described later. Terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, no tank ball error, and payout error; terminal regarding the number of prize balls paid out from the payout control device 311 Terminals and the like for outputting information are provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 119) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. That will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two horizontal rows of ball passages and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and on the downstream side of the tank rail 356, a case rail 357 is connected vertically. has been done. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 119) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 120, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage section 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow. A discharge chute (not shown) is formed to discharge the pachinko machine 10 to the outside. That is, the game balls won in each winning section such as the general winning section 31a are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning sections are also discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 119, a power supply/launch control device 310, a payout control device 311, and a CR unit connection board 314 are removably attached to the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a stacked state. It is being The power supply/launch control device 310 includes a launch control circuit 312 and a power supply circuit 313, and is housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251.

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply/firing control device 310). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. There is.

In addition, the CR unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (power supply/launch control device 310). Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Furthermore, the power supply circuit 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 120, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 includes a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 115, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame 14, and by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, the inner frame is locked. 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked with respect to the outer frame 11, and the front frame 14 is locked with respect to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 119). reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 119) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 118, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 119). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. In other words, when the front frame 14 is closed, the front frame open detection switch 91 has a detection part pressed by the back surface of the front frame 14 and is turned off, and when the front frame 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state and is turned on. Become. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

In addition, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313 even after the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data that is stored is backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, special symbol display devices 43A, 43B, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later, are connected to the input/output port 505. With this configuration, the above-described special symbol display devices 43A, 43B and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, although illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes general winning switches 221a, 221b, big winning opening count switch 222, ball entering count switch 223a, specific ball entering detection switch 223b, non- Various detection switches such as the specific ball entry detection switch 223c, starting prize switches 224a and 224b, and through gate switch 225, various boards such as the power supply/launch control device 310, payout control device 311, and sub-control device 262, and the hold display device. 46A, 46B, information display devices such as the normal reservation display device 44, various solenoids provided in the variable winning devices 32A and 32B, and various electrical components such as a solenoid that operates the second start winning portion 33WB are connected. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 551 and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It is equipped with a RAM 553, which is a memory that temporarily stores various data, etc. when executing the program, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc. It is equipped with The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a production button 125, a cross button 126, an illumination section 102, an error display lamp 104, and the like.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the effect display device 42 to display the display control. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B controlled by the main control device 261 are designed to teach that the jackpot has been won, and the presentation controlled by the sub control device 262 In the display device 42, in accordance with the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, a variable display of decorative symbols is performed as an effect display.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply circuit 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the commands are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a power source/firing control device 310 (firing control circuit 312), a dispensing device 358, a CR unit connection board 314, and the like.

The CR unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (rent switch 121 and return switch 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the CR unit (card reader unit, ball rental unit) and the payout control device 311, respectively. Information regarding the ball lending operation by the player to the ball lending operation section or the CR unit is input to the CR unit, and the balance of gaming value is stored in the card, which is a recording medium, inserted into the CR unit. If so, the balance of the card is subtracted, and a payout request signal for the number of game balls corresponding to the subtraction is output to the payout control device 311. Note that the recording medium of the CR unit is not limited to a card type, but may be a coin type or a stick type.

Further, the payout control device 311 periodically sends a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected to the firing control circuit 312 of the power source/firing control device 310. (For example, every 2 msec).

The firing control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls. The handle 18 , the dispensing control device 311 , and the main control device 261 are electrically connected to the ejection control circuit 312 . The firing control circuit 312 also receives a dial position signal from a variable resistor from the handle 18 that indicates the amount of rotation operation (rotation angle) of the rotation operation section 18a, and a dial position signal that indicates that the player is touching the handle 18. It is configured to be able to input a touch signal from a touch sensor and a firing switch signal indicating that the player is not operating the stop lever 18b. Furthermore, the firing control circuit 312 is configured to be able to input a CR unit connection signal from the payout control device 311 indicating that the CR unit connection board 314 and the CR unit are electrically connected.

Then, the firing control circuit 312 outputs a firing state signal to the main controller 261 on the condition that the touch signal, the firing switch signal, and the CR unit connection signal are input. On condition that the status signal is input, a firing permission signal and a ball sending signal are output to the firing control circuit 312. The main controller 261 is configured to output a launch permission signal at intervals of 0.6 seconds while the launch status signal is being input.

Further, the firing control circuit 312 is configured to drive the ball feeding device 63 and send the game ball to the firing position when a ball sending signal is input. In addition, in a state in which it is detected that a game ball is already present at the firing position by the preparation ball detection sensor provided in the ball feeding device 63 and capable of detecting whether or not a game ball exists at the firing position, the ball feeding device 63 (Even if a ball sending signal is received, the game ball is not sent to the firing position).

Furthermore, the firing control circuit 312 drives the firing device 60 (firing solenoid) on condition that the touch signal, firing switch signal, CR unit connection signal, dial position signal, and firing permission signal are input. It is composed of Thereby, the game ball set at the firing position is launched by the firing device 60 with a strength based on the dial position signal.

Further, the power supply circuit 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via a control device to which these are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (Generation of internal command for VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the effect display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the effect display device 42.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 122, a win/fail random number counter CC1 is used as a win/fail random number generation means used for a win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, etc., and a win/fail random number counter CC1 is used to determine the jackpot type (type lottery). A type determination counter CC2, a fluctuation selection counter CC3 used for determining whether or not to generate a ready-to-reach state in the production display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, and a special Whether to open the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time of the symbol display devices 43A, 43B (effect display device 42), and the second start winning part 33WB. The normal symbol random number counter CC4 used for the starting ball support lottery is used. Incidentally, the variation selection counter CC3 is also used for lottery of a reach pattern when the decorative symbols of the performance display device 42 are removed and varied. Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for effect pattern selection (for example, variation pattern selection of decorative symbols) in the effect display device 42.

The counters CC1, CC2, CC3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CC4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation reservation area as a reservation storage means in which the values of the win/fail random number counter CC1, type determination counter CC2, and fluctuation selection counter CC3 are stored, and a normal symbol random number counter CC4 in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is stored. A variable holding area is provided.

The special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area and a second special fluctuation reservation area each having four reservation areas (first to fourth reservation areas), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, each value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, type determination counter CC2, and fluctuation selection counter CC3 is displayed in chronological order according to the winning history in the first starting winning part 33WA. Stored. In this embodiment, the first special fluctuation holding area provided in the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 is a first storage means (first holding area) capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit (four). means).

In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, each value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, type determination counter CC2, and fluctuation selection counter CC3 is displayed in chronological order according to the winning history in the second starting winning part 33WB. Stored. In this embodiment, the second special fluctuation holding area provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 is configured as "a second storage means (second holding area) capable of storing the establishment of the second start condition up to a predetermined upper limit (four)". means).

In this embodiment, there is one execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing a fluctuation display based on the data. Then, they will be shifted to a common execution area.

The normal fluctuation holding area includes four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area) and one execution area. In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

By adopting such a configuration, the first variable display on the first special symbol display device 43A, the second variable display on the second special symbol display device 43B, and the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times each. It is possible.

To explain each counter in detail, the win/fail random number counter CC1 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing price (that is, 599), the lower limit value as the opening price is 0. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the win/fail random number counter CC1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the applicable random number counter CC1. Note that the initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value=0 to 599) similar to the win/fail random number counter CC1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the win/fail random number counter CC1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is stored in the win/fail random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins in the first starting winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB, the value of the winning/losing random number counter CC1 stored in the winning/losing random number counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special fluctuation holding area). area or second special fluctuation holding area).

In this embodiment, the probability of winning the first win/fail lottery (jackpot lottery) changes depending on the game mode (any of the game modes "normal mode", "time-saving A mode", and "time-saving B mode"). There is no problem, and the number of values of the win/fail random number counter CC1 that becomes a jackpot is three, and the value is "7,207,407". That is, the first winning lottery (big winning lottery) is won with a probability of 1/200, which is the first winning probability, and a jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, the "first lottery means" is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that performs the first lottery (jackpot lottery).

Similarly, the winning probability of the second lottery (small winning lottery) changes depending on the game mode (any of the game modes "normal mode", "time-saving A mode", and "time-saving B mode"). There are no small wins, and the number of values of the win/fail random number counter CC1 that results in a small win is 84, and the values are "9-50, 409-450". That is, the second winning lottery (small winning lottery) is won with a probability of 84/600 (≈approximately 1/7), which is the second winning probability, and a small winning state occurs. In this embodiment, the "second lottery means" is configured by the function of the main control device 261 that performs the second lottery (small winning lottery).

Further, the third winning/failure drawing (time-saving winning drawing) is carried out only during the "normal mode" based on the entry of game balls into the second starting winning section 33WB. In other words, the third winning/failure lottery (time-saving winning lottery) is conducted only while the remaining second variable display that is stored on hold at the end of the "time-saving A mode" is being executed (remaining pending is being used up). . Therefore, in this embodiment, the state in which the "remaining hold of the second variable display (continuation chance stage performance)" is being performed after the end of the "time saving A mode (battle stage performance or rush stage performance)" is the state in which the "predetermined game corresponds to "state".

The number of values of the win/fail random number counter CC1 that results in a time saving win is 60, and the values are "211 to 230, 311 to 330, and 511 to 530". In other words, the player will win the third lottery (time-saving winning lottery) with a probability of 1/10, and will be entitled to the "time-saving B mode".

More specifically, if the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is "211 to 230", "30 time saving wins" will occur, and if the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is "311 to 330", "40 If a "time saving win" occurs and the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is "511 to 530", a "50 time saving win" occurs.

As will be described later, the third lottery (time-saving lottery) is the first lottery (big prize lottery) and the second lottery (small prize lottery) conducted based on the balls entered into the second starting winning section 33WB. ) will be executed if the winner is not selected.

The ROM 502 is provided with a win/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 corresponds to any of the wins. In this embodiment, a first validity determination table (a first validity determination table common to the "normal mode", "time saving A mode" and "time saving B mode") corresponding to the ball entering the first starting winning part 33WA, A second correctness judgment table corresponding to the ball entering the second starting winning part 33WB (a second judgment table including a small hit judgment common to “time saving A mode” and “time saving B mode”, and a second judgment table for “normal mode”) There is a second win/fail determination table including a small hit determination and a time-saving hit determination.

The type determination counter CC2 is configured such that, for example, the number is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 19, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 19), returns to 0, which is the lower limit.

The ROM 502 is provided with a type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter CC2 corresponds to. In this embodiment, a first type determination table corresponding to the ball entering the first starting winning part 33WA and a second type determining table corresponding to the ball entering the second starting winning part 33WB are provided.

Then, when a jackpot is won in the lottery, the type of jackpot state to be awarded is determined based on the value of the type determination counter CC2 (a type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is awarded. The Rukoto.

In this embodiment, in the "normal mode (the same applies to time-saving A mode)", if a direct jackpot is won in the first winning/failure lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, , 5% of the time it becomes a "15R jackpot" and 95% of the time it becomes a "4R jackpot".

On the other hand, in the "time saving B mode", if you win a direct jackpot in the first lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, you will receive a "15R jackpot" at a rate of 100%. (The percentage of "4R jackpot" is 0%).

On the other hand, regardless of the game mode, if you win a direct jackpot in the first lottery (jackpot lottery) triggered by the ball entering the second starting prize winning section 33WB, and if you win the second prize via a small prize, When a V winning jackpot occurs based on a ball hitting the specific ball winning area (V winning area) 320c of the variable winning device 32B, the 15R jackpot occurs at a rate of 40%, and the 8R jackpot occurs at a 10% rate. It becomes a "4R jackpot" at a rate of 50%.

Note that the type determination counter CC2 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the type determination counter CC2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins in the first start-up winning section 33WA or the second start-up winning section 33WB, the value of the type determination counter CC2 stored in the type determination counter buffer changes to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area).

The variable selection counter CC3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of, for example, 0 to 238, and after reaching the upper limit (that is, 238), returns to 0, which is the lower limit. In the present embodiment, after the fluctuation selection counter CC3 generates a reach state with respect to a decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before or after the reach symbol and stops, which is a "reach behind or behind", and a reach state is also generated. After that, the final stop symbol stops at a position other than before or after the reach symbol, ``reach other than before or after,'' and ``reach,'' in which no reach state occurs, is selected by lottery.

The ROM 502 is provided with a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variable selection counter CC3 and various reach patterns.

The variation selection counter CC3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variation selection counter CC3 is stored in the variation selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins in the first starting prize winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB, the value of the fluctuation selection counter CC3 stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area).

Further, among the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 255, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 255), the lower limit value is added. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 31, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 31). It becomes.

In addition, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B and the rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display on the performance display device 42 (reach patterns such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc.) are matched by a fluctuation pattern table. If the fluctuation time of the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the effect display device 42 is also determined.

For example, the variation time may be determined based on the first variation type counter CS1, and the stop display mode in the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B may be determined based on the second variation type counter CS2. For example, when corresponding to "15R jackpot", one of the stop display modes corresponding to "15R jackpot" is determined. Note that the counters and the like used to determine the fluctuation time and fluctuation pattern are not limited to the above configuration, and can be changed as appropriate for each model.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. In this embodiment, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB. The values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the special fluctuation reservation area of the RAM 503.

In this way, by acquiring the values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 at the timing of the start winning, the first variation time of the first variation display and the second variation of the second variation display that have been stored on hold can be stored. The time can be grasped (pre-read) before the fluctuation starts, and using this information, it is possible to perform various effects. In addition, if a configuration in which the variation time is predicted and the effect is performed is not required, the buffer values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the effect display device 42 determines the variation pattern at the time when the variation of the decorative pattern starts. It may also be a thing.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the random number counter CC1, the type determination counter CC2, the variation selection counter CC3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

Further, the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 29, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (ie, 29). The normal symbol random number counter CC4 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 is acquired when the game ball passes through the through gate 34.

When the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 that results in a winning is acquired, after the variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time (the normal symbol lamps constituting the normal symbol display device 41 blink alternately) (After), the display is stopped in a mode (lighting pattern) corresponding to the winning, and the second starting winning section 33WB is opened in a pattern corresponding to the game mode at that time.

In this embodiment, in the "low ball entry state", there are two winning random numbers, "0 and 1". On the other hand, in the "high ball entry state", the winning random number values are 28 from "0 to 27". In other words, in the "low ball entry state", the second starting winning part 33WB will be in the open state with a probability of 1/15, and in the "high ball entering state", the second starting winning part 33WB will be in the open state with a probability of 14/15. .

The ROM 502 is provided with a support determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 corresponds to winning. In this embodiment, a first support determination table corresponding to a "low ball entry state" and a second support determination table corresponding to a "high ball entry state" are set.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec. First, in step SC301, a process of reading various winning switches is executed. That is, it reads the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261, determines the states of the switches, and stores detection information (winning detection information). On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process directly moves to the next process.

In addition, when there is detection information of various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and a prize ball is awarded based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out). ). Furthermore, upon outputting this prize ball command, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step SC302, random number initial value updating processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SC303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the win/fail random number counter CC1, type determination counter CC2, variation selection counter CC3, and normal symbol random number counter CC4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the maximum value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter CC1, CC2, CC3, CC4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

After that, in step SC304, a starting winning process is executed when the game ball enters the first starting winning part 33WA or the second starting winning part 33WB (winning), and in step SC305, the starting winning process is executed when the gaming ball enters the through gate 34. Execute the through gate passage processing associated with passage. In the following step SC306, a firing permission command setting process is performed to perform processing such as transmitting a firing permission signal to the firing control circuit 312 of the power supply/launch control device 310. Furthermore, in step SC307, a remaining ball monitoring process is performed to check whether or not game balls remain in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily ended.

Here, the starting winning process in step SC304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 127. In addition, the RAM 503 includes a first holding counter Na that counts the number of holds in the first variable display triggered by the entry of a ball into the first starting winning part 33WA, and a first holding counter Na that counts the number of holdings in the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the first starting winning part 33WB. A second suspension counter Nb is provided to count the number of suspensions in the second variable display.

In addition, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a win/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, a winning type random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter CC2, and a win/fail random number storage area that stores the value of the type determination counter CC2. A reach random number storage area that stores the value, a first fluctuation type random number storage area that stores the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1, a second fluctuation type random number storage area that stores the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, and a fluctuation type random number storage area that stores the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2. Various storage areas are provided, including a mode storage area for storing game mode information for specifying the game mode at the start of display.

First, in step SC501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the second starting winning section 33WB based on the detection information of the second starting winning switch 224b. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC501, it is determined in step SC502 whether or not the value of the second holding counter Nb, which is the first counting function section, is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step SC501 or SC502, the process moves to step SC510. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC502, the process proceeds to step SC503, where the second hold counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step SC504, an addition display process is performed on the second reservation display device 46B (second reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of reservations in the second variable display increases by one. That is, when the second hold lamp is in the off state, processing is performed to turn it on.

After step SC504, in the process of step SC505 which is an information setting function section, each value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, type determination counter CC2, fluctuation selection counter CC3, and fluctuation type counters CS1, CS2 (win/fail random number counter buffer, type The values stored in the decision counter buffer, fluctuation selection counter buffer, and each fluctuation type counter buffer) are stored in the first reservation area (win/fail random number storage area, The winning type random number storage area, the reach random number storage area, and the first and second fluctuation type random number storage areas). At the same time, the game mode when this second variable display is started is specified, and the game mode information is stored in the mode storage area. After step SC505, the process moves to step SC506.

In step SC506, a second win/fail determination is made to determine whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to various wins (big win, small win, time-saving win). Perform processing.

Here, details of the second validity determination process in step SC506 will be explained with reference to FIG. 128(b).

First, in step SC5111, with reference to the second win/fail judgment table corresponding to the gaming mode, the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is set to "7", which corresponds to a jackpot. It is determined whether it matches either "207" or "407". When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5111, in step SC5112, the jackpot schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special fluctuation reservation areas is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC5111, in step SC5113, the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined with reference to the second win/fail determination table corresponding to the gaming mode. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "9 to 50, 409 to 450" corresponding to a small win. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5113, in step SC5114, the small winning schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special fluctuation reservation areas is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5113, a time saving appropriateness determination process is executed in step SC5115, and then this process is ended.

Here, the details of the time saving propriety determination process in step SC5115 will be explained with reference to FIG. 128(c).

First, in step SC5121, it is determined whether the variation information newly stored in the second special variation holding area is a variation display performed in the "normal mode". If a negative determination is made in step SC5121, the process is immediately terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC5121, that is, if the second variable display is performed in the "normal mode", the process moves to step SC5122.

In step SC5122, the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "30 time saving wins" with reference to the second win/fail determination table corresponding to the "normal mode". It is determined whether the value matches any of the values "211 to 230".

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5122, in step SC5123, the 30 time saving per plan flag of the corresponding holding area among the second special fluctuation holding areas is turned on, and then this process is ended.

If the determination in step SC5122 is negative, in step SC5124, the value of the random number counter CC1 is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area, with reference to the second validity determination table corresponding to the "normal mode". It is determined whether or not the value matches any one of the values "311 to 330" corresponding to "40 times saving time".

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5124, in step SC5125, the 40 time saving per plan flag of the corresponding holding area among the second special fluctuation holding areas is turned on, and then this process is ended.

If the determination in step SC5124 is negative, in step SC5126, the value of the random number counter CC1 is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area, with reference to the second validity determination table corresponding to the "normal mode". It is determined whether or not the value matches any one of the values "511 to 530" corresponding to "50 time reductions".

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5126, in step SC5127, the 50 time saving per schedule flag of the corresponding holding area among the second special fluctuation holding areas is turned on, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5126, the process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC507 following step SC506, if it is determined in step SC506 that the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area. A second type determination process is performed to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the type determination counter CC2.

Here, the second type determination process in step SC507 will be explained with reference to FIG. 129(b). In the second type determination process, first, in step SC5300, it is determined whether or not the jackpot schedule flag was set on in the second success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step SC5300, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC5300, in step SC5301, the value of the type determination counter CC2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be "15R jackpot" with reference to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value "0 to 7" corresponding to "." When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5301, in step SC5302, the 15R jackpot flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special fluctuation reservation areas is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC5301, in step SC5303, the value of the type determination counter CC2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be "8R jackpot" with reference to the second type determination table. It is determined whether the number is "8 to 17" corresponding to "." When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5303, in step SC5304, the 8R jackpot flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special fluctuation reservation areas is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5303, that is, if the value of the type determination counter CC2 is "18, 19", in step SC5305, a new second special After turning on the 4R jackpot flag of the corresponding reservation area among the second special fluctuation reservation areas stored in the fluctuation reservation area, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC508 following step SC507, a second fluctuation time determination process is performed to determine the second fluctuation time of the second fluctuation display. Here, if the gaming mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is the "normal mode", the second normal fluctuation time determination table for the "normal mode" is referred to, and the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is The second fluctuation time is grasped based on. If the gaming mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is "time saving A mode", refer to the second shortening fluctuation time determination table for "time saving A mode" and set the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Based on this, the second fluctuation time is grasped. In addition, if the gaming mode at the start of the second fluctuation display is the "time saving B mode", the second fluctuation fluctuation time determination table for the "time saving B mode" is referred to, and the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is set. The second fluctuation time is grasped based on the value. The fluctuation time grasped here is stored in the corresponding holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area. However, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 of the reservation area is not deleted here.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode", the second reduced variable time determination table for the "time saving A mode", and the second reduced variable time determination table for the "time saving B mode" are used. As shortening fluctuation time determination tables, tables for "big win", "small win", "time saving win", and "missing" tables are provided, respectively.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 is provided with a mode storage area that is referred to when determining the gaming mode. The mode storage area stores a value of "11" corresponding to "normal mode", "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode", and "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode".

Correspondingly, the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262 is also provided with a mode storage area that the sub-control device 262 refers to when determining the gaming mode. The game mode information set in the main control device 261 is output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SC201) every time the game mode is switched and set.

In step SC509 following step SC508, a process for setting the first command is performed. Note that this preceding command includes fluctuation information (information used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the second validity judgment process, the second type judgment process, and the second variation time judgment process. , information indicating whether the fluctuation information is triggered by the entry of the ball into either the first starting winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB, and gaming mode information for specifying the gaming mode at the start of the second variable display. etc., and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SC201).

After the process of step SC509, or if a negative determination is made in step SC501 or step SC502, in step SC510, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the first starting winning section 33WA. The determination is made based on the detection information of 224a. If a negative determination is made at step SC510, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC510, in step SC511, the first counting function part which is the second counting function part counts the number of reservations in the first variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting winning part 33WA. It is determined whether the value of the hold counter Na is less than the upper limit value ("4" in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step SC511, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC511, the process proceeds to step SC512, where the first suspension counter Na is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step SC513, an addition display process is performed on the first reservation display device 46A (first reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of reservations in the first variable display, which is numerical information (specific numerical information), has increased by one. In other words, if both the left and right first holding lamps are off, the left first holding lamp is turned on, the left first holding lamp is on, and the right first holding lamp is off. If so, both the left and right first holding lamps are turned on, and if both the left and right first holding lamps are lit, the left first holding lamp is turned on while the right side first holding lamp is lit. If the first hold lamp on the left side is in a blinking state and the first hold lamp on the right side is in a lit state, processing is performed to make both the left and right first hold lamps blink.

After step SC513, in the process of step SC514, which is an information setting function section, each value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, type determination counter CC2, fluctuation selection counter CC3, and fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 is set to the first special fluctuation hold. It is stored in vacant holding areas (win/fail random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area, and first and second fluctuation type random number storage areas). At the same time, based on the current values of the number of fluctuation counters A, B, etc., the game mode when this first fluctuation display is started is specified, and the game mode information is stored in the mode storage area. After step SC514, the process moves to step SC515.

In step SC515, a first win/fail determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot.

Here, details of the first validity determination process in step SC515 will be described with reference to FIG. 128(a).

First, in step SC5101, with reference to the first win/fail determination table, the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is changed to the values "7", "207", " 407''. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC5101, in step SC5102, the jackpot schedule flag of the corresponding reservation area among the first special fluctuation reservation areas is turned on, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5101, the process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC516 following step SC515, if it is determined in step SC515 that the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value is newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area. A first type determination process is performed to determine the jackpot type based on the value of the type determination counter CC2.

Here, the first type determination process in step SC516 will be described with reference to FIG. 129(a). First, in step SC5201, it is determined whether or not the jackpot schedule flag was set on in the first success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If a negative determination is made in step SC5201, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC5201 is affirmative, in step SC5202, the value of the type determination counter CC2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is determined as "15R jackpot" with reference to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches the value "0" corresponding to . If an affirmative determination is made in step SC5202, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on in step SC5203, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5202, the 4R jackpot flag is turned on in step SC5204, and then the process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC517 following step SC516, if it is determined in step SC515 that the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot (missing), a new first special variation is added. Based on the value of the variation selection counter CC3 stored in the holding area, a reach determination process is performed to determine the type of reach.

Here, the reach determination process in step SC517 will be explained with reference to FIG. 130. First, in step SC5401, it is determined whether or not a jackpot schedule flag was set in the first success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC5401, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC5401, that is, if the result is a failure, then in step SC5402, the value of the fluctuation selection counter CC3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is set to " It is determined whether the value matches either the value "0 or 1" corresponding to "front/back off reach". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC5402, a front/rear flag indicating the occurrence of a front/back off reach is turned on in step SC5403, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC5402, in step SC5404, the value of the fluctuation selection counter CC3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "reach other than front and back" by taking into account the reach determination table. It is determined whether the value matches any of the values "2 to 21". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC5404, the flag other than before and after is turned on in step SC5405, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC5404, that is, if the variable display ends without passing through the ready-to-reach state, which is a "completely missed" state, the process is immediately ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 127, in step SC518 following step SC517, a first variation time determination process is performed to determine the first variation time of the first variation display. In other words, if the gaming mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is the "normal mode", the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is determined by referring to the first normal fluctuation time determination table for the "normal mode". The first fluctuation time is grasped based on. If the gaming mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is "time saving A mode", refer to the first shortening fluctuation time determination table for "time saving A mode" and set the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1. Based on this, the first fluctuation time is grasped. If the gaming mode at the start of the first fluctuation display is the "time saving B mode", the value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 is set with reference to the first shortening fluctuation time determination table for the "time saving B mode". Based on this, the first fluctuation time is grasped. The fluctuation time grasped here is stored in the corresponding reservation area of the first special fluctuation reservation area. However, the value of the first variation type counter CS1 of the reservation area is not deleted here.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first normal variable time determination table for the above-mentioned "normal mode", the first reduced variable time determination table for the "time saving A mode", and the first reduced variable time determination table for the "time saving B mode" are used. As shortening variation time determination tables, there are provided tables for "jackpot hit", "front/back off reach", "other than front/back off reach", and "complete miss" tables. For example, regarding the variable time determination table for "completely removed", "for 1 and 2 pending items (normal variable time)", "for 3 pending items (reduced variable time)", and "for 4 pending items". (Reduced Fluctuation Time)" is provided, and the fluctuation time determination table (variation time) to be referred to is changed according to the number of pending fluctuation displays stored in the first special fluctuation holding area. Good too. As a result, in a state where the first variable display that has been stored on hold is being executed sequentially, the first variable display for when it is off is displayed according to the number of first variable displays that are scheduled to be executed and stored on hold at that time. You can set a shortened time. Here, for example, in a situation where the variable time determination table for "4 pending items" is referred to when executing a predetermined variable display, if the variable display is a variable display corresponding to various wins such as a jackpot, , a configuration may be adopted in which priority is given to the "jackpot" variable time determination table.

After step SC518, in step SC519, a first command setting process is performed, and this process ends. Note that this first command includes fluctuation information (used to determine the contents of the fluctuation display) indicating the results of the first validity judgment process, the first type judgment process, the reach judgment process, and the first variation time judgment process. information), information indicating whether the fluctuating information is triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB, and identifying the gaming mode at the start of the first variable display. This includes game mode information, etc., and is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SC201).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start-up winning section 33WA or the second start-up winning section 33WB, the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1, etc. is directly stored in the special fluctuation holding area, and then the win/fail judgment is performed. Although the configuration is such that processing and the like are executed, the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, when obtaining the values of the random number counter CC1, etc., a temporary storage area is provided to temporarily store these counter values, and after performing a validity judgment process etc. on the information stored in the temporary storage area, A configuration may be adopted in which the information is stored in the holding area of the corresponding special fluctuation holding area.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SC305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 131.

In step SC601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. If a negative determination is made in step SC601, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step SC602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and if the value of the normal holding counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step SC603, where the normal holding counter is Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the following step SC604, an addition display process is performed on the normal holding display device 44 (normal holding lamp) corresponding to the increase in the holding number of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 by one. In other words, if a pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both off, the left normal hold lamp will be turned on, and if the left normal hold lamp is on and the right side normal hold lamp is off. When both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, if both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp blinks while the right side normal hold lamp remains lit, and the left normal hold lamp is turned on. If the lamps are blinking and the right normal hold lamp is lit, processing is performed to make both the left and right normal hold lamps blink.

After step SC604, in step SC605, a random number related to validity is obtained. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CC4 updated in the random number update process of step SC303 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended.

Next, the firing permission command setting process in step SC306 will be explained with reference to FIG. 132.

First, in step SC701, it is determined whether a launch permission flag indicating that a launch status signal is being received from the launch control circuit 312 is set on. Note that the firing state signal is transmitted to the firing control circuit 312 when the firing control circuit 312 receives a touch signal from the handle 18, a firing switch signal, and a CR unit connection signal from the dispensing control device 311. The information is transmitted from the main controller 261 to the main controller 261.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC701, it is determined in step SC702 whether or not a firing state signal is being received. If a negative determination is made in step SC702, the launch permission flag is turned off in step SC703, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC702, it is determined in step SC704 whether or not the value of a firing timer used to measure the firing interval of game balls is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC704, the value of the firing timer is subtracted by 1 in step SC707, and then the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC704 is affirmative, the main controller 261 transmits a launch permission signal to the launch control circuit 312 in step SC705. In the following step SC706, the launch permission flag is turned off. After step SC706, this process ends.

If the determination in step SC701 is negative, it is determined in step SC708 whether or not a firing state signal is being received. If a negative determination is made in step SC708, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step SC708 is affirmative, the firing permission flag is set to ON in step SC709.

In the following step SC710, a ball sending signal is transmitted to the launch control circuit 312. Furthermore, in step SC711, the firing timer is set to "300", which corresponds to 0.6 seconds. As a result, the game ball is reliably set at the firing position by the ball feeding device 63, and then the game ball is launched by the firing device 60, and the main controller 261 is controlled from the firing control circuit 312 to the firing state. While the signal continues to be received, a firing permission signal is transmitted from the main control device 261 at intervals of 0.6 seconds, and game balls are fired by the firing device 60 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. After step SC711, this process ends.

Note that when the firing control circuit 312 receives the firing permission signal from the main control device 261, it receives all of the touch signal, firing switch signal, and CR unit connection signal from the handle 18 and the dispensing control device 311. If the determination is affirmative, a firing process is performed to drive the firing device 60 (firing solenoid) and fire the game ball. Note that the firing control circuit 312 performs adjustment control of the firing device 60 regarding the firing strength (launching speed) of the game ball based on the dial position signal. Thereby, the game ball is ejected by the ejecting device 60 with adjusted strength.

Further, when the launch control circuit 312 receives a ball sending signal from the main controller 261, the game ball is set at the launch position of the launch rail 61 where the game ball is launched by the launch device 60. If it is confirmed that the game ball is not set at the launch position, the ball feeding device 63 is driven to set the game ball at the launch position. Perform ball feeding processing.

FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power to the Pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing, and in step SC401, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and starts the NMI interrupt processing. finish.

Note that the above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing. Its contents are as explained above.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 123. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SC101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Executes wait processing for about seconds. In the following step SC102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step SC103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply circuit 313 of the power supply/launch control device 310 is pressed down (ON), and if it is pressed down, the backup data is cleared (erased). In order to do so, the process moves to step SC112. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the following step SC104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it has not been set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step SC112 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SC105, and in subsequent step SC106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case as well, the process moves to step SC112.

In the process of step SC112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SC113, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SC113, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SC113, etc.). That is, in step SC113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step SC114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step SC111, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SC103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step SC107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step SC108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

In step SC109, a command is sent to return the sub-side control device to the gaming state at power-off. In step SC110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step SC111, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 124. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As a general outline, the process of steps SC201 to SC211 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update process of steps SC212 and SC213 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SC201, control signals based on the settings of the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B and the second starting winning section 33WB, etc. updated in the previous normal processing are sent to each device, and output data such as commands is sent to each device. Executes external output processing such as sending data to each sub-side control device.

For example, when starting the variable display on the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B, a variable pattern command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 in order to start the effect by the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42. The sub-control device 262 that has input the variable pattern command determines the display mode (variation time, effect pattern, etc.) of the effect display device 42 based on the various commands, and causes the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42. An instruction is issued to the display control device 45.

The variation pattern command includes information for specifying variation patterns of decorative patterns such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation patterns of decorative symbols in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 determines the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, etc. based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, audio, etc.

Here, the variation pattern of decorative patterns will be explained. "Normal reach" is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. "Super Reach" is a reach pattern in which characters, etc. are displayed on the effect display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. It is. "Premium reach" is a performance mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to decorative symbols, characters with patterns different from those of super reach, etc. This is a reach pattern that creates a sense of anticipation in the player. In addition, "completely missed" is a variation pattern in which the variation display of decorative symbols is stopped without reaching any reach state.

Further, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) for the fluctuating display of decorative symbols on the performance display device 42 based on the fluctuating pattern included in the fluctuating pattern command and the fluctuating time information. , the display will stop after the variable time has elapsed. In other words, if you win a jackpot ("15R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "4R jackpot"), the combination of decorative symbols consisting of the same numbers 1 to 9 (the combination of jackpot symbols) ), the fluctuating display will stop displaying.

The combination of the front and back off symbols corresponds to the "front and back off reach" in which after the reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops. The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to "reach other than front and back off" in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs. The combination of complete miss symbols corresponds to a "complete miss" in which even reach does not occur.

In addition, in the main control device 261, a symbol command is set that specifies any of the following: a combination of jackpot symbols, a combination of symbols that are out of the front and back, a combination of symbols other than the out of the front and back, and a combination of symbols that are completely out of order. It may be configured such that it is output to the sub-control device 262 together with the pattern command.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 124, in step SC202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (255, 31 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step SC203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SC204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Thereafter, in step SC205, a second special display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the second special symbol display device 43B is performed, as well as determination of various wins (big win, small win, time-saving win), and setting of variable display on the second special symbol display device 43B and effect display device 42. etc. will be carried out. Details of this second special display control process will be described later.

Furthermore, in step SC206, a first special display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the first special symbol display device 43A is performed, as well as jackpot determination and variable display on the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 (variation pattern of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42). Settings etc. are performed. Details of this first special display control process will be described later.

In step SC207, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, control regarding the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B is performed. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step SC208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control regarding the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

In step SC209, starting winning section control processing is executed. In this process, control is performed regarding the second starting winning part 33WB, which includes the blade member 33WBb that opens and closes. The details of this starting winning section control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step SC210, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SC211, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal process. ) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SC201, and the processes from step SC201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is executed repeatedly (step SC212, step SC213).

That is, in step SC212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SC213, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step SC202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (255 and 31 in this example), they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps SC201 to SC210 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, it is possible to randomly update the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the win/fail random number counter CC1), and similarly, the random number initial value counter CINI can be updated randomly. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated randomly.

Further, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SC210: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step SC214 onward is performed as power outage processing at the time of power-off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SC214, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step SC215, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step SC216. to be memorized.

Thereafter, in step SC217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step SC218, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step SC219, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step SC210 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps SC201 to SC209, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps SC212 and SC213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the appropriate timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step SC214), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the first special display control process in step SC206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 133.

First, in step SC800, it is determined whether the value of the variable interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the variable interval set after the first variable display on the first special symbol display device 43A is "0". .

If a negative determination is made in step SC800, that is, if it is within the period of the fluctuation interval, the value of the fluctuation interval timer is subtracted in step SC819, and then the process ends. In other words, for example, if the fluctuation interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the fluctuation interval timer is set to "249 ("250" if the configuration is such that step SC819 is performed before step SC800)", In this process, the value of the variable interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC800, that is, if it is not a variable interval, then in step SC801, the winning situation storage area, which will be described in detail later, is referred to, and the current state is other than the jackpot state or small win state. Determine whether it exists or not.

In addition, during the jackpot state, the period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped on the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B until the first variable winning device 32A is released is an opening period in between, a round period in which the first variable winning device 32A is in an open state, an interval period in which the first variable winning device 32A is in a closed state between round periods, and after the final round. , and an ending period until variable display can be started on the first special symbol display device 43A or the second special symbol display device 43B.

In addition, the small winning state includes a round period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in an open state, and an interval period in which the second variable winning device 32B is in a closed state between round periods. It will be done.

In the winning situation storage area of this embodiment, "0" is stored in states other than the jackpot state and small win state, and in the jackpot state, "1" is stored during the opening period and the interval period, and "1" is stored during the round period. "2" is stored at times, and "3" is stored during the ending period. In addition, in the small winning state, "4" is stored in the first round, "5" is stored in the interval period after the first round, and "6" is stored in the second round. That is, in step SC801, it is determined whether "0" is stored in the winning situation storage area, and it is determined whether the winning state is in a jackpot state or a small winning state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC801, that is, if the game is in a jackpot state or a small win state, the process is directly ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC801, it is determined in step SC802 whether or not the special figure 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variable display is being displayed on the second special symbol display device 43B is set on. Determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC802, the process is immediately terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step SC802, the process proceeds to step SC803, where the second holding counter Nb that counts the number of holdings in the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB is larger than 0. Determine whether or not.

If a negative determination is made in step SC803, it is determined in step SC804 whether or not the special symbol 1 display flag indicating that the first variable display is being displayed on the first special symbol display device 43A is set to on. do.

If a negative determination is made in step SC804, that is, if the jackpot state or small win state is not in progress, the first variation display is not in progress or the second variation display is not in progress, and no second variation display is stored in storage, step Proceeding to SC805, it is determined whether the first suspension counter Na, which counts the number of suspensions in the first variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the first starting winning section 33WA, is greater than zero.

In other words, if the second variable display is being displayed on the second special symbol display device 43B, or if even one second variable display is being stored, a new variable display will be displayed on the first special symbol display device 43A. It is configured such that a 1-variation display cannot be started.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC805, 1 is subtracted from the first pending counter Na in the process of step SC806, which serves as an update function section or a subtraction function section. In the following step SC807, processing for shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area.

After step SC807, in step SC808, subtraction display processing is performed on the first reservation display device 46A (first reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of reservations in the first variable display has decreased by one. In other words, if the left and right pair of first hold lamps are both blinking, the right first hold lamp is turned on while the left first hold lamp is blinking, and the left first hold lamp is blinking. When the first holding lamp on the right side is lit, both the left and right first holding lamps are lit, and when both the left and right first holding lamps are lit, the first holding lamp on the left side is turned on. Turn off the first holding lamp on the right side while leaving it on, and if the first holding lamp on the left side is on and the first holding lamp on the right side is off, turn off the first holding lamps on both the left and right sides. Perform the processing to make it happen. After step SC808, a first variable display setting process is performed in step SC809, and then this process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC805, in step SC811, both the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B are in a fluctuation standby state in which no fluctuation display is performed. A standby display setting (sub-control device After setting the standby display command to be output to H.262), this process ends.

In other words, the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B of the present embodiment maintain the stop mode (in a mode showing the result of the winning/fail lottery) during the variation interval after the variation is stopped. However, when the variation interval ends, the display mode is switched to a display mode that indicates the variation standby state.

In addition, the display modes indicating that the production display device 42 is in a variable standby state include a first standby display mode and a second standby display mode, and the sub-control device 262 that receives the standby display command firstly While the brightness of the effect display device 42 is maintained, the stop display mode of the fluctuating display of decorative symbols is maintained almost as it is. The standby time measurement timer may be configured to set a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds). Furthermore, when the value of the standby time measurement timer is subtracted every predetermined time and becomes "0", the brightness of the effect display device 42 is dimmed, and the display mode is also simplified (for example, a decorative pattern is displayed. The second standby display mode may be used.

Here, details of the first variable display setting process in step SC809 will be explained with reference to FIG. 134.

First, in step SC900, it is determined whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is "7", which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SC900, by determining whether or not the jackpot schedule flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on, it may be determined whether or not the first fluctuation display corresponds to a jackpot. good.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC900, it is determined in step SC901 whether or not "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored in the mode storage area.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC901, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on in the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area in step SC902, and then the process proceeds to step SC903.

When a negative determination is made in step SC901, the process moves to step SC904, and it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot flag has already been set on in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If the determination in step SC904 is affirmative, the process moves to step SC903.

In step SC903, 15R jackpot pattern setting processing is performed. The 15R jackpot pattern setting process is a process for causing the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 to execute a variable display and effect display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area (various patterns described later). The same applies to the setting process). Here, with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to the 15R jackpot, the variation pattern (variation display time, stop mode, production pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and production display device 42 is determined, and the variation pattern command Configure settings, etc.

Specifically, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process at step SC903 (the same applies to various pattern setting processes at steps SC905, SC907, SC909, and SC910 described later), first, the mode storage area is checked to understand the game mode. Here, if "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the first variable time determination table that is referred to when setting the first variable time corresponds to the pattern setting process. The first normal variable time determination table for the "normal mode" is selected. Further, if "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time saving A mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected. If "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored, the first shortened variable time determination table for "time saving B mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected.

Then, with reference to the selected first variable time determination table, the first variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable holding area. The determined first fluctuation time is stored in association with the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area.

Furthermore, a reach pattern is determined based on the first variation time and the variation pattern. For example, the first normal variable time determination table for jackpot is referred to, and if the first variable time is determined to be 22 seconds, normal reach is set, and if it is determined to be 30 seconds or 35 seconds, super reach is set. If set and determined to be 40 seconds, premium reach is set.

Then, various information including the first variable display, the 15R jackpot, the determined reach pattern, game mode information, variable time, etc. are set in the variable pattern command. In addition, in the 15R jackpot pattern setting process, the special figure 1 jackpot variation flag indicating that the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON.

Further, in this embodiment, the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 is determined on the main control device 261 side, but in order to reduce the burden on the main control device 261, the main control device 261 does not determine the reach pattern. In the fluctuation pattern command, information on whether it is the first fluctuation display or the second fluctuation display, information indicating the fluctuation pattern (15R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, small hit, front and back off reach, front and back off reach, The sub-control device 262 may determine the reach pattern of the effect display device 42 by including information that allows it to be determined whether the hit is a complete miss or not, information indicating a fluctuation time, and the like.

After step SC903, in step SC911, the special figure 1 displaying flag indicating that the first variable display is being displayed on the first special symbol display device 43A is set on, and in step SC912, the remaining time of the first variable display is measured. After setting a value corresponding to the first variable time to the special figure 1 display timer, this process is ended.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step SC904, a 4R jackpot pattern setting process is performed in step SC905. Here, with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to the 4R jackpot, the variation pattern (variation display time, stop mode, production pattern, etc.) of the first special symbol display device 43A and production display device 42 is determined, and the variation pattern command Configure settings, etc. In addition, in the 4R jackpot pattern setting process, the special figure 1 jackpot variation flag indicating that the first variation display corresponding to the jackpot is being performed is set to ON.

After step SC905, in step SC911, the special figure 1 displaying flag is set on, and in step SC912, a value corresponding to the first variable time is set for the special figure 1 display timer, and then this process is ended. .

Further, when a negative determination is made in step SC900, in step SC906, it is determined whether or not the preceding and following flags (see reach determination processing in FIG. 130) are on, taking into account the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC906, that is, in the case of "out-of-front reach", step SC907 performs front and rear reach pattern setting processing (setting of variable pattern commands, etc.), and then steps SC911 and SC912 are performed. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SC906, it is determined in step SC908 whether or not the flag other than the preceding and following flags is on, taking into account the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC908, that is, if it is a "reach other than front/back off", a reach pattern setting process other than front/back is performed at step SC909 (setting of a fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then step SC911 and step After passing through SC912, this process ends.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SC908, that is, if it is "completely off", then step SC910 performs off fluctuation pattern setting processing (setting of a fluctuation pattern command, etc.), and then steps SC911 and SC912 are performed. After that, this process ends.

In addition, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, although the first winning lottery (jackpot lottery) is performed to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, it will be a small winning. The configuration is such that the second lottery (small winning lottery) to determine whether or not it will be a win or the third lottery (a time-saving winning lottery) to determine whether or not it will be a time-saving win is not performed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 133, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC804, that is, if the first variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SC812, where the special figure 1 display timer is subtracted. Each time this process is performed, the value of the special figure 1 display timer is subtracted by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 6 seconds (6000 msec), "1500" is set for the special figure 1 display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SC813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed by taking into consideration the value of the special figure 1 display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure 1 display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SC813.

If a negative determination is made in step SC813, a switching display setting is performed in step SC818 to continue the switching display (fluctuating display) of the first special symbol display device 43A. In addition, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal process, a control signal to perform switching display is outputted to the first special symbol display device 43A. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the first special symbol display device 43A is realized at the timing of the first special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step SC818, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC813, the special figure 1 displaying flag is turned off in step SC814, and special figure 1 stop display setting is made to perform a stop display on the first special symbol display device 43A in step SC815. I do. Based on the setting contents of this special figure 1 stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the first special symbol display device 43A. That is, in the first special symbol display device 43A, modes corresponding to each jackpot type, loss, etc. set in the first variable display setting process are stopped and displayed.

Further, after step SC815, in step SC816, a special figure 1 stop command is set for the sub-control device 262 to cause the production display device 42 to stop display. Thereby, the synchronization of the stop timing of the first special symbol display device 43A and the effect display device 42 is ensured. However, since the stop mode of the effect display device 42 has already been determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the variation pattern command output at the start of the variable display, there is no need to add information regarding the stop mode of the effect display device 42 again. do not have. Also, as I repeat, the stop display by the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is the main display, and the display of decorative symbols by the performance display device 42 is only auxiliary (for performance).

Subsequently, in step SC817, a special figure 1 discrimination information setting process for initializing the winning state and switching the game mode is performed, and then this process ends.

Here, the special figure 1 discrimination information setting process in step SC817 will be explained with reference to FIG. 135.

First, in step SC1001, the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area is referred to, and it is determined whether the special symbol 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1001, the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SC1002, and in step SC1003, the jackpot flag (stored in the first special fluctuation reservation area) indicating that the jackpot is in the state is turned off. Turn on the special figure 1 jackpot flag (indicating that you hit the jackpot in the first variable display).

Furthermore, in step SC1004, the round number counter for determining the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of openings of the first variable prize winning device 32A) A value corresponding to the jackpot flag (“15” corresponding to a 15R jackpot or “4” corresponding to a 4R jackpot) is set.

In the following step SC1005, "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. Furthermore, in step SC1006, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, a value "2000" corresponding to the opening period of 8 seconds) is set for a special variable timer used for control during the winning state (opening/closing control of the first variable winning device 32A). ). Subsequently, in step SC1007, "8" indicating the maximum number of balls entered per round is input to the first winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32A. ”.

The value of the first winning counter is determined by the detection information of the big winning opening count switch 222 to determine whether or not a ball has entered the first variable winning device 32A during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 125). However, when it is determined that a ball has entered the first variable winning device 32A, 1 is subtracted.

Then, in step SC1008, an opening command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the start of the winning state, and the process ends. The opening command includes information on the winning type, etc., so that the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the total number of rounds in the winning state.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1001, a value corresponding to a variable interval (for example, 1 second) is set in the variable interval timer in step SC1013. In addition, in the effect display device 42, basically, the variable display of decorative symbols is stopped at the timing when the variable display of the special symbol display devices 43A and 43B is stopped, and until the variation interval ends (the next special symbol display device Until the variable display of 43A and 43B is started, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed continue to be displayed. Then, when the fluctuation interval ends and the fluctuation display is stored on hold, the fluctuation display on the special symbol display devices 43A, 43B and the fluctuation display on the performance display device 42 are started simultaneously. On the other hand, even if the variable interval ends, if the variable display is not stored on hold, the stop symbols on the effect display device 42 continue to be derived for a while, and then the display switches to a display for waiting for a game (demonstration screen display).

After step SC1013, in step SC1014, it is determined whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the "time saving A mode" is in progress.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1014, the value of the first variation counter A is subtracted by 1 in step SC1015. The first fluctuation number counter A is for measuring the duration of the "time saving A mode" (the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit).

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, after the end of all types of jackpots, the "time saving A mode" is provided for a period of one or seven fluctuation displays, so when the jackpot ends, the first fluctuation number counter "1" or "7" is set for A.

In the following step SC1016, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1016, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step SC1016 is affirmative, in step SC1017, "11" indicating the "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area. That is, at the time when the total number of executions of the first variable display and the second variable display performed in the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B becomes "1 time" or "7 times". The "time-saving mode A" ends and the mode shifts to the "normal mode."

After step SC1017, in step SC1018, a time-saving A mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving A mode"). The configuration may be such that the rush stage performance and battle stage performance are continuously executed during the period in which the "time saving A mode" is provided by the function of the sub-control device 262, which is the continuation function unit. After that, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1014, it is determined in step SC1019 whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the "time saving B mode" is in progress.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1019, the value of the second variation counter B is subtracted by 1 in step SC1020. The second fluctuation number counter B is for measuring the duration of the "time saving B mode" (the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a time-saving win occurs, the "time-saving B mode" is given for a period of "30 times", "40 times", or "50 times" in the variable display. At times, "30", "40", or "50" is set for the second variation counter B as specific numerical information. This function constitutes the information setting function section in this embodiment.

In the following step SC1021, it is determined whether the value of the second variation counter B is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1021, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1021, "11" indicating the "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1022. That is, the total number of executions of the first variable display and the second variable display performed in the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B is "30 times", "40 times", or "50 times". At this point, the "time-saving B mode" ends and the mode shifts to the "normal mode."

After step SC1022, in step SC1023, a time-saving B mode end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of transition to "normal mode" (end of "time-saving B mode"), and then this process ends. do.

Next, the second special display control process (step SC205) of the normal process (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. 136. In this embodiment, the second special symbol display device 43B is configured such that the fluctuation interval of the second fluctuation display is not set. Of course, a configuration may also be adopted in which a variable interval for the second variable display is set.

First, in step SC1601, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning situation storage area is "0", that is, whether the winning state is in a state other than the jackpot state or the small winning state. If a negative determination is made in step SC1601, that is, if the game is in a jackpot state or a small win state, the process is directly ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1601, it is determined in step SC1603 whether or not the special figure 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variable display is being displayed on the second special symbol display device 43B is set on. Determine.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1603, that is, if the jackpot or small win is not in progress, and if the second variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step SC1604, where the entry of the ball into the second starting winning section 33WB is the trigger. It is determined whether a second suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions in the second variable display is greater than zero. In other words, during the predetermined state until the value of the second hold counter Nb is subtracted and becomes "0", the display performance related to the second variable display will continue to be performed. If a negative determination is made in step SC1604, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1604, 1 is subtracted from the second pending counter Nb in the process of step SC1605, which serves as an update function section or a subtraction function section. In the following step SC1606, processing for shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the second special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area.

After step SC1606, in step SC1607, subtraction display processing is performed on the second reservation display device 46B (second reservation lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of reservations in the second variable display has decreased by one. That is, processing for turning off the second hold lamp is performed. After step SC1607, a second variable display setting process is performed in step SC1608, and then this process ends.

Here, details of the second variable display setting process in step SC1608 will be explained with reference to FIG. 137.

First, in step SC1701, it is determined whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is "7", which corresponds to a jackpot. In addition, in step SC1701, by determining whether or not the jackpot schedule flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on, it is also possible to determine whether or not the second fluctuation display corresponds to a jackpot. good.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1701, then in step SC1702, a special chart 2 jackpot variation flag indicating that a second variation display corresponding to a jackpot is being performed is set on. In the following step SC1703, it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot flag is set on in the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1703, a 15R jackpot pattern setting process is performed in step SC1704.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1703, it is determined in step SC1705 whether or not the 8R jackpot flag is set on. If a positive determination is made in step SC1705, an 8R jackpot pattern setting process is performed in step SC1706, and if a negative determination is made in step SC1705, a 4R jackpot pattern setting process is performed in step SC1707.

As in the case of the first variable display setting process, various pattern setting processes execute variable display and effect display corresponding to the variable information stored in the execution area in the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42. Here, the fluctuation patterns of the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42 (fluctuating display time, stop mode, effect pattern, etc.) are processed by referring to the variable pattern table corresponding to each type of winning. , and set the fluctuation pattern command.

That is, in each pattern setting process related to step SC1704, step SC1706, and step SC1707, "11 ” is stored, the second normal variable time determination table for the “normal mode” corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected. Further, if "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time saving A mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected. If "31" corresponding to "time-saving B mode" is stored, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time-saving B mode" corresponding to the pattern setting process is selected.

Subsequently, with reference to the selected second variable time determination table, the second variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable holding area. The determined second fluctuation time is stored in association with the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area.

Then, various information including the second variable display, jackpot type information, game mode information, variable time, etc. are set in the variable pattern command.

In this embodiment, the effect display device 42 does not perform a reach effect corresponding to the second variable display. However, as mentioned above, the value of the fluctuation selection counter CC3 is stored in each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area according to the winning history in the second starting winning part 33WB, so it corresponds to the first changing display. In the same manner as in the case where the above-mentioned example is shown in FIG. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether a reach effect or the like is to be executed or not based on a player's selection using an operating means.

After step SC1704, step SC1706, or step SC1707, in step SC1710, the special symbol 2 displaying flag indicating that the second variable display is in progress on the second special symbol display device 43B is set to ON, and in step SC1711, the special symbol 2 displaying flag is set on. After setting a value corresponding to the second variable time to the special figure 2 display timer that measures the remaining time of the 2-variable display, this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1701, it is determined in step SC1712 whether the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a small win. . In addition, in step SC1712, by determining whether or not the small hit schedule flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on, it is determined whether or not the second fluctuation display corresponds to a small win. You can also use it as

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1712, then in step SC1713, a small win fluctuation flag indicating that a second fluctuation display corresponding to a small win is being performed is set on. Then, in the following step SC1709, after performing a small winning pattern setting process (setting of a fluctuation pattern command, etc.), this process is ended through steps SC1710 and step SC1711.In the small winning pattern setting process, the second fluctuation time If "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variable time determination table referred to during setting, the "normal mode" table corresponding to the small winning pattern setting process is stored. The second normal variable time determination table is selected. In addition, when "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time saving A mode" corresponding to the small winning pattern setting process is stored. selected. If "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second shortened variable time determination table for "time saving B mode" corresponding to the small winning pattern setting process is selected. Ru.

Then, with reference to the selected second variable time determination table, the second variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable holding area. The determined second fluctuation time is stored in association with the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area. Furthermore, information including the second variable display, the variable pattern (small win), game mode information, and variable time is set in the variable pattern command.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step SC1712, it is determined in step SC1717 whether or not the value of the win/fail random number counter CC1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to the time saving win. . In addition, in step SC1717, it is determined whether or not the time-saving winning schedule flag in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is set to on, thereby determining whether or not the second variation display corresponds to the time-saving winning. You can also use it as

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1717, in step SC1718, a time-saving win fluctuation flag indicating that a second fluctuation display corresponding to a time-saving win is being performed is set to ON. Then, in the subsequent step SC1719, a time saving per pattern setting process (setting of variable pattern commands, etc.) is performed, and then this process is completed through steps SC1710 and step SC1711.

In the time saving per pattern setting process, if "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is stored in the mode storage area as the second variable time determination table that is referred to when setting the second variable time, the time saving pattern is set. A second normal variable time determination table for "normal mode" corresponding to the winning pattern setting process is selected. In addition, when "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second reduction variable time determination table for "time saving A mode" corresponding to the time saving per pattern setting process is stored. selected. If "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is stored in the mode storage area, the second reduction variable time determination table for "time saving B mode" corresponding to the time saving per pattern setting process is selected. Ru.

Then, with reference to the selected second variable time determination table, the second variable time is determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1 stored in the execution area of the special variable holding area. The determined second fluctuation time is stored in association with the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area. Further, information including the second variable display, the variable pattern (time saving win), game mode information, and variable time is set in the variable pattern command.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 136, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1603, that is, if the second variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SC1609, where the special figure 2 display timer is subtracted.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SC1610, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the special figure 2 display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure 2 display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SC1610.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1610, a switching display setting is performed in step SC1615 to continue the switching display (second variable display) of the second special symbol display device 43B. In addition, based on the settings of the switching display settings, in the external output processing in the next normal process, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the second special symbol display device 43B. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the second special symbol display device 43B is realized at the timing of the second special display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step SC1615, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1610, the special figure 2 displaying flag is turned off in step SC1611, and in step SC1612, special figure 2 stop display setting is made to perform a stop display on the second special symbol display device 43B. I do. Based on the setting contents of this special figure 2 stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the second special symbol display device 43B. That is, in the second special symbol display device 43B, modes corresponding to various jackpots, small wins, various time-saving hits, misses, etc. set in the second variable display setting process are stopped and displayed.

Further, after step SC1612, in step SC1613, a special figure 2 stop command is set for the sub-control device 262 to cause the effect display device 42 to stop display. Thereby, synchronization of the stop timings of the second special symbol display device 43B and the effect display device 42 is ensured.

Subsequently, in step SC1614, a special figure 2 discrimination information setting process is performed to initialize the winning state and change the game mode, and then this process ends.

Here, the special figure 2 discrimination information setting process of step SC1614 will be explained with reference to FIG. 138. First, in step SC1801, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether the small winning fluctuation flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1801, the small win fluctuation flag is turned off in step SC1802, and the small win medium flag indicating that the small win is in the state is turned on in step SC1803. Furthermore, in step SC1804, "2" is set in a round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the small winning state (number of times the second variable winning device 32B is opened).

In the following step SC1805, "4" is set in the winning situation storage area, indicating that the first round of a small winning state is in progress. Further, in step SC1806, it is determined whether the value stored in the mode storage area is "21". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1806, that is, in the case of the "time saving A mode" (in the case of high ball entry state), in step SC1807, control during the winning state (opening/closing control of variable winning devices 32A, 32B) ) is set to a value "400" corresponding to an open period of 1.6 seconds. On the other hand, if the determination at step SC1806 is negative (if the ball is in a low ball entry state), then at step SC1808, a value "25" corresponding to an open time of 0.1 seconds is set for the special variable timer.

After step SC1807 or step SC1808, in step SC1809, the second winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 32B is set to 4, which is the maximum number of balls entered per round. Set “4” to indicate the number of items.

The value of the second winning counter is determined by determining whether or not a ball has entered the second variable winning device 32B based on the detection information of the ball entering count switch 223a during the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 125). , 1 is subtracted when it is determined that a ball has entered the second variable winning device 32B.

In the following step SC1810, a second opening process is performed to open the second variable winning device 32B.

Furthermore, in step SC1811, a process of subtracting the variation counter is performed. In this embodiment, since there is no change in the game mode just by winning a small win, if the "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode" is set, the change in the small win will be changed by this subtraction process. Even when the display ends, processing is performed to reduce the remaining number of continuations of "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode" by one.

It should be noted that this process of subtracting the number of fluctuations counter is configured so that it is not performed and is skipped when the current gaming mode is the "normal mode" (when "11" is stored in the mode storage area). There is.

In other words, in this process of subtracting the number of fluctuations counter, first check whether "21" or "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the current gaming mode is "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode". Only when the determination is affirmative, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the variation counter (first variation counter A or second variation counter B) is executed.

In the following step SC1812, a small win start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 of the start of a small win state. After that, this process ends. This small hit start command includes various information regarding the small win (for example, the type of jackpot when the V jackpot state occurs), etc., and the sub-control device 262 can also grasp the progress status of the small win state. There is.

When a negative determination is made in step SC1801, the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area is referred to in step SC1813, and it is determined whether the special chart 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1813, the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is turned off in step SC1814, and in step SC1815, the jackpot flag (stored in the second special fluctuation holding area) indicating that the jackpot is in the state is turned off. Turn on the special figure 2 jackpot flag (indicating that you hit the jackpot in the second variable display).

In the subsequent step SC1816, a process for determining the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the first variable winning device 32A is opened) is performed by referring to various jackpot flags set in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. Set values corresponding to various jackpots in the round number counter.

For example, when the 15R jackpot flag is set on, the round number counter is set to "15". If the 8R jackpot flag is set on, the round number counter is set to "8". When the 4R jackpot flag is set on, "4" is set in the round number counter.

Thereafter, in step SC1817, "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. Furthermore, in step SC1818, a value "2000" corresponding to an opening period of 8 seconds, for example, is set in the special variable timer. Subsequently, in step SC1819, "8" is set for the first winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 32A. Then, in step SC1820, an opening command is set, and the process ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SC1813, in step SC1821, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the time saving per fluctuation flag is set on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1821, the time saving per change flag is turned off in step SC1822, and a value "31" corresponding to "time saving B mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1823. As a result, the gaming mode is internally switched from the "normal mode" to the "time saving B mode".

In the following step SC1824, a value corresponding to the won time-saving winning type is set for the second fluctuation number counter B used to measure the duration of the "time-saving B mode" (remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit). .

In detail, if you take into account the various time-saving winning schedule flags set in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and win the "30 time-saving winnings", the value of the second fluctuation number counter B will be set to "30". If you win the "40 time saving win", set the value of the second variation counter B to "40", and if you win the "50 time saving win", set the value of the second variation counter B to "40". Set the value of B to "50".

After that, this process ends. In this embodiment, the configuration is such that, at this stage, no command or the like to generate the "time-saving B mode" is sent to the sub-control device 262. In other words, at this stage, the effect display device 42 or the like is configured to have a configuration in which it is difficult for the player to recognize that the "time saving B mode" has been provided without performing any effect related to the "time saving B mode".

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1821, it is determined in step SC1827 whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the current gaming mode is "time saving A mode". do.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1827, in step SC1828, the value of the first fluctuation number counter A used to measure the duration of the "time saving A mode" (remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit) is subtracted by 1. do.

Note that the first variation counter A in this embodiment also measures the remaining execution period of the second variation display (remaining pending consumption period, maximum 4 times) that is stored on hold at the end of the "time saving A mode". used.

In the following step SC1829, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1829, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1829, "11" indicating the "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1830. That is, when the total number of executions of the first variable display and the second variable display performed on the first special symbol display device 43A and the second special symbol display device 43B becomes "1 time" or "7 times" The "time saving mode A" ends and the mode shifts to the "normal mode".

After step SC1830, in step SC1831, it is determined whether the value of the second suspension counter Nb is greater than "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the second variable display is held and stored in the second special change holding area.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1831, that is, if the second fluctuation display is not held in the second special fluctuation holding area, in step SC1832, the sub-control device 262 is instructed to shift to the "normal mode" (" After setting the "time saving A mode" end command to notify the end of "time saving A mode", this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1831, that is, if the second variation display is pending in the second special variation pending area, the process moves to step SC1833, and the current 2. Set the value of the hold counter Nb (the number of holds of the second variable display stored in the current second special change hold area, 4 at the maximum). As a result, a period (number of variable display times) during which the "continuation chance stage performance" is continuously performed is set.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the "continuation chance stage performance" corresponds to the "specific performance", and the function of the sub-control device 262 that executes the "continuation chance stage performance" constitutes a "performance execution function section". In addition, in this embodiment, the remaining pending consumption period until the value of the first fluctuation number counter A is subtracted and becomes the specific value "0" corresponds to "in a predetermined state", and during this period, the "continuation chance" The function of the sub-control device 262 that continuously executes the "stage performance" constitutes a "continuation function section."

In the following step SC1834, the production start setting process related to the "continuation chance stage production" is performed (for example, setting a production start command for causing the sub-control device 262 to execute the "continuation chance stage production"), and then the main processing is performed. Finish the process.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1827, it is determined in step SC1835 whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the current gaming mode is "time saving B mode". do.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1835, the value of the second variation counter B is subtracted by 1 in step SC1836 (after the duration of the time-saving B mode is internally updated), and then the process moves to step SC1837. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1835, the process directly proceeds to step SC1837. In this embodiment, the processing function for subtracting the second variation counter B constitutes an "update function section".

In step SC1837, regardless of whether the value of the first variation counter A is greater than 0, that is, whether the current gaming mode is the "normal mode" or the "time saving B mode", the "continuation chance stage production" is executed. ” is inside. If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1837, the value of the first variation counter A is subtracted by 1 in step SC1838, and then the process moves to step SC1839.

In step SC1839, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1839, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1839, that is, if it is the end timing of the "continuation chance stage performance", the performance end setting process related to the "continuation chance stage performance" (for example, the sub-control device 262 After setting a performance end command to end the chance stage performance, etc.), this process ends.

In this embodiment, the first variation counter A and various functions related thereto constitute a first counting function section, and the second variation counter B and various functions related thereto constitute a second counting function section.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the end of the second variable display of the second special symbol display device 43B corresponds to the establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition, and the subtraction function section is configured by the processing function of subtracting the first variation counter A. Ru.

Next, the variable winning device control process in step SC207 for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 139.

First, in step SC1201, it is determined whether the value set in the winning status storage area is "0" or not, thereby determining whether the game is in a state other than the winning state. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1201, that is, if there is no winning state, the process is immediately terminated. By the way, at the start of the jackpot state or the small win state, "1" or "4" is set in the winning situation storage area in the above-mentioned special figure 1 discrimination information setting process and special figure 2 discrimination information setting process. There is.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1201, that is, if the winning state is in progress (if any of "1" to "6" is set in the winning status storage area), the process moves to step SC1202, Subtract 1 from the value of the special variable timer. In the following step SC1203, it is determined whether the value of the special variable timer is "0". When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1203, it is determined in step SC1204 whether or not "1" is set in the winning situation storage area.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1204, "2" is set in the winning situation storage area in step SC1205. In the following step SC1206, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the first variable winning device 32A in the open state is set in the special variable timer.

After step SC1206, in step SC1207, a first opening process is performed to open the first variable winning device 32A, and in step SC1208, a round command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to convey information to the effect that a round is to be started. Set. After that, this process ends.

If the determination in step SC1204 is negative, it is determined in step SC1209 whether "5" is set in the winning situation storage area. In this embodiment, "5" is set in the winning situation storage area during the interval period between the first round in the small winning state and the second round.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1209, it is determined in step SC1210 whether or not "3" is set in the winning situation storage area. As will be described in detail later, when all rounds in the jackpot state end and the ending period begins, "3" will be set in the winning situation storage area. If a negative determination is made in step SC1210, that is, if it is not yet time to end the jackpot state, it is determined in step SC1211 whether or not "6" is set in the winning situation storage area. In this embodiment, "6" is set in the winning situation storage area in the second round of the small winning state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1211, the value of the round number counter is subtracted by 1 in step SC1212. In the following step SC1213, it is determined whether the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1213, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, it is determined in step SC1214 whether "4" is set in the winning situation storage area. In this embodiment, "4" is set in the winning situation storage area in the first round of the small winning state.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1214, that is, if "2" is set in the winning situation storage area, the process moves to step SC1215, and "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. Thereafter, in step SC1216, a value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer.

In the following step SC1217, "8" is set for the first winning counter. Further, in step SC1218, a first closing process is performed to close the first variable winning device 32A, and in step SC1219, an interval command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start an interval. After that, this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1214, that is, if the first round in the small winning state has ended, "5" is set in the winning situation storage area in step SC1220. Thereafter, in step SC1221, a value "25" corresponding to the interval time (0.1 seconds) is set for the special variable timer.

In the following step SC1222, "4" is set for the second winning counter. Furthermore, in step SC1223, a second closing process is performed to close the second variable winning device 32B, and then this process ends.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SC1203, that is, if there is still time (open time or closed time) for maintaining the open state or closed state of the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B, , the process moves to step SC1224, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entry section 320c provided in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B. Although details will be described later, in this process, a specific winning flag that is set to ON when detection is performed by the specific ball entering detection switch 223b that detects a game ball entering the specific ball entering section 320c is set to ON. By determining whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entry section 320c, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the specific ball entry section 320c.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1224, in step SC1225, the winning counters corresponding to the variable winning devices 32A and 32B in the current winning state (the first winning counter if in the jackpot state, or the first winning counter if in the small winning state) In this case, it is determined whether the value of the second prize winning counter) is "0" or not. As mentioned above, each winning counter has an upper limit for the number of winnings per round (the specified number of ``8'' or ``4'') at the start of the winning state or the start of the interval. Set. Then, each time one game ball enters the variable winning device 32A, 32B, 1 is subtracted.

If a negative determination is made in step SC1225, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1225, that is, if the opportunity to end the round comes before the set period of the round has elapsed, the process moves to step SC1211. As a result, if the game balls enter the first variable winning device 32A or the second variable winning device 32B up to the upper limit (8 or 4 balls) during one round, the upper limit of the opening period (30 Even if the time period (1.6 seconds, 1.6 seconds, or 0.1 seconds) has not elapsed, the round ends immediately at that point.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1224, that is, in a small winning state, when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section 320c and a V winning jackpot occurs, a jackpot is determined in step SC1226. After performing specific winning processing to continue the state, this processing ends. The details of the specific winning process will be described later.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1213, that is, if all rounds in the jackpot state have been played, the process moves to step SC1227, and "3" is set in the winning situation storage area. Thereafter, in step SC1228, a value "2500" corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer.

After step SC1228, in step SC1229, "7" is set for the first winning counter. In addition, when the process of setting the ending after step SC1227 is performed after the affirmative determination is made in step SC1225, the value of the first prize winning counter is "0". If the value of the first winning counter is set to "0" at the start of the ending period, in the variable winning device control process after 4 msec, an affirmative determination will suddenly be made in step SC1225, making it impossible to complete the ending period. Can not. Therefore, by entering a temporary value other than "0" ("7" in this example) into the first prize winning counter in step SC1229, the ending period is made to complete. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step SC1229, in step SC1230, a first closing process is performed to close the first variable prize winning device 32A, and in subsequent step SC1231, an ending command is issued to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start the ending. Set. After that, this process ends.

Further, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC1210, that is, when the ending period has ended and the time has come to end the jackpot state, the process moves to step SC1232 and an end setting process is performed.

Here, the termination setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 141. First, in step SC1401, it is determined whether or not a jackpot flag (any of the special chart 1 jackpot flag, special chart 2 jackpot flag, or V winning jackpot flag to be described later) is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1401, a value "21" corresponding to "time saving A mode" is stored in the mode storage area in step SC1403. As a result, the "time saving A mode" will be provided after the jackpot state ends.

In the subsequent step SC1404, a time-saving A mode start command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 that the "time-saving A mode" is to be started (transition to "rush stage performance" or "battle stage performance"). The configuration may be such that a rush stage performance or a battle stage performance is executed as a specific performance by the performance execution processing of the sub-control device 262 as a performance execution function unit. After step SC1404, in step SC1407, the jackpot flag (any of the special chart 1 jackpot flag, special chart 2 jackpot flag, or V prize jackpot flag) that is set on is turned off.

In the following step SC1408, a value "0" indicating a state other than a winning state is set in the winning state storage area. Furthermore, in step SC1409, a jackpot end command is set to notify the sub-control device 262 that the jackpot state has ended. After that, in step SC1410, the first variation counter A is set to a variation number value of "1" or "7", which is the upper limit of the "time saving A mode" corresponding to the jackpot type, and then this process is terminated. do.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1401, that is, if it is a small winning state, in step SC1411, a ball entry counter that counts the number of game balls existing in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B is set. , and determines whether or not the number of game balls present in the internal area 320a is "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1411, the small winning flag is turned off in step SC1412, "0" is set in the winning situation storage area in step SC1413, and "0" is set in the winning situation storage area in step SC1414. Set a small win end command to notify the end of the small win state.

Thereafter, in step SC1415, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0". In addition, the duration of the "time saving A mode" is until the first variable display and the second variable display are performed "1 time" or "7 times" in total, or until a jackpot condition occurs. , when the second fluctuation display corresponding to the small win ends and the small win starts, the value of the first fluctuation number counter A is decremented by 1 (see step SC1811). In step SC1415, it is determined whether the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the "time saving A mode" has been reached ("1 time" or "7 times" has ended).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1415, a value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1416, and a time saving A mode end command is set in step SC1417. This process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1415, it is determined in step SC1420 whether or not the value of the second variation counter B is "0". In addition, the duration of "Time Saving B Mode" is until the first variable display and the second variable display are performed "30", "40" or "50 times" in total, or until a jackpot condition occurs. Therefore, when the second fluctuation display corresponding to the small win ends and the small win starts, the value of the second fluctuation number counter B is decremented by 1 (see step SC1811). In step SC1420, it is determined whether the upper limit of the number of fluctuations in the "time saving B mode" has been reached ("30", "40" or "50" has ended).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1420, a value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1421, and a time-saving B mode end command is set in step SC1422. This process ends.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SC1411, in step SC1418, the remaining ball monitoring flag is set to ON to continue monitoring the game balls in the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B, and then the main processing end. In other words, if there are game balls remaining in the internal area 320a, the small winning state is configured not to end even when the small winning state (second round) ends.

Here, the remaining ball monitoring process (step SC307) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 125) will be described with reference to FIG. 142.

First, in step SC1301, whether or not a game ball has entered the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B is detected by the ball entering count switch 223a installed near the ball entry opening 320b of the internal area 320a. Make informed decisions. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1301, in step SC1302, 1 is added to the value of an entry ball counter that counts the number of game balls present in the internal area 320a.

In the following step SC1303, the monitoring timer used for the remaining ball monitoring process is set to a predetermined time period that is enough to make it obvious that the game ball detected by the entering ball count switch 223a has been ejected from the internal area 320a. Set the value corresponding to . In this embodiment, the game ball that enters the internal area 320a is configured so that it does not take more than 2 seconds to be ejected from the internal area 320a unless there is a problem, and in step SC1303, the monitoring timer is "750" corresponding to seconds is set.

After step SC1303, or if a negative determination is made in step SC1301, in step SC1304, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific ball entry section 320c based on the detection information of the specific ball entry detection switch 223b. to determine. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1304, a specific winning flag is set on in step SC1305. In the following step SC1306, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1.

After step SC1306, or if a negative determination is made in step SC1304, in step SC1307, whether or not a game ball has entered the non-specific ball entry section 320d is determined based on the detection information of the non-specific ball entry detection switch 223c. Determine based on. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC1307, the value of the ball entry counter is subtracted by 1 in step SC1308.

After step SC1308, or if a negative determination is made in step SC1307, it is determined in step SC1309 whether or not the value of the ball entry counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1309, it is determined in step SC1310 whether or not the value of the monitoring timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC1310, the value of the monitoring timer is subtracted by 1 in step SC1311, and then the process is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1310, that is, even if all the game balls are supposed to have been ejected from the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B, there are still game balls remaining. If it is determined, error processing is performed in step SC1312 (for example, turning on the error display lamp 104, displaying an error on the data lamp, notifying the hall computer, etc.), and then the process ends.

If the determination in step SC1309 is affirmative, it is determined in step SC1313 whether or not a remaining ball monitoring flag, which may be set when ending the small winning state, is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step SC1313, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step SC1313 is affirmative, the remaining ball monitoring flag is turned off in step SC1314. In the following step SC1315, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag (V winning jackpot flag) is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1315, that is, if a game ball enters the specific ball entering section 320c in a small winning state and a V winning jackpot has occurred, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1315, since the process to end the small winning state has not been performed yet, the small winning flag is turned off in step SC1316, and the winning situation storage area is stored in step SC1317. "0" is stored, and a small winning end command is set in step SC1318.

Thereafter, in step SC1319, it is determined whether the value of the first variation counter A is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1319, a value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1320, and a time-saving A mode end command is set in step SC1321. This process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1319, it is determined in step SC1325 whether or not the value of the second variation counter B is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1325, a value "11" corresponding to "normal mode" is set in the mode storage area in step SC1326, and a time-saving B mode end command is set in step SC1327. This process ends. Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC1325, the process is directly terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the variable winning device control process in FIG. 139, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1209, that is, if the interval period after the end of the first round in the small winning state has ended, in step SC1233, the winning situation is stored. A value "6" corresponding to the second round of the small winning state is set for the area, and in step SC1234, a value corresponding to the open time of the second variable winning device 32B is set for the special variable timer. Here, if the game mode is "time saving A mode", set the value "400" corresponding to the opening time "1.6 seconds", and if the game mode is "normal mode" or "time saving B mode" In this case, the value "25" corresponding to the open time "0.1 seconds" is set. Furthermore, in step SC1235, a second opening process is performed to open the second variable prize winning device 32B, and then this process ends.

Further, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC1211, that is, if the second round (final round) in the small winning state has ended, in step SC1236, a second closing process is performed in which the second variable winning device 32B is brought into the closed state. I do. Thereafter, in step SC1232, end setting processing is performed, and then this processing is ended.

Next, in step SC1224 of the variable winning device control process (FIG. 139), a specific winning flag is determined to be set on, which indicates that a ball has entered the specific ball entering section 320c. The winning process (step SC1226) will be explained with reference to FIG. 140.

First, in step SC1901, the specific winning flag is turned off. In the following step SC1902, whether or not the jackpot flag is set to on (in this example, if two game balls enter the specific ball entering section 320c in a row during a small win state, the V jackpot flag is set to (may be turned on). If an affirmative determination is made in step SC1902, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC1902, a second closing process is performed in step SC1903 to close the second variable winning device 32B. Further, in step SC1904, the small winning flag is turned off, and in step SC1905, the jackpot flag (V winning jackpot flag) is turned on. In other words, when a game ball enters the specific ball entering section 320c during a small winning state, the small winning state is immediately ended and a jackpot state is started.

Thereafter, in step SC1906, a round number counter setting process is performed in which a value corresponding to the jackpot type is set in the round number counter. In this process, first, a jackpot type determination process is performed. In the jackpot type determination process, the jackpot type determination process takes into consideration the second type determination table used in the second type determination process in step SC507, and is acquired based on the ball entering the specific ball entering section 320c of the second variable winning device 32B. The value of the type determination counter CC2 is any of the values "0 to 7" corresponding to "15R jackpot", "8 to 17" corresponding to "8R jackpot", and "18, 19" corresponding to "4R jackpot". , and determine the type of jackpot.

Then, the round number corresponding to the determined jackpot type is set in the round number counter. However, in this embodiment, since the small winning state corresponds to the first round, the remaining number of rounds is set to the round number counter here.

For example, if the determined jackpot type is "15R jackpot", the round number counter is set to "14", and if it is "8R jackpot", the round number counter is set to "7", and "4R jackpot" is set to "7". If it is a jackpot, the round number counter is set to 3.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game ball that has won a small hit and entered the second variable winning device 32B that is in the open state enters the specific ball entry section 320c, so that the first variable Since the winning device 32A is configured to continue in the jackpot state in which it is in the open state, if the small winning state ends without a game ball entering the specific ball entering section 320c, the jackpot state will not be awarded. Also, the game mode is not changed after a jackpot state.

After step SC1906, in step SC1909, "1" is set in the winning situation storage area. Furthermore, in step SC1910, "500" is set to the special variable timer, which corresponds to an opening period for teaching the occurrence of a jackpot state. Thereafter, in step SC1911, "8" is set in the first winning counter, and in step SC1912, a V winning jackpot state occurs for the sub-control device 262 when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section 320c. After setting a specific winning command that tells the player to do so, this process ends.

Next, the normal display control process in step SC208 of the normal process (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to FIG. 143.

First, in step SC2101, it is determined whether the value of the regular pattern interval timer for measuring the remaining time of the interval (normal pattern interval) set after the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41 is "0". do. If a negative determination is made in step SC2101, that is, if it is a general pattern interval, the value of the general pattern interval timer is subtracted in step SC2116, and then this process is ended. In other words, for example, if the general pattern interval is 1 second (1000 msec) and the general pattern interval timer is set to "249 ("250" if the configuration is such that step SC2116 is performed before step SC2101)" In this process, the value of the regular pattern interval timer is subtracted by "1" every 4 msec, and becomes "0" after 1 second.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2101, that is, if it is not the regular pattern interval period, in step SC2102, the support that indicates that the opening/closing control of the second starting prize part 33WB (blade member 33WBb) is in progress. Determine whether or not the period flag is set on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2102, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC2102, it is determined in step SC2103 whether or not the normal symbol display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display is on. In addition, when the normal symbol display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display.

If a negative determination is made in step SC2103, the process proceeds to step SC2104, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step SC2104, that is, if no variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 is pending, the process is immediately terminated. In addition, for example, when a negative determination is made in step SC2104, a standby display setting is performed in the normal symbol display device 41 to derive a display mode corresponding to a variable standby state in which a variable display is not performed. You can also use it as In other words, after the normal pattern display device 41 stops changing, its stop mode is maintained during the normal pattern interval period (in a mode that shows the result of the starting ball support lottery), but the normal pattern display device 41 is maintained during the normal pattern interval period. When the process is finished, the display mode may be changed to indicate the variable standby state.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2104, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc in the process of step SC2105, which serves as an update function section or a subtraction function section. In the following step SC2106, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step SC2107, a normal pattern fluctuation setting process is executed to set and start the variable display of the normal pattern display device 41.

Here, the ordinary figure fluctuation setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 144. First, in step SC2301, a normal symbol displaying flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner on the normal symbol display device 41 is set on. In the following step SC2302, the winning status storage area is referred to and it is determined whether "0" is stored, that is, whether the current state is other than the winning state. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2302, that is, if there is no winning state, then in step SC2303, it is determined whether or not a value of "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, "time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)". ”.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2303, in step SC2304, the normal symbol display timer that measures the variation time (remaining time) of the variable display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to the normal symbol display time. Set "100" to make it 0.4 seconds.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC2302 or step SC2303, that is, if it is in a winning state or if it is not in a high ball hit state, in step SC2307, the normal symbol display timer is set to display the variable display time of the normal symbol. Set "1500" to make it 6 seconds.

After that, in step SC2305, the normal symbol random number counter CC4 in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is set to the winning value ("0, 1" in the case of "low ball entry state", "1" in the case of "high ball entry state"). 0 to 27''). If a negative determination is made in step SC2305, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2305, that is, if the starting ball entry support lottery is won to decide whether or not to open the second starting prize section 33WB, the starting ball entry support lottery is won in step SC2306. Turn on the entry support flag to indicate that the player has received the ball. After step SC2306, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 143, after step SC2107, in step SC2108, subtraction display processing of the normal holding display device 44 (normal holding lamp) corresponding to the fact that the number of holdings in the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 has decreased by one I do. In other words, if a pair of left and right normal hold lamps are both blinking, the left normal hold lamp will remain blinking and the right side normal hold lamp will turn on, and the left normal hold lamp will remain blinking while the right side normal hold lamp will remain blinking. If the normal hold lamp is lit, both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, and if both the left and right normal hold lamps are lit, the left normal hold lamp remains lit and the right normal hold lamp is lit. The holding lamp is turned off, and when the left normal holding lamp is on and the right normal holding lamp is off, processing is performed to turn off both the left and right normal holding lamps. After step SC2108, this process ends.

Moreover, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC2103, that is, when the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display, the process proceeds to step SC2109, and a process of subtracting the normal symbol display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the regular figure display timer is decremented by 1.

The process then proceeds to step SC2110, where it is determined whether the count value of the regular figure display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC2110, the normal symbol displaying flag is turned off in step SC2111, and in step SC2112, a normal symbol stop display setting is performed for performing a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41. In other words, if you win the starting ball entry support lottery (if the entry support flag is set to on), both the left and right normal symbol lamps of the normal symbol display device 41 are lit, and if you win, lights up only the left general lamp.

Subsequently, the process advances to step SC2113, where ordinary figure discrimination information setting processing is performed. Here, the ordinary figure discrimination information setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 145.

First, in step SC2401, it is determined whether the ball entry support flag is set to on. If a negative determination is made in step SC2401, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2401, then in step SC2402, a normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second starting winning part 33WB is in the open state is set on.

In the following step SC2403, it is determined whether or not "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not it is the "time saving A mode (high ball entry state)". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2403, in step SC2404, the open time of the second start winning part 33WB is set to 1 for the normal variable timer for measuring the open time (remaining time) of the second start winning part 33WB. .Set "450" to make it 8 seconds.

Furthermore, in step SC2405, "2" is set to the opening number counter that counts the number of times the second starting winning part 33WB is opened (remaining number of times) in order to open the second starting winning part 33WB twice.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC2403, that is, if it is not the "time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)", in step SC2406, the open time of the second start winning part 33WB is set to 0. Set "50" to make it 2 seconds. Subsequently, in step SC2407, the opening number counter is set to "2" in order to open the second starting winning part 33WB twice.

After step SC2405 or after step SC2407, the entry support flag is turned off in step SC2408, and the support period flag is turned on in step SC2409. Furthermore, in step SC2410, the second starting winning part 33WB is set to be in an open state, and then this process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 143, after step SC2113, in step SC2114, a value corresponding to the general pattern interval period (for example, 1 second) is set for the general pattern interval timer, and then this process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC2110, in step SC2115, switching display settings are made to continue the variable display (switching display in which a pair of left and right normal symbol lamps are alternately lit) of the normal symbol display device 41. I do. In addition, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms. After step SC2115, this process ends.

Next, the startup winning section control process in step SC209 of the normal process (see FIG. 124) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 146.

First, in step SC2201, it is determined whether the support period flag is on. If a negative determination is made in step SC2201, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2201, the value of the normal variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step SC2202.

In the following step SC2203, it is determined whether the value of the normal variable timer is "0". If a negative determination is made in step SC2203, that is, if it is the period during which the open/closed state of the second starting winning part 33WB is maintained, this process is ended as is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC2203, it is determined in step SC2204 whether or not the normal variable flag is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2204, that is, if the second starting winning part 33WB is currently in the open state and the timing to close it has arrived, the normal variable flag is turned off in step SC2205. In the following step SC2206, the value of the opening number counter is subtracted by 1, and in step SC2207, the second starting winning part 33WB is set to be in the closed state.

Thereafter, in step SC2208, it is determined whether the value of the open count counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2208, the support period flag is turned off in step SC2209, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC2208, that is, if there is a remaining number of times when the second starting winning part 33WB is opened multiple times, in step SC2210, a value corresponding to the interval time is set for the normal variable timer. (for example, "250"), and then ends this process.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC2204, that is, in the interval period between when the second starting winning part 33WB is opened a plurality of times (the second starting winning part 33WB is in a closed state), the timing to end the interval period is determined. If it has arrived, the normal variable flag is set on in step SC2211. Furthermore, in step SC2212, it is determined whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC2212, a value "450" corresponding to an open time of 1.8 seconds is set for the normal variable timer in step SC2213. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC2212, a value "50" corresponding to an open time of 0.2 seconds is set for the normal variable timer in step SC2214.

After step SC2213 or step SC2214, in step SC2215, the second start winning part 33WB is set to be in the open state. After that, this process ends. In addition, when the second starting winning part 33WB is in the open state, if a specified number of game balls (for example, 4) enter the second starting winning part 33WB, the second starting winning part 33WB It may be configured so that it is immediately brought into the closed state.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will first be explained with reference to FIG. 147, and then main processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 148.

FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed.

When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step SC3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step SC3002, in order to memorize that the command was sent from the main control device 261. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process that is executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step SC3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SC3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SC3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step SC3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step SC3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SC3107, and in the following step SC3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, it is determined whether the backup is valid or not. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step SC3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SC3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization process from step SC3115 onward. Transition.

In step SC3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SC3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step SC3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SC3114, where interrupts are permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step SC3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SC3108, process). That is, in step SC3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step SC3110, the power cut-off occurrence information is cleared, and in step SC3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step SC3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SC3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SC3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SC3114, in the process of step SC3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step SC3123 onwards is performed as power outage processing at the time of power-off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SC3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step SC3124. Thereafter, in step SC3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step SC3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step SC3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and RAM access is prohibited in step SC3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that in the process of step SC3122, information on the occurrence of power-off is confirmed after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 149. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is obtained, and a determination process for the command is performed (step SC3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 150.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps SC3124, SC3201), first, it is determined in step SC3301 whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 147).

If it is determined in step SC3301 that the command reception flag is off, this process ends because no new command has been received from main controller 261. On the other hand, if it is determined in step SC3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step SC3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SC3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SC3303, the processing in steps SC3302 to SC3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can also be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing from step SC3304 to step SC3306. In step SC3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SC3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SC3306, it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step SC3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on, and if the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step SC3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step SC3309. Thereafter, in step SC3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission to pay out the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step SC3307, the command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step SC3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of RAM 513 (step SC3308) and set the initial value of RAM 513 (step SC3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SC3304: NO, step SC3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step SC3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SC3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step SC3305: NO, step SC3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step SC3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step SC3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SC3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step SC3304: NO), a payout return command (step SC3305: NO), and a prize ball command (step SC3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 149. When the command determination processing is completed, in step SC3202, it is determined whether or not a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is received from the CR unit connection board 314. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC3202, a CR unit connection signal indicating that the CR unit is electrically connected is transmitted to the launch control circuit 312 of the power source/launch control device 310 in step SC3203.

After step SC3203, or if a negative determination is made in step SC3202, it is determined in step SC3204 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC3204, the state return switch 321 is checked in step SC3205, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state return operation is executed. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step SC3206, the lower tray full state or lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the full detection switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full, the lower tray 15 is set. Execute the setting for the plate full release state. Further, in step SC3207, a tank ball no state (ball out state) or a tank ball no state released state (ball present state) is executed in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, and the special setting for the no-tank-bulb state is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank-bulb state and the no-tank-bulb release state are performed. Run the settings.

Thereafter, in step SC3208, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step SC3209, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step SC3210, and a motor drive process is performed in step SC3211.

In step SC3212, the dispensing motor is driven to execute the ball discharging process on the condition that the status return switch 321 is checked to indicate that the ball is not in a state where it is not possible to dislodge the ball, and that the ball discharging operation has not started. In the following step SC3213, vibrator control (vibrator motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained with reference to FIG. 151. First, in step SC3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step SC3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

Note that the ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the storage area is It is configured to return to the starting point and update the command. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the subsequent step SC3903, a pending information storage process is performed in which information on the preceding command output from the main controller 261 is stored in a pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262. In addition, as mentioned above, the starting command includes information indicating whether the fluctuating display is triggered by a ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA or the second starting winning section 33WB, and corresponds to a jackpot or small winning. Information indicating whether the information is variable information, information indicating the type of jackpot, information indicating the type of reach, game mode information for specifying the gaming mode at the start of the variable display, information indicating the variable time, etc. are included.

The reservation information storage area of the sub-control device 262 has four reservation areas (1st to 2nd special fluctuation reservation areas), respectively, similar to the special fluctuation reservation areas (first special fluctuation reservation area and second special fluctuation reservation area) of the main controller 261. 4th area), a first pending information storage area and a second pending information storage area, and one execution area.

The first pending information storage area contains information on whether or not it is a jackpot, jackpot type, reach pattern, according to the reception history of the first command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area). Game mode information and information regarding variable display such as variable time (variation information) are stored in chronological order. In addition, in the second pending information storage area, information on whether or not there is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the small Information on whether or not it is a win, information on whether or not it is a time-saving win, game mode information, and information regarding a variable display such as a variable time (variation information) are stored in chronological order. By adopting such a configuration, the fluctuation information regarding the first fluctuation display triggered by the ball entering the first starting prize part 33WA, and the second fluctuating display triggered by the ball entering the second starting winning part 33WB. It is possible to suspend and store the variation information related to each. As a result, the sub-control device 262 can grasp not only the execution area of the special fluctuation reservation area of the main control device 261 but also the fluctuation information stored in each reservation area of the first and second special fluctuation reservation areas. is possible.

Here, the pending information storage process will be explained with reference to FIG. 154. First, in step SC4101, it is determined whether the preceding command of the first variable display has been received (whether or not the preceding command of the first variable display has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553).

When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4101, in step SC4102, a first variable pending counter Nd that counts the number of pending changes in the variable information stored in the first pending information storage area is incremented by one.

In the following step SC4103, information on whether or not it is a jackpot, information on jackpot type, reach pattern, game mode information, first variable time information, etc. included in the starting command are stored in an empty holding area of the first holding information storage area. It is stored in the first area.

Further, in the following step SC4104, advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in this embodiment, mutually related effect displays may be intentionally derived in a plurality of consecutive variable displays (so-called "continuous notice" is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether to give continuous notices and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of continuous notices are acquired, and the counter values are stored in the first pending information storage. Among the areas, the fluctuation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step SC4103.

The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 49, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 49). The continuous notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

The notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The notice type counter is updated periodically, and the value of the notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (notice type counter buffer) each time.

In the notice information storage process, when the fluctuation information is stored in the pending information storage area, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Furthermore, each suspension area and execution area of the suspension information storage area is provided with a continuous notice flag that is turned on when it is determined that a continuous notice will be derived.

Further, in this embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice adequacy determination table that is taken into account when deciding whether or not to give continuous notices, and a notice table that is taken into account when determining the form of continuous notices. A plurality of advance notice adequacy determination tables and advance notice tables are provided, and the advance notice appropriateness determination table and advance notice table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the fluctuation information.

After step SC4104, in step SC4105, a continuous notice lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute continuous notices. In the continuous notice lottery process in step SC4105, it is checked whether there is a reservation area in which the continuous notice flag has already been set to ON. Therefore, in the case where the existence of the holding area in which the continuous notice flag is set is not confirmed, and furthermore, in the case where only the fluctuation information corresponding to a complete failure (missing without a reach state) is stored in the first holding area, , a continuous preview lottery will be held. On the other hand, if the existence of a reservation area with a continuous notice flag set is confirmed, the continuous notice lottery will not be held.

In addition, in the continuous notice lottery process of step SC4105, when the value of the first variable pending counter Nd is "2" or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area, Determine whether or not to execute consecutive notices by referring to the notice judgment table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode (those that correspond to jackpots are more likely to win than those that correspond to misses). . Furthermore, when it is decided to execute continuous notices, a notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, reach pattern, and game mode is created based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first pending information storage area. , and decide whether to execute continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flags of all the holding areas in the first holding information storage area in which change information is stored are turned on. However, the continuous notice flag in the execution area is not turned on.

After step SC4105, in step SC4106, a hold icon setting process is performed to additionally display one hold icon, which is a specific corresponding display indicating that the first variable display is held and stored on the effect display device 42. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, a hold icon H461 (see FIG. 159, etc.) resembling a "floating ring" is displayed on the effect display device 42. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the hold icon corresponding to the second variable display is not displayed.

Further, the pending icon H461 may be derived in a manner that suggests the jackpot expectation level of the corresponding first variable display. Hereinafter, such a hold icon H461 will also be referred to as a "preread hold icon H463." The prefetch pending icon H463 (see FIG. 159, etc.) of this embodiment is derived in a manner in which the character uses a "floating ring." Further, a plurality of types of characters are prepared for the pre-reading pending icon H463, and the pattern of the pre-reading pending icon H463 is associated with the winning expectation level (jackpot expectation level) for occurrence of a jackpot state. As a result, the prefetch pending icon H463 is ranked in terms of the jackpot expectation level depending on its aspect, and by deriving the prefetch pending icon H463, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation level (perform a prefetch pending preview effect). It is configured.

In addition, when the prefetch pending icon H463 is derived, the pattern of the prefetch pending icon H463 changes until the first variable display corresponding to the prefetch pending icon H463 is digested (the pending change effect is derived). That is, in the hold icon setting process of step SC4106, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to derive the prefetch hold icon H463, and in the case of failure, the pattern of the hold icon H461 is determined to be the default (float only). be done. On the other hand, in the case of winning, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform the holding change effect, and in the case of winning, the holding change flag of the corresponding holding area is set to ON, and as a pattern of the pre-read holding icon H463, An upper limit pattern that may be finally displayed and a provisional pattern that is displayed first and have a lower jackpot expectation (lower rank) than the upper limit pattern are determined. Note that the temporary pattern may be configured such that there is an option to initially display only the default hold icon H461. On the other hand, in the case of a failed election, one pattern is determined as the pattern of the prefetch pending icon H463.

Basically, the hold icons H461 of the determined pattern are displayed so as to be lined up to the right of the rightmost one of the hold icons H461 displayed in the hold display area HW3 of the effect display device 42. Such processing is performed. Further, in this embodiment, in step SC4106, when the prefetch pending icon H463 is derived in the pending display area HW3, the prefetch pending performance flag is set to on.

After step SC4106, or if a negative determination is made in step SC4101, in step SC4107, it is determined whether the preceding command of the second variable display has been received (the preceding command of the second variable display is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). (whether or not). If a negative determination is made in step SC4107, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step SC4107, in step SC4108, a second variable hold counter Ne that counts the number of holds of the second variable information held and stored in the second hold information storage area is incremented by one.

Thereafter, in step SC4109, information on whether or not it is a jackpot, information on the type of jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small win, information on whether or not it is a time saving win, game mode information, and information on the second variable time included in the first command. Information etc. are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas in the second reservation information storage area. After step SC4109, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, after step SC3903 or if a negative determination is made in step SC3901, the process moves to step SC3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SC3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step SC3913.

In step SC3905, updating processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 152, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO and the upper, middle, and lower symbols used to set each losing symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area. Symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is for determining the symbol (jackpot symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 when a jackpot state occurs. In this embodiment, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO. That is, the decorative symbol counter CO at the time of jackpot is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 8, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

When a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to a jackpot is received from the main control device 261, based on the table that associates the counter value with the decorative pattern, for example, if the counter value is 0, it is "1" (lower number), 1 If so, a combination of jackpot symbols is determined, such as "2" (double number).

This jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SC3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives a variation pattern command as described later. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer, and the counter value is referenced at the timing when a fluctuation pattern command is received. You can do it like this.

The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are used to determine the combination of each stopped symbol in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the lottery results in a loss. Since any of nine decorative patterns are displayed in each column, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each column. The upper symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbols in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbols in the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbols in the lower symbol display area.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical values of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that their update times do not overlap, and the combinations of these symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are stored in the RAM 553's front and back off reach symbol buffers, front and rear off reach symbol buffers, and complete reach symbol buffers other than front and back off. It is stored in one of the out-of-line symbol buffers.

Here, the updating process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 153, in step SC4001, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL, and in step SC4002, it is determined whether or not it is time to update the middle symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the lower symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination will be made in step SC4001. Further, if the upper symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step SC4002. If it is time to update the upper symbol counter CL (step SC4001 is YES), the process advances to step SC4003 and the upper symbol counter CL is updated. Further, if it is time to update the medium symbol counter CM (step SC4002 is YES), the process advances to step SC4004 and the medium symbol counter CM is updated. Furthermore, if it is time to update the lower symbol counter CR (steps SC4001 and S4002 are both NO), the process advances to step SC4005 and the lower symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SC4003 to SC4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, The calculation results are set as the current values of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above update process of CL, CM, and CR, the upper, middle, and lower symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. There isn't. As a result, one set of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated every time the update process is executed three times.

Thereafter, in step SC4006, the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is changed to the combination of winning symbols (the combination of jackpot symbols in which the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas and the symbols in the middle symbol display area are the same). A combination of a predetermined small winning symbol, a predetermined time saving winning symbol combination) is determined. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4006, the process is ended without storing the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC4006, in step SC4007, the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (a symbol in the upper symbol display area and a symbol in the lower symbol display area). are the same, and the symbols in the upper and lower symbol display areas are different from the symbols in the middle symbol display area), and if it is a combination of reach symbols (step SC4007 is YES), In step SC4008, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of front and back off symbols (front and back off reach). If the symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of front and back off reach symbols (step SC4008 is YES), the process advances to step SC4009, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the front and back off reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. This process ends. If the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of symbols other than front and back off (reach other than front and back off) (step SC4008 is NO), the process advances to step SC4010, and the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is The matching is stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer of RAM 553 except for the front and back, and this process is ended.

In addition, if the combination is other than the reach symbol (NO in step SC4007), the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of missing symbols (completely missing symbols), so in step SC4011 , the combination of symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and the present process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in step SC3906, suspension processing is performed. The reservation process will be described below with reference to FIG. 155.

First, in step SC4201, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been received (whether or not the variation pattern command for the first variation display has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4201, in the process of step SC4202, which serves as an update function unit or a subtraction function unit, the value of the first fluctuation pending counter Nd, which is a second counting function unit, is subtracted by 1.

In the following step SC4203, processing for shifting the data stored in the first pending information storage area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first pending information storage area (including the continuous notice flag) to the execution area side, and Data in each area is shifted in the following order: → execution area, second pending area → first pending area, third pending area → second pending area, fourth pending area → third pending area.

After step SC4203, in step SC4204, a preview setting process is performed to determine the type of display effect used for continuous previews. In the notice setting process of step SC4204, it is determined whether the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area (see the continuous notice lottery process of step SC4105) is on, and if the determination is negative, the continuous notice flag is turned on. Since this is not performed, the process ends immediately. On the other hand, if the determination is positive, based on the fluctuation information of the fluctuation pattern command, whether it is a jackpot or not, if it is a jackpot, what type is it, and if it is not a jackpot, what is the reach pattern, and the game mode. The type of continuous notice is determined by referring to the corresponding table. The continuous notice of the type determined here will be derived at the desired timing when the corresponding variable display is displayed.

After step SC4204, in step SC4205, a pending icon shift process is performed to shift the pending icon H461 displayed on the effect display device 42. Note that each hold area and execution area of the hold information storage area is provided with a hold icon storage area that stores the type of hold icon H461, and information regarding the hold icon H461 is also stored in the hold information storage area described above. It is shifted by area data shift processing.

The pending icon shift process is a process for redrawing the pending icon H461 in accordance with the data shift, and in the effect display device 42, each time one of the first variable displays is consumed (executed), The hold icon H461 located on the leftmost side is deleted, and the hold icon H461 placed on the right side is shifted one place to the left (the display location is moved).

In this embodiment, in step SC4205, prior to the process of redrawing the hold icon H461, if there is a hold area in which the hold change flag is set to ON, the hold change effect of the pre-read hold icon H463 is executed. A lottery is held to decide whether or not to proceed, and if the winner is selected, the pattern of the prefetch pending icon H463 is changed to a higher rank one (however, the rank of the upper limit pattern is not exceeded). In addition, when it is determined that there is no holding area in which the holding change flag is set to ON, the pre-reading holding effect flag is turned OFF. Furthermore, by changing the pattern of the prefetch hold icon H463, when the prefetch hold icon H463 reaches the upper limit pattern, the prefetch hold effect flag is turned off, and the hold change flag is turned off. ing.

After step SC4205, or if a negative determination is made in step SC4201, step SC4206 determines whether the fluctuation pattern command of the second fluctuation display has been received (the fluctuation pattern command of the second fluctuation display is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). (whether or not it has been stored). If a negative determination is made in step SC4206, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4206, in the process of step SC4207, which is an update function unit or a subtraction function unit, the value of the second fluctuation pending counter Ne, which is a first counting function unit, is subtracted by 1. In the following step SC4208, processing for shifting the data stored in the second pending information storage area is executed. This data shift processing shifts the data stored in the first pending area of the second pending information storage area to the execution area. After step SC4208, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in step SC3907, display setting processing is performed. Here, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the effect display device 42 is determined. For example, when receiving a variation pattern command, the sub-control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, variation time, stop symbol, etc., and determines the display pattern of the variation display of the decorative symbols. Then, control is performed such as outputting the determined matter to the display control device 45 as a display command.

Note that the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42. Furthermore, once a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, the decoration is performed in cooperation with the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 until the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses. The fluctuating display of symbols (effect fluctuating display), etc. continues.

In addition, when starting the effect variation display corresponding to the first variation display, if the continuous notice flag in the execution area of the pending information storage area is on, each situation will be responded to based on the variation information of the variation pattern command. The user can refer to the table to determine the type of continuous notice to be derived into the effect variable display corresponding to the first variable display, decide to derive a different notice effect from the continuous notice, operate the effect button 125, etc. Display the corresponding display. Furthermore, in the display setting process of step SC3907, a process (win display process) for controlling the effect during the jackpot is also performed.

Here, the variable display setting process performed in the display setting process of step SC3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 157. In the effect display device 42 of this embodiment, basically, the first effect variation display (first variation compatible effect display) corresponding to the first variation display of the first special symbol display device 43A, or the second special symbol display A second performance variation display (second variation compatible performance display) corresponding to the second variation display of the device 43B is performed.

First, in step SC4501, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the second fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as a second fluctuation pattern command) has been received. Note that various types of variation information included in the first variation pattern command and the second variation pattern command may be configured to be stored in the execution area of the corresponding pending information storage area, or may be stored in a separate storage area. It may be configured so that Furthermore, for example, when processing corresponding to reception of the second variation pattern command is performed in the hold process (see FIG. 155), the second variation reception flag is turned on, and when an affirmative determination is made in step SC4501, the second variation pattern command is turned on. The configuration may be such that the fluctuation reception flag is turned off, and in step SC4501, it may be determined whether or not the second fluctuation pattern command has been received by checking the second fluctuation reception flag.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4501, it is determined in step SC4502 whether "21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether the current gaming mode (at the start of variation) is "time saving A mode". Determine whether

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4502, in step SC4503, various information included in the second variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not it is a jackpot, information on whether or not it is a small win, jackpot type, game mode information, , second variation time, etc.), a special second performance variation display setting process is performed to determine a production pattern (pattern of second performance variation display), and the process moves to step SC4506. In the special second performance variation display setting process, display setting processes corresponding to the "rush stage performance" and "battle stage performance" shown in FIGS. 161 and 162 are performed.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC4502, it is determined in step SC4504 whether or not the continuation effect flag is set on. The continuation production flag is set to ON when the sub-control device 262 receives a production start command related to the "continuation chance stage production" from the main control device 261, and is set to ON when the sub-control device 262 receives a production end command related to the "continuation chance stage production". It is set to off when

If a negative determination is made in step SC4504, the process directly proceeds to step SC4506.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4504, that is, if the "continuous chance stage performance" is being executed (including at the start), in step SC4505, various information included in the second variation pattern command (for example, jackpot Based on the production pattern (second variable time, etc.) A normal second performance variation display setting process is performed to determine a performance variation display pattern), and the process moves to step SC4506. In the normal second performance variation display setting process, a display setting process corresponding to the "continuation chance stage performance" shown in FIG. 163 is performed. In this embodiment, when the second variable display is performed in the "normal mode", the "normal stage performance" is performed on the performance display device 42.

Thereafter, in step SC4506, it is determined whether a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first fluctuation display (hereinafter referred to as the first fluctuation pattern command) has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC4506, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4506, it is determined in step SC4507 whether "31" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, the current gaming mode (at the start of variation) is "time saving B mode". Determine whether or not.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4507, in step SC4508, various information included in the first variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not it is a jackpot, jackpot type, gaming mode information, first variation time, etc.) Based on this, a special first performance variation display setting process is performed to determine the pattern of the first performance variation display, and the present process ends. In the special first effect variation display setting process, a display setting process corresponding to the "lucky stage effect" shown in FIG. 164 is performed. In this embodiment, the "lucky stage performance" corresponds to the "specific correspondence display", and the game played in the "time saving B mode" in the "lucky stage performance" constitutes the "specific game".

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC4507, in step SC4510, various information included in the first variation pattern command (for example, information on whether or not it is a jackpot, jackpot type, gaming mode information, first variation time, etc.) ), a normal first performance variation display setting process is performed to determine the pattern of the first performance variation display, and the present process is immediately terminated. In the normal first performance variation display setting process, a display setting process corresponding to the "normal stage performance" shown in FIG. 159 is performed.

In this embodiment, when the first fluctuation display is performed in the "time saving A mode", although internal processing such as subtraction processing of the first fluctuation number counter A is performed, the "rush stage" is displayed in the effect display device 42. There will be no "Production" or "Battle Stage Production", but a "Normal Stage Production".

Next, the winning display processing performed in the display setting processing of step SC3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 156.

First, in step SC4701, it is determined whether an opening command indicating the start of a jackpot state has been received from the main controller 261. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4701, in step SC4702, a round grasp counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds is inputted based on the jackpot type information included in the opening command.If it is a "15R jackpot", " 15" is set, "8" is set if it is an "8R jackpot", and "4" is set if it is a "4R jackpot".

Thereafter, in step SC4703, the opening performance is set (the image of the performance display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting mode of the various lamps), and then this process is ended. In this embodiment, when the value of the round grasp counter is "15", "8", or "4", an 8-second opening performance is performed. In addition, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a table etc. that stores the correspondence between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various production modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding production is performed by referring to the table. Make a choice and execute it.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC4701, it is determined in step SC4704 whether or not a specific winning command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4704, that is, if a jackpot state occurs based on the ball entering the specific ball entering section 320c of the second variable winning device 32B, in step SC4702, the specific winning prize is set for the round grasping counter. Based on the jackpot type information included in the command, set "14" for "15R jackpot", "7" for "8R jackpot", and "3" for "4R jackpot". Set.

After that, in step SC4703, the opening effect is set, and then this process ends. In this embodiment, when the value of the round grasp counter is "14," "7," or "3," a two-second opening performance is performed.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SC4704, it is determined in step SC4705 whether or not a round command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4705, in step SC4706, the performance during the round is set for a maximum of 30 seconds, and then the present process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step SC4705, it is determined in step SC4707 whether or not an interval command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4707, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SC4708, and the performance during the 4-second interval is set in step SC4709, and then this process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step SC4707, it is determined in step SC4710 whether or not an ending command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4710, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SC4711, a 10-second ending effect is set in step SC4712, and then this process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step SC4710, it is determined in step SC4713 whether or not a jackpot end command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SC4713, a jackpot display end process is performed in step SC4714, and the present process is ended.

In the jackpot display termination process, the ending display is immediately terminated, and at this timing, the time-saving A mode start command is received, so based on this command, the "rush stage production" corresponding to the "time-saving A mode" or Start setting processing for "battle stage production" is performed.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step SC4713, it is determined in step SC4715 whether or not a small winning start command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4715, then in step SC4716, a small win effect setting for deriving the effect display etc. during the small win state is performed, and then this process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step SC4715, it is determined in step SC4717 whether or not a small winning end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC4717, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4717, a small win display ending process is performed in step SC4718 to immediately end the small win effect display. After step SC4718, this process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in step SC3908, a fluctuation stop process regarding stopping the fluctuation display of the effect display device 42 is executed. Here, the fluctuation stop processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 158.

First, in step SC4401, it is determined whether a special map 2 stop command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4401, it is determined in step SC4402 whether or not the second effect variation display is being derived. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4402, processing is performed to stop displaying the second effect variation display in step SC4403. After step SC4403, the process moves to step SC4407, which will be described later. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC4402, the process directly proceeds to step SC4407.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step SC4401, it is determined in step SC4404 whether or not a special figure 1 stop command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4404, it is determined in step SC4405 whether or not the first effect variation display is being derived. If an affirmative determination is made in step SC4405, processing is performed to stop the first effect variation display in step SC4406. After step SC4406, the process moves to step SC4407. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SC4405, the process directly proceeds to step SC4407.

After step SC4403 or step SC4406, or if a negative determination is made in step SC4404, it is determined in step SC4407 whether or not a time saving A mode end command or a time saving B mode end command has been received. If a negative determination is made in step SC4407, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SC4407, that is, if the total number of executions of the first variable display and the second variable display in "time saving A mode" or "time saving B mode" reaches a predetermined number, step SC4408 In this step, a process is performed to change the display performance being performed on the performance display device 42 to "normal stage performance" corresponding to the normal mode. After that, this process ends.

Next, changes in the effect display mode on the effect display device 42 as the game progresses will be explained together with the flow of the game played by the player. On the display screen of the performance display device 42, various display performances corresponding to the current gaming state (gaming mode, etc.) are performed.

In the normal state (the gaming state in which the first variable display can be performed based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA in the "normal mode"), the "normal stage performance" is performed on the performance display device 42.

As shown in FIG. 159, in the "normal stage production", a variable display area HW1 in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner is set in most of the display screen of the production display device 42.

As described above, in this embodiment, in this variable display area HW1, upper, middle, and lower three symbol display areas (upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area) are set, and each symbol A plurality of types of decorative patterns (designs numbered 1 to 9) are scrollably displayed in the display area.

An instruction display area HW2 is set above the variable display area HW1 for instructing (recommending) the firing mode of the game ball to the player, and a pending number of variable displays is set below the variable display area HW1. A hold display area HW3 to be specified is set.

In the normal state, the instruction display area HW2 displays "← "Left-handed" is displayed. Accordingly, the player plays the game by "hitting to the left."

Further, in the hold display area HW3, a hold icon H461 resembling a "floating ring" is displayed. The hold display area HW3 of this embodiment includes an execution compatible area H462a corresponding to the execution area of the hold information storage area, and a hold compatible area H462b corresponding to each hold area of the first hold information storage area. 5 pending icons H461 can be displayed.

When the player "hits to the left", most of the game balls are guided toward the first starting winning part 33WA located below the variable display unit 35 by the nails and the like. Among them, some game balls will be won into the first starting winning section 33WA.

In this embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the second starting winning part 33WB and its pair of blade members 33WBb is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35. In other words, since the second starting winning part 33WB and the through gate 34 are arranged at a position where the game ball flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach, if the player continues to "hit left", The pair of blade members 33WBb is never released, and the game ball is never won into the second starting winning section 33WB.

Further, even if the player performs an act of firing a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 in the normal state (such act is hereinafter referred to as "right-handed hitting"), the present embodiment described above does not apply. Under such a configuration, there is almost no possibility that the game ball will win in the second starting winning section 33WB. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that in the normal state, the player can play the game more advantageously by "hitting to the left".

When the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA, in the variable display area HW1 of the effect display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed in each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. Various decorative patterns are scrolled and displayed periodically from right to left in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In the upper pattern display area, various decorative patterns are displayed in descending order (the number attached increases), and in the middle and lower pattern display areas, the various decorative patterns are displayed in ascending order (the number attached increases) (in order). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol display area → the lower symbol display area → the middle symbol display area, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

When a jackpot lottery is won based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, the decorative symbols of the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed on a predetermined jackpot line after reaching a reach state. In the normal state of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, when three decorative symbols of a jackpot combination are lined up and displayed on any one of the five lines, the occurrence of a jackpot condition is confirmed.

When a jackpot state occurs, the jackpot shutter 32Ab of the first variable winning device 32A is opened, and a game ball can enter the jackpot 32Aa, and a predetermined jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 42. The performance begins (see FIG. 160).

However, here, if the player continues to "hit left", it is possible to make the game ball flow down towards the first variable winning device 32A and win a prize, but regardless of the type of jackpot, the prize will not be awarded after the jackpot ends. At the start of the "Time Saving A Mode", there is no pending storage of the second variable display based on the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB, and the first variable display is started after the jackpot ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, winning a direct jackpot in the second variable display is more likely to provide an advantageous gaming state to the player than winning a direct jackpot in the first variable display, and Since the small winning state lottery, which is easy to win and triggers the occurrence of the V-winning jackpot, is configured to be performed only on the second variable display based on the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB, after the jackpot ends, " If the first variable display is performed in "Time Saving Mode A", it will be disadvantageous for the player.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, when the jackpot effect is started, the instruction display area HW2 displays "Right hit →" to recommend "Right hit" to the player. be done. Accordingly, the player switches the firing mode of the game ball from "left-handed" to "right-handed" so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right area of the variable display unit 35. Play a jackpot game.

Here, if the player hits the right ball, many of the game balls will flow down toward the first variable winning device 32A while being guided by the nails, etc., and will win a prize in the first variable winning device 32A. Become. This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35, a through gate 34, a second start winning part 33WB, etc. are provided on the downstream path to the first variable winning device 32A. The game ball passes through the through gate 34, or wins a prize in the second starting winning section 33WB that is opened upon passing through the gate.

In this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the starting ball support lottery, the pair of blade members 33WBb becomes open, and the game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB. Balls can be entered.

As a result, the second variable display is stored on hold during the jackpot state, and at the start of the "time saving A mode" after the jackpot ends, the second variable display can be started immediately with priority over the first variable display. state.

Here, in the present embodiment, if a "15R jackpot" is won by a lottery in the "normal mode" based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, after the "15R jackpot" ends, "variable" "A mode that saves time for 7 times" will be granted. Then, when the "time-saving A mode for 7 variable displays" is provided, the "rush stage performance" is performed on the performance display device 42, as shown in FIG. 161.

On the other hand, if the "4R jackpot" is won by a lottery in the "normal mode" based on the ball entering the first starting winning section 33WA, after the "4R jackpot" ends, "time saving A for one variable display" mode" is assigned. When the "time-saving A mode for one variable display" is provided, the "battle stage performance" is performed on the performance display device 42, as shown in FIG. 162.

In the "rush stage performance" and the "battle stage performance", the variable display area HW1 is displayed in a reduced size downward. In the reduced variable display area HW1, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes one line. Then, on the background screen, various display effects related to the "rush stage effect" and the "battle stage effect" are performed, such as various characters and the like being displayed.

For example, in the "rush stage production", as shown in Fig. 161, during its duration (during the period in which seven variable displays are executed), an animation (continuous production) of moving underwater continuously is derived, and A ``small win'' is taught by a display mode such as a school of fish passing by or fluttering, and a ``big win'' is taught by a display mode such as the appearance of a large creature such as a whale or the discovery of a treasure chest.

In addition, in the "battle stage production", as shown in Figure 162, a humanoid character appears and an animation of fighting the enemy is derived, and by winning or losing the battle, a "small win" is generated. ” and whether or not you won a “jackpot.”

In addition, in the "rush stage production" and "battle stage production", since it is taught that a "small win" or "big win" has been won by the above various productions, the reduced variable display area HW1 is also omitted, A configuration may also be adopted in which the decorative patterns are not displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the "rush stage performance" and the "battle stage performance", a configuration may be adopted in which the player can select a pattern performance mode in which decorative symbols are displayed and an animation performance mode in which decorative symbols are not displayed.

In addition, in the "rush stage performance" and "battle stage performance", in order to make more game balls enter the second starting prize winning section 33WB and to suspend and store more second variable displays, the instruction display area HW2 is As in the case of a jackpot, "Right hit →" is displayed to encourage the player to "Right hit".

In addition, in the "rush stage performance" and "battle stage performance", the hold display area HW3 is not set on the performance display device 42, and the hold display (hold icon) corresponding to the second hold display device 46B (second variable display) is not set. (derivation) is not performed.

Here, even if there is a first variable display that has been stored on hold, the hold icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed. As described above, if a game ball enters the first starting winning part 33WA that meets the specific condition while the second variable display is being executed, the first variable display corresponding to the entered ball is suspended. At the same time, the leading command related to the first variable display is transmitted from the main controller 261 to the sub-control device 262, and information regarding the first variable display is stored in the first pending information storage area of the sub-control device 262. , the hold icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed during periods such as "rush stage performance". However, although the hold icon corresponding to the first variable display is not displayed here, if a game ball enters the next first starting prize winning section 33WA, which is the update condition, the first hold icon is not displayed. The process of updating data in the information storage area is executed. Then, when the "rush stage performance" or the like ends and the mode returns to the "normal mode", the pending icon related to the first variable display stored in the first pending information storage area at that point will be displayed.

In addition, during the execution of the "rush stage performance" and "battle stage performance", they are performed during the "time saving A mode" in which a small winning state may occur, and during that time, the second variable prize winning device 32B is specified. Since the game is aimed at generating a jackpot state by inserting a game ball into the ball entry section 320c, it basically suggests whether or not a jackpot has been won in the first lottery (jackpot lottery). Decorative designs are not displayed. Instead, the winning of the small win may be taught by a simple display, and the teaching is carried out in the form of light emission from a lamp or in the form of sound, and the effect display device 42, in accordance with the expiration of the second variable display, It is also possible to simply update the count display of the remaining number of times in the time saving A mode. In addition, when a direct jackpot is won in the second variable display, decorative symbols may be displayed as the second performance variable display, and may be configured to be stopped and displayed in combination with the jackpot symbols.

During the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)", if the game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB, the first winning/failure drawing (big winning drawing) and the second winning/failure drawing (small winning drawing) A lottery is held, and the results are displayed in the reduced variable display area HW1.

In addition, during the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)", while the player is "hitting right", the game ball almost never enters the first starting winning part 33WA. , it is easy for many game balls to enter the second starting winning part 33WB in a high ball entry state in a short period of time, and the number of reserved storage numbers for the second variable display is likely to reach the upper limit quickly. Therefore, some players may think that when the number of pending memories for the second variable display has reached the upper limit and the second variable display, which has a relatively long presentation time, such as a reach effect, is started, the game ball Some players switch the firing mode from "right-handed" to "left-handed" and enter the game ball into the first starting winning section 33WA during that time. For this reason, during the "time saving A mode" where the player's level of interest is high and the gaming value is high, there are also situations where the player's level of interest is low and the gaming value is not very high, such as the suspended memory of the first variable display. This can occur. Of course, the first variable display will not start while the second variable display is being executed, but by storing and storing the first variable display during this time, it will be displayed immediately after the "continuation chance stage production" ends. Since the first variable display that has been stored on hold is started, it is possible to prevent the performance from being interrupted.

If the player wins a small winning state in which winning is relatively easy, the ball entrance opening 320b of the second variable winning device 32B is opened, and the game ball enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the inner area 320a. Furthermore, when the game ball that entered the internal area 320a of the second variable winning device 32B enters the specific ball entering section 320c, a V winning jackpot occurs and the first variable winning device 32A is opened. At the same time, similarly to the above, a predetermined jackpot effect is started on the effect display device 42 (see FIG. 160).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165(a), during the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)", the "time saving A mode" ends without a jackpot state occurring, and the game mode changes to " When switching to the "normal mode," the "rush stage performance" or "battle stage performance" ends in the performance display device 42, and the ball is put on hold based on the entry into the second starting winning section 33WB during the "time saving A mode." A "continuation chance stage performance" based on the stored second variable display is started (see FIG. 163).

Here, if at the end of the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)", there is no second variable display based on the ball entering the second starting winning section 33WB stored in reserve. , "continuation chance stage production" is not executed. Further, the duration of the "continuation chance stage performance" differs depending on the number of pending second variable displays stored at the end of the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)". Therefore, in the present embodiment, a duration for up to four variable displays can be provided.

For example, in the "continuous chance stage production", as shown in Figure 163, similar to the "rush stage production", during the duration (during the period in which a maximum of 4 variable displays are executed), the player moves underwater continuously. Animation (continuous performance) is derived, and "small wins" are taught by display formats such as schools of fish passing by or fluttering, and "small wins" are taught by display formats such as the appearance of large creatures such as whales and the discovery of treasure chests. It is designed to teach you how to hit the jackpot.

In addition, when the "continuous chance stage production" starts, the "time-saving A mode (high ball entry state)" ends, so the instruction display area HW2 is displayed with " ← “Left-handed” is displayed. As a result, the player can change the game mode as soon as the "time saving A mode (rush stage performance or battle stage performance)" ends, thereby preventing problems such as wasting game balls. Can be suppressed.

As described above, when the "rush stage performance" is performed in this embodiment, the "rush stage performance" for 7 variable displays and the "continuation chance stage performance" for a maximum of 4 times are executed. During the period, a maximum of 11 (7 + 4) small winning lottery tickets will be held for variable display.

On the other hand, when a "Battle Stage Production" is performed, the "Battle Stage Production" for one fluctuating display and the "Continuation Chance Stage Production" for a maximum of 4 times are executed, up to a maximum of 4 times. A small winning lottery will be held for 5 variable displays (1 time + 4 times).

As described above, in this embodiment, the small winning probability is set to about 1/7, and the small winning state occurs during the "time saving A mode", and the second variable winning device 32B is in the open state. If so, the game ball will be able to enter the special ball entry section 320c with almost 100% probability, so when the "rush stage performance (15R jackpot or 8R jackpot)" is executed, the next jackpot will be On the other hand, if the "Battle Stage Production (4R Jackpot)" is executed, the player who is unable to obtain the next jackpot in succession is likely to have an advantage. It is easy to become in a state where it is not possible.

However, in this embodiment, during the execution period of the "continuous chance stage production", that is, while the remaining pending display of the second variable display in the normal state is being used up, neither the jackpot lottery nor the small prize lottery was won. In this case, the structure is such that a time-saving winning lottery is held.

Here, if you win a time-saving win, the game mode will internally change from "normal mode" to the winning time-saving win type ("30 time-saving wins," "40 time-saving wins," or "50 time-saving wins.") ) is set to switch to the "time saving B mode" the number of times corresponding to the number of times.

However, the "time-saving B mode" is a game mode that does not result in a "high ball entry state", and is a game state that is less interesting to the player than jackpots, small wins, etc. Therefore, even if the player wins the "time-saving B mode" during the execution of the "continuous chance stage production", the player's interest at this point is mainly in whether or not they can win the next jackpot. , a notification performance that notifies you that you have won the "time saving B mode" is carried out with priority over the "continuation chance stage performance" so as to interrupt the "continuation chance stage performance" or interrupt the "continuation chance stage performance". If the configuration is such that the player is not interested in the game, there is a risk that the player will be less interested in the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 165(b), when the "time saving B mode" is won during the execution of the "continuous chance stage performance", the game mode is internally changed from "normal mode" to "time saving B mode". Even if the mode is switched to "Continuation Chance Stage Production", the effect will not be notified on the performance display device 42 until all the remaining reservations in the second variable display are exhausted, and the "Continuation Chance Stage Production" will continue to be performed. .

However, in accordance with the expiration of the remaining reservation in the second variable display, the setting value of the "time saving B mode" is subtracted (updated) by the number of times set corresponding to the time saving winning type. For example, if the second variable display is performed once after the "time saving B mode" is set, the set value becomes a value subtracted by 1.

Then, when the "continuous chance stage performance" ends without acquiring a jackpot state, if the game mode is the "normal mode", the "normal stage performance" is executed on the performance display device 42.

On the other hand, when the "continuation chance stage performance" ends, if the game mode is the "time saving B mode", the "lucky stage performance" is executed on the performance display device 42, as shown in FIG. 164.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the "continuation chance stage performance" ends, a distribution performance is performed to liven up the game, such as whether to shift to a "normal stage performance" or a "lucky stage performance". The structure is as follows.

Furthermore, if you do not win in the time-saving lottery during the "continuous chance stage production" and move to "normal mode (normal stage production)" after the "continuous chance stage production" ends, and if you win in the time-saving lottery, The configuration is such that a different performance is executed when transitioning to the "time saving B mode (lucky stage performance)" after the end of the "continuous chance stage performance". For example, if the player wins the time-saving lottery, a performance such as a "resurrection mode" to enliven the game is performed, and then a transition to a "lucky stage performance" is performed.

With this configuration, even if the state does not shift to an advantageous state for the player due to the "rush stage performance" or the like, it is possible to give the player new hope and improve his desire to play. As a result, it is possible to provide a step-by-step performance that gives the player a sense of expectation, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In the "lucky stage performance", a variable display area HW1 is set in the performance display device 42, and basically the same decorative symbols as in the "normal mode" are displayed in a variable manner, with only the background display being different. In other words, "← left-handed hit" is displayed in the instruction display area HW2 above the variable display area HW1.

Further, in the hold display area HW3 below the variable display area HW1, hold icons H461 of a number corresponding to the number of holds in the first variable display are clearly displayed. In addition, if the first variable display is held and stored at the time when the "continuation chance stage performance" ends, the display mode in the variable display area HW1 will be a variable display mode in which decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the first variable display If it is not stored on hold, the display mode in the variable display area HW1 becomes a stop performance mode in which decorative symbols are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, in the "lucky stage performance", a number of times display area HW4 is set in the performance display device 42 (see FIG. 164). In the frequency display area HW4, the number of variable displays (the value of the second variable frequency counter B) corresponding to the remaining duration of the current "lucky stage performance" is clearly displayed. Therefore, when the value of the second variable number counter B is "28", "28 more times" is displayed in the number display area HW4.

As a result, by looking at the numerical value clearly displayed in the number of times display area HW4 in the "Lucky Stage Performance", the player can determine at which timing in the second variable display the specific condition that caused the "Time Saving B Mode" to occur. It is possible to understand by back calculation how much time has passed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

Then, each time the first variation display is performed, the value (the numerical value of the second variation counter B) is subtracted by 1 and displayed. Thereafter, when the set number of variable displays (the value of the second variable number counter B) becomes 0, the "Lucky Stage Performance" ends and the mode returns to the "Normal Mode (see FIG. 159)."

On the other hand, during the "time saving B mode (lucky stage performance)", if a jackpot is won based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning section 33WA, a "15R jackpot" is always awarded. Furthermore, after the end of the "15R jackpot", a "rush stage performance ("time-saving A mode" for 7 variable displays)" is given.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 151, in the lamp setting process of step SC3909, lighting patterns of lamps and electric decorations are set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the effect display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step SC3910, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the effect display performed on the effect display device 42. Further, when commands related to audio, such as notification of error occurrence, are transmitted from main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step SC3910.

In step SC3911, other processes such as control settings for customer waiting effects are performed. In other words, if the player does not play for a specified period of time, the mode shifts to the customer attracting mode or the energy saving mode, and the effect display device 42 does not display decorative patterns as a customer waiting effect (instead, A demonstration screen display is derived in which a series of moving images or still images are displayed, the screen is darkened, etc.

In step SC3912, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings in steps SC3905 to SC3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a decorative pattern in a variable manner.

After the processes of steps SC3905 to SC3912, which are performed every 2 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in step SC3904, the process moves to step SC3913, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information or not. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step SC3914, where it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step SC3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SC3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step SC3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As detailed above, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are a plurality of gaming states that have different degrees of advantage for the player, and if these occur overlappingly, this is appropriately notified to the player. That is required.

As an example, in the pachinko machine 10, which is a so-called 1-type 2-type mixer like this embodiment, a normal state (low ball entry state) in which it is difficult to enter a game ball into the second starting winning part 33WB is used. In this game, the player hits the game ball to the left and enters the first starting winning portion 33WA to aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, in a high ball state where it is easy to make the game ball enter the second starting prize part 33WB, which can be awarded after the end of the jackpot state, the game ball is hit right and the game ball enters the second starting winning part 33WB. The game is such that a small winning state is generated, a game ball is made to enter a specific ball entering section 320c in the opened second variable winning device 32B, and a jackpot state is aimed at.

Under such a configuration, in the present embodiment, in the high-hitting ball state (time-saving A mode) after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined performance (rush stage performance, etc.) is executed on the performance display device 42, and the high-balling state is After the end of the ball state, during the execution of the second variable display that entered the second starting winning part 33WB during the high ball state and was stored on hold (while the remaining hold of the second variable display is being used up), the production display A continuous performance (continuous chance stage performance) is executed in the device 42 to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to further improve interest, while the continuous performance is being executed, a specific gaming state (high performance) that cannot be said to be more advantageous to the player than a jackpot, small win, high ball entry state, etc. The configuration is such that a lottery is performed to generate a time-saving B mode in which the ball does not enter the ball state.

However, such a specific gaming state (time-saving B mode) is a gaming state that has a lower level of interest for the player compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so if the specific gaming state (time-saving B mode) is Even if you win, the fact that you have won a specific gaming state will be given priority over the continuous performance (continuation chance stage performance) (for example, by interrupting the continuous performance or interrupting the continuous performance). If the configuration is such that a notification effect is performed, there is a risk that the player's interest will decrease.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, if the player does not win either the jackpot lottery or the small prize lottery during the execution period of the "continuous chance stage production" after the end of the "rush stage production", The configuration is such that a time-saving winning lottery is held that can generate a "time-saving B mode."

Then, during the "time saving B mode (lucky stage performance)", if you win a jackpot based on the winning of the game ball in the first starting winning section 33WA, you will always be given a "15R jackpot", and furthermore, after the end of the The configuration is such that ``Rush stage production ('Time-saving A mode' for 7 variable displays)'' is provided.

As a result, even if the player does not win a jackpot or a small jackpot, the "time-saving B mode", which is more advantageous to the player than the "normal mode", can be provided at least, reducing the disappointment of the player, and It is possible to give new hope to players and improve their desire to play. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, during the execution of the second variable display during the execution of the "continuous chance stage production" (e.g. while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used up), the time-saving winning lottery of the "time-saving B mode" is performed. Even if you win, the "Time Saving B Mode" will progress internally, such as by subtracting the second fluctuation counter B to measure the duration of the "Time Saving B Mode". A configuration in which the "lucky stage performance" corresponding to the "time saving B mode" corresponding to the remaining number of times at that point is executed after the "continuation chance stage performance" ends without executing the corresponding notification display etc. on the performance display device 42. It becomes.

As a result, it is possible to give priority to the "continuation chance stage performance" which is of higher interest to the player, and it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the second variable display is being executed while the "continuation chance stage production" is being executed (e.g. while the remaining pending memory of the second variation display is being used up), the time-saving winning lottery is not won, and the "continuation chance stage production" is being executed. The game mode when switching to "Normal mode (normal stage production)" after the end of "Stage production" (game ball firing mode: left-handed hit), and after winning the time-saving lottery and after the "Continuation chance stage production" ends. The game mode (game ball launch mode: left-handed hit) when shifting to the "time saving B mode (lucky stage performance)" is the same. As a result, the player can decide (change) the game mode as soon as the "continuous chance stage performance" ends, regardless of whether or not he has won a time-saving hit, which will lead to unnecessary consumption of game balls. The occurrence of such problems can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) It may be implemented as a different type of pachinko machine from the pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment. In addition to the pachinko machine, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

For example, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine is configured to switch between the starting ball entry support state (high ball entry state or low ball entry state). Instead or in addition to this, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which the lottery mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) is switched. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to paying out prize balls, the pachinko machine may be configured to provide points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player to a storage medium such as a magnetic card.

Furthermore, the present invention may be implemented as a type of game machine in which the game balls are circulated within the game machine and are not directly paid out to the player, a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine.

(b) The configuration on the board surface of the game board 30 (the arrangement and number of the variable winning devices 32A, 32B, the starting winning parts 33WA, 33WB, the through gate 34, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be different. The configuration may also be adopted.

For example, in the embodiment described above, the through gate 34 and the second starting winning part 33WB are arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position that cannot be reached by the game ball that has flown down the left side area of the variable display unit 35). However, the configuration is not limited to this, and, for example, the second starting winning part 33WB may be arranged below the first starting winning part 33WA.

Alternatively, the first starting winning part 33WA may be arranged in a position where the game balls that have flown down the right side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach, or the game balls that have flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 may It is also possible to arrange the first variable winning device 32A and the second variable winning device 32B at an unreachable position.

In addition, the vertical positional relationship of the through gate 34, the second starting winning part 33WB, the first variable winning device 32A, and the second variable winning device 32B is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different arrangement may be adopted. Good too. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the first variable winning device 32A is arranged upstream of the second starting winning section 33WB.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the right general prize winning section 31B provided in the right side area of the variable display device unit 35 is omitted.

(c) The configuration of the second variable winning device 32B is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the embodiment described above, when a small winning state occurs and the ball entering opening 320b of the second variable winning device 32B is opened, the game ball enters the specific ball entering portion 320c at a rate of almost 100%, resulting in a jackpot. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a predetermined distribution mechanism is provided inside the second variable winning device 32B, so that even when game balls enter the second variable winning device 32B, a predetermined proportion is generated. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the ball does not enter the specific entering section 320c and the ball misses.

(d) The configuration related to various wins (big win, small win, time-saving win) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, three types of jackpots are set: "15R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "4R jackpot", but the number of rounds, opening time, and game mode awarded after the end are not limited to these. It is also possible to have a configuration in which other jackpot states with different conditions occur.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the jackpot type that is awarded when the game ball is won in the winning lottery is divided between when the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA and when it enters the second starting winning section 33WB. However, the ratio is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be a different distribution ratio.

In addition, the distribution ratio of the jackpot type awarded when winning in the winning lottery is the same when the game ball enters the first starting winning section 33WA and when it enters the second starting winning section 33WB. There may be.

Of course, instead of being a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that only generates one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot).

Further, regarding the small winnings, a gaming machine may be used that can generate multiple types of small winning states with different numbers of rounds, opening times, and the like.

Regarding time-saving wins, in the above embodiment, three types of time-saving wins are set: "per 30 time savings," "per 40 time savings," and "per 50 time savings." However, the present invention is not limited to this. Other time saving wins with different number of times saving may be set.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when performing the time-saving winning lottery, the winning/losing random number counter CC1 used in the jackpot lottery and the small winning lottery is used, but the random number counter CC1 for the time-saving winning lottery is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a time-saving winning lottery is performed separately when a jackpot lottery or a small winning lottery is not won. Alternatively, the time-saving winning lottery and the type lottery may be performed separately.

It should be noted that the probability of winning for various types of lottery in pachinko machines (soft lottery processing, mechanical mechanism lottery, etc.) is appropriately set for each machine type, and any value can be adopted.

(e) The configurations related to the various game modes (normal mode, time saving A mode, time saving B mode) are not limited to the above embodiments, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the "time saving A mode (fluctuating time saving mode with start ball entry support)" is always provided after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type, but the invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type Depending on the situation, the configuration may be such that the "time-saving A mode" is not provided, but the "normal mode" or the "time-saving B mode (fluctuating time-saving mode without starting pitch support)" is provided.

In addition, in the above embodiment, only the winning support mode ("high support mode" or "low support mode") is switched, but instead of or in addition to this, the lottery mode ("high probability support mode") is switched. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which switching is performed between "mode" or "low probability mode").

(f) Configurations related to various performance displays (for example, normal stage performance, battle stage performance, rush stage performance, continuous chance stage performance, lucky stage performance, etc.) are not limited to the above embodiments, and other different configurations may be used. may be adopted.

For example, in the "lucky stage performance", a continuous performance may be executed over multiple variable displays, such as a "rush stage performance".

In addition, although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, when performing a continuous performance spanning multiple fluctuating displays, a series of fluctuating displays during the duration of the continuous performance can be performed without performing a fluctuating pattern lottery each time. It is also possible to perform a variable effect display using a variable pattern table that defines a variable pattern (for example, a variable pattern for out-of-line variations for 30 variable displays).

More specifically, there is a variation pattern table that determines the operation time of each variation display during the continuous performance period (for example, the variation time of the first variation time is "5 seconds", the variation time of the second variation time is "7 seconds", etc. . . , a variation pattern table that defines the variation time for the 30th variation display such as "10 seconds" for the 30th variation display) may be used to perform a series of effect variation displays. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined time period for a predetermined variable display (variable time for a missed variation) is set depending on the number of variable displays scheduled to be executed.

If a jackpot is won in a predetermined number of fluctuating displays during the period in which this series of fluctuating displays is being performed, a fluctuating pattern table that defines a fluctuating pattern for losing fluctuations for the 30 fluctuating displays is created. It may be configured to ignore this and perform a variable display using a variable pattern obtained by taking into account a variable pattern table for jackpots.

(g) In the above embodiment, after the end of the "continuous chance stage performance", distribution performances are performed to liven up the game, such as whether to transition to the "normal stage performance" or to the "lucky stage performance". However, the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the distribution effect is omitted.

In addition, in the above embodiment, there is a case where the player does not win in the time-saving lottery during the "continuous chance stage performance" and shifts to "normal mode (normal stage performance)" after the "continuous chance stage performance" ends, and a case where the time-saving prize is won. The configuration is such that a different performance will be executed depending on when you win the lottery and move to "Time Saving B Mode (Lucky Stage Production)" after the "Continuation Chance Stage Production" ends, but this is not limited to the "Continuation Chance Stage Production". The same performance may be performed when transitioning to the "normal mode (normal stage performance)" and when transitioning to the "time saving B mode (lucky stage performance)" after the completion of the "stage performance".

(h) The configuration related to the specific effect is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, in the "continuous chance stage production" as a specific production in the above embodiment, an animation (continuous production) of continuously moving underwater is derived during the duration (during the period in which variable displays are executed up to four times). The configuration is as follows.

The specific effect is not limited to this, as long as the player can at least recognize the period, and may be, for example, a text suggestion or a display of a specific image (various characters or background images).

Furthermore, the "lucky stage performance" that is performed based on the end of a specific performance may be executed immediately after the specific performance ends, or may be performed after various processes related to the end of the specific performance have been performed during a predetermined period of time. A configuration may also be used.

(i) The configurations of the various counting means (first counting means, second counting means) are not limited to the above embodiments, and other configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, numerical data is set for each variation counter A, B, and by subtracting this, the remaining number of variations is grasped. Any configuration may be adopted as long as it can be counted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of various counting targets can be grasped by setting a flag each time a variable display is performed and counting the number of flags.

In addition, the first fluctuation number counter A in the above embodiment measures the duration of the "time saving A mode" (remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit) and is stored on hold at the end of the "time saving A mode". Although it is configured to be used for measuring the remaining execution period of the second variable display (the remaining pending consumption period, up to 4 times), separate counting counters may be provided for each.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when measuring the duration of the "time saving B mode" (the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the upper limit), a predetermined upper limit value (for example, 30 times) is set in the second fluctuation number counter B. By subtracting this value, the remaining number of fluctuations can be grasped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the second fluctuation number counter B can be added to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 30 times). A configuration may be adopted in which the remaining number of fluctuations can be grasped by comparing. In such a case, the set value (upper limit value) stored in the predetermined storage area will be updated (subtracted) every time the second variable display is performed. Then, at the end of the "time saving A mode", if the set value is greater than 0, the "lucky stage effect" is executed, and if it is smaller than 0, it is not executed.

(j) In addition to the above embodiment, when a "time saving win" is won, a configuration may be provided which notifies or suggests that fact, separately from the effect display device 42. For example, a frame lamp 102 or the like may be used to indicate that a "time saving win" will occur. This makes it possible for the player to feel a sense of expectation that the game will lead to a "time-saving win," and further improve the player's interest in the game. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which suggestions are made using a speaker SP as a voice generating means.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below along with their effects.

Conventional subject WA. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur overlappingly while a predetermined gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level gaming states overlap in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately notify the players without reducing their interest.

For example, as a type of pachinko machine, a pachinko machine called a 1 type 2 type mixer is known. Such a pachinko machine includes, for example, a first starting ball entry means that shoots (left-handed) a game ball into the left side area of the gaming area and a first starting ball entering means based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. A first display device that displays a variable display, a first holding device that can hold the first variable display a predetermined number of times, and a second starting ball entry device that shoots (hits to the right) a game ball into the right side area of the game area and aims it. a second display device that displays a second variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means; a second holding means capable of holding the second variable display a predetermined number of times; The system includes an opening/closing member that changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entering means and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter, and the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means. A jackpot lottery is conducted based on the balls, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a jackpot state advantageous to the player can be generated, and the game ball is entered into the second starting ball entry means. A game in which a small winning lottery is conducted based on balls, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a small winning state can be generated in which a predetermined variable winning device is released, and a ball enters the variable winning device. It is configured to be able to generate a jackpot state when a ball enters a specific ball entry means (V winning hole).

Generally, in such a pachinko machine, in a normal state (low support state) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering means, the game ball is hit left-handed and the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means. The gameplay is to let the ball hit and aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, in a high support state that can be given after the end of the jackpot state, where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering means, hit the right hand and let the game ball enter the second starting ball entering means. The game is such that a winning state is generated, a game ball is entered into a specific ball entering means (V winning hole) in the opened variable winning device, and a jackpot state is aimed at.

Under such a configuration, in recent years, in the high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means, and after the end of the high support state, during the high support state, During the execution of the second variable display that has entered the second starting ball entering means and is stored on hold (while the remaining hold of the second variable display is being used up), a continuation effect (continuation chance effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. Some gaming machines are also designed to increase the interest of players.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. Interest may decrease.

Therefore, in conventional pachinko machines, there is a need to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WA1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific response display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is performed based on the end of the specific effect. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: specific correspondence display execution means for executing.

According to the above-mentioned means WA1, during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific performance (continuation chance performance, etc.) is being executed (e.g., while the remaining pending memory of the second game operation is being used up), a specific game that can be executed is specified. Even if a specific condition that can generate a gaming state (for example, a time reduction mode that does not result in a high support state) is satisfied, internal operations such as starting the counting of the second gaming operation related to the specific gaming state A specific game state is advanced, but specific response displays such as notification performances corresponding to this are not executed, and after the end of the specific performance, specific response displays are executed for the remaining number of times at that point.

As a result, even if lower-level game states overlap in the middle, it is possible to give priority to a specific performance that is of higher interest to the player, which is preferable while suppressing a decline in interest for the player. It is possible to make notifications.

Means WA2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to means WA1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WA2, normally, the player is in the first special game state while playing the game in the first firing mode in which the game ball is fired toward the first area (first starting ball entering means). After this occurs, the game ball is fired to the player according to the game state, such as switching to the second firing mode in which the game ball is fired towards the second area (second starting ball entry means) and playing the game. It is configured to change the aspect.

As a result, the configuration related to the means WA1 can be realized with a simpler configuration, and the games can be diversified. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means WA3. comprising an opportunity ball entering means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball fired by the firing means can reach the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the game ball entering or passing through the opportunity ball entry means, the game ball is unable to enter or is difficult to enter as the second auxiliary state (low support state). Means WA2 characterized in that it is at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or easily enter, as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WA3, the trigger ball entering means is provided at a position that can be reached only by the game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through the second area, so that the action and effect of the means WA2 can be more assured. It can be made into something.

Means WA4. The first special game state generating means is
configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of the first special gaming states with different gaming values (for example, high support state, number of supports, number of rounds, etc.) given to the player;
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means is more important than the first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure lottery resulting from the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. The first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure drawing that occurred, and the first special gaming state that occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section, The gaming machine according to the means WA2 or WA3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (for example, high support state) is provided is increased.

According to the means WA4, when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering means and when the game ball enters the specific ball entering section than when the gaming ball enters the first starting ball entering means. In this case, the probability (allocation probability) of winning the first special game state with higher gaming value is higher.

As a result, when the predetermined release condition is satisfied, it becomes easier for more game balls to enter the second starting ball entry means, so the player can enter the first ball entry means with more advantageous gaming value. It becomes possible to obtain more special game states.

Means WA5. The first storage means stores a lottery result of the first win/fail lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means executes the lottery based on the lottery result. a first holding means for causing the first variable display to wait until after the first variable display that has already been executed;
The second storage means stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery resulting from the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery based on the lottery results. and second holding means for making the second variable display executed by the special display means wait until after the second variable display that has already been executed is completed,
Means WA2 to WA4 characterized in that when there is a variable display that is put on hold by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display that is put on hold by the second holding means is executed with priority. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means WA5, when playing a game in the second firing mode in which game balls are fired toward the second area (second starting ball entry means), more game balls can be fired in a shorter period of time. By allowing the balls to enter the second starting ball entry means, it is possible to execute more first and second winning lots in a shorter period of time. As a result, it is possible to further improve interest.

Means WA6. Said specific correspondence display execution means, when executing said specific correspondence display, specifies a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of said second counting means at that time, as described in any one of means WA1 to WA5. gaming machines.

According to the means WA6, the same effects as the means WB1 described later are achieved.

Means WA7. A gaming mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance, and the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance. The gaming machine according to any one of the means WA1 to WA6, characterized in that the gaming mode after the end of the specific effect is the same as the gaming mode when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the specific effect.

According to the means WA7, the same effects as the means WC1 described later are achieved.

Means WA8. During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of means WA1 to WA7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured differently.

According to the means WA8, the same effects as the means WD1 described later are achieved.

Means WA9. The gaming machine according to any one of means WA1 to WA8, characterized in that during the specific gaming state, a time period for a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WA9, the same effects as the means WE1 described later are achieved.

Means WA10. In addition to the specific correspondence display, means capable of notifying or suggesting that when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance is provided. A gaming machine according to any one of characterized means WA1 to WA9.

According to WA10, the same effects as the means WF1 described later are achieved.

Conventional assignment WB. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur overlappingly while a predetermined gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level gaming states overlap in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately notify the players without reducing their interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration of the 1 type and 2 type mixer described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second fluctuation display that entered the second starting ball entry means and was stored in the hold during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display is being used up). Some gaming machines are also seen in which a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) is executed on a variable display means to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. Interest may decrease.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (e.g., while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used) while a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) When a specific condition that allows a shortcut mode (such as a shortened mode) to occur is satisfied, the specific gaming state is internally advanced, such as by starting counting on the second variable display related to the specific gaming state, but the corresponding notification effect is If the configuration is such that the specific response display is not executed, but the specific response display is executed for the remaining number of times after the continuous performance ends, the specific response display will suddenly start after the continuous performance ends. There is a risk that the configuration may end up being

In addition, in the specific correspondence display, if there is an effect that displays a false value that does not correspond to the updated numerical information of the counting means (for example, ``29'') (for example, a display effect such as ``10 times remaining?'') In such a case, the player may not be able to grasp at which timing of the second variable display the specific condition that caused the specific gaming state was established, and may feel distrustful.

Therefore, in conventional pachinko machines, there is a need to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WB1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific response display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is performed based on the end of the specific effect. a specific response display execution means for executing;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when executing the specific correspondence display, the specific correspondence display execution means clearly displays a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time.

According to the means WB1, the same effects as those of the means WA1 are achieved. In addition, in the case of executing a specific correspondence display, this means clearly indicates a numerical value corresponding to the updated numerical information (for example, "29") of the second counting means (for example, a display effect such as "29 times remaining") ) is configured.

As a result, by looking at the numerical value specified in the specific correspondence display, the player can calculate backwards to determine at which timing the second gaming operation the specific condition that caused the specific gaming state was established. becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

Means WB2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to means WA1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WB2, the same effects as the means WA2 are achieved.

Means WB3. comprising an opportunity ball entering means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball fired by the firing means can reach the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the game ball entering or passing through the opportunity ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WB2 characterized in that it is at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or easily enter, as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WB3, the same effects as those of the means WA3 are achieved.

Means WB4. The first special game state generating means is
configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of the first special gaming states with different gaming values (for example, high support state, number of supports, number of rounds, etc.) given to the player;
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means is more important than the first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure lottery resulting from the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. The first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure drawing that occurred, and the first special gaming state that occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section, The gaming machine according to means WB2 or WB3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (for example, high support state) is provided is increased.

According to the means WB4, the same effects as the means WA4 are achieved.

Means WB5. The first storage means stores a lottery result of the first win/fail lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means executes the lottery based on the lottery result. a first holding means for causing the first variable display to wait until after the first variable display that has already been executed;
The second storage means stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery resulting from the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery based on the lottery results. and second holding means for making the second variable display executed by the special display means wait until after the second variable display that has already been executed is completed,
Means WB2 to means WB4 characterized in that, when there is a variable display held by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display held by the second holding means is executed with priority. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means WB5, the same effects as those of the means WA5 are achieved.

Means WB6. A gaming mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance, and the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance. The gaming machine according to any one of means WB1 to WB5, wherein the gaming mode after the end of the specific effect is the same as the gaming mode when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the specific effect.

According to the means WB6, the same effects as the means WC1 described later are achieved.

Means WB7. During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of means WB1 to WB6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured differently.

According to the means WB7, the same effects as the means WD1 described later are achieved.

Means WB8. The gaming machine according to any one of means WB1 to WB7, characterized in that during the specific gaming state, a time period for a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WB8, the same effects as the means WE1 described later are achieved.

Means WB9. In addition to the specific correspondence display, means capable of notifying or suggesting that when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance is provided. A gaming machine according to any one of characterized means WB1 to WB8.

According to the above-mentioned WB9, the same effects as the means WF1 described later are achieved.

Conventional issue WC. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur overlappingly while a predetermined gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level gaming states overlap in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately notify the players without reducing their interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration of the 1 type and 2 type mixer described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second fluctuation display that entered the second starting ball entry means and was stored in the hold during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display is being used up). Some gaming machines are also seen in which a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) is executed on a variable display means to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. There is a risk that interest will decrease.

In addition, for example, during the execution of the second variable display during the execution of a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) (e.g. while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used up), the time during which a specific gaming state (for example, a high support state) does not occur can be shortened. If the game mode after the end of the continuous performance (for example, the game ball launch mode) is different depending on whether a specific condition that allows a game to occur (e.g. mode, etc.) is satisfied and a case where the specific condition is not satisfied, the player When the continuous performance ends, the game mode cannot be determined (changed), and there is a risk that problems such as game balls will be wasted.

Therefore, in conventional pachinko machines, there is a need to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WC1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific response display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is performed based on the end of the specific effect. a specific response display execution means for executing;
A gaming mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance, and the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance. A gaming machine characterized in that the game mode after the end of the specific performance is the same when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the game.

According to the means WC1, the same effects as the means WA1 are achieved. In addition, in this means, during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific effect, the game mode after the end of the specific effect (for example, the shooting mode of the game ball) when the specific condition is satisfied, and the specific condition The game mode after the end of the specific performance in the case where the above is not established is the same.

As a result, the player can decide (change) the game mode as soon as the specific performance ends, regardless of whether the specific conditions are met or not. The occurrence of defects can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

Means WC2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to the means WC1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WC2, the same effects as the means WA2 are achieved.

Means WC3. comprising an opportunity ball entering means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball fired by the firing means can reach the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the game ball entering or passing through the opportunity ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized in that it is at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WC3, the same effects as the means WA3 are achieved.

Means WC4. The first special game state generating means is
configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of the first special gaming states with different gaming values (for example, high support state, number of supports, number of rounds, etc.) given to the player;
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means is more important than the first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure lottery resulting from the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. The first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure drawing that occurred, and the first special gaming state that occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section, The gaming machine according to the means WC2 or WC3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (for example, high support state) is provided is increased.

According to the means WC4, the same effects as the means WA4 are achieved.

Means WC5. The first storage means stores a lottery result of the first win/fail lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means executes the lottery based on the lottery result. a first holding means for causing the first variable display to wait until after the first variable display that has already been executed;
The second storage means stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery resulting from the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery based on the lottery results. and second holding means for making the second variable display executed by the special display means wait until after the second variable display that has already been executed is completed,
Means WC2 to means WC4 characterized in that, when there is a variable display held by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display held by the second holding means is executed with priority. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means WC5, the same effects as those of the means WA5 are achieved.

Means WC6. The means described in any one of means WC1 to WC5, characterized in that, when executing the specific correspondence display, the specific correspondence display execution means clearly displays a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time. gaming machines.

According to the means WC6, the same effects as the means WB1 are achieved.

Means WC7. During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of means WC1 to WC6, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured differently.

According to the means WC7, the same effects as the means WD1 described later are achieved.

Means WC8. The gaming machine according to any one of means WC1 to WC7, wherein during the specific gaming state, a time period for a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WC8, the same effects as the means WE1 described later are achieved.

Means WC9. In addition to the specific correspondence display, means capable of notifying or suggesting that when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance is provided. A gaming machine according to any one of characterized means WC1 to WC8.

According to the above-mentioned WC9, the same effects as the means WF1 described later are achieved.

Conventional assignment WD. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur overlappingly while a predetermined gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level gaming states overlap in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately notify the players without reducing their interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration of the 1 type and 2 type mixer described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second fluctuation display that entered the second starting ball entry means and was stored in the hold during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display is being used up). Some gaming machines are also seen in which a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) is executed on a variable display means to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. There is a risk that interest will decrease.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (e.g., while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used) while a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) When a specific condition that allows a shortcut mode (such as a shortened mode) to occur is satisfied, the specific gaming state is internally advanced, such as by starting counting on the second variable display related to the specific gaming state, but the corresponding notification effect is If the configuration is such that the specific response display is not executed, but the specific response display is executed for the remaining number of times at that point after the end of the continuous performance, the specific response display will be suddenly specified without any warning after the end of the continuous performance. There is a possibility that the configuration is such that the correspondence display is started.

Therefore, in conventional pachinko machines, there is a need to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WD1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific response display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is performed based on the end of the specific effect. specific response display execution means for executing;
During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine characterized by being configured differently.

According to the means WD1, the same effects as those of the means WA1 are achieved. In addition, the present means is configured such that the effect display mode after the specific effect is completed depends on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied at the time of the end of the specific effect.

For the player, this configuration can be a display effect that indicates whether or not to move to a specific gaming state after the end of a specific effect, so even if the specific effect does not shift to a state advantageous to the player, the player It is possible to give new hope to players and improve their desire to play. As a result, it is possible to provide a step-by-step performance that gives the player a sense of expectation, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Means WD2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to means WD1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WD2, the same effects as the means WA2 are achieved.

Means WD3. comprising an opportunity ball entering means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball fired by the firing means can reach the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the game ball entering or passing through the opportunity ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized in that it is at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WD3, the same effects as those of the means WA3 are achieved.

Means WD4. The first special game state generating means is
configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of the first special gaming states with different gaming values (for example, high support state, number of supports, number of rounds, etc.) given to the player;
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means is more important than the first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure lottery resulting from the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. The first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure drawing that occurred, and the first special gaming state that occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section, The gaming machine according to the means WD2 or WD3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (for example, high support state) is provided is increased.

According to the means WD4, the same effects as the means WA4 are achieved.

Means WD5. The first storage means stores a lottery result of the first win/fail lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means executes the lottery based on the lottery result. a first holding means for causing the first variable display to wait until after the first variable display that has already been executed;
The second storage means stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery resulting from the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery based on the lottery results. and second holding means for making the second variable display executed by the special display means wait until after the second variable display that has already been executed is completed,
Means WD2 to means WD4 characterized in that, when there is a variable display held by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display held by the second holding means is executed with priority. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means WD5, the same effects as those of the means WA5 are achieved.

Means WD6. The specific correspondence display execution means is characterized in that, when executing the specific correspondence display, the means specifies a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time, according to any one of means WD1 to WD5. gaming machines.

According to the means WD6, the same effects as the means WB1 are achieved.

Means WD7. A gaming mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance, and the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance. The gaming machine according to any one of means WD1 to WD6, wherein the gaming mode after the end of the specific effect is the same as the gaming mode when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the specific effect.

According to the means WD7, the same effects as the means WC1 are achieved.

Means WD8. The gaming machine according to any one of means WD1 to WD7, wherein during the specific gaming state, a time period for a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WD8, the same effects as the means WE1 described later are achieved.

Means WD9. In addition to the specific correspondence display, means capable of notifying or suggesting that when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance is provided. A gaming machine according to any one of characterized means WD1 to WD8.

According to the above-mentioned WD9, the same effects as the means WF1 described later are achieved.

Conventional subject WE. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur overlappingly while a predetermined gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level gaming states overlap in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately notify the players without reducing their interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration of the 1 type and 2 type mixer described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second fluctuation display that entered the second starting ball entry means and was stored in the hold during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display is being used up). Some gaming machines are also seen in which a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) is executed on a variable display means to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. There is a risk that interest will decrease.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (e.g., while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used) while a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) When a specific condition that allows a shortcut mode (such as a shortened mode) to occur is satisfied, the specific gaming state is internally advanced, such as by starting counting on the second variable display related to the specific gaming state, but the corresponding notification effect is If the configuration is such that a specific response display is not executed, but after the continuation performance ends, a specific response display is executed for the remaining number of times at that point, a variety of performances can be performed during the continuation period of the specific gaming state. If you try to do this, there is a risk that the process will become complicated.

Therefore, in conventional pachinko machines, there is a need to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WE1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation in which the specific performance is executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. does not execute the specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means, and displays the specific response corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time based on the end of the specific effect. A specific corresponding display execution means for executing the display,
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specific gaming state, a time period for a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations scheduled to be executed.

According to the above-mentioned means WE1, the same effects as the above-mentioned means WA1 are achieved. In addition, this means is configured to set the time of a predetermined game operation in accordance with the number of game operations scheduled to be executed during a specific game state.

This configuration is based on an operation pattern table that defines the operation time of each game operation during the duration of a specific game state (for example, the first game operation time is "5 seconds", the second game operation time is "7 seconds", etc.). This can be realized by providing an operation pattern table, etc. that defines the 30th game operation time "10 seconds" and the operation time for 30 game operations.

Thereby, it is possible to execute a series of effects (continuous effects) spanning multiple game operations during the duration of the specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. Further, since there is no need to perform processing to determine the operation time each time a game operation is executed, the processing can be simplified.

Means WE2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
The game according to the means WE1, characterized in that it comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WE2, the same effects as the means WA2 are achieved.

Means WE3. comprising an opportunity ball entering means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball fired by the firing means can reach the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the game ball entering or passing through the opportunity ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized in that it is at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the above-mentioned means WE3, the same effects as the above-mentioned means WA3 are achieved.

Means WE4. The first special game state generating means is
configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of the first special gaming states with different gaming values (for example, high support state, number of supports, number of rounds, etc.) given to the player;
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means is more important than the first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure lottery resulting from the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. The first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure drawing that occurred, and the first special gaming state that occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section, The gaming machine according to the means WE2 or WE3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (for example, high support state) is provided is increased.

According to the means WE4, the same effects as the means WA4 are achieved.

Means WE5. The first storage means stores a lottery result of the first win/fail lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means executes the lottery based on the lottery result. a first holding means for causing the first variable display to wait until after the first variable display that has already been executed;
The second storage means stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery resulting from the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery based on the lottery results. and second holding means for making the second variable display executed by the special display means wait until after the second variable display that has already been executed is completed,
Means WE2 to WE4 characterized in that when there is a variable display that is put on hold by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display that is put on hold by the second holding means is executed with priority. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means WE5, the same effects as those of the means WA5 are achieved.

Means WE6. Said specific correspondence display execution means, when executing said specific correspondence display, specifies a numerical value corresponding to numerical information of said second counting means at that time, as described in any one of means WE1 to WE5. gaming machines.

According to the means WE6, the same effects as those of the means WB1 are achieved.

Means WE7. A gaming mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance, and the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance. The gaming machine according to any one of means WE1 to WE6, characterized in that the gaming mode after the end of the specific effect is the same as the gaming mode when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the specific effect.

According to the means WE7, the same effects as the means WC1 are achieved.

Means WE8. During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or the specific condition is not satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of means WE1 to WE7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured differently.

According to the means WE8, the same effects as the means WD1 are achieved.

Means WE9. In addition to the specific correspondence display, means capable of notifying or suggesting that when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance is provided. A gaming machine according to any one of characterized means WE1 to WE8.

According to the above-mentioned WE9, the same effects as the means WF1 described later are achieved.

Conventional assignment WF. Conventionally, gaming machines have a plurality of gaming states with different degrees of advantage, and when each occurrence condition is satisfied, a corresponding gaming state occurs.

As a type of gaming machine, a game is played by shooting a game ball into a game area, and a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery. , Pachinko machines that generate gaming conditions advantageous to players are known (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-31769).

The gaming states of a pachinko machine, such as the normal state, the time-saving state with electric support (electronic support), the time-saving state without electric support, the definite variable state with time-saving, and the definite variable state without time-saving, are basically established independently, and between them, When the conditions are satisfied, the game state moves to a higher level game state or to a lower game state.

Furthermore, depending on the gaming machine, a higher level gaming state may occur overlappingly while a predetermined gaming state is being executed.

In this case, it is desirable for the player that a higher-ranking gaming state occurs, so if a notification corresponding to a higher-ranking gaming state or a notification indicating that it overlaps with a higher-ranking gaming state is provided, the player will be more It can provide a high level of interest.

However, there is no precedent for a gaming machine in which lower-level gaming states overlap in the middle, and in such a gaming machine, it is necessary to appropriately notify the players without reducing their interest.

For example, in recent years, under the configuration of the 1 type and 2 type mixer described in the above conventional problem WA, in a high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined effect (rush effect, etc.) is executed on the variable display means. At the same time, after the end of the high support state, during the execution of the second fluctuation display that entered the second starting ball entry means and was stored in the hold during the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display is being used up). Some gaming machines are also seen in which a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) is executed on a variable display means to improve the player's interest.

Furthermore, in order to further improve interest, during the execution of continuous performance, specific game states (for example, periods during which high support states are not reached) that are less advantageous to the player than jackpots, small wins, high support states, etc. It is also conceivable to add a configuration that performs a lottery that generates a shortcut mode, etc.).

However, such a specific gaming state is a gaming state in which the level of interest for the player is lower compared to jackpots, small wins, etc., so even if the player wins the specific gaming state during the execution of the continuous performance, the corresponding If the configuration is such that a notification effect that notifies the player that he or she has won a specific gaming state is given priority over the continuous effect (for example, by interrupting the continuous effect or interrupting the continuous effect), it would be a problem for the player. There is a risk that interest will decrease.

On the other hand, for example, during the execution of the second variable display (e.g., while the remaining pending memory of the second variable display is being used) while a continuous effect (continuous chance effect, etc.) When a specific condition that allows a shortcut mode (such as a shortened mode) to occur is satisfied, the specific gaming state is internally advanced, such as by starting counting on the second variable display related to the specific gaming state, but the corresponding notification effect is If the configuration is such that the specific response display is not executed, but the specific response display is executed for the remaining number of times at that point after the end of the continuous performance, the specific response display will be suddenly specified without any warning after the end of the continuous performance. There is a possibility that the configuration is such that the correspondence display is started.

Therefore, in conventional pachinko machines, there is a need to further improve the interest for players.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to provide appropriate notification when gaming states with different degrees of advantage overlap, and to provide further benefits to players. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve interest.

Means WF1. a first execution means capable of executing a first game operation when a first starting condition is satisfied;
a second execution means capable of executing a second game round operation upon establishment of a second starting condition different from the first starting condition;
a first storage means capable of storing the establishment of the first starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
a second storage means capable of storing the establishment of the second starting condition up to a predetermined upper limit;
A gaming machine comprising: an auxiliary means capable of switching a state between a first auxiliary state that makes it easier to satisfy the second starting condition and a second auxiliary state that makes it difficult to satisfy the second starting condition. ,
a first counting means capable of executing counting corresponding to the second gaming operation in a predetermined gaming state;
a subtraction means capable of subtracting predetermined numerical information of the first counting means based on establishment of a predetermined subtraction condition;
performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance as a corresponding performance during execution of the second game operation in the predetermined gaming state;
During execution of the second game operation during execution of the specific performance, if a specific condition that can generate a specific game state in which the specific game can be executed is satisfied, counting corresponding to the specific game can be executed. Information setting means capable of setting specific numerical information to the second counting means;
updating means for updating specific numerical information of the second counting means based on establishment of a predetermined update condition;
If the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed during the predetermined state at least until the first counting means is subtracted to a specific value. A means of continuation that can be carried out continuously,
When the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation during the execution of the specific performance, specific numerical information is set in the second counting means, and the specific numerical value of the second counting means is set. The specific numerical information of the second counting means is updated when the update condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game operation while the specific performance is being executed without executing a specific correspondence display corresponding to the information. The specific response display corresponding to the updated specific numerical information of the second counting means is not executed, and the specific response display corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time is performed based on the end of the specific effect. specific response display execution means for executing;
In addition to the specific correspondence display, means capable of notifying or suggesting that when the specific condition is satisfied during execution of the second game round operation during execution of the specific performance, the game apparatus further comprises: A gaming machine featuring:

According to the means WF1, the same effects as those of the means WA1 are achieved. In addition, in this means, when a specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during execution of a specific performance, it is possible to notify or suggest that fact separately from the specific correspondence display (display means). It is configured to include means (for example, a predetermined light emitting means, a means for outputting sound, etc.).

Thereby, the player can predict that the specific condition will be satisfied before the end of the specific performance, and the player can make preparations after the end of the specific performance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as wasteful consumption of game balls, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

Means WF2. a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
A game ball is provided at a position within the game area that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "left-handed") by the firing means so as to pass through at least the first area. a first starting ball entry means;
A game ball is provided in the game area so that the game ball can enter the game area at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired (for example, "hit right") by the firing means so as to pass through at least a second area. a second starting ball entry means;
a first lottery means that performs a first lottery (for example, a jackpot lottery) with a first winning probability due to the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means;
a second lottery means that performs a second lottery (for example, a small winning lottery) with a second winning probability higher than the first winning probability due to the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means; ,
After performing the first variable display as the first game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery is caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means where the first starting condition is satisfied. a first special display means as the first execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the result;
After performing the second variable display as the second game round operation, the first winning/failure lottery or the a second special display means as the second execution means that performs a stop display in a specific manner based on the lottery result of the second lottery;
When a winning result is obtained in the first lottery, a first special game state is generated that causes a first special game state advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot state in which the player obtains a large number of game balls). means and
a second special game state generating means for generating a second special game state (for example, a small winning state) that is less advantageous to the player than the first special game state when a winning result is obtained in the second win/fail lottery; ,
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a first special variable ball entry means (for example, a jackpot winning device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
A game ball is provided at a position that can be reached by a game ball fired by the firing means so as to pass through at least the second area, and an open state in which a game ball flowing down the second area can enter; a second special variable ball entry means (for example, a small winning prize device) having at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state in which a ball cannot enter;
a first opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the first special variable ball entry means when the first special game state occurs;
a second opening/closing control means that controls opening and closing of the second special variable ball entry means when the second special game state occurs;
a specific ball entry section into which a game ball that enters the second special variable ball entry means can enter;
A game according to means WF1, characterized in that the game comprises a specific ball entry section first special game state generating means that generates the first special gaming state when a game ball enters the specific ball entry section. Machine.

According to the means WF2, the same effects as those of the means WA2 are achieved.

Means WF3. comprising an opportunity ball entering means (for example, a through gate) provided at a position where only the game ball fired by the firing means can reach the second area,
The auxiliary means is
When the predetermined release condition is satisfied due to the game ball entering or passing through the opportunity ball entry means, the second auxiliary state (low support state) is such that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter. Means WC2 characterized in that it is at least one opening/closing member that can be displaced between a closed state and an open state in which a game ball can enter or can easily enter as the first auxiliary state (high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means WF3, the same effects as those of the means WA3 are achieved.

Means WF4. The first special game state generating means is
configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of the first special gaming states with different gaming values (for example, high support state, number of supports, number of rounds, etc.) given to the player;
The entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entering means is more important than the first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure lottery resulting from the entering of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. The first special gaming state that occurs based on the first winning/failure drawing that occurred, and the first special gaming state that occurs due to the entry of the game ball into the specific ball entry section, The gaming machine according to the means WF2 or WF3, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that the proportion of more advantageous gaming value (for example, high support state) is provided is increased.

According to the means WF4, the same effects as those of the means WA4 are achieved.

Means WF5. The first storage means stores a lottery result of the first win/fail lottery caused by the entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entry means, and the first special display means executes the lottery based on the lottery result. a first holding means for causing the first variable display to wait until after the first variable display that has already been executed;
The second storage means stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery resulting from the entry of game balls into the second starting ball entry means, and stores the lottery results of the first win/fail lottery or the second win/fail lottery based on the lottery results. and second holding means for making the second variable display executed by the special display means wait until after the second variable display that has already been executed is completed,
Means WF2 to means WF4 characterized in that when there is a variable display that is put on hold by the first holding means and the second holding means, the variable display that is put on hold by the second holding means is executed with priority. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the means WF5, the same effects as those of the means WA5 are achieved.

Means WF6. The specific correspondence display execution means is characterized in that when executing the specific correspondence display, it clearly displays a numerical value corresponding to the numerical information of the second counting means at that time. gaming machines.

According to the means WF6, the same effects as those of the means WB1 are achieved.

Means WF7. A gaming mode after the end of the specific performance when the specific condition is satisfied during the execution of the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance, and the second game round operation during the execution of the specific performance. The gaming machine according to any one of means WF1 to WF6, wherein the gaming mode after the end of the specific effect is the same as the gaming mode when the specific condition is not satisfied during the execution of the specific effect.

According to the means WF7, the same effects as those of the means WC1 are achieved.

Means WF8. During the execution of the second game operation during which the specific effect is being executed, the effect display mode after the end of the specific effect is different depending on whether the specific condition is satisfied or the specific condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine according to any one of means WF1 to WF7, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured differently.

According to the means WF8, the same effects as the means WD1 are achieved.

Means WF9. The gaming machine according to any one of means WF1 to WF8, wherein during the specific gaming state, a time period for a predetermined gaming operation is set according to the number of gaming operations scheduled to be executed.

According to the stage WF9, the same effects as the means WE1 can be achieved.

Incidentally, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of the means WB1 to WB9. The configuration of a part or all of any of the above means WC1 to means WC9, the structure of a part or all of any of the above means WD1 to WD9, the above means WE1 to WE9 The configuration of a part or all of any one of the above means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WB1 to WB9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of a part or all of the means WB1 to WB9. a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the means WE1 to WD9; The structure of a part or all of any one of WE9 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of a part or all of the means WB1 to WB9. a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the means WE1 to WD9; The structure of a part or all of any one of WE9 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of a part or all of the means WB1 to WB9. a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the means WE1 to WD9; The structure of a part or all of any one of WE9 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WE1 to WE9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of a part or all of the means WA1 to WA10, to the means WB1 to WB9. a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the means WE1 to WD9; The structure of a part or all of any one of WE9 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Similarly, for a gaming machine having a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9, a configuration of a part or all of any of the means WA1 to WA10, and a configuration of a part or all of the means WB1 to WB9. a part or all of any of the means WC1 to WC9, a part or all of any of the means WD1 to WD9, a part or all of the means WE1 to WD9; The structure of a part or all of any one of WE9 and the structure of a part or all of any of the means WF1 to WF9 may be arbitrarily combined and implemented.

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means (such as a firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing device) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and A pinball gaming machine that is equipped with a gaming area (gaming board, etc.) through which game balls are guided, and various ball entry means (general prize opening, variable winning device, starting prize opening, etc.) arranged in the gaming area. Can be mentioned.

(b) The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

[Fourth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with those of the first to third embodiments described above (same components, same processing contents, etc.) will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals.

The gaming machine according to the present invention (pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment) includes a movable body as a movable means of the present invention, a display control section as a display control means of the present invention, and a movable body as a movable control means of the present invention. The present invention has a movable control section, a determination function section as a determination means of the present invention, and a termination function section as a termination means of the present invention.

The "display means" only needs to be provided in the gaming area and capable of executing one specific performance determined from among a plurality of performance display modes in response to the results of various lottery results, and the gist of the present invention can be realized. It can be anything. For example, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, at least the gaming area may be installed on the center frame attached to the gaming board that constitutes the gaming area, or on the back side of the gaming board that is translucent. It is sufficient if it is provided within the range of .

The "specific effect" may be any display effect that can be executed by the display means, as long as it can realize the gist of the present invention. For example, a symbol fluctuation performance in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, various reach performances performed in a reach state or their development performances, a winning notification performance that notifies the player of winning in a jackpot state or a small win state, a jackpot state or a small win. A win type confirmation performance or promotion performance that determines the type of state, an opening performance performed at the start of a jackpot state or a small win state, a round performance or promotion performance or continuous performance performed during a round of a jackpot state or a small win state, a jackpot. A winning performance that is performed over multiple rounds during a state of winning or a small winning state, an ending performance that is performed at the end of a state of jackpot or a small winning state, and a mode determining performance that determines the type of game mode to be given after the end of a state of jackpot. , a support continuation effect that determines whether or not a support mode advantageous to the player will continue.

The "movable means" may be provided in the gaming area, and may have any shape, size, Regardless of the arrangement position, movable mode, etc., any arrangement may be used as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. For example, a display device attached to a game board constituting a game area or a center frame surrounding it, a display device placed on a decorative member attached to a game board, a variable winning device attached to a game board, or If it is located at least within the gaming area when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, such as one placed in the internal area of the gaming machine, or one placed on the back side of a translucent gaming board, etc. good.

A "series of specific operations" refers to a plurality of predetermined operations in which the movable means is positioned at or near the first position between the first position, which is the initial position, and the second position, which is the most moved position. Any method may be used as long as it is executed twice and can realize the gist of the present invention. For example, movable means that can slide or vibrate in vertical, horizontal, longitudinal, or diagonal directions move back and forth between a first position and a second position multiple times; The movable means, which is rotatable, swingable, or tiltable, may move back and forth between the first position and the second position a plurality of times.

The "operating condition" may be one that causes the movable means to perform a series of specific operations based on the fulfillment of the condition, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a predetermined variable display effect may be used. that the fluctuating display starts, that a predetermined period of time passes after the start of the fluctuating display, that a predetermined effect is performed a predetermined number of times, that a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area, or that a predetermined number of balls enter a predetermined ball entry area. A game ball enters the ball, a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on the ball entry and a predetermined result is obtained, a predetermined operating means is operated or operated a predetermined number of times, and based on the operation It may be anything, such as holding a lottery with a predetermined probability and achieving a predetermined result, or a predetermined count reaching an upper limit.

The "specific information" is set corresponding to one movable mode, and it is sufficient if the movable means can be made to perform a series of specific operations based on this.If the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, the setting information As a table, various setting information groups such as information that determines the movement direction, information that determines the movement distance, information that determines the operation time, information that determines the number of times the operation is executed, information that determines the termination condition of the operation, etc. It may be any information such as information stored in the configuration.

The "termination condition" may be one that stops the movable means based on the fulfillment of the condition and terminates a series of specific operations.For example, if the gist of the present invention can be realized, The means is operated or operated a predetermined number of times, a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display has stopped, the stop of the variable display has been confirmed, a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable display has stopped, a predetermined A game ball enters the ball entry area, a predetermined number of game balls enter the ball, a predetermined action is completed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined number of game balls are fired or paid out, etc. You can.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a movable body performs a plurality of types of movable modes. When operating a movable body in one movable mode, if the corresponding motion data is read in advance for each movement in one movable mode, depending on the movable mode, reading may be required an enormous number of times, and control It's a big burden. In order to solve this problem, if motion data corresponding to a series of motions is set and a series of motions is executed based on the motion data, the control burden is reduced, but it is necessary to determine the end of a suitable series of motions. It will be done.

Now, FIG. 166 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 167 is a perspective view, and FIG. 168 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 169 is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame 12, game board 30, etc. FIG. 170 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 171 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, back pack unit 203, etc. are opened. However, in FIG. 168, for convenience, the nails and various accessories disposed on the game board 30, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 168 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

As shown in FIG. 171 etc., the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 166). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 171) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 170). Additionally, as shown in FIG. 168, a pair of upper and lower receivers 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 168, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 166, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is now possible. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

In addition, a performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower tray 15 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The production button 125 is configured so that the player can press it (press it downward). Further, inside the lower plate 15, an operation detection switch (not shown) is provided as an operation detection means for detecting a pressing operation of the production button 125. When the production button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to a sub-control device 262, which will be described later. As a result, when the player presses the performance button 125, a predetermined performance is performed on the performance display device 42, the speaker SP, the LED boards 48A, 48B, 48C, etc. as control targets, as will be described later. The contents may change.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and projects toward the front. The handle 18, which serves as an operating means that can be operated by the player, includes, for example, a base fixed to the front frame set 14, and a rotary operating section as a first operating section that is rotatably assembled to the base. , a variable resistor as operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the rotary operation section, a firing stop switch as a second operation section that can select whether or not to launch the game ball into the game area, etc. .

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as "launching device") 60 as a launching means to be described later while arranging them in a line. In addition, when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication path 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 as operation means that can be operated by the player. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19. Further, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Further, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball extraction button 123 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Furthermore, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting or blinking according to changes in the gaming state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach. For example, a frame lamp 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided around the periphery of the window portion 101. Additionally, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the frame lamp 102, which are turned on in the event of a predetermined error. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the upper part of each error display lamp 104 of the frame lamp 102, corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 168) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 168, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIG. 169. At the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a firing device 60 and a firing rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after being fired from the firing device 60. installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device having a plunger serving as a driving member is employed as the firing device 60.

In the present embodiment, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from being launched based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the firing device 60 is allowed to launch.

A ball feeding device 63 is provided above the firing device 60. The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by a driving means such as a solenoid.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 168 and 169 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352 to be described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19 ) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like and almost closes the exit of the dispensing passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear ends of the lower plate communication path 71 and the upper plate communication path 73. In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective entrances of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 and the payout passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance apart, and the gap between them is replaced by the game ball. is allowed to pass.

In addition, since the entrance of the lower tray communication path 71 and the entrance of the upper tray communication path 73 are provided adjacent to each other, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are full of game balls, the balls are not put out. The game balls flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and are delivered to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication path 71.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) at the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 serving as the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 169. The game board 30 in this embodiment is based on a transparent plate, which is a light-transmitting member formed into a flat plate shape from a resin material having light-transmitting properties, such as polycarbonate, acrylic resin, and ABS resin. (game board main body). Here, "transparent" does not only mean that objects existing in the rear area of the game board 30 can be seen in a completely transparent state, but also that at least a portion of light can be transmitted and the presence of the object can be seen. It may also include a so-called semi-transparent state.

With this configuration, the player can view various objects such as lamps and display devices arranged in the rear area of the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light emitting means are arranged at the rear position of a predetermined area in the gaming area, and the player , the light emitted from the LED can be seen from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. Incidentally, the LED board 48A and the like are controlled to light up and blink in a predetermined light emitting manner in response to various game performances, and serve to enhance the performance effect during the game.

In addition, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 formed of a band-shaped metal plate, and a rail 50 that guides the game ball fired from the firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. is installed. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 169). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 169) of the outer rail component 52. As a result, the game ball fired with more than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball launched by the launcher 60 passes the return ball prevention member 53, it may flow backwards through the rail 50, so the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the play area. .

In addition, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a space for dropping game balls that have fallen through the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed that guides the ball to the dish 15. As a result, if a game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. be discharged.

The game board 30 includes a general winning opening (general winning section) 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper starting winning opening 33YA, a lower starting winning opening 33YB, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L, and A second special display device 43R and the like are disposed so as to be fitted into attachment holes formed through the transparent plate.

Furthermore, in the front area of the game board 30, that is, in the game area formed on the front side of the game board 30, in order to allocate the falling direction of the game ball in a predetermined area and guide the game ball to a predetermined position, A large number of nails 49, windmills 57, etc. are arranged.

The game balls guided to the game area flow down through various paths while having their flow direction and rotation direction changed by nails 49 and the like. Then, some of the plurality of game balls guided to the game area are guided to the windmill 57 while moving relatively through various routes, and the windmill 57 divides the falling routes to the left and right.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the gaming area is widely expanded in the left and right direction, by providing the windmill 57 etc., the gaming ball can be moved to the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the variable winning device 32 etc. It is constructed so that it is easy to guide the person to the destination. In addition, the nails 49 and the like are adjusted in advance on the game board 30 so that winnings to the top starting prize opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, etc. occur with a moderate probability.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with winning detection switches as ball entering detection means for detecting game balls that have won into the various winning holes, corresponding to various winning holes (ball entering means) such as the general winning hole 31. It is being Specifically, as shown in FIG. 169, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. In addition, a first starting winning switch 224A is provided in the upper starting winning opening 33YA, and a second starting winning switch 224B is provided in the lower starting winning opening 33YB. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

As is well known, when a game ball wins (balls entered) into various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning hole 33YA, and the lower starting winning hole 33YB, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the (or lower tray 15). For example, if there is a prize in the upper starting prize opening 33YA, there will be 3 prizes, if there is a winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, one prize will be awarded, and if there is a winning in the general winning opening 31, there will be 10 prizes. When there is a win in the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15). Here, the upper starting winning hole 33YA and the lower starting winning hole 33YB constitute the starting ball entering means in this embodiment. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the gaming area through this out port 36. .

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a into which a game ball can enter, a rectangular flat plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 32b as a movable body that is rotatably supported pivotably and opening/closing the large winning opening 32a, and the opening/closing shutter 32b. It is equipped with a solenoid 32c for the big prize opening as a driving means for opening and closing, and is controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later. Here, the big prize opening solenoid 32c has a plunger as a driving member that can move in and out of its main body, a coil spring as a biasing means, and the like.

Under such a configuration, the variable winning device 32 allows the plunger to protrude from the main body due to the biasing force of the coil spring in normal times when the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (the large winning opening solenoid 32c is in a non-energized state). By being in this state, the opening/closing shutter 32b is in a vertical state along the top and bottom, and is in a state in which it is in contact with an abutted part (not shown) provided inside the periphery of the big prize opening 32a. Thereby, the variable winning device 32 is located in the closed position as the first position, which is the initial position side where the opening/closing shutter 32b closes the big winning opening 32a, making it impossible or difficult to see a predetermined area on the back side of the big winning opening 32a. In this first state, the game ball flowing down the game area is in a closed state where it is impossible for the ball to enter the grand prize opening 32a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when a jackpot or a small jackpot (to be described later) occurs, the jackpot solenoid 32c becomes energized, and the plunger moves inside the main body against the biasing force of the coil spring. By being recessed into the opening/closing shutter 32b, the opening/closing shutter 32b tilts forward using its lower side as a rotation axis, and comes into contact with a predetermined contact portion provided outside the periphery of the grand prize opening 32a in a substantially horizontal state. state. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is in a second state in which the opening/closing shutter 32b is located at the second position where the big winning opening 32a is opened, and a predetermined area on the back side of the big winning opening 32a is made visible or easy. Thus, the game ball flowing down the game area is in an open state where it can enter the big prize opening 32a.

The upper starting prize opening 33YA allows game balls to be won at all times. On the other hand, the lower starting prize opening 33YB is provided with an opening/closing accessory 37Y as an opening/closing winning assistance device.

The opening/closing accessory 37Y includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37Ya as a movable body that rotationally displaces in the left-right direction about the lower end side, and a starting prize opening solenoid 37Yb as a driving means for driving the movable blades 37Ya to open and close. In preparation, the movable blade 37Ya opens and closes in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition, thereby creating an open state in which the game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB, and the gaming ball entering the lower starting winning opening 33YB. It is configured so that the state can be changed between a closed state in which winnings are not possible.

As mentioned above, the upper starting prize opening 33YA and the lower starting winning opening 33YB are provided with the first starting winning switch 224A and the second starting winning switch 224B as ball entering detection means for detecting winning game balls, respectively. There is. Then, when a game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224A, 224B, various drawings are performed such as a winning/failure drawing to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, etc., and the special display devices 43L, 43R and the like will be described later. The effect display device 42 is configured to perform variable display and predetermined effects. Here, if you win in the lottery, you will be given a jackpot status or the like.

Hereinafter, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 203, in this embodiment, the jackpot types are "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", and "JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot".

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", a series of specific operations are performed in which "Long Open" is regarded as one special prize state (one round), and this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

In this embodiment, "long open" means a second control period after the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state at the first position to the open state at the second position and is controlled to stop. The opening/closing shutter 32b returns to the first position or its vicinity until it is in the closed state, on the condition that the specified time of 30 seconds has elapsed or the specified number of 10 game balls have entered the grand prize opening 32a. It refers to one opening/closing operation which is a predetermined operation.

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", the "long opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round), and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), the "short opening" is repeated once. As a special prize state (one round), a series of specific actions are performed which are repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In this embodiment, "short opening" refers to the first control period after the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable prize winning device 32 is switched from the closed state at the first position to the open state at the second position and is controlled to stop. The opening/closing shutter 32b returns to the first position or its vicinity and enters the closed state, on the condition that the specified time of 0.4 seconds passes or the specified number of three game balls enters the grand prize opening 32a. This refers to one opening/closing operation that is a predetermined operation up to.

In this embodiment, the game ball is fired from the firing device 60 toward the game area at a rate of one every "0.6 seconds" based on the player's operation of the handle 18. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening/closing shutter 32b is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the opening/closing shutter 32b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, with just one "short release", even one game ball may not win. For this reason, the opening/closing shutter 32b is almost never closed based on the condition related to the number of winnings (the number of winnings is 3) among the above two closing conditions corresponding to "short opening", and the opening/closing shutter 32b once opened is will normally be closed based on the elapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). This prevents the execution period from changing each time during the "short release" execution period.

In the jackpot states of "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" and "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", a series of specific actions are performed in which "Long Open" is treated as one special prize state (1 round) and this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds). be exposed.

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot A", the "long opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round), and after repeating this 8 times (8 rounds), the "short opening" is further given as one special prize state (1 round). As a state (one round), a series of specific operations are performed in which this is repeated eight times (eight rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot B", the "long open" is set as one special prize state (1 round), and after repeating this 4 times (4 rounds), the "short open" is also given as one special prize. As a state (one round), a series of specific operations are performed in which this is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In the jackpot states of "4R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot B", a series of specific actions are performed that repeat this four times (four rounds) with "long opening" as one special prize state (one round). be exposed.

In the jackpot state of "JUB jackpot", "short opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round), and after repeating this 5 times, "long opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round). , a series of specific operations are performed in which this is repeated 15 times. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which "short opening" is performed five times in the first round, and "long opening" is performed in each of the second to 16th rounds.

In addition, when the above-mentioned various "probability variable jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, a "high probability mode (high probability state)" is provided as a lottery mode after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when various "normal jackpots" occur, a "low probability mode (low probability state)" is given after the jackpot state ends.

"High probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is increased compared to the "low probability mode" that is normally set. The "high probability mode" set after the end of the jackpot continues until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, after the above-mentioned various jackpots are completed, the winning support mode related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y is maintained while the special display devices 43L and 43R display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode (high ball entry state)" is given as a.

"High support mode" means that the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time of the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting winning hole 33YB is higher than the "low support mode (low ball entry state)" which is normally set. It refers to a state in which there is an increase in the number of

For example, the "high support mode" includes (1) a state in which the fluctuating display time on the normal symbol display device 41 described below is shorter than that in the "low support mode", (2) a state in which the movable blade 37Ya of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is (3) A state in which the opening time (regulated time) is longer than in the "low support mode"; (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be won per opening of the movable blade 37Ya is greater than in the "low support mode"; , (4) If a winning result is obtained by the opening/closing lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the number of times the opening/closing process of the movable blade 37Ya is executed per time is set to "low support mode". (5) A state in which the winning probability in the open lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is higher than the winning probability in the "low support mode." The high support mode in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high support mode." This makes it easier for game balls to frequently win into the lower starting prize opening 33YB, increasing the number of times jackpot lottery is executed, and making it possible to hold balls well.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "high support mode" is assigned, by changing the fluctuation pattern table to a table for the "high support mode" as described later, the first and second special display devices 43L , 43R (effect display device 42) is configured so that the variable display time is shorter than that in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of "16R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot A", a "high support mode" is provided until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until next time/high support mode."

After the completion of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", a variable display of "20 times", "30 times", "40 times" or "50 times" is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. ``High Support Mode'' will be granted during the period. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", respectively.

After the completion of "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A", "high support mode" is given while "30 times" variable display is performed on special display devices 43L and 43R. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "30 times/high support mode S."

After the end of "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" "Support mode" will be added.

After the “JUB Jackpot” ends, “Until next time/High support mode” will be given.

In this embodiment, various gaming states occur by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if a state is given a "high probability mode" and a "high support mode", it becomes a so-called "probability variable state".

A state in which "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are added becomes a so-called "normal state."

When the "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are added, it becomes a so-called "time saving state".

When a state is provided with a "high probability mode" and a "low support mode", it becomes a so-called "potential state (potential probability variable state)". In other words, in the "potential state", the probability of winning a jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is no different from the "normal state", so the state with the "high probability mode" This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the situation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned various "big wins", a "small win" is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the win/fail lottery. In the small win state, a series of specific operations are performed in which the "short opening" is treated as one special prize state (one round), and this is repeated five times (five rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode that are awarded after the small winning state ends are the original modes before the small winning state occurred. For example, if the lottery mode before the small winning state is "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small winning state ends.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the prize is awarded when the game ball is won in the winning lottery in the case where the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA and when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. The distribution of jackpot types is different. If you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the upper starting winning slot 33YA, "16R definite strange jackpot A", "16R sure strange jackpot B", "4R sure strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot B" ”, “16R regular jackpot A”, “16R regular jackpot B”, and “4R regular jackpot B”, and if you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the lower starting winning slot 33YB. The winnings will be divided into one of the following: "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Regular Jackpot A," and "JUB Jackpot." Furthermore, the "small win" is configured to occur only when a winning lottery is triggered by a game ball landing in the lower starting prize opening 33YB.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R each include two segment display devices and are installed at the bottom of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source consisting of an LED, and by controlling these individual light sources on and off, it is possible to light up only one arbitrary display segment, and also to light up any combination of display segments. The display segment can be lit. As a result, predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers) are individually displayed on each segment display device.

Then, a variable display is performed on the first special display device 43L when a game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and a variable display is performed on the second special display device 43R when a game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. The configuration is such that a variable display is performed at . Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the display mode when the variable display stops, whether or not you have won the jackpot lottery, etc. is definitively displayed. Ru. For example, when a game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, a fluctuating display is made at high speed on the corresponding first special display device 43L, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the display modes is stopped (for example, stopped for a few seconds) )do. If the player wins the jackpot lottery, numerical values, etc. (see FIG. 203) corresponding to various jackpots are displayed when the fluctuations are stopped, and a jackpot state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 203, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", "9-" will be stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and "50 times/high support mode" will be displayed. If you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "16R Guaranteed Variable Jacket B", "84" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. In addition, if you win the "JUB jackpot", "1.-" will be stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and if you win the "small win", the first or second special display will stop displaying. "1-" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, in order to enhance the production effect of the "JUB jackpot", the stopping modes of both "1.-" and "1-" for the "JUB jackpot" and the stopping mode "1.-" for the "JUB jackpot" are important. It is preferable that the configuration is confusing.

Of course, the manner in which the special display devices 43L and 43R stop corresponding to each type of win is not limited to the above-mentioned manner. For example, there may be not one but a plurality of stopping modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type. For example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", one of "91", "92", "93", etc. is selected and stopped on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition, even if there are multiple stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type, there are multiple stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and "small win". It is preferable that the plurality of stopping modes have a confusing configuration. For example, any one of "-1.", "-2", "-3.", "-4", etc. is displayed as a stop mode related to "JUB jackpot", and "small jackpot" is displayed. As a plurality of stop modes, any one of "-1", "-2.", "-3", "-4.", . . . may be stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, a pair of specific symbols (here, "1", "2", "3", etc.) with a predetermined display segment (here, ".") lit and a specific symbol that is not lit. One of them is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and the other is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "small win", and these are alternately inserted.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in any or all display segments can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting winning hole 33YA, 33YB during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variable display is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is suspended is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper starting winning slot 33YA and the gaming balls that have entered the lower starting winning slot 33YB. Correspondingly, up to four variable displays (a total of eight variable displays) are suspended. Further, the number of times of holding is displayed by lighting on the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. Incidentally, when a new game ball enters the starting prize opening 33YA, 33YB during the jackpot state, the corresponding variable display is also suspended.

Basically, the fluctuating display that is triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA, and is digested in the order in which it is won, and is displayed in the lower starting winning hole. The variable display triggered by winning in 33YB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball wins in the lower starting winning hole 33YB, and is digested in the order in which the winnings are won. However, if both the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper start winning hole 33YA and the variable display triggered by a win in the lower start winning hole 33YB are suspended (the first holding lamp 46a and the second If one or more of the holding lamps 46b are lit, the variable display triggered by a win in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is preferentially digested. That is, the configuration is such that the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is not performed unless all of the variable displaying triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is digested. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, if a game ball is won in the lower start winning hole 33YB and one second holding lamp 46b is lit, a winning into the upper starting winning hole 33YA is disabled. The fluctuating display triggered by the winning will be postponed, and the fluctuating display triggered by the winning to the lower starting prize opening 33YB will be performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is also referred to as the "first fluctuating display", and the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning opening 33YB is referred to as the "second fluctuating display". ” is also called.

Further, the through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through one ball at a time. Although details will be described later, the through gate 34 is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the through gate switch 225 opens or closes. An opening lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the accessory 37Y (lower starting prize opening 33YB), and a variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. If the player wins in the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y remains open for a specified time.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that displays a variable display when passing through the through gate 34, and an effect display device 42 that displays a variable display in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. and is provided.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 includes a variation specification indicating which of the upper start winning hole 33YA and the lower start winning hole 33YB the variable display performed on the performance display device 42 corresponds to. A lamp 40 is provided.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol changes from "○" to "x" to The display changes at high speed in the order of "○" →... Then, when the fluctuating display stops for several seconds at the "○" symbol (winning symbol), the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB remains open for a predetermined period of time. The display contents of this normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount will be performed after the variable display that is being performed at that point ends. It becomes. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times that the change is held is displayed by lighting on the hold lamp 44. There is.

The effect display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, based on the command from the main control device 261, the sub control device 262 performs auxiliary control so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display contents are determined and displayed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 209, the effect display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, and in each symbol display area, a plurality of types of symbols (numbers) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed). ), and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in order for each symbol display area (for example, in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area). For example, when the main control device 261 determines the above-mentioned various "probable and variable jackpots" or various "regular jackpots", a display corresponding to the jackpot is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and an effect display device At step 42, the symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot (for example, the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and a jackpot state is started. Ru. In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or a "small win", the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 does not correspond to a jackpot, as will be described later.

Further, when symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a jackpot, as a preliminary step, for example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. In this way, the state in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, and the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area is the ready-to-win state.

Note that even if a ready-to-win state occurs, if a jackpot state does not occur, a symbol different from the symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. In addition, in the case of various "probable jackpots" or various "regular jackpots", the number of zeros is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above, but in this embodiment, the numbers are stopped and displayed. Depending on the type of symbol, it is impossible to determine the gaming state (such as whether or not it is a "high probability mode") that will be awarded after the end of the jackpot.

In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", a predetermined specific combination of numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance symbol) is stopped and displayed instead of a double. For example, in this embodiment, "3", "4", and "1" are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. As a result, when the chance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player cannot distinguish between "JUB jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and "small win" which is less advantageous to the player. ” can be expected to occur, so it is possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Of course, the combination of specific numbers that are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas may be different depending on whether it is a "JUB jackpot" or a "small win." In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", instead of a predetermined specific combination of numbers, the display will stop at a random winning combination, just like when you win. You may also do so.

Furthermore, the performance display device 42 is configured to display the number of pending changes in the special display devices 43L, 43R corresponding to the above-mentioned pending lamps 46a, 46b (see FIG. 209, etc.).

In this embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the holding lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. . Therefore, the player will be able to grasp the game status, lottery results, etc. exclusively from the display contents of the performance display device 42 (symbol display, pending display, etc.).

Of course, the configurations of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46L, 46R are not limited to such configurations, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special display devices 43L, 43R, etc. may be configured to be visible. However, as mentioned above, the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an inconspicuous place such as the lower corner of the gaming area where the player cannot easily see them, and the size of the display section is small, and the characters for identification are displayed in a stopped state. The time is also relatively short. Therefore, unless one takes his eyes off the special display devices 43L and 43R and carefully observes them, it is virtually impossible to grasp the game state to be granted.

The fluctuation specific lamp 40 is equipped with an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red, and when a fluctuation display is performed on the effect display device 42 triggered by a winning in the upper starting prize opening 33YA. It emits blue light, and it emits red light when a variable display triggered by a winning in the lower start prize opening 33YB is performed.

Next, the configuration of the variable display unit 35 will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, so that the variable display unit 35 is It has an integrated configuration.

A rectangular opening 213a (see FIG. 171) is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is detachably attached to the back side of the opening 213a. The liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42 is a known one in which a liquid crystal panel made of various translucent members laminated is disposed on the front side of a backlight serving as a light emitting means.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a substantially circular opening 751 formed in the center thereof, and the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 can be viewed through the opening 751.

Note that the center frame 47 is not composed of a single member, but includes various decorative members plated on the base member, lens members made of transparent resin that transmit light such as LEDs, etc. is assembled.

A stage portion 770 is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 along the left-right direction. The stage portion 770 has gentle undulations formed along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the center of the rear wall portion 772 of the stage portion 770, which opens toward the front and into which a game ball can fall. Furthermore, a communication path 775 communicating with the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the central portion of the stage portion 770 . The other side of the communication path 775 is opened at the front side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47, and serves as a discharge port 776 for discharging the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the game board 30 surface. In addition, in the state where the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 169, the discharge port 776 is located above the upper starting winning port 33YA.

A guide groove (not shown) is formed in the center of the stage section 770 at a position in front of the drop hole 774 and slopes gently downward toward the back. This allows the game ball to fall from the stage section 770 to the drop hole 774.

A ball passage (warp passage) 764 through which game balls pass is formed inside the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47. The entrance portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while the exit portion 764b opens toward the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. It's open. This ball passage 764 allows the game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 to be guided onto the stage section 770 within the center frame 47.

After the game ball guided onto the stage section 770 rolls on the stage section 770, it falls from the front onto the game board 30 surface or falls into the above-mentioned drop hole 774. Among these, the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 are guided onto the game board 30 surface via the communication path 775. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA with a relatively high probability.

Further, in the variable display unit 35, an upper performance accessory unit 761 is disposed between the center frame 47 and the frame cover 213. Here, the configuration of the upper performance accessory unit 761 will be explained in detail with reference to the drawings.

As shown in FIGS. 172 and 173, the upper performance accessory unit 761 is provided on the back side of the upper side 47a of the center frame 47, and in normal times (see FIG. 172), most of the upper part 47a is attached to the upper side 47a. It is covered and difficult for players to see.

The upper performance accessory unit 761 includes a unit base portion 810 disposed on the upper front surface of the frame cover 213, a movable accessory 811 as a movable body provided to be movable up and down with respect to the unit base portion 810, and a movable accessory unit 761. A vertical drive mechanism 1812 for vertically moving the movable accessory 811 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 174(a) and (b), the vertical drive mechanism 1812 includes a support section 1814 that supports the movable accessory 811, and a vertical drive motor 1815 as a drive means for driving the support section 1814. We are prepared.

Although not shown in the drawings, the unit base portion 810 is formed with a guide groove extending in the vertical direction, and the support portion 1814 is formed with a protrusion that is assembled into the guide groove. As a result, the support portion 1814 can be slid in the vertical direction, and positional displacement in the left-right direction when moving up and down is restricted.

Furthermore, a rack portion 1814a is formed on the right edge of the support portion 1814. The rack portion 1814a of the support portion 1814 is engaged with a pinion gear 1815a fixedly attached to the rotating shaft of the vertical drive motor 1815.

With this configuration, the movable accessory 811 can be slid in the vertical direction by rotating the vertical drive motor 1815.

Normally, most of the movable accessory 811 is located in a standby position on the back side of the upper side 47a of the center frame 47, and is in a standby state where it is difficult for the player to see (see FIGS. 172 and 174(a)). . Then, as the vertical drive motor 1815 rotates forward and the support section 1814 slides downward, the entire movable accessory 811 is positioned on the front side of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42. The player then enters an exposed state that is visible to the player (see FIGS. 173 and 174(b)).

Further, from this state, the vertical drive motor 1815 reversely rotates and the support portion 1814 slides upward, so that the movable accessory 811 returns to the normal standby state.

Note that the vertical drive motor 1815 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by an applied drive pulse signal. That is, by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the vertical movement amount and movement speed of the movable accessory 811 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of vertical displacement of the movable accessory 811 from the reference position.

More specifically, a position detection sensor 1816 for detecting the vertical position of the movable accessory 811 is attached to the unit base portion 810. In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 1816, a known photosensor in which a light-emitting element and a light-receiving element are spaced apart and placed facing each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 1814b is formed protruding from the support portion 1814 near its lower end. Then, when the light shielding piece 1814b is detected by the position detection sensor 1816, it is recognized that the movable accessory 811 (support part 1814) is at the reference position. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172, the standby position where the movable accessory 811 is in a standby state is the reference position.

Although not shown in the drawings, the unit base portion 810 includes an accessory control board that receives instructions from the sub-control device 262 and performs drive control of the vertical drive motor 1815, monitoring control of the position detection sensor 1816, etc. is installed.

Here, the movable accessory 811 will be explained in detail with reference to FIGS. 215 to 219. The movable accessory 811 includes a base portion 817 fixed to the lower end of the support portion 1814, and a rotating body 820 rotatably supported on the front side of the base portion 817.

The base portion 817 has a generally circular shape when viewed from the front, and a support shaft portion 818 is formed in the center thereof to protrude forward. The support shaft portion 818 is formed into a substantially cylindrical shape with a closed front side and an open back side.

A rotating body drive motor 821 is attached and fixed to the back side of the base portion 817. A pinion gear 821b is fixedly attached to the front end of the rotating shaft 821a of the rotating body drive motor 821. The driving force of the rotating body drive motor 821 is transmitted to the rotating body 820 via the pinion gear 821b.

An annular cover body 822 is attached and fixed to the front surface of the base portion 817 . A circular opening 822a is formed in the center of the cover body 822.

The rotary body 820 mainly consists of a rotary base plate 823 and six movable pieces 825 arranged annularly on the front side thereof.

The rotating board 823 has a cylindrical portion 826 extending in the front-rear direction, and six extending pieces 827 extending radially outward from the outer circumferential wall of the cylindrical portion 826. The six extending pieces 827 are provided at equal intervals (60° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 826.

The cylindrical portion 826 is externally fitted onto the support shaft portion 818 of the base portion 817 . As a result, the rotating board 823 is rotatably supported by the base portion 817. Although not shown in the drawings, the cylindrical portion 826 or the spindle portion 818 is provided with a regulating means for preventing the rotary board 823 (cylindrical portion 826) from falling off from the base portion 817 (spindle portion 818). ing.

Each extending piece 827 is formed with a slit 829 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 . A cylindrical pinion support shaft 830 is formed on the back surface near the tip of each extending piece 827 to protrude rearward.

An annular central gear member 831 is fitted onto the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating board 823 from behind.

The central gear member 831 is integrally formed with a large diameter gear portion 831a provided on the front side and a small diameter gear portion 831b provided on the rear side so as to form steps in the front and back.

Further, a pinion gear 832 is fitted onto each of the pinion support shafts 830 and meshed with a large-diameter gear portion 831a of a central gear member 831.

Furthermore, an annular presser plate 835 is attached to the back side of the rotating board 823 (see FIG. 219). The circular opening 835a of the holding plate 835 has a slightly larger diameter than the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831, through which the small diameter gear portion 831b can be inserted, and has a smaller diameter than the large diameter gear portion 831a.

As a result, the presser plate 835 covers the six pinion gears 832 and the large-diameter gear portion 831a from behind, and is fixed to the tip of the pinion support shaft 830 while passing through the small-diameter gear portion 831b. As a result, the central gear member 831 is held rotatably around the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotary base plate 823.

The pinion gear 821b of the rotating body drive motor 821 is meshed with the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831. Thereby, the rotation of the rotating body drive motor 821 is transmitted to the central gear member 831.

That is, the power of the rotating body drive motor 821 is transmitted to the rotating body 820 by the pinion gear 821b, the central gear member 831, the pinion gear 832, etc. to slide the movable piece 825 and rotate the rotating board 823. A main power transmission mechanism for driving is configured.

Further, a second drive gear 841 is attached and fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating board 823. As shown in FIG. 219, the second drive gear 841 is meshed with a second transmission gear 842. The second transmission gear 842 is connected to an oil damper 843. A support member 844 is fitted into the oil damper 843 from the rear, and the support member 844 is attached and fixed to the base portion 817.

As a result, the rotating board 823 is braked so as not to rotate with low torque below a predetermined level. Here, the second drive gear 841, the second transmission gear 842, and the like constitute a regulating power transmission mechanism that transmits the force of the oil damper 843 to the rotating body 820 and regulates the operation of the rotating body 820.

The regulating power transmission mechanism is not connected to the main power transmission mechanism, and power is directly transmitted between the rotating body drive motor 821 and the oil damper 843 without going through the rotating board 823. It is configured so that it is not transmitted.

As can be seen from FIG. 215 and the like, the rotating body 820 is formed with the motif of one flower, and each movable piece 825 is formed to imitate one flower petal.

Each movable piece 825 is made of a transparent resin material having light-transmitting properties. However, on the surface of the general portion of each movable piece 825, fine irregularities (not shown) are formed. As a result, the general part of the movable piece 825 diffuses and transmits the light emitted from the display part (liquid crystal display part) 42a of the effect display device 42 located at the rear, and the whole becomes in a state where the surface emits light uniformly.

A rack portion 838 extending linearly is integrally formed on the back surface of the movable piece 825. The rack portion 838 is inserted into the slit 829 of the extending piece 827 of the rotating board 823. This allows the movable piece 825 to slide along the radial direction of the rotary base plate 823 (the direction in which the extending piece 827 extends). Although not shown in the drawings, the rack portion 838 or the slit 829 is provided with a regulating means for preventing the movable piece 825 from falling off from the rotating board 823.

The rack portion 838 of the movable piece 825 is engaged with the pinion gear 832 on the back side of the extending piece 827. As a result, the movable piece 825 is moved along the slit 829 of the extending piece 827, that is, along the radial direction of the rotating base plate 823, by transmitting the power of the rotating body drive motor 821 via the main power transmission mechanism. Slide displacement is possible.

Under such a configuration, when the rotating body 820 is in a normal standby state, the movable piece 825 of each of the six radially arranged extending pieces 827 is slid to the innermost side in the radial direction, so that the rotating body 820 is in a reduced diameter state. (See Figures 215 and 216).

Note that in the diameter-reduced state of the rotating body 820, the base end portions of the six movable pieces 825 are in a state of approximately contacting the outer circumferential portion of the cylindrical portion 826 of the rotating base plate 823, and the Both side edges on the proximal end are in a state in which they are substantially in contact with the proximal side edges of the adjacent movable pieces 825, respectively.

On the other hand, when a predetermined performance is executed, the rotary body 820 expands in diameter by simultaneously sliding the movable pieces 825 radially outward in the six extending pieces 827 arranged in a radial manner ( (See Figures 217 and 218).

Furthermore, a motor control board (motor driver) 845 is attached to the back side of the base portion 817 to control the rotating body drive motor 821 in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262.

The rotating body drive motor 821 is a stepping motor whose rotation is controlled by a drive pulse signal applied via a motor control board 845, and the rotation angle changes depending on the number of input pulses. That is, by adjusting the drive pulse signal, the amount of rotational displacement and rotational speed of the rotating body 820 can be controlled. At the same time, by monitoring the number of input drive pulse signals, it is possible to grasp the amount of rotational displacement of the rotating body 820 from the reference position.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 219, a position detection sensor 846 for detecting the rotational position of the rotating body 820 (rotary substrate 823) is attached to the front surface of the base portion 817. In this embodiment, as the position detection sensor 846, a known photosensor in which a light emitting element and a light receiving element are spaced apart and placed facing each other is employed.

Correspondingly, a light shielding piece 847 is formed to protrude from the back side of the rotating board 823 (second drive gear 841 in this embodiment). Then, when the light shielding piece 847 is detected by the position detection sensor 846, it is determined that the rotating body 820 is at the reference position.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 215, the reference position is the position where a predetermined movable piece 825 is arranged along the horizontal direction when the rotating body 820 is viewed from the front.

Further, although not shown, a control board is provided on the base portion 817 to monitor and control the position detection sensor 846 in response to instructions from the sub-control device 262.

Under such a configuration, if it is assumed that the rotating body drive motor 821 rotates once with a 360-pulse excitation signal (drive pulse signal), the angular change based on the 1-pulse excitation signal (angular change per 1 step) is 1°. becomes.

Further, when it is assumed that the gear ratio (gear ratio) between the pinion gear 821b of the rotating body drive motor 821 and the small diameter gear portion 831b of the central gear member 831 is 1:4, the rotating body drive motor 821 is Under the configuration in which the excitation signal has 360 pulses and rotates once, the rotating body 820 rotates once with 1440 pulses (=360 pulses×4).

However, the amount of angular change based on the one-pulse excitation signal, the gear ratio between the pinion gear 821b and the small diameter gear portion 831b, etc. are not limited to the values exemplified above, and different configurations may be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 217, etc., when the rotating body 820 stops rotating, the six movable pieces 825 move at predetermined positions set at six locations in the rotating direction of the rotating body 820 (in the clockwise direction in this embodiment). Stop positions EA1 to EA6 (specifically, a first stop position EA1 located on the right side of the rotating body 820, a second stop position EA2 located on the diagonally lower right side, and a third stop position EA3 located on the diagonally lower left side) , a fourth stop position EA4 located on the left side, a fifth stop position EA5 located diagonally on the upper left side, or a sixth stop position EA6 located on the diagonally upper right side.

Here, the operation mode of the rotating body 820 configured as described above will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 215, 216, etc., in normal times when no accessory performance is performed, the six movable pieces 825 are each located at the radially inner slide limit position of the rotating body 820. In other words, the rotating body 820 is in the most reduced diameter state.

In this state, when the rotating body drive motor 821 is rotated forward, the central gear member 831 first begins to rotate clockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b.

At the beginning of rotation, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotary base plate 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotary base plate 823 remains stopped and does not move.

On the other hand, as the central gear member 831 rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a rotate, respectively. Power is transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 through the rack portion 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension piece 827. , the rotating body 820 is slid radially outward in the radial direction. In other words, the rotating body 820 expands in diameter.

As shown in FIGS. 217, 218, etc., when the six movable pieces 825 each reach the radially outer sliding limit position of the rotary body 820 and the rotary body 820 becomes the most expanded state, the rotary base plate 823 On the other hand, rotational power is transmitted. Then, when the torque exceeds a predetermined level, the rotating board 823 starts rotating clockwise in front view.

Thereafter, when the rotating body drive motor 821 stops, the rotating body 820 stops, and the six movable pieces 825 each stop at one of the above-mentioned stopping positions EA1 to EA6.

Furthermore, when the role performance ends and returns to the normal state, first, the rotating body drive motor 821 is reversely rotated, and the central gear member 831 is rotated counterclockwise in front view via the pinion gear 821b. .

Even in such a case, when the central gear member 831 initially starts rotating, the braking force of the oil damper 843 is applied to the rotating board 823 via the regulating power transmission mechanism, so the rotating board 823 is stopped. It remains stationary, and only the movable piece 825 moves.

As a result, the six pinion gears 832 meshed with the large-diameter gear portion 831a of the central gear member 831 rotate. Power is transmitted to each of the six movable pieces 825 through the rack portion 838 meshed with each of these pinion gears 832, and the six movable pieces 825 move along the slits 829 of the extension piece 827. , the rotating body 820 is slid radially inward, and the rotating body 820 becomes smaller in diameter.

Thereafter, when each of the six movable pieces 825 has slid to the radially inward sliding limit position of the rotating body 820, the rotating body drive motor 821 is stopped. As a result, the rotating body 820 returns to its normal diameter-reduced state.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 170, 171, and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 171 and the like. As described above, on the back side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 169) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, there is a frame cover 213 made of resin that covers the center frame 47 from behind. It is provided so as to protrude from the rear. Furthermore, on the back side of the frame cover 213, an effect display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213 are removably mounted in a stacked state. installed.

The performance display device 42 is housed in a housing box (not shown) in which an opening is formed to expose the display section (liquid crystal screen) of the performance display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and It is fixed on the back side. The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (accommodation box). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible. Note that an LED control board and the like that drive the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 are disposed inside the frame cover 213.

A back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 below the frame cover 213 so as to cover the general prize opening 31, the variable prize winning device 32, the starting prize openings 33YA, 33YB, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have moved from the front side to the back side of the game board 30 through different routes such as the above-mentioned various winning openings and out openings 36. . The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224A and 224B that detect winnings to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. (Except when detected by the through gate switch 225.)
Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 170, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. In addition, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 170) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external relay terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 170) of the back pack unit 203.

The external relay terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For convenience, symbols are not attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information regarding the current gaming state (jackpot state, high probability mode, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and internal terminals. A terminal for outputting information regarding the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information regarding various error states such as a prize winning error, a lower tray full error, a tank ball error, a payout error, and a prize paid out from the payout control device 311. A terminal for outputting information regarding the number of pitches is provided.

However, in this embodiment, a terminal for outputting information regarding a "small win" is not provided, and the configuration is such that no information on the occurrence of a "small win" is output. In this embodiment, during the "high support mode", "small wins" tend to occur relatively frequently, so occurrence information is not always output every time a "small win" occurs. , this may lead to a significant increase in the output signal. Therefore, when such a problem is relatively unlikely to occur, such as during a "low support mode", the configuration may be such that information on the occurrence of a "small hit" is output.

In addition, the output of the occurrence information of the "JUB jackpot" is performed, for example, after the five "short openings" related to the "JUB jackpot" have finished, that is, after the situation is no longer distinguishable from the case of a "small win", for example, as described below. It is preferable to perform the output of the opening command (jackpot notification effect) with the occurrence of the "JUB jackpot" confirmed. In a situation where it is still not possible to distinguish between a "small win" and a "JUB jackpot" occurrence information, if only the "JUB jackpot" occurrence information is output first, the information display equipment installed in the hall's island equipment corresponding to the pachinko machine 10, etc. There is a risk that the player will know in advance that a "JUB jackpot" has occurred by looking at the "JUB jackpot" and the presentation effect of the "JUB jackpot" will be diminished.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 170) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. That will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has two rows of ball passages through which game balls flow down sideways, for example, and which slopes gently toward the downstream side. A case rail 357 is connected to the case rail 357 that allows the water to flow downward vertically. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 170) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 171, a discharge passage section 217 is formed in the lower frame set 251, into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow. A discharge chute (not shown) is formed to discharge the pachinko machine 10 to the outside. The game ball rotates and flows down while coming into contact with nails 49, windmills 57, etc. in the game area and being influenced by it. The game balls that have entered each winning hole such as the general winning hole 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311 as a payout control means, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are stacked front and back. It is removably attached.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 171, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 166, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction, the lock can be opened. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 170). reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 170) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 17, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion (lower left in FIG. 170) of the back side of the inner frame 12. The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 175 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L, 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-described special display devices 43L, 43R and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 as a display means is controlled via the sub-control device 262. The sub-control device 262 constitutes a light emission control means in this embodiment.

In addition, although illustrations of various relay boards etc. are omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes various detection switches such as a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, starting winning unit switches 224A, 224B, and a through gate switch 225. Various electrical components such as various boards are connected to it. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 551, and a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a performance button 125, a performance accessories unit 761, various illumination parts, and lamps 102, 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the effect display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 display whether or not there is a jackpot, etc. The effect display device 42 controlled by the player performs a display that matches the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 performs drive control of the upper performance accessory unit 761.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that this is not the case, the firing device 60 is driven and the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. Thereby, the player can change the movement amount and operation mode of the game ball guided to the game area.

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It is equipped with An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, and controls the VDP 526 by analyzing the received command or performing predetermined calculation processing based on the received command. (specifically, generation of internal commands for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the effect display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. It is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data to be displayed on the effect display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of this video RAM 524, the display contents of the effect display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as symbols displayed on the effect display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) built into the effect display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads display data stored in the video RAM 524 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the effect display device 42.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 176, there is a jackpot random number counter CD1 used in a jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot state occurs, and a jackpot type determination counter used to determine the jackpot type (lottery). CD2, a reach selection counter CD3 used for determining whether or not to generate a reach state when the production display device 42 is removed and varied (lottery), determining the type of reach to be generated (lottery), etc., and a jackpot random number. The initial value random number counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the counter CD1, the determination (lottery) of the variable display time of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42), and the variation in the effect display device 42 Variation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for determining patterns (performance patterns) (lottery), etc., and lottery of normal symbol display device 41 (opening of opening/closing accessory 37Y of lower starting prize opening 33YB) A normal symbol random number counter CD4 used for lottery (lottery) is used.

Counters CD1, CD2, CD3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CD4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area in which the values of the jackpot random number counter CD1, jackpot type determination counter CD2, and reach selection counter CD3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 is stored. It is provided. The normal fluctuation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

Further, the special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area and a second special fluctuation reservation area each having four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area), and one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and the reach selection counter CD3 are set according to the winning history of game balls in the upper starting prize opening 33YA. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and the reach selection counter CD3 are set according to the winning history of game balls in the lower starting prize opening 33YB. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

By adopting such a configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times, respectively, as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter CD1 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (that is, 599), the lower limit value as the opening value is 0. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the jackpot random number counter CD1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter CD1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter CD1 (value=0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter CD1 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA or the lower starting winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is changed to the first special fluctuation holding area or the second special fluctuation. Stored in the holding area. Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lottery games.

There are two types of random number values that result in a jackpot: "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." In this embodiment, in the "low probability mode," the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set as "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." 2, the value is "7, 307", and in the "high probability mode", the number of random number values that will be a jackpot is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the "low probability mode", there is a probability of 1/300 to win the lottery (a jackpot state occurs), and in the "high probability mode", the probability is 1/30 to win the lottery.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a validity determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two validity determination tables, the first validity determination table storing "7, 307" and the second validity determination table storing "7 to 16, 307 to 316". be.

Further, in this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is also used when determining a "small win". The number of random number values that result in a "small win" is 50, and the values are "101-125, 401-425". In other words, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/12 (a small winning state occurs).

The jackpot type determination counter CD2 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (ie, 19). In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter CD2 determines the jackpot type, that is, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A". , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", or "JUB jackpot" is determined.

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball wins into the upper start winning hole 33YA or when it wins into the lower start winning hole 33YB. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when winning a prize.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, with reference to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 204), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "0, 1". The granting of “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A” is determined.

Also, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "2", it is decided to grant "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "3", it is decided to give "30 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "Mode", and if it is "4", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "5", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "50 It has been decided that ``16R Probable Variable Jackpot B'' with ``Numbers and High Support Mode'' will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "6", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot A".

If the value of jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "7", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "8", "30 times/high support mode" is awarded. It is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "9", if it is "9", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "10", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "High Support Mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "11", it is determined that "16R normal jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "12", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "13", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". If it is "14", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to give "30 times/high support mode". If it is "18", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "19", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the upper starting prize opening 33YA, there is a 10% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 20% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot B", and a 5 % probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", 20% probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", 5% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot A", and 20% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot B". , there is a 20% probability of "4R normal jackpot B".

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start prize opening 33YB, with reference to the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 205), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is "0 to 9", " If it is "10, 11", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot A", and if it is "12, 13", it is decided to award "4R regular jackpot A". If it is "14", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times/high support mode". If it is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times / high support mode". If it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "Normal jackpot B", and if it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "JUB jackpot".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, there is a 50% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 10% probability that it will be a "4R probability variable jackpot A", and a 10% probability. % probability will be "4R normal jackpot A", 20% probability will be "4R normal jackpot B", and 10% probability will be "JUB jackpot".

The jackpot type determination counter CD2 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area). Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lottery games.

Further, the reach selection counter CD3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In this embodiment, the reach selection counter CD3 determines that after a reach occurs with respect to a decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops. We will draw a lottery between ``reach except before and after,'' where the symbol stops at a point other than before and after the reach symbol, and ``completely miss,'' where no reach occurs. In this embodiment, the ROM 502 stores a reach determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the reach selection counter CD3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and which reach it corresponds to. It is provided. The reach determination table stores values from 0 to 238, CD3=0, 1 corresponds to a reach that is out of the front and back, CD3=2 to 21 corresponds to a reach other than the front and back, and CD3=22 to 238 is a complete reach. It has a configuration that falls under the category of outliers.

The reach selection counter CD3 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter CD3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the reach selection counter CD3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special fluctuation holding area) of the RAM 503. area or second special fluctuation holding area). Therefore, such processing constitutes a part of various lottery games.

Further, among the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 198), the lower limit value is added. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 240, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 240). It becomes. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as a "first variation type counter" and CS2 is also referred to as a "second variation type counter." This is also expressed in FIG. 176.

For example, in the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table (see Figure 207) related to the normal state, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach types of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, and other rough fluctuation patterns. The second variation type counter CS2 determines more detailed variation aspects such as variation time. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of variation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode using only the first variation type counter CS1.

Note that the normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the variation of decorative symbols. Super reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the performance display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. . Premium reach is a performance mode that can only be derived when a jackpot state occurs, and during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative symbols, characters with a different pattern from super reach are displayed. This is a reach pattern that creates a sense of expectation in the player.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the effect display device 42 determines a variation pattern at the start of variation of decorative symbols.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the reach selection counter CD3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter CD4 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9).Normal symbols The random number counter CD4 is updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 is acquired.

Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 that results in a win is acquired, the symbol corresponding to the win (in this example, "○") is stopped and displayed after a fluctuating display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time. Then, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB remains open for a predetermined period of time.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", there are two winning random numbers, "0 and 1". On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the winning random number values are eight from "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 1/5, and in the "high support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 4/5.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing. Its contents are as explained above.

FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 179, first in step SD301, a process of reading various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the states of various winning detection switches (general winning switch 221, count switch 223, starting winning switches 224A, 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control device 261 are read, and the states of the switches are determined. and save the detection information.

In step SD302, random number initial value updating processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SD303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, the reach selection counter CD3, and the normal symbol random number counter CD4 are each incremented by 1, and when these counter values reach the upper limit value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter CD1, CD2, CD3, and CD4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step SD304, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB, and in step SD305, a through gate passage process is executed in accordance with the passage of the game ball to the through gate 34. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily ended.

Here, the starting winning process in step SD304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 180. In addition, the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a jackpot random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1, a jackpot type random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and a reach selection counter CD3. A reach random number storage area is provided to store the value of .

First, in step SD501, it is determined based on the detection information of the second starting winning switch 224B whether the game ball has won in the lower starting winning opening 33YB. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD501, in step SD502, the value of the lower reservation counter Nb that counts the number of reservations in the variable display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is set to an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SD502, the process moves to step SD509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD502, the process proceeds to step SD503, where the lower holding counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step SD504, the values of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and the reach selection counter CD3, which were updated in the random number update process in step SD303, are set among the vacant holding areas in the second special fluctuation holding area. Store in the first area. After step SD504, the process moves to step SD505.

In step SD505, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In the following step SD506, when it is determined in step SD505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a second jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot schedule flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the second jackpot type determination table. If the value is one of "0 to 9", turn on the "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "10, 11" corresponding to "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" , turn on the "4R Probable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "12, 13" corresponding to "4R Normal Jackpot A", turn on the "4R Normal Jackpot A Flag", If it is one of the values ``14 to 17'' corresponding to ``4R normal jackpot B'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag'', and select one of the values ``18, 19'' corresponding to ``JUB jackpot''. If so, turn on the "JUB jackpot flag".

In addition, if you win "16R definite strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" here, that is, if "until next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot ends. For a predetermined period of time (20 variable displays in this embodiment), for example, a production lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a non-announcement production that does not notify that the assigned "high support mode" is "until next time/high support mode". The lottery is held with a probability of about 1/100. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SD507, when it is determined in step SD505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter CD3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. Note that details of the reach determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step SD508, a holding control command setting process is performed. The hold control command is a command for informing the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the change display) held and stored in the second special change hold area. be. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SD201). The hold control command includes, as hold information, for example, information indicating the results of the above-mentioned jackpot determination process and jackpot type determination process, and information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is the trigger for the winning of the variable display. It will be done.

Here, details of the jackpot determination process in step SD505 will be explained with reference to FIG. 181.

First, in step SD5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be either the value "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first judgment table. Determine if they match. In addition, in FIG. 181, the processing of step SD5101 is simplified for convenience, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is "307", and if either of these determinations is affirmative, an affirmative determination is made in step SD5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is also made in step SD5101, a negative determination is made in step SD5101.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot schedule flag is turned on in step SD5102, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD5101, it is determined in step SD5103 whether or not the "high probability mode" is in effect based on the value of a lottery mode flag to be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD5103, that is, if the "high probability mode" is in progress, in step SD5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used for the second validity determination. Among the values corresponding to jackpots stored in the table, it is determined whether it is any one of "8 to 16, 308 to 316" excluding the above "7" and "307". In this determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 and each value corresponding to a jackpot match, as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD5104, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode," the jackpot schedule flag is turned on in step SD5102, and then this process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step SD5103 or step SD5104, that is, if it is not a "big hit", the process moves to step SD5105.

Also, in step SD5105, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to a small win. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD5105, that is, if it is determined that a small winning state will occur, the small winning schedule flag is turned on in step SD5106, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD5105, the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the reach determination process in step SD507 will be described with reference to FIG. 182.

First, in step SD5301, it is determined whether or not a hit schedule flag (big hit schedule flag or small win schedule flag) was set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step SD5301, that is, if a jackpot state or a small win state occurs, the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD5301, that is, if a winning state does not occur, in step SD5302, the value of the reach selection counter CD3 is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area, taking into account the reach determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "front/back off reach". When an affirmative determination is made in step SD5302, in step SD5303, a front-back off-reach flag indicating the occurrence of a front-back off reach is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD5302, in step SD5304, the reach determination table is taken into account and the value of the reach selection counter CD3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be "reach other than front and back". It is determined whether the value matches any one of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "." If an affirmative determination is made in step SD5304, the flag other than front and back out is turned on in step SD5305, and then the present process ends.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SD5304, that is, if the result is "completely missed", the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 180, after the process in step SD508, or if a negative determination is made in step SD501, in step SD509, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper starting winning hole 33YA or not. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step SD509, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made, in step SD510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the variable display triggered by winning to the upper starting winning hole 33YA is set to the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SD510, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD510, the process proceeds to step SD511, where the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step SD512, the values of the jackpot random number counter CD1, the jackpot type determination counter CD2, and the reach selection counter CD3 are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the first special fluctuation reservation area. After step SD512, the process moves to step SD513.

In step SD513, a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Incidentally, the jackpot determination process in step SD513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step SD505 above, except for the small hit determination, and the information regarding the variable display that is the target of the process is based on the winning in the upper starting winning opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

In the following step SD514, when it is determined in step SD513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a first jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot schedule flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CD2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the above-mentioned first jackpot type judgment table. If the value is either “0, 1”, turn on the “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag”, and if the value is one of “2 to 5” corresponding to “16R Probable Variable Jackpot B” turns on the "16R definite variable jackpot B flag", and if the value is "6" corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot A", turns on the "4R definite variable jackpot A flag", corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot B" If the value is "7 to 10", turn on the "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B flag", and if the value is "11" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot A", turn on the "16R normal jackpot". A flag" is turned on, and if the value is one of "12 to 15" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot B", turn on the "16R normal jackpot B flag" and correspond to "4R normal jackpot B". If the value is one of "16 to 19", the "4R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on.

If you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" here, that is, if "Until next time/High support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the above-mentioned non-announcement will be performed as in step SD506. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to perform the performance. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SD515, when it is determined in step SD513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter CD3 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is used. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. The reach determination process in step SD515 is similar to the reach determination process in step SD507, except that the information regarding the variable display that is the target of the process is based on the ball hitting the upper starting prize opening 33YA. For convenience, detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the subsequent step SD516, a holding control command setting process is performed. After that, this process ends. The setting process of the hold control command in step SD516 is similar to the process of setting the hold control command in step SD508, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SD305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 183.

In step SD601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step SD601, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step SD602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal holding counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step SD603, where the normal holding counter is Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step SD604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 updated in the random number update process of step SD303 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 177. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SD101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Executes wait processing for about seconds. In the following step SD102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step SD103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). If it is pressed, the process moves to step SD112 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step SD104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, and therefore, in this case as well, the process moves to step SD112. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SD105, and in the subsequent step SD106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case as well, the process moves to step SD112.

In the process of step SD112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. The sub-control device 262 that has received the initialization command executes its own initialization process as described later, and sets the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting to the gaming state Store in the status storage area.

Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SD113, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SD113, etc.). Furthermore, if the power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SD113, etc.). That is, in step SD113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step SD114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step SD115, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SD103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step SD107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step SD108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

In step SD109, a game state check process is executed to check the game state stored in the RAM 503 at the time of power-off.

In the subsequent step SD110, a return command is sent to return the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc., which are the sub-side control devices, to the gaming state at the time of power-off. Note that the return command sent to the sub-control device 262 includes information regarding the gaming state at the time of power-off identified in the gaming state check process (gaming state determination value Xj described later).

In step SD111, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step SD115, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Here, the game status check process in step SD109 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing a gaming state check process, and FIG. 185 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter Kj, and a gaming state determination value Xj, which will be described later. Note that the game state check process is also executed in the variable display setting process (step SD807) and the ending end setting process (step SD1214), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 184, in step SD1901, a process of reading various information related to the gaming state at the time of power-off, which is backed up and stored in the RAM 503, is executed. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj are each read from the RAM 503.

The lottery mode flag is state discrimination information for determining whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" or "high probability mode", and the flag value indicates whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode". In the case of "high probability mode", "50 (H)" is set, and in the case of "high probability mode", "53 (H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "5" of the upper four bits in the lottery mode flag is uniformly added as a countermeasure against noise, and is not particularly used to determine the gaming state.

The support mode flag is state discrimination information for determining what state the winning support mode is in. As the flag value, if the winning support mode is "low support mode", "A0 ( H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "A" of the upper four bits in the support mode flag is uniformly added as a noise countermeasure, and is not specifically used to determine the gaming state.

In addition, if the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", the flag value is "A1(H)" is set.

In addition, when the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value, and when it is "until next time/high support mode", the flag value is set. "A3(H)" is set.

The gaming state identification counter Kj is state discrimination information for counting the number of executions of the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot and specifying the switching timing of the gaming state, and is set to a predetermined initial value at the end of the jackpot, is subtracted by 1 each time it is performed. For example, as will be described later, if "50" is set as the initial value of the gaming state specific counter Kj, and then the value of the counter Kj becomes "31", the fluctuation display at that point will be as follows: It can be specified that this is the 20th fluctuation display.

In this embodiment, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "16R Normal Jackpot B" or "4R Normal Jackpot B", in other words, after the jackpot ends, "20 times/high support mode", When "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode" is provided, "50" is set as the initial value.

In addition, if you win "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A", that is, if "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded after the jackpot ends, "30" is set as the initial value. Ru.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", or "JUB Jackpot", that is, if you are granted "Until next time/High support mode" after the jackpot ends, the initial value will be "0". " is set. However, when the non-notification performance execution flag is turned on and the non-notification performance is executed, "30" is set as the initial value. The non-notification performance execution flag is turned off after the initial value is set.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 184, in step SD1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read in step SD1901 and the value of the support mode flag are added.

In the following step SD1903, the addition value calculated in step SD1902 is ANDed with a predetermined mask value (in this embodiment, "07 (H)"), the lower 3 bits of data are extracted, and the data is processed for a predetermined work. Set the game state determination value Xj in the area.

In step SD1904, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1" or not. In other words, the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SD1905, and it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4" or not. In other words, the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD1904 or step SD1905, the process moves to step SD1909. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD1905, the process moves to step SD1906.

In step SD1906, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "2" or not. That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SD1907, and it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5" or not. That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD1906 or step SD1907, the process moves to step SD1912. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD1907, the process moves to step SD1908.

In step SD1908, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "6" or not. That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode".

If an affirmative determination is made here, the process moves to step SD1914. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SD1916, stores the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and ends the process.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step SD1904 or step SD1905, and in step SD1909, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "31". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 20th time. If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SD1913, and if a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step SD1910.

In step SD1910, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "21". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SD1913, and if a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step SD1911.

In step SD1911, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "11". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SD1913, and if a negative determination is made, the process proceeds to step SD1912.

In step SD1912, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1". That is, it is determined whether it is the "50th time (in the case of the initial value "50")" or the "30th time (in the case of the initial value "30")".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SD1916, stores the value of the gaming state determination value Xj ("1", "4", "2", or "5") in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and Finish the process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD1912, that is, if the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1", the process moves to step SD1913, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is changed to "7". . Thereafter, the process moves to step SD1916, where the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step SD1908, and in step SD1914, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "0". That is, it is determined whether the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is not performed. If an affirmative determination is made here, the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD1914, that is, if it is the "until next time/high support mode" where non-notification effects are performed, the process moves to step SD1915, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set to "5". Change to Thereafter, the process moves to step SD1916, where the value "5" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends. As a result, even if you are in the "until next time/high support mode" state, the lottery mode will be "high probability mode" and the winning support mode will be "30 times" for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment).・The same effect as in the state of "High Support Mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 178. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the processing of steps SD201 to SD210 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps SD211 and SD212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SD201, control signals based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R, variable prize winning device 32, opening/closing accessory 37Y, etc. updated in the previous process are sent to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to each device. Execute external output processing such as sending the data to each sub-side control device. Some more detailed examples are listed below.

For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches described above, it is determined whether or not game balls have entered various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, and if there has been a winning, the prize balls corresponding to the number of winnings are determined. A payout command is transmitted to the payout control device 311.

Furthermore, if a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

In addition, in the external output process, information for understanding the gaming state is externally output to the hall computer of the game hall, taking into consideration various information such as the lottery mode flag and the jackpot flag described later. Furthermore, output of error information and the like to the hall computer is also executed in this output process.

For example, if a winning error is detected, an on signal (pulse signal) is output to the hall computer of the game hall via a predetermined terminal of the external relay terminal board 240, and if there is no winning error, the turn-off signal is output. A signal is output.

Further, when displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner by the effect display device 42, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 which has input the variation pattern command, symbol command, etc., determines the variation mode of the production display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the production display device 42 (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.). An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 to display (display).

In step SD202, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (198, 240 in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step SD203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SD204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Thereafter, in step SD205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of control is to be performed on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R and the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R are set, and jackpot determination and decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 are set. Setting of the fluctuation pattern is performed. Details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step SD206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the variable winning device 32 are set, such as what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when a jackpot or small win occurs, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step SD207, a second display control process is executed. In this process, settings such as what kind of control is to be performed on the normal symbol display device 41 and the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are performed. Details of this second display control processing will be described later.

In step SD208, opening/closing accessory control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, such as what kind of control is to be performed on the opening/closing accessory 37Y, are set. Details of this opening/closing accessory control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step SD209, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SD210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal process. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SD201, and the processes from step SD201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is executed repeatedly (step SD211, step SD212).

That is, in step SD211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SD212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step SD202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198, 240 in this example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process in steps SD201 to SD209 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CD1) can be randomly updated, and fluctuations can be similarly performed. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated randomly.

Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SD209: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step SD213 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SD213, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step SD214, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step SD215. to be memorized. Thereafter, in step SD216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step SD217, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step SD218, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step SD209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps SD201 to SD208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps SD211 and SD212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the appropriate timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since interrupt processing is prohibited from occurring before data is stored (step SD213), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the first display control process in step SD205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 186.

In FIG. 186, in step SD801, various winning flags (medium jackpot flag and medium winning flag) to be described later are referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is currently in a winning state (in a jackpot state or in a small winning state). judge.

In addition, during the winning state (during the jackpot state, during the small winning state), there is a round period in which the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, and an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state between the round periods. During the opening period before the start of the first round (the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R, the variable display is stopped in a manner corresponding to a win (big win or small win), and then the variable prize winning device 32 is displayed. (a predetermined period before the start of the first round), an ending period after the end of the final round (after the final round ends and the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state, the first special display device 43L or the (2) a predetermined period until the variable display can be started on the special display device 43R).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD801, that is, if the winning state is in progress, this process is immediately terminated.On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD801, a first display is displayed in step SD802, which will be described in detail later. It is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (effect display device 42) is undergoing a variable display by looking at the setting status of the medium flag. Specifically, if the first displaying flag is set (in the on state), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the first displaying flag is cleared (in the off state), the fluctuation display is considered to be in progress. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped. Although the details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting variable display on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step SD920, step SD807). When the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step SD814), it is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step SD802, that is, if the winning state is not in progress and the fluctuating display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step SD803, where the fluctuating display (second fluctuating It is determined whether the value of the lower suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions (display) is greater than 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD803, that is, if at least one second variable display is stored on hold, 1 is subtracted from the lower hold counter Nb in step SD804. Note that in this embodiment, if the second variable display is held and stored as a result of the determination process in step SD803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even if the first variable display is stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is prioritized and consumed (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

In the following step SD805, processing for shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the second special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step SD805, in step SD806, the process of turning on and off the second hold lamp 46b and the process of making the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 emit red light are performed, and then the process moves to step SD807.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SD803, that is, if no second variable display is stored pending storage, in step SD808, the variable display (first It is determined whether an upper suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions (variable display) is greater than 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step SD808, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step SD809. In the following step SD810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step SD810, in step SD811, the process of turning on and off the first holding lamp 46a and the process of causing the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process moves to step SD807. In this embodiment, there is one execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing a fluctuation display based on the data. Then, they will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step SD807, a variable display setting process is performed. Here, details of the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 187. First, in the pre-processing of step SD900, small hit determination processing, jackpot determination processing, gaming state check processing, etc. are executed.

In the small hit determination process, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a small win. sets the small winning flag to ON. Here, it may be determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a small win by determining whether or not the small hit schedule flag in the execution area of the special variable holding area is set to on. Further, the small hit scheduled flag is turned off after the small hit winning flag is set on.

Similarly, in the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CD1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot, and if it is a value corresponding to a jackpot. sets the jackpot winning flag to on. Here, it may be determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot schedule flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to on. Further, the jackpot scheduled flag is turned off after the jackpot winning flag is set on.

The above-mentioned small hit determination process, jackpot determination process, jackpot type determination process, reach determination process, etc. constitute a part of various lotteries in this embodiment, and are part of the lottery means by the function of the main control device 261 that executes them. is configured.

Since the game status check process is similar to the game status check process in step SD109 (see FIG. 184), detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the subsequent step SD901, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a small win by determining whether or not the small win winning flag is on.

If it is determined that this corresponds to a small win, the process moves to step SD910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process moves to step SD902.

In step SD902, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot winning flag is on.

If it is determined that this corresponds to a jackpot, the process moves to step SD903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step SD912.

In step SD903, the various probability variation jackpot flags ("16R probability variation jackpot A flag", "16R probability variation jackpot B flag", "4R probability variation jackpot A flag", "4R probability variation jackpot B" stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area are By determining whether any of the "flags") are on, it is determined whether the fluctuating display corresponds to a "probable variable jackpot".

When an affirmative determination is made in step SD903, that is, when it is a "probable variable jackpot", a variation pattern is determined in consideration of the variation pattern table corresponding to "probable variable jackpot" in step SD904, and is set in the variation pattern command. . Next, in step SD905, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "probable variable jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" (described later). Thereafter, the process moves to step SD920.

If a negative determination is made in step SD903, the process moves to step SD906, and the various normal jackpot flags (“16R normal jackpot A flag”, “16R normal jackpot B flag”, “4R normal jackpot A flag”, “4R normal jackpot A flag”, “4R normal jackpot A flag”, “4R normal jackpot A flag”, “4R normal jackpot A flag”, By determining whether any of the "Jackpot B Flag") is on, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to the "Normal Jackpot". If an affirmative determination is made in step SD906, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", then in step SD907, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot", and is set in the variation pattern command. do. Next, in step SD908, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "normal jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" (described later). Thereafter, the process moves to step SD920.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, depending on the type of symbols stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42, it is impossible to determine the gaming state such as the lottery mode given after the end of the jackpot. In other words, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", the "odd number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is a "normal jackpot", the "even number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and so on, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol and the jackpot type. are not clearly associated with each other, and in this embodiment, the above various tables are used to determine the predetermined fluctuations depending on the type of various jackpots, for example, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", it is likely to be stopped and displayed with "odd symbols". The tables are simply divided so that the appearance rates of patterns and designs are different. Therefore, for example, at the time of a jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable pattern or a stop symbol is selected based on one jackpot table, regardless of the type of jackpot such as "probable jackpot" or "normal jackpot".

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SD906, the process moves to step SD909, and it is determined whether or not the JUB jackpot flag is on, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to "JUB jackpot". Determine whether If an affirmative determination is made in step SD909, that is, if it is a "JUB jackpot", the process moves to step SD910.

In step SD910, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", and is set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step SD911, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ6", which will be described later) corresponding to the chance symbol is set, and the process proceeds to step SD920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SD902, that is, if it is "missing", it is determined in step SD912 whether or not the front and rear missing flags are on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD912, that is, in the case of "out-of-front reach", in step SD913, a variation pattern is determined by taking into consideration the variation pattern table corresponding to "out-of-front reach", and the variation pattern command is , and turn off the front and back out-of-line flags. Subsequently, in step SD914, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ3", which will be described later) corresponding to the front and back out-of-place symbol is set. Thereafter, the process moves to step SD920.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, it is determined in step SD915 whether or not the flag other than front/rear deviation is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SD915, that is, if it is a "reach other than front/back off", a fluctuation pattern is determined in step SD916 with reference to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front/back off"; Set it to the fluctuation pattern command and turn off the flags other than those that are out of order. Subsequently, in step SD917, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ4", which will be described later) corresponding to a symbol other than front and back out is set. Thereafter, the process moves to step SD920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SD915, that is, if it is "completely off", then in step SD918, an outgoing variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to "completely off", and the variation pattern command is Set to . Subsequently, in step SD919, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ5" to be described later) corresponding to a completely missed symbol is set. Thereafter, the process moves to step SD920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and variation pattern command will be explained. In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "probable variable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as "probable variable jackpot/variable pattern table"), a variable pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot", "JUB jackpot" and "small win" are used. , a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "completely off" (hereinafter referred to as "reach when completely off"). A plurality of variable pattern tables (referred to as variable pattern tables) are provided depending on the gaming status (values of gaming status determination value Xj "0" to "7").

For example, regarding the probability variable jackpot/variable pattern table, as shown in FIG. 206(a), at "address 100" which is the reference address, the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to the "normal state" of "0". A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 101", a variable probability/variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state determination value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 102", the value of gaming state determination value Xj is "2". A variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "103" is stored, a variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value Xj of "3" is stored at "address 104" , when the variable pattern table is stored, when the gaming state determination value Xj corresponds to the value "4", the fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 105", when the variable probability jackpot corresponds to the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5", A variable pattern table is stored, and at "address 106", a variable pattern table for a probability variable jackpot corresponding to the value "6" of the gaming state judgment value A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

In addition, regarding the complete failure/fluctuation pattern table, as shown in Figure 206(b), at "address 700" which is the reference address, the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to the "normal state" of "0". A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 701", a complete failure/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state judgment value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 702", the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2". A complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "703" is stored, a complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value "3" is stored at "address 704", , when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "4", the variation pattern table is stored, and at "address 705", when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "5", the completely off state/ A fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 706", a fluctuation pattern table for when the gaming state determination value Xj is completely off corresponding to "6" is stored; A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Although not shown, there are other fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "foreign and off reach", and As for the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front and back misses", as in the case of the above-mentioned variable pattern table for variable jackpot and fluctuating pattern table for complete miss, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0" ~ A plurality of table groups corresponding to "7" are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the fluctuation pattern in step SD904, step SD907, step SD910, step SD913, step SD916, and step SD918, first, based on the gaming state judgment value Xj specified in the above gaming state check process (step SD900). Next, a process is performed to select a table corresponding to a predetermined gaming state (values of gaming state determination value Xj from "0" to "7") from a plurality of table groups. At this time, the address where the table to be selected is stored is specified by adding the value of the gaming state judgment value can do. In other words, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj plays the role of the offset value as it is.

Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected fluctuation pattern table (for example, the variable jackpot time fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "address 100": see Figure 207). and set the corresponding variation pattern command.

The variable pattern command in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are composed of information specifying the gaming state. In this embodiment, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set as is. Furthermore, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are made up of information that specifies the jackpot type, etc., and the 8 bits of the lower byte are made up of information that specifies the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the variable probability jackpot/variation pattern table (see Figure 207) related to the normal state (Xj=0), in the variable probability jackpot/variation pattern command related to the normal state, the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are "0", which is the value of the gaming state determination value Xj, is set, and "F" indicating "probable variable jackpot" is set in the following four lower bits. Then, the remaining 8 bits of the lower byte are set with values that specify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Note that the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation modes (effect patterns) of decorative symbols in a table, and when a variation pattern command is received, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is stored in the sub-control device 262. The pattern (performance pattern) becomes executable.

Next, the symbol commands will be explained in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine the symbol to be stopped. In this embodiment, there are six categories: combinations of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of even-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of symbols other than front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of completely out-of-place symbols, and combinations of chance symbols. is specified. These categories are indicated by, for example, "BZ1," "BZ2," "BZ3," "BZ4," "BZ5," and "BZ6," and any one of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and stop symbols is stored in the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

The combination of odd jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "BZ1" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of odd jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "BZ1" indicating an odd jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of even jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "BZ2" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of even jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "BZ2" indicating an even jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of front and back off symbols corresponds to the "front and back off reach" in which after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops, and corresponds to the combination of front and back off symbols. “BZ3” is set in the symbol command.

The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to the "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the combination of symbols other than front and rear off is the pattern that corresponds to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "BZ4" is set in the command.

The combination of complete miss symbols corresponds to a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs, and "BZ5" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the complete miss symbol combination.

Moreover, "BZ6" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, as described above, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top.

Although details will be described later, when "BZ3" to "BZ5" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. Specifically, when "BZ3" indicating a combination of front and rear out-of-reach symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command selects the front and rear out-of-reach symbols stored in the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to a missed reach is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front and back misses is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than front and rear misses stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and rear misses in the RAM 553 is sent to the sub-control device. 262 is determined as the stopping symbol. When "BZ5" indicating a combination of completely missed symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects the combination of symbols corresponding to a completely missed symbol stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

Further, when "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols.

Incidentally, the variation pattern command and symbol command set as described above are output in an external output process (step SD201) which will be described later. Then, the sub-control device 262 that has input these commands determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on these commands, and performs display control to display the variation mode on the effect display device 42 (variable display). An instruction is issued to the device 45.

Now, in step SD920, a start setting process is performed that indicates that the conditions for performing variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In this start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. .

The variable display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative symbol selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the settings of the first display timer, when a control signal to start variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of normal processing, the special display device Variable display starts at 43L and 43R. After step SD920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 186, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD802, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SD812, where a first display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SD813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, taking into account the value of the first display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SD813.

If a negative determination is made in step SD813, in step SD817, switching display settings are made to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the present process is ended. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD813, the first displaying flag is canceled (turned off) in step SD814, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R in step SD815. .

In addition, based on the setting contents of the above-mentioned stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for only a few seconds).

Subsequently, in step SD816, a variation end setting process is performed, and then this process is ended. Here, the variation end setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 188.

First, in step SD1001, it is determined whether the stop display corresponds to a jackpot or a small win, taking into account the jackpot winning flag and the small winning winning flag. Here, if it corresponds to a big win or a small win, it is assumed that a predetermined operating condition is met, and the process moves to step SD1002, where win settings are made.

Specifically, setting processing is performed for the medium jackpot flag, medium small win flag, opening flag, first open flag, first variable timer, round number counter Rx, winning counter Vx, etc., and the start of the jackpot or small win. Also, processing for setting an opening command that announces the winning type is also performed. Then, after step SD1002 ends, the variation end time setting process ends.

The jackpot flag is state determination information for determining whether or not a jackpot is in progress, and here, "1" indicating the occurrence of a jackpot is set as the flag value (turned on). In addition, instead of using the jackpot flag, it may be determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress by determining whether the value of the round number counter Rx for jackpot is greater than 0. Further, the jackpot winning flag is turned off after the jackpot winning flag is set on.

The small hit medium flag is state discrimination information for determining whether or not a small win is in progress. Here, like the medium jackpot flag, "1" indicating the occurrence of a small win is set as the flag value. (turned on). Note that the small winning winning flag is turned off after the small winning medium flag is set on.

The opening flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the opening period is in progress. Here, "1" indicating that the opening period is in progress is set as the flag value (turned on).

The first open flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state (during the round period).

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the open time (round period) of the variable winning device 32, the interval period between rounds, etc., and a specified time has elapsed from the start or end of opening of the opening/closing shutter 32b. This will be taken into account when determining whether or not the In the win setting process of step SD1002, predetermined values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 208).

For example, if the first time is the above-mentioned "long open" like "16R guaranteed variable jackpot A", "7500" is set in the first variable timer, and like "JUB jackpot" the first time is the above-mentioned "short open". In this case, "100" is set in the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening/closing operation of the opening/closing shutter 32b is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds". In other words, the main control device 261 as a movable control unit selects an opening/closing pattern, which is one movable mode of the opening/closing shutter 32b that moves during the jackpot performance, among a plurality of opening/closing patterns (number of rounds) stored in the opening/closing pattern control table. The decision will be made and executed.

As shown in FIG. 208, the opening/closing pattern control table as specific information includes, as setting information, the number of occurrences of the special prize state in various winning states (number of rounds), and the opening/closing shutter 32b in each special prize state (each round). The opening time, the interval time between each special prize state, etc. are set in advance.

The round number counter Rx is the number of times the special prize state (round) is executed during the jackpot state or the small win state, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process (“long open” or “short open”) of the variable winning device 32 is executed. This is state determination information for determining. In the win setting process of step SD1002, initial values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 208). For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" is set as information indicating 16 times which is the second specific period, and in the case of "4R probability variable jackpot A", 4 times which is the first specific period. "4" is set as information indicating. In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", "20" is set as the initial value as information indicating 20 times, which is the total of 5 "short openings" and 15 "long openings". In addition, after the number of rounds is determined by the above-mentioned jackpot type determination process and the information indicating the number of rounds is initially set as an initial value, the set information does not increase in the middle and the set information A termination determination will be made based on this.

The winning counter Vx is a winning counting means that counts the number of game balls that have won into the variable winning device 32. In this embodiment, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 179), it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there is a winning prize, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is incremented by 1.

In addition, in the win setting process of step SD1002, the maximum expected number of prizes to be won to the variable prize winning device 32 per one opening/closing operation (one round) of the opening/closing shutter 32b is determined with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 208). Set the specified number Vo. As described above, the prescribed number Vo is predetermined for each opening type (operation mode of the opening/closing member related to one opening/closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". For example, for "long open", the specified number Vo is set to "10", and for "short open", the specified number Vo is set to "3".

Now, in step SD1001, if it is determined that the stop display does not correspond to a jackpot or a small win, the process moves to step SD1003.

In step SD1003, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". The support counter is a means to measure the duration of the "high support mode" (how many times the fluctuation is displayed), and as described later, after the jackpot ends, the values corresponding to various jackpots are set as the counter value. Ru.

Here, if the counter value of the support number counter is "0", this process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the support number counter is set (the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the high support mode is being set, and in step SD1004, the value of the support number counter is subtracted by 1. . In step SD1004, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is also performed. Thereafter, the process moves to step SD1005.

In step SD1005, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the predetermined number of variable displays after the end of the jackpot (after the high support mode is applied). Here, if the value of the support number counter is "0", the value of the support mode flag is switched to "A0 (H)" indicating "low support mode" in step SD1006, and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SD1005 that the counter value of the support number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the variable prize winning device control process in step SD206 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 189.

First, in step SD1201, various winning flags (medium jackpot flag and medium winning flag) are referred to to determine whether or not the game is currently in a winning state (in a jackpot state or a small winning state). If a negative determination is made here, the process is directly terminated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD1201, the value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in the subsequent step SD1202.

In the following step SD1203, it is determined whether the first open flag is on, that is, whether the round period is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SD1204, and checks whether the value of the first variable timer is "0" or not, that is, the round period ("30 seconds" in the case of "long open", "30 seconds" in the case of "short open", ”, it is determined whether it is the end timing of “0.4 seconds”).

If a negative determination is made in step SD1204, the process proceeds to step SD1205 to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is greater than or equal to the specified number Vo, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 during the round period. It is determined whether or not the winning number has reached the specified number Vo (“10 pieces” in the case of “long opening” and “3 pieces” in the case of “short opening”) which is the maximum expected number of prizes. If a negative determination is made in step SD1205, that is, if the timing to close the variable prize winning device 32 (the end timing of the round period) has not yet arrived, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD1204 or step SD1205, that is, if it is the end timing of the round period, the process proceeds to step SD1206, and the value of the round number counter Rx is subtracted by 1.

After that, the process proceeds to step SD1207, where it is determined whether the value of the round number counter Rx is "0", that is, whether the number of rounds ("long open" or "short open") has been executed has reached the specified number of times. Determined by functional part. In other words, it is determined whether the conditions for ending the series of round opening and closing operations in the winning state are satisfied.

Note that the end timing of each round period changes depending on the behavior of the game ball fired by the player operating the handle 18 and the state of the nails 49 etc. arranged in the game area. Therefore, each round period may end after the specified time (30 seconds in the case of ``Long Open'', ``0.4 seconds'' in the case of ``Short Open''), or The game ends on the condition that a specified number of game balls ("10" for "long open", "3" for "short open") enter the grand prize opening 32a before the time elapses. Sometimes. In other words, at least one of the conditions for ending the winning state can be satisfied based on the ball firing operation by the player, and the timing at which the condition is satisfied changes.

Alternatively, in place of the above configuration, in the win setting process of step SD1002, the initial value "0" is set to the value of the round number counter Rx, and the process of adding 1 to the value of the round number counter Rx in step SD1206 is performed. and in step SD1207, it is determined whether the value of the round number counter Rx has reached the specified number of rounds corresponding to each type of win (for example, "16" in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A"). Good too.

However, in this embodiment, it is configured such that it is determined whether or not the end condition is satisfied only when the big prize opening 32a is closed (when the opening/closing shutter 32b is in the initial position). This is because the termination condition cannot be satisfied when the big winning opening 32a is opened, and it is irrational to determine whether the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, and in the end, it is not possible to determine whether the termination condition is satisfied at this timing. This is because judgment is required.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD1207, ending setting processing is performed in step SD1208, and the present processing is ended. That is, the movement of the opening/closing shutter 32b located at the closed position (initial position) is stopped, and the series of round opening/closing operations is terminated by the termination function section.

In addition, in the ending setting process of step SD1208, the first open flag is turned off, the ending flag is turned on, and an ending command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start the ending, and the first opening flag is turned off and the ending flag is turned on. A process such as setting a value corresponding to a predetermined ending period (ending period for a jackpot or ending period for a small win) for a variable timer is performed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD1207, that is, if the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the specified number of times, an interval setting process that becomes stop control is performed in step SD1209, and this process ends.

In the interval setting process at step SD1209, the first open flag is turned off, and an interval command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start an interval, and the above-mentioned opening/closing pattern control table (Fig. 208), a process of setting the first variable timer to a value corresponding to a predetermined interval period ("3 seconds" or "1 second") is performed.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SD1203, that is, if it is a predetermined period other than the round period (opening period, interval period, or ending period), the process proceeds to step SD1210, and the value of the first variable timer is It is determined whether or not is "0". That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the predetermined period (opening period, interval period, or ending period).

If a negative determination is made in step SD1210, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD1210, it is determined in step SD1211 whether or not the opening flag (see step SD1002) is turned on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD1211, that is, if it is the end timing of the opening period, an opening end setting process is performed in step SD1212, and then this process is ended.

In the opening end setting process of step SD1212, the opening flag is turned off, the first open flag is turned on, and a round command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start a round, and the above-mentioned opening/closing pattern control is performed. Considering the table (see Figure 208), correspond to the predetermined round period (“30 seconds” for “long release” and “0.4 seconds” for “short release”) for the first variable timer. Performs processing such as setting the value to be used.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD1211, it is determined in step SD1213 whether or not the ending flag (see step SD1208) is turned on. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD1213, that is, when it is the end timing of the ending period, ending end setting processing (end setting of winning state) is performed in step SD1214, and this processing is ended.

In the ending end setting process of step SD1214, the winning flag (medium jackpot flag or medium winning flag) and ending flag are turned off, and a winning end command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to convey information that the winning state ends. (a jackpot end command that conveys information that the jackpot state ends, or a small win end command that conveys information that the small win state ends), etc. is performed.

Further, in the ending end setting process, a lottery mode flag switching process, a support mode flag switching process, a support number counter setting process, a game state notification command setting process, etc. are performed.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (various "probability variable jackpot flag" or "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on), "53 (H)" indicating the occurrence of "high probability mode" is set as a flag value. On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (various "normal jackpot flags" are on), "50 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "low probability mode" is set as the flag value.

However, when the small winning medium flag is on (when the large winning medium flag is off), the lottery mode flag switching process is not performed, and the flag value related to the original mode is set as is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of a small win (the flag value of the lottery mode flag is "53 (H)"), even after the small win ends, the "high probability mode" (lottery mode The flag value "53 (H)") of the flag is set.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the flag value will be "A1 (H)" is set as the flag value, "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "30 times/high support mode S", and "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "until next time/high support mode". "A3(H)" is set as the flag value.

In the support number counter setting process, the support number counter is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the support As the value of the number counter, "20" corresponds to 20 times of fluctuation display, "30" corresponds to 30 times of fluctuation display, "40" corresponds to 40 times of fluctuation display, or "50" corresponds to 50 times of fluctuation display. Set. Further, when "30 times/high support mode S" is provided, "30" corresponding to 30 times of variable display is set as the value of the support number counter. When the "until next time/high support mode" is provided, the value of the support number counter is set to a value that is virtually impossible to reach (for example, "99999" corresponding to 99999 times of fluctuation display).

The gaming state notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the gaming state that will be set after the end of the jackpot. In setting the command, first a game status check process is performed. Since the game status check process is similar to the game status check process in step SD109 (see FIG. 184), detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The gaming status notification command includes a gaming status determination value Xj related to the new gaming status ascertained through the gaming status checking process. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that receives this switches the gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj) that it knows to a new gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj). Note that the gaming state notification command may be omitted, and instead of this, the gaming state determination value Xj may be included in, for example, a jackpot end command that announces the end of the jackpot state.

It should be noted that the various "jackpot flags" are turned off after various processes such as the lottery mode flag switching process are completed. In addition, when the winning setting (step SD1002) is performed in the variation end setting process in FIG. A configuration may also be adopted in which the "high probability mode" is interrupted.

If a negative determination is made in step SD1213, that is, if it is the end timing of the interval period, round start processing is performed in step SD1215, and then this processing is ended.

In the round start process of step SD1215, the first open flag is turned on, and a round command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start the round.

Furthermore, in the round start process, the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 208) is taken into consideration, and the opening time for the next round ("30 seconds" for "long opening", "30 seconds" for "short opening"), The process of setting the value corresponding to "0.4 seconds" in the first variable timer and the specified number Vo for the next round ("10 pieces" for "long open", "10 pieces" for "short open") Processing to set the value of "3"), processing to reset the value of the winning counter Vx to "0", etc. are performed.

Based on the on/off state of the first open flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first opening flag is on, a control signal to open the opening/closing shutter 32b is outputted to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening 32a becomes open. At the same time, a light emitting means such as an LED provided in the grand prize opening 32a is controlled to emit light, thereby making it easier for the player to visually recognize the grand prize opening 32a. On the other hand, when the first open flag is off, a control signal to close the opening/closing shutter 32b is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening 32a is closed. At the same time, control is performed to turn off the light emitting means such as the LED.

Next, the second display control process in step SD207 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 190.

In FIG. 190, in step SD2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display by checking the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display. Determine. Specifically, when the second displaying flag is on, it is assumed that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step SD2101, the process proceeds to step SD2102, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is >0, the process advances to step SD2103. In step SD2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step SD2104, a process is executed to shift the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step SD2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 are satisfied. Specifically, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, so "500" is set to the second display timer. . Further, in the "high support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, "100" is set to the second display timer.

Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the normal symbol display device 41 will display the variable display. Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "×" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and if the displayed symbol is "○", it will be displayed as "×" or "×". ”, the display is switched to “○”. Then, after step SD2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Now, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD2101, that is, if variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step SD2106, where a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second display timer is subtracted by 1.

The process then proceeds to step SD2107, where it is determined whether the value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD2107, the second displaying flag is turned off in step SD2108, and in step SD2109, the normal symbol stop display setting for performing a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Then, based on the setting contents of this normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a win, the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for a few seconds), and in the case of a loss, the "x" symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is determined whether or not it is a win based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter CD4 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area.

Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter CD4, the winning values are two, "0 and 1" in "low support mode", and "0 to 7" in "high support mode". There are 8 pieces.

Next, the process advances to step SD2110, where a variation end setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed. Specifically, the second open flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second open flag is state determination information for determining whether the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a prescribed time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is different between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", "1000" is set for the second variable timer. In the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD2107, a switching display setting is performed in step SD2111 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, and the present process is ended. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", the display is switched to "x", and if the current lighting is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the opening/closing accessory control process in step SD208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 191.

First, in step SD2201, it is determined whether the second open flag indicating whether the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second open flag is not on (the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the closed state), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD2201, that is, if the second open flag is on, it is assumed that the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step SD2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

The process then proceeds to step SD2203, where it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the second variable timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step SD2203 when the specified opening time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD2203, the process moves to step SD2204, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the end setting process of step SD2204, a process of turning off the second open flag is performed.

Based on the on/off status of the second open flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second opening flag is on, a control signal to open the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the open state. On the other hand, when the second opening flag is off, a control signal to close the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the closed state. As a result, it becomes impossible to win a game ball into the lower starting winning hole 33YB.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be explained. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will first be explained with reference to FIG. 192, and then main processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 193.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in step SD3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step SD3002, in order to memorize that the command was sent from the main control device 261. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by the interrupt process that is executed when the command is received. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step SD3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SD3101, initial setting processing is performed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted in step SD3103, and an external interrupt vector is set in step SD3104.

Thereafter, in step SD3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SD3107, and in the following step SD3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step SD3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SD3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization processing from step SD3115 onward. Transition.

In step SD3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SD3116, the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step SD3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SD3114, where interrupts are permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step SD3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SD3108, process). That is, in step SD3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step SD3110, the power cut-off occurrence information is cleared, and in step SD3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step SD3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SD3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SD3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SD3114, in the process of step SD3122, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step SD3123 onwards is performed as power outage processing at the time of power-off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SD3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step SD3124. After that, in step SD3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step SD3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step SD3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and RAM access is prohibited in step SD3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that the process in step SD3122 checks the power-off occurrence information after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 194. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is obtained, and a determination process for the command is performed (step SD3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 195.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps SD3124, SD3201), first, it is determined in step SD3301 whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 192).

If it is determined in step SD3301 that the command reception flag is off, then this process is terminated because no new command has been received from the main controller 261. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step SD3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step SD3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SD3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SD3303, it is possible to skip the processing of steps SD3302 to step SD3311 until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing from step SD3304 to step SD3306. In step SD3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SD3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SD3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step SD3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step SD3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step SD3309. Thereafter, in step SD3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission to pay out the prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step SD3307, this command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step SD3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of RAM 513 (step SD3308) and set the initial value of RAM 513 (step SD3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SD3304: NO, step SD3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 will return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step SD3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SD3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step SD3305: NO, step SD3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step SD3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step SD3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SD3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step SD3304: NO), a payout return command (step SD3305: NO), and a prize ball command (step SD3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 194. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step SD3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD3202, launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step SD3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step SD3204. Execute the return operation. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step SD3205, the lower tray full state or lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full. , execute the setting for the lower tray full release state. Further, in step SD3206, a tank ball no state (ball out state) or a tank ball no state released state (ball present state) is executed depending on the change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb condition is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb release condition are performed. Run the settings.

Thereafter, in step SD3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step SD3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step SD3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step SD3210.

In step SD3211, the dispensing motor 358a is driven to execute the ball discharging process, on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked and the ball is not in a state where it is not possible to dislodge the ball, and that the ball discharging operation has not started. In the following step SD3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibrator motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be explained with reference to FIG. 196. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In this normal processing, first in step SD3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step SD3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

Note that the ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the storage area is It is configured to return to the starting point and update the command. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the following step SD3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, command determination processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 199.

First, in step SD4101, the received command is read from the command buffer of RAM553. In the subsequent step SD4102, it is determined whether the command is an initialization command, in step SD4103 it is determined whether or not it is a return command, in step SD4104 it is determined whether or not it is a pending control command, and in step SD4110 In step SD4111, it is determined whether or not it is a gaming state notification command, and in step SD4112, it is determined whether or not it is a symbol command.

Note that commands related to winning effects (opening commands, round commands, interval commands, ending commands, jackpot end commands, small win end commands, etc.) are judged in the command judgment process of step SD3903; The processes corresponding to these commands are not executed, and the processes corresponding to these commands are executed in the display setting process (win display process) in step SD3907, which will be described later.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is an initialization command, it means that the main controller 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 553 when the power is turned on, so the RAM 553 is cleared in step SD4105, and the RAM 553 is cleared in step SD4106. Set the initial value of RAM 553. As a result, the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a return command (step SD4102: NO, step SD4103: YES), the main control device 261 returns to the state before the power was cut off, so the subsystem that does not have a backup function In step SD4107, the control device 262 reads the value of the gaming state determination value Xj (any one of "0" to "7") included in the return command, and stores it in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a hold control command (step SD4103: NO, step SD4104: YES), in step SD4108, various information (such as jackpot discrimination information and jackpot type) included in the hold control command is processed. information, information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is the trigger for the variable display) is stored in the sub-variation holding area, and this processing ends.

The sub-fluctuation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special fluctuation reservation area of the main controller 261. In other words, the sub-variation holding area includes a first sub-variation holding area corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33YA, a second sub fluctuation holding area corresponding to the lower starting winning opening 33YB, and one sub-execution area. Each of the two sub-fluctuating reservation areas includes four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area).

In each holding area, according to the reception history (reception order) of the holding control command and the winning history of the game ball included in the holding control command (whether the winning is based on which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB, etc.), Information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type information) related to the variable display executed by the effect display device 42 is stored in chronological order. Thereby, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the number of pending changes and their contents.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a gaming state notification command (step SD4104: NO, step SD4110: YES), in step SD4107, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj included in the gaming state notification command ( (any one of "0" to "7") is read out and stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a variable pattern command (step SD4110: NO, step SD4111: YES), it is the timing to start variable display on the effect display device 42, so start setting is performed in step SD4113. After processing, the process moves to step SD4114.

In the start setting process of step SD4113, various settings related to the variable display performed on the effect display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub-fluctuation holding area to the sub-execution area side is executed. Subsequently, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display timer. The variable display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of the variable display) in the effect display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

In addition, in the start setting process, a variable display flag is turned on, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the effect display device 42 is displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, a production pattern related to the variation display of decorative symbols is selected, and the display is stopped after the variation time has elapsed based on the hit type information (including "miss"). Determine the stopping symbols (combination of stopping symbols) to be executed. Information regarding the production pattern and stop symbols determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation holding area. Note that the correspondence between variable time information and performance patterns and the correspondence between jackpot type information and stopped symbols are stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table.

In addition, in the sub-control device 262, similarly to the main control device 261, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "probable variable jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "normal jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "JUB jackpot" and a "small win" are generated. , the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "completely off", respectively, the values of the game state judgment value Xj are "0" to " 7" A plurality of corresponding table groups are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

That is, when determining the display mode on the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects a predetermined gaming state (gaming state judgment value The table corresponding to the values of Xj ("0" to "7") is selected. At this time, specifying the address where the table to be selected is stored by adding the value of the gaming state determination value Xj to the reference address is the same as when selecting the above-mentioned variable pattern table.

Therefore, the sub-control device 262 constitutes the display control section in this embodiment, and depending on the winning lottery result by the main control device 261, the display device 42 controls the variable display of decorative symbols, which is one specific effect, to be executed on the effect display device 42. Such a performance pattern is determined from among a plurality of performance display modes and executed.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a symbol command (step SD4111: NO, step SD4112: YES), symbol setting processing is performed in step SD4116, and this processing is ended.

In the symbol setting process of step SD4116, the symbols stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 197) of the RAM 553, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect display device 42 based on the winning type information stored in the reservation area of the sub-variation reservation area. It is set in the above sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed.

More specifically, when "BZ1" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th symbols is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "BZ2" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the zero, 2, 4, 6, and 8 symbols is determined as the stop symbol. In addition, when "BZ3" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front and back out-of-reach symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ4" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and back out is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ5" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely missed symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When “BZ6” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” is set as a stop symbol in accordance with the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the production display device 42. decide.

Now, in step SD4114, it is determined whether or not the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variable pattern command matches the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Here, if both values match, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the two values are different, the status error flag is turned on at step SD4115, and at step SD4117, the value of gaming status determination value Xj included in the newly received fluctuation pattern command is regarded as the appropriate value. , the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in the gaming state information storage area. After that, this process ends. If the two values are different by turning on the status error flag, this fact will be notified by the error display lamp 104 or the like. Of course, the notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and may be configured to notify the error using the effect display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like.

In recent years, gaming machines have a backup function in their main controllers, so even if the power is cut off due to a power outage, various data including the gaming mode (gaming state) at that time will be stored. Since the power can be maintained, even if the power is cut off during the high probability mode, the player can resume playing the game in the high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, by using the backup function described above, it becomes possible to set the gaming machines in the high probability mode from the beginning of business at the gaming hall, which is commonly called "morning." Such acts are carried out by the game hall in order to increase its ability to attract customers at the start of business, but there is a risk that the gambling spirit of the players may be turned into a prank. Various methods can be considered to set the above action, but one example is a method of not initializing and resetting a gaming machine whose gaming mode was the high probability mode at the end of business on the previous day. Furthermore, in a configuration such as the present embodiment, in which information regarding the gaming mode (gaming state determination value Xj) is transmitted from the main controller to the sub-control device by a return command or the like when the pachinko machine is powered on, etc. If the cable connector connecting the main controller and sub-control device is removed when the power is turned on, etc., the sub-control device will not be able to grasp the actual gaming mode set by the main controller, and will not be able to grasp the initial gaming mode. In other words, control related to the "normal mode" is performed.

In general gaming machines, when performing effects on a display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color, etc.) is made different between the normal mode and the high probability mode, so that players, etc. This makes it easy to understand the current game mode.

Further, since the sub-control device that controls the liquid crystal display device and the like generally does not have a backup function, when the power is turned off, control related to the initial setting gaming mode ("normal mode") is performed.

Therefore, by utilizing this, it is possible to set the display mode of the liquid crystal display device to be in the normal mode even though the actual gaming mode set by the main controller is the high probability mode. In this case, the current gaming mode cannot be easily determined just by looking at the liquid crystal display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this action through a predetermined investigation or the like.

In particular, in a gaming machine where a high probability mode that is superficially difficult to distinguish from the "normal mode", such as the "latent probability variable state" of the present embodiment, is set, the high probability mode is activated by the above action, and the gaming hall starts operating. If the game mode is set from time to time, it becomes impossible to determine the actual game mode from the display mode of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the fluctuation pattern command and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 are different. If so, an error notification is made to that effect, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the gaming state information storage area. In other words, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate gaming mode at that time. As a result, even if an action such as the above-mentioned "Morning" is performed and the actual gaming mode set by the main controller 261 is the high probability mode, the performance mode in the sub-control device 262 will be changed to the mode in the normal mode. Even if the variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the performance mode corresponds to the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command. As a result, actions such as the above-mentioned "morning" by the game hall can be suppressed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 196, after step SD3903 or if a negative determination is made in step SD3901, the process moves to step SD3904, and it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SD3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step SD3912.

In step SD3905, updating processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 197, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CD5, the role-playing counter CD8 as a determination counter, and each losing symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area The upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR used for setting are used.

The missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CD5 is for determining the symbol (jackpot symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42 when a jackpot (“probable jackpot” or “normal jackpot”) occurs. In this embodiment, five odd-numbered symbols and five even-numbered symbols are set as jackpot symbols. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CD5. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CD5 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 4, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit (ie, 4). When the symbol command transmitted from the main controller 261 is "BZ1" indicating a combination of odd jackpot symbols, the counter value is determined based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values and decorative symbols), for example. If is 0, it is "1" (lower number), if it is 1, it is "3" (lower number), if it is 2, it is "5" (lower number), and if it is 3, it is "7" (lower number). If the number is 4, then the number is 9, and so on, the combination of odd jackpot symbols is determined.

Also, if the symbol command is "BZ2" indicating a combination of even jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values and decorative symbols), for example, if the counter value is 0, "0" If it is 1, it will be “2”, if it is 2, it will be “4”, if it is 3, it will be “6”, if it is 4, it will be “ A combination of even jackpot symbols is determined, such as ``8'' (double number).

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CD5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SD3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as described above. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CD5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referenced at the timing when a symbol command is received. You may also do so.

The accessory performance counter CD8 is for determining whether or not to perform an accessory performance (additional performance), which will be described later, and its type. As the accessory production counter CD8, 400 counter values (0 to 399) are prepared. That is, the accessory production counter CD8 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 399, and return to 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 399).

The accessory performance counter CD8 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SD3905 and stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553. Then, it will be taken into consideration in the accessory performance setting process of step SD3910, which will be described later.

The upper, middle, and lower losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stopping symbols (combinations of losing symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the jackpot lottery results in a "losing" drawing. Since each column displays one of 10 decorative symbols, 10 counter values (0 to 9) are prepared for each column. The upper/missing symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle/missing symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower/missing symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbol in the lower symbol display area. is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical values of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted and the current value is determined. Ru. The winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that their update times do not overlap, and the combination of these winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the RAM 553 as the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffers, front and rear out-of-reach reach symbol buffers, and It is stored in one of the completely missed symbol buffers.

Here, the updating process of each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 198, in step SD4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL, and in step SD4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the center/miss symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the down/out symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination will be made in step SD4001. Further, if the top/miss symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step SD4002. Then, if it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL (step SD4001 is YES), the process advances to step SD4003, and the top/miss symbol counter CL is updated. If it is time to update the center/out symbol counter CM (step SD4002 is YES), the process advances to step SD4004, and the center/out symbol counter CM is updated. Furthermore, if it is time to update the down/out symbol counter CR (steps SD4001 and SD4002 are both NO), the process advances to step SD4005, and the down/out symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SD4003 to SD4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted. , the calculation results are set as the current values of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above update process of CL, CM, and CR, each of the upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. Never. As a result, one set of missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step SD4006, the combination of the updated missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas If it is a combination of reach-to-reach symbols (YES in step SD4006), further in step SD4007, it is determined whether or not the symbol is different from the symbol in the middle symbol display area. Determine whether or not. If the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and back missed reach (front and back missed symbols) (step SD4007 is YES), the process advances to step SD4008, and the combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is determined. It is stored in the front and back out-of-reach symbol buffers in the RAM 553. If the missing symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach (symbols other than front/back off) (symbols other than front/back off) (NO in step SD4007), the process advances to step SD4009, and the off symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time are The combinations are stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and back.

If the combination is other than the ready-to-reach symbol (NO in step SD4006), the process proceeds to step SD4010, where it is determined whether the combination of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a winning symbol combination, If it is a combination of losing symbols (completely missing symbols) (step SD4010 is YES), the process advances to step SD4011, and the combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely missing symbol buffer of the RAM 553. do. Note that if both Step SD4006 and Step SD4010 are NO, the symbols are aligned on the top, middle, and bottom, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols, but in this case, the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are buffered. The process ends without storing the data in the file.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the chance pattern that is stopped and displayed in the case of "JUB jackpot" has one combination of decorative patterns ("3", "4", "1"), There is no need to use counter information for display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 196, in step SD3907, display setting processing for performing various displays on the effect display device 42 is performed. In the display setting process, the effect display device 42 mainly performs a variable display setting process to perform a variable display of decorative symbols, a hold display setting process to perform a hold display, a effect display during a winning state, etc. A winning display process is performed for the purpose of winning.

First, the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 200. As shown in FIG. 200, in step SD4301, the setting status of the variable display flag is checked to determine whether or not the effect display device 42 is displaying a variable display. In detail, if the fluctuating display flag is set (on), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the fluctuating flag is cleared (off), the fluctuating display is It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which is a stopped state. As described above, the fluctuating display flag is turned on when starting the fluctuating display of the effect display device 42 (start setting process of step SD4113), and is turned on when the fluctuating display of the effect display device 42 is stopped (step SD4113). (see SD4305).

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, at the start of the fluctuation or if the fluctuation is in progress, the process proceeds to step SD4302, and if a negative determination is made, the present process is directly ended.

In step SD4302, a variable display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the fluctuation display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Next, the process proceeds to step SD4303, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the fluctuation display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SD4303.

If a negative determination is made in step SD4303, a variation execution process is performed in step SD4304 to execute a variation display on the effect display device 42, and this process is ended.

In this variation execution process, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variation reservation area of the RAM 553, for example. .

Thereby, the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in accordance with the command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of symbols on the effect display device 42. Once a fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the value of the fluctuation display timer set in the start setting process of step SD4113 is Until it reaches "0"), the variable display of symbols continues under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD4303, that is, if it is determined that the value of the variable display timer is "0", the stop display setting for performing a stop display on the effect display device 42 is performed in step SD4305. and end this process. In the stop display setting, the fluctuating display flag is canceled (turned off), and a stop command that instructs the display control device 45 to stop the fluctuating display on the effect display device 42 is set.

In addition, in the variation execution process of step SD4304, a performance mode switching setting process for performing the display mode on the performance display device 42 in a mode (performance mode) according to the type of gaming state is also performed.

The performance mode in this embodiment is a state in which a "normal mode" is not provided with a "high support mode" and a state in which a "high support mode" is provided, depending on the gaming state (value of the gaming state determination value Xj). ``Chance mode'', which has an unknown duration, and ``Until next time/high support mode'', and ``Gold mode'' which explicitly informs the player. It is set to switch between.

More specifically, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "0", that is, when "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are assigned, The performance mode in the performance display device 42 is set to "normal mode" (see FIG. 209).

In addition, when the value of the gaming state judgment value Since the state is in a "potential state", even in such a case, the performance mode in the performance display device 42 is set to the "normal mode" so that the state is superficially the same as the "normal state".

When the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5", or "7", that is, "20 times/high support mode" , "30 times/High support mode", "40 times/High support mode", "50 times/High support mode", "30 times/High support mode S", "Until next time/High support mode" non-announcement effects Alternatively, during the period of "support continuous performance" which will be described later, the performance mode on the performance display device 42 is set to "chance mode" (see FIG. 211).

When the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "6", that is, when the "until next time/high support mode" is assigned (excluding the non-announcement production period), , the performance mode on the performance display device 42 is set to "gold mode" (see FIG. 212).

Next, the hold display setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 201. First, in step SD4501, the winning type information stored in the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area corresponding to the lower start prize opening 33YB among the sub-variation reservation areas is information corresponding to a small win (small win). (win information).

If a negative determination is made here, that is, if small hit information is not included, a normal pending display update process is performed in step SD4502. As shown in FIG. 209, in the normal hold display, in the first hold display area W3a and the second hold display area W3b, hold images TA1 to TA1 corresponding to four hold areas (hold first to fourth hold areas), respectively. TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed. Normally, a "holding lamp image" imitating a circular holding lamp is displayed as each holding image TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4.

Then, in the normal hold display update process of step SD4502, the display is updated to increase or decrease the number of hold images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in a lighting mode or a light out mode, in accordance with an increase or decrease in the number of hold images in the sub-variable hold area. Processing will be carried out.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD4501, that is, if small hit information is included in any of the reservation first to fourth areas of the second sub-variation reservation area, reservation display change processing is performed in step SD4503. After that, this process ends.

By performing the pending display change process in step SD4503, among the four pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area containing the above-mentioned small winning information are One of them is replaced with the "star-shaped image" from the "holding lamp image" that is normally displayed on hold. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 214, the third pending image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image".

Next, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step SD3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 202.

First, in step SD4701, it is determined whether an opening command indicating the start of a winning state (big winning state or small winning state) is received from the main control device 261.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD4701, in step SD4702, an initial value corresponding to each type of win is set for the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds based on the win type information included in the opening command. Set. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" indicating 16 times is set as the initial value, and in the case of "JUB jackpot", 5 "short openings" and 15 "long openings" are set as the initial value. "20" indicating the total of 20 times is set as the initial value, and in the case of "small win", "5" indicating 5 times is set as the initial value.

After that, in step SD4703, which is the notification means, the opening performance is set (setting of the image of the performance display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting mode of various lamps), and then this process is ended.

The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table etc. that stores the correspondence between the winning type, the number of remaining rounds, and various performance modes during the winning state, and the table is referred to to create the corresponding performance. Make a choice and execute it. In other words, the sub-control device 262 controls the results of various drawings by the main control device 261 (for example, the winning type, such as a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), and the gaming state at the time of winning (for example, whether it is in a high support mode or a low support mode, etc.). Based on the mode type), the number of remaining rounds, etc., the table is referred to, and the content of the opening performance or the round performance during the jackpot as a specific performance to be executed on the performance display device 42 is selected from among a plurality of performance display modes. It will be decided and executed.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SD4701, it is determined in step SD4705 whether or not a round command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD4705, in step SD4706, which is a notification means, effect settings during the round, such as displaying the number of rounds, are performed, and then this process is ended.

Here, in each round of "long opening", a maximum of 30 seconds is set for each round, while in each round of "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening/closing shutter 32b is 0.4 seconds. Since it is short, a series of continuous effect settings are performed over multiple round periods (including an interval period to be described later). Of course, even in the case of "short opening", a configuration may be adopted in which individual performance settings are made for each round. Further, even in the case of "long opening", a continuous series of effect settings may be performed over multiple round periods (including an interval period to be described later). In other words, the shutter 32b opens and closes during execution of the jackpot performance that spans multiple round periods from the start of the first round (end of the opening performance) to the end of the final round (start of the ending performance). may be configured to open and close multiple times.

If a negative determination is made in step SD4705, it is determined in step SD4707 whether or not an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SD4707, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SD4708, and the performance during the interval is set in step SD4709, and then this process is ended.

Here, in the interval period between each round of "Long Open", the effect is set to 3 seconds for each interval, while in the interval period of each round of "Short Open", multiple rounds are performed as described above. A series of production settings are performed that are continuous with the production.

If a negative determination is made in step SD4707, it is determined in step SD4710 whether or not an ending command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SD4710, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SD4711, and an ending effect is set in step SD4712, and then this process is ended. In addition, in the setting process of the ending effect, one ending effect pattern may be selected and executed from among a plurality of ending effect patterns. Of course, regardless of whether the first ending display control is executed as the first specific control or the second ending display control is executed as the second specific control, these This control is performed in a state where the opening/closing shutter 32b is located at the closed position where the big prize opening 32a is closed.

If a negative determination is made in step SD4710, it is determined in step SD4713 whether or not a winning end command (big winning ending command or small winning ending command) has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SD4713, a winning display termination process is performed to terminate the ending display in step SD4714, and this process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step SD4713, the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 196, in the lamp setting process of step SD3908, lighting patterns of lamps and electric decorations are set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the effect display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step SD3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. Further, when commands related to voice, such as notification of error occurrence, are transmitted from the main control device 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step SD3909.

In step SD3910, accessory effect setting processing is executed. In the accessory performance setting process, various settings regarding the accessory performance using the upper performance accessory unit 761 are performed. Note that the accessory performance setting process is a process that is performed as an additional performance when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed, which will be described later, and is executed only when the support continuous performance (roulette performance) is performed. It is processing. Details of the accessory effect setting process in step SD3910 will be described later.

In step SD3911, other processes such as control settings for customer waiting effects (for example, a demo screen display that is set to be displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed with no variable display on the effect display device 42) are performed. .

In step SD3912, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings set in steps SD3905 to SD3911. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a decorative pattern in a variable manner. Furthermore, when performing the accessory performance, various control signals are output to the accessory control board of the upper performance accessory unit 761, etc.

After the processes of steps SD3905 to SD3912, which are performed every 1 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in step SD3904, the process moves to step SD3913, and it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step SD3914, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step SD3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SD3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step SD3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Next, the display mode etc. on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 will be explained together with the flow of the game by the player.

In the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, in the normal state (when the value of the gaming state determination value (See Figure 209). Further, below the variable display area W1, an instruction display area W2 is set which instructs (recommends) the firing mode of the game ball to the player, and further below it shows the pending number of variable displays. A hold display area W3 is set.

The hold display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variable hold area. In other words, the hold display area W3 is divided into a first hold display area W3a and a second hold display area W3b, corresponding to the first sub-variation hold area and the second sub-change hold area. In each of the hold display areas W3a and W3b, hold images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area) are displayed (see FIG. 209).

Holding images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 are displayed in an off state (see the shaded area) during normal times (when not on hold), and when a variable display is held in a predetermined holding area, the corresponding The pending images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area are switched to be displayed in a lighting mode (see the white portion).

In the example shown in FIG. 209, the first pending image TA1 and the second pending image TA2 in the first pending display area W3a are displayed in a lit mode, and the remaining pending images TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in a non-lit mode. The condition is shown. In other words, the fluctuation display is held in the reservation first area and the reservation second area of the first sub-variation reservation area, and the current number of reservations in the fluctuation display is "2" related to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. It is shown.

In the normal state, the instruction display area W2 is displayed with "← "Left-handed" is displayed. Accordingly, the player plays the game by "hitting to the left."

When "hitting to the left", most of the game balls are guided toward the upper starting prize opening 33YA located on the lower side of the variable display unit 35 by the nails and the like. Among them, how many game balls will be won into the upper starting prize opening 33YA.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) flows down the right side area of the variable display unit 35, that is, the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Since the game ball is placed in an unreachable position, if the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will not be opened and the game ball will enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB. Never.

In other words, in the normal state, the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the left".

When the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, in the variable display area W1 of the performance display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner in each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, decorative patterns Z with numbers "1" to "9" are displayed. The various decorative patterns Z are scrolled and displayed periodically from right to left in ascending or descending numerical order, thereby forming a series of pattern rows.

In such a case, in the upper pattern display area, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), and in the middle and lower pattern display areas, the various decorative patterns Z are displayed in ascending order (in the order of decreasing numbers). displayed in increasing order). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area, and decorative symbols Z are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

When a jackpot lottery is won based on the winning of a game ball to the upper starting winning hole 33YA, a decorative pattern Z of a jackpot combination is stopped and displayed on a predetermined jackpot line after reaching a reach state. In the normal state of this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, when three decorative symbols Z of a jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in line on any of the five lines in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, the occurrence of a jackpot condition is confirmed.

When a jackpot state occurs, the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable winning prize device 32 is opened, and a game ball can enter the big prize opening 32a, and a predetermined jackpot performance is displayed on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42. is started. Here, the number of jackpot rounds may be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable prize winning device 32 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position where the game balls flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach), If the player continues to "hit left-handed", the game ball cannot be won into the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 210, when the jackpot effect is started, the instruction display area W2 displays an action in which the player fires a game ball toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (such action will be described below). , "Right-handed hit") is displayed as "Right-handed hit →". Accordingly, the player plays a jackpot game by switching from "hitting left" to "hitting right" so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35. .

In the case of "hitting to the right" here, most of the game balls will be guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nails and the like, and will be won into the variable winning device 32. This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not win into the variable winning device 32 and pass through the variable winning device 32 flow down toward the upper starting winning hole 33YA and the lower starting winning hole 33YB by the nails and the like.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display unit 35, on the way to the variable winning device 32, a through gate 34 is provided which triggers the opening of the lower starting winning opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y). The game ball passes through the through gate 34.

Here, if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state, and the game ball will not be able to win into the lower starting prize opening 33YB. It becomes possible.

After the jackpot ends, the winning support related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42) display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode" will be added as a mode.

Accordingly, on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42, a predetermined support performance ("chance mode" performance or "gold mode" performance) related to the "high support mode" is performed, and the variable display area W1 is reduced. Is displayed. In the reduced variable display area W1, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes one line.

Further, during this support performance, a support number display area W4 is set on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 (see FIGS. 211 and 212). The support count display area W4 apparently displays the support count that has been confirmed to be provided. Therefore, for example, even if it is confirmed that the number of support will be given "50 times" in the internal lottery, "20 times" is initially displayed for presentation purposes.

More specifically, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" and win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or When the "50 times/high support mode" is granted, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

Similarly, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", you can win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode". - Even when the "high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

On the other hand, if "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded, that is, the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2" or "5". In the case of (excluding Xj=“5” in the case of non-notification effect), “30 times” is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" and are granted "Until next time/high support mode", that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is " 6", "until next time" is displayed in the support count display area W4 from the beginning. However, when the above-mentioned non-notification effect is performed, "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

As mentioned above, while the "high support mode" is provided, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to win into the lower start winning hole 33YB, so even if the jackpot game ends, the player can not open or close the winning combination. It is preferable to continue "hitting to the right" in order to obtain an opportunity to open object 37Y. In other words, during the "high support mode", the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the right". Therefore, in the instruction display area W2 of the performance display device 42 during the "high support mode", "Right hit →" is displayed to recommend "Right hit" to the player.

In this embodiment, when the normal number of times changes in the "high support mode" (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 does not show the end value "1 time"), that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj The fluctuation time when is "1", "2", "4", and "5" is set to "1 second" by the fluctuation pattern table selected based on each gaming state judgment value Xj (at the time of jackpot except for). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

Also, when the "high support mode" changes a specific number of times (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 is the ending value "1 time", that is, the "20th time" or "30th time" after the end of the jackpot) , the "40th" or "50th" variation time), that is, the variation time when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "7" is selected based on the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj. It is set to "25 seconds" according to the fluctuation pattern table (excluding when there is a jackpot). Then, on the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

On the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 during the above-mentioned specific times fluctuation (variation of 25 seconds), a support continuation performance that excites the player's interest is displayed, such as determining whether or not the "high support mode" continues by lottery. It is done.

For example, in this embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) at the time of the above-mentioned specific times variation. In the roulette effect, a roulette symbol TR is displayed as shown in FIG. 213. The roulette symbol TR includes "end" indicating that the number of supports ends here, "+10 times" indicating that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "next time" indicating that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Items such as "until" are listed.

In the roulette effect, the roulette symbol TR rotates and the subsequent gaming state is determined by the item that stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY.

Here, the item to stop at depends on the number of grants of "high support mode" determined at the time of jackpot lottery ("20 times", "30 times", "40 times", "50 times") or "until next time". ”) and the number of support grants at that time (the value of the support number counter). The determined item is then displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode" and after "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, if you reach the roulette effect, the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are "30" remaining support grants, so the item "+10 times" is selected.

For example, if you win "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times/high support mode" and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, Since the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are no more support grants left, the "End" item is selected.

Also, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A" with "Until Next Time/High Support Mode", a non-announcement effect is performed (the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj becomes "5"), and the number of support display area W4 is displayed. When the roulette effect is reached after "30 times" is initially displayed, the upper limit is "until next time", so the item "until next time" is selected.

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", the display mode on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 returns to the same state as the normal state (see FIG. 209). Therefore, "←Left hit" is displayed in the instruction display area W2 of the display section 42a.

However, in this embodiment, if a small hit is won during the "high support mode" and the small win information is stored in any of the holding areas of the second sub-variation holding area related to the lower starting winning opening 33YB, , among the pending images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second pending display area W3b, the display mode of the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area storing the small winning information is changed to an image in a mode different from the normal mode. (See Figure 214). In the example shown in FIG. 214, the third pending image TB3 has been changed to a "star-shaped image". In this embodiment, along with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

Therefore, even if the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", if small win information is stored in the hold area, the above display will be displayed and the player will receive a small win. This suggests that this will occur.

As mentioned above, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small winning state is extremely short, so if you switch from the “left hitting” state to “right hitting” after the small winning occurs, it will not be in time, and the variable winning device 32 will not open in time. In order to win the game ball to 32, it is necessary to hit it "right-handed" in advance. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the small win suggestion allows the player to understand that a small win will occur, so he can prepare in advance and miss out on a small win.

As described above, when the support continuation performance (roulette performance) is performed, an accessory performance using the upper performance accessory unit 761 may be performed as an additional performance.

Here, the accessory effect setting process of step SD3910 will be explained with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 221 and 222.

First, in step SD6001, it is determined whether or not the current variation is the execution time of the roulette performance (support continuous performance), taking into consideration the value of the gaming state determination value Xj.

Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not the time to perform the roulette effect, the value of the effect state flag JF, which will be described later, is reset to "0" in step SD6002, and the process is immediately terminated.

The performance state flag JF is discrimination information for determining the performance state of the additional performance (mainly the accessory performance using the upper performance accessory unit 761).

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6001, that is, if the current variation is the execution time of the roulette effect, the process moves to step SD6003.

In step SD6003, it is determined whether or not the current state is before the start of the additional performance (JF=0), taking into consideration the value of the performance status flag JF. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, after the start of the additional effect (JF≧1), the process moves to step SD6006.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6003, that is, if it is before the start of the additional effect, the process moves to step SD6004.

In step SD6004, based on the value of the accessory performance counter CD8 stored in the accessory performance counter buffer of the RAM 553, performance determination processing is performed to determine whether or not to perform the performance of the accessory and its type.

The correspondence between the value of the accessory performance counter CD8 and whether or not the accessory performance is executed and its type is stored in the ROM 552 of the sub-control device 262 as an accessory performance pattern determination table.

In this embodiment, in the roulette performance of the performance display device 42, a plurality of accessory performance pattern determination tables are set corresponding to the final display item of the roulette symbol TR that finally stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY. .

Specifically, "End" indicates that the number of supports ends here, "+10" indicates that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "Until next time" indicates that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Corresponding to the three confirmed display items, such as ``end'', role model performance pattern determination table, ``+10 times'', role model performance pattern determination table, and ``until next time'', role model performance pattern determination table. There are 3 tables available.

In each table, the rate at which various presentation patterns are selected differs depending on whether they correspond to "end", "+10 times", or "until next time". If the number of support is continued, or if it corresponds to "until next time", than in the case of "end", whether or not to execute the role performance, and furthermore, the development performance pattern described later. The various tables are configured to increase the rate at which this is done.

For example, when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "end", the "end"/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 223(a) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter CD8 is CD8=0 to 249, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory performance counter CD8 is CD8=250 to 399, "with accessory performance" is selected, and the accessory performance is executed as an additional performance. Among these, when CD8=250 to 329, the "no development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CD8=330 to 379, the "first development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CD8= In the case of 380 to 399, the accessory performance of the "second development pattern" is executed. Note that the details of these various character performances will be described later.

Further, when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "until next time", the "until next time" time/accessory performance pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 223(b) is referred to. In this case, when the value of the accessory performance counter CD8 is CD8=0 to 9, "no accessory performance" is selected, and no accessory performance is performed as an additional performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the accessory effect counter CD8 is CD8=10 to 399, "with accessory effect" is selected, and the accessory effect is executed as an additional effect. Among these, when CD8=10 to 199, the "no development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CD8=200 to 299, the "first development pattern" accessory effect is executed, and when CD8= In the case of 300 to 399, the accessory performance of the "second development pattern" is executed.

Note that the specific contents of the "+10 times" character performance pattern determination table, which is referred to when the confirmed display item in the roulette performance is "+10 times", are omitted from illustration, but are similar to those mentioned above. A table with contents different from the ``'End'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' and the ``'Until next time'' time/Accessory effect performance pattern determination table'' is set.

Here, when the above-mentioned "no accessory effect" is selected, the value of the accessory effect pattern flag PF is set to "0". The accessory performance pattern flag PF is discrimination information for determining the accessory performance pattern.

Similarly, when the "undeveloped pattern (no rotation effect)" accessory performance is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "1". When the accessory performance of "first development pattern (low speed rotation)" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "2". When the accessory performance of "second development pattern (high speed rotation)" is selected, the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is set to "3".

Therefore, when performing the effect determination process in step SD6004, the sub-control device 262 first selects a predetermined one from among the plurality of role object effect pattern determination table groups based on the information regarding the confirmed display items in the roulette effect. An accessory performance pattern determination table corresponding to the confirmed display item is selected, and an accessory performance pattern is determined based on the selected table. At this time, the determined result is stored in a predetermined storage area within the RAM 553.

That is, in this embodiment, the sub-control device 262 as a movable control unit controls the movable accessory 811 as a movable body (rotating body 820 ) is determined from among the plurality of movable modes and executed.

Then, in the subsequent step SD6005, a start request setting process is performed, and then this process ends.

In the start request setting process of step SD6005, the value of the production state flag JF is set to "1" indicating that the start request period for the accessory production is in progress, and the value of the operation effective timer ST is set to a predetermined value (main In the embodiment, it is set to 5 seconds).

Note that the operation valid timer ST is a timer for measuring the operation valid period of the effect button 125.

Furthermore, in this start request setting process, a display setting process for performing a start request display effect on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed.

By performing this display setting process, in addition to the roulette effect, characters such as "Please press the button" are displayed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 to prompt the player to press the effect button 125. A display effect prompting operation is executed.

Now, in step SD6006 to which the process proceeds after a negative determination is made in step SD6003, it is determined whether or not it is currently in the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance (JF=1), taking into account the value of the production status flag JF. judge. Here, if a negative determination is made, that is, if it is not during the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance (JF≧2), the process moves to step SD6012.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6006, that is, if it is currently in the period for requesting the start of the accessory performance, it is determined in step SD6007 whether or not the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0". do.

Here, if the affirmative determination is made, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the production button 125 during the period of requesting the start of the accessory production, and the operation validity period has passed, the process moves to step SD6008.

In step SD6008, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD6007, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process moves to step SD6009.

In step SD6009, taking into account the value of the button operation flag BF, it is determined whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the period of requesting the start of the accessory performance (during the valid operation period). judge.

The button operation flag BF is discrimination information for determining whether or not the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, and if the production button 125 has been pressed during the operation validity period, its value is "1". , and the value is maintained at "0" while no pressing operation is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step SD6009, that is, if the production button 125 is not pressed, the process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made, that is, if the effect button 125 is pressed, effect pattern setting processing is performed in step SD6010.

In the performance pattern setting process of step SD6010, a value corresponding to the performance pattern selected in the performance determination process of step SD6004 is set as the value of the performance status flag JF.

Specifically, in consideration of the value of the accessory effect pattern flag PF, if "no accessory effect" is selected, the value of the effect state flag JF is set to "2". On the other hand, when "with accessory performance (no development pattern, first development pattern, second development pattern)" is selected, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "3".

Thereafter, in step SD6011, the value of the button operation flag BF is reset to "0", and this processing is ended.

Now, in step SD6012 to which the judgment is negative in step SD6006 and proceeding, it is determined whether or not the performance pattern of the additional performance is "no accessory performance (JF=2)", taking into account the value of the performance status flag JF. Determine.

Here, if an affirmative determination is made, that is, if the performance pattern is "no accessory performance", notification setting processing is performed in step SD6013.

By performing this notification setting process, the display unit 42a of the performance display device 42 displays a notification performance that notifies the user that the accessory performance will not be performed, such as displaying characters such as "Unfortunate that it does not move". executed.

Thereafter, in step SD6014, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD6012, the process moves to step SD6015, and it is determined whether the value of the production state flag JF is "3".

If an affirmative determination is made here, the production pattern is "with accessory production (JF = 3)", but it is assumed that the predetermined operating condition, which is currently in the stage before the start of the accessory drive production, is met, and the step Accessory object appearance setting processing is performed in SD6016, and this processing ends.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance mode at the time of appearance of a role object (the initial state of the performance after the start of execution of the role object performance and before the stage of development of the performance) is the "no development pattern (PF=1)" and the "first development pattern". (PF=2)" or "second development pattern (PF=3)" is the same regardless of whether it is set.

Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and depends on which of the "no development pattern (PF=1)", "first development pattern (PF=2)", or "second development pattern (PF=3)" is set. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the production mode (operation time, etc.) when the accessory appears is different.

Here, the accessory appearance setting process in step SD6016 will be explained in detail with reference to FIG. 224. First, in step SD8001, the sub-control device 262 determines whether the value of the appearing operation flag MF is "1".

In addition, the appearing action flag MF is state discrimination information for determining whether or not the movable accessory 811 is in the appearing action, and when the movable accessory 811 is in the appearing action, its value is is set to "1" (turned on), and when the movable accessory 811 is not in the appearing motion, its value is set to "0" (turned off). The appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 corresponds to a series of specific motions of the movable body in this embodiment.

If a negative determination is made in step SD8001, the process moves to step SD8002, where the accessory appearance operation control table (see FIG. 225) as specific information is read out from the ROM 552 in one process, and a one-time process is performed in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. Set by processing. In other words, a series of operations can be executed using information read and set in one process.

As shown in FIG. 225, in the accessory appearance motion control table, a plurality of control process data defining the operation process for the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 (motor control of the vertical drive motor 1815), etc. are stored in accordance with the execution order. and stored in chronological order.

Each control process data includes, for example, data specifying an operation process for lowering or raising the movable accessory 811 by controlling the vertical drive mechanism 1812 (vertical drive motor 1815) of the upper performance accessory unit 761. The contents of the control processing executed by the sub-control device 262 are defined.

For example, the control process data related to the drive control of the vertical drive motor 1815 includes, as setting information, the rotation direction of the vertical drive motor 1815 (the moving direction of the movable accessory 811), the rotation speed of the vertical drive motor 1815 (the movable accessory The moving speed of the object 811), the excitation time of the vertical drive motor 1815 (the operating time of the movable accessory 811), the non-excitation time of the vertical drive motor 1815 (the stop time of the movable accessory 811), etc. are defined.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines in which a movable body performs a plurality of types of movable modes. When operating a movable body in one movable mode, if the corresponding motion data is read in advance for each movement in one movable mode, depending on the movable mode, reading may be required an enormous number of times, and control It's a big burden. To solve this problem, if you set motion data corresponding to a series of motions and execute the series of motions sequentially based on that motion data, the control burden will be reduced, but the series of motions will be terminated midway through. When performing the next operation, a suitable end determination of the series of operations is required.

As an example, when the movable accessory 811 as a movable body performs a series of operations, the sub-control device 262 uses an operation control table (a group of operation process data) that defines various operation processes related to the series of operations in chronological order. ) is read out from the ROM 552 and set in the RAM 553, the operation process data is sequentially read out from the operation control table and a series of operation controls of the movable accessory 811 are executed.

For example, when performing an accessory appearance effect based on the conventional motion control table for an accessory appearance effect as shown in FIG. After performing a predetermined operation (first operation) of returning to the reference position H0 twice, performing a predetermined operation (second operation) of descending from the reference position H0 to a second height position H2 and returning to the reference position H0 again, twice; Furthermore, after that, a series of operations will be performed in which a predetermined operation (third operation) of descending from the reference position H0 to the third height position H3 and returning to the reference position H0 again (third operation) is performed twice.

After the series of operations described above, the process moves to the next stage. For example, if the development conditions for the role performance are not satisfied, the role performance is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the development conditions for the accessory performance are satisfied, the sub-control device 262 reads out a new motion control table for the development performance that defines various motion processes to be executed next in chronological order from the ROM 552 and sets it in the RAM 553. After that, the motion process data is sequentially read from the motion control table and the development performance of the movable accessory is executed.

However, if the conditions for ending the series of motions of the movable accessory 811 are met during the series of motions, it is desirable to appropriately terminate the series of motions.

For example, if the player operates the performance button 125 during the above-mentioned role object appearance performance, the role object performance will move to the next stage (development or end). Even if the operation determination flag is set to ON at the appropriate timing, under the conventional configuration, the flag determination process is executed only after completing a series of motion processes defined in the motion control table for the appearance of a role object. Depending on the timing of the operation, there is a possibility that the accessory performance may not move to the next stage immediately after the player operates the performance button 125.

As a result, the performance may be delayed, which may reduce the interest for the players.

Further, in a conventional motion control table without an end determination process in the middle, as shown in FIG. 229, it is difficult to use the motion control table for motion control of a series of specific motions in a plurality of ways.

In order to solve the above problem, for example, the conventional operation control table shown in FIG. A second motion control table that defines the motion process of the second motion, and a third motion control table that defines the motion process of the third motion for the two times described above) are set separately, and these are sequentially set as individual motion controls. Although it is conceivable to have a configuration in which this is executed, in such a configuration, the frequency of execution of the reading process for each table, etc. increases, and there is a risk that the control burden will increase significantly.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, as an example, when the movable accessory 811 as a movable body performs a series of operations, the sub-control device 262 determines various operation processes related to the series of operations in chronological order. The accessory appearance operation control table (see FIG. 225) is read out from the ROM 552 in one process and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 in one process.

As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which the corresponding operational process data is read in advance for each operational process in a series of operations, an enormous number of reading processes is not required, and the control burden can be reduced.

Furthermore, based on the accessory appearance operation control table read and set in one process as described above, the movable accessory 811 is Each time the object returns to the reference position H0, a process is executed to determine whether the condition for ending the action of appearing the accessory is satisfied, and the next action is started from the reference position H0. .

In other words, even if the accessory object appearance action is in the middle of execution, if the termination condition for the accessory object appearance action is satisfied, the accessory object appearance action is promptly ended and the transition is made to the next action. I can do it. On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied, the accessory object appearance operation can be continued as is.

In particular, in this embodiment, the timing for determining whether or not the termination condition for the accessory object appearance operation is satisfied is the timing at which the movable accessory object 811 returns to the reference position H0, so that after the accessory object appearance operation ends. , the movable accessory 811 can be quickly returned to its initial state or moved to the next operation.

As a result, the movable accessory 811 can be suitably controlled, the performance is not delayed, and the player's interest can be improved.

Furthermore, the accessory appearance motion control table shown in FIG. 225 etc. can easily be configured to repeatedly refer to the motion control table multiple times and repeatedly execute multiple sets of specific motions defined in the motion control table. It can be realized. As a result, one motion control table can be used to control a series of specific motions in a plurality of ways, thereby increasing versatility. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that should be stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM, and to make effective use of a storage means such as a ROM which has a limited storage capacity.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, for example, by using a plurality of tables set by subdividing the above-mentioned accessory appearance operation control table related to the accessory appearance operation of the movable accessory 811, the operation control related to the plurality of tables is performed. Compared to a configuration in which execution is performed sequentially, the frequency of execution of table read processing, etc. can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

Following step SD8002, step SD8003 sets the value of the appearing operation flag MF to "1" (turns on), and step SD8004 resets the value of the button operation flag BF to "0", and step SD8005 Performs instruction display setting processing. Thereafter, the process moves to step SD8006.

Note that by performing the instruction display setting process in step SD8005, the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 displays characters such as "Attack!!", etc., to prompt the player to operate the effect button 125. An instruction display effect that prompts is executed.

In step SD8006, 1 is added to the value of process pointer CP. Note that the process pointer CP is discrimination information for specifying various control process data defined in the accessory appearance operation control table (see FIG. 225). As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 reads control process data related to the process number PN specified by the process pointer CP, and executes control processing according to the contents thereof. Further, at the start of the accessory appearance setting process, the value of the process pointer CP is set to "0", and is incremented by 1 each time the control process progresses.

In addition, instead of this, a predetermined value is set to the value of the process pointer CP at the start of the accessory appearance setting process, and it is subtracted by 1 each time the control process progresses, and the control process of the accessory appearance operation control table is It may also be configured to grasp data.

In the following step SD8007, it is determined whether the current value of the process pointer CP exceeds the maximum value PNmax ("30" in this example shown in FIG. 225) of the process number PN in the accessory appearance motion control table. . That is, it is determined whether all the control processes specified in the accessory appearance operation control table have been completed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD8007, the process moves to step SD8012. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD8007, the process moves to step SD8008, and with reference to the accessory appearance movement control table (see FIG. 225) set in the RAM 553, the process pointer CP is designated by the value of the current process pointer CP. The control process data corresponding to the specified process number PN is read out.

Note that the process of setting the accessory appearance motion control table in the RAM 553 in step SD8002 is omitted, and in step SD8008, the access point appearance motion control table stored in the ROM 552 is directly specified by the value of the current process pointer CP. The control process data corresponding to the process number PN may be read out.

In subsequent step SD8009, based on the control process data read out in step SD8008, it is determined whether the current control process is an end determination process that executes an end determination process for the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811.

If a negative determination is made in step SD8009, that is, if the current control process is not an end determination process but a normal operation process related to the vertical drive motor 1815, the process moves to step SD8010.

In step SD8010, the appearance motion setting process of the movable accessory 811 is performed based on the control process data (operation process data of the vertical drive motor 1815, etc.) read out in step SD8008. After that, this process ends.

Specifically, in the appearance action setting process of step SD8010, processing is performed to set the time specified in the control process data (see FIG. 225) to the appearance action process timer PT. For example, if the operation time specified in the control process data is 1000 msec, "250" is set for the appearance operation process timer PT. Then, the value of the appearance operation process timer PT is subtracted by 1 every 4 msec in a subtraction process to be described later.

Further, in the appearance operation setting process of step SD8010, output setting process of a motor control signal (excitation control data), etc. for driving and controlling the vertical drive motor 1815 according to the contents specified in the control process data is performed. As a result, motor control signals are sequentially outputted to the accessory control board (motor driver) of the upper performance accessory unit 761 at a predetermined timing (external output processing in step SD3912). As a result, the accessory control board performs a process of energizing the excitation phase specified by the motor control signal, and by performing the excitation process, the vertical drive motor 1815 is driven and controlled.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD8009, that is, if the current control process is an end determination process, the process moves to step SD8011, which is a determination function section. In step SD8011, the value of the button operation flag BF is taken into account to determine whether or not the player pressed the performance button 125 (BF=1) during the appearance movement of the movable accessory 811. It is determined whether the termination condition for the appearance motion of the accessory 811 is satisfied.

If a negative determination is made in step SD8011, that is, if the production button 125 is not pressed while the movable accessory 811 is appearing, the process returns to step SD8006, 1 is added to the value of the process pointer CP, and the next Move to control process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD8011, that is, if the production button 125 is pressed while the movable accessory 811 is appearing, the process moves to step SD8012.

In step SD8012, it is determined whether the value of the accessory performance pattern flag PF is "1" corresponding to "no development pattern".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SD8012, that is, if the accessory production does not progress any further, the process moves to step SD8013, which is an end function section, performs the accessory production end setting process, and then ends this process. .

In the accessory production end setting process of step SD8013, the value of the production status flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory production will not progress any further, and the appearance operation flag MF and button operation flag BF are The value is reset to "0" and the process ends.

Note that, by performing the end-of-accessories-performance setting process in step SD8013, the development performance is not performed, for example, characters such as "Unfortunately not developed" are displayed on the display section 42a of the performance display device 42. A notification effect is executed to notify the user. Furthermore, in performing the appearance motion end setting process, a configuration may be adopted in which a position adjustment process is performed to align the initial position of the movable accessory 811.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD8012, that is, if the production pattern develops into the "first development pattern (PF=2)" or "second development pattern (PF=3)" (PF≧2), , the process moves to step SD8014, which is the end function section.

In the development performance transition setting process of step SD8014, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "4", which indicates that it is the development transition period of the accessory performance.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads from the ROM 552 an evolution transition operation control table that defines the operation process of the movable accessory 811 (rotating body 820) corresponding to the evolution transition operation of the accessory performance, and stores it in a predetermined value in the RAM 553. Store in area.

In the present embodiment, the performance mode during the development transition period is the same regardless of whether the "first development pattern" or the "second development pattern" is set. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production mode (operation time, etc.) during the development transition period may be configured to differ depending on whether the "first development pattern" or the "second development pattern" is set.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads a plurality of motion process data included in the evolution transition motion control table in accordance with the execution order, and performs the motion specified by the motion process data. The time is set in a process timer for evolution and transition operation, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed while managing the operation time based on the value of the process timer for evolution and transition operation.

Note that the subtraction processing of the process timer for the development transition operation is separately performed in other processing (step SD3911) within the normal processing. In addition, the operation process data specified in the development transition operation control table includes, for example, an operation process for lowering the movable accessory 811 by driving and controlling the vertical drive motor 1815, and an operation process for driving and controlling the rotating body drive motor 821. It includes data that defines an operation process for expanding and contracting the rotating body 820, and the like.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 executes the development and transition operation control of the movable accessory 811 based on the development and transition operation control table while taking into consideration the value of the process timer and the like.

In addition, in the development effect transition setting process of step SD8014, the values of the appearing operation flag MF and the button operation flag BF are reset to "0", and the value of the operation effective timer ST is set to a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 5 seconds). ).

Furthermore, the sub-control device 262 performs an audio output setting process for outputting a sound effect related to the development transition motion of the movable accessory 811 from the speaker SP. By performing this audio output setting process, a sound effect such as "shakin" is output, for example.

At the same time, display setting processing for performing a development request display effect is performed on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42. By performing this display setting process, the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 displays an instruction to prompt the player to operate the effect button 125, such as displaying characters such as "Press the button!!" The performance is executed.

When the development transition operation of the movable accessory 811 is performed through the above series of setting processes, the movable accessory 811 that has finished the above-mentioned appearance operation and has temporarily returned to the back side of the upper side 47a of the center frame 47 (reference position H0) appears in a sudden descent along with the above sound effect, and stops at a predetermined production position. The production position may be a third height position H3, which will be described later, which is the lowest point of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811, or may be a position further below the third height position H3. It may be the fourth height position H4.

Subsequently, the rotating body 820 that has stopped at the production position undergoes an operation in which each movable piece 825 slides radially outward in the radial direction of the rotating body 820 (an operation in which the rotating body 820 expands in diameter), and each movable piece 825 An expansion/contraction state is entered in which the rotary body 820 alternately slides inward in the radial direction (the rotary body 820 contracts in diameter).

Further, on the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, the roulette symbol TR (see FIG. 213) is displayed in a reduced size and hidden behind the rotary body 820, making it difficult for the player to see it, and as described above. An instruction display performance such as "Press the button!!" is executed.

Now, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD8001, that is, if the movable accessory 811 is in the process of appearing, the process moves to step SD8020. In step SD8020, the value of the appearance action process timer PT is subtracted by 1.

Note that the process of step SD8020 is omitted, and the subtraction process of the appearance operation process timer PT related to step SD8020 is performed separately in other processes (step SD3911) in the above-mentioned normal process, like other various process timers. You may also do so.

In the following step SD8021, it is determined whether the value of the appearance action process timer PT is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step SD8021, that is, if the value of the appearance behavior process timer PT is not "0", the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD8021, that is, if the value of the appearance operation process timer PT is "0", the process returns to step SD8006, 1 is added to the value of the process pointer CP, and the next control process is started. Move to.

Here, the appearance operation mode of the movable accessory 811 executed based on the accessory appearance setting process of step SD6016 will be described.

When the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is executed based on the accessory appearance operation control table shown in FIG. 225, as shown in FIG. 0) to the first height position H1 (process 1: 500ms), and after stopping once at the first height position H1 (process 2: 100ms), rises again to the reference position H0 (process 3: 500ms). ), and temporarily stops at the reference position H0 (process 4: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing when the movable accessory 811 returns to the initial position, a process for determining the end of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed (process 5).

If the end condition is met at this timing (when the production button 125 is pressed), the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is immediately ended, and the next stage (production completion or production development) is quickly started. to move to.

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the reference position H0 to the first height position H1 (process 6: 500 ms), and then moves to the first height position H1. After stopping once at (Process 7: 100ms), it rises again to the reference position H0 (Process 8: 500ms), and once stops at the reference position H0 (Process 9: 100ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 10). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the reference position H0 to the second height position H2 (process 11: 1000 ms), and then moves to the second height position H2. After stopping once at (process 12: 100ms), it rises again to the reference position H0 (process 13: 1000ms), and once stops at the reference position H0 (process 14: 100ms).

In this embodiment, the period during which the robot descends to the first height position H1 (process 1: 500 ms) and temporarily stops at the first height position H1 (process 2: 100 ms) is regarded as the first control period. In this case, a second control period in which the period of descending to the second height position H2 (process 11: 1000 ms) and once stopping at the second height position H2 (process 12: 100 ms) is longer than the first control period. This corresponds to the control period of

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 15). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the reference position H0 to the second height position H2 (process 16: 1000 ms), and then moves to the second height position H2. After stopping once at (process 17: 100ms), it rises again to the reference position H0 (process 18: 1000ms), and once stops at the reference position H0 (process 19: 100ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 20). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the reference position H0 to the third height position H3 (process 21: 1500 ms), and then moves to the third height position H3. After stopping once at (Process 22: 100ms), it rises again to the reference position H0 (Process 23: 1500ms), and once stops at the reference position H0 (Process 24: 100ms).

In this embodiment, the period of descending to the second height position H2 (process 11: 1000 ms) and once stopping at the second height position H2 (process 12: 100 ms) is regarded as the first control period. In this case, the period of descending to the third height position H3 (process 21: 1500 ms) and once stopping at the third height position H3 (process 22: 100 ms) is longer than the first control period. This corresponds to the second control period.

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 25). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the reference position H0 to the third height position H3 (process 26: 1500 ms), and then moves to the third height position H3. After stopping once at (process 27: 100ms), it rises again to the reference position H0 (process 28: 1500ms), and once stops at the reference position H0 (process 29: 100ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 30). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, this timing is the completion timing of the accessory appearance operation when all the control processes defined in the accessory appearance operation control table are completed, so if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the corresponding After passing through the completion determination process of the accessory appearance motion (step SD8007), the process moves to the next stage.

In addition, in order to increase the versatility of the accessory appearance motion control table shown in FIG. 225, the table can be repeatedly referred to multiple times and a series of motion processes (processes 1 to 30) defined in the table can be repeated in multiple sets. In order to be executable, the termination determination process is incorporated into the final process (process 30), and the configuration is such that the termination determination process can be executed at that timing as well. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and an accessory appearance operation control table in which the end determination process is not incorporated in the final process may be adopted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, one lifting/lowering operation consisting of one lowering operation and one raising operation (for example, processes 1 to 4, processes 6 to 9, processes 11 to 14, processes 16 to 19, processes 21 to 24) , processes 26 to 29) constitute a "predetermined operation," the reference position H0 constitutes a "first position which is the initial position side," and the third height position H3 constitutes a "second position which is the most moved position." constitute the position. Note that a position different from the reference position H0 which is the initial position (standby position) (for example, a position lower than the reference position H0) may be used as the first position which is the starting point of the accessory object appearance action.

In addition, control related to the performance of the "non-development pattern", the control related to the performance of the "first development pattern", and the control of the performance of the "second development pattern", which are performed after the end of the character appearance movement, are also performed. Any one of the controls corresponds to the first specific control in this embodiment, and another control different from this corresponds to the second specific control.

Now, returning to the explanation of FIG. 221, in step SD6017 to which the judgment is negative in step SD6015 and the transition is made, taking into account the value of the performance state flag JF, the current state is that the role performance is in the development transition period (JF=4). Determine whether or not.

If a negative determination is made in step SD6017, that is, if it is not during the development transition period of the accessory performance (JF≧5), the process moves to step SD6025.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6017, that is, if it is during the development transition period of the accessory performance, it is determined in step SD6018 whether or not the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0".

Here, if an affirmative determination is made, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is "0", the player does not press the performance button 125 during the development transition period of the accessory performance, and the operation validity period has passed, the process moves to step SD6019.

In step SD6019, the value of the performance state flag JF is set to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SD6018, that is, if the value of the operation valid timer ST is not "0", the process moves to step SD6020 (see FIG. 222).

As shown in FIG. 222, in step SD6020, the player presses the performance button 125 during the development transition period (operation valid period) of the accessory performance, taking into consideration the value of the button operation flag BF (BF =1).

If a negative determination is made in step SD6020, that is, if the effect button 125 is not pressed, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, that is, if the production button 125 is pressed, the process moves to step SD6021, and the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF corresponds to the "first development pattern (low speed rotation)". 2" is determined.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "first development pattern," a first development effect setting process is performed in step SD6022, and the present process is ended.

In the first advanced effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "5", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the first development effect control table that defines the operation process of the movable accessory 811 (rotating body 820) corresponding to the first development pattern from the ROM 552, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. Store.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the first advanced effect control table in accordance with the execution order, and also The operation time is set in a first advanced performance process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed while managing the operation time based on the value of the first advanced performance process timer.

Note that, although the same is true for other advanced performance patterns, the plurality of operation process data includes, for example, operation processes such as driving and controlling the rotating body drive motor 821 to rotate or stop the rotating body 820. Contains data specifying the

In other words, the sub-control device 262 takes into consideration the rotational position information of the rotating body 820 (the amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the value of the process timer for the first advanced performance based on the first advanced performance control table. At the same time, the motion control of the movable accessory 811 corresponding to the first development pattern is executed. Incidentally, the subtraction processing of the first advanced production process timer is separately performed in other processing (step SD3911) within the normal processing.

Also, based on the contents of the various setting processes performed in this process, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the movable accessory 811, and various controls related to the movable accessory 811 are performed. It will be carried out. When the motion control of the movable accessory 811 corresponding to the first development pattern is started, the motion control continues until the value of the first development production process timer becomes "0". will be exposed.

Under such a configuration, when the first advanced effect pattern is executed in this embodiment, the rotating body 820 is rotated as shown in FIG. Control is performed to rotate clockwise at low speed.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SD6021, the process moves to step SD6023, and it is determined whether the value of the accessory production pattern flag PF is "3" corresponding to "second development pattern (high speed rotation)". judge.

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, if the development effect pattern is the "second development pattern," a second development effect setting process is performed in step SD6024, and the present process ends.

In the second advanced effect setting process, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the effect state flag JF to "5", which means after the development of the accessory effect.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads the second development effect control table that defines the operation process of the movable accessory 811 (rotating body 820) corresponding to the second development pattern from the ROM 552, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553. Store.

Thereafter, each time this process is performed, the sub-control device 262 sequentially reads out a plurality of motion process data included in the second development effect control table in accordance with the execution order, and The operation time is set in a second advanced performance process timer, and the process corresponding to the operation process data is executed while managing the operation time based on the value of the second advanced performance process timer.

In other words, the sub-control device 262 takes into account the rotational position information of the rotating body 820 (the amount of rotational displacement based on the number of drive pulse signals) and the value of the process timer for the second development effect based on the second development effect control table. At the same time, the motion control of the movable accessory 811 corresponding to the second development pattern is executed. Incidentally, the subtraction process of the process timer for the second advanced effect is separately performed in other processes (step SD3911) in the normal process.

Also, based on the contents of the various setting processes performed in this process, in the next external output process (step 3912), control signals are sequentially output to the movable accessory 811, and various controls related to the movable accessory 811 are performed. It will be carried out. When the motion control of the movable accessory 811 corresponding to the second development pattern is started, the motion control continues until the value of the process timer for the second development effect becomes "0". will be exposed.

Under such a configuration, when the second advanced effect pattern is executed in this embodiment, the rotating body 820 is rotated as shown in FIG. Control is performed to rotate at high speed in the clockwise direction.

Now, in step SD6025 to which the judgment is negative in step SD6017 and the transition is made, it is determined whether or not the role performance is currently in the developing state (JF=5), taking into consideration the value of the performance state flag JF. . If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6025, that is, if the accessory performance is in the developing state, the process moves to step SD6026.

In step SD6026, it is determined whether or not it is currently the end timing of the accessory development performance, with reference to the various development performance control tables mentioned above. If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SD6026, that is, if it is the end timing of the accessory development performance, end setting processing is performed in step SD6027, and the present processing is ended.

In the end setting process of step SD6027, the sub-control device 262 first sets the value of the performance state flag JF to "9", which means that the accessory performance will not progress any further.

Subsequently, the sub-control device 262 reads out from the ROM 552 the accessory performance end control table that defines the end process of the accessory development performance, and stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 553.

Based on this, processing for stopping the rotating body 820 (rotating body drive motor 821), operation setting processing for raising the movable accessory 811 to the standby position, etc. are sequentially performed, and the accessory production ends.

As described in detail above, in this embodiment, as an example, when the movable accessory 811 as a movable body performs a series of operations, the sub-control device 262 can timely control various operation processes related to the series of operations. The accessory appearance operation control table (see FIG. 225) defined in series is read out from the ROM 552 in one process and set in a predetermined area of the RAM 553 in one process.

As a result, for example, compared to a configuration in which the corresponding operational process data is read in advance for each operational process in a series of operations, an enormous number of reading processes is not required, and the control burden can be reduced.

Furthermore, based on the accessory appearance operation control table read and set in one process as described above, the movable accessory 811 is Each time the object returns to the reference position H0, a process is executed to determine whether the condition for ending the action of appearing the accessory is satisfied, and the next action is started from the reference position H0. .

In other words, even if the accessory object appearance action is in the middle of execution, if the termination condition for the accessory object appearance action is satisfied, the accessory object appearance action is promptly ended and the transition is made to the next action. I can do it. On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied, the accessory object appearance operation can be continued as is.

In particular, in this embodiment, the timing for determining whether or not the termination condition for the accessory object appearance operation is satisfied is the timing at which the movable accessory object 811 returns to the reference position H0, so that after the accessory object appearance operation ends. , the movable accessory 811 can be quickly returned to its initial state or moved to the next operation.

As a result, the movable accessory 811 can be suitably controlled, the performance is not delayed, and the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, for example, by using a plurality of tables set by subdividing the above-mentioned accessory appearance operation control table related to the accessory appearance operation of the movable accessory 811, the operation control related to the plurality of tables is performed. Compared to a configuration in which execution is performed sequentially, the frequency of execution of table read processing, etc. can be reduced, and the control burden can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the movable accessory 811 performs a series of accessory appearance operations in which the movable accessory 811 repeats the raising and lowering motion multiple times, after performing the raising operation to position the movable accessory 811 to the initial position side, and After performing a lowering operation to position the accessory 811 toward the production position, predetermined stop control (processes 2, 4, etc.) for stopping the movable accessory 811 is executed. As a result, the direction of movement of the movable accessory 811 is suddenly reversed, the load on the movable accessory 811 etc. is reduced, and the durability of the movable accessory 811 etc. can be improved.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is of the first type in which a jackpot state in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning holes 33YA and 33YB. It is a gaming machine.

The present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that is given a predetermined game value. Note that the gaming value includes, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to players, special prize states (rounds) awarded during jackpots, gaming modes such as high probability modes awarded after jackpots, etc. . In addition to the pachinko machine, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

(a-1) For example, a variable winning device is provided that opens when a small win is won in a lottery based on a ball entering a predetermined starting winning section, and the game ball that enters the variable winning device is placed in a predetermined state. It may be implemented as a second type gaming machine in which a jackpot state occurs when a ball enters a special winning part (V winning hole). Here, when a game ball enters the starting winning section, without performing a predetermined lottery process (or a lottery process with a winning probability of 100% may be performed), based on the ball entering the starting winning section, It may be configured such that the variable winning device is in an open state, and a game ball that enters the variable winning device enters a V winning hole or the like to generate a jackpot state.

(a-2) Also implemented as a third type gaming machine (for example, a so-called 1 type 2 type mixed machine) that combines the functions of the above first type gaming machine and the above second type gaming machine. You may.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities associated with various types of lottery related to pachinko machines (soft lottery processing, mechanical mechanism lottery, etc.) are appropriately set for each model, and any value can be adopted. Furthermore, as will be described later, it goes without saying that the board configuration of the game board 30 can be changed as appropriate. In other words, various configurations such as installation positions and movable modes of various devices such as the variable winning device 32 provided on the game board 30 are not limited to the above embodiments, and different configurations may be adopted. For example, it may be configured to include a variable winning device in which the opening/closing shutter slides in the front and rear directions to open and close the winning opening.

(a-3) Furthermore, it may be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which game balls are circulated within the gaming machine and are not directly paid out to the player, a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine.

(b) The type of jackpot (number of rounds, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, a 16R jackpot in which 16 special prize states (rounds) occur, a 4R jackpot in which 4 special prize states (rounds) occur, etc. are set, but the number of rounds is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which other different jackpot states occur.

Of course, instead of being a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that only generates one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot).

(c) The configuration of the game mode awarded after the end of the jackpot state (granting period, configuration details, etc.) is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different configuration may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the "high support mode" is always given after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the "high support mode" is not given depending on the jackpot type. Good too.

In addition, this pachinko machine does not change the lottery mode (``high probability mode'' or ``low probability mode''), but only switches to the winning support mode (``high support mode'' or ``low support mode''). You can. Furthermore, instead of or in addition to paying out prize balls, the pachinko machine may be configured to provide points corresponding to the prize balls won by the player to a storage medium such as a magnetic card.

Of course, it may be implemented as a gaming machine configured such that the time reduction mode, high probability mode, etc. are not provided after the end of the jackpot state.

(d) The configuration related to the game board is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, the game board 30 according to the above embodiment is constructed based on a transparent plate that is a light-transmitting member, but is not limited to this, and may be constructed from an opaque member such as wood that does not have light-transmitting properties. good.

(d-1) In the above embodiment, the LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C mounted with a plurality of LEDs are arranged at the rear position of a predetermined area in the game area, and the configuration is such that various light emitting effects can be performed. There is. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the LED board 48A, other light emitting means such as a lamp or a liquid crystal display device may be arranged at the rear of the game board 30.

(d-2) In place of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42 according to the above embodiment, a display screen having a size that covers substantially the entire back side of the gaming area or substantially the entire back side of the gaming board 30 at the rear position of the game board 30 It is also possible to have a configuration including a display device having.

Further, the game board 30 may be arranged so as to cover the front side of the display section 42a of the performance display device 42 without providing an opening for mounting the performance display device 42. At this time, nails or the like may be placed on the front surface of the game board 30, which is the area in front of the performance display device 42, to make this an area where the game ball can flow down. Of course, this may be an area where the game ball cannot fall.

(e) The configuration related to the movable means is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(e-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the movable accessory 811, which is the movable means, is configured to operate on the front side of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42, but the area in which the movable means operates is not limited to this.

For example, the movable means may be configured to operate in the center frame 47. The movable means may be configured to operate in a decorative member attached to the game board 30. A structure may be adopted in which the movable means operates in an internal area of a predetermined winning device. A configuration may be adopted in which the movable means operates in the front area (gaming area) of the game board 30. The movable means may be fitted into a hole or a recess formed in the game board 30 from the front side and operate at a position below the performance display device 42. The movable means may operate on the back side of the game board 30 having translucency.

(e-2) The shape, size, material, etc. of the movable means are not limited to the above embodiments, and other different configurations may be adopted.

The movable accessory 811 according to the embodiment described above includes a rotating body 820 having six movable pieces 825. For example, the movable accessory 811 may be composed of a simple spherical member, a plate-like member, or the like.

(e-3) In the above embodiment, the movable accessory 811 is configured to move up and down, but the movable mode of the movable means is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be adopted. Good too.

For example, the movable accessory 811 may be configured to perform a series of specific actions by slidingly displacing in the left-right direction or front-back direction and reciprocating multiple times between a first position, which is a standby position, and a second position, which is a performance position. . In addition, the movable accessory 811 (or the support part 1814) is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable, swingable, or tiltable in the vertical, horizontal, front-back, or diagonal directions, and the movable accessory 811 is in a first position, which is a standby position. It may also be configured to perform a series of specific operations that reciprocate a plurality of times between the first position and the second position, which is the performance position. Of course, a configuration may also be adopted in which a plurality of movements such as linear movements and curved movements are combined to displace between the standby position and the performance position.

In addition, when the movable means performs an operation including displacement in the front-back direction, at least a portion of the movable means may be configured to protrude forward from the front surface of the game board 30. This allows the movable means to move beyond the front of the game board 30 and move closer to the player, making it possible to perform a more dynamic and powerful performance, which increases the interest of the player. It is possible to improve the

(e-4) When the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 is located at the first position, which is the standby position, a predetermined area (for example, a part of the display section 42a of the effect display device 42) is made invisible or difficult to see. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the predetermined area is in a first state where the predetermined area is visible or easily visible when the predetermined area is located in a second position, which is a presentation position.

For example, under a configuration in which the eyeball is placed in the eyehole as a predetermined area provided on a dragon accessory that resembles a dragon head, under normal circumstances, the eyelid member as a movable means may not be able to see the eyeball (inside the eyehole). While the eyelids of the dragon accessory are in the first state where they are covered so as to be difficult to see, when the predetermined operating conditions are met, the eyelids of the dragon accessory blink multiple times. Afterwards, the eyelid member of the dragon accessory may be in a second state in which it is opened so that the eyeball (inside the eye hole) of the dragon accessory becomes visible or easily visible.

(e-5) A configuration including a light emitting means that lights up when the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 is located at the second position, which is the production position, and turns off when it is located at the first position, which is the standby position. You can also use it as

For example, an eyeball equipped with an LED as a light emitting means is placed in the eye hole of the dragon accessory as a predetermined area, and in a first state (normal state) when the dragon accessory's eyelids are closed, the eyeball is (LED) is in the off state, but when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied and the eyelid member of the dragon accessory is in the second state opened, the eyeball (LED) is in the lighted state. You can also use it as Of course, the position where the light emitting means is provided is not limited to the above-mentioned predetermined area, and may be any other position, such as a position where the predetermined area can be illuminated from the outside.

(f) The driving means for driving the movable means is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(f-1) For example, in the vertical drive mechanism 1812 of the above embodiment, a stepping motor is used as the vertical drive motor 1815 serving as a driving means. The present invention is not limited to this, and other motors such as a servo motor, a DC motor, or a linear motor may be used as the vertical drive motor 1815.

Further, the present invention is not limited to a motor, and may be configured to use other actuators such as a solenoid as the driving means, or may be configured to use a mechanism combining a motor and a solenoid. Even when using a solenoid, control can be performed using an operation control table in the same way as the motor control according to the above embodiment. Of course, the number of motors and solenoids is not limited to one, and a configuration using a plurality of motors or solenoids may also be used.

(f-2) When the movable accessory 811 is at the reference position H0, which is the first position, a part of the movable accessory 811 (or the support part 1814) is attached to the first cover provided on the unit base part 810. It may be configured to abut against a contact portion (stopper portion).

Similarly, when the movable accessory 811 is at the second position (third height position H3 or fourth height position H4) where the movable accessory 811 is at the lowest point of operation, a part of the movable accessory 811 (or the support part 1814) However, it may be configured to abut on a second abutted portion (stopper portion) provided on the unit base portion 810.

With this configuration, it is possible to omit the process of checking whether the movable accessory 811 is located at a predetermined position, the process of correcting the position of the movable accessory 811, etc., and the control burden can be reduced. can.

(f-3) It may be configured to include a biasing means such as a coil spring that biases the movable accessory 811 (or the support portion 1814) toward the reference position H0.

If the position where the movable accessory 811 waits deviates from the preset reference position H0 due to an assembly error or deterioration over time of the movable accessory 811, there is a risk that operation control related to the movable accessory 811 will be hindered. . Furthermore, there is a possibility that there will be a discrepancy between the display performance and the movement of the movable accessory 811, which may reduce the interest for the player.

On the other hand, with the above configuration, it is possible to suppress the positional shift of the movable accessory 811, and furthermore, the movement shift. In turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

(g) The configuration related to the operating means, such as the shape, function, and arrangement of the operating means, is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, a performance button 125 that can be pressed and operated by the player is provided as a performance operation means. The configuration is not limited to this, and may include a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

(g-2) In the above embodiment, when the player operates the performance button 125, the movable accessory 811 stops moving or the advanced performance is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which the advanced performance is started in accordance with a predetermined performance program without being triggered by the operation of the operating means.

(g-3) The movable mode of the movable accessory 811 may be configured to be changeable depending on the operating mode of the operating means operated by the player. Here, the "operation mode of the operating means" includes the number of operations, the amount of operation displacement, and the like. For example, the information includes the number of times a button-type operating means is pressed and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing at which the end condition for a series of specific operations of the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 is satisfied changes depending on the operation mode of a predetermined operation means operated by the player. As an example, in conjunction with the movement of the movable accessory 811 descending, a character is displayed on the display section 42a, and a display effect is performed in which the movable accessory 811 is pushed upward to prevent the execution of the development effect. In response to this, the movable accessory 811 that is about to be pushed upward may be configured to be stopped by the player repeatedly hitting the performance button 125.

(h) The time when the performance using the movable means is performed, that is, the time when the specific performance is performed on the performance display device 42, is not limited to the above embodiment, and other configurations may be adopted.

(h-1) In the above embodiment, a movable accessory is used as an additional performance when a support continuation performance (roulette performance) is performed on the performance display device 42 to determine whether or not the support mode advantageous to the player continues. The structure is such that a role performance using 811 is performed.

For example, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes, for example, a symbol variation performance in which symbols are displayed in a fluctuating manner, various reach performances performed in a ready-to-reach state or its development performances, a winning notification performance that notifies the player of winning in a jackpot state or a small win state that is advantageous to the player, Win type confirmation performance or promotion performance that determines the type of jackpot or small win state, opening performance performed at the start of the jackpot state or small win state, round performance or promotion performance performed during the round of the jackpot state or small win state Or, determine the type of continuous performance, winning performance performed over multiple rounds during the jackpot state or small win state, ending performance performed at the end of the jackpot state or small win state, and game mode provided after the end of the jackpot state. When a mode determination performance is performed on the performance display device 42, a movable means such as the movable accessory 811 may be configured to operate.

(h-2) In the above embodiment, depending on the degree of expectation that the high support mode will continue to be provided (the degree of expectation that game value can be provided), the role performance using the movable accessory 811, and furthermore the development performance. The system is configured such that the rate at which this is performed changes.

Not limited to this, for example, if a winning result is obtained through a predetermined lottery process (result that gaming value is awarded such as a big hit, small win, high probability mode, high support mode, etc.) , a configuration may be adopted in which the proportion of accessory presentations using the movable accessory object 811 and further development presentations being performed is higher than in the case where no winning result is obtained.

In addition, only when the grant of high support mode continues (when the game value is granted), or when a winning result is obtained through the prescribed lottery process (big win, small win, high probability mode, high support mode It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which an accessory performance using the movable accessory 811, or even an advanced performance, is performed as a confirmed performance only when a result in which a game value such as the following is awarded is obtained.

(h-3) The operating conditions for the movable means to perform a series of specific operations and the termination conditions for the movable means to complete the series of specific operations are not limited to the above embodiments, and other different configurations may be adopted. You may.

For example, in the above embodiment, the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed as a series of specific actions under the operating condition that an accessory effect (variable display effect) using the movable accessory 811 is executed. When the player presses the production button 125 during the appearance operation of the object 811, or when all the operation processes (processes 1 to 30) defined in the accessory appearance operation control table are completed, the termination condition is set. This is established, and the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 ends.

For example, the start of a fluctuating display, the passage of a predetermined period of time after the start of a fluctuating display, a predetermined performance being performed a predetermined number of times, a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry area, or a predetermined A number of game balls enter the ball, a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on the number of balls that enter the ball and a predetermined result is obtained, a predetermined operating means is operated or a predetermined number of times, and the operation Based on the operating conditions, the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 performs a series of specific actions such that a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability and a predetermined result is obtained, and a predetermined count value reaches an upper limit. Good too.

Further, for example, a predetermined operation means is operated a predetermined number of times, a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the fluctuating display has stopped, the stop of the fluctuating display has been confirmed, a predetermined period has elapsed after the fluctuating display has stopped, Termination conditions include that a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area or that a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined ball entry area, that a predetermined action is completed a predetermined number of times, and that a predetermined number of game balls are fired or paid out. Alternatively, the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 may complete a series of specific operations.

(i) The configuration of the accessory appearance operation control table, that is, the appearance operation mode of the movable accessory 811 is not limited to the above embodiment shown in FIGS. 225 and 226, and other configurations different from this are adopted. You may.

(i-1) For example, based on the accessory appearance operation control table shown in FIG. 227, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 may be executed in the operation mode shown in FIG. 228.

In this configuration, the movable accessory 811 first descends from the reference position H0 (process 0), which is the initial position, to the first height position H1 (process 1: 500 ms), and once stops at the first height position H1. After that (Process 2: 100ms), it rises again to the reference position H0 (Process 3: 500ms), and once stops at the reference position H0 (Process 4: 100ms).

Then, at the timing when the movable accessory 811 returns to the initial position, a process for determining the end of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed (process 5). If the end condition is met at this timing (when the production button 125 is pressed), the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is immediately ended, and the next stage (production completion or production development) is quickly started. to move to.

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the reference position H0 to the first height position H1 (process 6: 500 ms), and then moves to the first height position H1. After stopping once at (Process 7: 100ms), it rises again to the reference position H0 (Process 8: 500ms), and once stops at the reference position H0 (Process 9: 100ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 10). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the reference position H0 to the second height position H2 (process 11: 1000 ms), and then moves to the second height position H2. After stopping once at (process 12: 100ms), it rises to the first height position H1 (process 13: 500ms), and once stops at the first height position H1 (process 14: 100ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 15). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, if the end condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the first height position H1 to the second height position H2 (process 16: 500 ms), and then moves to the second height position H1. After stopping once at the vertical position H2 (process 17: 100 ms), it rises to the first height position H1 (process 18: 500 ms), and once stops at the first height position H1 (process 19: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 20). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the first height position H1 to the third height position H3 (process 21: 1000ms), and After stopping once at the second height position H3 (process 22: 100ms), it rises to the second height position H2 (process 23: 500ms), and once stops at the second height position H2 (process 24: 100ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 25). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the movable accessory 811 subsequently descends from the second height position H2 to the third height position H3 (process 26: 500ms), and After stopping once at position H3 (process 27: 100 ms), it rises again to reference position H0 (process 28: 1500 ms), and once stops at reference position H0 (process 29: 100 ms).

Then, at the timing of returning to the initial position side, the end determination process of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is executed again (process 30). If the termination condition is satisfied at this timing, the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 is immediately terminated, and the next stage is quickly proceeded to, as described above.

On the other hand, this timing is the completion timing of the accessory appearance operation when all the control processes defined in the accessory appearance operation control table are completed, so if the termination condition is not satisfied at this timing, the corresponding After passing through the completion determination process of the accessory appearance motion (step SD8007), the process moves to the next stage.

In addition, in the accessory appearance motion control tables shown in FIGS. 225 and 227, a temporary stop period (processes 2, 4, etc.) is set between various displacement motions (processes 1, 3, etc.). However, a table configuration (operation mode) may be used in which such a stop period is omitted.

(i-2) In the above embodiment, the value of the process pointer CP (process number PN) is added one by one each time the value of the appearance operation process timer PT, which is subtracted for each timer interrupt, becomes "0". By doing this, the control process specified in the chronological order in the role object appearance movement control table is executed sequentially. It may be configured to sequentially execute the control processes specified in the chronological order for each timer interrupt in the accessory appearance operation control table by adding the value of the process pointer CP (process number PN) one by one. .

(i-3) The setting information defined in the accessory appearance operation control table as specific information is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted. For example, the configuration may be such that the setting information includes number information that determines the number of times a predetermined operation is executed in a series of specific operations, condition information that determines conditions for ending the predetermined operation, and the like.

The "specific information" may be stored in a manner that allows the movable means to perform a series of specific operations, such as the appearance of the movable accessory 811, based on this information, and may not necessarily be stored in a table format in a ROM or the like. It doesn't have to be remembered.

(i-4) In the above embodiment, the configuration is such that only one pattern of appearance behavior of the movable accessory 811 can be executed based on the accessory appearance operation control table shown in FIG. 225. The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of patterns are set for the appearance operation mode of the movable accessory 811.

For example, the period for performing a series of specific actions of the movable means, such as the appearance action of the movable accessory 811, may include at least a first specific period and a longer second specific period.

At this time, one motion control table, such as the accessory appearance motion control table shown in FIGS. 225 and 227, is repeatedly referred to multiple times to repeatedly execute multiple sets of specific motions defined in the motion control table. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

For example, end determination processing may be set at the intermediate position (for example, 5 seconds position) and the final position (for example, 10 seconds position) of one motion control table that defines a series of specific operations for a first specific period (for example, 10 seconds). For example, by repeatedly referring to the operation control table two and a half times, it is possible to execute and complete a series of specific operations for a second specific period (for example, 25 seconds).

As a result, one motion control table can be used to control a series of specific motions in a plurality of ways, thereby increasing versatility.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored in advance in storage means such as ROM, and to effectively utilize storage means such as ROM, which has a limited storage capacity. Furthermore, the table reading process from a storage means such as a ROM only needs to be performed once, thereby reducing the control burden.

(i-5) In the accessory appearance motion control table shown in FIGS. 225 and 227, the end determination of the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is determined as a process executed at the timing when the movable accessory 811 returns to the initial position side. The configuration is configured with processing settings. The present invention is not limited to this, as long as the appearance operation of the movable accessory 811 can be immediately terminated at least at this timing, and an accessory appearance operation control table different from the table shown in FIG. 225 etc. may be used. good.

As an example, apart from the process related to the accessory appearance motion control table, an end determination process is performed to determine whether the end condition for the appearance action of the movable accessory object 811 is satisfied, and when the end condition is satisfied here, It is provided with an end flag that is turned on, and in the accessory appearance operation control table, it is determined whether the end flag is turned on as a process that is executed at the timing when the movable accessory 811 returns to the initial position side. A configuration may also be adopted in which flag determination processing is set. Then, the flag determination process is executed as a process related to the accessory appearance motion control table, and if the end flag is on, the appearance motion of the movable accessory 811 is immediately ended and the next stage is quickly moved. . At the same time, turn off the end flag. On the other hand, if the end flag is not turned on, the processing related to the accessory appearance operation control table is continued.

(j) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which various notifications are made in connection with the operation of the movable means such as the movable accessory 811.

(j-1) For example, in a stage before the movable means such as the movable accessory 811 starts a series of specific operations based on the establishment of a predetermined operating condition, a notification means (start notification means) is provided to notify that fact. It is also possible to have a different configuration.

If the movable means suddenly operates without any warning, the player who has not been paying attention to the movable means until then may not be able to grasp the situation and may become confused. On the other hand, by providing the above notification means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the movable means will perform a series of specific operations. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance using the movable means, and to further improve the interest for the players.

(j-2) For example, in a series of specific actions, it may be configured to include reporting means (number of times reporting means) capable of reporting the number of times a predetermined action has been performed by the movable means such as the movable accessory 811.

By providing the above notification means, the player can easily recognize the current situation in a series of specific operations. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, while displaying a display in which a character runs a generator to charge an electrical device, the movable means moves up and down. ) may be configured to perform an effect such that the number increases.

Examples of the notification means (start notification means and number of times notification means) include notification display using a predetermined display means, audio notification using a predetermined audio means, and light emission notification using various light emitting means.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below along with their effects.

Conventional assignment XA. Conventionally, gaming machines such as pachinko machines that play games by shooting game balls into a gaming area are known. For example, a pachinko machine is known in which a lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs. .

Some gaming machines cause a movable means (movable body) to perform a series of predetermined actions (for example, rocking, vibration, reciprocating motion, etc.) multiple times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-184066). ).

A series of operations of the movable means are executed based on setting information stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM.

For example, when a sub-control device executes control of a performance effect using a movable accessory (movable means) based on a command from the main control device, when the movable accessory is caused to perform a series of operations, for example, the sub-control device reads an operation control table (operation process data group) as specific information that defines various operation processes related to the series of operations in chronological order from the ROM and sets it in the RAM, and then sequentially reads the operation process data from the operation control table. A series of motion controls for the movable accessory are then executed.

For example, when performing an accessory appearance effect based on the conventional motion control table for an accessory appearance effect as shown in FIG. After performing the predetermined action (first action) of returning to position H0 twice, the predetermined action of descending from reference position H0 to second height position H2 and returning to reference position H0 again (second action) is performed twice, and then Thereafter, a series of operations are performed in which a predetermined operation (third operation) of descending from the reference position H0 to the third height position H3 and returning again to the reference position H0 is performed twice.

After the series of operations described above, the process moves to the next stage. For example, if the development conditions for the role performance are not satisfied, the role performance is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the development conditions for the accessory production are satisfied, the sub-control device reads out a new motion control table for the development production from the ROM and sets it in the RAM. After that, the motion process data is sequentially read from the motion control table and the development performance of the movable accessory is executed.

However, if the conditions for ending the series of operations of the movable accessory (movable means) are met during the series of operations, it is desirable to appropriately terminate the series of operations.

For example, if the player operates the performance button during the above-mentioned character appearance performance, the character performance moves to the next stage (develops or ends), and if the player operates the performance button at the timing Even if the operation determination flag is set to on, under the conventional configuration, the flag determination process can only be executed after completing a series of motion processes defined in the motion control table for the appearance of a role model. First, depending on the operation timing, there is a possibility that the accessory performance does not move to the next stage immediately after the player operates the performance button.

As a result, the performance may be delayed, which may reduce the interest for the players.

In order to solve the above problem, for example, the conventional operation control table shown in FIG. A second motion control table that defines the motion process of the second motion, and a third motion control table that defines the motion process of the third motion for the two times described above) are set separately, and these are sequentially set as individual motion controls. Although it is conceivable to have a configuration in which this is executed, in such a configuration, the frequency of execution of the reading process for each table, etc. increases, and there is a risk that the control burden will increase significantly.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can suitably control the movable means and improve the interest of the players. It is about providing.

Means XA1. a starting ball entry means provided in the gaming area;
a lottery means capable of executing various kinds of lottery when a game ball enters the starting ball entry means;
Display control capable of determining and executing one specific performance (for example, a performance mode related to a variable display) from among a plurality of performance display modes to be executed on a display means provided in the gaming area in response to the result of the lottery. means and
a movable control means provided in the gaming area and capable of determining and executing one movable mode of the movable means from among a plurality of movable modes that can be operated while displaying the specific performance on the display means; A gaming machine,
The movable control means causes the movable means to perform a series of specified operations based on specific information set corresponding to one of the movable modes determined from among the plurality of movable modes based on establishment of a predetermined operating condition. It is something that causes an action to take place,
The movable means is movably controlled between a first position, which is the initial position side, and a second position, which is the most moved position in the series of specific operations,
The series of specific operations is configured such that a predetermined operation for positioning the movable means at or near the first position can be performed multiple times,
The movable control means is
determining means capable of determining whether a termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied when the predetermined operation is executed;
terminating means capable of terminating the series of specific operations by stopping the movable means located at or near the first position when the determining means determines that the terminating condition is satisfied; A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the means XA1, specific information (a group of various setting information such as operation mode, operation time, number of operations, operation order, operation termination condition, etc.) is stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM as one operation control table or the like. ), the movable means repeats a predetermined action a plurality of times to perform a series of specific operations (a series of operations defined in one operation control table), and based on the specific information, the movable means moves to the first position ( A process is executed to determine whether a condition for ending the series of specific actions is satisfied at a timing located at or near the initial position or action starting point.

In other words, even if a series of specific operations based on specific information is in the middle of being executed, if the conditions for ending the series of specific operations are satisfied, the series of specific operations can be quickly terminated. On the other hand, if the termination condition is not satisfied, the series of specific operations can be continued as is.

In addition, if a configuration is adopted in which it is determined whether or not the end condition of a series of specific operations is satisfied at the timing when the movable means is located at the second position side, a predetermined amount of time is required before the movable means returns to the initial position side. Since it takes time, a time lag occurs before the movable means starts the next operation.

In contrast, in the present means, the timing at which it is determined whether or not the end condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied is the timing at which the movable means is located at or near the first position, which is the initial position side. After completing the series of specific operations, the movable means can be quickly returned to its initial state or moved to the next operation.

As a result, the movable means can be suitably controlled, the performance is not delayed, and the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, according to the present means, for example, compared to a configuration in which a plurality of tables set by subdividing one operation control table related to the series of specific operations described above is used to sequentially execute operation control related to the plurality of tables, etc. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the frequency of execution of table read processing, etc., and reduce the control burden.

The movable control means is acquired based on, for example, a predetermined determination counter used to determine the movable mode (movable pattern), the results of the various lottery draws, and the ball entering the starting ball entering means. The configuration may include a predetermined control table for determining one movable mode from among the plurality of movable modes based on the value of the determination counter.

Means XA2. The gaming machine according to means XA1, characterized in that the period for executing the series of specific operations includes at least a first specific period and a second specific period that is longer than the first specific period.

According to the means XA2, it is possible to diversify the performances related to a series of specific actions of the movable means, thereby further increasing interest for the player.

Incidentally, when attempting to execute a series of specific actions in multiple ways with different lengths (periods) as in the above means Each table needs to be set up separately. For example, a first motion control table that defines a series of specific operations for a first specific period (for example, 10 seconds), and a second motion control table that defines a series of specific operations for a second specific period (for example, 15 seconds). It is necessary to prepare a table in advance. For this reason, conventionally, there is a risk that the amount of data that must be stored in advance in a storage means such as a ROM increases.

In contrast, according to the present means, it is possible to repeatedly refer to one motion control table multiple times and repeatedly execute a plurality of sets of specific motions defined in the motion control table. For example, end determination processing may be set at the intermediate position (for example, 5 seconds position) and the final position (for example, 10 seconds position) of one motion control table that defines a series of specific operations for a first specific period (for example, 10 seconds). For example, by repeatedly referring to the operation control table two and a half times, it is possible to execute and complete a series of specific operations for a second specific period (for example, 25 seconds).

As a result, one motion control table can be used to control a series of specific motions in a plurality of ways, thereby increasing versatility.

In addition, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored in advance in storage means such as ROM, and to effectively utilize storage means such as ROM, which has a limited storage capacity. Furthermore, the table reading process from a storage means such as a ROM only needs to be performed once, thereby reducing the control burden.

Further, in a configuration in which a series of specific operations having different lengths and ending timings are executed in a plurality of ways as in the present means, the effect of the means XA1 is more effective.

Means XA3. The determination means is configured to satisfy a condition for ending the series of specific operations during a period in which the movable means is controlled to the second position side (including at least a stop period in which the movable means is controlled to stop at the second position side). The gaming machine according to the means XA1 or XA2, characterized in that it does not determine whether or not the game is played.

If a configuration is adopted in which it is possible to determine whether or not the termination conditions for a series of specific operations are satisfied during a period in which the movable means is controlled to the second position side, based on this determination, the movable means is moved to the initial position side. Since it takes a predetermined time to return to the position, there is a time lag before the movable means starts the next operation, and there is a risk that the motion of the movable means may become unnatural. As a result, the player may feel uncomfortable and lose interest.

On the other hand, according to the means XA3, during the period in which the movable means is controlled to the second position side, it is not determined whether or not the termination condition of the series of specific operations is satisfied, and the method according to the means XA1 is performed. According to the configuration, by determining the end condition at the timing when the movable means returns to the first position side, the time lag from the determination until the movable means returns to the initial position is reduced, and the impact on subsequent performances is reduced. can do. As a result, the effects of the above means XA1 can be enhanced.

Means XA4. The period during which the movable means is controlled to the second position side (including at least the stop period during which the movable means is controlled to stop at the second position side) includes at least a first control period and a second control period that is longer than the first control period. A gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to means XA3, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a control period.

If the movable means is configured to perform the same action every time, there is a possibility that the performance related to a series of specific actions of the movable means may become monotonous. On the other hand, according to the means XA4, it is possible to diversify the performances related to a series of specific operations of the movable means, thereby further increasing the interest for the player.

In addition, as in the above means XA4, under a configuration in which a plurality of periods are set during which control is performed from the first position, which is the initial position side, to the second position side, which is the farthest position, if the movable means is temporarily located at the second position side. If the configuration is such that it is determined whether or not the termination condition for a series of specific operations is satisfied at the timing when the movable means is controlled toward the second position, the movable means may be Variations occur in the time it takes to return to the initial position, and ultimately the time it takes for the movable means to start the next operation. When such variations occur, there is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the performance related to the series of specific operations of the movable means and the specific performance executed by the display means.

In contrast, in the present means, regardless of the length of the period during which the movable means is controlled to the second position side, under the configuration according to the above means XA1, the termination condition is set at the timing when the movable means returns to the first position side. By determining this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as variations in the time from the determination until the movable means returns to the initial position, and furthermore, the time until the movable means starts the next operation.

Means XA5. As the control executed after completing the series of specific operations, at least a first specific control and a second specific control different from the first specific control are configured to be executable,
In either case, the first specific control is executed or the second specific control is executed with the movable means located at the first position. A gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to means XA4.

According to the means XA5, whether the first specific control is executed or the second specific control is executed after completing a series of specific operations, the movable means is used in common in both cases. Since it is configured to be executed while positioned at the first position, which is the starting point, the movable means can be smoothly shifted to the next control.

Means XA6. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to means XA5, characterized in that at least one of the conditions for ending the series of specific operations can be satisfied based on the player operating a predetermined operation means.

According to the means XA6, by providing the operation means that can be operated by the player, the player can actively participate in the performance related to a series of specific movements of the movable means, which increases the interest of the player. You can improve your performance.

Note that, as in the above means XA6, when the timing at which the end condition for a series of specific actions is met is an event that does not occur, such as when the player operates an operating means, the effect of the above means XA1 is not effective. It will be more successful.

Means XA7. Any one of the means XA1 to XA6 is characterized in that the timing at which the end condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied changes depending on the operation mode of a predetermined operation means operated by the player. The game machine described.

According to the means XA7, by providing the operation means that can be operated by the player, the player can actively participate in the performance related to a series of specific actions of the movable means, which increases the interest of the player. You can improve your performance.

For example, in connection with the movement of the movable means descending, a character is displayed on the display means, and a display effect is performed in which the movable means is pushed upward to prevent the execution of the development effect. It may be configured such that the player repeatedly hits the operating means to stop the movable means that is about to be pushed up.

Here, the "operation mode of the operating means" includes the number of operations, the amount of operation displacement, and the like. For example, the information includes the number of times a button-type operating means is pressed and the amount of operation displacement of a movable operating means such as a jog dial or a slide lever.

Means XA8. Means XA1 characterized in that the control executed after the series of specific operations is completed includes control related to a predetermined control object different from the movable means (for example, the display means, various lamps, speakers, etc.) The gaming machine according to any one of means XA7 to XA7.

According to the means XA8, by providing a predetermined control object different from the movable means, it is possible to perform an effect using the control object in addition to an effect related to a series of specific operations of the movable means, which is useful for players. It is possible to further improve interest in the game.

In addition, in a configuration in which the first control related to a series of specific operations of the movable means and the second control related to a predetermined control object are executed together, as in the above-mentioned means XA8, the execution timing of both controls may be different. There is a possibility that a gap (time lag) may occur.

On the other hand, according to the present means XA8, it is possible to reduce the operational deviation between two types of controlled objects (the movable means and the predetermined controlled object) operated by different controls.

Means XA9. The determining means determines whether or not a termination condition for the series of specific actions is satisfied after executing the last predetermined action of the predetermined actions that are executed a plurality of times in the series of specific actions. A gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA8, characterized in that the gaming machine is configured such that

According to the means XA9, for example, it is an operation control table that defines a series of specific operations, and it is possible to determine whether or not a termination condition for the series of specific operations is satisfied after executing the last predetermined operation. By using the motion control table, it is possible to repeatedly refer to the motion control table multiple times and repeatedly execute multiple sets of specific motions defined in the motion control table.

As a result, it becomes possible to use one operation control table for multiple operation controls, increasing versatility and reducing the amount of data that must be stored in advance in storage means such as ROM, which has a limited storage capacity. It is possible to make effective use of storage means.

Means XA10. When the movable means is located at the first position, the movable means is in a first state in which a predetermined area (for example, a part of a predetermined display means, etc.) is made invisible or difficult to see, and when it is located at the second position, The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to means XA9, characterized in that the predetermined area is in a second state in which it is visible or easily visible.

According to the means XA10, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the movable means and further improve the interest for the player.

For example, under a configuration in which the eyeball is placed in the eyehole as a predetermined area provided on a dragon accessory that resembles a dragon head, under normal circumstances, the eyelid member as a movable means may not be able to see the eyeball (inside the eyehole). While the eyelids of the dragon accessory are in the first state where they are covered so as to be difficult to see, when the predetermined operating conditions are met, the eyelids of the dragon accessory blink multiple times. Afterwards, the eyelid member of the dragon accessory may be in a second state in which it is opened so that the eyeball (inside the eye hole) of the dragon accessory becomes visible or easily visible. Of course, the "predetermined area" is not limited to this, and may be another area such as a part of the display screen, for example.

Means XA11. Any one of the means XA1 to XA10, characterized in that it includes a light emitting means that can be turned on when the movable means is located at the second position and can be turned off when the movable means is located at the first position. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means XA11, it is possible to perform a motion effect of the movable means and a light effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the movable means and further improve the interest for the player.

For example, an eyeball equipped with an LED as a light emitting means is placed in the eye hole of the dragon accessory as a predetermined area, and in a first state (normal state) when the dragon accessory's eyelids are closed, the eyeball is (LED) is in the off state, but when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied and the eyelid member of the dragon accessory is in the second state opened, the eyeball (LED) is in the lighted state. You can also use it as Of course, the position where the light emitting means is provided is not limited to the above-mentioned predetermined area, and may be any other position, such as a position where the predetermined area can be illuminated from the outside.

Means XA12. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA11, characterized in that the game machine is provided with a biasing means (for example, a coil spring) for biasing the movable means toward the initial position (first position). .

If the standby position of the movable means deviates from a preset initial position (reference position) due to an assembly error of the movable means, deterioration over time, etc., there is a risk that operation control of the movable means will be hindered. Furthermore, there is a possibility that there will be a discrepancy between the display performance and the operation of the movable means, which may reduce the interest for the player.

On the other hand, according to the means XA12 described above, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the movable means, and furthermore, the movement deviation. In turn, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

Note that the location where the biasing means is provided is not particularly limited, and may be provided, for example, on the movable means side, or may be provided on the drive means side that drives the movable means.

Means XA13. In executing the series of specific operations, the movable control means performs a predetermined stop control to stop the movable means after once performing a predetermined operation to position the movable means at or near the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA12, characterized in that it is configured to be executable.

After the movable means performs the predetermined operation once to return to the first position, the direction of operation of the movable means is reversed to the second position. Therefore, if the above-mentioned stop control is not executed, the operating direction of the movable means will suddenly reverse, and there is a risk that a large load will be applied to the movable means and the drive means that drive it due to the influence of inertia, etc. be. As a result, there is a risk that the assembled state of the movable means and the driving means may become loose, resulting in a decrease in durability.

In contrast, according to the means XA13, by performing the stop control, it is possible to reduce the load on the movable means, the drive means, etc., and improve the durability of the movable means, the drive means, etc.

Means XA14. Means XA1 to XA13, wherein the movable control means is configured to be able to perform a predetermined stop control to stop the movable means at the second position when executing the series of specific operations. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the above means XA14, the same effects as the above means XA13 are achieved.

Means XA15. The predetermined operation is an operation that includes displacement of the movable means in the front-back direction,
Means XA1 to XA1 characterized in that at least when the movable means is located at the second position, at least a part of the movable means is in a state of protruding beyond the front surface of the game board constituting the game area. A gaming machine according to any one of means XA14.

According to the means XA15, the movable means is configured to move beyond the front surface of the game board and move closer to the player, so it is possible to perform a more dynamic and powerful performance, and the player It is possible to improve the interest of the students.

In addition, "actions that include displacement of the movable means in the front and rear directions" include actions that include sliding displacements in the front and back directions, and postural displacements in the front and rear directions (rotation, (swinging, tilting, etc.).

Means XA16. The gaming machine according to any one of means XA1 to XA15, wherein the movable means is provided at a position lower than the display means.

Usually, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a display means is provided in the game area, a starting ball entering means is provided at a position below the display means. Therefore, while playing a game while looking at the display, the player's line of sight frequently turns toward the lower position of the display where the starting ball entry means is provided, where the game balls shot into the gaming area are directed. Become. Therefore, if the movable means is provided at a position above the display means, even if a performance is performed by the movable means, there is a possibility that the performance will hardly be noticed by the player.

In contrast, according to the means XA16, by providing the movable means at a position below the display means that the player frequently sees, the player can easily notice changes in the movable means. As a result, the player will not miss the performance by the movable means, and the player's interest can be improved.

In addition, "being provided at a position lower than the display means" includes, for example, being provided on the back side of a transparent game board, or being fitted into a hole or recess formed in the game board from the front side. An example is that

Means XA17. The movable means according to any one of means XA1 to XA16, wherein the movable means is configured to abut on a predetermined abutted part (stopper part) when located at the first position. Game machine.

If the structure is such that the movable means does not come into contact with a predetermined abutted part when the movable means returns to the first position, it is not known whether or not the movable means has returned to the preset initial position. It is necessary to perform a process of checking whether the means has returned to the initial position, and if the position has shifted, it is necessary to perform a process of correcting the position of the movable means to the initial position.

On the other hand, according to the present means, it is only necessary to control the movable means to abut on a predetermined abutted part, and it is possible to omit position check processing and position correction processing after a predetermined operation. The processing load on the control means can be reduced.

Means XA18. The movable means according to any one of means XA1 to XA17, wherein the movable means is configured to abut on a predetermined abutted part (stopper part) when located at the second position. Game machine.

According to the above means XA18, the same effects as the above means XA17 are achieved.

Means XA19. Means XA1 to means XA1 to means characterized in that the movable means includes a notification means (start notification means) for notifying the start of the series of specific operations based on establishment of the operating condition at a stage before the movable means starts the series of specific operations. A gaming machine according to any one of XA18.

If the movable means suddenly operates without any warning, the player who has not been paying attention to the movable means until then may not be able to grasp the situation and may become confused.

On the other hand, according to the means XA19, by providing the above-mentioned notification means, it is possible to make the player aware in advance that the movable means will perform a series of specific operations. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the game performance using the movable means, and to further improve the interest for the players.

Note that examples of the notification means (start notification means) include notification display using a predetermined display means, audio notification using a predetermined audio means, and light emission notification using various light emitting means.

Means XA20. In the series of specific operations, the method according to any one of means XA1 to XA19, further comprising a notification means (number of times notification means) that can notify the number of times the predetermined operation has been executed by the movable means. Game machine.

According to the means XA20, by providing the above-mentioned notification means, the player can easily recognize the current situation in a series of specific operations. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

For example, while displaying a display in which a character runs a generator to charge an electrical device, the movable means moves up and down. ) may be configured to perform an effect such that the number increases.

Examples of the notification means (number of times notification means) include notification display using a predetermined display means, audio notification using a predetermined audio means, and light emission notification using various light emitting means.

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means (such as a firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing device) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and A game area (game board, etc.) into which the game ball is guided, and a predetermined ball entry means (general winning hole, variable winning device, starting winning hole, etc.) into which the game ball guided to the game area can enter. One example is a pinball game machine equipped with

(b) The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

[Fifth embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, parts that overlap with those of the first to fourth embodiments described above (same components, same processing contents, etc.) will be described using the same member names and the same reference numerals.

Conventional gaming machines are provided with an auxiliary member that can change the probability of winning a prize in a predetermined opening in order to improve gaming performance.

The auxiliary member enters the winning easy period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the game, and the winning easy period ends when, for example, a change to a predetermined starting winning is made a predetermined number of times.

During the easy winning period, the hall equipment displays effects and data by outputting discernible signals to hall computers and the like.

However, in conventional gaming machines, no measures have been taken to prevent startup suspension based on the auxiliary member at the end of the easy-to-win period. It has been demanded.

The purpose of this gaming machine is to improve the interest in gaming by improving the ability to identify gaming states.

In contrast, specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a predetermined special game advantageous to the player is executed, triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means;
a variable display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when the determining means executes a determination as to whether or not to transition to the special gaming state;
a reservation means for reserving the right to execute a variable display of the predetermined symbol executed by the variable display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means is a first starting ball entering means, and the first starting ball entering means is switched between an unfavorable state in which entering the game ball is restricted and an advantageous state in which entering the game ball is easier than in the unfavorable state. a second starting ball entering means different from the first starting ball entering means;
A gaming machine in which the advantageous state is executed after the predetermined special game ends until a predetermined condition is satisfied,
a first output means that continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state at least in the advantageous state to the outside of the gaming machine;
Output stopping means for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first outputting means when a termination condition is satisfied based on the termination of the advantageous state;
a storage means capable of storing the number of reserved rights to execute a variable display of the predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state;
After the end of the advantageous state, at least the number of reserved rights triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored in the storage means. a second output means capable of continuously outputting specific identification information for a predetermined period of time that can identify that a predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right is executable;
Equipped with
The second output means is characterized in that it continuously outputs the specific identification information in an output manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information by the first output means,
By improving the ability to identify gaming states, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

More specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention,
Shifts to a jackpot state in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (a game in which a game ball enters the jackpot of the variable winning device that is opened) is executed when the game ball enters the predetermined starting jackpot. a determination function that determines whether or not to
an effect display device that performs a variable display of a predetermined symbol when the determination function determines whether or not to transition to a jackpot state;
a special fluctuation reservation area for reserving the right to execute the fluctuation display of the symbol executed by the effect display device,
The predetermined starting prize opening is a top starting prize opening in which a low support mode in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a high support mode in which entering the game ball is easier than in the low support mode. The winning openings include different lower starting winning openings,
A pachinko machine in which a high support mode is executed after the end of a jackpot game until the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times,
an output terminal and a signal output function that continuously outputs a jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) that can identify the high support mode to the outside of the pachinko machine at least in the high support mode;
A signal stop function that stops outputting the jackpot signal 2 based on the end of the high support mode;
a remaining reservation number register that can store the number of reservations for the right to execute a variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the lower starting winning slot at the end of the high support mode;
After the high support mode ends, if at least the number of rights reserved that is triggered by the entry of a game ball into the lower starting winning slot is stored in the remaining number of reservations register, the said right stored in the remaining number of reservations register. Equipped with an output terminal and a signal output function capable of continuously outputting a pattern signal for a predetermined period that can identify that it is a period in which a predetermined symbol fluctuation display corresponding to the predetermined symbol fluctuation display can be executed,
By continuously outputting the pattern signal in an output mode different from the jackpot signal 2,
By improving the ability to identify gaming states, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present invention, a "special game state in which a predetermined special game advantageous to the player is executed" is defined as a "special game state in which a predetermined special game advantageous to the player is executed", for example, a small winning state more advantageous to the player than the normal state, a normal A jackpot state that is more advantageous to the player than a state or a small win state (more specifically, a jackpot state in which an advantageous state is given after the end, a jackpot state in which no advantageous state is given after the end, and a state in which a transition to a special gaming state is determined by the determination means) It may be any type of winning state, such as a jackpot state in which the high probability state in which the probability of a determination of the effect is higher than the normal state ends, a jackpot state in which the jackpot state is not awarded after the high probability state ends.

In the present invention, the "variable display means" may be any device that displays a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when it is determined whether to transition to a special gaming state, and the gist of the present invention can be realized. If so, for example, a display means provided on a game board constituting a game area, a display means provided on a center frame attached to the game board, a display means provided on the back side of a game board having translucency, Any display means may be used, such as a display means provided on a mounting frame to which a game board is mounted.

In the present invention, the "holding means" may be anything that reserves the right to display a predetermined symbol in a variable manner, and may be, for example, a RAM as an electrical storage area, or a It may be anything, such as a buffer or an area consisting of multiple addresses.

In the present invention, the "predetermined condition" may be one in which an advantageous state is executed until the condition is satisfied after the end of a predetermined special game, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, elapses, the variable display is performed a specified number of times, the start conditions for a predetermined variable display (for example, a variable display related to the occurrence of a special gaming state) are met, the predetermined variable display starts, and the predetermined variation The predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the display, the predetermined variable display has stopped, the stop of the predetermined variable display has been confirmed, the predetermined period has elapsed after the predetermined variable display has stopped, and the predetermined ball entry area A game ball enters into the ball or a predetermined number of game balls enter the ball, or a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on the result and a predetermined result is obtained, a predetermined operating means is operated, or a predetermined number of operations are performed. or that a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on the predetermined probability and a predetermined result is obtained; that the rights reserved in the reservation means include predetermined information or results; that a predetermined performance is performed or that a predetermined performance is performed; is performed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined number of game balls are fired or paid out, a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry means or a predetermined number of game balls enter, and a predetermined count value is the upper limit. It can be anything, such as reaching a value.

In the present invention, the "first output means" may be one that continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state at least in an advantageous state, and if the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example Various control devices such as a main control device, sub-control device, display control device, payout control device, etc. that are equipped with a control board capable of executing predetermined information output processing and terminals and ports for information output, and these various control devices and their Any configuration may be used, such as a combination with various relay boards such as an external terminal board that can relay and output information output from the board.

Here, the "predetermined identification information" may be any identification information that can identify the state at least in an advantageous state, and if it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, for example, a high level signal or a low level signal that is constant for a predetermined period of time. Various electrical signals such as level signals that are output at different levels, pulse signals that are intermittently output with a predetermined pulse width, pattern signals that change the output level in a predetermined pattern such as Morse code, and information that is output by predetermined light emission. It may be any signal, a signal that outputs information by a predetermined sound, a signal that outputs information by a predetermined electromagnetic wave, a signal that outputs information by a predetermined image, or a combination of these. .

Furthermore, "continuously" means that the receiving device that receives the identification information (electrical signal, etc.) output from the transmitting device determines that the identification information is substantially continuously output for a predetermined period of time. Of course, it is possible to output the identification information continuously at a constant level without any interruption for a predetermined period of time, and if it is possible to realize the gist of the present invention, for example, when the pulse signal is output intermittently, or This also includes a case where the output level of the identification information is changed periodically or irregularly during a predetermined period, such as a case where the output mode of the identification information changes midway. Therefore, "continuously" does not mean that the output signal is not interrupted at all; for example, it may be in a state where it is not output during the fluctuating display, and is output at least when the fluctuating display stops. In other words, it is only necessary that when the variable display stops, it can be determined whether the special game state related to the variable display can be counted in the number of consecutive games.

In the present invention, the "output stop means" may be any device that stops the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means when the end condition is satisfied based on the end of the advantageous state, and the gist of the present invention can be realized. If so, for example, various control devices equipped with a control board that can execute predetermined information output stop processing, such as a main control device, sub-control device, display control device, payout control device, etc., and output from these various control devices and It may be of any configuration, such as a combination with various relay boards such as an external terminal board that has a function of stopping the relay of information transmitted.

In the present invention, the "termination condition" may be any condition as long as it is satisfied based on the end of the advantageous state and that the output of the predetermined identification information by the first output means is stopped when the condition is satisfied. If it is possible, for example, the predetermined variable display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state is stopped, the stop of the corresponding predetermined variable display is confirmed at the end of the advantageous state, the predetermined change corresponding to the end of the advantageous state is confirmed. A predetermined period of time has elapsed after the variable display stopped or was determined, the conditions for starting the next variable display after the predetermined variable display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state are met, and the predetermined variable display corresponds to the end of the advantageous state. a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the next variation display of the predetermined variation display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state; The fluctuating display stops, a predetermined period of time passes after the fluctuating display next to the predetermined fluctuating display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state stops, a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area, or a predetermined number of balls enter the predetermined ball entry area. A game ball enters the ball, a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on that and a predetermined result is obtained, a predetermined operating means is operated or operated a predetermined number of times, or a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on that. a predetermined result is obtained, the predetermined information or result is included in the right reserved in the reservation means, a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a predetermined performance is performed, or a predetermined performance is performed a predetermined number of times. A predetermined number of game balls are fired or paid out, a predetermined number of game balls enter a predetermined ball entry means, a predetermined count reaches an upper limit, etc. , it can be anything.

In the present invention, the "storage means" is capable of storing the number of reserved rights to execute a variable display of a predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means at the end of an advantageous state. For example, counters set in RAM, registers, buffers, etc. as electrical storage areas, areas consisting of multiple addresses, pointers, mechanical counters, etc., can be used as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized. It may be any device, such as a device.

In the present invention, the "second output means" is a period during which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored in the storage means can be executed at least after the end of the advantageous state. Any device that continuously outputs specific identification information that can identify the person for a predetermined period of time may be used, and as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a main control device, a sub-control device, a display control device, a payout control device, etc. , various control devices equipped with a control board that can execute predetermined information output processing, terminals and ports for information output, and external terminal boards that can relay and output information output from these various control devices. Any configuration may be used, such as combinations with various relay boards.

Here, the "specific identification information" identifies a period during which a predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right stored in the storage means can be executed at least after the end of the advantageous state. Any identification information that is possible is sufficient, and as long as the purpose of the present invention can be realized, for example, a level signal such as a high level signal or a low level signal that is output at a constant level for a predetermined period of time, or a level signal that is output intermittently with a predetermined pulse width. Various electrical signals such as pulse signals, pattern signals whose output levels are switched according to a predetermined pattern such as Morse code, signals that output information by a predetermined light emission, signals that output information by a predetermined sound, and information output by a predetermined electromagnetic wave. The output signal may be any signal that outputs information based on a predetermined image, a signal that outputs information based on a predetermined image, or a combination thereof.

In the present invention, the difference between the "output mode of predetermined identification information" and the "output mode of specific identification information" is that the receiving device that receives the identification information (electrical signal, etc.) output from the sending device Any device that can determine the difference in the output mode of the identification information is sufficient, and as long as the gist of the present invention can be realized, for example, a level signal that is continuously output at a constant level during a predetermined period, and a level signal that is output intermittently during a predetermined period. Due to differences in the pulse signal output during the specified period, differences in the pulse interval (continuous off time) and/or pulse width (continuous on time) of the pulse signal that is intermittently output during the specified period, This is due to the difference in the number of pulse signals that are output intermittently, or the difference between a pulse signal that is output periodically during a predetermined period and a pattern signal whose output level is switched in a predetermined pattern during a predetermined period. This is due to the difference between a level signal that is continuously output at a constant level during a predetermined period and a pattern signal that changes the output level in a predetermined pattern during a predetermined period. It may be based on a difference in the pattern of the pattern signal, or may be a combination of these various types. In the first place, the output method is different, such as the difference between electrical signals and optical signals, the difference between light and sound, the difference between sound and images, the difference between images and electrical signals, etc. good.

Hereinafter, the specific configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present invention will be explained in detail. The gaming machine according to the present invention (pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment) described in detail below has a determination function as the determination means of the present invention described above, a fluctuation display section as the fluctuation display means of the present invention, and a fluctuation display section as the fluctuation display means of the present invention. A holding function as a holding means, a predetermined information output function section as a first output means of the present invention, an output stop function as an output stop means of the present invention, a storage function section as a storage means of the present invention, a second information output function section of the present invention It has a specific information output function section as an output means, a pattern storage section as a pattern information storage means of the present invention, and an extraction function as a pattern information extraction means of the present invention.

FIG. 230 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 231 is a perspective view, and FIG. 232 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12 and front frame set 14 are opened. FIG. 233 is a front view showing the structure of the inner frame 12, game board 30, etc. FIG. 234 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 235 is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame 12, back pack unit 203, etc. are opened. However, in FIG. 232, for convenience, the nails and various accessories disposed on the game board 30 surface, the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14, etc. are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 232 etc., the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and an inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. .

As shown in FIG. 235 etc., the outer frame 11 has an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of wooden boards, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of extruded aluminum alloy. The frame components 11a to 11d are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole using removable fasteners such as screws.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left frame component 11c, respectively (see FIG. 230). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. The inner frame 12 and the like are housed in a space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, an extending wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from near the rear end in the width direction is formed in the right side frame forming portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 235) provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 234). Additionally, as shown in FIG. 232, a pair of upper and lower receivers 84 and 85 are provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked. Further, on the lower receiving portion 85, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame open detection switch 92, which will be described later, is provided to protrude toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a curtain plate decoration 87 made of resin is attached to the lower side frame forming portion 11b. A rib 88 projecting upward is integrally formed at the back of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 232, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38 .

Further, a front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Like the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward about an opening/closing axis set vertically on the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers almost the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A generally elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 230, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided at the center of the lower part, and game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are stored in the lower tray 15. It is now possible. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball removal lever 25 for ejecting game balls from inside the lower tray 15 is provided.

In addition, a performance button 125 is provided on the left side of the lower tray 15 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The production button 125 is configured so that the player can press it (press it downward). Further, inside the lower plate 15, an operation detection switch (not shown) is provided as an operation detection means for detecting a pressing operation of the production button 125. When the production button 125 is pressed, an operation detection signal is output from the operation detection switch to a sub-control device 262, which will be described later. As a result, when the player presses the performance button 125, a predetermined performance is performed on the performance display device 42, the speaker SP, the LED boards 48A, 48B, 48C, etc. as performance means, which will be described later, or the content of the performance is changed. may be changed.

A game ball firing handle (hereinafter simply referred to as "handle") 18 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 15 and projects toward the front. The handle 18, which serves as an operating means that can be operated by the player, includes, for example, a base fixed to the front frame set 14, and a rotary operating section as a first operating section that is rotatably assembled to the base. , a variable resistor as operation amount detection means for detecting the operation amount of the rotary operation section, a firing stop switch as a second operation section that can select whether or not to launch the game ball into the game area, etc. .

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper tray 19 is a ball receiving tray that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a game ball launching device (hereinafter simply referred to as "launching device") 60 as a launching means to be described later while arranging them in a line. In addition, when the upper tray 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via the lower tray communication path 71 and the discharge port 16, which will be described later.

The upper tray 19 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 as operation means that can be operated by the player. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending button 121 is operated in accordance with the operation. Rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 19. Further, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Further, the upper tray 19 is provided with a ball extraction button 123 as an operation means that can be operated by the player. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 opens, and the balls stored in the upper tray 19 are opened. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower tray 15. That is, the player can move the game balls on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123.

Furthermore, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting or blinking according to changes in the gaming state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach. For example, a frame lamp 102 containing a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided around the periphery of the window portion 101. Additionally, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the frame lamp 102, which are turned on in the event of a predetermined error. Note that a large number of fine through holes are formed in the upper part of each error display lamp 104 of the frame lamp 102, corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 232) provided on the back side of the front frame set 14.

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 does not have a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular glass plates that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but has a round shape as a whole and is attached as an assembly.

Further, as shown in FIG. 232, a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the back side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101. The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower plate communication passage 71 that connects from a dispensing mechanism section 352 to the discharge port 16 of the lower tray 15, which will be described later, and an upper plate communication passage 73 that connects from the dispensing mechanism section 352 to the upper tray 19.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) that detects game balls located in the lower tray communication passage 71. Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is possible to know that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are retained in the lower tray communication path 71). be able to.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be explained with reference to FIG. 233. At the lower front of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, below the window hole 39 (game board 30), there is a firing device 60 and a firing rail 61 that guides the game ball immediately after being fired from the firing device 60. installed. In this embodiment, a solenoid type firing device having a plunger serving as a driving member is employed as the firing device 60.

In the present embodiment, control is performed to prohibit the launching device 60 from being launched based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. On the other hand, when the accumulation of game balls in the lower tray communication path 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game balls are no longer detected for a predetermined period of time), the firing device 60 is allowed to launch.

A ball feeding device 63 is provided above the firing device 60. The ball feeding device 63 guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one ball at a time to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by a driving means such as a solenoid.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 232 and 233 is a payout passage for guiding game balls put out by a payout mechanism section 352 (described later) to the front of the inner frame 12, and an upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19 ) and a passage leading to the lower plate communication passage 71 (lower plate 15).

Further, a shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is open, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like and almost closes the exit of the dispensing passage 67. It has become.

On the other hand, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the entrance-side rear ends of the lower plate communication path 71 and the upper plate communication path 73. In the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective entrances of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 and the payout passage 67 are adjacent to each other with a predetermined distance apart, and the gap between them is replaced by the game ball. is allowed to pass.

In addition, since the entrance of the lower tray communication path 71 and the entrance of the upper tray communication path 73 are provided adjacent to each other, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are full of game balls, the balls are not put out. The game balls flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and are delivered to the lower tray 15 through the lower tray communication path 71.

As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38) serving as a mounting frame at the rear side of the window hole 39. The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral edge in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, a substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 serving as the game area is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38.

Here, the configuration of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 233. The game board 30 in this embodiment is based on a transparent plate, which is a light-transmitting member formed into a flat plate shape from a resin material having light-transmitting properties, such as polycarbonate, acrylic resin, and ABS resin. (game board main body). Here, "transparent" does not only mean that objects existing in the rear area of the game board 30 can be seen in a completely transparent state, but also that at least a portion of light can be transmitted and the presence of the object can be seen. It may also include a so-called semi-transparent state.

With this configuration, the player can view various objects such as lamps and display devices arranged in the rear area of the game board 30 from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 233, LED boards 48A, 48B, and 48C on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted as light emitting means are arranged at the rear position of a predetermined area in the gaming area, and the player , the light emitted from the LED can be seen from the front of the game board 30 through the game board 30. Incidentally, the LED board 48A and the like are controlled to light up and blink in a predetermined light emitting manner in response to various game performances, and serve to enhance the performance effect during the game.

In addition, the game board 30 includes an inner rail component 51 and an outer rail component 52 formed of a band-shaped metal plate, and a rail 50 that guides the game ball fired from the firing device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. is installed. As a result, the game ball fired as the handle 18 is rotated is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail component 51 (upper left in FIG. 233). This prevents the game ball from returning to the rail 50 once guided from the rail 50 to the gaming area. Furthermore, a return rubber 54 is attached to approximately the tip portion (upper right corner in FIG. 233) of the outer rail component 52. As a result, the game ball fired with more than a predetermined force hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to the substantially center side of the game board 30.

In this embodiment, the outer rail component 52 is discontinued at the upper right corner of the game board 30, and the inner rail component 51 is discontinued at the lower right corner of the game board 30. Therefore, the gaming area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball launched by the launcher 60 passes the return ball prevention member 53, it may flow backwards through the rail 50, so the parallel portions of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 are excluded from the play area. .

In addition, there is a gap at a predetermined interval between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail component 52), and the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a space for dropping game balls that have fallen through the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed that guides the ball to the dish 15. As a result, if a game ball fired from the firing device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns as a foul ball on the rail 50, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. It is discharged.

The game board 30 includes a general winning opening (general winning section) 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper starting winning opening 33YA, a lower starting winning opening 33YB, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a first special display device 43L, and A second special display device 43R and the like are disposed so as to be fitted into attachment holes formed through the transparent plate.

Furthermore, in the front area of the game board 30, that is, in the game area formed on the front side of the game board 30, in order to allocate the falling direction of the game ball in a predetermined area and guide the game ball to a predetermined position, A large number of nails 49, windmills 57, etc. are arranged.

The game balls guided to the game area flow down through various paths while having their flow direction and rotation direction changed by nails 49 and the like. Then, some of the plurality of game balls guided to the game area are guided to the windmill 57 while moving relatively through various routes, and the windmill 57 divides the falling routes to the left and right.

As described above, in this embodiment, even if the gaming area is widely expanded in the left and right direction, by providing the windmill 57 etc., the gaming ball can be moved to the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the variable winning device 32 etc. It is constructed so that it is easy to guide the person to the destination. In addition, the nails 49 and the like are adjusted in advance on the game board 30 so that winnings to the top starting prize opening 33YA, the variable winning device 32, etc. occur with a moderate probability.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with winning detection switches as ball entering detection means for detecting game balls that have won into the various winning holes, corresponding to various winning holes (ball entering means) such as the general winning hole 31. It is being Specifically, as shown in FIG. 233, a general winning switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and a count switch 223 is provided in the variable winning device 32. In addition, a first starting winning switch 224A is provided in the upper starting winning opening 33YA, and a second starting winning switch 224B is provided in the lower starting winning opening 33YB. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

As is well known, when a game ball wins (balls entered) into various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper starting winning hole 33YA, and the lower starting winning hole 33YB, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the (or lower tray 15). For example, if there is a prize in the upper starting prize opening 33YA, there will be 3 prizes, if there is a winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, one prize will be awarded, and if there is a winning in the general winning opening 31, there will be 10 prizes. When there is a win in the variable winning device 32, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19 (lower tray 15). Here, the upper starting winning hole 33YA and the lower starting winning hole 33YB constitute the starting ball entering means in this embodiment. In particular, the upper starting winning hole 33YA constitutes the first starting ball entering means, and the lower starting winning hole 33YB constitutes the second starting ball entering means. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the gaming area through this out port 36. .

The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a into which a game ball can enter, a rectangular plate-shaped opening/closing shutter 32b that is tiltably supported and opens and closing the large winning opening 32a, and a drive that opens and closes the opening/closing shutter 32b. It is equipped with a solenoid 32c for the big prize opening as a means, and is controlled by a main control device 261 which will be described later. Here, the big prize opening solenoid 32c has a plunger as a driving member that can move in and out of its main body, a coil spring as a biasing means, and the like.

Under such a configuration, the variable winning device 32 allows the plunger to protrude from the main body due to the biasing force of the coil spring in normal times when the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (the large winning opening solenoid 32c is in a non-energized state). By being in this state, the opening/closing shutter 32b is in a vertical state along the top and bottom. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is in a state where the opening/closing shutter 32b closes the big winning hole 32a, and the game ball flowing down the gaming area is in a closed state where it cannot enter the big winning hole 32a.

On the other hand, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when a jackpot or a small jackpot (to be described later) occurs, the jackpot solenoid 32c becomes energized, and the plunger moves inside the main body against the biasing force of the coil spring. By being in the retracted state, the opening/closing shutter 32b tilts forward using its lower side as a rotation axis and becomes a substantially horizontal state. As a result, the variable winning device 32 is in a state where the opening/closing shutter 32b opens the big winning hole 32a, and the game ball flowing down the gaming area is in an open state where it can enter the big winning hole 32a.

The upper starting prize opening 33YA allows game balls to be won at all times. On the other hand, the lower starting prize opening 33YB is provided with an opening/closing accessory 37Y as an opening/closing winning assistance device.

The opening/closing accessory 37Y includes a pair of left and right movable blades 37Ya that are rotationally displaced in the left and right direction with the lower end side as an axis, and a starting prize opening solenoid 37Yb as a driving means for driving the movable blades 37Ya to open and close. The blade 37Ya opens and closes in accordance with the establishment of a predetermined condition, thereby creating an open state in which the game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB, and a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot enter the lower starting winning opening 33YB. It is configured so that the state can be changed between the states. In other words, the lower starting prize opening 33YB is switched between a disadvantageous state in which the entry of the game ball is restricted and an advantageous state in which the entry of the game ball is easier than in the disadvantageous state.

As mentioned above, the upper starting prize opening 33YA and the lower starting winning opening 33YB are provided with the first starting winning switch 224A and the second starting winning switch 224B as ball entering detection means for detecting winning game balls, respectively. There is. When a game ball is detected by the starting winning switches 224A and 224B, various drawings are performed such as a winning drawing to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state, etc., and a special display device 43L as a variable display section. , 43R and an effect display device 42 as a variable display section to be described later, are configured to perform variable display of predetermined symbols and predetermined effects. Here, if you win in the lottery, you will be given a jackpot status or the like. In other words, the determination function in this embodiment is constituted by the function of performing a win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to move to a jackpot state as a special gaming state.

Hereinafter, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 264, in this embodiment, the jackpot types are "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A" , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", and "JUB (Jump Up Bonus) jackpot".

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", a series of operations are performed in which "Long Open" is treated as one special prize state (one round), and this is repeated 16 times (16 rounds).

In this embodiment, "long opening" means that a specified time of 30 seconds has passed after the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable winning device 32 has been switched from the closed state to the open state, or that the specified number of 10 This refers to one opening/closing operation until the opening/closing shutter 32b is in the closed state on the condition that one game ball wins a prize. Note that a game in which a game ball enters the big winning hole 32a of the variable winning device 32 that is opened, that is, a jackpot game, corresponds to the special game in this embodiment.

In the jackpot state of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", the "long opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round), and after this is repeated 4 times (4 rounds), the "short opening" is repeated once. As a special prize state (one round), a series of operations are performed in which this is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In this embodiment, "short opening" means that a specified time of 0.4 seconds has elapsed after the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable winning device 32 is switched from the closed state to the open state, or that a specified number of prizes are in the big prize opening 32a. This refers to one opening/closing operation until the opening/closing shutter 32b is in the closed state on the condition that three game balls win a prize.

In this embodiment, the game ball is fired from the firing device 60 toward the game area at a rate of one every "0.6 seconds" based on the player's operation of the handle 18. On the other hand, in the above-mentioned "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening/closing shutter 32b is 0.4 seconds. That is, in the case of "short opening", the opening time of the opening/closing shutter 32b is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, with just one "short release", even one game ball may not win. Therefore, the opening/closing shutter 32b is almost never closed based on the condition related to the number of winnings (3 winnings) among the above two closing conditions corresponding to "short opening", and the opening/closing shutter 32b is once opened. will normally be closed based on the elapse of a specified time (0.4 seconds). This prevents the execution period from changing each time during the "short release" execution period.

In the jackpot states of "4R definite strange jackpot A" and "4R sure strange jackpot B", a series of actions are performed in which "long opening" is treated as one special prize state (one round) and this is repeated four times (four rounds). .

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot A", the "long opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round), and after repeating this 8 times (8 rounds), the "short opening" is further given as one special prize state (1 round). As a state (one round), a series of operations are performed in which this is repeated eight times (eight rounds).

In the jackpot state of "16R normal jackpot B", the "long opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round), and after repeating this 4 times (4 rounds), the "short opening" is given as one special prize state (1 round). As a state (one round), a series of operations are performed in which this is repeated 12 times (12 rounds).

In the jackpot states of "4R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot B", a series of actions are performed in which "long opening" is treated as one special prize state (one round) and this is repeated four times (four rounds). .

In the jackpot state of "JUB jackpot", "short opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round), and after repeating this 5 times, "long opening" is set as one special prize state (1 round). , a series of operations are performed in which this is repeated 15 times. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which "short opening" is performed five times in the first round, and "long opening" is performed in each of the second to 16th rounds.

In addition, when the above-mentioned various "probability variable jackpots" and "JUB jackpots" occur, a "high probability mode (high probability state)" is provided as a lottery mode after the jackpot state ends. On the other hand, when various "normal jackpots" occur, a "low probability mode (low probability state)" is given after the jackpot state ends.

"High probability mode" refers to a state in which the jackpot probability is increased compared to the "low probability mode" that is normally set. The "high probability mode" set after the end of the jackpot continues until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, after the above-mentioned various jackpots are completed, the winning support mode related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y is maintained while the special display devices 43L and 43R display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. As such, a "high support mode (high ball entry state)" is given as an advantageous state.

"High support mode" is compared to "low support mode (low ball entry state)" which is a disadvantageous state set in normal times. This refers to a state in which the proportion of states is increased.

For example, the "high support mode" includes (1) a state in which the fluctuating display time on the normal symbol display device 41 described below is shorter than that in the "low support mode", (2) a state in which the movable blade 37Ya of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is (3) A state in which the opening time (regulated time) is longer than in the "low support mode"; (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be won per opening of the movable blade 37Ya is greater than in the "low support mode"; , (4) If a winning result is obtained by the opening/closing lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y caused by the game ball passing through the through gate 34, the number of times the opening/closing process of the movable blade 37Ya is executed per time is set to "low support mode". (5) A state in which the winning probability in the open lottery of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is higher than the winning probability in the "low support mode." The high support mode in this embodiment employs the configurations (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the "high support mode." This makes it easier for game balls to frequently win into the lower starting prize opening 33YB, increasing the number of times jackpot lottery is executed, and making it possible to hold balls well.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the "high support mode" is assigned, by changing the fluctuation pattern table to a table for the "high support mode" as described later, the first and second special display devices 43L , 43R (effect display device 42) is configured so that the variable display time is shorter than that in the "low support mode".

In this embodiment, after the end of "16R probability variable jackpot A" and "4R probability variable jackpot A", a "high support mode" is provided until the next jackpot state occurs. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "until next time/high support mode."

After the completion of "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", a variable display of "20 times", "30 times", "40 times" or "50 times" is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. ``High Support Mode'' will be granted during the period. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", respectively.

After the completion of "16R normal jackpot A" and "4R normal jackpot A", "high support mode" is given while "30 times" variable display is performed on special display devices 43L and 43R. The "high support mode" is hereinafter referred to as "30 times/high support mode S."

After the end of "16R normal jackpot B" and "4R normal jackpot B", "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" "Support mode" will be added.

In addition, as mentioned above, the granting period of the "high support mode" has an upper limit set on the number of times (in this embodiment, "20 times", "30 times", "40 times", "50 times"). A jackpot game related to a jackpot state with support mode corresponds to a predetermined special game. Then, after the end of the jackpot game, the provision period of the "high support mode" (number of executions of variable display) reaching a predetermined upper limit corresponds to the establishment of a predetermined condition in this embodiment. In other words, after the end of the jackpot state with high support mode, the high support mode will be provided until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times.

After the “JUB Jackpot” ends, “Until next time/High support mode” will be given.

In this embodiment, various gaming states occur by combining the various modes described above.

For example, if a state is given a "high probability mode" and a "high support mode", it becomes a so-called "probability variable state".

A state in which "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are added becomes a so-called "normal state."

When the "low probability mode" and "high support mode" are added, it becomes a so-called "time saving state".

When a state is provided with a "high probability mode" and a "low support mode", it becomes a so-called "potential state (potential probability variable state)". In other words, in the "potential state", the probability of winning a jackpot is simply increased, and on the surface it is no different from the "normal state", so the state with the "high probability mode" This makes it difficult for the player to recognize the situation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above-mentioned various "big wins", a "small win" is generated when a predetermined result is obtained in the win/fail lottery. In the small win state, a series of operations is performed in which "short opening" is treated as one special prize state (one round) and this is repeated five times (five rounds). However, the lottery mode and winning support mode that are awarded after the small winning state ends are the original modes before the small winning state occurred. For example, if the lottery mode before the small winning state is "high probability mode", the "high probability mode" is maintained even after the small winning state ends.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the prize is awarded when the game ball is won in the winning lottery in the case where the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA and when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. The distribution of jackpot types is different. If you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the upper starting winning slot 33YA, "16R definite strange jackpot A", "16R sure strange jackpot B", "4R sure strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot B" ”, “16R regular jackpot A”, “16R regular jackpot B”, and “4R regular jackpot B”, and if you win the lottery triggered by the winning of a game ball in the lower starting winning slot 33YB. The winnings will be divided into one of the following: "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A," "4R Regular Jackpot A," and "JUB Jackpot." Furthermore, the "small win" is configured to occur only when a winning lottery is triggered by a game ball landing in the lower starting prize opening 33YB.

The first and second special display devices 43L and 43R each include two segment display devices and are installed at the bottom of the game board 30. Each segment display device is provided with eight display segments. Each display segment has an individual light source consisting of an LED, and by controlling these individual light sources on and off, it is possible to light up only one arbitrary display segment, and also to light up any combination of display segments. The display segment can be lit. As a result, each segment display device individually displays a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers) serving as a pattern.

Then, a variable display is performed on the first special display device 43L when a game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and a variable display is performed on the second special display device 43R when a game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. The configuration is such that a variable display is performed at . Note that the display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, after the variable display is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, depending on the display mode when the variable display stops, whether or not you have won the jackpot lottery, etc. is definitively displayed. Ru. For example, when a game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, a fluctuating display is made at high speed on the corresponding first special display device 43L, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the display modes is stopped (for example, stopped for a few seconds) )do. If the player wins the jackpot lottery, numerical values and the like (see FIG. 264) corresponding to various jackpots are displayed when the fluctuations are stopped, and a jackpot state occurs.

As shown in FIG. 264, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", "9-" will be stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and "50 times/high support mode" will be displayed. If you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "16R Guaranteed Variable Jacket B", "84" is stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. In addition, if you win the "JUB jackpot", "1.-" will be stopped and displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and if you win the "small win", the first or second special display will stop displaying. "1-" is stopped and displayed on the second special display devices 43L and 43R. Here, in order to enhance the production effect of the "JUB jackpot", the stopping modes of both "1.-" and "1-" for the "JUB jackpot" and the stopping mode "1.-" for the "JUB jackpot" are important. It is preferable that the configuration is confusing.

Of course, the manner in which the special display devices 43L and 43R stop corresponding to each type of win is not limited to the above-mentioned manner. For example, there may be not one but a plurality of stopping modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type. For example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A", one of "91", "92", "93", etc. is selected and stopped on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R. It is also possible to have a configuration in which

In addition, even if there are multiple stop modes of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R indicating one winning type, there are multiple stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and "small win". It is preferable that the plurality of stopping modes have a confusing configuration. For example, any one of "-1.", "-2", "-3.", "-4", etc. is displayed as a stop mode related to "JUB jackpot", and "small jackpot" is displayed. As a plurality of stop modes, any one of "-1", "-2.", "-3", "-4.", . . . may be stopped and displayed. In such a configuration, a pair of specific symbols (here, "1", "2", "3", etc.) with a predetermined display segment (here, ".") lit and a specific symbol that is not lit. One of them is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "JUB jackpot" and the other is included in a plurality of stop modes related to "small win", and these are alternately inserted.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in any or all display segments can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, if a new game ball enters the starting winning hole 33YA, 33YB during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the corresponding variable display is performed at that time. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display. In other words, the right to execute the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times this variable display is suspended is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper starting winning slot 33YA and the gaming balls that have entered the lower starting winning slot 33YB. Correspondingly, the right to perform up to four variable displays (total of eight variable displays) is reserved. Further, the number of times of holding is displayed by lighting on the first holding lamp 46a and the second holding lamp 46b. Incidentally, when a new game ball enters the starting prize opening 33YA, 33YB during the jackpot state, the right to execute the corresponding variable display is also reserved.

Basically, the fluctuating display that is triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA, and is digested in the order in which it is won, and is displayed in the lower starting winning hole. The variable display triggered by winning in 33YB is stored in the order in which the corresponding game ball wins in the lower starting winning hole 33YB, and is digested in the order in which the winnings are won. However, if both the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper start winning hole 33YA and the variable display triggered by a win in the lower start winning hole 33YB are suspended (the first holding lamp 46a and the second If one or more of the holding lamps 46b are lit, the variable display triggered by a win in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is preferentially digested. That is, the configuration is such that the variable display triggered by a winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is not performed unless all of the variable displaying triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is digested. For example, in a state where one first holding lamp 46a is lit, if a game ball is won in the lower start winning hole 33YB and one second holding lamp 46b is lit, a winning into the upper starting winning hole 33YA is disabled. The fluctuating display triggered by the winning will be postponed, and the fluctuating display triggered by the winning to the lower starting prize opening 33YB will be performed first. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the upper starting winning hole 33YA is also referred to as the "first fluctuating display", and the fluctuating display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning opening 33YB is referred to as the "second fluctuating display". ” is also called.

Further, the through gate 34 is configured to allow game balls flowing down the game area to pass through one ball at a time. Although details will be described later, the through gate 34 is equipped with a through gate switch 225 that can detect a game ball passing through the through gate 34, and when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, the through gate switch 225 opens or closes. An opening lottery is held to determine whether or not to open the accessory 37Y (lower starting prize opening 33YB), and a variable display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41. If the player wins in the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y remains open for a specified time.

The variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 that displays a variable display when passing through the through gate 34, and an effect display device 42 that displays a variable display in accordance with the variable display by the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. and is provided.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 includes a variation specification indicating which of the upper start winning hole 33YA and the lower start winning hole 33YB the variable display performed on the performance display device 42 corresponds to. A lamp 40 is provided.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and each time a game ball passes through the through gate 34, the normal symbol changes from "○" to "x" to The display changes at high speed in the order of "○" →... Then, when the fluctuating display stops for several seconds at the "○" symbol (winning symbol), the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB remains open for a predetermined period of time. The display contents of this normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by a main control device 261, which will be described later.

In addition, if a new game ball passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount will be performed after the variable display that is being performed at that point ends. It becomes. In other words, the variable display is put on standby (on hold). The maximum number of times this variable display is held is determined for each model of pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, it is held up to four times, and the number of times that the change is held is displayed by lighting on the hold lamp 44. There is. Of course, the upper limit of the number of reservations is not limited to four, and other different configurations may be adopted.

The effect display device 42 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device, and the display contents are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the effect display device 42, based on the command from the main control device 261, the sub control device 262 performs auxiliary control so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Display contents are determined and displayed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

Although details will be described later, the display unit 42a of the effect display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas, upper, middle, and lower, as shown in FIG. 277, and a predetermined number is displayed in each symbol display area. The attached multiple types of decorative patterns are displayed in sequence (variably displayed), and then the decorative patterns are stopped in order for each pattern display area (for example, in the order of upper pattern display area → lower pattern display area → middle design display area). It is now displayed. For example, when the main control device 261 determines the above-mentioned various "probable and variable jackpots" or various "regular jackpots", a display corresponding to the jackpot is made on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and an effect display device At step 42, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination that corresponds to a jackpot (for example, the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the upper symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the lower symbol display area are the same), and a jackpot state is started. Ru. In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 does not correspond to a jackpot, as will be described later.

Further, when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to a jackpot, as a preliminary step, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in, for example, the upper symbol display area and the lower symbol display area. In this way, the state in which the same decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the upper pattern display area and the lower pattern display area, and is still being displayed in a variable manner in the middle pattern display area is the ready-to-reach state.

In addition, even if a reach state occurs, if a jackpot state does not occur, a decorative pattern different from the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the upper and lower symbol display areas will be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area. . In addition, in the case of various "probable jackpots" or various "regular jackpots", the decorative pattern of the double number (the same type of decorative pattern) is stopped and displayed on the effect display device 42 as described above. In this embodiment, depending on the type of the decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed, it is impossible to determine the gaming state (such as whether or not it is a "high probability mode") that will be awarded after the end of the jackpot.

In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small win", a predetermined specific combination of numbers (hereinafter referred to as a chance symbol) is stopped and displayed instead of a double. For example, in the present embodiment, decorative symbols "3", "4", and "1" are displayed in a stopped state in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas. As a result, when the chance symbols are stopped and displayed, the player cannot distinguish between "JUB jackpot" which is more advantageous to the player and "small win" which is less advantageous to the player. ” can be expected to occur, so it is possible to suppress a decline in player interest.

Of course, the specific combinations of numbers (combinations of decorative symbols) that are stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are different depending on whether it is a "JUB jackpot" or a "small win." You can also use it as In addition, in the case of a "JUB jackpot" or "small hit", instead of a predetermined specific combination of numbers (combination of decorative patterns), it is a combination of random misses that appears on the surface as in the case of a miss. The display may be stopped at the same time.

In addition, the performance display device 42 is configured to display the number of pending changes in the special display devices 43L, 43R corresponding to the above-mentioned pending lamps 46a, 46b (see FIG. 277, etc.).

In this embodiment, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the special display devices 43L, 43R and the holding lamps 46a, 46b are covered by the front frame set 14, making them invisible to the player. . Therefore, the player will be able to grasp the game status, lottery results, etc. exclusively from the display contents of the performance display device 42 (symbol display, pending display, etc.).

Of course, the configurations of the special display devices 43L, 43R and the hold lamps 46L, 46R are not limited to such configurations, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, the special display devices 43L, 43R, etc. may be configured to be visible. However, as mentioned above, the special display devices 43L and 43R are provided in an inconspicuous place such as the lower corner of the gaming area where the player cannot easily see them, and the size of the display section is small, and the characters for identification are displayed in a stopped state. The time is also relatively short. Therefore, unless one takes his eyes off the special display devices 43L and 43R and carefully observes them, it is virtually impossible to grasp the game state to be granted.

The fluctuation specific lamp 40 is equipped with an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red, and when a fluctuation display is performed on the effect display device 42 triggered by a winning in the upper starting prize opening 33YA. It emits blue light, and it emits red light when a variable display triggered by a winning in the lower start prize opening 33YB is performed.

Next, the configuration of the variable display unit 35 will be explained in detail. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 233, the center frame 47 is fixed to the front side of the game board 30, and the frame cover 213 is fixed to the back side of the game board 30, so that the variable display unit 35 is integrated. The configuration is as follows.

A rectangular opening 213a (see FIG. 235) is formed in the center of the frame cover 213, and an effect display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is detachably attached to the back side of the opening 213a.

The display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is a known display panel in which a display panel made of a liquid crystal panel or the like is disposed on the front side of a backlight serving as a light emitting means. The liquid crystal display section 42a is composed of a large number of pixels arranged in a matrix. Then, each pixel of the liquid crystal display section 42a is driven based on a video signal outputted as specific identification information by a specific information output function section of a display control device 45, which is a transmitting device, which will be described later. A predetermined image is displayed on a certain liquid crystal display section 42a.

The video signal includes, for example, a synchronization signal (synchronization information), a color signal (color information), a luminance signal (luminance information), and the like. The video signal may be outputted as a component video signal obtained by separating these signals, or may be outputted as a composite video signal obtained by superimposing these signals onto one signal. The synchronization signal is generated by a synchronization signal generation circuit (oscillation circuit) provided inside the VDP 526, which will be described later. VDP 526 may generate a synchronization signal based on a clock signal from a clock generation circuit external to VDP 526. Alternatively, the synchronization signal itself may be generated outside the VDP 526 and input to the VDP 526. The synchronization signal includes a frame synchronization signal (a signal indicating the timing of the start or end of drawing an image for one frame), a vertical synchronization signal (a signal indicating the timing in the vertical direction when drawing an image for one frame), There are horizontal synchronization signals (signals indicating the timing in the horizontal direction when drawing an image for one frame), and at least one of the synchronization signals is used as necessary.

The effect display device 42 includes a synchronization circuit that inputs an RGB signal as a video signal and a synchronization signal, an internal memory that stores pixel information of each pixel, and reads pixel information from the internal memory and drives the liquid crystal display section 42a. It includes a liquid crystal drive circuit (LCD driver) that outputs a signal.

The synchronization circuit acquires pixel information for each pixel based on the input RGB signals, and determines the corresponding address of the internal memory based on the synchronization signal. The internal memory includes a storage area corresponding to a matrix-like pixel arrangement, and pixel information is written for each corresponding address determined by the synchronization circuit.

The liquid crystal drive circuit identifies each pixel of the liquid crystal display section 42a based on horizontal and vertical coordinates, and generates a drive signal based on pixel information read from the corresponding address in the internal memory. Then, by lighting up pixels at predetermined brightness for each RGB color in accordance with the pixel information, a dot matrix color image is displayed on the entire liquid crystal display section 42a.

Note that the effect display device 42 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

The center frame 47 has a frame shape with a substantially circular opening 751 formed in the center thereof, and the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 can be viewed through the opening 751.

Note that the center frame 47 is not composed of a single member, but includes various decorative members plated on the base member, lens members made of transparent resin that transmit light such as LEDs, etc. is assembled.

A stage portion 770 is provided on the upper surface of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47 along the left-right direction. The stage portion 770 has gentle undulations formed along the left-right direction.

A drop hole 774 is formed in the center of the rear wall portion 772 of the stage portion 770, which opens toward the front and into which a game ball can fall. Furthermore, a communication path 775 communicating with the drop hole 774 is provided below (inside) the central portion of the stage portion 770 . The other side of the communication path 775 is opened at the front side of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47, and serves as a discharge port 776 for discharging the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 onto the game board 30 surface. In addition, in the state where the center frame 47 is arranged on the game board 30, as shown in FIG. 233, the discharge port 776 is located above the upper starting winning port 33YA.

A guide groove (not shown) is formed in the center of the stage section 770 at a position in front of the drop hole 774 and slopes gently downward toward the back. This allows the game ball to fall from the stage section 770 to the drop hole 774.

A ball passage (warp passage) 764 through which game balls pass is formed inside the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47. The entrance portion 764a of the ball passage 764 opens at approximately the center in the vertical direction of the left side portion 47c of the center frame 47, while the exit portion 764b opens toward the upper surface (stage portion 770) of the lower side portion 47b of the center frame 47. It's open. This ball passage 764 allows the game ball flowing down on the surface of the game board 30 to be guided onto the stage section 770 within the center frame 47.

After the game ball guided onto the stage section 770 rolls on the stage section 770, it falls from the front onto the game board 30 surface or falls into the above-mentioned drop hole 774. Among these, the game balls that have fallen into the drop hole 774 are guided onto the game board 30 surface via the communication path 775. The game ball discharged from the discharge port 776 enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA with a relatively high probability.

Next, the back configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 234, 235, and the like. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, with some of them stacked one on top of the other, and a game ball supply device (dispensing mechanism) that supplies game balls. A protective cover made of resin is attached. The dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin part is generally sometimes referred to as a back pack, so this unit will be referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the back structure of the game board 30 will be explained with reference to FIG. 235 and the like. As described above, on the back side of the variable display unit 35 (see FIG. 233) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, there is a frame cover 213 made of resin that covers the center frame 47 from behind. It is provided so as to protrude from the rear. Furthermore, on the back side of the frame cover 213, an effect display device 42 which is a liquid crystal display device, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 facing forward from the opening of the frame cover 213 are removably mounted in a stacked state. installed.

The production display device 42 is housed in a housing box (not shown) in which an opening is formed to expose the display section (liquid crystal screen) 42a of the production display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10. is fixed on the back side of the The display control device 45 is housed in a board box 45a and fixed to the back side of the effect display device 42 (accommodation box). The sub-control device 262 is housed in a board box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (board box 45a). The board boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible. Note that an LED control board and the like that drive the LEDs and the like built into the center frame 47 are disposed inside the frame cover 213.

A back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 below the frame cover 213 so as to cover the general prize opening 31, the variable prize winning device 32, the starting prize openings 33YA, 33YB, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is equipped with a ball collection mechanism (not shown) for collecting game balls that have moved from the front side to the back side of the game board 30 through different routes such as the above-mentioned various winning openings and out openings 36. . The game balls collected by this ball collection mechanism are guided to a discharge passage section 217, which will be described later, and are discharged to the outside of the Pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the general winning switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board relay board relays between the general winning switch 221 and the like and the main control device 261, and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the starting winning switches 224A and 224B that detect winnings to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB are directly connected to the main control device 261 via a connector cable without going through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various winning detection switches are taken into the main control device 261. Then, the main control device 261 transmits a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning status each time to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls are sent to the payout control device 311. is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

Further, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261. More specifically, the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably supported on the back frame set 215, and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate boxes 263 connected by the sealing member cannot be opened unless a predetermined mark is left behind. Thereby, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 234, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352. In addition, the back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable on the left side (the right side in FIG. 234) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending along the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided at the upper left (upper right in FIG. 234) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is a relay board for externally outputting various information from the main control device 261 to the hall computer HC of the game hall (see FIG. 270, etc.), and is electrically connected to the main control device 261 and (See FIG. 236, etc.), and includes a plurality of output terminals (10 in this embodiment).

A predetermined communication cable (in this embodiment, a two-core cable consisting of two core wires) is connected to each output terminal. Each of the output terminals is constituted by a pair of upper and lower core wire insertion portions (symbols omitted), and each core wire insertion portion is configured such that one core wire can be inserted and held therein. In other words, the pair of upper and lower core wire insertion portions functions as one output terminal.

On the other hand, the other end of the communication cable is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via a relay device (not shown) or the like. Thereby, information (signal) output from a predetermined output terminal of the external terminal board 240 is input to the hall computer HC via the communication cable connected to the output terminal. Then, the hall computer HC grasps the various gaming states of the output source pachinko machine 10 based on the various information inputted in this way.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. A terminal for outputting signal 1) (hereinafter referred to as "first terminal 240a"), and a terminal for indicating that the current gaming state is either a jackpot state or a high support mode (high ball input state). A terminal (hereinafter referred to as "second terminal 240b") for outputting information (jackpot signal 2) is provided.

In addition to this, the external terminal board 240 of this embodiment includes a variable display and a fixed/stop display on the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R, although no reference numerals are given for the sake of simplicity. A terminal (third terminal) for outputting information (signal) indicating that the current gaming state is in high probability mode (fourth terminal), Terminal (fifth terminal) for outputting information (signal) indicating that a game ball has entered the upper starting prize opening 33YA, information (signal) indicating that a gaming ball has entered the lower starting winning opening 33YB (sixth terminal), a terminal (seventh terminal) for outputting information (signal) indicating that the inner frame 12 is open, and a terminal (seventh terminal) for outputting information (signal) indicating that the front frame set 14 is open. Terminal (8th terminal) for outputting information (signal) indicating that various errors (winning error, no tank ball error, payout error, etc.) have been detected (9th terminal), and a terminal (10th terminal) for outputting information (signal) indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out from the payout control device 311.

Note that the signal outputted by the main controller 261 to the external terminal board 240 is serial data having a plurality of bits of information. This serial data is converted into parallel data by an S/P conversion circuit (serial/parallel conversion circuit), not shown, and is input to the external terminal board 240. For example, the first bit of this serial data corresponds to "jackpot signal 1" (if the first bit is "1", jackpot signal 1 will be output, and if it is "0", jackpot signal 1 will not be output). ), the second bit corresponds to "jackpot signal 2" (if the first bit is "1", jackpot signal 2 is output; if it is "0", jackpot signal 2 is not output). It is data. Therefore, when such serial data is converted to parallel data and input to the external terminal board 240, the signal transmission elements such as photorelays provided corresponding to each output terminal respond to the respective input signals. Switch between conduction and non-conduction. As a result, a high level signal is output from the output terminal where the photorelay has become conductive.

However, the method of outputting information from each output terminal is not limited to the above configuration, and other different configurations may be adopted. For example, in this embodiment, since a two-core cable is connected as a communication cable to each output terminal, a configuration may be adopted in which various types of information are individually output as serial data from each output terminal. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which output terminals and communication cables for parallel communication are employed, and various information is output as parallel data from each output terminal.

Furthermore, it is not necessary that all the output terminals of the external terminal board 240 be connected to the hall computer HC, and which output terminal to acquire information from is determined at the discretion of the game hall manager or the like. In other words, the game hall manager and the like can use only the necessary information according to the management style of the game hall.

Furthermore, the type of information externally output from the external terminal board 240 and the number of output terminals for outputting information are not limited to the configuration illustrated above, and may vary depending on the model of the pachinko machine 10, etc. , it may be configured to be able to output information different from the information (signal) exemplified above.

For example, in this embodiment, an output terminal for outputting information regarding a "small win" is not provided, and the configuration is such that information on the occurrence of a "small win" is not output. In this embodiment, "small wins" tend to occur relatively frequently during the "high support mode", so if the occurrence information is always output every time a "small win" occurs, the output signal will be This may lead to a significant increase in The present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which information on the occurrence of a "small win" is output.

The back pack 351 is integrally molded from, for example, ABS resin, and includes a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes toward the rear of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed, and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover part 354 is configured to cover the upper and right parts (the left part in FIG. 234) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, when the back pack unit 203 is in the closed state, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. That will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354. That is, a tank 355 that opens upward is provided above the protective cover part 354, and this tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 is connected, which has two rows of ball passages through which game balls flow down sideways, for example, and which slopes gently toward the downstream side. A case rail 357 is connected to the case rail 357 that allows the water to flow downward vertically. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 357, and pays out the required number of game balls as appropriate using a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls put out by the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

Further, the payout mechanism section 352 is provided with a payout relay board 381 that relays a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358, and a power switch board 382 that takes in main power from the outside. There is. The power switch board 382 is supplied with, for example, AC 24V main power via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by switching the power switch 382a.

A lower frame set 251 is provided below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), which is pivotally supported on the left side (right side in FIG. 234) of the inner frame 12 and can be opened rearward. As shown in FIG. 235, a discharge passage section 217 is formed in the lower frame set 251, into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collection mechanism flow. A discharge chute (not shown) is formed to discharge the pachinko machine 10 to the outside. The game ball rotates and flows down while coming into contact with nails 49, windmills 57, etc. in the game area and being influenced by it. The game balls that have entered each winning hole such as the general winning hole 31 are collected via the ball collection mechanism of the back frame set 215, and are further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage section 217. Note that the out port 36 similarly communicates with the discharge passage section 217, and game balls that have not won in any of the winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the bottom frame set 251 are formed integrally. It may also be a thing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 234, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311 as a payout control means, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are stacked in the front and back. It is removably attached.

The launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251. Although the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 will be described as independent control devices for convenience, they are actually composed of one board (printed board).

Moreover, the payout control device 311 is accommodated in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313). Note that the board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member, similar to the board box 263 in which the main control device 261 described above is housed, so that traces of the board box 311a being opened remain. It has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (launch control device 312 and power supply device 313).

Note that each of the board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 that projects outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor section, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 that protrudes outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, which allows it to maintain the state at the time of power outage even in the event of a power outage, and to return to the state at the time of power outage when recovering from the power outage (power restoration). can. Therefore, if you turn off the power in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power cut off will be retained in memory, so if you want to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, hold down the RAM erase switch 323 and turn on the power. Insert.

Further, as shown in FIG. 235, a locking device 600 is provided on the back side of the right side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is equipped with a cylinder lock 600a (see FIG. 230, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and is locked by inserting a key into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 600a and rotating it in one direction. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame component 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with an extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 234). reference). This makes it difficult to enter a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 using the wire or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve defense performance. Further, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 234) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is in the closed state, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 233, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right side of the front side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the firing device 60). As shown in FIG. 23, an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 234). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 are each equipped with a detection section that is retractable from the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection section faces forward. The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection part faces rearward. When the detection section protrudes from the switch body, an on signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detection section is pressed toward the switch body and recessed into the switch body, an off signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame open detection switch 91 is closed, the detection part is pressed by the back side of the front frame set 14 and turns off, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection part returns to the protruding state. Turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is pressed by a pressing section 86 formed integrally with the receiving section 85 of the outer frame 11 to turn off, and when the inner frame 12 is opened, the detection section is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and turns on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. FIG. 236 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The main control device 261 (main board) is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data etc. when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. It also has various built-in circuits such as interrupt circuits, timer circuits, and data transmission/reception circuits. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area where the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. ) and a backup area 503a.

Furthermore, the RAM 503 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and is stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 503a. All data stored in the database is now backed up.

The backup area 503a is used when the power is cut off (including when a power outage occurs) in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut off when the power is turned on again when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This is an area that stores the stack pointer (similar), the values of each register, I/O, etc. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored by the main process when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on after a power outage is resolved; the same applies hereinafter). It is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 output from a power outage monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. Upon occurrence, power outage processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas, as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 503a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus, a data bus, and the like. The input/output port 505 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 543, payout control device 311, sub-control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L, 43R, normal symbol display device 41, etc., which will be described later. With this configuration, the above-described special display devices 43L, 43R and normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main controller 261. On the other hand, the effect display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262.

In addition, various relay boards and the like are omitted for convenience, but the input/output port 505 includes various detection switches such as a general winning switch 221, a count switch 223, starting winning unit switches 224A, 224B, and a through gate switch 225. , various electrical components such as the external terminal board 240 and various boards are connected directly or indirectly via a predetermined relay board. That is, the main control device 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal sections constitute the input/output port 505.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) includes a CPU 551 that is an arithmetic unit, a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 551, and a ROM 552 that stores various control programs and fixed value data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing data, an input/output port 554, and a bus line 555, as well as various other circuits (not shown) such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

The CPU 551, ROM 552, and RAM 553 are connected to the input/output port 554 via a bus line 555, and the display control device 45 is also connected thereto. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to a speaker SP, a production button 125, various illumination parts, and lamps 102, 104. In other words, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, and the input/output port 554 is configured by these terminal sections. Become.

The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on a command (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the effect display device 42 to display the display control. As described above, in this embodiment, the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main controller 261 display whether or not there is a jackpot, etc. The effect display device 42 controlled by the player performs a display that matches the display of the special display devices 43L and 43R.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 that stores control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 513 used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511 are stored, various flags and counters, It includes a work area (work area) in which I/O values and the like are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with backup voltage from the power supply device 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all of the data stored in the stack area, work area, and backup area 513a data is now backed up. Note that it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas as long as the data stored in at least the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which data stored in the stack area and backup area 513a is backed up, but data stored in the work area is not backed up.

The backup area 513a stores the stack pointer at power-off, each register, This is an area for storing I/O values, etc. Writing to this backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed during the main process when the power is turned on. Note that, similar to the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SK1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

In the work area, a payout permission flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls, a command reception flag is set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a command reception flag is set to allow the payout control device 311 to pay out prize balls. A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from the computer are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag that sets permission to pay out the prize ball, and is turned on when a specific command to permit the payout of the prize ball is transmitted from the main control device 261 and the specific command is received, and is set to the initial setting. It is turned off when processing or when returning to the state before the power was shut off. In this embodiment, the specific commands include a payout initialization command that instructs the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a command that instructs the main control device 261 to restore power. There are three payout return commands that are sent in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag that confirms whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. It is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, it is used for initial setting processing or power cutoff. It is turned off when the previous return is made, and it is turned off when the received command is judged in the command judgment process.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, and the like are connected to the input/output port 515, respectively. In other words, the payout control device 311 is provided with a plurality of terminal sections (board side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors, but these terminal sections etc. constitute the input/output port 515. Become.

The card unit connection board 314 connects the ball rental operation section (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the card unit (ball rental unit) that is placed on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. The card unit is electrically connected to each of the card units, and receives commands for ball lending operations from players and outputs them to the card unit. Note that in a cash machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted.

The firing control device 312 allows or prohibits the firing device 60 from firing game balls, and the firing device 60 is permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, the sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and the firing stop switch that stops firing is operated. On the condition that this is not the case, the firing device 60 is driven and the game ball is fired with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. Thereby, the player can change the movement amount and operation mode of the game ball guided to the game area.

The display control device 45 executes variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 42 in accordance with instructions from the sub-control device 262. This display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM (VRAM) 524, a character ROM 525, a VDP (video display processor) 526, an input port 527, and an output port 529. , bus lines 530 and 531. An input/output port 554 of the sub-control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, and a VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via a bus line 530. Further, an output port 529 as an output terminal is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the effect display device 42 is connected to the output port 529 via a predetermined signal line.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 45, and reads and executes control programs, etc., and also reads and executes control programs and the like, and receives data from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527. Performs command analysis, etc.

Further, the CPU 521 instructs the VDP 526 to perform a drawing process to generate a video to be displayed on the effect display device 42, based on a command received from the sub-control device 262.

The program ROM 522 stores in advance various control data including control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data.

The work RAM 523 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the program ROM 522, work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs.

Control data is transferred from the program ROM 522 to the work RAM 523 based on a data transfer instruction from the CPU 521 to the program ROM 522 . Then, the CPU 521 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 523 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

The video RAM 524 is a storage means for temporarily storing various data to be output to the effect display device 42, and includes two frame buffers (a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer) in which drawing data is created by the VDP 526. frame buffer).

The two frame buffers are each provided to be capable of storing one frame's worth of drawing data (one screen's worth of images). Specifically, each frame buffer includes a large number of unit areas each corresponding to a pixel (dot) of the liquid crystal display section 42a at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area is configured to be able to store data for specifying which color to display. In this embodiment, a full color system is adopted, and each pixel can be set in 256 steps for each color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue). Correspondingly, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is allocated to each color of RGB. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

Since two frame buffers are provided in the video RAM 524, in a situation where drawing data created in one frame buffer is being output to the effect display device 42, the drawing data created in one frame buffer is output next to the other frame buffer. You can create drawing data. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the video RAM 524.

Note that the two frame buffers are alternately switched between a drawing frame buffer and a display frame buffer each time the drawing process starts. Specifically, each time a drawing process is started, one of two frame buffers is designated as a display frame buffer (for example, the first frame buffer). By specifying the display frame buffer, a drawing frame buffer (for example, the second frame buffer) is also specified. In other words, the two frame buffers are alternately specified in the following order: drawing frame buffer→display frame buffer→drawing frame buffer→...

The character ROM 525 stores in advance various image data including sprite data such as patterns and characters to be displayed on the effect display device 42, background image data, and the like. Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the external shape and pattern of a design or character, and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color of each pixel of the bitmap image. Contains. Further, the background image data is stored and held as JPEG format data that is compressed still image data.

The VDP 526 is a type of drawing circuit that operates the liquid crystal drive circuit (LCD driver) that drives and controls the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42, and performs image generation etc. based on drawing instructions from the CPU 521. Since the VDP 526 is implemented as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip," and its actual form is a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing.

The VDP 526 stores the drawing instruction list as the drawing instruction information transmitted from the CPU 521 in its own register. By storing the drawing instruction list in the register of the VDP 526, the VDP 526 starts a program according to the drawing instruction list and executes a predetermined process. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which all the control programs for the operation of the control section of the VDP 526 are provided by the drawing instruction list, and the VDP 526 has a built-in memory in which the control program is stored in advance, and the control program and the contents of the drawing instruction list are provided in the VDP 526. The configuration may be such that the VDP 526 executes predetermined processing depending on the above.

Under the above configuration, when the VDP 526 performs drawing processing, it first reads image data stored in the character ROM 525 based on the drawing instruction list. Subsequently, the VDP 526 develops the read image data into a predetermined frame buffer of the video RAM 524, and creates drawing data for one frame. Here, one frame of drawing data is used to display an image at one update timing in a configuration where the image displayed on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is updated at a predetermined update timing. refers to the data necessary for In this embodiment, the creation of one frame's worth of drawing data is completed within a 20 msec period.

In the VDP 526, a video signal containing pixel information corresponding to each pixel of the liquid crystal display section 42a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer of the video RAM 524, and the video signal is output. It is output to the effect display device 42 via the port 529.

More specifically, the VDP 526 generates an RGB signal consisting of color information of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) indicating color data of each pixel of the liquid crystal display section 42a as a video signal from the created drawing data. Also, a synchronization signal for synchronizing the RGB signal and the liquid crystal display section 42a is output to the effect display device 42. That is, the output mode of the video signal is different from the output mode of the level signal, which is output at a constant output level, such as the jackpot signals 1 and 2, and is a predetermined pattern signal containing various information.

However, as mentioned above, since the double buffer method is adopted in this embodiment, the output of the video signal is performed by creating drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame later than the frame corresponding to the output. This will be done in parallel.

The VDP 526 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the specified frame buffer every time the output of one frame of drawing data is completed, and by switching by the selector circuit, drawing data is created in the video RAM 524. The drawing frame buffer that is used is regulated so that it does not become a display frame buffer that outputs drawing data.

When the VDP 526 outputs a video signal related to one frame's worth of drawing data (one screen's worth of images) to the effect display device 42, for example, first, , 1st column) to the pixel at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display section 42a (1st row, nth column), for each pixel lined up on the same horizontal line. The video signal is output sequentially, and when the video signal has been output to the pixel in the upper right corner (first row, nth column), the next pixel is output to the leftmost pixel in the second row (second The video signal is output sequentially from the pixel in the row (first row, first column) to each pixel on the same horizontal line. By sequentially outputting video signals to the pixels, an image can be displayed on the entire screen of the liquid crystal display section 42a.

Then, the VDP 526 outputs a V interrupt signal to the CPU 521 at the timing when the video signal is output to the last pixel in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display section 42a, and the update of one frame of drawing data is completed. The CPU 521 is made to recognize what has been done. In this embodiment, the output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of drawing data for one frame. In this respect, the V interrupt processing can also be considered to be activated in synchronization with the reception of the V interrupt signal. That is, in this embodiment, output processing of a video signal related to one frame of drawing data is executed to the effect display device 42 every predetermined period (20 msec) when the V interrupt signal is output. However, even if the V-interrupt signal is not received, if 20 msec has passed since the previous V-interrupt process was activated, a new V-interrupt process may be activated.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power cutoff due to a power failure, etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It is equipped with

The power supply section 541 supplies necessary operating power to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311, etc. through a power path (not shown). In summary, the power supply section 541 takes in AC 24 volt power supplied from the outside and generates +12 V power for driving various switches and motors, +5 V power for logic, backup power for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, payout control device 311, and the like. Note that operating power (+12V power, +5V power, etc.) is supplied to the firing control device 312 via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, etc. via the control device to which they are connected.

The power outage monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power outage signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the dispensing control device 311 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power outage (power cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. A power outage signal SK1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By outputting this power outage signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the dispensing control device 311 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute a power outage process (NMI interrupt process).

Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the power outage process. Configured to maintain the value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power outage process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erase switch 323 being pressed (including turning on the power after a power outage is resolved), the data in each of the RAMs 503 and 513 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. Ru.

Now, in a game hall, as shown in FIG. 270, a large number of pachinko machines 10 are installed in island equipment (numerals omitted), and a hall computer HC is provided as a management means for managing these pachinko machines 10. There is.

Although not shown, the hall computer HC includes an MPU which is an arithmetic unit, a ROM which stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and a workpiece which temporarily stores various data. It is equipped with a RAM used as a memory, a hard disk that is a rewritable non-volatile memory, etc., and is electrically connected to each pachinko machine 10 via a predetermined communication cable (not shown).

The hall computer HC stores and aggregates various information regarding the game acquired through each output terminal (terminals 240a, 240b, etc.) of the pachinko machine 10, and manages the game status, operating status, etc. of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 270, game data display devices HD are installed in the island equipment of the game hall in one-to-one correspondence with each pachinko machine 10. Each game data display device HD is installed above the corresponding pachinko machine 10, and is electrically connected to the hall computer HC via predetermined electrical wiring (not shown).

Part or all of the various information output from the corresponding pachinko machine 10 is input to each game data display device HD indirectly via the hall computer HC or as various commands from the hall computer HC. Ru. Based on this, various game data (game information) regarding the pachinko machine 10 corresponding to itself is displayed on the game data display device HD.

However, in this embodiment, information output from the hall computer HC to the pachinko machine 10, information output from the game data display device HD to the pachinko machine 10, and information output from the game data display device HD to the hall computer HC. No information is output.

As shown in FIG. 271, the game data display device HD includes a liquid crystal display section H50 that can display various game data, and a control section H51 that controls the liquid crystal display section H50. FIG. 271 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of one pachinko machine 10 and the corresponding game data display device HD configured via the hall computer HC.

Note that the game data display device HD is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix.

Furthermore, the game data display device HD includes a call button H53 that is operated by the player to call an attendant at the game hall, and display contents (display items) on the liquid crystal display section H50 as operation means that can be operated by the player. A switching button H54 that is operated when switching is provided.

Each of the buttons H53 and H54 is electrically connected to the control section H51, so that signals from each of the buttons H53 and H54 are input to the control section H51. When the control unit H51 detects that the call button H53 has been operated, the display content on the liquid crystal display unit H50 is changed to correspond to a call from an attendant.

Under the above configuration, the liquid crystal display section H50 of the game data display device HD displays the number of occurrences of the jackpot state, the number of times the symbol variation display is executed (the number of starts), the number of winning prize balls, and the occurrence of the jackpot state while the high support mode is continuing. Various game data related to the corresponding pachinko machine 10, such as the number of consecutive games played, are displayed. Thereby, by visually checking the game data display device HD, the player can grasp the game data regarding the corresponding pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, the player can change these display contents by operating the switching button H54.

Here, an example of the display mode of the game data display device HD will be explained with reference to FIGS. 272(a) to 272(c).

The gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 can be roughly divided into a first gaming state (a normal state with a low probability state and a low support mode), and a second gaming state (a jackpot state and a high support mode) which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. mode, etc.).

Then, in accordance with these changes, in the game data display device HD, the display mode (display mode) of the liquid crystal display section H50 is switched. Note that switching of the display mode on the liquid crystal display section H50 is performed based on predetermined data input, commands, etc. from the hall computer HC triggered by predetermined information output from the corresponding pachinko machine 10.

For example, as shown in FIG. 272(a), the liquid crystal display section H50 in the normal display mode corresponding to the first gaming state displays, as information regarding the game, a graph showing changes in income and expenditure as the game progresses, and a graph showing the total amount for the day. The number of jackpot hits, the number of first hits, the number of starts, etc. are displayed. Note that the "first win" refers to a jackpot won in a low probability state and in a normal state of low support mode.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 272(b), the liquid crystal display section H50 in the active display mode corresponding to the second gaming state displays information regarding the game, including the number of continuous jackpots (number of consecutive games), number of starts, and acquired prizes. The number of pitches etc. will be displayed.

In the active display mode, the number of prize balls acquired is the number of prize balls that the player has acquired up to this point during a series of advantageous periods that continue without returning to the normal state after the first hit (including during the first winning game). is displayed.

In addition, in the corresponding pachinko machine 10, when the gaming state is in the expiration period of the remaining hold of the second variable display after the end of the high support mode, the display mode of the liquid crystal display section H50 becomes the effect display mode. As shown in FIG. 272(c), in addition to the number of continuous jackpots, the number of starts, and the number of winning prize balls, text information such as "Last-minute chance mode" is displayed on the liquid crystal display section H50 in the production display mode. The player is in a state where he or she can recognize that the remaining pending period of the variable display is in progress.

Of course, the display contents and display mode on the liquid crystal display section H50 of the game data display device HD are not limited to the above contents, and other different display contents and display modes may be used. In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the output mode of the output signal (jackpot signal 2) output from the second terminal 240b is set to differ depending on the value of the remaining pending number register FR (remaining pending number). Therefore, if the hall computer HC or game data display device HD has a specification that can recognize this difference, in the effect display mode, the remaining number of reservations on the second variable display after the end of the high support mode will be displayed. It may be configured to have different display modes or perform different effects depending on the situation.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be explained.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237, there is a jackpot random number counter CE1 used in a jackpot lottery (win/fail lottery) to determine whether or not a jackpot state occurs, and a type determining means used to determine the jackpot type (lottery). jackpot type determination counter CE2, and a reach selection counter used to determine whether or not to generate a reach state (lottery) when the production display device 42 is removed and varied, and to determine the type of reach to be generated (lottery). CE3, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CE1, the determination (lottery) of the variable display time of the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R (effect display device 42), and the effect. The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 used for determining the fluctuation pattern (performance pattern) on the display device 42 (lottery), etc., and the lottery on the normal symbol display device 41 (the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB are opened) The normal symbol random number counter CE4 used for the open lottery (open lottery of whether or not) is used.

The counters CE1, CE2, CE3, CINI, CS1, CS2, and CE4 are loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value each time they are updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, the counters return to 0, which is the lower limit value. Each counter is updated regularly, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 includes a special fluctuation holding area where the values of the jackpot random number counter CE1, jackpot type determination counter CE2, and reach selection counter CE3 are stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area where the value of the normal symbol random number counter CE4 is stored. It is provided. The normal fluctuation holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

In addition, the special fluctuation reservation area includes a first special fluctuation reservation area as a storage function section and a second special fluctuation reservation area as a storage function section, each of which has four reservation areas (first reservation area to fourth reservation area). It has one execution area.

In each holding area of the first special fluctuation holding area, each value of the jackpot random number counter CE1, the jackpot type determination counter CE2, and the reach selection counter CE3 is set according to the winning history of game balls to the upper starting winning opening 33YA. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the second special fluctuation holding area, the values of the jackpot random number counter CE1, the jackpot type determination counter CE2, and the reach selection counter CE3 are set according to the winning history of game balls in the lower starting winning opening 33YB. Stored sequentially.

In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CE4 is stored in chronological order according to the passing history of the game ball to the through gate 34.

By adopting such a configuration, the variable display on the special display devices 43L, 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 can be suspended up to four times, respectively, as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the jackpot random number counter CE1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value as the closing value (that is, 599), the lower limit value as the opening value is 0. It is configured to return to . Normally, when the jackpot random number counter CE1 completes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the jackpot random number counter CE1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter CE1 (value=0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter CE1 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 stored in the jackpot random number counter buffer is changed to the first special variation holding area or the second special variation holding area. Stored in the holding area.

There are two types of random number values that result in a jackpot: "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." In this embodiment, in the "low probability mode," the number of random number values that result in a jackpot is set as "low probability mode" and "high probability mode." 2, the value is "7, 307", and in the "high probability mode", the number of random number values that will be a jackpot is 20, and the values are "7 to 16, 307 to 316". That is, in the "low probability mode", there is a probability of 1/300 to win the lottery (a jackpot state occurs), and in the "high probability mode", the probability is 1/30 to win the lottery.

In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a validity determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 corresponds to a jackpot. In this embodiment, there are two validity determination tables, the first validity determination table storing "7, 307" and the second validity determination table storing "7 to 16, 307 to 316". be.

Further, in this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 is also used when determining a "small win". The number of random number values that result in a "small win" is 50, and the values are "101-125, 401-425". In other words, the probability of winning the lottery is 1/12 (a small winning state occurs).

The jackpot type determining counter CE2 is configured such that it is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 19, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (ie, 19). In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination counter CE2 determines the jackpot type, that is, "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16R probability variation jackpot B", "4R probability variation jackpot A", "4R probability variation jackpot B", "16R normal jackpot A". , "16R normal jackpot B", "4R normal jackpot A", "4R normal jackpot B", or "JUB jackpot" is determined.

The ROM 502 is provided with a jackpot type determination table that is referred to when determining which jackpot the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 corresponds to. Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type is different depending on whether the game ball wins into the upper start winning hole 33YA or when it wins into the lower start winning hole 33YB. That is, in this embodiment, there are two jackpot type determination tables, the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA, and the first jackpot type determination table that is taken into account when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. There is a second jackpot type determination table that is taken into consideration when winning a prize.

Specifically, when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, with reference to the first jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 265), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 is "0, 1". The granting of “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A” is determined.

In addition, if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 is "2", it is decided to award "16R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "3", it is decided to give "30 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "Mode", and if it is "4", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "5", it is decided to award "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "50 It has been decided that ``16R Probable Variable Jackpot B'' with ``Numbers and High Support Mode'' will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 is "6", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot A".

If the value of jackpot type determination counter CE2 is "7", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "8", "30 times/high support mode" is awarded. It is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "9", if it is "9", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "10", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B" with "High Support Mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 is "11", it is determined that "16R normal jackpot A" will be awarded.

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 is "12", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "13", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". If it is "14", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "16R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

If the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to award "30 times/high support mode". If it is "18", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times/high support mode", and if it is "19", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode". It is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "high support mode".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the upper starting prize opening 33YA, there is a 10% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 20% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot B", and a 5 % probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", 20% probability is "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", 5% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot A", and 20% probability is "16R Normal Jackpot B". , there is a 20% probability of "4R normal jackpot B".

On the other hand, when the game ball enters the lower start prize opening 33YB, with reference to the second jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 266), if the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 is "0 to 9", " If it is "10, 11", it is decided to award "4R probability variable jackpot A", and if it is "12, 13", it is decided to award "4R regular jackpot A". If it is "14", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "20 times/high support mode", and if it is "15", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "30 times/high support mode". If it is "16", it is decided to award "4R normal jackpot B" with "40 times / high support mode", and if it is "17", it is decided to give "4R normal jackpot B" with "50 times / high support mode". If it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "Normal jackpot B", and if it is "18, 19", it is decided to award "JUB jackpot".

In other words, if you win the lottery triggered by winning in the lower starting prize opening 33YB, there is a 50% probability that it will be a "16R probability variable jackpot A", a 10% probability that it will be a "4R probability variable jackpot A", and a 10% probability. % probability will be "4R normal jackpot A", 20% probability will be "4R normal jackpot B", and 10% probability will be "JUB jackpot".

The jackpot type determination counter CE2 is updated regularly (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 is stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA or the lower start winning hole 33YB, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 stored in the jackpot type determination counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special (Fluctuation Holding Area or Second Special Fluctuation Holding Area).

Further, the reach selection counter CE3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to 0, which is the lower limit value. In the present embodiment, the reach selection counter CE3 determines that after a reach occurs with respect to a decorative symbol, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops. We will draw a lottery between ``reach except before and after,'' where the symbol stops at a point other than before and after the reach symbol, and ``completely miss,'' where no reach occurs. In this embodiment, the ROM 502 stores a reach determination table that is referred to when determining whether the value of the reach selection counter CE3 corresponds to the occurrence of a reach state and which reach it corresponds to. It is provided. The reach judgment table stores values from 0 to 238, CE3 = 0, 1 corresponds to a reach that is out of the front and back, CE3 = 2 to 21 corresponds to a reach other than the front and back, and CE3 = 22 to 238 is a complete reach. It has a configuration that falls under the category of outliers.

The reach selection counter CE3 is updated periodically (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the reach selection counter CE3 is stored in the reach selection counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA or the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the value of the reach selection counter CE3 stored in the reach selection counter buffer is changed to the special fluctuation holding area (first special fluctuation holding area) of the RAM 503. area or second special fluctuation holding area).

Further, among the two variation type counters CS1 and CS2, one variation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 198), the lower limit value is added. The other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in sequence within the range of 0 to 240, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 240). It becomes. In the following description, CS1 is also referred to as a "first variation type counter" and CS2 is also referred to as a "second variation type counter." This is also expressed in FIG. 237.

For example, in the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table related to the normal state (see Figure 268), the first variation type counter CS1 determines the reach types of decorative symbols such as normal reach, super reach, special reach, and other rough fluctuation patterns. The second variation type counter CS2 determines more detailed variation aspects such as variation time. Therefore, by combining these variation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize diversification of variation patterns. Of course, it is also possible to determine the variation mode using only the first variation type counter CS1.

Note that the normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effects are displayed other than the variation of decorative symbols. Super reach is a reach pattern in which characters and the like are displayed on the performance display device 42 in addition to the decorative symbols during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player. . Special reach is a performance mode that can be derived when there is a high expectation that a jackpot state will occur (in this embodiment, only when a jackpot state will occur), and during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (after the reach state is established), This is a reach pattern that, in addition to decorative patterns, displays characters with a pattern different from that of the super reach pattern, thereby creating a sense of anticipation in the player.

Further, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the effect display device 42 determines a variation pattern at the start of variation of decorative symbols.

Note that the size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the sizes of the jackpot random number counter CE1, the reach selection counter CE3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are all different prime numbers, and are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter CE4 is configured as a loop counter that increments one by one within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit of 0 after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The random number counter CE4 is updated regularly (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CE4 is acquired.

Then, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter CE4 that results in a winning is acquired, after a fluctuating display is performed on the normal symbol display device 41 for a predetermined period of time, the symbol corresponding to the winning ("○" in this example) is stopped and displayed. Then, the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB remains open for a predetermined period of time.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", there are two winning random numbers, "0 and 1". On the other hand, in the "high support mode", the winning random number values are eight from "0 to 7". That is, in the "low support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 1/5, and in the "high support mode", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state with a probability of 4/5.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to a flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 can be roughly divided into main processing that is started upon power-on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a 2 msec cycle in this embodiment), and a stop signal sent to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of . For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be explained first, and then the main process will be explained.

The NMI interrupt process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like. This NMI interrupt causes the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power-off to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is similarly executed by the payout control device 311, and information on the occurrence of power outage is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal SK1 is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. and starts NMI interrupt processing. Its contents are as explained above.

FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 240, first, in step SE301, reading processing of various winning detection switches is executed. Here, the states of various winning detection switches (general winning switch 221, count switch 223, starting winning switches 224A, 224B, through gate switch 225) connected to the main control device 261 are read, and the states of the switches are determined. and save the detection information.

In step SE302, random number initial value updating processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SE303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter CE1, jackpot type determination counter CE2, reach selection counter CE3, and normal symbol random number counter CE4 are each incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit value, they are each cleared to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters CE1, CE2, CE3, and CE4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Thereafter, in step SE304, a starting winning process is executed in response to a winning to the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB, and in step SE305, a through gate passing process is executed as the game ball passes through the through gate 34. Thereafter, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily ended.

Here, the starting winning process in step SE304 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 241. The execution area of the special fluctuation holding area and each holding area include a jackpot random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1, a jackpot type random number storage area that stores the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2, and a reach selection counter CE3. A reach random number storage area is provided to store the value of .

First, in step SE501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won in the lower starting winning hole 33YB based on the detection information of the second starting winning switch 224B. When an affirmative determination is made in step SE501, in step SE502, the value of the lower reservation counter Nb that counts the number of reservations in the variable display triggered by winning in the lower starting winning hole 33YB is set to the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SE502, the process moves to step SE509. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE502, the process proceeds to step SE503, where the lower holding counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the subsequent step SE504, the values of the jackpot random number counter CE1, the jackpot type determination counter CE2, and the reach selection counter CE3 that were updated in the random number update process of step SE303 are set among the vacant reservation areas in the second special fluctuation reservation area. Store in the first area. The function of executing such processing constitutes the hold function in this embodiment. After step SE504, the process moves to step SE505.

In step SE505, a jackpot determination process is performed as a determination function to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. The details of the jackpot determination process will be described later.

In the following step SE506, when it is determined in step SE505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a second jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot schedule flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the second jackpot type determination table. If the value is one of "0 to 9", turn on the "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "10, 11" corresponding to "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" , turn on the "4R Probable Jackpot A Flag", and if the value is either "12, 13" corresponding to "4R Normal Jackpot A", turn on the "4R Normal Jackpot A Flag", If it is one of the values ``14 to 17'' corresponding to ``4R normal jackpot B'', turn on the ``4R normal jackpot B flag'', and select one of the values ``18, 19'' corresponding to ``JUB jackpot''. If so, turn on the "JUB jackpot flag".

In addition, if you win "16R definite strange jackpot A", "4R sure strange jackpot A" or "JUB jackpot" here, that is, if "until next time / high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, after the jackpot ends. For a predetermined period of time (20 variable displays in this embodiment), for example, a production lottery is held to determine whether or not to perform a non-announcement production that does not notify that the assigned "high support mode" is "until next time/high support mode". The lottery is held with a probability of about 1/100. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SE507, when it is determined in step SE505 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter CE3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. Note that details of the reach determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step SE508, a holding control command (first command) is set. The hold control command is a command for informing the sub-control device 262 in advance of various hold information (information used to determine the content of the change display) held and stored in the second special change hold area. be. The hold control command set in this process is output to the sub-control device 262 in the next external output process (see step SE201). The hold control command includes, for example, hold information such as information indicating the results of the above-mentioned jackpot determination process and jackpot type determination process, and information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is the trigger for the winning of the variable display, which will be described later. This includes information on the number of remaining reservations stored in the remaining number of reservations register FR, information on the number of reservations stored in a second reservation counter Nb to be described later, and the like.

Here, details of the jackpot determination process in step SE505 will be explained with reference to FIG. 242.

First, in step SE5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be either the value "7" or "307" corresponding to the jackpot stored in the first judgment table. Determine if they match. In addition, in FIG. 242, the process of step SE5101 is simplified for convenience, but in reality, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 is "7", and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 is "307", and if either of these determinations is affirmative, an affirmative determination is made in step SE5101, and which determination is made. If a negative determination is made in step SE5101, a negative determination is made in step SE5101.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE5101, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur, the jackpot schedule flag is turned on in step SE5102, and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE5101, it is determined in step SE5103 whether or not the "high probability mode" is in effect based on the value of a lottery mode flag, which will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE5103, that is, if the "high probability mode" is in progress, in step SE5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is used for the second validity determination. Among the values corresponding to jackpots stored in the table, it is determined whether it is any one of "8 to 16, 308 to 316" excluding the above "7" and "307". In this determination process, it is actually determined one by one whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 matches each value corresponding to a jackpot, as described above.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE5104, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot state will occur during the "high probability mode," the jackpot schedule flag is turned on in step SE5102, and then the process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step SE5103 or step SE5104, that is, if it is not a "big hit", the process moves to step SE5105.

Further, in step SE5105, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area matches the value "101 to 125, 401 to 425" corresponding to a small win. .

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE5105, that is, if it is determined that a small winning state will occur, the small winning schedule flag is turned on in step SE5106, and then this process is ended. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE5105, the process is immediately terminated.

Next, the reach determination process in step SE507 will be described with reference to FIG. 243.

First, in step SE5301, it is determined whether or not a hit schedule flag (big hit schedule flag or small win schedule flag) was set in the jackpot determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE5301, that is, if a jackpot state or a small win state occurs, the process is immediately ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE5301, that is, if a winning state does not occur, then in step SE5302, the value of the reach selection counter CE3 is newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area with reference to the reach determination table. It is determined whether or not the value matches one of the values "0, 1" corresponding to "front/back off reach". When an affirmative determination is made in step SE5302, in step SE5303, a front-back off-reach flag indicating the occurrence of a front-back off reach is turned on, and then this process is ended.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step SE5302, in step SE5304, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the reach selection counter CE3 newly stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is determined to be "reach other than front and back". It is determined whether the value matches any one of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "." If an affirmative determination is made in step SE5304, the flag other than front and rear outliers is turned on in step SE5305, and then the present process is ended.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SE5304, that is, if the result is "completely missed", the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 241, after the process in step SE508, or if a negative determination is made in step SE501, in step SE509, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the upper starting winning hole 33YA or not. The determination is made based on the detection information of the switch 224A. If a negative determination is made in step SE509, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made, in step SE510, the value of the upper hold counter Na that counts the number of holds in the variable display triggered by winning to the upper starting winning hole 33YA is set to the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4"). ”). If a negative determination is made in step SE510, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE510, the process proceeds to step SE511, where the upper hold counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step SE512, the values of the jackpot random number counter CE1, the jackpot type determination counter CE2, and the reach selection counter CE3 are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the first special fluctuation reservation area. The function of executing such processing constitutes the hold function in this embodiment. After step SE512, the process moves to step SE513.

In step SE513, a jackpot determination process is performed as a determination function to determine whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot. Incidentally, the jackpot determination process in step SE513 is the same as the jackpot determination process in step SE505 above, except for the small hit determination, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the winning in the upper start winning opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

In the following step SE514, when it is determined in step SE513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 is a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is used. Then, a first jackpot type determination process is performed to determine the type of jackpot.

Here, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot schedule flag was set in the jackpot determination process that was performed immediately before, and if the determination is negative, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the value of the jackpot type determination counter CE2 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area corresponds to "16R probability variable jackpot A" with reference to the above-mentioned first jackpot type determination table. If the value is either “0, 1”, turn on the “16R Probable Variable Jackpot A Flag”, and if the value is one of “2 to 5” corresponding to “16R Probable Variable Jackpot B” turns on the "16R definite variable jackpot B flag", and if the value is "6" corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot A", turns on the "4R definite variable jackpot A flag", corresponding to "4R definite variable jackpot B" If the value is "7 to 10", turn on the "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B flag", and if the value is "11" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot A", turn on the "16R normal jackpot". A flag" is turned on, and if the value is one of "12 to 15" corresponding to "16R normal jackpot B", turn on the "16R normal jackpot B flag" and correspond to "4R normal jackpot B". If the value is one of "16 to 19", the "4R normal jackpot B flag" is turned on.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" here, that is, if "Until next time/High support mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the above-mentioned non-announcement will be performed as in step SE506. A lottery will be held to decide whether or not to perform the performance. If it is determined as a result of the lottery that a non-notification performance will be performed, a non-notification performance execution flag is turned on.

In the following step SE515, when it is determined in step SE513 that the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 is not a value corresponding to a jackpot, the value of the reach selection counter CE3 newly stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is used. , performs reach determination processing to determine the type of reach. The reach determination process in step SE515 is the same as the reach determination process in step SE507, except that the information regarding the variable display that is the target of the process is based on the ball hitting the upper starting prize opening 33YA. For convenience, detailed explanation will be omitted.

Further, in step SE516, a holding control command (first command) setting process is performed. After that, this process ends. The setting process of the hold control command in step SE516 is the same as the process of setting the hold control command in step SE508, and the information regarding the variable display to be processed is based on the ball to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. Since the only difference is that , a detailed explanation will be omitted for convenience.

Next, the through gate passing process in step SE305 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 244.

In step SE601, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225.

If a negative determination is made in step SE601, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted in step SE602. It is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and if the value of the normal holding counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step SE603, where the normal holding counter is Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the following step SE604, a random number related to validity is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter CE4 updated in the random number update process of step SE303 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM 503. Thereafter, the through gate passing process is ended.

Next, the flow of the main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 238. This main processing is started upon reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step SE101, an initial setting process is executed when the power is turned on. Specifically, in addition to setting a predetermined value in the stack pointer, for example, 1. Executes wait processing for about seconds. In the following step SE102, RAM access is permitted.

Thereafter, data backup processing is executed regarding the RAM 503 within the CPU 501. That is, in step SE103, it is determined whether the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed down (ON), and if it is pressed down, the process moves to step SE112 to clear (erase) the backup data. do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the subsequent step SE104 whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, so the process moves to step SE112 in this case as well. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SE105, and in the subsequent step SE106, whether or not the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM judgment value calculated here does not match the RAM judgment value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, so in this case as well, the process moves to step SE112.

In the process of step SE112, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc. that serve as the sub-side control device. The sub-control device 262 that has received the initialization command executes its own initialization process as described later, and sets the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting to the gaming state Store in the status storage area.

Thereafter, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SE113, etc.). Note that the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process moves to RAM initialization processing (step SE113, etc.). Furthermore, if power-off occurrence information is not set or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step SE113, etc.). That is, in step SE113, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0, and in the subsequent step SE114, the initial value of the RAM 503 is set. Thereafter, in step SE115, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step SE103: NO), the conditions are that power-off occurrence information is set and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the processing at the time of power restoration (processing at the time of recovery from power outage) is executed. That is, in step SE107, the stack pointer before the power-off is restored, and in step SE108, the information on the occurrence of the power-off is cleared.

In step SE109, a game state check process is executed to check the game state stored in the RAM 503 at the time of power-off.

In the subsequent step SE110, a return command is sent to return the sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc., which are the sub-side control devices, to the gaming state at the time of power-off. Note that the return command sent to the sub-control device 262 includes information regarding the gaming state at the time of power-off identified in the gaming state check process (gaming state determination value Xj described later).

In step SE111, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Thereafter, in step SE115, interrupt permission is set, and the process shifts to normal processing, which will be described later.

Here, the game status check process in step SE109 will be explained with reference to FIGS. 245 and 246. FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing a gaming state check process, and FIG. 246 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence among a lottery mode flag, a support mode flag, a gaming state specific counter Kj, and a gaming state determination value Xj, which will be described later. Note that the game state check process is also executed in the variable display setting process (step SE807) and the ending end setting process (step SE1214), which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 245, in step SE1901, a process of reading various information related to the gaming state at the time of power-off, which is backed up and stored in the RAM 503, is executed. Specifically, the value of the lottery mode flag, the value of the support mode flag, and the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj are each read from the RAM 503.

The lottery mode flag is state discrimination information for determining whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" or "high probability mode", and the flag value indicates whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode". In the case of "high probability mode", "50 (H)" is set, and in the case of "high probability mode", "53 (H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "5" of the upper four bits in the lottery mode flag is uniformly added as a countermeasure against noise, and is not particularly used to determine the gaming state.

The support mode flag is state discrimination information for determining what state the winning support mode is in. As the flag value, if the winning support mode is "low support mode", "A0 ( H)" is set. Incidentally, the value "A" of the upper four bits in the support mode flag is uniformly added as a noise countermeasure, and is not specifically used to determine the gaming state.

In addition, if the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode" or "50 times/high support mode", the flag value is "A1(H)" is set.

In addition, when the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S", "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value, and when it is "until next time/high support mode", the flag value is set. "A3(H)" is set.

The gaming state identification counter Kj is state discrimination information for counting the number of executions of the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot and specifying the switching timing of the gaming state, and is set to a predetermined initial value at the end of the jackpot, is subtracted by 1 each time it is performed. For example, as will be described later, if "50" is set as the initial value of the gaming state specific counter Kj, and then the value of the counter Kj becomes "31", the fluctuation display at that point will be as follows: It can be specified that this is the 20th fluctuation display.

In this embodiment, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", "16R Normal Jackpot B" or "4R Normal Jackpot B", in other words, after the jackpot ends, "20 times/high support mode", When "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode" is provided, "50" is set as the initial value.

In addition, if you win "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A", that is, if "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded after the jackpot ends, "30" is set as the initial value. Ru.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A", or "JUB Jackpot", that is, if you are granted "Until next time/High support mode" after the jackpot ends, the initial value will be "0". " is set. However, when the non-notification performance execution flag is turned on and the non-notification performance is executed, "30" is set as the initial value. The non-notification performance execution flag is turned off after the initial value is set.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 245, in step SE1902, the value of the lottery mode flag read in step SE1901 and the value of the support mode flag are added.

In the following step SE1903, the addition value calculated in step SE1902 is ANDed with a predetermined mask value (in this embodiment, "07 (H)"), the lower 3 bits of data are extracted, and the data is processed for a predetermined operation. Set the game state determination value Xj in the area.

In step SE1904, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1". In other words, the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SE1905, and it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4" or not. In other words, the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "20 times/high support mode", "30 times/high support mode", "40 times/high support mode", or "50 times/high support mode". mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE1904 or step SE1905, the process moves to step SE1909. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE1905, the process moves to step SE1906.

In step SE1906, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "2". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "low probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SE1907, and it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5" or not. That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is "30 times/high support mode S".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE1906 or step SE1907, the process moves to step SE1912. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE1907, the process moves to step SE1908.

In step SE1908, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "6". That is, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the "high probability mode" and the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode".

If an affirmative determination is made here, the process moves to step SE1914. On the other hand, if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SE1916, where the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step SE1904 or step SE1905, and in step SE1909, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "31". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 20th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SE1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SE1910.

In step SE1910, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "21". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 30th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SE1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SE1911.

In step SE1911, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "11". That is, it is determined whether or not the fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot is the 40th time. If the determination is affirmative here, the process moves to step SE1913, and if the determination is negative, the process moves to step SE1912.

In step SE1912, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1". That is, it is determined whether it is the "50th time (in the case of the initial value "50")" or the "30th time (in the case of the initial value "30")".

If a negative determination is made here, the process moves to step SE1916, where the value of the gaming state determination value Finish the process.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE1912, that is, if the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "1", the process moves to step SE1913, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is changed to "7". . Thereafter, the process moves to step SE1916, where the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the process ends.

Now, an affirmative determination is made in step SE1908, and in step SE1914, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is "0". That is, it is determined whether the winning support mode is the "until next time/high support mode" in which the non-notification effect is not performed. If an affirmative determination is made here, the value "6" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE1914, that is, if it is "until next time/high support mode" where non-notification effects are performed, the process moves to step SE1915, and the value of the game state determination value Xj is set to "5". Change to Thereafter, the process moves to step SE1916, where the value "5" of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, and the present process ends. As a result, even if you are in the "until next time/high support mode" state, the lottery mode will be "high probability mode" and the winning support mode will be "30 times" for a predetermined number of times (20 times in this embodiment).・The same effect as in the state of "High Support Mode S" will be performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 239. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an overview, the processing in steps SE201 to SE210 is executed as a regular process with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing in steps SE211 and SE212 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step SE201, control signals based on the control contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R, the variable winning device 32, the opening/closing accessory 37Y, etc. updated in the previous process are sent to each device, and output data such as commands are sent to each device. Execute external output processing such as sending the data to each sub-side control device. Some specific examples are listed below.

For example, based on the detection information of the various detection switches mentioned above, it is determined whether or not game balls have entered various winning holes such as the general winning hole 31, and if there has been a winning, prize balls corresponding to the number of winning balls are paid out. A command is sent to the payout control device 311.

Furthermore, if a command for blinking the error display lamp 104 is set, the command is output to the sub-control device 262.

Further, when displaying decorative patterns in a variable manner by the effect display device 42, a variable pattern command, a pattern command, etc. are transmitted to the sub-control device 262. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 which has input the variation pattern command, symbol command, etc., determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on the various commands, and displays the variation mode on the effect display device 42 (variation pattern command, etc.). An instruction is issued to the display control device 45 to display (display).

In addition, in the external output process of step SE201, a process for externally outputting various information for understanding various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC via the external terminal board 240 is also performed.

For example, when the current gaming state is a jackpot state, a jackpot signal 1 (high level signal) is output from the first terminal 240a to the hall computer HC. Further, when the current gaming state is in the jackpot state or high support mode, jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) is output from the second terminal 240b to the hall computer HC. Thereby, the hall computer HC can grasp the start and end of the jackpot state and the start and end of the high support mode in the output source pachinko machine 10. The details of the output processing of the jackpot signal 1 and the jackpot signal 2 will be described later.

Further, when the variable display is fixed and stopped on the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R, predetermined information indicating this (for example, a pulse signal with a width of 20 ms) is sent to the external terminal board 240. It is output from the third terminal to the hall computer HC. Thereby, the hall computer HC can grasp the number of variable displays (the number of starts) executed in the output source pachinko machine 10.

Further, when the current gaming state is in the high probability mode, predetermined information indicating this (for example, a continuous high level signal) is output from the fourth terminal of the external terminal board 240 to the hall computer HC. . Thereby, the hall computer HC can understand that the current gaming state of the output source pachinko machine 10 is the high probability mode.

In addition, when a game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, predetermined information indicating this (for example, a pulse signal with a width of 5 ms) is output from the fifth terminal of the external terminal board 240 to the hall computer HC. Ru. Similarly, when a game ball enters the lower starting prize opening 33YB, predetermined information indicating this (for example, a pulse signal with a width of 5 ms) is output from the sixth terminal of the external terminal board 240 to the hall computer HC. be done.

Further, the state of the inner frame open detection switch 92 is checked to determine whether or not the inner frame 12 is open, and when the inner frame 12 is open, predetermined information indicating that (for example, continuous A high level signal) is output from the seventh terminal of the external terminal board 240 to the hall computer HC. Similarly, it is determined whether or not the front frame set 14 is opened by checking the state of the front frame open detection switch 91, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, predetermined information indicating that is displayed. (For example, a continuous high level signal) is output from the eighth terminal of the external terminal board 240 to the hall computer HC.

Further, when various errors are detected, predetermined information indicating the error (for example, a continuous high level signal) is outputted from the ninth terminal of the external terminal board 240 to the hall computer HC.

Further, when a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out from the payout control device 311, predetermined information indicating this (for example, a pulse signal with a width of 10 ms) is sent to the external terminal board 240. The signal is output from terminal 10 to the hall computer HC. Then, the hall computer HC that detects this adds the predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) to the value of the total prize ball counter related to the output source pachinko machine 10, and also If it is a ball, the predetermined number (for example, 10) is added to the value of the advantageous period acquisition award ball number counter. Further, the updated value of the total prize ball number counter and the updated value of the advantageous period acquired prize ball number counter are outputted to the game data display device HD and displayed on the game data display device HD. Here, the "total prize balls counter" is a counting means for counting the total number of prize balls paid out in a predetermined pachinko machine 10 from the opening of the game hall to the present time. Further, the "advantageous period acquired prize balls counter" is a counting means for counting the number of prize balls paid out during the series of advantageous periods in a predetermined pachinko machine 10.

Here, the jackpot signal 1 output process described above will be explained in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 273. First, in step SE5001, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot signal 1 output flag F1 is set to "1", that is, whether the jackpot signal 1 output flag F1 is turned on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE5001, the output level of the output signal output from the first terminal 240a is set to high level (H) in step SE5002. That is, the jackpot signal 1 (high level signal) is output from the first terminal 240a. After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE5001, the output level of the output signal output from the first terminal 240a is set to low level (L) in step SE5003. In other words, the process is ended without outputting the jackpot signal 1 (high level signal) from the first terminal 240a.

With this configuration, the output level of the output signal output from the first terminal 240a of the external terminal board 240 switches from low level (L) to high level (H) upon the start of the jackpot state, and when the jackpot state ends. This triggers a switch from high level (H) to low level (L). By switching the output level of the output signal, the hole computer HC can recognize the start and end of the jackpot state.

Next, the jackpot signal 2 output process described above will be explained in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 274. First, in step SE5101, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot signal 2 output flag F2 is set to "1", that is, whether the jackpot signal 2 output flag F2 is turned on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE5101, the output level of the output signal output from the second terminal 240b is set to high level (H) in step SE5102. As a result, the jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) is output from the second terminal 240b. After that, this process ends.

Here, when the jackpot signal 2 output flag F2 is set to ON, that is, during the jackpot state or high support mode, the second terminal 240b and signal output processing for outputting the jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) are activated. The functions performed constitute a predetermined information output function section in this embodiment. That is, the jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) corresponds to predetermined identification information that can identify at least the high support mode.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE5101, it is determined in step SE5103 whether the value of the extension flag F3 is set to "1", that is, whether the extension flag F3 is turned on.

If a negative determination is made in step SE5103, the output level of the output signal output from the second terminal 240b is set to low level (L) in step SE5104. In other words, this process is ended without outputting the jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) from the second terminal 240b.

Here, when the high support mode termination condition is satisfied (the high support mode provision period ends) and the high support mode is terminated, the output level of the output signal output from the second terminal 240b is set to a low level ( The output stop function in this embodiment is configured by the function of switching to L) and stopping the output of the jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) which is predetermined identification information.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE5103, in step SE5105, the output level of the output signal output from the second terminal 240b is set to high level (H), and the output mode of this output signal is converted. Then, the output mode conversion process is performed, and this process ends.

In the output mode conversion process of step SE5105, the main controller 261 uses the extraction function to generate a signal pattern as a plurality of pattern information stored in advance in the ROM 502 as a pattern storage unit, with reference to the remaining pending number register FR, which will be described later. Extract a predetermined signal pattern corresponding to the current hold status (remaining number of holds in the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB) from among them and set it in a predetermined area of the RAM 503, The output mode of the jackpot signal 2 is sequentially converted based on the signal pattern.

Note that the above signal pattern is stored in the ROM 502 in a table configuration (signal pattern table) associated with the number of remaining reservations.

For example, "10101010..." is stored as signal pattern data corresponding to the case where the value of the remaining pending number register FR (remaining pending number) is "4". Similarly, "100100100100..." is stored as signal pattern data corresponding to the case where the value of the remaining pending number register FR is "3". "1000100010001000..." is stored as signal pattern data corresponding to the case where the value of the remaining pending number register FR is "2". "10000100001000010000..." is stored as signal pattern data corresponding to the case where the value of the remaining pending number register FR is "1".

Based on this, the main controller 261 takes into account the signal pattern data (for example, "10101010...") set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 when executing the output mode conversion process in step SE5105, and Every 4 msec period when processing is executed, the output signal () output from the second terminal 240b corresponds to each value (“1” or “0”) of the signal pattern data while sequentially updating the reference value. Convert the output level of the jackpot signal 2). That is, in the normal process in which the value of the signal pattern data is "1", the output level of the output signal (jackpot signal 2) output from the second terminal 240b is set to high level (H). On the other hand, in the normal process in which the value of the signal pattern data is "0", the output level of the output signal (jackpot signal 2) output from the second terminal 240b is set to low level (L).

As a result, for example, when the value of the remaining pending number register FR (remaining pending number) is "4", the output mode of the output signal (jackpot signal 2) output from the second terminal 240b has a predetermined output level. The high level (H) and low level (L) are switched every period (every 4 msec period). The output signal (jackpot signal 2) whose output mode has been converted in this way will be continuously output until the extension flag F3 is turned off.

With this configuration, the output level of the output signal output from the second terminal 240b of the external terminal board 240 usually switches from a low level (L) to a high level (H) upon the start of a jackpot state. The high level (H) is switched to the low level (L) upon termination or the termination of the high support mode. By switching the output level of the output signal, the hall computer HC can recognize the start and end of the high support mode.

Furthermore, during the period in which the remaining amount of the second variable display is pending after the end of the high support mode, the output signal output from the second terminal 240b of the external terminal board 240 is changed in output mode based on predetermined signal pattern data. is the converted pattern signal, so if the hall computer HC is designed to be able to identify changes in this signal, the period during which the pattern signal is input may be changed to another period (normal state or high support mode). ), it can be understood that the above-mentioned remaining reservation is being used up. As a result, if the hall computer HC is designed to be able to identify changes in the signal, during the period when the pattern signal is being input, the corresponding game data display device HD will display a mode such as "last minute chance mode". By displaying text information, etc., it becomes possible to execute a corresponding performance (last-minute chance mode performance) [see FIG. 275(c)].

On the other hand, even if the hall computer HC is not designed to be able to identify changes in the signal, the hall computer HC is capable of outputting an extended signal (jackpot signal 2) from the second terminal 240b of the external terminal board 240. Since it is possible to know that there is a player, even if it is not possible to perform the above-mentioned performance, it is possible to count the number of consecutive attempts, etc. without any particular problem.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 239, in step SE202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach their upper limit values (198, 240 in this embodiment), they are each cleared to 0. do. Then, the updated values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In the following step SE203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step SE204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Thereafter, in step SE205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, what kind of control is to be performed on the first and second special display devices 43L, 43R and the control contents of the special display devices 43L, 43R are set, and jackpot determination and decorative symbols on the performance display device 42 are set. Setting of the fluctuation pattern is performed. Details of this first display control process will be described later.

In step SE206, variable prize winning device control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the variable winning device 32 are set, such as what kind of control is to be performed in the variable winning device 32. As a result, when a jackpot or small win occurs, the opening/closing process of the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times. Details of the variable prize winning device control process will be described later.

In step SE207, a second display control process is executed. In this process, settings such as what kind of control is to be performed on the normal symbol display device 41 and the control contents of the normal symbol display device 41 are performed. Details of this second display control processing will be described later.

In step SE208, opening/closing accessory control processing is executed. In this process, the control contents of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, such as what kind of control is to be performed on the opening/closing accessory 37Y, are set. Details of this opening/closing accessory control process will be described later.

Thereafter, in step SE209, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step SE210, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment) from the start of the previous normal process. Then, it is determined whether 4 msec) has elapsed. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SE201, and the processes from step SE201 onward are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. It is executed repeatedly (step SE211, step SE212).

That is, in step SE211, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the upper limit value (599 in this example), it is cleared to 0.

Furthermore, in step SE212, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (same as step SE202). Specifically, the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the upper limit values (198, 240 in this example), they are each cleared to 0. Then, the changed values of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps SE201 to SE209 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using this remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (i.e., the initial value of the jackpot random number counter CE1) can be randomly updated, and fluctuations can be similarly performed. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated randomly.

Now, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step SE209: YES), it means that the power has been cut off, and the processing from step SE213 onward is performed as power outage processing when the power is cut off. be exposed. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SE213, saves the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 to the stack area in step SE214, and saves the value of the stack pointer to the backup area 503a in step SE215. to be memorized. Thereafter, in step SE216, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (such as the payout control device 311). Then, in step SE217, a RAM determination value is calculated and saved in the backup area 503a. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Thereafter, RAM access is prohibited in step SE218, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

Note that the process in step SE209 is performed at the end of a series of processes corresponding to changes in the state of the game performed in steps SE201 to SE208, or at the end of one cycle of the processes in steps SE211 and SE212 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the appropriate timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, information on the occurrence of power outage is checked at the end of each processing, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in the middle. and can be easily memorized. Further, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing burden on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since generation of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step SE213), data can be prevented from being changed when the power is turned off, and the state before the power is turned off can be reliably memorized. .

Next, the first display control process in step SE205 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 247.

In FIG. 247, in step SE801, various winning flags (medium jackpot flag and medium winning flag) to be described later are referred to, and it is determined whether or not the winning state is currently in progress (in the jackpot state or in the small winning state). judge.

In addition, during the winning state (during the jackpot state, during the small winning state), there is a round period in which the variable winning device 32 is in the open state, and an interval period in which the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state between the round periods. During the opening period before the start of the first round (the first special display device 43L or the second special display device 43R, the variable display is stopped in a manner corresponding to a win (big win or small win), and then the variable prize winning device 32 is displayed. (a predetermined period before the start of the first round), an ending period after the end of the final round (after the final round ends and the variable winning device 32 is in the closed state, the first special display device 43L or the (2) a predetermined period until the variable display can be started on the special display device 43R).

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE801, that is, if the winning state is in progress, the process is immediately terminated.On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE801, a first display is displayed in step SE802, which will be described in detail later. It is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (effect display device 42) is undergoing a variable display by looking at the setting status of the medium flag. Specifically, if the first displaying flag is set (in the on state), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the first displaying flag is cleared (in the off state), the fluctuation display is considered to be in progress. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped. Although the details will be described later, the first display flag is turned on when starting variable display on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (see step SE920, step SE807), and When the variable display of the second special display devices 43L and 43R is stopped and displayed (see step SE814), it is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step SE802, that is, if the winning state is not in progress and the fluctuating display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step SE803, where the fluctuating display (second fluctuating It is determined whether the value of the lower suspension counter Nb that counts the number of suspensions (display) is greater than 0.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE803, that is, if at least one second variable display is stored on hold, 1 is subtracted from the lower hold counter Nb in step SE804. In the present embodiment, if the second variable display is held and stored as a result of the determination process in step SE803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even if the first variable display is stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is prioritized and consumed (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

In the following step SE805, processing for shifting the data stored in the second special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the second special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step SE805, in step SE806, the process of turning on and off the second hold lamp 46b and the process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit red light are performed, and then the process moves to step SE807.

In addition, if a negative determination is made in step SE803, that is, if no second variable display is stored in storage, in step SE808, the variable display (first It is determined whether an upper suspension counter Na for counting the number of suspensions (variable display) is greater than 0 or not. If a negative determination is made in step SE808, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE808, 1 is subtracted from the upper hold counter Na in step SE809. In the following step SE810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift processing is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the first special fluctuation holding area to the execution area side, from the first pending area to the execution area, and then to the second pending area. The data in each area is shifted in the following order: area→first pending area, third pending area→second pending area, fourth pending area→third pending area. After step SE810, in step SE811, the process of turning on and off the first holding lamp 46a and the process of causing the fluctuation identification lamp 40 to emit blue light are performed, and then the process moves to step SE807. In this embodiment, there is one execution area of the special fluctuation holding area, and the data stored in the first special fluctuation holding area and the second special fluctuation holding area are used when performing a fluctuation display based on the data. Then, they will be shifted to a common execution area.

In step SE807, variable display setting processing is performed. Here, details of the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 248. First, in the pre-processing of step SE900, small hit determination processing, jackpot determination processing, gaming state check processing, etc. are executed.

In the small hit determination process, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a small win. sets the small winning flag to ON. Here, it may be determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a small win by determining whether or not the small hit schedule flag in the execution area of the special variable holding area is set to on. Further, the small hit scheduled flag is turned off after the small hit winning flag is set on.

Similarly, in the jackpot determination process, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter CE1 stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is a value corresponding to a jackpot, and if it is a value corresponding to a jackpot. sets the jackpot winning flag to on. Here, it may be determined whether or not the variable display corresponds to a jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot schedule flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to on. Further, the jackpot scheduled flag is turned off after the jackpot winning flag is set on.

Since the game status check process is similar to the game status check process in step SE109 (see FIG. 245), detailed explanation will be omitted.

In the subsequent step SE901, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a small win by determining whether or not the small win winning flag is on.

If it is determined that this corresponds to a small win, the process moves to step SE910. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not a small hit, the process moves to step SE902.

In step SE902, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to a jackpot by determining whether or not the jackpot winning flag is on.

If it is determined that this corresponds to a jackpot, the process moves to step SE903. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to step SE912.

In step SE903, the various probability variation jackpot flags ("16R probability variation jackpot A flag", "16R probability variation jackpot B flag", "4R probability variation jackpot A flag", "4R probability variation jackpot B" stored in the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area) are processed. By determining whether any of the "flags") are on, it is determined whether the fluctuating display corresponds to a "probable variable jackpot".

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE903, that is, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", a variation pattern is determined in consideration of the variation pattern table corresponding to the "probable variable jackpot" in step SE904, and is set in the variation pattern command. . Next, in step SE905, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "probable variable jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" (described later). After that, the process moves to step SE920.

If a negative determination is made in step SE903, the process moves to step SE906, and the various normal jackpot flags ("16R normal jackpot A flag", "16R normal jackpot B flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", "4R normal jackpot A flag", By determining whether any of the "Jackpot B Flag") is on, it is determined whether the variable display corresponds to the "Normal Jackpot". If an affirmative determination is made in step SE906, that is, if it is a "normal jackpot", a fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot" in step SE907, and is set in the fluctuation pattern command. do. Next, in step SE908, the jackpot symbol (in this embodiment, whether it is an odd number symbol or an even number symbol) is determined by considering the symbol table corresponding to the "normal jackpot", and the corresponding symbol command (in this embodiment) is determined. Now, set "BZ1" or "BZ2" (described later). After that, the process moves to step SE920.

However, in this embodiment, as described above, depending on the type of symbols stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42, it is impossible to determine the gaming state such as the lottery mode given after the end of the jackpot. In other words, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", the "odd number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and if it is a "normal jackpot", the "even number symbol" will be stopped and displayed, and so on, the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the stop symbol and the jackpot type. are not clearly associated with each other, and in this embodiment, the above various tables are used to determine the predetermined fluctuations depending on the type of various jackpots, for example, if it is a "probable variable jackpot", it is likely to be stopped and displayed with "odd symbols". The tables are simply divided so that the appearance rates of patterns and designs are different. Therefore, for example, at the time of a jackpot, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable pattern or a stop symbol is selected based on one jackpot table, regardless of the type of jackpot such as "probable jackpot" or "normal jackpot".

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SE906, the process moves to step SE909, and it is determined whether the JUB jackpot flag is on or not, thereby determining whether the variable display corresponds to "JUB jackpot". Determine whether If an affirmative determination is made in step SE909, that is, if it is a "JUB jackpot", the process moves to step SE910.

In step SE910, a variation pattern is determined with reference to the variation pattern table corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", and is set in the variation pattern command. Thereafter, in step SE911, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ6", which will be described later) corresponding to the chance symbol is set, and the process proceeds to step SE920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SE902, that is, if it is "missing", it is determined in step SE912 whether or not the front and rear missing flags are on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE912, that is, in the case of "out-of-front reach", in step SE913, a fluctuation pattern is determined by taking into consideration the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "out-of-front reach", and the fluctuation pattern command is , and turn off the front and back out-of-line flags. Subsequently, in step SE914, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ3", which will be described later) corresponding to the front and back out-of-place symbol is set. After that, the process moves to step SE920.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step 912, it is determined in step SE915 whether or not the flag other than the front and back deviations is on. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE915, that is, if it is a "reach other than front/back off", a fluctuation pattern is determined in step SE916 with reference to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front/back off"; Set it to the fluctuation pattern command and turn off the flags other than those that are out of order. Subsequently, in step SE917, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ4", which will be described later) corresponding to a symbol other than the front/rear misalignment is set. After that, the process moves to step SE920.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SE915, that is, in the case of "completely off", in step SE918, an outgoing fluctuation pattern is determined with reference to the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "completely off", and the fluctuation pattern command is Set to . Subsequently, in step SE919, a symbol command (in this embodiment, "BZ5" to be described later) corresponding to a completely missed symbol is set. After that, the process moves to step SE920.

Here, for convenience, the variation pattern table and variation pattern command will be explained. In this embodiment, a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the above-mentioned "probable variable jackpot" (hereinafter referred to as "probable variable jackpot/variable pattern table"), a variable pattern table corresponding to "normal jackpot", "JUB jackpot" and "small win" are used. , a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "completely off" (hereinafter referred to as "reach when completely off"). A plurality of variable pattern tables (referred to as variable pattern tables) are provided depending on the gaming status (values of gaming status determination value Xj "0" to "7").

For example, regarding the probability variable jackpot/variation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 267(a), at "address 100" which is the reference address, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0", which corresponds to the "normal state". A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 101", a variable probability/variable jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state determination value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 102", the value of gaming state determination value Xj is "2". A variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "103" is stored, a variable probability jackpot time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value Xj of "3" is stored at "address 104" , when the variable pattern table is stored, when the gaming state determination value Xj corresponds to the value "4", the fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 105", when the variable probability jackpot corresponds to the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "5", A variable pattern table is stored, and at "address 106", a variable pattern table for a probability variable jackpot corresponding to the value "6" of the gaming state judgment value A probability variable jackpot time/variation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

In addition, regarding the complete failure/fluctuation pattern table, as shown in FIG. 267(b), at "address 700" which is the reference address, the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to the "normal state" of "0". A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table is stored.

Similarly, at "address 701", a complete failure/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value of gaming state judgment value Xj of "1" is stored, and at "address 702", the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2". A complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "703" is stored, a complete loss/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the gaming state judgment value "3" is stored at "address 704", , when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "4", the variation pattern table is stored, and at "address 705", when the gaming state judgment value Xj corresponds to "5", the completely off state/ A fluctuation pattern table is stored, and at "address 706", a fluctuation pattern table for when the gaming state determination value Xj is completely off corresponding to "6" is stored; A completely off time/fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the value "7" is stored.

Although not shown, there are other fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the above-mentioned "normal jackpot", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "JUB jackpot" and "small win", fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to "foreign and off reach", and As for the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to "reach other than front and back misses", as in the case of the above-mentioned variable pattern table for variable jackpot and fluctuating pattern table for complete miss, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is "0" ~ A plurality of table groups corresponding to "7" are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

Therefore, when determining the fluctuation pattern in step SE904, step SE907, step SE910, step SE913, step SE916, and step SE918, first, based on the gaming state judgment value Xj specified in the above gaming state check process (step SE900). Next, a process is performed to select a table corresponding to a predetermined gaming state (values of gaming state determination value Xj from "0" to "7") from a plurality of table groups. At this time, the address where the table to be selected is stored is specified by adding the value of the gaming state judgment value can do. In other words, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj plays the role of the offset value as it is.

Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected fluctuation pattern table (for example, the variable jackpot time fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the "normal state (Xj = 0)" stored in "address 100": see Figure 268). and set the corresponding variation pattern command.

The variable pattern command in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes, and the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are composed of information specifying the gaming state. In this embodiment, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is set as is. Furthermore, the lower 4 bits of the upper byte are made up of information that specifies the jackpot type, etc., and the 8 bits of the lower byte are made up of information that specifies the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time, reach type, etc.).

For example, as can be seen by referring to the variable probability jackpot/variation pattern table (see Figure 268) related to the normal state (Xj = 0), in the variable probability jackpot/variation pattern command related to the normal state, the upper 4 bits of the upper byte are "0", which is the value of the gaming state determination value Xj, is set, and "F" indicating "probable variable jackpot" is set in the following four lower bits. Then, the remaining 8 bits of the lower byte are set with values that specify the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503. Note that the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these variation pattern commands and the variation modes (effect patterns) of decorative symbols in a table, and when a variation pattern command is received, the variation corresponding to the variation pattern command is stored in the sub-control device 262. It becomes possible to output a video signal corresponding to the pattern (performance pattern).

Next, the symbol commands will be explained in detail. The symbol command is a command for causing the sub-control device 262 to determine the symbol to be stopped. In this embodiment, there are six categories: combinations of odd-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of even-numbered jackpot symbols, combinations of front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of symbols other than front and back out-of-place symbols, combinations of completely out-of-place symbols, and combinations of chance symbols. is specified. These categories are indicated by, for example, "BZ1," "BZ2," "BZ3," "BZ4," "BZ5," and "BZ6," and any one of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the relationship between these commands and stop symbols is stored in the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table. Then, the sub-control device 262 displays a stop symbol corresponding to the symbol command.

The combination of odd jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9, and "BZ1" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of odd jackpot symbols. Ru. Then, when "BZ1" indicating an odd jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 1, 3, 5, 7, and 9. One is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols is a combination of symbols consisting of the zeros of the numbers 2, 4, 6, and 8, and "BZ2" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the combination of even-numbered jackpot symbols. Then, when "BZ2" indicating an even jackpot symbol is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects one of the symbol combinations consisting of the zeros of the numbers 2, 4, 6, and 8. Determine it as a stop symbol.

The combination of front and back off symbols corresponds to the "front and back off reach" in which after a reach occurs, the final stop symbol is shifted by one position before and after the reach symbol and stops, and corresponds to the combination of front and back off symbols. “BZ3” is set in the symbol command.

The combination of symbols other than front and back off corresponds to the "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the combination of symbols other than front and rear off is the pattern that corresponds to the combination of symbols other than front and back off. "BZ4" is set in the command.

The combination of complete miss symbols corresponds to a "complete miss" in which no reach occurs, and "BZ5" is set in the symbol command corresponding to the complete miss symbol combination.

Moreover, "BZ6" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of chance symbols. Incidentally, there is only one type of chance symbol, and in this example, as described above, the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area are "3", "4", and "1" from the top.

Although details will be described later, when "BZ3" to "BZ5" are set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 stops the combination of symbols stored in the counter buffer of the corresponding RAM 553. Determine as. Specifically, when "BZ3" indicating a combination of front and rear out-of-reach symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 that has received the symbol command selects the front and rear out-of-reach symbols stored in the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffer of the RAM 553. A combination of symbols corresponding to a missed reach is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ4" indicating a combination of symbols other than front and back misses is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols corresponding to the reach other than front and rear misses stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and rear misses in the RAM 553 is sent to the sub-control device. 262 is determined as the stopping symbol. When "BZ5" indicating a combination of completely missed symbols is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects the combination of symbols corresponding to a completely missed symbol stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553 as a stop symbol. decide.

Further, when "BZ6" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 selects a chance symbol as the combination of decorative symbols.

The variation pattern command and symbol command set as described above are output in the next external output process (step SE201) of the normal process. Then, the sub-control device 262 that has input these commands determines the variation mode of the effect display device 42 based on these commands, and performs display control to display the variation mode on the effect display device 42 (variable display). An instruction is issued to the device 45.

Now, in step SE920, a start setting process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R are satisfied. In this start setting process, the first display flag indicating whether or not variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is turned on, and a first display timer setting process is performed.

The first display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. .

The variable display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the variation pattern of the decorative symbol selected by the variation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the settings of the first display timer, when a control signal to start variable display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the next external output process of normal processing, the special display device Variable display starts at 43L and 43R. After step SE920 ends, the variable display setting process ends.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 247, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE802, that is, if variable display is in progress, the process proceeds to step SE812, where a first display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the first display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the first display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step SE813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variable time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the first display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variable time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SE813.

If a negative determination is made in step SE813, in step SE817, switching display settings are made to continue the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the present process ends. Note that, based on the settings of the switching display settings, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal process. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE813, the first display flag is canceled (turned off) in step SE814, and a stop display setting for performing a stop display is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R in step SE815. .

In addition, based on the setting contents of the above-mentioned stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "9-" is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for only a few seconds).

Subsequently, in step SE816, a variation end setting process is performed, and then this process is ended. Here, the variation end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 249.

First, in step SE1001, it is determined whether the stop display corresponds to a jackpot or a small win, taking into account the jackpot winning flag and the small winning winning flag. Here, if it corresponds to a big win or a small win, it is assumed that a predetermined operating condition is met, and the process moves to step SE1002, where a win setting is performed.

Specifically, setting processing is performed for the medium jackpot flag, medium small win flag, opening flag, first open flag, first variable timer, round number counter Rx, winning counter Vx, etc., and the start of the jackpot or small win. Also, processing for setting an opening command that announces the winning type is also performed. Then, after step SE1002 ends, the variation end time setting process ends.

The jackpot flag is state discrimination information for determining whether or not a jackpot is in progress, and here, "1" indicating the occurrence of a jackpot is set as the flag value (flag on). In addition, instead of using the jackpot flag, it may be determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress by determining whether the value of the round number counter Rx for jackpot is greater than 0. Further, the jackpot winning flag is turned off after the jackpot winning flag is set on.

The small hit medium flag is state discrimination information for determining whether or not a small win is in progress. Here, like the medium jackpot flag, "1" indicating the occurrence of a small win is set as the flag value. (flag on). Note that the small winning winning flag is turned off after the small winning medium flag is set on.

The opening flag is state discrimination information for determining whether or not the opening period is in progress. Here, "1" indicating that the opening period is in progress is set as the flag value (flag on).

The first open flag is state determination information for determining whether or not the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state (during the round period).

The first variable timer is a measuring means for measuring the open time (round period) of the variable winning device 32, the interval period between rounds, etc., and a specified time has elapsed from the start or end of opening of the opening/closing shutter 32b. This will be taken into account when determining whether or not the In the win setting process of step SE1002, predetermined values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 269).

For example, if the first time is the above-mentioned "long open" like "16R guaranteed variable jackpot A", "7500" is set in the first variable timer, and like "JUB jackpot" the first time is the above-mentioned "short open". In this case, "100" is set in the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum opening time (specified time) per opening/closing operation of the opening/closing shutter 32b is set to "30 seconds" or "0.4 seconds".

As shown in FIG. 269, the opening/closing pattern control table includes the number of times the special prize state occurs in each winning state (number of rounds), the opening time of the opening/closing shutter 32b in each special prize state (each round), and the information between each special prize state. The interval time and the like are set in advance.

The round number counter Rx is the number of times the special prize state (round) is executed during the jackpot state or the small win state, that is, the number of times the opening/closing process (“long open” or “short open”) of the variable winning device 32 is executed. This is state determination information for determining. In the win setting process of step SE1002, initial values corresponding to various wins are set with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 269). For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" indicating 16 times is set, and in the case of "4R probability variable jackpot A", "4" indicating 4 times is set. Further, in the case of a "JUB jackpot", "20" indicating 20 times, which is the total of 5 "short openings" and 15 "long openings", is set as the initial value.

The winning counter Vx is a winning counting means that counts the number of game balls that have won into the variable winning device 32. In this embodiment, in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 240), it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32 based on the detection information of the count switch 223, and whether or not there is a winning in the variable winning device 32. If it is determined that there is a winning prize, the value of the prize winning counter Vx is incremented by 1.

In addition, in the win setting process of step SE1002, the maximum number of expected prizes to be won to the variable prize winning device 32 per one opening/closing operation (one round) of the opening/closing shutter 32b is determined with reference to the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 269). Set the specified number Vo. As described above, the prescribed number Vo is predetermined for each opening type (operation mode of the opening/closing member related to one opening/closing operation) such as "long opening" or "short opening". For example, for "long open", the specified number Vo is set to "10", and for "short open", the specified number Vo is set to "3".

Furthermore, in the winning setting process of step SE1002, setting processes of "jackpot signal 1 output flag F1" and "jackpot signal 2 output flag F2" are also performed.

"Jackpot signal 1 output flag F1" is state determination information for determining whether to output jackpot signal 1 in the next external output process (see step SE201), and here jackpot signal 1 is output. "1" indicating that the flag is to be set is set as a flag value (flag on).

Similarly, the "jackpot signal 2 output flag F2" is state determination information for determining whether or not to output the jackpot signal 2 in the next external output process (see step SE201). “1” indicating that 2 is to be output is set as a flag value (flag on).

Now, in step SE1001, if it is determined that the stop display does not correspond to a jackpot or a small win, the process moves to step SE1003.

In step SE1003, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". The support counter is a means to measure the support duration (how many times the fluctuation is displayed) in "high support mode", and as described later, after the jackpot ends, the value corresponding to each jackpot is set as the counter value. be done.

Here, if the counter value of the support number counter is "0", the process moves to step SE1011. On the other hand, if the support number counter is set (the counter value is other than "0"), it is assumed that the high support mode is being set, and in step SE1004, the value of the support number counter is subtracted by 1. . In step SE1004, a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the gaming state specific counter Kj is also performed. Thereafter, the process moves to step SE1005.

In step SE1005, it is determined whether the counter value of the support number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variable display is the predetermined number of variable displays after the end of the jackpot (after the high support mode is applied).

If a negative determination is made in step SE1005, that is, if it is determined that the counter value of the support number counter is not "0", the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE1005, that is, if it is determined that the value of the support number counter is "0", it is assumed that the predetermined termination condition has been met, and the value of the support mode flag is set in step SE1006. A process of switching to "A0 (H)" indicating "low support mode" is performed, and the process moves to step SE1007.

In step SE1007, it is determined whether the second hold counter Nb is greater than zero. In other words, at the end of the high support mode, it is determined whether or not there is a hold on the second variable display (remaining hold) triggered by the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB. In addition, under the configuration according to the present embodiment, the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB can substantially only occur during the high support mode.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE1007, that is, if there is a remaining reservation in the second variable display, in step SE1008, the value of the second reservation counter Nb (remaining number of reservations) is stored in the storage function section, which is the remaining number of reservations. Set in register FR. Note that the remaining pending number register FR of this embodiment is provided as one of the internal registers of the CPU 501. However, the remaining pending number register FR may be provided in the main control device 261 (main board) separately from the CPU 501. Of course, instead of the remaining pending number register FR, the storage function section may be configured by the RAM 503, a counter set in a buffer, etc., an area consisting of a plurality of addresses, a pointer, a mechanical counting device, etc.

Subsequently, in step SE1009, an extension flag F3 setting process is executed. The "extension flag F3" is state determination information for determining whether or not to continue outputting the jackpot signal 2 even after the end of the high support mode in the next external output process (see step SE201). Yes, and here "1" indicating that the jackpot signal 2 will be continuously output is set as the flag value (flag on). That is, the extension flag F3 corresponds to the jackpot signal 2 output flag after extension.

However, in this embodiment, if the jackpot signal 2 that is continuously outputted for an extended period during the remaining pending consumption period has its output mode converted, and the hall computer HC is designed to be able to identify changes in this signal. It is possible to identify that the output mode is different from the jackpot signal 2 and the jackpot signal 1 before the extension. The jackpot signal 2 before the extension and the jackpot signal 1 are continuous high-level signals that maintain a constant level from the start of output to the stop of output, but the jackpot signal 2 after the extension turns on and off in a predetermined pattern (high level and low level). level) is a signal that changes (see FIG. 275).

In the following step SE1010, switching processing of the jackpot signal 2 output flag F2 is executed, and this processing is ended. Here, the value of the jackpot signal 2 output flag F2 is set to "0".

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE1007, that is, if there is no remaining second variable display pending, the process directly proceeds to step SE1010.

Now, when an affirmative determination is made in step SE1003 and the process moves to step SE1011, it is determined whether the value of the extension flag F3 is set to "1", that is, whether the remaining pending consumption period of the second fluctuation display is in progress. do.

Here, if a negative determination is made, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the process moves to step SE1012, and the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the remaining pending number register FR is performed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the second variable display is configured to be consumed with priority, during the period of extinguishing the remaining pending in the second variable display (during the setting period of the remaining pending number register FR), the second variable display is , the value of the remaining pending number register FR is subtracted by 1 each time the second variable display stops.

In the following step SE1013, it is determined whether the remaining pending number register FR is "0". In other words, it is determined whether the remaining pending consumption period of the second variable display has ended. Here, if the value of the remaining pending number register FR is not "0", it is assumed that the remaining pending usage period of the second variable display is in progress, and the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if the value of the remaining pending number register FR is "0", in step SE1014, the extension flag F3 switching setting process is executed, and this process ends. Specifically, in the next external output process (see step SE201), "0" indicating that the extended output of the jackpot signal 2 is to be stopped is set to the value of the extension flag F3 (flag off).

In other words, after the high support mode ends, specific identification information (predetermined pattern signal ) for a predetermined period of time constitutes the specific information output function section in this embodiment.

In addition, the specific information output function section outputs specific identification information (output level The pattern signal to which the pattern signal has been switched will continue to be output.

Next, the variable prize winning device control process in step SE206 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 250.

First, in step SE1201, various winning flags (medium jackpot flag and medium winning flag) are referred to to determine whether or not the game is currently in a winning state (in a jackpot state or a small winning state). If a negative determination is made here, the process is directly terminated.

When an affirmative determination is made in step SE1201, the value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in the subsequent step SE1202.

In the following step SE1203, it is determined whether the first open flag is on, that is, whether the round period is in progress. If an affirmative determination is made here, the process proceeds to step SE1204, and checks whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, the round period ("30 seconds" in the case of "long open", "30 seconds" in the case of "short open", ”, it is determined whether it is the end timing of “0.4 seconds”).

If a negative determination is made in step SE1204, the process proceeds to step SE1205 to determine whether or not the value of the winning counter Vx is greater than or equal to the specified number Vo, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32 during the round period. It is determined whether or not the winning number has reached the specified number Vo (“10 pieces” in the case of “long opening” and “3 pieces” in the case of “short opening”) which is the maximum expected number of prizes. If a negative determination is made in step SE1205, that is, if the timing to close the variable prize winning device 32 (the end timing of the round period) has not yet arrived, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE1204 or step SE1205, that is, if it is the end timing of the round period, the process proceeds to step SE1206, and the value of the round number counter Rx is subtracted by 1.

Thereafter, the process proceeds to step SE1207, where it is determined whether the value of the round number counter Rx is "0", that is, whether the number of rounds ("long open" or "short open") has been executed has reached the specified number of times. do. Note that the end timing of each round period changes depending on the behavior of the game ball fired by the player operating the handle 18 and the state of the nails 49 etc. arranged in the game area. Therefore, each round period may end after the specified time (30 seconds in the case of ``Long Open'', ``0.4 seconds'' in the case of ``Short Open''), or The game ends on the condition that a specified number of game balls ("10" for "long open", "3" for "short open") enter the grand prize opening 32a before the time elapses. Sometimes. In other words, at least one of the conditions for ending the winning state can be satisfied based on the ball firing operation by the player, and the timing at which the condition is satisfied changes.

In addition, instead of the above configuration, in the win setting process of step SE1002, the initial value "0" is set to the value of the round number counter Rx, and the process of adding 1 to the value of the round number counter Rx in step SE1206 is performed. and in step SE1207, it is determined whether the value of the round number counter Rx has reached the specified number of rounds corresponding to each type of win (for example, "16" in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A"). Good too.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE1207, ending setting processing is performed in step SE1208, and the present processing is ended.

In addition, in the ending setting process in step SE1208, the first open flag is turned off, the ending flag is turned on, and an ending command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start the ending, and the first opening flag is turned off and the ending flag is turned on. A process such as setting a value corresponding to a predetermined ending period (ending period for a jackpot or ending period for a small win) for a variable timer is performed.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE1207, that is, if the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the prescribed number of times, an interval setting process is performed in step SE1209, and the present process ends.

In the interval setting process in step SE1209, the first open flag is turned off, and an interval command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start an interval, and the above-mentioned opening/closing pattern control table (Fig. 269), a process of setting the first variable timer to a value corresponding to a predetermined interval period ("3 seconds" or "1 second") is performed.

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SE1203, that is, if it is a predetermined period other than the round period (opening period, interval period, or ending period), the process proceeds to step SE1210, and the value of the first variable timer is It is determined whether or not is "0". That is, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the predetermined period (opening period, interval period, or ending period).

If a negative determination is made in step SE1210, the process is immediately terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE1210, it is determined in step SE1211 whether or not the opening flag (see step SE1002) is turned on.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE1211, that is, if it is the end timing of the opening period, an opening end setting process is performed in step SE1212, and then this process is ended.

In the opening end setting process of step SE1212, the opening flag is turned off, the first open flag is turned on, and a round command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start a round, and the opening/closing pattern control described above is set. Considering the table (see Figure 269), correspond to the predetermined round period ("30 seconds" for "long release", "0.4 seconds" for "short release") for the first variable timer. Performs processing such as setting the value to be used.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE1211, it is determined in step SE1213 whether the ending flag (see step SE1208) is turned on, that is, whether the conditions for ending the series of round opening and closing operations in the corresponding state are satisfied. Determine whether If an affirmative determination is made in step SE1213, that is, if it is the end timing of the ending period, an ending end setting process (end setting of the winning state) is performed in step SE1214, and the movement of the opening/closing shutter 32b located in the closed position is performed. After stopping as it is and completing a series of round opening/closing operations, this process ends.

In the ending end setting process of step SE1214, the winning flag (medium jackpot flag or medium winning flag) and the ending flag are turned off, and a winning end command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to convey information that the winning state ends. (a jackpot end command that conveys information that the jackpot state ends, or a small win end command that conveys information that the small win state ends), etc. is performed.

Further, in the ending end setting process, a lottery mode flag switching process, a support mode flag switching process, a support number counter setting process, a game state notification command setting process, etc. are performed.

In the lottery mode flag switching process, the lottery mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, when the "high probability mode" is set after the jackpot ends (various "probability variable jackpot flag" or "JUB jackpot flag" is turned on), "53 (H)" indicating the occurrence of "high probability mode" is set as a flag value. On the other hand, when the "low probability mode" is set (various "normal jackpot flags" are on), "50 (H)" indicating the occurrence of the "low probability mode" is set as the flag value.

However, when the small winning medium flag is on (when the large winning medium flag is off), the lottery mode flag switching process is not performed, and the flag value related to the original mode is set as is. For example, if the "high probability mode" is set before the occurrence of a small win (the flag value of the lottery mode flag is "53 (H)"), even after the small win ends, the "high probability mode" (lottery mode The flag value "53 (H)") of the flag is set.

In the support mode flag switching process, the support mode flag is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is given after the jackpot ends, the flag value will be "A1 (H)" is set as the flag value, "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "30 times/high support mode S", and "A2 (H)" is set as the flag value in the case of "until next time/high support mode". "A3(H)" is set as the flag value.

In the support number counter setting process, the support number counter is switched and set based on the various jackpot flags described above. As a result, if "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode" is granted after the jackpot ends, the support As the value of the number counter, "20" corresponds to 20 times of fluctuation display, "30" corresponds to 30 times of fluctuation display, "40" corresponds to 40 times of fluctuation display, or "50" corresponds to 50 times of fluctuation display. Set. Further, when "30 times/high support mode S" is provided, "30" corresponding to 30 times of variable display is set as the value of the support number counter. When the "until next time/high support mode" is provided, the value of the support number counter is set to a value that is virtually impossible to reach (for example, "99999" corresponding to 99999 times of fluctuation display).

The gaming state notification command is a command for notifying the sub-control device 262 of the gaming state that will be set after the end of the jackpot. In setting the command, first a game status check process is performed. Since the game status check process is similar to the game status check process in step SE109 (see FIG. 245), detailed explanation will be omitted here.

The gaming status notification command includes a gaming status determination value Xj related to the new gaming status ascertained through the gaming status checking process. As will be described later, the sub-control device 262 that receives this switches the gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj) that it knows to a new gaming state (gaming state determination value Xj). Note that the gaming state notification command may be omitted, and instead of this, the gaming state determination value Xj may be included in, for example, a jackpot end command that announces the end of the jackpot state.

It should be noted that the various "jackpot flags" are turned off after various processes such as the lottery mode flag switching process are completed. In addition, when the winning setting (step SE1002) is performed in the fluctuation end setting process in FIG. A configuration may also be adopted in which the "high probability mode" is interrupted.

In addition, in the ending end setting process of step SE1214, switching process of the jackpot signal 1 output flag F1 is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot signal 1 output flag F1 is set to "0" indicating that the output of the jackpot signal 1 (high level signal) is to be stopped (flag off).

In addition, in the ending end setting process of step SE1214, the jackpot signal 2 output flag F2 is updated.

Specifically, when "A0" is set to the value of the support mode flag, that is, when the winning support mode after the end of the jackpot becomes the low support mode, the jackpot signal is set to the value of the jackpot signal 2 output flag F2. 2 (high level signal) is set to "0" indicating that the output is to be stopped (flag off).

On the other hand, when the value of the support mode flag is set to "A1", "A2" or "A3", that is, when the high support mode is given after the jackpot ends, the value of the jackpot signal 2 output flag F2 is set to "1" indicating that the jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) is to be continuously output is set (flag on).

Now, if a negative determination is made in step SE1213, that is, if it is the end timing of the interval period, round start processing is performed in step SE1215, and then this processing is ended.

In the round start process of step SE1215, the first open flag is turned on, and a round command is set to convey information to the sub-control device 262 to start the round.

Furthermore, in the round start process, the opening/closing pattern control table (see FIG. 269) is taken into consideration, and the opening time for the next round ("30 seconds" for "long opening", "30 seconds" for "short opening"), The process of setting the value corresponding to "0.4 seconds" in the first variable timer and the specified number Vo for the next round ("10 pieces" for "long open", "10 pieces" for "short open") Processing to set the value of "3"), processing to reset the value of the winning counter Vx to "0", etc. are performed.

Based on the on/off state of the first open flag, various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the next external output process of the normal process. When the first opening flag is on, a control signal to open the opening/closing shutter 32b is outputted to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening 32a becomes open. On the other hand, when the first open flag is off, a control signal to close the opening/closing shutter 32b is output to the variable winning device 32, and the big winning opening 32a is closed.

Next, the second display control process in step SE207 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 251.

In FIG. 251, in step SE2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display by checking the setting status of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display. Determine. Specifically, when the second displaying flag is on, it is assumed that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying a variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 displays a variable display. It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which means that the display is stopped.

If a negative determination is made in step SE2101, the process proceeds to step SE2102, where it is determined whether the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than 0 or not. At this time, if the value of the normal hold counter Nc is 0, the process is immediately terminated.

Further, if the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is >0, the process advances to step SE2103. In step SE2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step SE2104, processing for shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation reservation area is executed. This data shift processing is a process that sequentially shifts the data stored in the first to fourth pending areas of the normal fluctuation holding area to the execution area side: first pending area → execution area, second pending area → The data in each area is shifted in the following order: first reserved area, third reserved area → second reserved area, fourth reserved area → third reserved area.

Thereafter, in step SE2105, start setting processing is executed. In this process, a process is performed to indicate that the conditions for performing a variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 are satisfied. Specifically, the second display flag is turned on, and a second display timer setting process is performed. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into account when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In this embodiment, in the "low support mode", the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 2 seconds, so "500" is set to the second display timer. . Further, in the "high support mode", since the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is set to 0.4 seconds, "100" is set to the second display timer.

Based on the settings in the start setting process, if a control signal to start variable display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process of the next normal process, the normal symbol display device 41 will display the variable display. Display starts. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "×" as a normal symbol by lighting up, and if the displayed symbol is "○", it will be displayed as "×" or "×". ”, the display is switched to “○”. Then, after step SE2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Now, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE2101, that is, if variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step SE2106, where a second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second display timer is subtracted by 1.

The process then proceeds to step SE2107, where it is determined whether the value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether the variable time has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE2107, the second displaying flag is turned off in step SE2108, and a normal symbol stop display setting is performed in step SE2109 to perform a stop display on the normal symbol display device 41. Then, based on the setting contents of this normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to perform a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, in the case of a win, the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, lit for a few seconds), and in the case of a loss, the "X" symbol is stopped and displayed.

In addition, as mentioned above, it is determined whether or not it is a win based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter CE4 stored in the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area.

Specifically, among the numbers 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter CE4, the winning values are two, "0 and 1" in "low support mode", and "0 to 7" in "high support mode". There are 8 pieces.

Next, the process proceeds to step SE2110, where a variation end setting process is performed, and this process ends. In this process, if the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening/closing the opening/closing accessory 37Y is performed. Specifically, the second open flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second open flag is state determination information for determining whether the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state.

The second variable timer is a means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a prescribed time has elapsed from the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the opening/closing accessory 37Y is different between the "high support mode" and the "low support mode", and in the "high support mode", "1000" is set for the second variable timer. In the "low support mode", "100" is set for the second variable timer.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step SE2107, a switching display setting is performed in step SE2111 to continue the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, and this process is ended. Then, based on the setting contents of this switching display setting, a control signal to perform switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, if the current lighting is "○", the display is switched to "x", and if the current lighting is "x", it is switched to "○". As a result, the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the opening/closing accessory control process in step SE208 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 252.

First, in step SE2201, it is determined whether the second open flag indicating whether the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state is on. Here, if it is determined that the second open flag is not on (the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the closed state), the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE2201, that is, if the second open flag is on, it is assumed that the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state, and a second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step SE2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Next, the process proceeds to step SE2203, and it is determined whether or not the specified open time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the second variable timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. Here, an affirmative determination is made in step SE2203 when the specified open time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0". If a negative determination is made here, the process is immediately terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE2203, the process moves to step SE2204, where an end setting process is performed, and then this process ends. In the end setting process of step SE2204, a process of turning off the second open flag is performed.

Based on the on/off status of the second open flag, various control signals are output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y in the next external output process of the normal process. When the second opening flag is on, a control signal to open the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the open state. On the other hand, when the second opening flag is off, a control signal to close the movable blade 37Ya is output to the opening/closing accessory 37Y, and the opening/closing accessory 37Y enters the closed state. As a result, it becomes impossible to win a game ball into the lower starting winning hole 33YB.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be explained. For convenience of explanation, reception interrupt processing will first be explained with reference to FIG. 253, and then main processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 254.

FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process that is interrupted and executed when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, first, in step SE3001, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513, and in step SE3002, the command sent from the main control device 261 is stored in order to remember that the command was sent. Turn on the command reception flag and end this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is also used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

Note that in this embodiment, the reception process of a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is performed by an interrupt process that is executed when the command is received, but for example, as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, before the command determination process (step SE3201) is performed, it is checked whether a command has been received, and if the command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if no command is received, the process may proceed to command determination processing. In such a case, it is confirmed whether or not a command has been received by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to FIG. 254. FIG. 254 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is started upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step SE3101, initial setting processing upon power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step SE3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step SE3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

Thereafter, in step SE3106, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, a RAM judgment value is calculated in step SE3107, and in the following step SE3108, whether the RAM judgment value matches the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power-off is determined. In other words, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup based on whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step SE3106, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) in step SE3108, proceed to the RAM 513 initialization processing from step SE3115 onward. Transition.

In step SE3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step SE3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step SE3117, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and the process proceeds to step SE3114, where interrupts are permitted.

On the other hand, on condition that the power-off occurrence information is set in step SE3106 and that the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step SE3108, process). That is, in step SE3109, the stack pointer before the power cut is restored, in step SE3110, the information on the occurrence of the power cut is cleared, and in step SE3111, the payout permission flag that permits the payout of prize balls is cleared. Further, in step SE3112, the CPU peripheral devices are initialized, and in step SE3113, the used registers are restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Furthermore, in step SE3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step SE3114, in the process of step SE3122, it is determined whether power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power has been cut off, and therefore, the processing from step SE3123 onwards is performed as a power outage process when the power is cut off. The power outage process first prohibits the occurrence of each interrupt process in step SE3123, and executes a command determination process to be described later in the next step SE3124. After that, in step SE3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved to the stack area, in step SE3126, the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step SE3127, the RAM judgment value is calculated and RAM access is prohibited in step SE3128, and an infinite loop continues until the power is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 513.

Note that in the process of step SE3122, the information on the occurrence of power-off is confirmed after the process performed at power-on is completed, so the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than when each process is in progress. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power was cut off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 255. This timer interrupt processing is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is obtained, and a determination process for the command is performed (step SE3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG. 256.

FIG. 256 is a flowchart showing command determination processing performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination process (steps SE3124, SE3201), first, it is determined in step SE3301 whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is received in the above-mentioned reception interrupt process (see FIG. 253).

If it is determined in step SE3301 that the command reception flag is off, this process ends because no new command has been received from main controller 261. On the other hand, if the command reception flag is determined to be on in step SE3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step SE3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step SE3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step SE3303, the processing in steps SE3302 to SE3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can also be reduced.

The type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined in the processing from step SE3304 to step SE3306. In step SE3304, it is determined whether the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step SE3305 it is determined whether it is a payout return command, and in step SE3306 it is determined whether it is a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined in step SE3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main Since the initialization of the RAM 513 has been instructed by the control device 261, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step SE3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step SE3309. Thereafter, in step SE3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and permission for payout of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 initializes the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are approximately the same. Therefore, due to the timing of initialization being shifted, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command sent from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 will be initialized, making it impossible to perform control corresponding to the received command, etc. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, it is possible to reliably set permission to pay out prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag has already been turned on in step SE3307, the command determination process is ended without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. That is, the process of step SE3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Note that the payout initialization command is a command that is sent only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, so it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on, and in such a case, It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if you clear the work area of RAM 513 (step SE3308) and set the initial value of RAM 513 (step SE3309) while the payout permission flag is on, there may be problems such as not being paid out if prize balls remain. This will cause a negative effect and cause a loss to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is on, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a loss.

Further, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step SE3304: NO, step SE3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power was cut off. In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step SE3311. That is, when there is information on the occurrence of a power cutoff and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power cutoff, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SE3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step SE3305: NO, step SE3306: YES), the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored in step SE3310. , turns on the payout permission flag in step SE3311 to permit payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer) and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the command to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command that instructs the payout of the prize balls. . Further, when a prize ball command is received, payout permission is immediately set, so prize balls can be paid out quickly in response to winnings. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step SE3311, it means that the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is finished, so the read pointer changes to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Note that if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is not a payout initialization command (step SE3304: NO), a payout return command (step SE3305: NO), or a prize ball command (step SE3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the explanation will be returned to the flowchart of FIG. 255. When the command determination process is completed, it is determined in step SE3202 whether or not the payout permission flag has been turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, the process is directly ended. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE3202, launch permission is set for the launch control device 312 in step SE3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step SE3204. Execute the return operation. Through this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated in forward and reverse directions, thereby eliminating the ball jam (returning to normal state). .

Thereafter, in step SE3205, the lower tray full state or lower tray full release state is set depending on the change in the state of the lower tray 15. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined based on the detection signal of the lower tray full switch, and when the lower tray is full, the lower tray full state setting is executed, and when the lower tray is no longer full. , execute the setting for the lower tray full release state. Further, in step SE3206, a tank ball absent state (ball out state) or a tank ball non-released state (ball present state) is set in accordance with a change in the state of the tank ball. In other words, the no-tank-bulb state is determined based on the detection signal of the no-tank-bulb switch, the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb condition is executed, and the special setting for the no-tank bulb condition and the no-tank bulb release condition are performed. Run the settings.

Thereafter, in step SE3207, it is determined whether there is a condition that should be notified, such as an error condition, and if there is a condition that should be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process for prize balls and rental balls is executed. Specifically, a payout number setting process is performed in step SE3208, a motor control state acquisition process is performed in step SE3209, and a motor drive process is performed in step SE3210.

In step SE3211, the dispensing motor 358a is driven to execute the ball discharging process, on the condition that the state return switch 321 is checked to indicate that the ball is not in an impossible state and that the ball discharging operation has not started. In the following step SE3212, a vibrator (not shown) is controlled (vibrator motor control) on the condition that the ball is clogged. Thereafter, the process returns to the beginning of the timer interrupt process.

Next, normal processing of the sub-control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 257. Note that this normal processing is a timer interrupt processing that is activated periodically (in this embodiment, every 2 msec).

In this normal processing, first in step SE3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is checked, and it is determined whether the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is being received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step SE3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main control device 261.

Note that the ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and when commands are stored in all storage areas, the storage area is It is configured to return to the starting point and update the command. Therefore, when a command is stored or read, the storage pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In the following step SE3903, command determination processing is performed. Here, command determination processing will be explained with reference to FIG. 260.

First, in step SE4101, the received command is read from the command buffer of RAM 553. In subsequent step SE4102, it is determined whether the command is an initialization command, in step SE4103 it is determined whether or not it is a return command, in step SE4104 it is determined whether or not it is a pending control command, and in step SE4110 In step SE4111, it is determined whether or not it is a gaming state notification command, and in step SE4112, it is determined whether or not it is a symbol command.

Note that commands related to winning effects (opening commands, round commands, interval commands, ending commands, jackpot end commands, small win end commands, etc.) are judged in the command judgment process in step SE3903; The processes corresponding to these commands are not executed, and the processes corresponding to these commands are performed in the display setting process (win display process) in step SE3907, which will be described later.

If the command sent from the main controller 261 is an initialization command, it means that the main controller 261 has instructed to initialize the RAM 553 when the power is turned on, so the RAM 553 is cleared in step SE4105, and the RAM 553 is cleared in step SE4106. Set the initial value of RAM 553. As a result, the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 stores the value "0" of the gaming state determination value Xj corresponding to the "normal state" which is the initial setting. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command sent from the main control device 261 is a return command (step SE4102: NO, step SE4103: YES), the main control device 261 returns to the state before the power was cut off, so the subsystem that does not have a backup function In step SE4107, the control device 262 reads the value of the gaming state determination value Xj (any one of "0" to "7") included in the return command, and stores it in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a hold control command (step SE4103: NO, step SE4104: YES), in step SE4108, various information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type) included in the hold control command is processed. information, information indicating which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB is the trigger for the variable display, information on the number of reservations, etc.) is stored in the sub-variation reservation area, and this processing ends.

The sub-fluctuation reservation area is provided corresponding to the special fluctuation reservation area of the main controller 261. In other words, the sub-variation reservation area includes a first sub-variation reservation area as a storage function section corresponding to the upper start winning opening 33YA, a second sub fluctuation reservation area as a storage function section corresponding to the lower start winning opening 33YB, Each of the two sub-variation holding areas includes four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area).

In each holding area, according to the reception history (reception order) of the holding control command and the winning history of the game ball included in the holding control command (whether the winning is based on which of the starting winning openings 33YA and 33YB, etc.), Information (such as jackpot determination information and jackpot type information) related to the variable display executed by the effect display device 42 is stored in chronological order. Thereby, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the number of pending changes and their contents.

Further, in accordance with the storage process of storing various information included in the hold control command in the sub-variable hold area, the sub control device 262 displays the liquid crystal display of the effect display device 42 at any time based on these various pieces of information and the number of holds. A stage change lottery to determine whether to change the display mode (production stage) on the display section 42a, a preview execution lottery to determine whether to perform a predetermined preview performance (including continuous previews), and a predetermined zone entry performance. A zone entry lottery is held to decide whether or not to enter the zone, and if a predetermined result is obtained from these various lottery results, information for executing the lottery is stored in the sub-variation reservation area. Based on this, the sub-control device 262 can perform stage changes, various effects, etc. as appropriate.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a gaming state notification command (step SE4104: NO, step SE4110: YES), in step SE4107, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj included in the gaming state notification command ( (any one of "0" to "7") is read out and stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. After that, this process ends.

If the command sent from the main control device 261 is a variable pattern command (step SE4110: NO, step SE4111: YES), it is the timing to start variable display on the effect display device 42, so start setting is performed in step SE4113. After processing, the process moves to step SE4114.

In the start setting process of step SE4113, various settings related to the variable display performed on the effect display device 42 are performed.

In this start setting process, first, as in the case of the special fluctuation holding area of the main controller 261, a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the sub-fluctuation holding area to the sub-execution area side is executed. Subsequently, the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern command is set in the fluctuation display timer. The variable display timer is a means for measuring the variable time (remaining time of the variable display) in the effect display device 42, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display.

In addition, in the start setting process, a variable display flag is turned on, which is taken into consideration when determining whether or not the effect display device 42 is displaying a variable display.

In this embodiment, based on the variation pattern information stored in the variation pattern command, one of the production patterns as pattern information related to the variation display of the decorative pattern is selected from among a plurality of production patterns by the extraction function of the sub-control device 262. Based on the hit type information (including "miss"), the stop symbols (combination of stop symbols) to be stopped and displayed after the elapse of the variable time are determined. Information regarding the production pattern and stop symbols determined here is added to the sub-execution area of the sub-variation holding area.

The correspondence between variable time information and performance patterns and the correspondence between jackpot type information and stopped symbols are stored in the ROM 552 as a pattern storage section of the sub-control device 262 in the form of a table. Furthermore, the correspondence between the variable time information and the performance pattern differs depending on the number of pending variable displays. For example, the fluctuation time is different depending on whether the number of reservations in the first variable display related to the upper starting winning hole 33YA or the number of pending changes in the second variable display related to the lower starting winning hole 33YB is 1 or 2, and if it is 3 or 4. It is configured as follows. Then, here, a predetermined performance pattern corresponding to the number of reservations is extracted. Thereby, the display control device 45 outputs a video signal of a predetermined output pattern based on the predetermined effect pattern extracted by the sub-control device 262 to the effect display device 42.

In addition, in the sub-control device 262, similarly to the main control device 261, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "probable variable jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "normal jackpot", a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a "JUB jackpot" and a "small win" are generated. , the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach outside the front and back", the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "reach other than the front and back", and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to "completely off", respectively, the values of the game state judgment value Xj are "0" to " 7" A plurality of corresponding table groups are stored in consecutive numbers starting from a predetermined reference address.

That is, when determining the display mode on the effect display device 42, the sub-control device 262 selects a predetermined gaming state (gaming state judgment value The table corresponding to the values of Xj ("0" to "7") is selected. At this time, specifying the address where the table to be selected is stored by adding the value of the gaming state determination value Xj to the reference address is the same as when selecting the above-mentioned variable pattern table.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a symbol command (step SE4111: NO, step SE4112: YES), symbol setting processing is performed in step SE4116, and this processing ends.

In the symbol setting process of step SE4116, the symbols stored in the counter buffer (see FIG. 258) of the RAM 553, which will be described later, are displayed on the effect display device 42 based on the winning type information stored in the reservation area of the sub-variation reservation area. It is set in the above sub-execution area as a stop symbol to be stopped and displayed.

More specifically, when "BZ1" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the 1st, 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th symbols is determined as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when "BZ2" is set in the symbol command, a combination of any one of the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th symbols is determined as the stop symbol. In addition, when "BZ3" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the front and back out-of-reach symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When "BZ4" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the reach symbol buffer other than front and back out is determined as a stop symbol. When "BZ5" is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols stored in the completely missed symbol buffer is determined as the stop symbol. When “BZ6” is set in the symbol command, the combination of symbols “3”, “4”, and “1” is set as a stop symbol in correspondence with the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas of the production display device 42. decide.

Now, in step SE4114, it is determined whether the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variable pattern command matches the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553. Here, if both values match, the process ends.

On the other hand, if the two values are different, the status error flag is turned on at step SE4115, and at step SE4117, the value of the gaming status determination value Xj included in the newly received fluctuation pattern command is regarded as the appropriate value. , the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is stored in the gaming state information storage area. After that, this process ends. If the two values are different by turning on the status error flag, this fact will be notified by the error display lamp 104 or the like. Of course, the notification means is not limited to the error display lamp 104, and may be configured to provide error notification using the effect display device 42, the speaker SP, or the like.

In recent years, gaming machines have a backup function in their main controllers, so even if the power is cut off due to a power outage, various data including the gaming mode (gaming state) at that time will be stored. Since the power can be maintained, even if the power is cut off during the high probability mode, the player can resume playing the game in the high probability mode when the power is restored.

However, by using the backup function described above, it becomes possible to set the gaming machines in the high probability mode from the beginning of business at the gaming hall, which is commonly called "morning." Such acts are carried out by the game hall in order to increase its ability to attract customers at the start of business, but there is a risk that the gambling spirit of the players may be turned into a prank. Various methods can be considered to set the above action, but one example is a method of not initializing and resetting a gaming machine whose gaming mode was the high probability mode at the end of business on the previous day. Furthermore, in a configuration such as the present embodiment, in which information regarding the gaming mode (gaming state determination value Xj) is transmitted from the main controller to the sub-control device by a return command or the like when the pachinko machine is powered on, etc. If the cable connector connecting the main controller and sub-control device is removed when the power is turned on, etc., the sub-control device will not be able to grasp the actual gaming mode set by the main controller, and will not be able to grasp the initial gaming mode. In other words, control related to the "normal mode" is performed.

In general gaming machines, when performing effects on a display effect means such as a liquid crystal display device, the display mode (for example, background color, etc.) is made different between the normal mode and the high probability mode, so that players, etc. This makes it easy to understand the current game mode.

Further, since the sub-control device that controls the liquid crystal display device and the like generally does not have a backup function, when the power is turned off, control related to the initial setting gaming mode ("normal mode") is performed.

Therefore, by utilizing this, it is possible to set the display mode of the liquid crystal display device to be in the normal mode even though the actual gaming mode set by the main controller is the high probability mode. In this case, the current gaming mode cannot be easily determined just by looking at the liquid crystal display device, etc., and it becomes substantially difficult to confirm this action through a predetermined investigation or the like.

In particular, in a gaming machine where a high probability mode that is superficially difficult to distinguish from the "normal mode", such as the "latent probability variable state" of the present embodiment, is set, the high probability mode is activated by the above action, and the gaming hall starts operating. If the game mode is set from time to time, it becomes impossible to determine the actual game mode from the display mode of the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, as described above, the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the fluctuation pattern command and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 are different. If so, an error notification is made to that effect, and the value of the gaming state determination value Xj included in the newly received variation pattern command is stored in the gaming state information storage area. In other words, the sub-control device 262 can grasp the appropriate gaming mode at that time. As a result, even if an action such as the above-mentioned "Morning" is performed and the actual gaming mode set by the main controller 261 is the high probability mode, the performance mode in the sub-control device 262 will be changed to the mode in the normal mode. Even if the variation pattern command is received, it is notified that the game mode is different, and the performance mode corresponds to the gaming state determination value Xj included in the variation pattern command. As a result, actions such as the above-mentioned "morning" by game halls can be suppressed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 257, after step SE3903 or if a negative determination is made in step SE3901, the process moves to step SE3904, and it is determined whether the execution timing of the next normal process has arrived, that is, the start of the previous normal process. It is determined whether a predetermined time (1 msec in this example) has elapsed since then. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step SE3905, whereas if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step SE3912.

In step SE3905, updating processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 uses various types of counter information when displaying decorative patterns. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CE5 and the upper, middle, and lower symbols used to set each losing symbol in the upper symbol display area, middle symbol display area, and lower symbol display area. Each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR is used.

The missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added using the R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, the numerical values change randomly. The values of these counters are stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 553 as appropriate.

The jackpot decorative symbol counter CE5 is for determining the symbol (jackpot symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the performance display device 42 when a jackpot (“probable jackpot” or “normal jackpot”) occurs. In this embodiment, five odd-numbered symbols and four even-numbered symbols are set as jackpot symbols. Therefore, five counter values (0 to 4) are prepared as the jackpot decorative symbol counter CE5. That is, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CE5 is incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 4, and returns to 0 after reaching the upper limit (ie, 4). When the symbol command transmitted from the main controller 261 is "BZ1" indicating a combination of odd jackpot symbols, the counter value is determined based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values and decorative symbols), for example. If is 0, it is "1" (lower number), if it is 1, it is "3" (lower number), if it is 2, it is "5" (lower number), and if it is 3, it is "7" (lower number). A combination of odd jackpot symbols is determined, such as "9" (double number) if the number is 4.

In addition, if the symbol command is "BZ2" indicating a combination of even jackpot symbols, based on a table (not shown) (a table that associates counter values and decorative symbols), for example, if the counter value is 0, "2" is displayed. If it is 1, it will be “2”, if it is 2, it will be “4”, if it is 3, it will be “6”, if it is 4, it will be “ A combination of even jackpot symbols is determined, such as ``8'' (double number).

The jackpot decoration symbol counter CE5 is periodically updated in the counter update process of step SE3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub-control device 262 receives the symbol command as described above. In this embodiment, the jackpot decorative symbol counter CE5 is stored in the jackpot decorative symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but it is not stored in the buffer and the counter value is referenced at the timing when a symbol command is received. You may also do so.

The upper, middle, and lower losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR determine the stopping symbols (combinations of losing symbols) in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas when the jackpot lottery results in a "losing" drawing. Since any one of nine decorative symbols is displayed in each column, nine counter values (1 to 9) are prepared for each column. The upper/missing symbol counter CL determines the stopping symbol in the upper symbol display area, the middle/missing symbol counter CM determines the stopping symbol in the middle symbol display area, and the lower/missing symbol counter CR determines the stopping symbol in the lower symbol display area. is determined.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical values of the R register built into the CPU 551. That is, when updating each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted and the current value is determined. Ru. The winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated so that their update times do not overlap, and the combination of these winning symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is stored in the RAM 553 as the front and rear out-of-reach symbol buffers, front and rear out-of-reach reach symbol buffers, and It is stored in one of the completely missed symbol buffers.

Here, the updating process of each losing symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be explained in detail. As shown in FIG. 259, in step SE4001, it is determined whether it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL, and in step SE4002, it is determined whether it is time to update the center/miss symbol counter CM. The upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the down/out symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination will be made in step SE4001. Further, if the top/miss symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative determination is made in step SE4002. If it is time to update the top/miss symbol counter CL (step SE4001 is YES), the process advances to step SE4003 and the top/miss symbol counter CL is updated. If it is time to update the center/out symbol counter CM (step SE4002 is YES), the process advances to step SE4004, and the center/out symbol counter CM is updated. Further, if it is time to update the down/out symbol counter CR (both steps SE4001 and SE4002 are NO), the process advances to step SE4005 and the down/out symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps SE4003 to SE4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and if the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 10 is subtracted. , the calculation results are set as the current values of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above update process of CL, CM, and CR, each of the upper, middle, and lower missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated one by one in one update process, and the update timing of each counter value overlaps. Never. As a result, one set of missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step SE4006, the combination of the updated missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of reach symbols (the symbols in the upper symbol display area and the symbols in the lower symbol display area are the same, and the upper and lower symbol display areas If it is a combination of reach-to-reach symbols (YES in step SE4006), further in step SE4007, it is determined whether or not the symbol is different from the symbol in the middle symbol display area. Determine whether or not. If the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are a combination of front and back missed reach (front and back missed symbols) (step SE4007 is YES), proceed to step SE4008, and check the combination of the missed symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time. It is stored in the front and back out-of-reach symbol buffers in the RAM 553. If the missed symbol counters CL, CM, CR are a combination of reach (symbols other than front and back miss) (symbols other than front and back miss) (step SE4007 is NO), the process advances to step SE4009, and the missed symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time are The combinations are stored in the ready-to-win symbol buffer of the RAM 553 except for the front and back.

If the combination is other than the ready-to-reach symbol (NO in step SE4006), the process proceeds to step SE4010, where it is determined whether the combination of the losing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a winning symbol combination, If it is a combination of missing symbols (completely missing symbols) (step SE4010 is YES), the process advances to step SE4011, and the combination of the missing symbol counters CL, CM, CR at that time is stored in the completely missed symbol buffer of the RAM 553. do. Note that if both step SE4006 and step SE4010 are NO, the symbols are aligned on the top, middle, and bottom, that is, it corresponds to a combination of jackpot symbols, but in this case, the missing symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are buffered. The process ends without storing the data in the file.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the chance pattern that is stopped and displayed in the case of "JUB jackpot" has one combination of decorative patterns ("3", "4", "1"), There is no need to use counter information for display.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 257, in step SE3907, display setting processing for performing various displays on the effect display device 42 is performed. In the display setting process, the effect display device 42 mainly performs a variable display setting process to perform a variable display of decorative symbols, a hold display setting process to perform a hold display, a effect display during a winning state, etc. A win display process, a display mode change process corresponding to various game states, etc. are performed.

First, the variable display setting process will be explained with reference to FIG. 261. As shown in FIG. 261, in step SE4301, the setting status of the variable display flag is checked to determine whether or not the effect display device 42 is displaying a variable display. In detail, if the fluctuating display flag is set (on), it is considered to be fluctuating, and if the fluctuating flag is cleared (off), the fluctuating display is It is considered that the display is in a stopped state, which is a stopped state. As described above, the fluctuating display flag is turned on when starting the fluctuating display of the effect display device 42 (start setting process of step SE4113), and is turned on when the fluctuating display of the effect display device 42 is stopped (step SE4113). (see SE4305).

If an affirmative determination is made here, that is, at the start of the fluctuation or if the fluctuation is in progress, the process proceeds to step SE4302, and if a negative determination is made, the present process is directly terminated.

In step SE4302, a variable display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the value of the display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, if the fluctuation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set for the fluctuation display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Next, the process advances to step SE4303, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, with reference to the value of the fluctuation display timer after the above-mentioned subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the fluctuation display timer becomes "0", an affirmative determination is made in step SE4303.

If a negative determination is made in step SE4303, a variation execution process is performed in step SE4304 to execute a variation display on the effect display device 42, and this process is ended.

In this variation execution processing, various calculation processes such as generating a command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output settings are performed based on various information stored in the execution area of the sub-variation reservation area of the RAM 553, for example.

Thereby, the display control device 45 performs a drawing process in accordance with the command from the sub-control device 262, and starts variable display of symbols on the effect display device 42. Once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the value of the fluctuation display timer set in the start setting process of step SE4113 is Until it reaches "0"), the variable display of symbols continues under the cooperation of the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE4303, that is, if it is determined that the value of the variable display timer is "0", the stop display setting for performing a stop display on the effect display device 42 is performed in step SE4305. and end this process. In the stop display setting, the fluctuating display flag is canceled (turned off), and a stop command that instructs the display control device 45 to stop the fluctuating display on the effect display device 42 is set.

In addition, in the fluctuation execution process of step SE4304 (excluding during the ready-to-win state) and the stop display setting of step SE4305, the display mode on the effect display device 42 is set in a mode (effect mode) according to the type of gaming state. Performance mode switching setting processing is also performed at the same time.

The production modes in this embodiment are mainly "normal mode" and "high support mode" to which "high support mode" is not provided, depending on the gaming state (value of gaming state judgment value Xj) etc. "chance mode" where the duration of support is unknown, "until next time/high support mode", and where the player is explicitly informed of the "chance mode" It is set to switch between "Gold Mode".

In this embodiment, the switching setting of the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is performed according to each effect mode. Here, the background HG may have any configuration, for example, it may consist of only one background image data (still image data) stored in the character ROM 525, or it may consist of a series of moving image data. Alternatively, it may be configured by combining static background image data with static or dynamic image data (sprite data).

More specifically, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "0", that is, when "low probability mode" and "low support mode" are assigned, The performance mode in the performance display device 42 is set to "normal mode", and a predetermined background HG corresponding to the "normal mode" is set on the liquid crystal display section 42a.

However, when the production mode is "normal mode", as mentioned above, changes in the production stage, preview production, zone entry production, etc. can be executed as appropriate, so even when these are executed, the liquid crystal display section The setting for switching the background HG of 42a will be performed.

For example, in the "normal stage" of the "normal mode" set in the initial state, as shown in FIG. 277, the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a is " "Normal Stage Background HG1" is displayed.

Furthermore, in the "Lively Stage" of the "Normal Mode" that is set when a predetermined result is obtained in the stage change lottery, as shown in FIG. 278, a girl character appears as the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a. A "lively stage background HG2" consisting of images (videos) showing various effects is displayed.

In addition, in the "slightly lively stage" of the "normal mode" that is set when a predetermined result is obtained in the stage change lottery, as shown in FIG. 279, various fish characters are displayed as the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a. A "rather lively stage background HG3" consisting of images (videos) of characters appearing and performing various effects is displayed.

Furthermore, in the "Zone Entry Stage" of the "Normal Mode" that is set when a predetermined result is obtained in the zone entry lottery, a goddess character appears as the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a, as shown in FIG. 280. A "zone background HG4" consisting of images (videos) for performing various effects is displayed.

When the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "3", that is, after the end of the "high support mode" for a predetermined period, the "high probability mode" and the "low support mode" are switched. The state to which is given is a so-called "potential state", so even in such a case, the effect mode in the effect display device 42 is set so that the state is no different from the "normal state" on the surface. The "normal mode" is set, and a predetermined background HG corresponding to the "normal mode" is set on the liquid crystal display section 42a as described above.

When the value of the gaming state determination value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "1", "2", "4", "5", or "7", that is, "20 times/high support mode" , "30 times/High support mode", "40 times/High support mode", "50 times/High support mode", "30 times/High support mode S", "Until next time/High support mode" non-announcement effects Or, during the period of "support continuous performance" which will be described later, the performance mode on the performance display device 42 is set to "chance mode", and a predetermined background HG corresponding to the "chance mode" is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 42a. is set.

In the "chance mode", for example, as shown in FIG. 281, a "chance mode background HG5" consisting of an image (video) of a gently flowing ocean current is displayed as the background HG on the liquid crystal display section 42a.

When the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj stored in the gaming state information storage area of the RAM 553 is "6", that is, when the "until next time/high support mode" is assigned (excluding the non-announcement production period), , the performance mode on the performance display device 42 is set to "gold mode", and a predetermined background HG corresponding to the "gold mode" is set on the liquid crystal display section 42a.

In the "gold mode", for example, as shown in FIG. 282, a "gold mode background HG6" consisting of an image (video) illustrating the ocean floor where an ancient temple sank is displayed as the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "0" (normal state of "low probability mode" and "low support mode"), the "high support mode" For a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 10 variable displays) after the end of the game, the production mode is set to a "dark mode" that arouses the player's sense of anticipation and anxiety. In the "dark mode", as shown in FIG. 283, a "dark mode background HG7" consisting of an image (video) depicting a dark deep sea is displayed as the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a.

Next, the hold display setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 262. First, in step SE4501, the winning type information stored in the holding areas 1 to 4 of the second sub-fluctuation holding area corresponding to the lower starting prize opening 33YB among the sub-fluctuation holding areas is information corresponding to a jackpot or a small win. (winning information).

If a negative determination is made here, that is, if winning information is not included, normal pending display update processing is performed in step SE4502. As shown in FIG. 277 and the like, in the normal hold display, hold images ( Hold icons) TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed. Normally, a "holding lamp image" imitating a circular holding lamp is displayed as each holding image TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4.

Then, in the normal hold display update process of step SE4502, the display is updated to increase or decrease the number of hold images TA1 to TA4, TB1 to TB4 displayed in a lighting mode or a light out mode, in accordance with an increase or decrease in the number of hold images in the sub-variable hold area. Processing will be carried out.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step SE4501, that is, if hit information is included in any of the first to fourth pending areas of the second sub-fluctuation pending area, a pending display change process is performed in step SE4503. , and then ends this process.

By performing the hold display change process of step SE4503, which of the four hold images TB1 to TB4 displayed in the second hold display area W3b corresponds to the hold area containing the winning information. The ``hold lamp image'' that is normally displayed when a hold is displayed is replaced with a ``star-shaped image.''

Here, production mode switching setting processing is performed when the production mode in the production display device 42 is set to the above-mentioned "dark mode" during a predetermined period after the end of the "high support mode" (10 variable displays in this embodiment). I will explain about it.

In this embodiment, when setting the production mode to "dark mode", first the remaining pending number information stored in the remaining pending number register FR (or the pending number information stored in the second pending counter Nb) is set to 0. Determine whether it is larger than . In other words, it is determined whether or not there is a hold on the second variable display (remaining hold) triggered by the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB during the high support mode. In addition, as mentioned above, under the configuration according to this embodiment, the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB can substantially only occur during the high support mode.

However, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the second variable display remains pending when the high support mode ends, the production mode is set to "dark mode" at the same time as the high support mode ends, and the liquid crystal display section A predetermined background HG corresponding to "dark mode" is set in 42a. Specifically, "dark mode background HG7" is displayed as described above (see Figure 283)
If there is a remaining pending second variable display, a decorative pattern related to the remaining second variable display is displayed in front of the dark mode background HG7 of the liquid crystal display section 42a whose production mode is set to "dark mode". A variable display will be performed.

On the other hand, if there is no remaining pending second variable display, the next or pending first The decorative pattern related to the variable display will be displayed in a variable manner.

Note that until a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 10 fluctuation displays) has elapsed after the high support mode ends, even after the expiration period for the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display for a maximum of 4 fluctuation displays has ended. , the "dark mode" is maintained as the production mode of the production display device 42, and the dark mode background HG7 is continuously displayed on the liquid crystal display section 42a.

Of course, the display contents and display mode of the liquid crystal display section 42a in the "dark mode" are not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and may be other different display contents and display modes. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which different display modes or different effects are performed depending on the number of remaining reservations in the second variable display after the end of the high support mode. In addition, since the remaining number of holds in the second variable display after the end of the high support mode is grasped, it is possible to use (Middle) A configuration may be adopted in which a continuously progressing animation (continuous performance spanning multiple variable displays) is derived.

Next, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step SE3907 will be described with reference to FIG. 263.

First, in step SE4701, it is determined whether an opening command indicating the start of a winning state (big winning state or small winning state) is received from the main control device 261.

If an affirmative determination is made in step SE4701, in step SE4702, an initial value corresponding to each type of win is set for the round grasp counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds based on the win type information included in the opening command. Set. For example, in the case of "16R probability variable jackpot A", "16" indicating 16 times is set as the initial value, and in the case of "JUB jackpot", 5 "short openings" and 15 "long openings" are set as the initial value. "20" indicating the total of 20 times is set as the initial value, and in the case of "small win", "5" indicating 5 times is set as the initial value.

After that, in step SE4703, the opening performance is set (setting of the image of the performance display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, and the lighting mode of various lamps), and then this process is ended.

Based on this, if the winning type is "big win", an opening effect as shown in FIG. 284 is performed on the liquid crystal display section 42a. In the opening performance, an opening background HG8 consisting of an image with characters such as "Jackpot" written on it is displayed as the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a, and a decorative pattern that is a jackpot pattern is displayed on the front side. Ru.

Further, here, a configuration may be adopted in which different backgrounds HG are set depending on the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot", a "probable variable opening background" consisting of an image on which characters such as "probable variable jackpot" are written may be displayed as the background HG. Similarly, when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", a "normal opening background" consisting of an image on which characters such as "normal jackpot" are written may be displayed as the background HG.

The sub-control device 262 is provided with a table etc. that stores the correspondence between the winning type, the number of remaining rounds, and various performance modes during the winning state, and the table is referred to to create the corresponding performance. Make a choice and execute it. In other words, the sub-control device 262 controls the results of various drawings by the main control device 261 (for example, the winning type, such as a variable jackpot or a normal jackpot), and the gaming state at the time of winning (for example, whether it is in a high support mode or a low support mode, etc.). Based on the mode type), the number of remaining rounds, etc., the table is referred to, and the content of the opening performance or the round performance during the jackpot to be executed on the performance display device 42 is determined and executed in one of a plurality of performance display modes. That will happen.

Further, if a negative determination is made in step SE4701, it is determined in step SE4705 whether or not a round command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SE4705, in step SE4706, effect settings during the round, such as displaying the number of rounds, are performed, and then this process is ended.

Based on this, a round effect as shown in FIG. 285 is performed on the liquid crystal display section 42a. In this round effect, as shown in FIG. 285, a "round background HG9" consisting of an image (video) of a seaside is displayed as the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a, and a moving pattern character ( A decorative pattern without numbers is displayed.

Further, here, a configuration may be adopted in which different backgrounds HG are set depending on the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type is a "probable variable jackpot", a "probable variable round background" consisting of an image (video) of a beach in the daytime may be displayed as the background HG. Similarly, in the case of a "normal jackpot", a "normal round background" consisting of an image (video) of an evening seaside may be displayed as the background HG.

Here, in each round of "long opening", a maximum of 30 seconds is set for each round, while in each round of "short opening", the specified opening time of the opening/closing shutter 32b is 0.4 seconds. Since it is short, a series of continuous effect settings are performed over multiple round periods (including an interval period to be described later). Of course, even in the case of "short opening", a configuration may be adopted in which individual performance settings are made for each round. Further, even in the case of "long opening", a continuous series of effect settings may be performed over multiple round periods (including an interval period to be described later). In other words, the shutter 32b opens and closes during execution of the jackpot performance that spans multiple round periods from the start of the first round (end of the opening performance) to the end of the final round (start of the ending performance). may be configured to open and close multiple times.

If a negative determination is made in step SE4705, it is determined in step SE4707 whether or not an interval command has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE4707, the round grasp counter is decremented by 1 in step SE4708, and the performance during the interval is set in step SE4709, and then the present process is ended.

Here, in the interval period between each round of "Long Open", the effect is set to 3 seconds for each interval, while in the interval period of each round of "Short Open", multiple rounds are performed as described above. A series of production settings are performed that are continuous with the production.

If a negative determination is made in step SE4707, it is determined in step SE4710 whether or not an ending command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step SE4710, the round understanding counter is decremented by 1 in step SE4711, and an ending effect is set in step SE4712, and then this process is ended. In addition, in the setting process of the ending effect, one ending effect pattern may be selected and executed from among a plurality of ending effect patterns.

Based on this, an ending effect as shown in FIG. 286 is performed on the liquid crystal display section 42a. In the ending effect, an ending background HG10 consisting of an image with characters such as "See you again" is displayed as the background HG on the liquid crystal display section 42a.

Further, here, a configuration may be adopted in which different backgrounds HG are set depending on the type of jackpot. For example, when the jackpot type is a "probably variable jackpot", a "probably variable ending background" consisting of an image with characters such as "It's still going on" may be displayed as the background HG. Similarly, when the jackpot type is a "normal jackpot", a "normal ending background" consisting of an image with characters such as "Good luck" may be displayed as the background HG.

If a negative determination is made in step SE4710, it is determined in step SE4713 whether or not a winning end command (big winning ending command or small winning ending command) has been received. If an affirmative determination is made in step SE4713, a winning display termination process is performed to terminate the ending display in step SE4714, and the present process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step SE4713, the process is immediately terminated.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 257, in the lamp setting process of step SE3908, lighting patterns of lamps and electric decorations are set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed on the effect display device 42.

In the audio setting process of step SE3909, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set in order to synchronize with the display performance performed by the performance display device 42. Further, when commands related to audio, such as notification of error occurrence, are transmitted from main controller 261, settings for controlling these are also performed in step SE3909.

Therefore, the sub-control device 262 constitutes the effect control means in this embodiment, and outputs predetermined signals to various lamps and speakers SP as effect means in accordance with the output to the effect display device 42.

In step SE3911, other processes such as a setting process for executing a demonstration effect (customer waiting effect) on the effect display device 42 are performed. The demonstration effect is executed when the next variable display does not start even after a predetermined period of time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the predetermined variable display stopped on the effect display device 42. For example, as shown in FIG. 287, in the demonstration performance, a demonstration background HG11 consisting of an animation video of a dolphin swimming around in the sea is displayed as the background HG on the liquid crystal display section 42a.

In step SE3912, external output processing is executed to transmit a control signal to each device based on the settings set in steps SE3905 to SE3911. For example, a command is sent to the display control device 45 when the effect display device 42 displays a decorative pattern in a variable manner.

After the processes of steps SE3905 to SE3912, which are performed every 1 msec, are executed, or if a negative determination is made in step SE3904, the process moves to step SE3913, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 stores power-off occurrence information or not. Determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step SE3914, and it is determined whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed, the process returns to step SE3901 and normal processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step SE3913 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step SE3915. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. It also erases the memory of the power-off occurrence information. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

Next, various processes executed by the display control device 45 will be explained. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 activates the control program stored in the program ROM 522, executes initial setting processing, and then permits various interrupts. This allows the CPU 521 to execute command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing.

First, command interrupt processing will be explained. The command interrupt process is a process that is periodically executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 ms cycle). When command interrupt processing is executed in the CPU 521, it is determined whether or not a new command is received from the sub-control device 262 to the input port 527, and if it is determined that a command is being received, the received command is is stored in a command buffer (ring buffer) provided in the work RAM 523.

Note that the command interrupt process may be configured as a process that is started when a strobe signal is received from the sub-control device 262, instead of a process that is executed periodically at a predetermined period. Here, when the CPU 521 receives the strobe signal from the sub-control device 262, the CPU 521 may execute the command interrupt process regardless of what process is being executed at that time.

Next, the V interrupt processing will be explained. The V-interrupt process is a process that is activated when a V-interrupt signal is input from the VDP 526. The present invention is not limited to this, and the V interrupt process may be configured as a process that is periodically executed at a predetermined period (for example, a 20 ms period).

When the V-interrupt process is executed, the CPU 521 first determines whether a new command exists in the command buffer, and if it determines that a new command exists, reads the new command from the command buffer of the work RAM 523 and executes the corresponding command. Parse the contents of the command.

Next, the CPU 521 reads a predetermined display data table for executing display processing corresponding to the command from the program ROM 522 based on the content of the analyzed command, and stores the read display data table in the table buffer of the work RAM 523. Set.

In addition, the display data table includes data necessary for displaying one frame worth of images at each update timing of the video when displaying the video related to the performance etc. corresponding to the command on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42. This is a group of information for which processing is determined.

That is, in the display data table, a group of information is defined that corresponds to each frame (frame update cycle is 20 msec) from the start timing to the end timing in the video related to the current display effect.

Here, the data structure of the display data table corresponding to various display effects will be explained. In the display data table, a plurality of display control data for realizing a predetermined display performance (for example, a variable display performance, a jackpot display performance, etc.) on the performance display device 42 is set in chronological order. START data indicating the start of the display effect is set at the top address of the display data table, and END data indicating the end of the display effect is set at the final address. Then, each address between the first address where START data is set and the last address where END data is set contains drawing contents (symbol position, background type, character type, effect, etc.) corresponding to the display presentation mode. is registered as display control data.

When the display data table is set in the table buffer of the work RAM 523, the CPU 521 sets a pointer to the top address of the display data table and executes task processing.

Thereafter, the CPU 521 increments the pointer by 1 each time it executes task processing (each time one frame of drawing processing is completed) and sequentially acquires the display control data at the address specified by the pointer in the display data table. Based on the acquired display control data, a drawing instruction list for displaying one frame of image corresponding to the current update timing on the effect display device 42 is created.

As a result, various data necessary for instructing the VDP 526 to draw are set. Various data include, for example, address information of an area in the character ROM 525 where image data to be drawn is stored, address information of an area to which image data to be drawn is transferred in the video RAM 524, and image data to be drawn. Information on the frame buffer to be created for which drawing data should be created, information on the coordinates when writing the image data to be drawn in the frame buffer to be created, information on the scale when writing the image data, and the image. There is information such as uniform α value (semi-transparent value) when writing data.

Subsequently, the CPU 521 transmits the created drawing instruction list to the VDP 526. By transmitting the drawing instruction list to the VDP 526, the CPU 521 issues an instruction to draw one frame of image. The VDP 526 creates drawing data in the frame buffer of the video RAM 524 according to this drawing instruction list. Thereby, according to the update of the pointer, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table, and the video as specified in the display data table is displayed on the effect display device 42.

Next, various processes executed by the VDP 526 will be explained. The VDP 526 performs a drawing process that creates drawing data in one frame buffer of the video RAM 524 based on the drawing instruction list sent from the CPU 521, and a drawing process that creates drawing data in the effect display device 42 based on the drawing data created in the other frame buffer. Output processing for outputting a video signal is executed.

Here, the drawing process will be explained in detail. Prior to explaining the drawing process, first, the contents of the drawing instruction list sent from the CPU 521 to the VDP 526 will be explained.

Header information is set in the drawing instruction list. The header information includes information indicating which of the first frame buffer and second frame buffer to draw the drawing data for displaying one frame of image corresponding to the drawing instruction list. Information is set.

In addition to the above header information, the drawing instruction list includes multiple types of image data used to display one frame of image, information on the drawing order of each image data, parameter information for each image data, etc. has been done. More specifically, information on the drawing order is set to be numerical information of serial numbers, and information on image data to be used is set in one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information. Further, parameter information is set in one-to-one correspondence with information of each image data.

The drawing order is set so that in one frame of images, the individual image that is desired to be displayed at the back of the liquid crystal display section 42a is drawn first. Note that the individual image refers to one still image defined by still image data such as background image data, or one sprite defined by sprite data such as pattern sprite data. For example, background image data (background image) is set as the first object to be drawn, sprite data A (for example, a character image) is set as second, sprite data B (for example, a pattern image) is set as third, and so on. According to the drawing instruction list, background image data (background image) is first written to the drawing frame buffer, and then sprite data A (for example, a character image) is written so as to overlap the background image data. is written, and furthermore, sprite data B (for example, a pattern image) is written. In addition, in the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed in the order of background image → effect image → pattern so that it is on the near side.

Moreover, multiple types of parameters are set in the parameter information. Regarding the parameters of the background image data, specifically, information on the address of the area where the background image data is stored in the character ROM 525, information on the address of the area where the background image data is transferred in the video RAM 524, and information on the address of the area where the background image data is stored in the character ROM 525, Information on the coordinates indicating the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing, information on the rotation angle indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing the background image data, and the information set as the initial state of the background image data. For the current size, scale information indicating the magnification when writing to the frame buffer, uniform α value information indicating the overall transparency information (or transparency information) when writing background image data, and whether or not α data is applied. and α data designation information indicating the application target. Note that the above parameter types are the same for sprite data A and B.

The coordinate information is not set individually for all pixels constituting the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one piece of image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for which coordinate information is specified. The VDP526 can recognize that the specified coordinate information is the center pixel of the image data, and when arranging the image data, make sure that the center pixel is on the specified coordinates. . This allows the CPU 521 to reduce the amount of coordinate information that should be specified for one piece of image data. Moreover, since it is not necessary for the CPU 521 or the VDP 526 to be able to recognize the coordinates of all pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

Further, the uniform α value is transparency information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the CPU 521. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all pixels of the image data. On the other hand, α data is transparency information applied to each pixel of background image data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the character ROM 525 as image data. The α data can have different transparency information for each pixel within the same background image data or the same sprite data. This α data has a larger data capacity than program data for uniformly setting α values.

Because the α value and α data are uniformly set as described above, the transparency of background image data and sprite data can be controlled uniformly for all pixels instead of finely controlling it on a pixel-by-pixel basis. By being able to respond uniformly using α values, the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying α data, it is also possible to finely control transparency on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

Next, the drawing processing in the VDP 526 will be explained. First, the VDP 526 determines whether the creation of drawing data instructed by the drawing instruction list that has already been received has been completed. If the creation of the drawing data has been completed, it is determined whether a new drawing instruction list has been received from the CPU 521 or not. If a new drawing instruction list has been received, the corresponding processing at the time of reception is executed.

In the processing at the time of reception, based on the target buffer information included in the drawing instruction list, it is determined in which of the two frame buffers one frame of drawing data corresponding to the currently received drawing instruction list should be drawn. Understand.

Subsequently, the VDP 526 executes content understanding processing. In the content understanding process, image data set as a drawing target in the drawing instruction list is read from the character ROM 525 and written to the video RAM 524.

Further, in the content understanding process, the type of image data that is initially set as a drawing target in the drawing instruction list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, the image data to be drawn this time is written to the frame buffer set as the creation target based on the grasping result of the content grasping process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the drawing data instructed in the drawing instruction list that has already been received is in the process of being created, the process of updating the counter of the drawing instruction list is executed. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data of the next drawing order. Then, the above-mentioned processing is performed on the switched image data. That is, by executing the drawing process multiple times, drawing data for one frame of the image instructed by one drawing instruction list is created.

Note that the configuration is not limited to a configuration in which only one piece of image data is processed in one rendering process, and a configuration in which multiple pieces of image data are processed in one rendering process is also possible. The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing process, but may be a configuration in which a different number of image data are processed in each processing time of the drawing process.

In addition, if a new drawing instruction list has not been received or after writing the image data to be drawn, it is determined whether the output of the video signal for one frame of the image has been completed. . If the process has not been completed, the main drawing process is ended, and if it has been completed, a V interrupt signal is output to the CPU 521, and then the main drawing process is ended.

Next, the display mode etc. on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 will be explained together with the flow of the game by the player.

In the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42, in the normal state (when the value of the gaming state determination value (See Figure 277, etc.).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 277 and the like, an instruction display area W2 is set below the variable display area W1 in the liquid crystal display section 42a to instruct (recommend) the firing mode of the game ball to the player. Furthermore, a pending display area W3 indicating the number of pending items in a variable display is set below it.

The hold display area W3 is set corresponding to the sub-variable hold area. That is, the hold display area W3 is divided into a first hold display area W3a and a second hold display area W3b, corresponding to the first sub-change hold area and the second sub-change hold area. In each of the hold display areas W3a and W3b, hold images (hold icons) TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the four hold areas (first hold area to fourth hold area) are displayed (see FIG. 277 etc.).

For the held images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4, in normal times (when not on hold), images (icons) in an unlit state are displayed (see the shaded area), and the variable display is held in a predetermined holding area. In this case, the reserved images TA1 to TA4 and TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the reserved area are switched to be displayed as images (icons) in a lighting mode (see the white part).

In the example shown in FIG. 277, the first pending image (first pending icon) TA1 and the second pending image (second pending icon) TA2 in the first pending display area W3a are displayed in a lighting manner, and the remaining pending images (on hold A state in which icons TA3, TA4, TB1 to TB4 are displayed in an unlit state is shown. In other words, the fluctuation display is held in the reservation first area and the reservation second area of the first sub-variation reservation area, and the current number of reservations in the fluctuation display is "2" related to the upper starting prize opening 33YA. It is shown.

In the normal state, a message is displayed in the instruction display area W2 to encourage the player to shoot a game ball toward the left side area of the variable display unit 35 (such action is hereinafter referred to as "left-handed hitting"). ← “Left-handed” is displayed. Accordingly, the player plays the game by "hitting to the left."

When "hitting to the left", most of the game balls are guided toward the upper starting prize opening 33YA located on the lower side of the variable display unit 35 by the nails and the like. Among them, how many game balls will be won into the upper starting prize opening 33YA.

In the present embodiment, the through gate 34 that triggers the opening of the lower starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) flows down the right side area of the variable display unit 35, that is, the left side area of the variable display unit 35. Since the game ball is placed in an unreachable position, if the player continues to "hit left", the opening/closing accessory 37Y will not be opened and the game ball will enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB. Never.

In other words, in the normal state, the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the left".

When the game ball enters the upper starting prize opening 33YA, in the variable display area W1 of the effect display device 42, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are variably displayed in each of the symbol display areas. In this embodiment, patterns Z1 to Z9 are displayed as decorative patterns (see FIG. 276).

As shown in FIG. 276, the symbols Z1 to Z9 are assigned predetermined numbers "1" to "9", respectively. The symbols Z1 to Z9 are scrolled and displayed periodically from right to left in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol display areas. As a result, a series of symbol rows are configured to be variably displayed in each of the symbol display areas.

More specifically, in the upper symbol display area, the symbols Z1 to Z9 are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers), and in the middle symbol display area and the lower symbol display area, the symbols Z1 to Z9 are displayed in descending order (in order of decreasing numbers). Displayed in ascending order (in order of increasing numbers). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the variable display stops in the order of upper symbol display area → lower symbol display area → middle symbol display area, and symbols Z1 to Z9 are stopped and displayed in each symbol display area.

If you win a jackpot lottery based on the winning of a game ball into the upper starting prize opening 33YA, after reaching a predetermined reach state, a decorative pattern of the jackpot combination (patterns Z1 to Z9) will appear on a predetermined jackpot line. is stopped and displayed.

In this embodiment, the jackpot line is composed of left, middle, and right vertical lines and two diagonal lines (referred to as 5 lines). Therefore, in the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas, three decorative symbols (of the same type among symbols Z1 to Z9) of jackpot combinations are displayed in a line on any one of the five lines. When this happens (for example, when three crab symbols Z9 with the number "9" attached to them are fixedly displayed on the diagonal line rising to the right), the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed.

In addition, the reach state includes a state in which the symbol fluctuation in the lower symbol display area stops at the same type of symbol as the stopping symbol in the upper symbol display area on the jackpot line. For example, in FIG. 288, in each of the upper and lower symbol display areas, the octopus symbol Z1 with the number "1" is displayed stopped on the diagonal jackpot line going downward to the right, and the octopus symbol Z1 with the number "1" attached is stopped and displayed on the diagonal jackpot line going downward to the left. A case is illustrated in which the crab symbol Z9 with the number "9" attached thereto is displayed in a stopped state, and the middle symbol display area is still changing.

However, in FIG. 288, symbols Z1 to Z9 that are variably displayed in the middle symbol display area are omitted to simplify the drawing (the same applies to FIGS. 289 and 290, which will be described later). In this case, when the octopus symbol Z1 or the crab symbol Z9 is stopped and displayed on the jackpot line in the medium symbol display area, a jackpot state will occur.

However, in the above-mentioned reach state, in addition to the one in which the symbol in the middle symbol display area finally stops at the same type of symbol (jackpot symbol) as the stopping symbol in the upper and lower symbol display areas, and the jackpot state occurs. This includes symbols that stop at a different type of symbol (this is referred to as a "missing reach symbol") and do not result in a jackpot state (this is referred to as a "missing reach state").

As mentioned above, various ready-to-reach effects are performed during the ready-to-reach state. One of the ready-to-reach performance patterns is "normal reach" in which the symbols Z1 to Z9 in the middle symbol display area simply scroll as in the normal variation. In "normal reach" in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 288, "coral reach background HG12" consisting of an image (video) in which a huge coral appears in the center is displayed as the background HG of the liquid crystal display section 42a. be done.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a "super reach" in which the degree of expectation that a jackpot state will occur is higher than that of the "normal reach". In "Super Reach" in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 289, "Ripple Reach Background HG13" consisting of an image (video) in which ripples appear is displayed as the background HG on the liquid crystal display section 42a.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a "special reach" in which the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot state is higher than that of the "super reach". In "Special Reach" in this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 290, "Amakin Reach Background HG14" consisting of an image (video) in which a Kaito character appears is displayed as the background HG on the liquid crystal display section 42a. Ru.

However, there are multiple types of each reach effect pattern, and in this embodiment, single reach (hereinafter referred to as S reach) in which the same type of symbols Z1 to Z9 are lined up only on one jackpot line, and two diagonal jackpot lines. A double reach (hereinafter referred to as W reach) is set in which symbols Z1 to Z9 of the same type are lined up in a crossed manner at the top. In other words, the reach effect patterns shown in FIGS. 288 to 290 are "Sango W Reach," "Ripple W Reach," and "Kaijin W Reach," respectively.

Then, as described above, the symbols Z1 to Z9 are fixedly displayed on the predetermined jackpot line in combination of jackpot symbols (combination of symbols of the same type), and when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed, the liquid crystal display of the effect display device 42 The opening effect (see FIG. 284) is started on the display section 42a. Here, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state may be displayed.

Subsequently, the opening/closing shutter 32b of the variable winning device 32 is opened, and the game ball can enter the grand prize opening 32a, and the round effect (see FIG. 285) is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42. will be started.

However, in this embodiment, since the variable prize winning device 32 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position where the game balls flowing down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach), If the player continues to "hit left-handed", the game ball cannot be won into the variable winning device 32. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 284 and 285, when the jackpot performance (opening performance or round performance) is started, the instruction display area W2 shows the player pointing towards the right side area of the variable display unit 35 to play the game. ``Right-handed hit →'' is displayed to encourage the act of firing the ball (such act is hereinafter referred to as ``right-handed hit''). Accordingly, the player switches from "left-handed" to "right-handed" so that the game ball passes above the variable display unit 35 and heads toward the right side area of the variable display unit 35, and plays the special game. Play a jackpot game.

In the case of "hitting to the right" here, most of the game balls will be guided toward the variable winning device 32 by the nails and the like, and will be won into the variable winning device 32. This allows the player to acquire more game balls.

On the other hand, game balls that do not win into the variable winning device 32 and pass through the variable winning device 32 flow down toward the upper starting winning hole 33YA and the lower starting winning hole 33YB by the nails and the like.

In addition, in the right side area of the variable display unit 35, on the way to the variable winning device 32, a through gate 34 is provided which triggers the opening of the lower starting winning opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y). The game ball passes through the through gate 34.

Here, if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 and wins the open lottery, the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be in the open state, and the game ball will not be able to win into the lower starting prize opening 33YB. It becomes possible.

When the jackpot ends, the ending effect (see FIG. 286) is performed on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42.

After the jackpot ends, the winning support related to the opening/closing accessory 37Y will be provided while the special display devices 43L and 43R (effect display device 42) display fluctuations a predetermined number of times or until the next jackpot condition occurs. "High support mode" will be added as a mode.

Along with this, on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42, a predetermined support performance ("chance mode" performance or "gold mode" performance) related to the "high support mode" is performed. As described above, the chance mode background HG5 is displayed in the "chance mode" effect (see FIG. 281), and the gold mode background HG6 is displayed in the "gold mode" effect (see FIG. 282).

Further, during the support performance, a support count display area W4 is set on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42 (see FIGS. 281 and 282). The support count display area W4 apparently displays the support count that has been confirmed to be provided. Therefore, for example, even if it is confirmed that the number of support will be given "50 times" in the internal lottery, "20 times" is initially displayed for presentation purposes.

More specifically, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" or "4R normal jackpot B" and win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or When the "50 times/high support mode" is granted, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "1", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

Similarly, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "4R Probable Variable Jackpot B", you can win "20 times high support mode", "30 times high support mode", "40 times high support mode" or "50 times high support mode". - Even when the "high support mode" is provided, that is, when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "4", "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

On the other hand, if "16R normal jackpot A" or "4R normal jackpot A" is won and "30 times/high support mode S" is awarded, that is, the value of gaming state judgment value Xj is "2" or "5". In the case of (excluding Xj=“5” in the case of non-notification effect), “30 times” is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

In addition, if you win "16R Probable Variable Jackpot A", "4R Probable Variable Jackpot A" or "JUB Jackpot" and are granted "Until next time/high support mode", that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj is " 6", "until next time" is displayed in the support count display area W4 from the beginning. However, when the above-mentioned non-notification effect is performed, "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4. Then, each time the variable display is performed, the value is subtracted by 1 and displayed.

As mentioned above, while the "high support mode" is provided, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to win into the lower start winning hole 33YB, so even if the jackpot game ends, the player can not open or close the winning combination. It is preferable to continue "hitting to the right" in order to obtain an opportunity to open object 37Y. In other words, during the "high support mode", the game is set so that it is more advantageous to play the game by "hitting to the right". Therefore, in the instruction display area W2 of the performance display device 42 during the "high support mode", "Right hit →" is displayed to recommend "Right hit" to the player.

In this embodiment, when the normal number of times changes in the "high support mode" (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 does not show the end value "1 time"), that is, the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj The fluctuation time when is "1", "2", "4", and "5" is set to "1 second" by the fluctuation pattern table selected based on each gaming state judgment value Xj (at the time of jackpot except for). Then, on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

Also, when the "high support mode" changes a specific number of times (when the number of times displayed in the support number display area W4 is the ending value "1 time", that is, the "20th time" or "30th time" after the end of the jackpot) , the "40th" or "50th" variation time), that is, the variation time when the value of the gaming state determination value Xj is "7" is selected based on the value "7" of the gaming state determination value Xj. It is set to "25 seconds" according to the fluctuation pattern table (excluding when there is a jackpot). Then, on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42 during the support performance, a display performance corresponding to this is determined by the sub-control device 262 and executed.

The liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 during the above-mentioned specific times variation (25 seconds variation) displays a support continuation effect that excites the player's interest, such as a lottery to determine whether or not the "high support mode" continues. will be carried out.

For example, in this embodiment, a roulette effect is performed as the display effect (support continuation effect) at the time of the above-mentioned specific times variation. In the roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 291, a roulette symbol TR is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 42a. Accordingly, the variable display area W1 is displayed in a reduced size on the liquid crystal display section 42a. In the reduced variable display area W1, the upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas are switched to the left, middle, and right symbol display areas, and the jackpot line becomes one line.

The roulette symbol TR includes "end" indicating that the number of supports ends here, "+10 times" indicating that 10 more times will be added to the number of supports, and "next time" indicating that the number of supports will continue until the next jackpot. Items such as "until" are listed.

In the roulette effect, the crab pattern character rotates the roulette pattern TR, and the subsequent game state is determined by the item that stops at the position indicated by the arrow TY.

Here, the item to stop at depends on the number of grants of "high support mode" determined at the time of jackpot lottery ("20 times", "30 times", "40 times", "50 times") or "until next time". ”) and the number of support grants at that time (the value of the support number counter). The determined item is then displayed in the support count display area W4.

For example, if you win "16R normal jackpot B" with "50 times/high support mode" and after "20 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, if you reach the roulette effect, the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are "30" remaining support grants, so the item "+10 times" is selected.

For example, if you win "4R normal jackpot A" with "30 times/high support mode" and after "30 times" is initially displayed in the support number display area W4, the roulette effect is reached, Since the upper limit is not "until next time" and there are no more support grants left, the "End" item is selected.

Also, for example, if you win "16R Probable Jackpot A" with "Until Next Time/High Support Mode", a non-announcement effect is performed (the value of the gaming state judgment value Xj becomes "5"), and the number of support display area W4 is displayed. When the roulette effect is reached after "30 times" is initially displayed, the upper limit is "until next time", so the item "until next time" is selected.

Now, when the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 displays the remainder of the second variable display that can be suspended during the high support mode. The display mode (presentation mode) in is the above-mentioned "dark mode" (see FIG. 283).

In addition, in this embodiment, the "dark mode" is activated until a predetermined period of time (in this embodiment, 10 variable displays) has elapsed after the high support mode ends, regardless of whether or not the second variable display is on hold. maintained. The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the "dark mode" may also be configured to end as soon as there are no remaining pending items in the second variable display.

Further, when returning to the "low support mode", "← left-handed hit" is displayed in the instruction display area W2 of the liquid crystal display section 42a. However, in this embodiment, if you win during the "high support mode" and the winning information is stored in any of the holding areas of the second sub-fluctuating holding areas related to the lower starting prize opening 33YB, the second holding Among the pending images (pending icons) TB1 to TB4 displayed in the display area W3b, the display mode of the pending images TB1 to TB4 corresponding to the pending area in which the winning information is stored is changed to an image in a mode different from the normal mode. be done. In this embodiment, along with this, "Right hit →" is displayed in the instruction display area W2.

Therefore, even if the "high support mode" ends and returns to the "low support mode", if winning information is stored in the hold area, the above display will be displayed and the player will not be able to win. is suggested.

For example, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 in the small winning state is extremely short, so if you switch from the “left hitting” state to “right hitting” after the small winning occurs, it will not be in time, and the variable winning device 32 will not be able to play the game. In order to win the ball, it is necessary to hit it "right-handed" in advance. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the player can understand that a small win will occur due to the above-mentioned win suggestion, and therefore can prepare in advance, thereby reducing the chance of missing a small win.

Subsequently, at the end of the high support mode, if the second variable display that was suspended during the high support mode remains pending, a display is displayed in front of the dark mode background HG7 of the liquid crystal display section 42a that has become "dark mode". , the decorative symbols related to the remaining pending second variable display will be displayed in a variable manner.

Here, if the hall computer HC or the game data display device HD has a specification that allows distinguishing between the output modes of the jackpot signal 2, the display mode of the game data display device HD corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 is set to effect display. The mode is switched to, and the liquid crystal display section H50 displays text information indicating that the current state is the "last minute chance mode" in which the remaining suspension is being used up [see FIG. 272(c)].

After that, when there is no remaining pending second variable display, or if there is no remaining pending second variable display when the high support mode ends, the dark mode background HG7 of the liquid crystal display section 42a that has become "dark mode" The decorative symbol related to the first variable display that is to be generated or held in advance will be displayed in a variable manner.

After the high support mode ends, when the variable display is executed 10 times without a jackpot, the "dark mode" ends, the production mode returns to the "normal mode", and the liquid crystal display section 42a ``Normal stage background HG1'' is displayed (see FIG. 277).

As described in detail above, conventional gaming machines are provided with an auxiliary member that can change the probability of winning a prize in a predetermined opening in order to improve gaming performance.

The auxiliary member enters the winning easy period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the game, and the winning easy period ends when, for example, a change to a predetermined starting winning is made a predetermined number of times.

During the easy winning period, the hall equipment displays effects and data by outputting discernible signals to hall computers and the like.

However, in conventional gaming machines, no measures have been taken to prevent startup suspension based on the auxiliary member at the end of the easy-to-win period. It has been demanded.

The purpose of this gaming machine is to improve the interest in gaming by improving the ability to identify gaming states.

In contrast, specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a predetermined special game advantageous to the player is executed, triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means;
a variable display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when the determining means executes a determination as to whether or not to transition to the special gaming state;
a reservation means for reserving the right to execute a variable display of the predetermined symbol executed by the variable display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means is a first starting ball entering means, and the first starting ball entering means is switched between an unfavorable state in which entering the game ball is restricted and an advantageous state in which entering the game ball is easier than in the unfavorable state. a second starting ball entering means different from the first starting ball entering means;
A gaming machine in which the advantageous state is executed after the predetermined special game ends until a predetermined condition is satisfied,
a first output means that continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state at least in the advantageous state to the outside of the gaming machine;
Output stopping means for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first outputting means when a termination condition is satisfied based on the termination of the advantageous state;
a storage means capable of storing the number of reserved rights to execute a variable display of the predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state;
After the end of the advantageous state, at least the number of reserved rights triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored in the storage means. a second output means capable of continuously outputting specific identification information for a predetermined period of time that can identify that a predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right is executable;
Equipped with
The second output means is characterized in that it continuously outputs the specific identification information in an output manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information by the first output means,
By improving the ability to identify gaming states, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

More specifically, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention,
A jackpot state in which a jackpot game advantageous to the player (a game in which a game ball enters the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 that is opened) is executed when the game ball enters a predetermined starting jackpot. a determination function that determines whether or not to transition to
an effect display device 42 that displays a variable display of a predetermined symbol when the determination function determines whether or not to transition to a jackpot state;
A special fluctuation reservation area (RAM 503) for reserving the right to execute the fluctuation display of the symbols executed by the effect display device 42,
The predetermined starting winning openings include an upper starting winning opening 33YA and a lower starting winning opening 33YB in which a low support mode in which the entry of game balls is restricted and a high support mode in which the entry of game balls is facilitated. , including;
A pachinko machine 10 in which a high support mode is executed after the end of a jackpot game until the number of executions of the variable display reaches a predetermined number of times,
A second terminal 240b and a signal output function that continuously outputs a jackpot signal 2 (high level signal) that can identify the high support mode to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 at least in the high support mode;
A signal stop function that stops outputting the jackpot signal 2 based on the end of the high support mode;
A remaining reservation number register FR capable of storing the number of reservations for the right to execute a predetermined symbol variation display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the lower starting prize opening 33YB at the end of the high support mode;
After the high support mode ends, if at least the number of reserved rights triggered by the entry of a game ball into the lower start winning hole 33YB is stored in the remaining number of reserved numbers register FR, the number of reserved rights is stored in the remaining number of reserved numbers register FR. The second terminal 240b and a signal output function are capable of continuously outputting a pattern signal for a predetermined period that can identify that it is an executable period for displaying a predetermined symbol variation corresponding to the right.
By continuously outputting the pattern signal in an output mode different from the jackpot signal 2,
By improving the ability to identify gaming states, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

More specific issues, effects, etc. will be described below. For example, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, in the normal state (low support mode) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the lower start winning hole 33YB, the game ball is hit to the left and the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA. The gameplay is to let the ball hit and aim for a jackpot. On the other hand, in the high support mode where it is easy to enter the game ball into the lower start winning hole 33YB, which can be awarded after winning a jackpot (probable jackpot with high support mode) and the jackpot ends, you can hit the ball to the right and start the lower start. The game is such that a game ball enters the winning hole 33YB and the player aims for a jackpot state.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with an external terminal board 240 for externally outputting a signal (information) for identifying the current state of the pachinko machine. connected. Thereby, the hall computer HC can grasp the status of each pachinko machine 10 in the game hall.

Examples of signals outputted from the pachinko machine 10 to the hall computer HC include a jackpot signal 1 indicating that the current gaming state is a jackpot, and a jackpot signal indicating that the current gaming state is a jackpot or high support mode. There are 2 etc.

For example, as shown in FIG. 275(a), if you win a jackpot (probable variable jackpot with high support mode) in the normal state (low support mode), that is, if you win for the first time, at timing TM1 when the jackpot state starts. Both jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 switch from the off state (low level output) to the on state (high level output).

Then, the hall computer HC that detects the switching of the output levels of these signals (output of jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2) performs update processing (addition processing) of the total jackpot number counter and the consecutive jackpot number counter, and The updated value is saved in the hard disk together with other data as the game history of the pachinko machine 10 with the predetermined machine number that outputs the signal.

Here, the "total jackpot number counter" is a counting means for counting the total number of jackpots that have occurred in a predetermined pachinko machine 10 from the opening of the game hall to the present time. Further, the "consecutive jackpot number counter" is a counting means for counting the number of consecutive jackpots (number of consecutive jackpots) that occur continuously after the first win without returning to the normal state in a predetermined pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, based on the jackpot signals 1 and 2 outputted from a predetermined pachinko machine 10 (depending on the number of receptions of the jackpot signal 1 while the jackpot signal 2 is being received), the hall computer HC determines whether the pachinko machine 10 receives a normal win from the first win. It is possible to grasp how many times a jackpot state has occurred in a row (how many consecutive chances) without returning to the state.

Next, the hall computer HC transmits the updated values of the total jackpot number counter and the consecutive jackpot number counter, as well as a command to display these updated values, to the gaming data display corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 with the predetermined machine number. Send to device HD.

The game data display device HD that has received these data stores these data in its own RAM, etc., and changes the display mode of the liquid crystal display section H50 from the normal display mode [see FIG. 272(a)] to the active display mode [see FIG. 272(a)]. (see FIG. 272(b)), and data of predetermined display contents (display items) is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 272(b), the updated value of the continuous jackpot number counter is displayed in the display item [Number of continuations] on the liquid crystal display section H50 in the active display mode. Here, in the case of the first win, since the updated value of the continuous jackpot number counter is "1", "1" will be displayed in the column of the display item [Number of continuations].

After that, at timing TM2 when the jackpot state ends, the jackpot signal 1 turns off (low level output), while the high support mode is given after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot signal 2 continues to turn on (high level output). level output). Therefore, in the game data display device HD, the display mode of the liquid crystal display section H50 is maintained in the active display mode [see FIG. 272(b)].

Subsequently, during the high support mode after the end of the first jackpot state, if the second jackpot (jackpot with high support mode) is won without returning to the normal state, the jackpot signal 2 continues. While being maintained in the on state (high level output), the jackpot signal 1 becomes on state (high level output) again at timing TM3 when the jackpot state starts.

After that, at timing TM4 when the second jackpot state ends, the jackpot signal 1 turns off (low level output), while the high support mode is given after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot signal 2 continues to turn on. state (high level output).

Then, the hole computer HC that detects this performs processing such as updating the total jackpot number counter and the consecutive jackpot number counter as described above, and the display mode of the liquid crystal display section H50 in the game data display device HD is maintained in the active display mode. Ru. However, the value of the display item [number of continuations] on the liquid crystal display section H50 is the updated value of the continuous jackpot number counter. Here, since the updated value of the continuous jackpot number counter becomes "2", "2" will be displayed in the column of the display item [Number of continuations].

Here, in the case where a high support mode with a limited number of times with a specified support duration period is granted, if a jackpot is not won during the high support mode and the high support mode continues for the specified number of times (for example, 30 fluctuation displays). If it has ended, the jackpot signal 2 becomes OFF (low level output) at the end timing TM5 of the high support mode, and the counting of the number of consecutive wins by the hole computer HC is stopped. In accordance with this, the display mode in the game data display device HD is switched from the active display mode to the normal mode. In other words, the display of [number of continuations] in the active display mode ends at "2".

However, in the normal state after the end of the high support mode with a limited number of times, if a game ball enters the lower starting winning hole 33YB during the high support mode and there is a second variable display (remaining pending) that is stored pending, Conventionally, when a jackpot is won during the execution of the second fluctuation display (during the remaining pending period), the jackpot is regarded as the first hit by the hole computer HC, and at the timing TM6 when the jackpot state starts. , jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 both switch from the off state (low level output) to the on state (high level output).

In other words, for the player, the right to execute the second variable display (remaining pending) that was stored on hold during the high support mode is the right obtained during the high support mode. The jackpot state related to this is not counted in the number of successive wins up to that point, and the counting of the number of consecutive wins is restarted, so there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease.

In general, the normal state (low support mode) is a state in which the number of balls held by the player decreases, so the player should use the opening/closing accessory 37Y to assist (support) the opening/closing accessory 37Y when the ball enters the lower starting prize opening 33YB. I hope to win the jackpot again during the high support mode, which is an advantageous situation in which the game becomes easier and the number of balls you own is less likely to decrease. In other words, you want to continue to get as many jackpots as possible without going back to normal (low support mode). Therefore, one of the real pleasures of the game is increasing the number of consecutive jackpot wins (number of consecutive wins). Therefore, the display of the number of consecutive games on the game data display device HD or the like tends to attract the attention of many players, and has the effect of increasing the satisfaction level of the players themselves who play games here.

Therefore, it has been desired to grasp minute changes in the gaming state, such as the above-mentioned period during which the remaining suspension is being used up, and to output appropriate information in response to this.

On the other hand, in an example of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 275(b), a high support mode with a limited number of times is provided, and if a jackpot is not won during the high support mode, the high support mode continues for a specified number of times. (For example, if the variable display ends 30 times), at the end timing TM5 of the high support mode, the second variable display is suspended (remaining pending) triggered by the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB. If there is no remaining pending on the second fluctuation display, turn on the extension flag F3 (set the value of extension flag F3 to "1") and output the jackpot signal 2 continuously. The configuration is as follows.

However, the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 outputted here is converted into a different output mode from the normal one based on a predetermined signal pattern corresponding to the remaining number of reservations in the second variable display.

Then, the hall computer HC that detects this output signal regards the end timing TM5 of the high support mode with limited number of plays as an accompanying period of the high support mode, and enters a state in which it can continue counting the number of consecutive matches during that period. maintain. In line with this, in the game data display device HD, the display mode of the liquid crystal display section H50 is switched from the active display mode to the effect display mode [see FIG. 275(c)].

If no jackpot is won during this period and all remaining reservations in the second variable display are used up, the extension flag F3 is turned off (the value of the extension flag F3 is set to "0"), and At the end timing TM7, the jackpot signal 2 is turned off (low level), and counting of the number of consecutive wins by the hole computer HC is stopped. Further, at this timing TM7, the display mode of the game data display device HD is switched from the effect display mode to the normal mode.

In addition, in the game data display device HD, when the effect display mode ends (when the output of the jackpot signal 2 whose output mode has been converted is stopped), the liquid crystal display section H50 displays the player's information during the above-mentioned series of advantageous periods. In addition to displaying the number of prize balls acquired by the player in a large size, and displaying a message such as ``End of consecutive winnings'', the state that is counted as a series of profit earning states including the above-mentioned incidental period (remaining pending period) has ended. A notification display that can be identified by the player is performed.

At the same time, in the pachinko machine 10, a message such as "last minute chance mode ended" is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the performance display device 42, and the state is counted as a series of profit earning states including the above-mentioned accompanying period (remaining hold period). It may be possible to display a notice that allows the player to identify that the game has ended.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 275(c), if a jackpot is won during the execution of the second variable display (during the remaining pending period: during the last-minute chance mode), the jackpot is the first hit in the hall computer HC. At timing TM8 when the jackpot state starts, the jackpot signal 1 switches from the off state (low level output) to the on state (high level output), and the jackpot signal 2 changes to the predetermined signal pattern. The specific output mode based on the output mode is switched to a normal constant high level output mode.

Then, the hole computer HC that detects this performs the process of updating the total jackpot number counter and the consecutive jackpot number counter, etc., and continues counting the number of consecutive jackpots, as described above. Further, the display mode of the liquid crystal display section H50 in the game data display device HD is switched from the effect display mode to the active display mode. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 272(b), if the jackpot state is won for the third time, the value of the continuous jackpot number counter is updated from "2" to "3", so the display items on the liquid crystal display section H50 In the [Number of continuations] column, "3", which is the updated value of the continuous jackpot number counter, will be displayed.

As described above, according to an example of the present embodiment, it is possible to output suitable information in response to minute changes in the gaming state, such as during the remaining suspension period (last-minute chance mode).

As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is currently in the last-minute chance mode after the end of the high support mode, that is, during the period of extinguishing the remaining hold (execution period of the second variable display corresponding to the held right) for the hall computer HC etc. middle).

In addition, the hall computer HC can distinguish the expiry period of the remaining reservations after the end of the high support mode (bare chance mode) from other gaming states such as during the high support mode. It is also possible to execute dedicated information display and effects during the chance mode) on the game data display device HD or the like. As a result, in addition to the original performance (fluctuating display performance, etc.) performed on the pachinko machine 10, the information display and performance etc. are performed on the game data display device HD, etc., and due to the synergistic effect of these, the player It is possible to dramatically improve the interest of children.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the embodiment described above, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Here, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to the above embodiment, or a part or all of them may be arbitrarily combined and applied to the above embodiment. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments.

(a) The pachinko machine 10 according to the above embodiment is a type of game in which a jackpot state in which the variable winning device 32 opens and closes when a jackpot is won in a lottery based on balls entering the starting winning holes 33YA and 33YB. It is a machine.

The present invention is not limited to this, and may be implemented as another type of pachinko machine that is given a predetermined game value. Note that the gaming value includes, for example, gaming media such as prize balls paid out to players, special prize states (rounds) awarded during jackpots, gaming modes such as high probability modes awarded after jackpots, etc. . In addition to the pachinko machine, it is also possible to implement various game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a mahjong ball machine.

(a-1) As an example, in addition to the configuration according to the above embodiment, when a small win is won in a lottery based on the ball entering the lower start winning hole 33YB, the variable winning device 32 does not open and the The variable winning device 32 is equipped with a second variable winning device that opens instead, and when a game ball that enters the second variable winning device enters a predetermined special winning section (V winning hole), the variable winning device 32 It may be implemented as a type of pachinko machine (so-called 1 type 2 type mixer) that can generate a jackpot state in which the machine is in an open state.

Here, a more specific configuration of a pachinko machine called a 1-type 2-type mixer will be described. Such a pachinko machine includes, for example, a first starting ball entry means that shoots (left-handed) a game ball into the left side area of the gaming area and a first starting ball entering means based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. A first display device that displays a variable display, a first holding device that can hold the first variable display a predetermined number of times, and a second starting ball entry device that shoots (hits to the right) a game ball into the right side area of the game area and aims it. a second display device that displays a second variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means; a second holding means capable of holding the second variable display a predetermined number of times; The system includes an opening/closing member that changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball entering means and a closed state in which the ball cannot enter, and the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means. A jackpot lottery is conducted based on the balls, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a jackpot state advantageous to the player can be generated, and the game ball is entered into the second starting ball entry means. A game in which a small winning lottery is conducted based on balls, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a small winning state can be generated in which a predetermined variable winning device is released, and a ball enters the variable winning device. It is configured to be able to generate a jackpot state when a ball enters a specific ball entry means (V winning hole).

Generally, in such a pachinko machine, in a normal state (low support state) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering means, the game ball is hit left-handed and the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means. The gameplay is to let the ball hit and aim for a jackpot. On the other hand, in a high support state that can be given after the end of the jackpot state, where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering means, hit the right hand and let the game ball enter the second starting ball entering means. The game is such that a winning state is generated, a game ball is entered into a specific ball entering means (V winning hole) in the opened variable winning device, and a jackpot state is aimed at.

Under such a configuration, in recent years, in the high support state after the end of the jackpot state, a predetermined performance (rush performance, etc.) is executed on the variable display means such as the performance display device 42, and after the high support state ends, During the execution of the second variable display in which the ball enters the second starting ball entering means and is stored in the high support state (while the remaining hold of the second variable display is being used up), the variable display means displays a continuous chance display, etc. Some gaming machines are designed to increase the interest of players.

In addition, during the above continuous chance performance, various performances and information output related to the last-minute chance mode (during the expiration period of the remaining hold of the second variable display after the end of the high support mode) in the above embodiment are the same as in the above embodiment. The configuration may also be adopted.

Of course, a configuration different from the above embodiment may be adopted. For example, in the "normal mode" after the end of the high support mode, the display mode may be different depending on whether or not the second variable display is pending.

Here, an example of the production mode switching setting process in the case where the production mode in the production display device 42 is set to "normal mode" after the high support mode ends will be described.

In this embodiment, when setting the production mode to "normal mode", first the remaining pending number information stored in the remaining pending number register FR (or the pending number information stored in the second pending counter Nb) is set to 0. Determine whether it is larger than . In other words, it is determined whether or not there is a hold on the second variable display (remaining hold) triggered by the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB during the high support mode. In addition, as mentioned above, under the configuration according to this embodiment, the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB can substantially only occur during the high support mode.

Then, when there is no remaining pending second variable display, that is, when executing the first variable display, the production mode is set to the "normal mode" of the normal mode. Specifically, in the "normal mode" in which the display mode on the effect display device 42 is the normal mode, the displayed image is in a vivid full-color color scheme using a plurality of colors.

On the other hand, if the second variable display remains pending, the production mode is set to a specific mode of "normal mode." Specifically, in the "normal mode" in which the display mode on the liquid crystal display section 42a of the effect display device 42 is a specific mode, the displayed image has a reddish monotone color scheme.

Of course, the display content and display mode of the liquid crystal display section 42a in the specific mode of "normal mode" are not limited to the above-described content, and may be other different display content or display mode. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which different display modes or different effects are performed depending on the number of remaining reservations in the second variable display after the end of the high support mode. In addition, since the remaining number of holds in the second variable display after the end of the high support mode is grasped, it is possible to use (Middle) A configuration may be adopted in which a continuously progressing animation (continuous performance spanning multiple variable displays) is derived.

In addition, text information indicating the current gaming state is displayed on the liquid crystal display section 42a, allowing the player to recognize that the remaining pending period of the second variable display is in progress. For example, the performance name related to the remaining pending expiration period is displayed. Of course, the text information displayed here is not limited to this, but is intended to help the player understand that the current gaming state is different from the normal state, that is, that the remaining pending period has expired. It is fine as long as it is something.

(a-2) In the above embodiment, a high support mode with a limit on the number of times in which an upper limit is set on the support duration can be provided as the winning support mode after the end of the jackpot, but instead of this, Alternatively, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a type of pachinko machine that ends the high support mode and shifts to the low support mode when a predetermined fall lottery is performed during the high support mode and a predetermined loss result is obtained.

(a-3) The winning probability for various types of drawings related to pachinko machines (soft drawing processing, mechanical mechanism drawing, etc.) shall be set appropriately for each machine, and any value may be adopted. I can do it.

(a-4) Furthermore, it may be implemented as a type of gaming machine in which game balls are circulated within the gaming machine and are not directly paid out to the player, a so-called enclosed type pachinko machine.

(b) Electrical configuration inside the pachinko machine 10 (electrical connection configuration between various control devices, various boards, etc., input/output method of various information, etc.), and electrical configuration outside the pachinko machine 10 such as a game hall ( The electrical connection configuration between various devices, the input/output method of various information, etc.) are not limited to the above embodiments, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(b-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the main control device 261, which is the sending device, controls the sub-control device 262, which is the receiving device, and the sub-control device 262, which is the sending device, is the receiving device. The control device 45 is controlled, and the display control device 45, which is a transmitting device, controls the effect display device 42, which is a receiving device.

Instead, for example, a predetermined control device in which the functions of both the main control device 261 and the sub-control device 262, which are transmitting devices, are integrated into one display control device 45 (effect display device 42, which is a receiving device) can be used. ) may be controlled. Alternatively, the effect display device 42, which is a receiving device, may be controlled by a predetermined control device in which the functions of both the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45, which are transmitting devices, are integrated into one. In addition, the effect display device 42, which is a receiving device, is controlled by a predetermined control device in which the functions of the main controller 261, sub-control device 262, and display control device 45, which are transmitting devices, are integrated into one. A configuration may also be used.

(b-2) In the above embodiment, the output destination of various information output from each output terminal of the external terminal board 240 of the pachinko machine 10 is the hall computer HC, but the information output destination is not limited to this. However, other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the island equipment of a game hall, the pachinko machine 10 and the game data display device HD are electrically connected by a predetermined communication cable, and various information output from the pachinko machine 10 is directly transmitted to the game data without going through the hall computer HC. It may also be configured to be input to the display device HD.

In such a case, the various information output from each output terminal of the external terminal board 240 of the pachinko machine 10 may be branched by a predetermined branching means and input to both the game data display device HD and the hall computer HC.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which various information output from each output terminal of the external terminal board 240 of the pachinko machine 10 is input to the hall computer HC via the game data display device HD.

(b-3) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the information input/output method between the hall computer HC and the game data display device HD, and the information input/output method between the various control devices inside the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the main control device 261 and the sub-control device 262, between the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45, between the display control device 45 and the effect display device 42, etc.) The information input/output method, etc., is a serial communication method or parallel communication. Any method may be used.

(c) The configuration related to the game board (gaming area) is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(c-1) For example, the game board 30 according to the above embodiment is configured based on a transparent plate that is a light-transmitting member, but is not limited to this, and may be constructed using an opaque member such as wood that does not have light-transmitting properties. may be configured.

(c-2) The configuration on the surface of the game board 30, such as the arrangement and number of various ball entry means (variable winning device 32, starting winning openings 33YA, 33YB, through gate 34, etc.), is limited to the above embodiment. However, other configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the through gate 34 and the variable winning device 32 are arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 35 (a position that the game ball that has flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 cannot reach), and the variable display An upper starting prize opening 33YA is provided at a lower position in the center of the left and right direction of the device unit 35, and a lower starting winning opening 33YB is further arranged below the upper starting winning opening 33YA.

However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the upper start prize opening 33YA may be arranged in a position that cannot be reached by game balls that have flown down the right side area of the variable display unit 35, or the game balls that have flowed down the left side area of the variable display unit 35 may It is also possible to arrange the lower starting prize opening 33YB at a position that cannot be reached by the ball.

Further, the variable winning device 32 may be arranged at a position that can be reached by the game ball that has flown down the left side area of the variable display device unit 35.

Further, the vertical positional relationship of the through gate 34, the lower starting winning opening 33YB, the variable winning winning device 32, etc. is not limited to the above embodiment, and a different arrangement may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the lower starting prize opening 33YB is arranged on the upstream side of the variable winning device 32.

(c-3) Instead of the effect display device 42 according to the above embodiment, a display of a size covering substantially the entire back side of the gaming area or substantially the entire back side of the gaming board 30 at the rear position of the game board 30 having translucency A configuration may also be adopted in which a display device having a screen is provided as a variable display section.

In addition, in the game board 30 having translucency, the game board 30 is arranged so as to cover the front side of the performance display device 42 (liquid crystal display section 42a) without providing an opening for mounting the performance display device 42. It may be configured as follows. At this time, nails or the like may be placed on the front side of the game board 30, which is the area in front of the effect display device 42 (liquid crystal display section 42a), to make this an area where the game balls can flow down. Of course, this may be an area where the game ball cannot fall.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of display devices forming the variable display section are provided.

(d) Various gaming states in the gaming machine are not limited to the above embodiments, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(d-1) The jackpot type is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, other configurations may be adopted in which the game value to be awarded is different from the above embodiment, such as the number of rounds during a jackpot, the opening time during a round, and the game mode awarded after the jackpot ends.

Furthermore, instead of being a gaming machine that can generate multiple types of jackpot states, it may be implemented as a gaming machine that only generates one type of jackpot state (for example, a 15R jackpot).

In addition, in the above embodiment, the jackpot type that is awarded when a game ball is won in the win/fail lottery is divided between when the game ball enters the upper start winning hole 33YA and when the game ball enters the lower start winning hole 33YB. Although the configurations are different, the ratio is not limited to the above embodiment, and different distribution ratios may be used.

In addition, the distribution ratio of the jackpot type awarded when winning in the win/fail lottery is the same when the game ball enters the upper starting winning hole 33YA and when the ball enters the lower starting winning hole 33YB. You can.

(d-2) Regarding small wins, it is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which multiple types of small winning states with different numbers of rounds, opening times, etc. can occur. Further, the small winning state may be used as a special game state in this embodiment.

(d-3) In the above embodiment, the "high probability mode", which has a higher jackpot probability than the "low probability mode", can be provided as the lottery mode after the jackpot state ends.

Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the "high probability mode" is not provided after the jackpot state ends. In other words, the lottery mode ("high probability mode" or "low probability mode") may not be switched, but only the winning support mode ("high support mode" or "low support mode") may be switched.

In addition, the "high probability mode" in the above embodiment is configured to continue until the next jackpot state occurs, but is not limited to this, and is a high probability mode with a limit on the number of times with an upper limit of the duration. It is also possible to have a configuration in which . Furthermore, the duration of the high probability mode may be set in a plurality of ways.

(d-4) In the above embodiment, as the winning support mode related to the second starting ball entry means (the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting winning hole 33YB), after the jackpot state ends, a predetermined number is displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R. While the number of fluctuations is displayed or until the next jackpot state occurs, the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the second starting ball entry means is higher than in the "low support mode". The configuration is such that a “high support mode” can be added.

The configuration related to the "high support mode", that is, the configuration related to the advantageous state related to the second starting ball entry means, is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which only the high support mode with a limited number of times can be provided.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the "high support mode" is always given after the jackpot ends regardless of the jackpot type, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the "high support mode" is not given depending on the jackpot type. You can also use it as

In addition, as an advantageous state, compared to the low support mode, although the ratio of the open state to the closed state per unit time in the opening/closing accessory 37Y of the lower starting prize opening 33YB is higher, the time when the opening/closing accessory 37Y is in the open state is higher. A configuration may also be adopted in which a support mode (so-called slight time saving mode) that is shorter than the high support mode can be generated. In other words, the slight time saving mode is not as advantageous to the player as the high support mode, but it is more advantageous than the low support mode.

(e) The configuration regarding the reservation means is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(e-1) In the above embodiment, the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB is better than the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the upper starting winning hole 33YA. It is configured to be digested with priority.

The present invention is not limited to this, but if both the first variable display triggered by the entry of the ball into the upper starting winning slot 33YA and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the lower starting winning slot 33YB are suspended. Alternatively, the variable display may be configured to be digested according to the order in which the game balls enter the upper starting winning hole 33YA or the lower starting winning hole 33YB.

(e-2) A configuration that can execute the first variable display triggered by the ball entering the upper start winning hole 33YA and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the lower start winning hole 33YB in parallel. You can also use it as

(e-3) The upper limit of the number of reservations (maximum number of reservations) is not limited to four, and other different configurations may be adopted. A configuration may be adopted in which less than four or five or more can be held. Moreover, it is good also as a structure in which the maximum number of reservations concerning the upper start winning a prize opening 33YA and the maximum number of reservations concerning the lower starting winning opening 33YB are different.

(f) The "predetermined condition" under which the duration of the advantageous state (high support mode, etc.) ends is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

In the above embodiment, the advantageous state (high support mode, etc.) is terminated when a predetermined condition is satisfied that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times after a predetermined jackpot ends.

This is not limited to, for example, a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) has elapsed after the end of a predetermined jackpot, a start condition for a predetermined fluctuating display such as a fluctuating display related to the occurrence of a jackpot condition is satisfied, a predetermined fluctuating display (e.g. (a fluctuating display when a jackpot state is derived) starts, a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of a predetermined fluctuating display, the predetermined fluctuating display stops, and the stopping of the predetermined fluctuating display is confirmed; A predetermined period of time has elapsed after the predetermined fluctuating display has stopped, a game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area, or a predetermined number of game balls enter the ball, or a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on this. , a predetermined operation means (for example, the performance button 125) is operated or operated a predetermined number of times, or based on this, a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability and a predetermined result is obtained, a suspension means (for example, Predetermined information or results are included in the rights reserved in the special fluctuation reservation area), a predetermined performance is performed or a predetermined performance is performed a predetermined number of times, and a predetermined number of game balls are fired or paid out. , a game ball entering a predetermined ball entry means, a predetermined number of game balls entering the ball, a predetermined count reaching an upper limit value, or the like.

(g) Configurations related to the first output means and second output means (including mechanical configurations such as output terminals, and electrical configurations such as output processing), and identification by the first output means and second output means The information output mode is not limited to the above embodiment, and other different configurations may be adopted.

(g-1) In the above embodiment, the jackpot signal 2, which is the predetermined identification information output during the high support mode, is a level signal with a high output level, but the present invention is not limited to this. The jackpot signal 2 may be configured to output an intermittent pulse signal, for example.

(g-2) In the above embodiment, the jackpot signal 2, which is the specific identification information output during the remaining pending period of the second fluctuation display after the end of the high support mode, is a plurality of pre-stored signal patterns. A predetermined signal pattern corresponding to the current hold status (remaining number of holds in the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the lower starting prize opening 33YB) is extracted from among the signals and output based on the signal pattern. Although the pattern signal is a converted pattern signal, the output mode of the jackpot signal 2, which is specific identification information output during the remaining pending period of the second fluctuation display, is not limited to this, and may be used in other ways. A different configuration may be adopted.

For example, the jackpot signal 2, which is specific identification information, may be a constant level signal at a third output level different from the low level signal or the high level signal. It should be noted that a high level signal (same signal) having the same level as the normal jackpot signal 2 may be extended and output as is. In this way, the hall computer HC can understand that the signal (jackpot signal 2) is extended and outputted from at least the second terminal 240b of the external terminal board 240, and especially when it comes to counting the number of consecutive games, etc. It can be done without any problem.

In addition, the difference between "output mode of predetermined identification information" and "output mode of specific identification information" is that the receiving device that receives the identification information (electrical signal, etc.) output from the sending device Any method may be used as long as it can determine the difference in the output mode of the identification information, for example, the difference between a level signal that is continuously output at a constant level during a predetermined period and a pulse signal that is intermittently output during a predetermined period, Due to differences in the pulse interval (continuous off time) and/or pulse width (continuous on time) of pulse signals that are intermittently output during a predetermined period, or due to differences in the number of pulse signals that are intermittently output during a predetermined period. This is due to the difference between a pulse signal that is output periodically during a predetermined period and a pattern signal whose output level is switched in a predetermined pattern during a predetermined period, and a pulse signal that is output at a constant level continuously during a predetermined period. Differences between level signals and pattern signals whose output levels are switched in a predetermined pattern during a predetermined period; differences between pattern signals whose output levels are switched in a predetermined pattern during a predetermined period; Any combination of various types may be used. In the first place, the output method is different, such as the difference between electrical signals and optical signals, the difference between light and sound, the difference between sound and images, the difference between images and electrical signals, etc. good.

(g-3) In the above embodiment, the output mode of the specific identification information (jackpot signal 2) is configured to differ depending on the number of remaining reservations in the second variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may be adopted in which the output mode is the same regardless of the number of reservations.

(g-4) In the above embodiment, once the remaining pending number of the second variable display at the end of the high support mode is determined, the information output in the same manner is continuously executed during the expiration period. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the output mode of the jackpot signal 2, which is specific identification information, may also change at any time, for example, in accordance with a decrease in the value of the remaining pending number register FR (remaining pending number). For example, when the number of remaining reservations changes from "3" to "2", the output mode of the jackpot signal 2 may also change.

(g-5) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, there is a case where at least one variable display that transitions to a jackpot state is included in the remaining second variable display at the end of the high support mode, When specific variable displays such as super reach and special reach are included, the jackpot signal 2, which is specific identification information, may be output in a different output mode than when these are not included. Furthermore, when a fluctuating display that transitions to a jackpot state is included, the jackpot signal 2, which is specific identification information, may be output in different output modes depending on the winning type.

For example, if at least one fluctuation display related to a jackpot is included in the remaining second fluctuation display at the end of the high support mode, the output level switches between high level and low level every 12 msec. A configuration may be adopted in which one pattern signal is output, and if this pattern signal is not included, a second pattern signal whose output level switches between high level and low level every 24 msec is output.

(g-6) In the above embodiment, the jackpot signal 2 which is predetermined identification information (level signal) and the jackpot signal 2 which is specific identification information (pattern signal) are sent from the main controller 261 to the external terminal board 240. It is configured to be output via .

However, the output source of the identification information outputted via the external terminal board 240 etc. is not limited to the main control device 261, and may be output from the sub-control device 262 or the display control device without going through the main control device 261. 45, various control devices equipped with a control board capable of executing predetermined information output processing, terminals and ports for information output, and external terminals capable of relaying and outputting information output from these various control devices. It may be of any configuration, such as combination with various relay boards such as plates.

In this embodiment, "predetermined identification information" and "specific identification information" respectively refer to, for example, a level signal such as a high level signal or a low level signal that is output at a constant level for a predetermined period, or a level signal that is output intermittently with a predetermined pulse width. Various electrical signals such as pulse signals that are output to , pattern signals whose output levels are switched according to a predetermined pattern such as Morse code, signals that output information by a predetermined light emission, signals that output information by a predetermined sound, and predetermined electromagnetic waves. It may be any signal, such as a signal that outputs information based on a predetermined image, a signal that outputs information based on a predetermined image, or a combination thereof.

(g-7) In the above embodiment, an output terminal to which predetermined identification information (for example, jackpot signal 2 of the level signal during high support mode) is output, and an output terminal that outputs specific identification information (for example, remaining reservation after high support mode ends) The output terminal to which the jackpot signal 2) of the pattern signal during the expiration period is output is the same. Alternatively, the output terminal related to the first output means capable of outputting predetermined identification information and the output terminal related to the second output means capable of outputting specific identification information are provided spaced apart without being adjacent to each other. It is also possible to have a different configuration. For example, in the external terminal board 240, in addition to the second terminal 240b that outputs predetermined identification information (for example, jackpot signal 2), specific identification information (for example, a level signal during the remaining suspension period after the end of the high support mode or It is also possible to have a configuration including an output terminal (eg, No. 11 terminal) from which a pattern signal) is output.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the position of the output terminal to which specific identification information is output is provided at a position different from that of the external terminal board 240. Such an output terminal can be placed at any position on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in the case of such a configuration, the receiving device can distinguish between the two regardless of the output format, so that the output mode of the predetermined identification information and the output mode of the specific identification information are the same (for example, high level signal).

(g-8) In the above embodiment, when the value of the second pending counter Nb (remaining pending number) is larger than 0 at the end of the high support mode, and this value is set in the remaining pending number register FR, that is, When the second variable display remains pending, the extension flag F3 is turned on and the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output (extended output).

For example, the extension flag F3 is turned on and the jackpot signal 2 is continuously output (extended output), regardless of whether or not the second fluctuation display remains pending at the end of the high support mode, and then, It is determined whether there is any remaining pending of the second variable display, and if there is any remaining pending of the second variable display, the jackpot signal 2 is output as is, and if there is no remaining pending of the second variable display, Even if the remaining hold of the second fluctuation display is not stored in the predetermined storage means after the end of the high support mode, such as turning off the extension flag F3 and stopping the output of the jackpot signal 2, specific identification information ( A configuration may also be adopted in which output processing for outputting the jackpot signal 2) can be executed.

As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as, for example, temporary interruption of the output of the jackpot signal 2, and to perform the continuous processing of the signal output more appropriately and more smoothly.

(h) The output start timing and output stop timing of various identification information such as jackpot signals 1 and 2 are not limited to the above embodiments, and other different configurations may be adopted. In addition, in the above embodiment, a fixed display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) for definitively stopping and displaying the stopped symbols is not set so that the next variable display starts immediately after the symbol changing display stops. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a predetermined fixed display period is set after the variable display stops.

(h-1) The predetermined identification information (jackpot signal 2) and the start condition (start timing) for starting output of the jackpot signal 1 are not limited to the above embodiments, and other different configurations may be adopted. You may.

In the above embodiment, the predetermined identification information etc. are output at the timing when the predetermined fluctuation display from which the jackpot state is derived stops, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be any timing, such as the timing when the fluctuating display stops and a predetermined fixed display period has elapsed, the start timing of the opening period of the jackpot state, the end timing of the opening period of the jackpot state, etc.

(h-2) End condition (end timing) for stopping the output of predetermined identification information (for example, jackpot signal 2 of the level signal when there is no remaining hold of the second fluctuation display at the end of the high support mode), and specific The start conditions (output start timing) for starting the output of the identification information (for example, jackpot signal 2 of the pattern signal when the second fluctuation display is pending at the end of the high support mode) are limited to the above embodiments. However, other different configurations may be adopted. This may be established based on at least the end of an advantageous state (high support mode, etc.).

For example, in the above embodiment, the predetermined identification information is set on the condition that the predetermined fluctuating display (in the above embodiment, the predetermined fluctuating display after the end of the jackpot) corresponding to the end of the high support mode as an advantageous state stops. The configuration is such that the output of specific identification information is stopped and the output of specific identification information is started.

The conditions are not limited to this, for example, the stoppage of a predetermined fluctuation display corresponding to the end of an advantageous state (high support mode, etc.) is confirmed, or the stoppage of a predetermined fluctuation display corresponding to the end of an advantageous state is confirmed. A predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, and the start condition for the next variable display after the predetermined variable display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state is (for example, a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means). ) is established, the next variable display of the predetermined variable display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state starts, and a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the next variable display of the predetermined variable display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state. that the variable display next to the predetermined variable display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state stops; a predetermined period of time elapses after the stop of the variable display next to the predetermined variable display corresponding to the end of the advantageous state; A game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area or a predetermined number of game balls enter the ball, or a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on this and a predetermined result is obtained, and a predetermined operation means (for example, a production button) 125) is operated or operated a predetermined number of times, or based on this, a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability and a predetermined result is obtained, the right reserved in the reservation means includes predetermined information or results, The passage of a predetermined period of time, the execution of a predetermined performance or the predetermined number of performances, the firing or payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and the entry of game balls into a predetermined ball entry means. Alternatively, it may be anything, such as a predetermined number of game balls entering the ball, or a predetermined count reaching an upper limit.

(h-3) The end condition (end timing) for stopping the output of specific identification information (for example, jackpot signal 2 of the pattern signal when the second fluctuation display is pending at the end of the high support mode) is as follows. The configuration is not limited to this, and other different configurations may be adopted.

For example, in the above embodiment, the jackpot signal 2, which is specific identification information (for example, a pattern signal), is immediately output on condition that the corresponding last variable display stops at the end of the expiration period of the remaining pending second variable display. The jackpot signal 2 is stopped and the jackpot signal 2 becomes a low level signal.

The conditions are not limited to this, for example, the suspension of the last variable display corresponding to the end of the remaining pending period of the second variable display is confirmed, and the condition corresponds to the end of the remaining pending period of the second variable display. A predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed after the last variable display stopped or was confirmed, and the next variable display after the last variable display corresponds to the end of the remaining pending period of the second variable display. The start condition is satisfied (for example, a game ball enters the first starting ball entry means), and the next variable display after the last variable display corresponding to the end of the remaining hold period of the second variable display starts. a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the next variable display of the last variable display corresponding to the end of the remaining pending period of the second variable display, and at the end of the remaining pending period of the second variable display. The variable display next to the corresponding last variable display stops, and a predetermined period of time elapses after the variable display next to the corresponding last variable display stops at the end of the expiration period of the remaining pending of the second variable display; A game ball enters a predetermined ball entry area or a predetermined number of game balls enter the ball, or a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability based on this and a predetermined result is obtained, and a predetermined operation means (for example, a production button) 125) is operated or operated a predetermined number of times, or based on this, a lottery is drawn with a predetermined probability and a predetermined result is obtained, the right reserved in the reservation means includes predetermined information or results, The passage of a predetermined period of time, the execution of a predetermined performance or the predetermined number of performances, the firing or payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and the entry of game balls into a predetermined ball entry means. Alternatively, it may be anything, such as a predetermined number of game balls entering the ball, or a predetermined count reaching an upper limit.

In other words, the configuration continues to output specific identification information (for example, a pattern signal) until a specific period elapses after the predetermined variable display that is executed at the end of the remaining hold period of the second variable display is stopped. You can also use it as

Note that "continuously" means that the receiving device that receives the identification information (electrical signal, etc.) output from the transmitting device determines that the identification information is substantially continuously output for a predetermined period of time. Of course, it is possible if the identification information (level signal) is outputted continuously at a constant level without interruption for a predetermined period of time, but also if the pulse signal is outputted intermittently, or if the output mode of the identification information is changed. This also includes a case where the output level of the identification information is changed periodically or irregularly during a predetermined period, such as a case where the output level changes midway. Therefore, "continuously" does not mean that the output signal is not interrupted at all; for example, it may be in a state where it is not output during the fluctuating display, and is output at least when the fluctuating display stops. In other words, it is only necessary to be able to determine whether or not the special game state (jackpot state) related to the variable display can be counted in the number of consecutive games when the variable display stops.

(i) In the above embodiment, in steps SE1007 and SE1008, if there is a remaining hold in the second variable display, the value of the second hold counter Nb (remaining hold count) is set in the remaining hold count register FR. Thereafter, the remaining pending usage period of the second variable display is grasped while taking into account the remaining pending number register FR.

On the other hand, for example, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the remaining reservation expiration period is determined by directly considering the second special variable reservation area or the second reservation counter Nb without providing the remaining reservation number register FR. .

However, in the case of such a configuration, there is a possibility that the process of determining the remaining pending expiration period, etc., becomes extremely complicated.

For example, in the gaming machine according to the above embodiment, in the normal state (low support mode), even if the player hits the right hand, the bottom starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) is hardly opened, and the game ball The configuration is such that it is difficult for the player to enter the lower starting prize opening 33YB, but instead of this, in the normal state (including during the remaining pending expiry period described above), if a predetermined condition is met, the player It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which when the game ball passes through the through gate 34 by "hitting to the right", the opening condition for the lower starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) is relatively easily satisfied.

More specifically, for example, during the above-mentioned remaining hold consumption period after the end of the high support mode, a recommendation display that recommends "hitting to the right" is displayed on the performance display device 42, and a game ball is placed in the bottom starting prize opening 33YB. It is also possible to have a configuration that executes a game performance such as letting the ball enter the ball.

In such a gaming machine, during the above-mentioned remaining suspension period after the end of the high support mode, a lottery (open lottery) by the normal symbol display device 41 is won, and the lower starting prize opening 33YB (opening/closing accessory 37Y) is opened. state, and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the lower starting winning hole 33YB will be newly suspended.

In such a case, under the configuration according to the above embodiment, there is a right to execute the second variable display (remaining pending) that was stored on hold during the high support mode, and a right to execute the second variable display that was stored on hold after the end of the high support mode. The right to be executed is mixed in the second special fluctuation holding area, etc., and if you look at it from a different perspective, the right to execute the second fluctuation display (remaining pending) that was held and stored during high support mode is mixed. There is also a risk that it may be considered an increased condition.

As a result, for example, if a jackpot occurs due to the second variable display that is stored on hold after the end of the high support mode, even the jackpot that should not be counted in the number of consecutive chances will be counted in the number of consecutive chances. There is a risk of it getting lost.

Therefore, the right to execute the second variable display (remaining pending) stored while in high support mode and the right to execute the second variable display stored on hold after high support mode ends are separated and grasped. It is necessary to control the As a result, there is a possibility that the process of determining the remaining pending expiration period, etc. becomes extremely complicated, and the control load increases significantly.

On the other hand, as in the above embodiment, when the high support mode ends, the value of the second pending counter Nb (remaining pending number information) is transferred to the remaining pending number register FR, and the remaining pending number register FR is taken into consideration. By configuring the configuration to grasp the pending expiration period, etc., it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems and to appropriately perform performances during the remaining pending expiration period.

In other words, during the normal state (including the above-mentioned remaining suspension expiration period), the specification is such that it is easy to win the lottery (open lottery) by the normal symbol display device 41, and the game ball is entered into the lower start prize opening 33YB. In addition to making it possible to appropriately execute a game performance, it also becomes possible to simultaneously execute the game performance and a performance during the remaining pending expiration period.

In addition, if there is a remaining hold on the second variable display after the high support mode ends, text information indicating the current gaming status will be displayed on the liquid crystal display section 42a, and the remaining hold on the second variable display will be displayed while the remaining hold on the second variable display is being used. It may also be a state that the player can recognize. For example, it may be displayed as "last-minute chance mode", which is the name of the performance related to the expiry period of remaining reservations in the above embodiment. Of course, the text information displayed here is not limited to this, but is intended to help the player understand that the current gaming state is different from the normal state, that is, that the remaining pending period has expired. It is fine as long as it is something.

[Additional notes]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiments will be described below along with their effects.

Conventional assignment YA. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that play games by shooting game balls into a gaming area. As a type of gaming machine, a lottery is held based on the entry of game balls into a predetermined starting ball entry means (starting hole), and if a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, an advantage is given to the player. There are pachinko machines in which a certain gaming state occurs.

Further, in conventional gaming machines, an auxiliary member is provided that can change the winning probability of a predetermined starting ball entry means in order to improve the playability.

The auxiliary member enters the winning easy period based on the establishment of a predetermined condition in the game, and the winning easy period ends when, for example, a change to a predetermined starting winning is made a predetermined number of times.

During the easy winning period, the hall equipment displays effects and data by outputting discernible signals to hall computers and the like.

As an example, a first starting ball entry means for shooting a game ball into the left side area of the gaming area (left hit) and a first variable display based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting ball entering means. a first display device capable of holding the first variable display a predetermined number of times; a second starting ball entry device that shoots (hits to the right) the game ball to the right side of the game area and aims; a second display device that performs a second variable display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entering means; a second holding means capable of holding the second variable display a predetermined number of times; and a second starting ball entering means. The device includes an opening/closing member (auxiliary member) that changes between an open state in which a game ball can enter the means and a closed state in which a ball cannot enter the means, and the game ball is introduced into the first starting ball entering means or the second starting ball entering means. There is a pachinko machine that performs a jackpot lottery based on ball entry, and when a predetermined result is obtained from the lottery, a jackpot situation advantageous to the player occurs.

Normally, in such a pachinko machine, in a normal state (low support state) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second starting ball entering means, the game ball is hit left-handed and the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means. The gameplay is to let the ball hit and aim for a jackpot. On the other hand, in a high support state (easy prize winning period) that can be given after the end of the jackpot state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting ball entering means, the game ball is hit right and the game ball enters the second starting ball entering means. The gameplay is to let the ball hit and aim for a jackpot.

In general, gaming machines such as pachinko machines are equipped with an external terminal board for externally outputting signals (information) that identify the current state of the machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2010-284365). In the game hall, the game hall is electrically connected to a hall computer that manages the game hall. Thereby, the hall computer can grasp the status of each gaming machine in the gaming hall.

Signals output from the gaming machine to the hall computer include, for example, a jackpot signal 1 indicating that the current gaming state is a jackpot state, a jackpot signal 2 indicating that the current gaming state is a jackpot state or a high support state, etc. There is.

For example, as shown in FIG. 275(a), if you win a jackpot (jackpot with high support state) in the normal state (low support state), that is, if you win for the first time, you will hit the jackpot at timing TM1 when the jackpot state starts. Both signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 switch from the off state (low level output) to the on state (high level output).

After that, at timing TM2 when the jackpot state ends, jackpot signal 1 turns off, while a high support state is given after the jackpot ends, so jackpot signal 2 continues to remain on (high level output). be done.

Subsequently, if a second jackpot (jackpot with high support state) is won without returning to the normal state during the high support state after the end of the first jackpot state, the jackpot signal 2 continues. While being maintained in the on state (high level output), the jackpot signal 1 becomes on state (high level output) again at timing TM3 when the jackpot state starts.

After that, at timing TM4 when the second jackpot state ends, the jackpot signal 1 turns off (low level output), while the high support state is given after the jackpot ends, so the jackpot signal 2 continues to turn on. state (high level output).

Then, based on the jackpot signals 1 and 2 output from the gaming machine (depending on the number of receptions of the jackpot signal 1 while receiving the jackpot signal 2), the hall computer of the gaming hall operates the gaming machine without returning to the normal state. The machine grasps how many consecutive jackpots have occurred (how many consecutive wins) and displays the counted number (number of consecutive wins) on a game data display device attached to the pachinko machine.

Here, in the case where a high support state with a limited support period and a limited number of times is granted, if a jackpot is not won during the high support state and the high support state continues for the specified number of times (for example, 30 fluctuation displays). If it ends, the jackpot signal 2 turns off (low level output) at the end timing TM5 of the high support state, and counting of the number of consecutive wins by the hole computer etc. is stopped.

However, in conventional gaming machines, no measures have been taken to prevent the startup from being suspended based on the opening/closing member (auxiliary member) at the end of the high support state (easy winning period); More suitable functions are required in terms of performance.

More specifically, for example, in the normal state after the end of the high support state with a limited number of times, a game ball enters the second starting ball entry means during the high support state, and the second variable display (remaining If there is a hold), conventionally, if a jackpot is won while the second variation display is being executed (while the remaining hold is being used up), the jackpot is considered to be the first hit on the hole computer, and the jackpot state starts. At timing TM6, both jackpot signal 1 and jackpot signal 2 switch from the off state (low level output) to the on state (high level output).

In other words, for the player, although the right to execute the second variable display (remaining pending) that was stored pending during the high support state is the right obtained during the high support state, the second variable display The jackpot state related to this is not counted in the number of successive wins up to that point, and the counting of the number of consecutive wins is restarted, so there is a risk that the player's interest may decrease.

In general, the normal state (low support state) is a state in which the number of balls held by the player decreases, so the player should try to make it easier for the player to enter the ball into the second starting ball entry means and reduce the amount of balls he or she has. I hope to win the jackpot again during the high support state, which is an advantageous situation where the number of bets is less likely to decrease. In other words, they want to continue to get as many jackpots as possible without returning to the normal state (low support state). Therefore, one of the real pleasures of the game is increasing the number of consecutive jackpot wins (number of consecutive wins). Therefore, the display of the number of consecutive games on a game data display device or the like tends to attract the attention of many players, and has the effect of increasing the satisfaction level of the players themselves who play games here.

Therefore, it has been desired to grasp minute changes in the gaming state, such as the above-mentioned period during which the remaining suspension is being used up, and to output appropriate information in response to this.

The present invention has been made in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, etc., and its purpose is to be able to output suitable information corresponding to the gaming state, and to further improve the identification performance for the gaming state. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of players.

Means YA1. A determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a predetermined special game advantageous to the player is executed, triggered by the entry of a game ball into a predetermined starting ball entry means;
a variable display means for displaying a predetermined symbol in a variable manner when the determining means executes a determination as to whether or not to transition to the special gaming state;
a reservation means for reserving the right to execute a variable display of the predetermined symbol executed by the variable display means;
Equipped with
The predetermined starting ball entering means is a first starting ball entering means, and the first starting ball entering means is switched between an unfavorable state in which entering the game ball is restricted and an advantageous state in which entering the game ball is easier than in the unfavorable state. a second starting ball entering means different from the first starting ball entering means;
A gaming machine in which the advantageous state is executed after the predetermined special game ends until a predetermined condition is satisfied,
a first output means that continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state at least in the advantageous state to the outside of the gaming machine;
Output stopping means for stopping the output of the predetermined identification information by the first outputting means when a termination condition is satisfied based on the termination of the advantageous state;
a storage means capable of storing the number of reserved rights to execute a variable display of the predetermined symbol triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state;
After the end of the advantageous state, at least the number of reserved rights triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored in the storage means. a second output means capable of continuously outputting specific identification information for a predetermined period of time that can identify that a predetermined variable display of the predetermined symbol corresponding to the reserved right is executable;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second output means continuously outputs the specific identification information in an output manner different from the output manner of the predetermined identification information by the first output means.

According to the means YA1, the first output means continuously outputs predetermined identification information that can identify the state in an advantageous state, and the output stops outputting the predetermined identification information based on the end of the advantageous state. and a stopping means. Thereby, it is possible to make the receiving side equipment, such as a hall computer or a data display device, understand that the gaming machine is currently in an advantageous state.

Furthermore, a storage means capable of storing the number of reserved rights to execute a symbol variation display (second variation display) triggered by entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means at the end of the advantageous state; After the state ends, if at least the number of reserved rights triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entry means is stored in the storage means, the number of reserved rights stored in the storage means is and a second output means capable of continuously outputting specific identification information for a predetermined period that allows identification of a period in which the symbol variation display corresponding to the right is executable.

As a result, for example, a receiving device such as a hall computer or a data display device is informed that the gaming machine is currently in the expiration period of the remaining reservation after the end of the advantageous state (the execution period of the second variable display corresponding to the reserved right). middle).

Furthermore, the expiration period of the remaining reservations after the expiration of the advantageous state is regarded as an accompanying period of the advantageous state, and even if, for example, the transition to the special gaming state is confirmed during the expiration period of the remaining reservations, the special gaming state is not deemed to be a first win (a special gaming state in which the winning occurs during the normal state in which the second starting ball entering means is in a disadvantageous state) by receiving equipment such as a hall computer or data display device, and the special gaming state is This can be added to the number of special gaming states (number of consecutive wins) that occurred during the series of advantageous periods (period from the first win until returning to the normal state). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest for players.

However, if the output mode of the predetermined identification information outputted by the first output means and the output mode of the specific identification information outputted by the second output means are the same, for example, Unless the output terminal for the second output means and the output terminal for the second output means are provided separately, the receiving device such as the hall computer or the data display device is in a state where the gaming machine, which is the transmitting device, is in an advantageous state. It is no longer possible to distinguish whether it is during the expiration period of remaining reservations after the end of the advantageous state.

On the other hand, the second output means according to the present means is configured to continuously output the specific identification information in an output manner different from the output manner of the identification information by the first output means. Even if the output is configured to be output from the output terminal, if the receiving device such as a hall computer or data display device is designed to be able to recognize the difference in the output mode of identification information, The receiving device can understand and distinguish the difference between the two.

Furthermore, receiving devices such as hall computers and data display devices can distinguish the remaining pending expiration period after the end of an advantageous state from other gaming states such as an advantageous state, so that the remaining pending expiration period It is also possible to execute dedicated information display and effects on the receiving device. As a result, in addition to the original effects performed on the gaming machine (such as variable display effects), the above-mentioned information display and effects are performed on the receiving device, etc., and the synergistic effect of these increases the interest for the player. It is possible to achieve a dramatic improvement in performance.

As described above, according to the present means, it is possible to output suitable information in response to minute changes in the gaming state, such as during the period when remaining reservations are being used up, and furthermore, by improving the identification performance for the gaming state, can improve the interest of

In addition, under the configuration according to the present means, if an output terminal for the first output means and an output terminal for the second output means were provided separately, the number of parts would increase, the structure would become complicated, and the information Since various problems such as an increase in the processing load related to output processing may occur, as will be described later, it is recommended that the output terminal for the first output means and the output terminal for the second output means be made common. preferable. However, this means does not exclude a configuration in which an output terminal for the first output means and an output terminal for the second output means are provided separately, and other effects may be obtained in consideration of the various disadvantages mentioned above. In the case where the music is played, a configuration in which output terminals are provided individually may of course be adopted.

Means YA2. The gaming machine according to means YA1, characterized in that when the second output means starts outputting the specific identification information, corresponding gaming state information is displayed in characters on the variable display means.

According to the means YA2, when outputting specific identification information is started, that is, when the predetermined variable display that is executed for the number of reservations stored in the storage means is started, a message to that effect is sent. By clearly indicating this in text, it is possible to make the player clearly aware of the fact. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means YA3. Until a specific period elapses after the last of the predetermined variable displays executed for the pending number stored in the storage means is stopped, the specific The gaming machine according to means YA1 or YA2, characterized in that the identification information is continuously output.

According to the means YA3, the specific identification information is continuously output until a specific period (for example, a fixed stop display period of the predetermined variable display) has elapsed after the last executed predetermined variable display is stopped. With this configuration, when the last predetermined fluctuating display is a fluctuating display that transitions to a special gaming state, receiving equipment such as hall computers and data display devices can more reliably perform the last predetermined fluctuating display. The special gaming state related to the variable display can be added to the number of special gaming states (number of consecutive wins) that have occurred during a series of advantageous periods up to that point, without considering it as the first win. As a result, the effects of the means YA1 and the like described above are more reliably achieved.

Means YA4. The gaming machine according to any one of means YA1 to YA3, wherein the second output means executes output processing of the specific identification information at predetermined intervals.

Here, the "predetermined identification information" output from the first output means includes, for example, a level signal (e.g., high level signal), etc.

On the other hand, the "specific identification information" outputted from the second output means includes a predetermined pulse width (e.g., 10 ms width) every predetermined period (e.g., every 20 ms) during a predetermined output period (e.g., 3 minutes). ) is intermittently outputted as a pulse signal.

According to the means YA4, it is possible to make the information output mode from the first output means different from the information output mode from the second output means with a relatively simple configuration. As a result, it is possible to suppress the complexity of output processing of identification information.

Means YA5. comprising pattern information storage means for storing at least one pattern information,
The gaming machine according to any one of means YA1 to YA4, wherein the second output means executes output processing of the specific identification information in an output mode based on the pattern information.

Here, the "specific identification information" output from the second output means includes, for example, during a predetermined output period, the output level is switched between high and low (on and off) at a predetermined period based on a predetermined output pattern. For example, a pattern signal that is output after being

According to the means YA5, by executing the output process of the specific identification information based on the pattern information stored in advance in the pattern information storage means, even if the output mode of the specific identification information is changed to a more complicated mode, It is possible to suppress the complexity of output processing of identification information.

Means YA6. Any of means YA1 to YA5, wherein the second output means is configured to be able to output the specific identification information in different output modes depending on the number of reservations stored in the storage means. A gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means YA6, specific identification information can be output in different output modes depending on the number of reservations stored in the storage means. As a result, it is possible to output information suitable for responding to small changes in the gaming state, such as differences in the number of remaining holds in the gaming machine that outputs the identification information, which is the sending device, or in other words, differences in the length of the remaining holding period. It can be performed. Furthermore, if the receiving device is designed to be able to recognize differences in the output mode of identification information, it is possible to recognize more detailed differences in gaming status by receiving the identification information from the hall computer, data display device, etc. It is possible to have the side equipment grasp the information. As a result, the receiving device or a predetermined performance device (for example, a data display device, etc.) that receives instructions from the receiving device can perform a variety of information displays and performances that correspond to more detailed differences in gaming conditions. This makes it possible to dramatically improve the interest for players.

Means YA7. pattern information storage means for storing a plurality of pattern information;
pattern information extraction means capable of extracting predetermined pattern information corresponding to the number of reservations stored in the storage means from among the plurality of pattern information stored in the pattern information storage means;
Means YA1 to YA4, wherein the second output means executes output processing of the specific identification information in a predetermined output mode based on the predetermined pattern information extracted by the pattern information extraction means. A gaming machine described in any of the above.

According to the above-mentioned means YA7, the same effects as the above-mentioned means YA5 and YA6 are achieved.

Means YA8. The second output means includes at least one of the predetermined variation displays executed for the pending number stored in the storage means, the predetermined variation when transitioning to the special gaming state. When the display is included, the specific identification information is configured to be output in a different output manner than when the predetermined variable display is not included when transitioning to the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of means YA1 to means YA7.

According to the above-mentioned means YA8, the variable display when the output source gaming machine, which is the transmitting device, shifts to the special gaming state is displayed on the receiving device such as the hall computer or data display device, which is the destination of the identification information. This makes it possible to understand what is being done. Furthermore, if the receiving device or a predetermined performance device (for example, a data display device, etc.) that receives instructions from the receiving device has specifications that allow these devices to recognize differences in the output mode of identification information. It becomes possible to display various information and perform effects regarding transition to a special gaming state based on input of specific identification information.

As a result, in addition to the original effects on the gaming machine (such as variable display effects), it becomes possible to execute new effects on the receiving device, etc., and the synergy between these effects increases the level of interest for players. It is possible to improve the performance.

Means YA9. When at least one of the predetermined variable displays executed for the number of reservations stored in the storage means includes a specific variable display, the second output means outputs the The gaming machine according to any one of means YA1 to YA8, characterized in that it is configured to be able to output the specific identification information in an output mode different from that when the specific variable display is not included.

According to the means YA9, the receiving device such as a hall computer or data display device to which the identification information is output is able to grasp that a specific variable display is performed in the output source gaming machine which is the transmitting device. It becomes possible to do so. Furthermore, if the receiving device or a predetermined performance device (for example, a data display device, etc.) that receives instructions from the receiving device has specifications that allow these devices to recognize differences in the output mode of identification information. It becomes possible to display various information and effects regarding execution of a specific variable display based on input of specific identification information.

As a result, in addition to the original effects on the gaming machine (such as variable display effects), it becomes possible to execute new effects on the receiving device, etc., and the synergy between these effects increases the level of interest for players. It is possible to improve the performance.

Means YA10. At least when the determination means determines that the transition to the special game state is to be made, one of the plurality of special game states (for example, triggered by the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry means) Equipped with a type determination means for determining whether to migrate to
The second output means includes at least one of the predetermined variation displays executed for the pending number stored in the storage means, the predetermined variation when transitioning to the special gaming state. When the display is included, the specific identification information can be outputted in different output modes depending on the type of the special gaming state, according to any one of the means YA1 to YA9. Game machine.

According to the means YA10, when the receiving device such as a hall computer or data display device, which is the destination of identification information, shifts to the special gaming state in the output source gaming machine, which is the transmitting device, the special game The type of state can be grasped.

As a result, if the receiving device or the predetermined performance device (for example, a data display device, etc.) that receives instructions from the receiving device has specifications that allow these devices to recognize differences in the output mode of identification information. Since it becomes possible to display more detailed information and perform performances based on the differences in the types of special game states, it is possible to dramatically improve the interest for players.

Means YA11. The variable display of the predetermined symbol is executed when a game ball enters the second starting ball entering means, rather than when the game ball enters the first starting ball entering means. The gaming machine according to any one of means YA1 to YA10, characterized in that variable display of the predetermined symbols is executed with priority.

Incidentally, instead of the above means YA11,
For example, "Means YA11. The determining means includes a first determining means that makes the determination upon entry of a game ball into the first starting ball entering means, and a first determining means that makes the judgment upon entry of a game ball into the second starting ball entering means." a second determining means for making the determination using the ball as an opportunity;
The holding means includes a first holding means for holding the right to perform a variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is executed when a game ball enters the first starting ball entering means, and a second starting entering means. a second reservation means for reserving the right to perform a variable display of the predetermined symbol, which is executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the ball means;
If there is a right to perform a variable display of the predetermined symbol held by the first holding means and the second holding means, the predetermined symbol held by the second holding means may be displayed in a variable manner. The gaming machine according to any one of means YA1 to YA10, characterized in that execution is given priority. ”.

According to the means YA11, when a game is played by firing a game ball toward the second starting ball entry means (for example, located in the right side area of the game area) in an advantageous state, more games can be played in a shorter period of time. It is possible to make the ball enter the second starting ball entry means and to determine whether or not to move to more special game states in a shorter period of time.

However, under this configuration, if the configuration is such that a specific performance is executed during the expiry of the remaining hold of the second variable display after the end of the advantageous state, if the ball enters the first starting ball entry means as a trigger. The first variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting ball entering means and the second variable display triggered by the ball entering the second starting ball entering means are executed in the order in which the game balls enter the respective starting ball entering means. In such a case, it is necessary to memorize the order in which these balls enter and execute control processing that takes these into consideration, which may complicate the control processing.

On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned means YA11, the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems can be suppressed, and control can be simplified. As a result, in the configuration according to the means YA11, the effects of the means YA1 and the like described above are more effective.

Means YA12. Means YA1 characterized in that when the output of the specific identification information by the second output means is finished, a notice that allows identification that the state counted as a series of profit earning states has ended is displayed on the fluctuation display means. The gaming machine according to any one of the means YA11 to YA11.

According to the means YA12, when the output of specific identification information is finished, that is, when the predetermined variable display executed for the number of reservations stored in the storage means is all finished, a message to that effect is sent. By notifying the player, it is possible to make the player clearly aware of the fact. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Means YA13. configured to be able to generate a plurality of types of special gaming states with different gaming values (for example, high support state, number of supports, number of rounds, etc.) given to the player;
Rather than the special game state occurring based on the determination caused by the game ball entering the first starting ball entering means, the judgment is caused by the game ball entering the second starting ball entering means. Any one of means YA1 to YA12 is characterized in that the special gaming state generated based on the above-mentioned special gaming state is configured such that a player is given a higher percentage of advantageous gaming value (for example, a high support state). The gaming machine described in .

According to the means YA12, the special game state has a higher gaming value when the game ball enters the second starting ball entering means than when the gaming ball enters the first starting ball entering means. The probability of winning (allocation probability) increases.

As a result, an advantageous state is created in which more game balls are easily entered into the second starting ball entry means, and the player is able to obtain more special game states with more advantageous gaming value. .

Means YA14. Equipped with predetermined presentation means (for example, various lamps, speakers, etc.) and presentation control means for controlling the presentation means,
In one of the means YA1 to YA13, the effect control means outputs a predetermined signal to the effect means in conjunction with the output of the specific identification information by the second output means. The game machine described.

According to the means YA14, by providing the predetermined presentation means, in addition to the original presentation of the gaming machine, such as presentation on the variable display means, presentations using the presentation means can be performed, and further improvements to the players can be made. You can improve your interest.

Furthermore, if the identification information is output to a receiving device such as a hall computer or a data display device, or a predetermined presentation device (for example, a data display device, etc.) that receives a command from the receiving device, the production and transmission In a configuration in which the performance performed by a predetermined performance means in the output source gaming machine, which is a side device, is executed together, there is a risk that a lag (time lag) will occur in the execution timing of both controls.

On the other hand, according to the present means YA14, the discrepancy in presentation operations between two types of control objects (predetermined presentation means in a sending device, receiving device such as a data display device, etc.) operated by different controls is reduced. be able to.

Means YA15. The output terminal related to the first output means capable of outputting the predetermined identification information and the output terminal related to the second output means capable of outputting the specific identification information are provided spaced apart without being adjacent to each other. The gaming machine according to any one of means YA1 to YA14.

As mentioned above, when the output terminal for the first output means and the output terminal for the second output means are provided separately, the number of parts increases, the structure becomes complicated, and the processing burden associated with information output processing increases. Although there is a risk of problems such as an increase in the amount of noise, it is possible to simplify the wiring work of communication cables and reduce communication cable connection errors. As a result, according to the above-mentioned means YA15, it is possible to improve the convenience for those involved in the game hall.

Means YA16. After the advantageous state ends, the specific identification information is output even when the storage means does not store the number of reserved rights triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting ball entry means. A gaming machine according to any one of means YA1 to YA15, characterized in that output processing can be executed.

According to the above-mentioned means YA16, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as temporary interruption of the output of specific identification information, and to perform the continuous processing of information output more appropriately and more smoothly.

Below, the basic configurations of various gaming machines to which the above-mentioned means are applied are shown.

(a) The gaming machine in each of the above means is a pinball gaming machine. As a more detailed example, "an operating means (such as a firing handle) operated by a player, a firing means (such as a firing device) that flicks and fires a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and A game area (game board, etc.) into which the game ball is guided, and a predetermined ball entry means (general winning hole, variable winning device, starting winning hole, etc.) into which the game ball guided to the game area can enter. One example is a pinball game machine equipped with

(b) The gaming machine or each pinball gaming machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine, 30... Game board, 42... Production display device, 42a... Liquid crystal display part, 45... Display control device, 240... External terminal board, 240a... First terminal, 240b... Second terminal, 261... Main control Device, 262...Sub control device, HC...Hall computer, HD...Game data display device.

Claims (1)

a firing means for firing a game ball;
a game area where the fired game ball is guided;
It had an opening/closing member that can change its state between an open state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the inner area and a closed state in which a game ball flowing down the game area cannot enter the inner area. variable entry means;
special ball entry means that allows a game ball to enter the inner area;
A gaming machine comprising a special gaming state providing means capable of providing a special gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined ball enters the special ball entering means,
The variable ball entry means is configured such that only game balls that have passed through a specific area can enter the internal area,
This gaming machine is
a first opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a second opportunity ball entry means that allows the game ball to enter after passing through the specific area;
a first route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means;
a second route through which the game ball that has passed through the specific area can flow down to the first opportunity ball entry means and cannot flow down to the second opportunity ball entry means;
Route allocating means capable of allocating the destination of the game ball to at least the first route or the second route,
By changing the state to at least an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous state that is less advantageous to the player than the advantageous state, the value for the game ball that has flowed down to the predetermined route that can flow down to the special ball entry means. configured to be able to change the value of a game ball that has entered the internal area of the variable ball entry means by a variable means that can change the value of the game ball,
The variable means is configured to perform a predetermined lottery result when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in a predetermined lottery process that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into the first chance entry means or the second opportunity entry means. configured to be able to execute the advantageous state based on the establishment of a switching condition,
In this gaming machine,
The specific area is provided in only one place through which game balls can pass one by one,
A ball passage capable of guiding game balls one by one to the specific area is provided at only one location,
In the specific area, a regulating means is provided that allows the game ball to pass in a predetermined direction while restricting the game ball to pass in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction;
The game ball that enters the first opportunity ball entry means and the second opportunity ball entry means is configured to be unable to flow down to the special ball entry means thereafter;
This gaming machine is
comprising an award confirmation means for confirming the award of one gaming value to the special gaming state when a game ball enters the special entry means;
When the game ball is controlled to be in the advantageous state by the variable means and the game ball enters the special ball entry means and the special game state is given, the case where the special game state is given is higher than the case where the variable means is controlled to the non-advantageous state. Also, the configuration is such that it is easy to determine the provision of the special gaming state of the predetermined type that is most advantageous to the player,
In the first route or the second route, a delay means capable of delaying the falling speed of the game ball is provided,
When a game ball that has passed through the specific area enters the second opportunity ball entry means, the variable value is applied to game balls that have passed through the specific area after the next game ball after the game ball that entered the ball. It is structured so that the value of the falling game ball can be changed by the action of the means,
In a predetermined gaming state, when the game ball that has passed through the specific area flows down the first route and enters the second opportunity ball entry means, the game ball that has passed through the specific area is The variable means is configured to be more likely to enter a specific control state advantageous to a player who can execute the advantageous state than when the ball flows down two routes and enters the first opportunity ball entry means. A gaming machine featuring:

Images